ExamDiff Pro Diff Report

C:\cc\ch\Original Madhya-lila Chapter 24.TXT

C:\cc\chnew\Revised Madhya-lila Chapter 24.TXT

1|Madhya 24-1975: The Sixty-One Explanations of the Atmarama

>|Verse

2|Chapter 24

3|The Sixty-One Explanations of the Atmarama Verse

4|The following summary of this chapter is given by Srila

>|Bhaktivinoda Thakura in his Amrta-pravaha-bhasya. According

>|to Sri Sanatana Gosvami's request, Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu

>|explained the well-known Srimad-Bhagavatam verse beginning

>|atmaramas ca munayo. He explained this verse in sixty-one

>|different ways. He analyzed all the words and described

>|each word with its different connotations. Adding the words

>|ca and api, He described all the different meanings of the

>|verse. He then concluded that all classes of

>|transcendentalists (jnanis, karmis, yogis) utilize this

>|verse according to their own interpretation, but if they

>|gave up this process and surrendered to Krsna, as

>|indicated by the verse itself, they would be able to

>|comprehend the real meaning of the verse. In this regard,

>|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu narrated a story about how the

>|great sage Narada converted a hunter into a great Vaisnava,

>|and how this was appreciated by Narada's friend Parvata

>|Muni. Sanatana Gosvami then offered a prayer to Sri

>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu, and Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu explained

>|the glory of Srimad-Bhagavatam. After this, the Lord gave

>|Sanatana Gosvami a synopsis of Hari-bhakti-vilasa, which

>|Sanatana Gosvami later developed into the guiding principle

>|of all Vaisnavas.

5|Madhya 24.1

6|TEXT 1

7|TEXT

8|atmarameti padyarkasy-

9|arthamsun yah prakasayan

10|jagat-tamo jaharavyat

11|sa caitanyodayacalah

12|SYNONYMS

13|atmarama-iti-beginning with the word atmarama; padya-verse;

>|arkasya-of the sunlike; artha-amsun-the shining rays of

>|different meanings; yah-who; prakasayan-manifesting; jagat-

>|tamah-the darkness of the material world; jahara-eradicated;

>| avyat-may protect; sah-He; caitanya-udaya-acalah-Sri

>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu, who is like the eastern horizon, where

>|the sun rises.

14|TRANSLATION

15|May Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu be glorified. It

>|was He who acted as the eastern horizon where the sun of

>|the atmarama verse rises and manifests its rays in the

>|form of different meanings and thus eradicates the darkness

>|of the material world. May He protect the universe.

16|Madhya 24.2

17|TEXT 2

18|TEXT

19|jaya jaya sri-caitanya jaya nityananda

20|jayadvaita-candra jaya gaura-bhakta-vrnda

21|SYNONYMS

22|jaya jaya-all glories; sri-caitanya-to Lord Caitanya

>|Mahaprabhu; jaya-all glories; nityananda-to Lord Nityananda;

>| jaya-all glories; advaita-candra-to Advaita Acarya; jaya-

>|all glories; gaura-bhakta-vrnda-to all the devotees of Lord

>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu.

23|TRANSLATION

24|All glories to Lord Caitanya! All glories to Lord

>|Nityananda! All glories to Advaitacandra! And all glories

>|to all the devotees of Lord Caitanya!

25|Madhya 24.3

26|TEXT 3

27|TEXT

28|tabe sanatana prabhura carane dhariya

29|punarapi kahe kichu vinaya kariya

30|SYNONYMS

31|tabe-thereafter; sanatana-Sanatana Gosvami; prabhura carane

>|dhariya-catching the lotus feet of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu;

>|punarapi-again; kahe-says; kichu-something; vinaya kariya-

>|with great humility.

32|TRANSLATION

33|Thereafter, Sanatana Gosvami clasped the lotus feet of Sri

>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu and humbly submitted the following

>|petition.

34|Madhya 24.4

35|TEXT 4

36|TEXT

37|'purve suniyachon, tumi sarvabhauma-sthane

38|eka sloke athara artha kairacha vyakhyane

39|SYNONYMS

40|purve-formerly; suniyachon-I heard; tumi-You; sarvabhauma-

>|sthane-at the place of Sarvabhauma Bhattacarya; eka sloke-

>|in one verse; athara artha-eighteen meanings; kairacha

>|vyakhyane-have explained.

41|TRANSLATION

42|Sanatana Gosvami said, "My Lord, I have heard that

>|previously, at the home of Sarvabhauma Bhattacarya, You

>|explained the atmarama verse in eighteen different ways.

43|Madhya 24.5

44|TEXT 5

45|TEXT

46|atmaramas ca munayo

47|nirgrantha apy urukrame

48|kurvanty ahaitukim bhaktim

49|ittham-bhuta-guno harih

50|SYNONYMS

51|atma-aramah-persons who take pleasure in being

>|transcendentally situated in the service of the Lord; ca-

>|also; munayah-great saintly persons who have completely

>|rejected material aspirations, fruitive activities and so

>|forth; nirgranthah-without interest in any material desire;

>|api-certainly; urukrame-unto the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead, Krsna, whose activities are wonderful; kurvanti-do;

>| ahaitukim-causeless, or without material desires; bhaktim-

>|devotional service; ittham-bhuta-so wonderful as to attract

>|the attention of the self-satisfied; gunah-who has

>|transcendental qualities; harih-the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead.

52|TRANSLATION

53|" 'Those who are self-satisfied and unattracted by external

>|material desires are also attracted to the loving service

>|of Sri Krsna, whose qualities are transcendental and whose

>|activities are wonderful. Hari, the Personality of Godhead,

>|is called Krsna because He has such transcendentally

>|attractive features.'

54|PURPORT

55|This is the famous atmarama verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.

>|7.10).

56|Madhya 24.6

57|TEXT 6

58|TEXT

59|ascarya suniya mora utkanthita mana

60|krpa kari' kaha yadi, judaya sravana'

61|SYNONYMS

62|ascarya-wonderful; suniya-hearing; mora-my; utkanthita-

>|desirous; mana-mind; krpa kari'-showing Your causeless

>|mercy; kaha yadi-if You speak; judaya-pleases; sravana-the

>|ear.

63|TRANSLATION

64|"I have heard this wonderful story and am therefore very

>|inquisitive to hear it again. If You would

>|kindly repeat it, I would be very pleased to hear."

65|Madhya 24.7

66|TEXT 7

67|TEXT

68|prabhu kahe,-"ami vatula, amara vacane

69|sarvabhauma vatula taha satya kari' mane

70|SYNONYMS

71|prabhu kahe-Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu said; ami-I; vatula-a

>|madman; amara vacane-in My words; sarvabhauma-Sarvabhauma

>|Bhattacarya; vatula-another madman; taha-that (My

>|explanation); satya kari' mane-took as truth.

72|TRANSLATION

73|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu replied, "I am one madman, and

>|Sarvabhauma Bhattacarya is another. Therefore he took My

>|words to be the truth.

74|Madhya 24.8

75|TEXT 8

76|TEXT

77|kiba pralapilana, kichu nahika smarane

78|tomara sanga-bale yadi kichu haya mane

79|SYNONYMS

80|kiba-what; pralapilana-I have said; kichu-anything; nahika-

>|there is not; smarane-in memory; tomara-of you; sanga-bale-

>|by the strength of association; yadi-if; kichu-something;

>|haya-there is; mane-in My mind.

81|TRANSLATION

82|"I do not recall what I spoke in that connection, but if

>|something comes to My mind due to association with you, I

>|shall explain it.

83|Madhya 24.9

84|TEXT 9

85|TEXT

86|sahaje amara kichu artha nahi bhase

87|toma-sabara sanga-bale ye kichu prakase

88|SYNONYMS

89|sahaje-generally; amara-My; kichu-any; artha-meaning; nahi

>|bhase-does not manifest; toma-sabara sanga-bale-by the

>|strength of your association; ye-which; kichu-something;

>|prakase-manifests.

90|TRANSLATION

91|"Generally by Myself I cannot give an explanation, but by

>|the strength of your association something may manifest

>|itself.

92|Madhya 24.10

93|TEXT 10

94|TEXT

95|ekadasa pada ei sloke sunirmala

96|prthak nana artha pade kare jhalamala

97|SYNONYMS

98|ekadasa pada-eleven words; ei-this; sloke-in the verse; su-

>|nirmala-very clear; prthak-separately; nana-various; artha-

>|meanings; pade-in each word; kare jhalamala-are glittering.

99|TRANSLATION

100|"There are eleven clear words in this verse, but when they

>|are studied separately, various meanings glitter from each

>|word.

101|PURPORT

102|The eleven separate words are (1) atmaramah, (2) ca, (3)

>|munayah, (4) nirgranthah, (5) api, (6) urukrame, (7)

>|kurvanti, (8) ahaitukim, (9) bhaktim, (10) ittham-bhuta-

>|gunah, and (11) harih. Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu will explain

>|the different connotations and imports of these words.

103|Madhya 24.11

104|TEXT 11

105|TEXT

106|'atma'-sabde brahma, deha, mana, yatna, dhrti

107|buddhi, svabhava,-ei sata artha-prapti

108|SYNONYMS

109|atma-sabde-by the word atma; brahma-the Absolute Truth;

>|deha-the body; mana-the mind; yatna-endeavor; dhrti-

>|firmness; buddhi-intelligence; sva-bhava-nature; ei

>|sata-these seven; artha-prapti- obtainment of meanings.

110|TRANSLATION

111|"The seven different meanings of the word atma are the

>|Absolute Truth, the body, the mind, endeavor, firmness,

>|intelligence and nature.

112|Madhya 24.12

113|TEXT 12

114|TEXT

115|"atma deha - mano - brahma - svabhava - dhrti -

>|buddhisu

116|prayatne ca"

>| iti xxx

117|SYNONYMS

118|atma-the word atma; deha-the body; manah-the mind; brahma-

>|the Absolute Truth; sva-bhava-nature; dhrti-firmness;

>|buddhisu-in the sense of intelligence; prayatne-in endeavor;

>| ca-and; iti-thus.

119|TRANSLATION

120|" 'The following are synonyms of the word atma : the body,

>| mind, Absolute Truth, natural characteristics, firmness,

>|intelligence and endeavor.'

121|PURPORT

122|This is a quotation from the Visva-prakasa dictionary.

123|Madhya 24.13

124|TEXT 13

125|TEXT

126|ei sate rame yei, sei atmarama-gana

127|atmarama-ganera age kariba ganana

128|SYNONYMS

129|ei sate-in these seven items; rame-enjoy; yei-those who;

>|sei-they; atmarama-gana-atmaramas; atmarama-ganera-of the

>|atmaramas; age-later; kariba ganana-shall make a count.

130|TRANSLATION

131|"The word atmarama refers to one who enjoys these seven

>|items [the Absolute Truth, body, mind , and so on]. Later,

>|I shall enumerate the atmaramas.

132|Madhya 24.14

133|TEXT 14

134|TEXT

135|'muni'-adi sabdera artha suna, sanatana

136|prthak prthak artha pache kariba milana

137|SYNONYMS

138|muni-the word muni; adi-and the other; sabdera-of the words;

>| artha-the meaning; suna-hear; sanatana-My dear Sanatana;

>|prthak prthak-separately; artha-meaning; pache-after;

>|kariba milana-I shall combine.

139|TRANSLATION

140|"My dear Sanatana, first hear the meanings of the other

>|words, beginning with the word muni. I shall first

>|explain their separate meanings, then combine them.

141|Madhya 24.15

142|TEXT 15

143|TEXT

144|'muni'-sabde manana-sila, ara kahe mauni

145|tapasvi vrati, yati, ara rsi, muni

146|SYNONYMS

147|muni-sabde-by the word muni; manana-sila-who is thoughtful;

>|ara-also; kahe-it means; mauni-one who is silent; tapasvi-

>|an ascetic; vrati-one who keeps great vows; yati-one in the

>|renounced order of life; ara-and; rsi-a saintly person;

>|muni-they are called muni.

148|TRANSLATION

149|"The word muni refers to one who is thoughtful, one who

>|is grave or silent, an ascetic, one who keeps great vows,

>|one in the renounced order , a saint. These are the

>|different meanings of the word muni.

150|Madhya 24.16

151|TEXT 16

152|TEXT

153|'nirgrantha'-sabde kahe, avidya-granthi-hina

154|vidhi-nisedha-veda-sastra-jnanadi-vihina

155|SYNONYMS

156|nirgrantha-nirgrantha; sabde-by the word ; kahe-

>|one means; avidya-of ignorance; granthi-hina-without any

>|knot; vidhi-nisedha-regulative principles of rules and

>|restrictions; veda-sastra-the Vedic literature; jnana-adi-

>|knowledge, and so on; vihina-without.

157|TRANSLATION

158|"The word nirgrantha refers to one who is liberated from

>|the material knots of ignorance. It also refers to one who

>|is devoid of all regulative principles enjoined in the

>|Vedic literature. It also refers to one who does not have

>|knowledge.

159|Madhya 24.17

160|TEXT 17

161|TEXT

162|murkha, nica, mleccha adi sastra-rikta-gana

163|dhana-sancayi-nirgrantha, ara ye nirdhana

164|SYNONYMS

165|murkha-foolish, illiterate persons; nica-lowborn; mleccha-

>|unclean persons with no principles; adi-and others; sastra-

>|rikta-gana-persons devoid of all regulative principles

>|stated in sastra; dhana-sancayi- capitalist (one who

>|gathers wealth); nirgrantha-called nirgrantha; ara-also; ye-

>|anyone who; nirdhana-without riches.

166|TRANSLATION

167|"Nirgrantha also refers to one who is illiterate,

>|lowborn, misbehaved, unregulated and devoid of respect for

>| Vedic literature. The word also refers to one who is a

>|capitalist and to one who has no riches.

168|Madhya 24.18

169|TEXT 18

170|TEXT

171|nir niscaye nis kramarthe

172|nir nirmana-nisedhayoh

173|grantho dhane 'tha sandarbhe

174|varna-sangrathane 'pi ca

175|SYNONYMS

176|nih-the prefix nih; niscaye-in the sense of ascertainment;

>|nih-the prefix nih; krama-arthe-in the meaning of

>|succession; nih-the prefix nih; nirmana-in the sense of

>|forming; nisedhayoh-in the sense of forbidding; granthah-

>|the word grantha; dhane-in the sense of wealth; atha-also;

>|sandarbhe-thesis; varna-sangrathane-in the sense of tying

>|together words; api-also; ca-and.

177|TRANSLATION

178|" 'The prefix nih may be used for a sense of

>|ascertainment, gradation, construction or forbidding. The

>|word grantha means riches, thesis and composition.

>| '

179|PURPORT

180|This is another quotation from the Visva-prakasa dictionary.

181|Madhya 24.19

182|TEXT 19

183|TEXT

184|'urukrama'-sabde kahe, bada yanra krama

185|'krama'-sabde kahe ei pada-viksepana

186|SYNONYMS

187|urukrama-urukrama; sabde-by this word ; kahe-one

>|means; bada-great; yanra-whose; krama-step; krama-sabde- in

>|this word krama; kahe-one means; ei-this; pada-viksepana-

>|throwing forth of the foot.

188|TRANSLATION

189|"The word urukrama refers to one whose krama [step] is

>|great. The word krama means 'throwing the foot forward,'

>|that is, ' step.'

190|Madhya 24.20

191|TEXT 20

192|TEXT

193|sakti, kampa, paripati, yukti, saktye akramana

194|carana-calane kanpaila tribhuvana

195|SYNONYMS

196|sakti-power; kampa-trembling; paripati-method; yukti-

>|argument; saktye-with great force; akramana-attacking;

>|carana-calane-by moving the foot; kanpaila-caused to

>|tremble; tri-bhuvana-the three worlds.

197|TRANSLATION

198|"Krama also means power, trembling, a systematic

>|method, argument , and a forcible attack by stepping

>|forward. Thus Vamana caused the three worlds to tremble.

199|PURPORT

200|Uru means very great, and krama means step. When Lord

>|Vamanadeva was offered three steps of land, He expanded His

>|three steps by covering the entire universe. In this way

>|the three worlds trembled, and therefore Sri Vamanadeva,

>|the incarnation of Lord Visnu, is referred to as Urukrama.

201|Madhya 24.21

202|TEXT 21

203|TEXT

204|visnor nu virya-gananam katamo 'rhatiha

205|yah parthivany api kavir vimame rajamsi

206|caskambha yah sva-ramhasaskhalata triprstham

207|yasmat trisamya -sadanad urukampayanam

208|SYNONYMS

209|visnoh-of Lord Visnu; nu-certainly; virya-gananam-a

>|counting of the different potencies; katamah-who; arhati-is

>|able to do; iha-in this world; yah-who; parthivani-of the

>|element earth; api-although; kavih-a learned person; vimame-

>|has counted; rajamsi-the atoms; caskambha-captured; yah-who;

>| sva-His own; ramhasa-by potency; askhalata-without

>|hindrances; tri-prstham-the topmost planet (Satyaloka);

>|yasmat-from some cause; tri-samya-where there is

>|equilibrium of the three gunas; sadanat-from the place (

>|from the root of the material world); urukampayanam

>|-trembling greatly.

210|TRANSLATION

211|" 'Even if a learned man is able to count all the minute

>|atoms in this material world, he still cannot count the

>|potencies of Lord Visnu. In the form of the Vamana

>|incarnation, Lord Visnu, without hindrance, captured all

>|the planets, beginning from the root of the material world

>|up to Satyaloka. Indeed, He caused every planetary system

>|to tremble by the force of His steps.'

212|PURPORT

213|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (2.7.40). In the

>|Rg Veda mantra (1.2.154.1), it is said:

214|om visnor nu viryani kam pravocam

215|yah parthivani vimame rajamsi

216|yo 'skambhayad uttaram sadhastham

217|vicakramanas tredhorugayah

218|Madhya 24.22

219|TEXT 22

220|TEXT

221|vibhu-rupe vyape, saktye dharana-posana

222|madhurya-saktye goloka, aisvarye paravyoma

223|SYNONYMS

224|vibhu-rupe-in His all-pervasive feature; vyape-expands;

>|saktye-by His potency; dharana-posana-maintaining and

>|nourishing; madhurya-saktye-by His potency of conjugal love;

>| goloka-the planetary system Goloka Vrndavana; aisvarye-and

>|by opulence; para-vyoma-the spiritual world.

225|TRANSLATION

226|"Through His all-pervasive feature, the Supreme Personality

>|of Godhead expanded the entire creation. He is holding

>|and maintaining this creation by His extraordinary potency.

>|By His conjugal potency, He maintains the planetary system

>|known as Goloka Vrndavana. Through His six opulences, He

>|maintains many Vaikuntha planets.

227|PURPORT

228|In His gigantic form, Lord Krsna has covered the creation.

>|He holds all the planetary systems and maintains them by

>|His inconceivable potencies. Similarly, He is maintaining

>|His personal abode, Goloka Vrndavana, through His conjugal

>|love, and He is maintaining the spiritual world containing

>|the Vaikuntha planets by His opulences.

229|Madhya 24.23

230|TEXT 23

231|TEXT

232|maya-saktye brahmandadi-paripati-srjana

233|'urukrama'-sabdera ei artha nirupana

234|SYNONYMS

235|maya-saktye-by His external potency; brahmanda-adi-of

>|material universes and so on; paripati-an orderly

>|arrangement; srjana-creating; urukrama-sabdera-of the word

>|urukrama; ei-this; artha-of the meaning; nirupana-

>|ascertainment.

236|TRANSLATION

237|"The word urukrama indicates the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead, who, by His external potency, has perfectly

>|created innumerable universes.

238|Madhya 24.24

239|TEXT 24

240|TEXT

241|"kramah saktau paripatyam kramas calana-kampayoh"

242|SYNONYMS

243|kramah-the word krama; saktau-in the meaning of potency;

>|paripatyam-in the meaning of systematic arrangement; kramah-

>|the word krama; calana-in moving; kampayoh-or in trembling.

244|TRANSLATION

245|" 'These are the different meanings of the word krama.

>|It is used in the sense of potency, systematic arrangement,

>|step, moving or trembling.'

246|PURPORT

247|This is a quotation from the Visva-prakasa dictionary. The

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead is all-pervasive. Not only

>|does He carry the three worlds by His inconceivable energy,

>|but He maintains them also. He is also maintaining His

>|spiritual planet, Goloka Vrndavana, by His conjugal love,

>|and He is maintaining the Vaikunthalokas by His opulences.

>|He maintains these material universes through the external

>|energy. material universes are perfectly situated

>|because they are created by the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead.

248|Madhya 24.25

249|TEXT 25

250|TEXT

251|'kurvanti'-pada ei parasmaipada haya

252|krsna-sukha-nimitta bhajane tatparya kahaya

253|SYNONYMS

254|kurvanti-they do (for others); pada-the word ; ei-

>|this; parasmaipada -a verb form indicating things done

>|for others; haya-is; krsna-sukha-nimitta-to satisfy Krsna;

>|bhajane-in devotional service; tatparya-the purport; kahaya-

>|is said.

255|TRANSLATION

256|"The word kurvanti , which means 'they do something for

>|others,' is a form of the verb '

>|things done for others. ' It is used in connection with

>|devotional service, which must be executed for the

>|satisfaction of Krsna. That is the purport of the word

>|kurvanti.

257|PURPORT

258|In Sanskrit the verb "to do" has two forms, technically

>|called parasmaipada and atmanepada . When things

>|are done for one's personal satisfaction, the form is

>|called atmanepada . In that case, the word "do" in

>|English is kurvante in Sanskrit. When things are done for

>|others, the verb form changes to kurvanti. Thus Sri

>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu informed Sanatana Gosvami that in the

>|atmarama verse the verb kurvanti means that things should

>|be done only for the satisfaction of Krsna. This is

>|supported by the grammarian Panini. The verb is formed as

>|atmanepada when the work is to be done for one's own

>|benefit, and when it is done for others, it is called

>|parasmaipada . Thus the verb is formed according to

>|whether something is done for one's self-satisfaction or

>|for another's satisfaction.

259|Madhya 24.26

260|TEXT 26

261|TEXT

262|"svaritanitah kartrabhipraye

>|kriya - phale "

263|SYNONYMS

264|svarita-nitah -of verbs having an indicatory n or a

>|svarita accent; kartr-abhipraye-is meant for the agent;

>|kriya-phale-when the fruit of the action.

265|TRANSLATION

266|" 'The terminations of the atmanepada are employed

>|when the fruit of the action accrues to the agent of verbs

>|having an indicatory n or a svarita accent.'

267|PURPORT

268|This is a quotation from Panini's sutras (1.3.72).

269|Madhya 24.27

270|TEXT 27

271|TEXT

272|'hetu'-sabde kahe-bhukti-adi vanchantare

273|bhukti, siddhi, mukti-mukhya ei tina prakare

274|SYNONYMS

275|hetu-cause; sabde-by the word ; kahe-it is said;

>|bhukti-enjoying the result by oneself; adi-and so on;

>|vancha-antare-because of a different ambition; bhukti-

>|enjoying the result of action; siddhi-the perfection of

>|doing something; mukti-liberation; mukhya-chief; ei-these;

>|tina prakare-in three ways.

276|TRANSLATION

277|"The word hetu [ cause ] means that a thing is done

>|for some motive. There can be three motives. One may act to

>|enjoy the result personally, to achieve some material

>|perfection, or to act in such a way that one may be

>|liberated.

278|Madhya 24.28

279|TEXT 28

280|TEXT

281|eka bhukti kahe, bhoga-ananta-prakara

282|siddhi-astadasa, mukti-panca-vidhakara

283|SYNONYMS

284|eka-first; bhukti-material enjoyment by doing something;

>|kahe-is known; bhoga-enjoyment; ananta-prakara-unlimited

>|varieties; siddhi-the yogic perfections; astadasa-eighteen

>|in number; mukti-liberation; panca-vidha-akara-five

>|varieties.

285|TRANSLATION

286|"First we take the word bhukti [ material enjoyment ],

>|which is of unlimited variety. We may also take the word

>|siddhi [ perfection ], which has eighteen varieties.

>|Similarly, the word mukti has five varieties.

287|Madhya 24.29

288|TEXT 29

289|TEXT

290|ei yanha nahi, taha bhakti-'ahaituki'

291|yaha haite vasa haya sri-krsna kautuki

292|SYNONYMS

293|ei-these; yanha-where; nahi-not existing; taha-that; bhakti-

>|the platform of devotional service; ahaituki-unmotivated;

>|yaha haite-by which; vasa haya-comes under control; sri-

>|krsna-Lord Sri Krsna; kautuki-the most funny.

294|TRANSLATION

295|"Causeless devotional service is unmotivated by sense

>|enjoyment, perfection or liberation. When one is freed from

>|all these contaminations, he can bring Lord Krsna, who is

>|very funny, under control.

296|Madhya 24.30

297|TEXT 30

298|TEXT

299|'bhakti'-sabdera artha haya dasa-vidhakara

300|eka-'sadhana', 'prema-bhakti'-nava prakara

301|SYNONYMS

302|bhakti-bhakti; sabdera-of this word ; artha-meanings;

>| haya-are; dasa-vidha-akara-ten varieties; eka-one; sadhana-

>|the execution of regulative devotional service; prema-

>|bhakti-ecstatic love ; nava prakara-nine kinds.

303|TRANSLATION

304|"There are ten meanings to the word bhakti , devotional

>|service . One is execution of devotional

>|service according to the regulative principles, and the

>|other , called prema-bhakti [ecstatic

>|love ] has nine varieties.

305|PURPORT

306|The nine varieties are rati, prema, sneha,

>|mana, pranaya, raga, anuraga, bhava and mahabhava-

>|attraction, love, affection, adverse feelings, intimacy,

>|attachment, subattachment, ecstatic love and sublime

>|ecstatic love. For the

>|execution of devotional service according

>|to regulative principles , there is only one meaning.

307|Madhya 24.31

308|TEXT 31

309|TEXT

310|'rati'-laksana, 'prema'-laksana, ityadi pracara

311|bhava-rupa, mahabhava-laksana-rupa ara

312|SYNONYMS

313|rati-of attraction; laksana-the symptoms; prema-of love;

>|laksana-the symptoms; iti-adi-and so on; pracara-are known;

>|bhava-rupa-in the form of ecstatic love; maha-bhava-of

>|higher ecstatic love; laksana-rupa-there are many symptoms;

>|ara-other.

314|TRANSLATION

315|"Next are explained the symptoms of love of Godhead, which

>|can be divided into nine varieties, beginning with

>|attraction up to ecstatic love and finally up

>|to the topmost ecstatic love [mahabhava].

316|Madhya 24.32

317|TEXT 32

318|TEXT

319|santa-bhaktera rati bade 'prema'-paryanta

320|dasya-bhaktera rati haya 'raga'-dasa-anta

321|SYNONYMS

322|santa-bhaktera-of devotees on the platform of neutrality;

>|rati-attraction; bade-increases; prema-paryanta-up to love

>|of Godhead; dasya-bhaktera-of devotees on the platform of

>|servitude; rati-attraction; haya-increases; raga-dasa-anta-

>|up to the point of spontaneous attachment.

323|TRANSLATION

324|"The attraction to Krsna of devotees on the platform of

>|neutrality increases up to love of Godhead [prema], and the

>|attraction of devotees on the platform of servitorship

>|increases to spontaneous attachment [raga].

325|Madhya 24.33

326|TEXT 33

327|TEXT

328|sakha-ganera rati haya 'anuraga' paryanta

329|pitr-matr-sneha adi 'anuraga'-anta

330|SYNONYMS

331|sakha-ganera-of the friends; rati-the attraction; haya-

>|becomes; anuraga paryanta-up to subecstatic love; pitr-matr-

>|sneha-paternal love; adi-and so on; anuraga-anta-up to the

>|end of subecstatic love.

332|TRANSLATION

333|"Devotees in Vrndavana who are friends of the Lord can

>|increase their ecstatic love to the point of anuraga.

>|Paternal affectionate lovers, Krsna's father and mother,

>|can increase their love of Godhead up to the anuraga point

>|also.

334|Madhya 24.34

335|TEXT 34

336|TEXT

337|kanta-ganera rati paya 'mahabhava'-sima

338|'bhakti'-sabdera ei saba arthera mahima

339|SYNONYMS

340|kanta-ganera-of the devotees in conjugal love; rati-the

>|attraction; paya-attain; maha-bhava-sima-the limit of

>|mahabhava; bhakti-devotional service; sabdera-of the word

>|; ei saba-all these; arthera-of the meanings; mahima-

>|of the glories.

341|TRANSLATION

342|"The gopis of Vrndavana who are attached to Krsna in

>|conjugal love can increase their ecstatic love up to the

>|point of mahabhava [the greatest ecstatic love ]. These

>|are some of the glorious meanings of the word bhakti ,

>|devotional service.

343|Madhya 24.35

344|TEXT 35

345|TEXT

346|'ittham-bhuta-gunah'-sabdera sunaha vyakhyana

347|'ittham'-sabdera bhinna artha, 'guna'-sabdera ana

348|SYNONYMS

349|ittham-bhuta-gunah-having qualities like this; sabdera-of

>|the word ; sunaha-please hear; vyakhyana-

>|the explanation; ittham- ittham; sabdera-of the word

>|; bhinna artha-different meanings; guna- guna;

>|sabdera-of the word ; ana- other.

350|TRANSLATION

351|"Please hear the meaning of the word ittham-bhuta-guna,

>|which is found in the atmarama verse. Ittham-bhuta has

>|different meanings, and guna has other meanings.

352|Madhya 24.36

353|TEXT 36

354|TEXT

355|'ittham-bhuta'-sabdera artha-purnanandamaya

356|yanra age brahmananda trna-praya haya

357|SYNONYMS

358|ittham-bhuta-sabdera artha- the meaning or import of the

>|word ittham-bhuta ; purna-

>|ananda-maya-full of transcendental bliss; yanra age-in

>|front of which; brahma-ananda-the transcendental bliss

>|derived from impersonalism; trna-praya-just like straw;

>|haya-is.

359|TRANSLATION

360|"The word ittham-bhuta is transcendentally exalted

>|because it means 'full of transcendental bliss.' Before

>|this transcendental bliss, the bliss derived from merging

>|into the existence of the Absolute [brahmananda] becomes

>|like a piece of straw in comparison.

361|Madhya 24.37

362|TEXT 37

363|TEXT

364|tvat-saksat-karanahlada-

365|visuddhabdhi-sthitasya me

366|sukhani gospadayante

367|brahmany api jagad-guro

368|SYNONYMS

369|tvat-Your; saksat-meeting; karana-such action; ahlada-

>|pleasure; vi-suddha-spiritually purified; abdhi-

>|ocean; sthitasya-being situated; me-by me; sukhani-

>|happiness; gospadayante -a small

>|hole created by the hoof of a calf; brahmani-the pleasure

>|derived from impersonal Brahman understanding; api-also;

>|jagat-guro-O master of the universe.

370|TRANSLATION

371|" 'My dear Lord, O master of the universe, since I have

>|directly seen You, my transcendental bliss has taken the

>|shape of a great ocean. Being situated in that ocean, I now

>|realize all other so-called happiness to be like the water

>|contained in the hoofprint of a calf.'

372|PURPORT

373|This is a verse from the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya (14.36).

374|Madhya 24.38

375|TEXT 38

376|TEXT

377|sarvakarsaka, sarvahladaka, maha-rasayana

378|apanara bale kare sarva-vismarana

379|SYNONYMS

380|sarva-akarsaka-all-attractive; sarva-ahladaka-all-pleasing;

>|maha-rasa-ayana-the complete abode of transcendental

>|mellow; apanara bale-by His own strength; kare-causes;

>|sarva-vismarana-forgetfulness of all other bliss.

381|TRANSLATION

382|"Lord Krsna is so exalted that He is more attractive than

>|anything else and more pleasing than anything else. He is

>|the most sublime abode of bliss. By His own strength, He

>|causes one to forget all other ecstasies.

383|Madhya 24.39

384|TEXT 39

385|TEXT

386|bhukti-mukti-siddhi-sukha chadaya yara gandhe

387|alaukika sakti-gune krsna-krpaya bandhe

388|SYNONYMS

389|bhukti-material happiness; mukti-liberation from material

>|suffering; siddhi-the perfection of mystic yoga; sukha-the

>|happiness derived from these things; chadaya-one gives up;

>|yara-of which; gandhe-simply by the slight fragrance;

>|alaukika-uncommon, transcendental; sakti-gune-by the power

>|and quality; krsna-krpaya-by the mercy of Lord Krsna;

>|bandhe-one becomes bound.

390|TRANSLATION

391|"Pure devotional service is so sublime that one can very

>|easily forget the happiness derived from material happiness,

>| material liberation and mystic or yogic perfection. Thus

>|the devotee is bound by Krsna's mercy and His uncommon

>|power and qualifications.

392|Madhya 24.40

393|TEXT 40

394|TEXT

395|sastra-yukti nahi ihan siddhanta-vicara

396|ei svabhava-gune, yate madhuryera sara

397|SYNONYMS

398|sastra-yukti-logic on the basis of revealed scripture; nahi-

>|there is not; ihan-here; siddhanta-vicara-consideration of

>|logical conclusions; ei-this; svabhava-gune-a natural

>|quality; yate-in which; madhuryera sara-the essence of all

>|transcendental bliss.

399|TRANSLATION

400|"When one is attracted to Krsna on the transcendental

>|platform, there is no longer any logical argument on the

>|basis of revealed scripture, nor are there considerations

>|of such conclusions. This is His transcendental quality

>|that is the essence of all transcendental sweetness.

401|Madhya 24.41

402|TEXT 41

403|TEXT

404|'guna' sabdera artha-krsnera guna ananta

405|sac-cid-rupa-guna sarva purnananda

406|SYNONYMS

407|guna sabdera artha-the meaning of the word guna; krsnera

>|guna ananta-Krsna has unlimited qualities; sat-cit-rupa-

>|guna-such qualities are spiritual and eternal; sarva purna-

>|ananda-full of all transcendental bliss.

408|TRANSLATION

409|"The word guna means 'quality.' The qualities of Krsna

>|are transcendentally situated and are unlimited in quantity.

>| All of the spiritual qualities are full of transcendental

>|bliss.

410|Madhya 24.42

411|TEXT 42

412|TEXT

413|aisvarya-madhurya-karunye svarupa-purnata

414|bhakta-vatsalya, atma-paryanta vadanyata

415|SYNONYMS

416|aisvarya-opulence; madhurya-transcendental sweetness;

>|karunye-mercy; svarupa-purnata-fullness of spiritual value;

>|bhakta-vatsalya-affection for the devotee; atma-paryanta-up

>|to the point of His personal self; vadanyata-magnanimity.

417|TRANSLATION

418|"Krsna's transcendental qualities such as opulence,

>|sweetness and mercy are perfect and full. As far as Krsna's

>|affectionate leaning toward His devotees is concerned, He

>|is so magnanimous that He can give Himself to His devotees.

419|Madhya 24.43

420|TEXT 43

421|TEXT

422|alaukika rupa, rasa, saurabhadi guna

423|karo mana kona gune kare akarsana

424|SYNONYMS

425|alaukika rupa-uncommon beauty; rasa-mellows; saurabha-adi

>|guna-qualities like transcendental fragrance; karo mana-the

>|mind of a devotee; kona gune-by some particular quality;

>|kare-does; akarsana-attracting.

426|TRANSLATION

427|"Krsna has unlimited qualities. The devotees are attracted

>|by His uncommon beauty, mellows and fragrance. Thus they

>|are differently situated in the different transcendental

>|mellows. Therefore Krsna is called all-attractive.

428|Madhya 24.44

429|TEXT 44

430|TEXT

431|sanakadira mana harila saurabhadi gune

432|SYNONYMS

433|sanaka-adira mana-the minds of saintly sages like Sanaka

>|and Sanatana; harila-attracted; saurabha-adi-such as the

>|transcendental aroma of His lotus feet; gune-by the quality.

434|TRANSLATION

435|"The minds of the four boy sages [Sanaka, Sanatana,

>|Sanandana and Sanat-kumara] were attracted to the lotus

>|feet of Krsna by the aroma of the tulasi that had been

>|offered to the Lord.

436|Madhya 24.45

437|TEXT 45

438|TEXT

439|tasyaravinda-nayanasya padaravinda-

440|kinjalka-misra-tulasi-makaranda-vayuh

441|antargatah svavivarena cakara tesam

442|sanksobham aksara-jusam api citta-tanvoh

443|SYNONYMS

444|tasya-of Him; aravinda-nayanasya-of the Supreme Personality

>|of Godhead, whose eyes are like the petals of a lotus; pada-

>|aravinda-of the lotus feet; kinjalka-with saffron; misra-

>|mixed; tulasi-of tulasi leaves; makaranda-with the aroma;

>|vayuh-the air; antargatah -entered; sva-vivarena-

>|through the nostrils; cakara-created; tesam-of them;

>|sanksobham-strong agitation; aksara-jusam-of the

>|impersonally self-realized (Kumaras); api-also; citta-

>|tanvoh-of the mind and body.

445|TRANSLATION

446|" 'When the breeze carrying the aroma of tulasi leaves and

>|saffron from the lotus feet of the lotus-eyed Personality

>|of Godhead entered through the nostrils into the hearts of

>|those sages [the Kumaras], they experienced a change in

>|both body and mind, even though they were attached to

>|impersonal Brahman understanding.'

447|PURPORT

448|This is a verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (3.15.43). For an

>|explanation, see Madhya-lila (17.142 ).

449|Madhya 24.46

450|TEXT 46

451|TEXT

452|sukadevera mana harila lila-sravane

453|SYNONYMS

454|sukadevera-of Sukadeva Gosvami; mana-the mind; harila-

>|carried away; lila-sravane-by remembering the pastimes of

>|the Lord.

455|TRANSLATION

456|"Sukadeva's mind was carried away by remembering the

>|pastimes of the Lord.

457|Madhya 24.47

458|TEXT 47

459|TEXT

460|parinisthito 'pi nairgunye

461|uttamahsloka-lilaya

462|grhita-ceta rajarse

463|akhyanam yad adhitavan

464|SYNONYMS

465|parinisthitah-situated; api-although; nairgunye-in the

>|transcendental position, freed from the material modes of

>|nature; uttamah-sloka-lilaya-by the pastimes of the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead, Uttamahsloka; grhita-ceta-the mind

>|became fully taken over; rajarse -O great King;

>|akhyanam-the narration; yat-which; adhitavan-studied.

466|TRANSLATION

467|" 'Sukadeva Gosvami addressed Pariksit Maharaja , "My

>|dear King, although I was fully situated in the

>|transcendental position, I was nonetheless attracted to the

>|pastimes of Lord Krsna. Therefore I studied Srimad-

>|Bhagavatam from my father.' "

468|PURPORT

469|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (2.1.9).

470|Madhya 24.48

471|TEXT 48

472|TEXT

473|svasukha -

>|nibhrta-cetas tad-vyudastanya-bhavo

474|'py ajita-rucira-lilakrsta-saras tadiyam

475|vyatanuta krpaya yas tattva-dipam puranam

476|tam akhila-vrjina-ghnam vyasa-sunum nato 'smi

477|SYNONYMS

478|sva-sukha-nirbhrta-cetah-whose mind was always fully

>|absorbed in the happiness of self-realization; tat-by that;

>|vyudasta-anya-bhavah-being freed from all other attractions;

>| api-although; ajita-rucira-lila-by the most attractive

>|pastimes of Ajita, the Supreme Personality of Godhead;

>|akrsta-attracted; sarah-whose heart; tadiyam-in relation to

>|the Lord; vyatanuta-described and spread; krpaya-out of

>|mercy; yah-he who; tattva-dipam-which is the light of the

>|Absolute Truth; puranam-the supplementary Vedic literature

>|Srimad-Bhagavatam; tam-to him; akhila-vrjina-ghnam-who can

>|destroy all kinds of material misery; vyasa-sunum-Sukadeva

>|Gosvami, the son of Vyasadeva; natah asmi-I offer my

>|respectful obeisances.

479|TRANSLATION

480|" 'I offer my respectful obeisances unto Srila Sukadeva

>|Gosvami, the son of Vyasadeva . He is the destroyer of all

>|sinful reactions and is full in self-realization and

>|bliss . Because of this, he has no other desire. Still,

>|he was attracted by the transcendental pastimes of the

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead, and out of compassion for

>|the people , he described the transcendental historical

>|literature called Srimad-Bhagavatam. This is compared to

>|the light of the Absolute Truth.'

481|PURPORT

482|This verse is from Srimad-Bhagavatam (12.12.68).

483|Madhya 24.49

484|TEXT 49

485|TEXT

486|sri-anga-rupe hare gopikara mana

487|SYNONYMS

488|sri-anga-of His transcendental body; rupe-by the beauty;

>|hare-attracts; gopikara mana-the minds of the gopis.

489|TRANSLATION

490|"Lord Sri Krsna attracts the minds of all the gopis with

>|His beautiful transcendental bodily features.

491|Madhya 24.50

492|TEXT 50

493|TEXT

494|viksyalakavrta-mukham tava kundala-sri-

495|ganda-sthaladhara-sudham hasitavalokam

496|dattabhayam ca bhuja-danda-yugam vilokya

497|vaksah sriyaika-ramanam ca bhavama dasyah

498|SYNONYMS

499|viksya-seeing; alaka-avrta-mukham-face decorated with

>|curling tresses of hair; tava-Your; kundala-sri-beauty of

>|earrings; ganda-sthala-falling on Your cheeks; adhara-

>|sudham-and the nectar from Your lips; hasita-avalokam-Your

>|smiling glance; datta-abhayam-which assure fearlessness; ca-

>|and; bhuja-danda-yugam-the two arms; vilokya-by seeing;

>|vaksah-chest; sriya-by the beauty; eka-ramanam-chiefly

>|producing conjugal attraction; ca-and; bhavama-we have

>|become; dasyah-Your maidservants.

500|TRANSLATION

501|" 'Dear Krsna, we have simply surrendered ourselves as Your

>|maidservants, for we have seen Your beautiful face

>|decorated with tresses of hair, Your earrings falling upon

>|Your cheeks and the nectar of Your lips . We have also

>|seen the beauty of Your smile and have

>|been embraced by Your arms, which give us courage .

>|Because we have seen Your chest, which is beautiful and

>|broad, we have surrendered ourselves.'

502|PURPORT

503|This verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.29.39) was spoken by

>|the gopis when they arrived near Krsna for the rasa dance

>|on a full moonlit night. The attracted gopis were awestruck,

>| and they began to speak about how they came to Krsna to

>|enjoy the rasa dance.

504|Madhya 24.51

505|TEXT 51

506|TEXT

507|rupa-guna-sravane rukminy-adira akarsana

508|SYNONYMS

509|rupa-beauty; guna-qualities; sravane-by hearing; rukmini-

>|adira-of the queens, headed by Rukmini; akarsana-attracting.

510|TRANSLATION

511|"The queens in Dvaraka, who are headed by Rukmini, are also

>|attracted to Krsna simply by hearing about His

>|transcendental beauty and qualities.

512|Madhya 24.52

513|TEXT 52

514|TEXT

515|srutva gunan bhuvana-sundara srnvatam te

516|nirvisya karna-vivarair harato 'nga-tapam

517|rupam drsam drsimatam akhilartha-labham

518|tvayy acyutavisati cittam apatrapam me

519|SYNONYMS

520|srutva-hearing; gunan-the transcendental qualities; bhuvana-

>|sundara-O most beautiful in the whole creation;

>|srnvatam-of those hearing; te-Your; nirvisya-entering;

>|karna-vivaraih-by the holes of the ears; haratah anga-tapam-

>|decreasing all the miserable conditions of the body; rupam-

>|the beauty; drsam-of the eyes; drsimatam -of those

>|who can see; akhila-artha-labham-the achievement of all

>|kinds of gains; tvayi-unto You; acyuta-O infallible one;

>|avisati-enters; cittam-the consciousness; apatrapam-without

>|shame; me-my.

521|TRANSLATION

522|" 'O most beautiful Krsna, I have heard about Your

>|transcendental qualities from others, and therefore all my

>|bodily miseries are relieved. If one sees Your

>|transcendental beauty, his eyes have attained everything

>|profitable in life. O infallible one, I have become

>|shameless after hearing of Your qualities, and I have

>|become attracted to You.'

523|PURPORT

524|This verse (Srimad-Bhagavatam 10.52.37) was written by

>|Rukminidevi in a letter to Krsna inviting Him to kidnap her.

>| Sukadeva Gosvami described this to Maharaja Pariksit when

>|the King asked him how Rukmini had been kidnapped. Rukmini

>|had heard about Krsna's qualities from different people,

>|and after she heard about them, she decided to accept Krsna

>|as her husband. Everything had been arranged for her

>|marriage to Sisupala; therefore she wrote a letter to Krsna,

>| which she sent through a brahmana, and invited Him to

>|kidnap her.

525|Madhya 24.53

526|TEXT 53

527|TEXT

528|vamsi-gite hare krsna laksmy-adira mana

529|SYNONYMS

530|vamsi-gite-by the vibration of His flute; hare-attracts;

>|krsna-Lord Krsna; laksmi-adira-of the goddess of fortune

>|and others; mana-the mind.

531|TRANSLATION

532|"Lord Krsna even attracts the mind of the goddess of

>|fortune simply by vibrating His transcendental flute.

533|Madhya 24.54

534|TEXT 54

535|TEXT

536|kasyanubhavo 'sya na deva vidmahe

537|tavanghri-renu-sparasadhikarah

538|yad-vanchaya srir lalanacarat tapo

539|vihaya kaman suciram dhrta-vrata

540|SYNONYMS

541|kasya-of what; anubhavah-a result; asya-of the serpent (

>|Kaliya); na-not; deva-O Lord; vidmahe-we know; tava-anghri-

>|of Your lotus feet; renu-of the dust; sparasa-for touching;

>|adhikarah-qualification; yat-which; vanchaya-by desiring;

>|srih-the goddess of fortune; lalana-the topmost woman;

>|acarat-performed; tapah-austerity; vihaya-giving up; kaman-

>|all desires; suciram -for a long time; dhrta-a law

>|upheld; vrata-as a vow.

542|TRANSLATION

543|" 'O Lord, we do not know how the serpent Kaliya attained

>|such an opportunity to be touched by the dust of Your lotus

>|feet. For this end, the goddess of fortune performed

>|austerities for centuries, giving up all other desires and

>|taking austere vows. Indeed, we do not know how this

>|serpent Kaliya got such an opportunity.'

544|PURPORT

545|This verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.16.36) was spoken by

>|the wives of the Kaliya demon.

546|Madhya 24.55

547|TEXT 55

548|TEXT

549|yogya-bhave jagate yata yuvatira gana

550|SYNONYMS

551|yogya-bhave-by proper behavior; jagate-within the three

>|worlds; yata-all; yuvatira gana-the groups of young girls.

552|TRANSLATION

553|"Krsna attracts not only the minds of the gopis and the

>|goddesses of fortune but the minds of all the young girls

>|in the three worlds as well.

554|Madhya 24.56

555|TEXT 56

556|TEXT

557|ka stry anga te kala-padamrta-venu-gita-

558|sammohitarya-caritan na calet trilokyam

559|trailokya-saubhagam idam ca niriksya rupam

560|yad go-dvija-druma-mrgah pulakany abibhran

561|SYNONYMS

562|ka stri-who is that woman; anga-O Krsna; te-of You; kala-

>|pada-by the rhythms; amrta-venu-gita-and sweet songs of

>|Your flute; sammohita-being captivated; arya-caritat-from

>|the path of chastity according to Vedic civilization; na-

>|not; calet-would wander; tri-lokyam-within the three worlds;

>| trailokya -saubhagam-which is the fortune of the

>|three worlds; idam-this; ca-and; niriksya-by observing;

>|rupam-the beauty; yat-which; go-the cows; dvija-the birds;

>|druma-the trees; mrgah-forest animals like the deer;

>|pulakani-transcendental jubilation; abibhran-manifested.

563|TRANSLATION

564|" 'My dear Lord Krsna, where is that woman within the three

>|worlds who cannot be captivated by the rhythms of the

>|sweet songs coming from Your wonderful flute? Who cannot

>| fall down from the path of chastity in this way? Your

>|beauty is the most sublime within the three worlds. Upon

>|seeing Your beauty, even cows, birds, animals and trees in

>|the forest are stunned in jubilation.'

565|PURPORT

566|This verse is from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.29.40).

567|Madhya 24.57

568|TEXT 57

569|TEXT

570|guru-tulya stri-ganera vatsalye akarsana

571|dasya-sakhyadi-bhave purusadi gana

572|SYNONYMS

573|guru-tulya-on the level of a superior guardian; stri-ganera-

>|of the ladies of Vrndavana; vatsalye-in parental affection;

>|akarsana-attracting; dasya-sakhya-adi-servants, friends,

>|and others; bhave-in the mode of; purusa-adi gana-all the

>|males of Vrndavana.

574|TRANSLATION

575|"The women of Vrndavana, who are on the level of superior

>|guardians , are attracted maternally. The men

>|of Vrndavana are attracted as servants, friends and fathers

>| to Lord Krsna.

576|Madhya 24.58

577|TEXT 58

578|TEXT

579|paksi, mrga, vrksa, lata, cetanacetana

580|preme matta kari' akarsaye krsna-guna

581|SYNONYMS

582|paksi-birds; mrga-animals; vrksa-trees; lata-creepers;

>|cetana-acetana-living entities and even the stones and wood;

>| preme-in ecstatic love; matta-captivated; kari'-making;

>|akarsaye-attract; krsna-guna-the qualities of Krsna.

583|TRANSLATION

584|"The qualities of Krsna captivate and attract everything,

>|living and dead. Even birds, animals and trees are

>|attracted to Krsna's qualities.

585|Madhya 24.59

586|TEXT 59

587|TEXT

588|'harih'-sabde nanartha, dui mukhyatama

589|sarva amangala hare, prema diya hare mana

590|SYNONYMS

591|harih-hari; sabde-by this word ; nana-artha-different

>|imports; dui-two; mukhya-tama-chief; sarva-all; amangala-

>|inauspiciousness; hare-takes away; prema diya-by ecstatic

>|love; hare-attracts; mana-the mind.

592|TRANSLATION

593|"Although the word hari has many different meanings, two

>|of them are foremost. One meaning is that the Lord takes

>|away all inauspicious things from His devotee, and the

>|second meaning is that He attracts the mind by ecstatic

>|love for God.

594|Madhya 24.60

595|TEXT 60

596|TEXT

597|yaiche taiche yohi kohi karaye smarana

598|cari-vidha tapa tara kare samharana

599|SYNONYMS

600|yaiche taiche-somehow or other; yohi kohi-anywhere and

>|everywhere; karaye smarana-remembers; cari-vidha-the four

>|kinds; tapa-miserable conditions of life; tara-of the

>|devotee; kare samharana-He takes away.

601|TRANSLATION

602|"When the devotee somehow or other always remembers the

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead anywhere and everywhere,

>|Lord Hari takes away life's four miserable conditions.

603|PURPORT

604|The four miserable conditions are due to the four kinds of

>|sinful activities, known as (1) pataka, (2) urupataka

>|, (3) maha-pataka and (4) atipataka -

>|preliminary sin, very great sin, greater sin and topmost

>|sin. However, Krsna assures the devotee, aham tvam sarva-

>|papebhyo moksayisyami ma sucah: "I will protect

>|you from all sinful reactions. Do not fear." The word sarva-

>|papebhyah indicates four kinds of sinful activity. As

>|soon as the devotee surrenders unto Krsna's lotus feet, he

>|is certainly relieved from all sinful activities and their

>|results. The four basic sinful activities are summarized as

>|illicit sex, intoxication, gambling and meat-eating.

605|Madhya 24.61

606|TEXT 61

607|TEXT

608|yathagnih susamrddharcih

609|karoty edhamsi bhasmasat

610|tatha mad-visaya bhaktir

611|uddhavainamsi krtsnasah

612|SYNONYMS

613|yatha-as; agnih-a fire; su-samrddha-arcih-having a full

>|flame; karoti-makes; edhamsi-fuel; bhasmasat -into

>|ashes; tatha-similarly; mat-visaya bhaktih-devotional

>|service in relation to Me; uddhava-O Uddhava; enamsi-all

>|kinds of sinful activity; krtsnasah-totally.

614|TRANSLATION

615|" 'As all fuel is burned to ashes by a full-fledged fire,

>|all sinful activities are totally erased when one engages

>|in devotional service to Me.'

616|PURPORT

617|This verse is from Srimad-Bhagavatam (11.14.19)

>|.

618|Madhya 24.62

619|TEXT 62

620|TEXT

621|tabe kare bhakti-badhaka karma, avidya nasa

622|sravanadyera phala 'prema' karaye prakasa

623|SYNONYMS

624|tabe-thereafter; kare-does; bhakti-badhaka-impediments on

>|the path of devotional service; karma-activities; avidya-

>|ignorance; nasa-vanquishing; sravana-adyera-of hearing,

>|chanting and so forth; phala-the result; prema-love of

>|Godhead; karaye prakasa-causes a manifestation of.

625|TRANSLATION

626|"In this way, when all sinful activities are vanquished by

>|the grace of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, one

>|gradually vanquishes all kinds of impediments on the path

>|of devotional service, as well as the ignorance resulting

>|from these impediments. After this, one totally manifests

>|his original love of Godhead through devotional service in

>|nine different ways-hearing, chanting and so forth.

627|Madhya 24.63

628|TEXT 63

629|TEXT

630|nija-gune tabe hare dehendriya-mana

631|aiche krpalu krsna, aiche tanra guna

632|SYNONYMS

633|nija-gune-by transcendental qualities; tabe-then; hare-

>|attracts; deha-indriya-mana-the body, senses and mind;

>|aiche-in that way; krpalu krsna-merciful Krsna; aiche-in

>|that way; tanra-His; guna-transcendental qualities.

634|TRANSLATION

635|"When the devotee is freed from all sinful material

>|activities, Krsna attracts his body, mind and senses to His

>|service. Thus Krsna is very merciful, and His

>|transcendental qualities are very attractive.

636|Madhya 24.64

637|TEXT 64

638|TEXT

639|cari purusartha chadaya, gune hare sabara mana

640|'hari'-sabdera ei mukhya kahilun laksana

641|SYNONYMS

642|cari purusa-artha-the four kinds of so-called goals of life;

>| chadaya-causes to give up; gune-by the transcendental

>|qualities; hare-attracts; sabara mana-everyone's mind; hari-

>|hari; sabdera-of the word ; ei-this; mukhya-chief;

>|kahilun-I have explained; laksana-the symptoms.

643|TRANSLATION

644|"When one's mind, senses and body are attracted to the

>|transcendental qualities of Hari, one gives up the four

>|principles of material success. Thus I have explained the

>|chief meanings of the word hari.

645|PURPORT

646|The four principles of material success are (1) religious

>|performance, (2) economic development, (3) sense

>|gratification and (4) liberation, or merging in the

>|impersonal effulgence of Brahman. These things do not

>|interest the devotee.

647|Madhya 24.65

648|TEXT 65

649|TEXT

650|'ca' 'api', dui sabda tate 'avyaya' haya

651|yei artha lagaiye, sei artha haya

652|SYNONYMS

653|ca-ca; api-api; dui-two; sabda-words; tate-in that way;

>|avyaya-indeclinable words; haya-are; yei-whatever; artha-

>|meaning; lagaiye-they want to use; sei-that; artha-meaning;

>|haya-can be used.

654|TRANSLATION

655|"When the conjunction ca [ and ] and the adverb api

>| [ although ] are added to this verse, the verse can

>|assume whatever meaning one wants to give it.

656|Madhya 24.66

657|TEXT 66

658|TEXT

659|tathapi ca-karera kahe mukhya artha sata

660|SYNONYMS

661|tathapi-still; ca-karera-of the word ca; kahe-it is said;

>|mukhya-chief; artha-meanings; sata-seven.

662|TRANSLATION

663|"The word ca can be explained in seven ways.

664|Madhya 24.67

665|TEXT 67

666|TEXT

667|canvacaye samahare

668|'nyo ' nyarthe ca samuccaye

669|yatnantare tatha pada-

670|purane 'py avadharane

671|SYNONYMS

672|ca-this word ca; anvacaye-in connecting one with another;

>|samahare-in the sense of aggregation; anyo 'nya-arthe-

>|to help one another in the imports; ca-the word ca;

>|samuccaye-in aggregate understanding; yatna-antare-in

>|another effort; tatha-as well as; pada-purane-in completing

>|the verse; api-also; avadharane-in the sense of certainty.

673|TRANSLATION

674|" 'The word ca [ and ] is used to connect a word or

>|sentence with a previous word or sentence, to give the

>|sense of aggregation, to assist the meaning, to give a

>|collective understanding, to suggest another effort or

>|exertion, or to fulfill the meter of a verse. It is also

>|used in the sense of certainty.'

675|PURPORT

676|This is a quotation from the Visva-prakasa dictionary.

677|Madhya 24.68

678|TEXT 68

679|TEXT

680|api-sabde mukhya artha sata vikhyata

681|SYNONYMS

682|api-sabde-by the word api; mukhya-chief; artha-meanings;

>|sata-seven; vikhyata-celebrated.

683|TRANSLATION

684|"There are seven chief meanings of the word api. They

>|are as follows.

685|Madhya 24.69

686|TEXT 69

687|TEXT

688|api sambhavana-prasna-

689|sanka-garha-samuccaye

690|tatha yukta-padarthesu

691|kama-cara-kriyasu ca

692|SYNONYMS

693|api-the word api; sambhavana-possibility; prasna-question;

>|sanka-doubt; garha-censure or abuse; samuccaye-aggregation;

>|tatha-as well as; yukta-pada-arthesu-the appropriate

>|application of things; kama-cara-kriyasu-of extravagance;

>|ca-and.

694|TRANSLATION

695|" 'The word api is used in the sense of possibility,

>|question, doubt, censure, aggregation, appropriate

>|application of things, and extravagance.'

696|PURPORT

697|This is another quotation from the Visva-prakasa.

698|Madhya 24.70

699|TEXT 70

700|TEXT

701|ei ta' ekadasa padera artha-nirnaya

702|ebe slokartha kari, yatha ye lagaya

703|SYNONYMS

704|ei ta'-this; ekadasa-eleven; padera-of the words; artha-

>|nirnaya-demonstration of import; ebe-now; sloka-artha-the

>|total meaning of the verse; kari-let Me do; yatha-as much

>|as; ye-which; lagaya-applicable.

705|TRANSLATION

706|"I have now described the different meanings of the eleven

>|separate words. Now let Me give the complete meaning of the

>|sloka, as it is applied in different places.

707|Madhya 24.71

708|TEXT 71

709|TEXT

710|'brahma' sabdera artha-tattva sarva-brhattama

711|svarupa aisvarya kari' nahi yanra sama

712|SYNONYMS

713|brahma-brahma; sabdera artha-the meaning of the word;

>|tattva-the truth; sarva-brhat-tama-summum bonum among

>|the relative truths; sva-rupa-the original identity;

>|aisvarya-opulence; kari'-accepting; nahi-not; yanra-whose;

>|sama-equal.

714|TRANSLATION

715|"The word brahma indicates the summum bonum, the

>|Absolute Truth, which is greater than all other truths. It

>|is the original identity, and there can be no truth

>|equal to that Absolute Truth.

716|Madhya 24.72

717|TEXT 72

718|TEXT

719|brhattvad brmhanatvac ca

720|tad brahma paramam viduh

721|tasmai namas te sarvatman

722|yogi-cintyavikaravat

723|SYNONYMS

724|brhattvat-because of being all-pervasive; brmhanatvat-

>|because of increasing unlimitedly; ca-and; tat-that; brahma-

>|Absolute Truth; paramam-the ultimate; viduh-they know;

>|tasmai-unto Him; namah-obeisances; te-unto You; sarva-atman-

>|the Supreme Soul; yogi-cintya-appreciable by great yogis;

>|avikara-vat-without change.

725|TRANSLATION

726|" 'I offer my respectful obeisances to the Absolute Truth,

>|the summum bonum. He is the all-pervasive, all-increasing

>|subject matter for the great yogis. He is changeless, and

>|He is the soul of all.'

727|PURPORT

728|This is a quotation from the Visnu Purana (1.12.57).

729|Madhya 24.73

730|TEXT 73

731|TEXT

732|sei brahma-sabde kahe svayam-bhagavan

733|advitiya-jnana, yanha vina nahi ana

734|SYNONYMS

735|sei-that; brahma-brahma; sabde-by the word ; kahe-it

>|is said; svayam-bhagavan-the Supreme Personality of Godhead;

>| advitiya-jnana-the supreme one, without duality; yanha-

>|which; vina-without; nahi ana-there is nothing else.

736|TRANSLATION

737|"The proper meaning of the word brahma is the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead, who is one without a second and

>|without whom nothing exists.

738|Madhya 24.74

739|TEXT 74

740|TEXT

741|vadanti tat tattva-vidas

742|tattvam yaj jnanam advayam

743|brahmeti paramatmeti

744|bhagavan iti sabdyate

745|SYNONYMS

746|vadanti-they say; tat-that; tattva-vidah-learned souls;

>|tattvam-the Absolute Truth; yat-which; jnanam-knowledge;

>|advayam-nondual; brahma-Brahman; iti-thus; paramatma-

>|Paramatma; iti-thus; bhagavan-Bhagavan; iti-thus; sabdyate-

>|is known.

747|TRANSLATION

748|" 'Learned transcendentalists who know the Absolute Truth

>|say that it is nondual knowledge and is called impersonal

>|Brahman, localized Paramatma and the Personality of Godhead.

>|'

749|PURPORT

750|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.2.11). For an

>|explanation, see Adi-lila (2.11 ).

751|Madhya 24.75

752|TEXT 75

753|TEXT

754|sei advaya-tattva krsna-svayam-bhagavan

755|tina-kale satya tinho-sastra-pramana

756|SYNONYMS

757|sei-that; advaya-tattva-Absolute Truth without a second;

>|krsna-Lord Krsna; svayam-bhagavan-the Supreme Personality

>|of Godhead; tina-kale-in three phases of time (past,

>|present and future); satya-truth; tinho-He; sastra-pramana-

>|the verdict of all Vedic literature.

758|TRANSLATION

759|"That Absolute Truth without a second is Lord Krsna, the

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead. He is the supreme truth in

>|the past, present and future. That is the evidence of all

>|revealed scriptures.

760|Madhya 24.76

761|TEXT 76

762|TEXT

763|aham evasam evagre

764|nanyad yat sad-asat-param

765|pascad aham yad etac ca

766|yo 'vasisyeta so 'smy aham

767|SYNONYMS

768|aham-I, the Personality of Godhead; eva-certainly; asam-

>|existed; eva-only; agre-before the creation; na-never;

>|anyat-anything else; yat-which; sat-the effect; asat-the

>|cause; param-the supreme; pascat-after; aham-I, the

>|Personality of Godhead; yat-which; etat-this creation; ca-

>|also; yah-who; avasisyeta-remains; sah-that; asmi-am; aham-

>|I, the Personality of Godhead.

769|TRANSLATION

770|" 'Prior to the cosmic creation, only I exist, and no

>|phenomena exist, either gross, subtle or primordial. After

>|creation, only I exist in everything, and after

>|annihilation only I remain eternally.'

771|PURPORT

772|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (2.9.33)

>|. For an explanation see Adi-lila (

>|1.53 ).

773|Madhya 24.77

774|TEXT 77

775|TEXT

776|'atma'-sabde kahe krsna brhattva-svarupa

777|sarva-vyapaka, sarva-saksi, parama-svarupa

778|SYNONYMS

779|atma-atma; sabde-by the word ; kahe-it is said; krsna-

>|the Supreme Lord Krsna; brhattva-the greatest of all;

>|sva-rupa-identity; sarva-vyapaka-all pervasive; sarva-

>|saksi-the witness of all; parama-svarupa-the supreme form.

780|TRANSLATION

781|"The word atma [ self ] indicates the highest truth,

>|Krsna. He is the all-pervasive witness of all, and He is

>|the supreme form.

782|Madhya 24.78

783|TEXT 78

784|TEXT

785|atatatvac ca matrtvad

786|atma hi paramo harih

787|SYNONYMS

788|atatatvat-due to being all-pervading; ca-and; matrtvat-due

>|to being the progenitor; atma-the soul; hi-certainly;

>|paramah-supreme; harih-the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

789|TRANSLATION

790|" 'Hari, the Personality of Godhead, is the all-pervasive

>|original source of everything; He is therefore the

>|Supersoul of everything.'

791|PURPORT

792|This is a quotation from the Bhavartha-dipika, Sridhara

>|Svami's commentary on Srimad-Bhagavatam.

793|Madhya 24.79

794|TEXT 79

795|TEXT

796|sei krsna-prapti-hetu trividha 'sadhana'

797|jnana, yoga, bhakti,-tinera prthak laksana

798|SYNONYMS

799|sei-those; krsna-prapti-of achieving the lotus feet of

>|Krsna; hetu-causes; tri-vidha sadhana-the three kinds of

>|execution; jnana-knowledge; yoga-mystic yoga practice;

>|bhakti-and devotional service; tinera-of these three;

>|prthak laksana-the symptoms are different.

800|TRANSLATION

801|"There are three ways to attain the lotus feet of the

>|Absolute Truth, Krsna. There is the process of

>|philosophical speculation, the practice of mystic yoga and

>|the execution of devotional service. Each of these has its

>|different characteristics.

802|Madhya 24.80

803|TEXT 80

804|TEXT

805|tina sadhane bhagavan tina svarupe bhase

806|brahma, paramatma, bhagavatta,-trividha prakase

807|SYNONYMS

808|tina sadhane-by these three different processes; bhagavan-

>|the Supreme Personality of Godhead; tina-three; sva-

>|rupe-in identities; bhase-appears; brahma-the impersonal

>|feature; paramatma-the localized feature; bhagavatta-and

>|the Supreme Personality of Godhead; trividha prakase-three

>|manifestations.

809|TRANSLATION

810|"The Absolute Truth is the same, but according to the

>|process by which one understands Him, He appears in three

>|forms-as Brahman, Paramatma, and Bhagavan, the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead.

811|Madhya 24.81

812|TEXT 81

813|TEXT

814|vadanti tat tattva-vidas

815|tattvam yaj jnanam advayam

816|brahmeti paramatmeti

817|bhagavan iti sabdyate

818|SYNONYMS

819|vadanti-they say; tat-that; tattva-vidah-learned souls;

>|tattvam-the Absolute Truth; yat-which; jnanam-knowledge;

>|advayam-nondual; brahma-Brahman; iti-thus; paramatma-

>|Paramatma; iti-thus; bhagavan-Bhagavan; iti-thus; sabdyate-

>|is known.

820|TRANSLATION

821|" 'Learned transcendentalists who know the Absolute Truth

>|say that it is nondual knowledge and is called impersonal

>|Brahman, localized Paramatma and the Personality of Godhead.

>|'

822|Madhya 24.82

823|TEXT 82

824|TEXT

825|'brahma-atma'-sabde yadi krsnere kahaya

826|'rudhi-vrttye' nirvisesa antaryami kaya

827|SYNONYMS

828|brahma-atma-brahma and atma; sabde-by these words

>|; yadi-if; krsnere kahaya-Krsna is indicated; rudhi-

>|vrttye-by the direct meaning; nirvisesa-impersonal;

>|antaryami-the Supersoul; kaya-is said.

829|TRANSLATION

830|"Although the words brahma and atma indicate Krsna,

>|their direct meaning refers only to the impersonal Brahman

>|and the Supersoul .

831|Madhya 24.83

832|TEXT 83

833|TEXT

834|jnana-marge-nirvisesa-brahma prakase

835|yoga-marge-antaryami-svarupete bhase

836|SYNONYMS

837|jnana-marge-the process of philosophical speculation;

>|nirvisesa-brahma-the impersonal Brahman effulgence; prakase-

>|becomes manifest; yoga-marge-by practicing mystic yoga;

>|antaryami-svarupete-in the localized aspect, Supersoul;

>|bhase-appears.

838|TRANSLATION

839|"If one follows the path of philosophical speculation, the

>|Absolute Truth manifests Himself as impersonal Brahman, and

>|if one follows the path of mystic yoga, He manifests

>|Himself as the Supersoul.

840|Madhya 24.84

841|TEXT 84

842|TEXT

843|raga-bhakti-vidhi-bhakti haya dui-rupa

844|'svayam-bhagavattve', bhagavattve-prakasa dvi-rupa

845|SYNONYMS

846|raga-bhakti-spontaneous devotional service; vidhi-bhakti-

>|regulative devotional service; haya-are; dui-rupa-the two

>|kinds of devotional service; svayam-bhagavattve-in the

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhagavattve-and in His

>|personal expansion; prakasa dvi-rupa-the two kinds of

>|manifestation.

847|TRANSLATION

848|"There are two kinds of devotional activity-spontaneous and

>|regulative. By spontaneous devotional service, one attains

>|the original Personality of Godhead, Krsna, and by the

>|regulative process one attains the expansion of the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead.

849|Madhya 24.85

850|TEXT 85

851|TEXT

852|raga-bhaktye vraje svayam-bhagavane paya

853|SYNONYMS

854|raga-bhaktye-by the discharge of spontaneous devotional

>|service; vraje-in Vrndavana; svayam-Himself; bhagavane-the

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead; paya-one gets.

855|TRANSLATION

856|"By executing spontaneous devotional service in Vrndavana,

>|one attains the original Supreme Personality of Godhead,

>|Krsna.

857|Madhya 24.86

858|TEXT 86

859|TEXT

860|nayam sukhapo bhagavan

861|dehinam gopika-sutah

862|jnaninam catma-bhutanam

863|yatha bhaktimatam iha

864|SYNONYMS

865|na-not; ayam-this Lord Sri Krsna; sukha-apah-easily

>|available; bhagavan-the Supreme Personality of Godhead;

>|dehinam-for materialistic persons who have accepted the

>|body as the self; gopika-sutah-the son of mother Yasoda;

>|jnaninam-for persons addicted to mental speculation; ca-and;

>| atma-bhutanam-for persons performing severe austerities

>|and penances; yatha-as; bhakti-matam-for persons engaged in

>|spontaneous devotional service; iha-in this world.

866|TRANSLATION

867|" 'The Supreme Personality of Godhead, Krsna, the son of

>|mother Yasoda, is accessible to those devotees engaged in

>|spontaneous loving service, but He is not as easily

>|accessible to mental speculators, to those striving for

>|self-realization by severe austerities and penances, or to

>|those who consider the body the same as the self.'

868|PURPORT

869|This verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.9.21) is spoken by

>|Srila Sukadeva Gosvami. It concerns the statement

>|about Krsna ' s being subjugated by the gopis and

>|thus glorifying them.

870|Madhya 24.87

871|TEXT 87

872|TEXT

873|vidhi-bhaktye parsada-dehe vaikunthete yaya

874|SYNONYMS

875|vidhi-bhaktye-by executing regulative devotional service;

>|parsada-dehe-in the form of an associate of the Lord;

>|vaikunthete yaya-one achieves the Vaikuntha planets.

876|TRANSLATION

877|"By executing regulative devotional service, one becomes an

>|associate of Narayana and attains the Vaikunthalokas, the

>|spiritual planets in the spiritual sky.

878|Madhya 24.88

879|TEXT 88

880|TEXT

881|yac ca vrajanty animisam rsabhanuvrttya

882|dure-yama hy upari nah sprhaniya-silah

883|bhartur mithah suyasasah kathananuraga-

884|vaiklavya-baspa-kalaya pulakikrtangah

885|SYNONYMS

886|yat-which; ca-also; vrajanti-go; animisam-of the demigods;

>|rsabha-anuvrttya-by practicing the best means of spiritual

>|life; dure-keeping at a distance; yamah-the regulative

>|principles; hi-certainly; upari-above; nah-our; sprhaniya-

>|silah-decorated with desirable qualities; bhartuh-of the

>|master; mithah-mutually; su-yasasah-who has all

>|transcendental qualities; kathana-anuraga-attracted to

>|discussions; vaiklavya-transformation; baspa-kalaya-with

>|tears in the eyes; pulakikrta -jubilation; angah-

>|bodily limbs.

887|TRANSLATION

888|" 'Those who discuss the activities of Lord Krsna are on

>|the highest platform of devotional life, and they evince

>|the symptoms of tears in the eyes and bodily jubilation.

>|Such persons discharge devotional service to Krsna without

>|practicing the rules and regulations of the mystic yoga

>|system. They possess all spiritual qualities, and they are

>|elevated to the Vaikuntha planets, which exist above us.'

889|PURPORT

890|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (3.15.25). In

>|this verse Lord Brahma is speaking to all the demigods, who

>|feared the two asuras in Diti's womb. Lord Brahma described

>|the Kumaras' visit to Vaikuntha, and this was again

>|explained by Maitreya, the friend of Vyasadeva, when he

>|gave instructions to Vidura.

891|Madhya 24.89

892|TEXT 89

893|TEXT

894|sei upasaka haya trividha prakara

895|akama, moksa-kama, sarva-kama ara

896|SYNONYMS

897|sei upasaka-those devotees; haya-are; tri-vidha prakara-

>|three varieties; akama-without material desires; moksa-kama-

>|desiring to become liberated; sarva-kama-filled with all

>|material desires; ara-and.

898|TRANSLATION

899|"The devotees are divided into three categories-akama [

>|desireless], moksa-kama [desiring liberation], and sarva-

>|kama [desiring material perfection].

900|Madhya 24.90

901|TEXT 90

902|TEXT

903|akamah sarva-kamo va

904|moksa-kama udara-dhih

905|tivrena bhakti-yogena

906|yajeta purusam param

907|SYNONYMS

908|akamah-without material desires; sarva-kamah-full of all

>|material desires; va-or; moksa-kamah-desiring liberation;

>|udara-dhih-sincere and advanced in devotional service;

>|tivrena-firm; bhakti-yogena-by the practice of bhakti-yoga;

>|yajeta-should worship; purusam param-the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead.

909|TRANSLATION

910|" 'One who is actually intelligent, although he may be a

>|devotee free from material desires, a karmi desiring all

>|kinds of material facilities, or a jnani desiring

>|liberation, should seriously engage in bhakti-yoga for the

>|satisfaction of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.'

911|PURPORT

912|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (2.3.10).

913|Madhya 24.91

914|TEXT 91

915|TEXT

916|buddhiman-arthe-yadi 'vicara-jna' haya

917|nija-kama lagiha tabe krsnere bhajaya

918|SYNONYMS

919|buddhiman-arthe-by the meaning of intelligent; yadi-if;

>|vicara-jna-expert in scrutinizing things; haya-is; nija-

>|kama lagiha-even for sense gratification; tabe-then;

>|krsnere bhajana-worships Lord Krsna.

920|TRANSLATION

921|"The meaning of the word udara- dhih is buddhiman-

>|intelligent or considerate. Because of this, even for one's

>|own sense gratification one engages in the devotional

>|service of Lord Krsna.

922|Madhya 24.92

923|TEXT 92

924|TEXT

925|bhakti vinu kona sadhana dite nare phala

926|saba phala deya bhakti svatantra prabala

927|SYNONYMS

928|bhakti vinu-without devotional service; kona-some; sadhana-

>|practice for perfection; dite-to give; nare-not able; phala-

>|any result; saba phala-all the results of different

>|processes; deya-give; bhakti-devotional service; svatantra

>|-independent; prabala-and powerful.

929|TRANSLATION

930|"The other processes cannot yield results unless they are

>|associated with devotional service. Devotional service,

>|however, is so strong and independent that it can give one

>|all the desired results.

931|Madhya 24.93

932|TEXT 93

933|TEXT

934|aja-gala-stana-nyaya anya sadhana

935|ataeva hari bhaje buddhiman jana

936|SYNONYMS

937|aja-gala-stana-nyaya-like the nipples on the neck of a goat;

>| anya-other; sadhana-execution of spiritual life; ataeva-

>|therefore; hari-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhaje-

>|one worships; buddhiman jana-the intelligent person.

938|TRANSLATION

939|"With the exception of devotional service, all the methods

>|of self-realization are like nipples on the neck of a

>|goat. an intelligent person adopts only

>|devotional service, giving up all other processes of self-

>|realization.

940|PURPORT

941|Without devotional service, other methods for self-

>|realization and spiritual life are useless. Other methods

>|cannot produce good results at any time, and therefore they

>|are compared to the nipples on the neck of a goat. These

>|nipples cannot produce milk, although it may appear that

>|they can. An unintelligent person cannot understand that

>|only devotional service can elevate one to the

>|transcendental position.

942|Madhya 24.94

943|TEXT 94

944|TEXT

945|catur-vidha bhajante mam

946|janah sukrtino 'rjuna

947|arto jijnasur artharthi

948|jnani ca bharatarsabha

949|SYNONYMS

950|catuh-vidhah-four kinds; bhajante-worship; mam-Me; janah-

>|persons; sukrtinah-who have obeyed the principles of human

>|life or the regulative principles of varna and asrama;

>|arjuna-O Arjuna; artah-the distressed; jijnasuh-the

>|inquisitive; artha-arthi-one in need of money; jnani-one

>|pursuing knowledge; ca-also; bharata-rsabha-O best of the

>|Bharata dynasty.

951|TRANSLATION

952|" 'O best among the Bharatas [Arjuna], four kinds of pious

>|men render devotional service unto Me-the distressed, the

>|desirer of wealth, the inquisitive , and he who is

>|searching for knowledge of the Absolute.'

953|PURPORT

954|This is a quotation from Bhagavad-gita (7.16). The word

>|sukrtinah is very important in this verse. Su means "

>|auspicious," and krti means "meritorious" or "regulated."

>|Unless one follows the regulative principles of religious

>|life, human life is no different from animal life.

>|Religious life means following the principles of varna and

>|asrama. In the Visnu Purana it is said:

955|varnasramacara- vata

956|purusena parah puman

957|visnur aradhyate pantha

958|nanyat tat

>|-tosa

>|-karanam

959|According to religious life, society is divided into four

>|social divisions-brahmana, ksatriya, vaisya and sudra-and

>|four spiritual divisions-brahmacarya, grhastha, vanaprastha

>|and sannyasa. One needs to be trained to become a brahmana,

>|ksatriya, vaisya or sudra, just as one is trained to become

>|an engineer, doctor or lawyer. Those who are properly

>|trained can be considered human beings; if one is not

>|trained socially and spiritually-that is, if one is

>|uneducated and unregulated-his life is on the animal

>|platform. Among animals there is no question of spiritual

>|advancement. Spiritual life can be attained by proper

>|training-either by following the principles of varna and

>|asrama or by being directly trained in the bhakti school by

>|the methods of sravanam kirtanam visnoh smaranam pada-

>|sevanamarcanam vandanam dasyam sakhyam atma-nivedanam.

>|Without being trained, one cannot be sukrti, auspicious. In

>|this verse Krsna says that people approach Him when in

>|distress, in need of money or when actually inquisitive to

>|understand the Supreme Being or the original source of

>|everything. Some people approach Him in the pursuit of

>|knowledge of the Absolute Truth, and others approach Him

>|when they are distressed, like the devotee Gajendra. Others

>|are inquisitive, like the great sages headed by Sanaka, and

>|others need money, like Dhruva Maharaja. Sukadeva Gosvami

>|approached the Lord when he pursued knowledge. All these

>|great personalities thus took to the devotional service of

>|the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Krsna.

960|Madhya 24.95

961|TEXT 95

962|TEXT

963|arta, artharthi,-dui sakama-bhitare gani

964|jijnasu, jnani,-dui moksa-kama mani

965|SYNONYMS

966|arta-distressed; artha-arthi-desirous of money; dui-two

>|persons; sakama-bhitare-in the division of material

>|activities; gani-we consider; jijnasu-inquisitive; jnani-

>|pursuing knowledge; dui-two; moksa-kama-transcendentalists

>|pursuing spiritual knowledge for liberation; mani-I

>|consider.

967|TRANSLATION

968|"Materialistic devotees take to devotional service and

>|worship Krsna when they are distressed or in need of money.

>|Those who are actually inquisitive to understand the

>|supreme source of everything and those who are in search of

>|knowledge are called transcendentalists, for they desire

>|liberation from all material contamination.

969|Madhya 24.96

970|TEXT 96

971|TEXT

972|ei cari sukrti haya maha-bhagyavan

973|tat-tat-kamadi chadi' haya suddha-bhaktiman

974|SYNONYMS

975|ei cari-these four persons; sukrti-pious men; haya-are;

>|maha-bhagyavan-highly fortunate; tat-tat-those respective;

>|kama-adi-aspirations; chadi'-giving up; haya-become; suddha-

>|bhaktiman-pure devotees.

976|TRANSLATION

977|"Because they have a pious background, all four types of

>|people are to be considered greatly fortunate. Such people

>|gradually give up material desires and become pure devotees.

978|Madhya 24.97

979|TEXT 97

980|TEXT

981|sadhu-sanga-krpa kimva krsnera krpaya

982|kamadi 'duhsanga' chadi' suddha-bhakti paya

983|SYNONYMS

984|sadhu-sanga-krpa-by the mercy of association with devotees;

>|kimva-or; krsnera krpaya-by the mercy of Krsna; kama-adi-

>|material desires and so on; duhsanga-unwanted association;

>|chadi'-giving up; suddha-bhakti paya-one obtains the

>|platform of pure devotional life.

985|TRANSLATION

986|"One is elevated to the platform of devotional life by the

>|mercy of a Vaisnava, the bona fide spiritual master, and by

>|the special mercy of Krsna. On that platform, one gives up

>|all material desires and the association of unwanted people.

>| Thus one is elevated to the platform of pure devotional

>|service.

987|Madhya 24.98

988|TEXT 98

989|TEXT

990|sat-sangan mukta-duhsango

991|hatum notsahate budhah

992|kirtyamanam yaso yasya

993|sakrd akarnya rocanam

994|SYNONYMS

995|sat-sangat-by the association of pure devotees; mukta-freed;

>| duhsangah-the association of materialistic persons; hatum-

>|to give up; na-not; utsahate-is able; budhah-one who is

>|actually learned; kirtyamanam-being glorified; yasah-the

>|glories; yasya-of whom (the Supreme Personality of Godhead);

>| sakrt-once; akarnya-hearing; rocanam-very pleasing.

996|TRANSLATION

997|" 'The intelligent, who have understood the Supreme Lord in

>|the association of pure devotees and have become free from

>|bad materialistic association, can never avoid hearing

>|the glories of the Lord, even though they have heard them

>|only once.'

998|PURPORT

999|This is a verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.10.11). All the

>|members of the Kuru dynasty offered respects when Krsna was

>|leaving Hastinapura after the Battle of Kuruksetra. Krsna

>|was going to His own kingdom, and all the members of the

>|Kuru dynasty were overwhelmed by His departure. This verse

>|was spoken in that connection by Sukadeva Gosvami. A pure

>|devotee becomes attached to Krsna by hearing the Lord's

>|glories. The Lord's glories and the Lord Himself are

>|identical. One has to be qualified to understand this

>|Absolute Truth; therefore one should be given a chance to

>|associate with a pure devotee. Our Krsna consciousness

>|movement is meant for this purpose. We want to create pure

>|devotees so that other people will benefit by their

>|association. In this way the number of pure devotees

>|increases. Professional preachers cannot create pure

>|devotees. There are many professional preachers of Srimad-

>|Bhagavatam who read this work to earn their livelihood.

>|However, they cannot convert materialistic people to

>|devotional service. Only a pure devotee can convert others

>|to pure devotional service. It is therefore important for

>|all the preachers in our Krsna consciousness movement to

>|first become pure devotees and follow the regulative

>|principles, refraining from illicit sex, meat-eating,

>|gambling and intoxication. They should regularly chant the

>|Hare Krsna maha-mantra on their beads, follow the

>|devotional process, rise early in the morning, attend

>|mangala-arati and recite Srimad-Bhagavatam and Bhagavad-

>|gita regularly. In this way, one can become purified and

>|free from all material contamination.

1000|sarvopadhi

>|-vinirmuktam

1001|tat-paratvena nirmalam

1002|hrsikena hrsikesa-

1003|sevanam bhaktir ucyate

1004|

>|(Narada-pancaratra)

1005|To make a show of devotional service will not help one. One

>|must be a pure devotee following the devotional process;

>|then one can convert others to devotional service. Sri

>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu practiced devotional service and

>|preached (apani acari' bhakti karila pracara). If a

>|preacher behaves properly in devotional service, he will be

>|able to convert others. Otherwise, his preaching will have

>|no effect.

1006|Madhya 24.99

1007|TEXT 99

1008|TEXT

1009|'duhsanga' kahiye-'kaitava', 'atma-vancana'

1010|krsna, krsna-bhakti vinu anya kamana

1011|SYNONYMS

1012|duhsanga-bad, unwanted association; kahiye-I say; kaitava-

>|cheating; atma-vancana-cheating oneself; krsna-Lord Krsna;

>|krsna-bhakti-devotional service to Krsna; vinu-without;

>|anya-other; kamana-desires.

1013|TRANSLATION

1014|"Cheating oneself and cheating others is called kaitava.

>|Associating with cheaters is called

>|duhsanga, bad association. Those who desire things other

>|than Krsna's service are also called duhsanga, bad

>|association.

1015|Madhya 24.100

1016|TEXT 100

1017|TEXT

1018|dharmah projjhita-kaitavo 'tra paramo nirmatsaranam satam

1019|vedyam vastavam atra vastu sivadam tapa-trayonmulanam

1020|srimad-bhagavate mahamuni -krte kim va parair isvarah

1021|sadyo hrdy avarudhyate 'tra krtibhih susrusubhis tat-ksanat

1022|SYNONYMS

1023|dharmah-religiosity; projjhita-completely rejected;

>|kaitavah-in which fruitive intention; atra-herein; paramah-

>|the highest; nirmatsaranam-of the fully pure in heart;

>|satam-devotees; vedyam-to be understood; vastavam-factual;

>|atra-herein; vastu-substance; siva-dam-giving well-being;

>|tapa-traya-of threefold miseries; unmulanam-causing

>|uprooting; srimat-beautiful; bhagavate-in the Bhagavata

>|Purana; maha-muni-by the great sage (Vyasadeva); krte-

>|compiled; kim-what; va-indeed; paraih-with others; isvarah-

>|the Supreme Lord; sadyah-at once; hrdi-within the heart;

>|avarudhyate-becomes confined; atra-herein; krtibhih-by

>|pious men; susrusubhih-desiring to hear; tat-ksanat-without

>|delay.

1024|TRANSLATION

1025|" 'The great scripture Srimad-Bhagavatam, compiled by

>|Mahamuni Vyasadeva from four original verses, describes the

>|most elevated and kindhearted devotees and completely

>|rejects the cheating ways of materially motivated

>|religiosity. It propounds the highest principle of eternal

>|religion, which can factually mitigate the threefold

>|miseries of a living being and award the highest

>|benediction of full prosperity and knowledge. Those willing

>|to hear the message of this scripture in a submissive

>|attitude of service can at once capture the Supreme Lord in

>|their hearts. Therefore there is no need for any scripture

>|other than Srimad-Bhagavatam.'

1026|PURPORT

1027|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.1.2). For an

>|explanation see also Adi-lila (1.91 ).

1028|Madhya 24.101

1029|TEXT 101

1030|TEXT

1031|'pra'-sabde-moksa-vancha kaitava-pradhana

1032|ei sloke sridhara-svami kariyachena vyakhyana

1033|SYNONYMS

1034|pra-sabde-by the affix pra; moksa-vancha-the desire for

>|being liberated; kaitava-pradhana-first-class cheating; ei

>|sloke-in this verse; sridhara-svami-the great commentator

>|Sridhara Svami; kariyachena-has made; vyakhyana-explanation.

1035|TRANSLATION

1036|"The prefix pra in the word projjhita specifically

>|refers to those desiring liberation or oneness with the

>|Supreme. Such a desire should be understood to result from

>|a cheating propensity. The great commentator

>|Sridhara Svami has explained this verse in that way.

1037|Madhya 24.102

1038|TEXT 102

1039|TEXT

1040|sakama-bhakte 'ajna' jani' dayalu bhagavan

1041|sva-carana diya kare icchara pidhana

1042|SYNONYMS

1043|sakama-bhakte-to devotees who still have material desires

>|to fulfill; ajna-foolish; jani'-knowing; dayalu-merciful;

>|bhagavan-Sri Krsna; sva-carana-His own lotus feet; diya-

>|giving; kare-does; icchara pidhana-the covering of other

>|desires.

1044|TRANSLATION

1045|"When the merciful Lord Krsna understands a devotee 's

>|foolish desire for material prosperity, He gratefully

>|gives him the shelter of His lotus feet. In this way, the

>|Lord covers his undesirable ambitions.

1046|Madhya 24.103

1047|TEXT 103

1048|TEXT

1049|satyam disaty arthitam arthito nrnam

1050|naivarthado yat punar arthita yatah

1051|svayam vidhatte bhajatam anicchatam

1052|iccha-pidhanam nija-pada-pallavam

1053|SYNONYMS

1054|satyam-it is true; disati-He awards; arthitam-that which is

>|desired; arthitah-being requested; nrnam-by human beings;

>|na-not; eva-certainly; artha-dah-giving desired things; yat-

>|which; punah-again; arthita-request; yatah-from which;

>|svayam-Himself; vidhatte-He gives; bhajatam-of those

>|engaged in devotional service; anicchatam-even though not

>|desiring; iccha-pidhanam-covering all other desires; nija-

>|pada-pallavam-the shelter of His own lotus feet.

1055|TRANSLATION

1056|" 'Whenever Krsna is requested to fulfill one's desire, He

>|undoubtedly does so, but He does not award anything which,

>|after being enjoyed, will cause someone to petition Him

>|again and again to fulfill further desires. When one has

>|other desires but engages in the Lord's service, Krsna

>|forcibly gives one shelter at His lotus feet, where one

>|will forget all other desires.'

1057|PURPORT

1058|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (5.19.27).

1059|Madhya 24.104

1060|TEXT 104

1061|TEXT

1062|sadhu-sanga, krsna-krpa, bhaktira svabhava

1063|e tine saba chadaya, kare krsne 'bhava'

1064|SYNONYMS

1065|sadhu-sanga-the association of devotees; krsna-krpa-the

>|mercy of Lord Krsna; bhaktira-of devotional service;

>|sva-bhava-nature; e tine-these three; saba chadaya-

>|cause one to give up everything else; kare-do; krsne-unto

>|Lord Krsna; bhava-the loving affairs.

1066|TRANSLATION

1067|"Association with a devotee, the mercy of Krsna, and the

>|nature of devotional service help one to give up all

>|undesirable association and gradually attain elevation to

>|the platform of love of Godhead.

1068|PURPORT

1069|This verse refers to the association of pure devotees, the

>|mercy of Krsna and the rendering of devotional service. All

>|these help one give up the association of nondevotees and

>|the material opulence awarded by the external energy, maya.

>|A pure devotee is never attracted by material opulence, for

>|he understands that wasting time to acquire material

>|opulence is a misuse of the gift of human life. In Srimad-

>|Bhagavatam it is said: srama eva hi kevalam . In

>|the eyes of a devotee, politicians, social workers,

>|philanthropists, philosophers and humanitarians are simply

>|wasting their time, for human society is not freed from the

>|cycle of birth and death by their activity and propaganda.

>|These so-called philanthropists, politicians and

>|philosophers have no knowledge because they do not know

>|that there is life after death. Understanding that there is

>|life after death is the beginning of spiritual knowledge. A

>|person can understand himself and what he is simply by

>|understanding the first lessons of Bhagavad-gita .

1070|dehino 'smin yatha dehe

1071|kaumaram yauvanam jara

1072|tatha dehantara - praptir

1073|dhiras tatra na muhyati

1074|"As the embodied soul continuously passes, in this body,

>|from boyhood to youth to old age, the soul similarly passes

>|into another body at death. The self-realized soul is not

>|bewildered by such a change." (Bg. 2.13)

1075|Not knowing the real science of life one engages in the

>|temporary activities of this life and thus becomes further

>|entangled in the cycle of birth and death. Thus one always

>|desires material opulence, which can be attained by karma,

>|jnana and yoga. However, when one is actually elevated to

>|the devotional platform, he gives up all these desires.

>|This is called anyabhilasita-sunya. Then one becomes a pure

>|devotee.

1076|Madhya 24.105

1077|TEXT 105

1078|TEXT

1079|age yata yata artha vyakhyana kariba

1080|krsna-gunasvadera ei hetu janiba

1081|SYNONYMS

1082|age-ahead; yata yata-as many as; artha-meanings; vyakhyana

>|kariba-I shall explain; krsna-guna-asvadera-of tasting the

>|transcendental qualities of Krsna; ei-this; hetu-reason;

>|janiba-we shall understand.

1083|TRANSLATION

1084|"In this way I shall progressively explain all the words in

>|the verse. It should be understood that all these

>|words are meant to enable one to taste the transcendental

>|quality of Krsna.

1085|Madhya 24.106

1086|TEXT 106

1087|TEXT

1088|sloka-vyakhya lagi' ei karilun abhasa

1089|ebe kari slokera mulartha prakasa

1090|SYNONYMS

1091|sloka-vyakhya-of the explanation of the verse; lagi'-for

>|the matter; ei-this; karilun-I did; abhasa-indication; ebe-

>|now; kari-let Me do; slokera-of the verse; mula-artha-the

>|real meaning; prakasa-the manifestation.

1092|TRANSLATION

1093|"I have given all these explanations just to indicate the

>|purpose of the verse . Allow Me to explain

>|the real purpose of the verse.

1094|Madhya 24.107

1095|TEXT 107

1096|TEXT

1097|jnana-marge upasaka-duita' prakara

1098|kevala brahmopasaka, moksakanksi ara

1099|SYNONYMS

1100|jnana-marge-on the path of philosophical speculation;

>|upasaka-worshipers; duita' prakara-two varieties; kevala-

>|only; brahma-upasaka-the worshiper of impersonal Brahman;

>|moksa-akanksi-desiring liberation; ara-and.

1101|TRANSLATION

1102|"There are two kinds of worshipers on the path of

>|philosophical speculation-one is brahma-upasaka, a

>|worshiper of the impersonal Brahman, and the other is

>|called moksakanksi, one who desires liberation.

1103|Madhya 24.108

1104|TEXT 108

1105|TEXT

1106|kevala brahmopasaka tina bheda haya

1107|sadhaka, brahmamaya, ara prapta-brahma-laya

1108|SYNONYMS

1109|kevala brahma-upasaka-the worshiper of only the impersonal

>|Brahman; tina bheda haya-there are three different groups;

>|sadhaka-the beginner; brahma-maya-absorbed in thought of

>|Brahman; ara-and; prapta-brahma-laya-actually merged into

>|the Brahman effulgence.

1110|TRANSLATION

1111|"There are three types of people who worship the impersonal

>|Brahman. The first is the beginner, the second is one whose

>|thoughts are absorbed in Brahman, and the third is one who

>|is actually merged in the impersonal Brahman.

1112|Madhya 24.109

1113|TEXT 109

1114|TEXT

1115|bhakti vina kevala jnane 'mukti' nahi haya

1116|bhakti sadhana kare yei 'prapta-brahma-laya'

1117|SYNONYMS

1118|bhakti-devotional service; vina-without; kevala-only; jnane-

>|by philosophical speculation; mukti-liberation; nahi haya-

>|there is not; bhakti-devotional service; sadhana-practice;

>|kare-does; yei-anyone who; prapta-brahma-laya-as good as

>|merging into the impersonal Brahman.

1119|TRANSLATION

1120|"One cannot attain liberation simply through philosophical

>|speculation devoid of devotional service. However, if one

>|renders devotional service, he is automatically on the

>|Brahman platform.

1121|Madhya 24.110

1122|TEXT 110

1123|TEXT

1124|bhaktira svabhava,-brahma haite kare akarsana

1125|divya deha diya karaya krsnera bhajana

1126|SYNONYMS

1127|bhaktira-of devotional service; sva-bhava-nature;

>|brahma-impersonal Brahman realization; haite-from; kare-

>|does; akarsana-attracting; divya-transcendental; deha-body;

>|diya-offering; karaya-causes to perform; krsnera bhajana-

>|the service of Lord Krsna.

1128|TRANSLATION

1129|"Characteristically, one in devotional service is attracted

>|away from the impersonal Brahman platform. Be is offered a

>|transcendental body to engage in Lord Krsna's service.

1130|Madhya 24.111

1131|TEXT 111

1132|TEXT

1133|bhakta-deha paile haya gunera smarana

1134|gunakrsta hana kare nirmala bhajana

1135|SYNONYMS

1136|bhakta-deha-the body of a devotee; paile-when one gets;

>|haya-there is; gunera smarana-remembrance of the

>|transcendental qualities; guna-akrsta hana-being attracted

>|by the transcendental qualities; kare-performs; nirmala

>|bhajana-pure devotional service.

1137|TRANSLATION

1138|"When one gets a devotee's spiritual body, he can remember

>|the transcendental qualities of Krsna. Simply by being

>|attracted to Krsna's transcendental qualities, one becomes

>|a pure devotee engaged in His service.

1139|PURPORT

1140|Srila Bhaktivinoda Thakura has given the following summary

>|of verses 107-111. Transcendentalists on the path of

>|philosophical speculation can be divided into two

>|categories-the pure worshiper of impersonal Brahman and

>|he who wishes to merge into the existence of impersonal

>|Brahman. When one is fully absorbed in the thought that one

>|is not different from the Supreme Absolute Truth, one is

>|said to be a worshiper of the impersonal Brahman. The

>|impersonal worshipers of Brahman can again be divided into

>|three categories-(1) sadhaka, those who are nearing

>|perfect execution of the process of Brahman realization; (2)

>| those who are fully absorbed in meditation on Brahman; and

>|(3) those who are on the brahma-bhuta platform

>|and have no relationship with material existence. Even

>|though the worshiper of impersonal Brahman can be highly

>|advanced, he cannot attain liberation without discharging

>|devotional service. Anyone who has realized himself as

>|spirit soul can engage in devotional service. This is the

>|verdict of Bhagavad-gita :

1141|brahma-bhutah prasannatma

1142|na socati na kanksati

1143|samah sarvesu bhutesu

1144|mad-bhaktim labhate param

1145|"One who is thus transcendentally situated at once realizes

>|the Supreme Brahman and is fully joyful. He never laments

>|nor desires to have anything; he is equally disposed to

>|every living entity. In that state he attains pure

>|devotional service unto Me." (Bg. 18.54)

1146|To attain the platform of pure devotional service, one has

>|to become spiritually pure and attain the brahma-bhuta

>|platform, which is beyond material anxiety and material

>|discrimination. When one approaches pure devotional service

>|after realizing Brahman, one becomes attracted by pure

>|devotional service. At such a time, by rendering devotional

>|service, one gets a spiritual body with purified senses.

1147|sarvopadhi-vinirmuktam

1148|tatparatvena nirmalam

1149|hrsikena hrsikesa -

1150|sevanam bhaktir ucyate

1151|When one's senses are pure, one can render loving

>|devotional service to Krsna. A pure devotee can only

>|remember Krsna's transcendental qualities. Remembering them,

>| he fully engages in the loving service of the Lord.

1152|Madhya 24.112

1153|TEXT 112

1154|TEXT

1155|"mukta api lilaya vigraham

1156|krtva bhagavantam bhajante"

1157|SYNONYMS

1158|muktah-liberated; api-although; lilaya-by pastimes;

>|vigraham-the form of the Lord; krtva-having installed;

>|bhagavantam-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhajante-

>|worship.

1159|TRANSLATION

1160|" 'Even a liberated soul merged in the impersonal Brahman

>|effulgence is attracted to the pastimes of Krsna. He thus

>|installs a Deity and renders the Lord service.'

1161|PURPORT

1162|Highly elevated Mayavadi sannyasis sometimes worship the

>|Radha-Krsna Deity and discuss the pastimes of the Lord, but

>|their purpose is not elevation to Goloka Vrndavana. They

>|want to merge into the Lord's effulgence. This statement is

>|quoted from Sankaracarya's commentary on the Upanisad known

>|as Nrsimha-tapani.

1163|Madhya 24.113

1164|TEXT 113

1165|TEXT

1166|janma haite suka-sanakadi 'brahmamaya'

1167|krsna-gunakrsta hana krsnere bhajaya

1168|SYNONYMS

1169|janma haite-from birth; suka-Sukadeva Gosvami; sanaka-adi-

>|the four Kumaras; brahma-maya-absorbed in the thought of

>|impersonal Brahman; krsna-guna-akrsta-attracted by the

>|transcendental pastimes of the Lord; hana-becoming; krsnere

>|bhajaya-worshiped Lord Krsna.

1170|TRANSLATION

1171|"Although Sukadeva Gosvami and the four Kumaras were always

>|absorbed in the thought of impersonal Brahman and were thus

>|Brahmavadis, they were nonetheless attracted by the

>|transcendental pastimes and qualities of Krsna. Therefore

>|they later became devotees of Krsna.

1172|Madhya 24.114

1173|TEXT 114

1174|TEXT

1175|sanakadyera krsna-krpaya saurabhe hare mana

1176|gunakrsta hana kare nirmala bhajana

1177|SYNONYMS

1178|sanaka-adyera-of the four Kumaras, headed by Sanaka; krsna-

>|krpaya-by the mercy of the Lord; saurabhe-the fragrance;

>|hare-took away; mana-the minds; guna-akrsta hana-thus being

>|attracted by the qualities of Krsna; kare-perform; nirmala

>|bhajana-pure devotional service.

1179|TRANSLATION

1180|"The minds of the four Kumaras were attracted by the aroma

>|of the flowers offered to Krsna's lotus feet. Being thus

>|attracted by the transcendental qualities of Krsna, they

>|engaged in pure devotional service.

1181|Madhya 24.115

1182|TEXT 115

1183|TEXT

1184|tasyaravinda-nayanasya padaravinda-

1185|kinjalka-misra-tulasi-makaranda-vayuh

1186|antargatah svavivarena cakara tesam

1187|sanksobham aksara-jusam api citta-tanvoh

1188|SYNONYMS

1189|tasya-of Him; aravinda-nayanasya-of the lotus-eyed Lord;

>|pada-aravinda-of the lotus feet; kinjalka-with the toes;

>|misra-mixed; tulasi-the tulasi leaves; makaranda-fragrance;

>|vayuh-breeze; antargatah -entered within; sva-

>|vivarena-through their nostrils; cakara-made; tesam-of the

>|Kumaras; sanksobham-agitation for change; aksara-jusam-

>|attached to impersonal Brahman realization; api-even though;

>| citta-tanvoh-in both mind and body.

1190|TRANSLATION

1191|" 'When the breeze carrying the aroma of tulasi leaves and

>|saffron from the lotus feet of the lotus-eyed Personality

>|of Godhead entered through the nostrils into the hearts of

>|those sages [the Kumaras], they experienced a change in

>|both body and mind, even though they were attached to

>|impersonal Brahman understanding.'

1192|PURPORT

1193|This is a verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (3.15.43).

1194|Madhya 24.116

1195|TEXT 116

1196|TEXT

1197|vyasa-krpaya sukadevera liladi-smarana

1198|krsna-gunakrsta hana karena bhajana

1199|SYNONYMS

1200|vyasa-krpaya-by the mercy of Srila Vyasadeva; sukadevera-of

>|Sukadeva Gosvami; lila-adi-smarana-remembrance of the

>|transcendental pastimes of Krsna; krsna guna-akrsta-

>|attracted by the transcendental qualities of Krsna; hana-

>|becoming; karena-performed; bhajana-loving service.

1201|TRANSLATION

1202|"By the mercy of Srila Vyasadeva, Sukadeva Gosvami was

>|attracted by the pastimes of Lord Krsna. Being thus

>|attracted by Krsna's transcendental qualities, he also

>|became a devotee and engaged in His service.

1203|Madhya 24.117

1204|TEXT 117

1205|TEXT

1206|harer gunaksipta-matir

1207|bhagavan badarayanih

1208|adhyagan mahad-akhyanam

1209|nityam visnu-jana-priyah

1210|SYNONYMS

1211|hareh-of Lord Krsna; guna-aksipta-matih-whose mind was

>|agitated by the qualities; bhagavan-the most powerful

>|transcendentalist; badarayanih-Sukadeva, son of Vyasadeva;

>|adhyagat-studied; mahat-akhyanam-the great epic description;

>| nityam-eternally; visnu-jana-priyah-who is very dear to

>|the Vaisnavas, devotees of Lord Visnu.

1212|TRANSLATION

1213|" 'Being very much attracted by the transcendental pastimes

>|of the Lord, the mind of Srila Sukadeva Gosvami was

>|agitated by Krsna consciousness. He therefore began to

>|study Srimad-Bhagavatam by the grace of his father.'

1214|PURPORT

1215|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.7.11).

1216|Madhya 24.118

1217|TEXT 118

1218|TEXT

1219|nava-yogisvara janma haite 'sadhaka' jnani

1220|vidhi-siva-narada-mukhe krsna-guna suni'

1221|SYNONYMS

1222|nava-nine; yogi-isvara-great saintly yogis; janma haite-

>|from the very birth; sadhaka-practicers; jnani-well versed

>|in transcendental knowledge; vidhi-Lord Brahma; siva-Lord

>|Siva; narada-the great sage Narada; mukhe-in their mouths;

>|krsna-guna suni'-hearing the transcendental qualities of

>|Krsna.

1223|TRANSLATION

1224|"From their very births, the nine great mystic yogis [

>|Yogendras] were impersonal philosophers of the Absolute

>|Truth. However , because they heard about Lord Krsna's

>|qualities from Lord Brahma, Lord Siva and the great sage

>|Narada, they also became Krsna's devotees.

1225|Madhya 24.119

1226|TEXT 119

1227|TEXT

1228|gunakrsta hana kare krsnera bhajana

1229|ekadasa-skandhe tanra bhakti-vivarana

1230|SYNONYMS

1231|guna-akrsta hana-being attracted by the transcendental

>|qualities; kare-engaged in; krsnera bhajana-the devotional

>|service of the Lord; ekadasa-skandhe-in the Eleventh Canto

>|of Srimad-Bhagavatam; tanra-of them; bhakti-vivarana-

>|description of the devotional service.

1232|TRANSLATION

1233|"In the Eleventh Canto of Srimad-Bhagavatam there is a full

>|description of the devotional service of the nine Yogendras,

>| who rendered devotional service because they were

>|attracted by the Lord's transcendental qualities.

1234|Madhya 24.120

1235|TEXT 120

1236|TEXT

1237|aklesam kamala-bhuvah pravisya gosthim

1238|kurvantah sruti-sirasam srutim srutajnah

1239|uttungam yadu-pura-sangamaya rangam

1240|yogindrah pulaka-bhrto navapy avapuh

1241|SYNONYMS

1242|aklesam-without material trouble; kamala-bhuvah-of Lord

>|Brahma, who took his birth from the lotus flower; pravisya-

>|entering; gosthim-the association; kurvantah-continuously

>|performing; sruti-sirasam-of the topmost Vedic knowledge;

>|srutim-hearing; sruta-jnah-who are expert in Vedic

>|knowledge; uttungam-very high; yadu-pura-sangamaya-for

>|going back home, back to Godhead, to Dvaraka; rangam-to

>|Ranga-ksetra; yogindrah -great saintly persons;

>|pulaka-bhrtah-being spiritually pleased; nava-nine; api-

>|although; avapuh-achieved.

1243|TRANSLATION

1244|" 'The nine Yogendras entered Lord Brahma's association and

>|heard from him the real meaning of the topmost Vedic

>|literatures - the Upanisads. Although they were

>|already conversant in Vedic knowledge, they became very

>|jubilant in Krsna consciousness just by listening to Brahma.

>| Thus they wanted to enter Dvaraka, the abode of Lord Krsna.

>| In this way they finally achieved the place known as Ranga-

>|ksetra.'

1245|PURPORT

1246|This is a quotation from the Maha Upanisad.

1247|Madhya 24.121

1248|TEXT 121

1249|TEXT

1250|moksakanksi jnani haya tina-prakara

1251|mumuksu, jivan-mukta, prapta-svarupa ara

1252|SYNONYMS

1253|moksa-akanksi-those who desire to merge into the impersonal

>|Brahman; jnani-advanced in knowledge; haya-are; tina-

>|prakara-three varieties; mumuksu-desiring to be liberated;

>|jivat-mukta-already liberated, even in this life; prapta-

>|svarupa-self-realized; ara-and.

1254|TRANSLATION

1255|"Those who wish to merge into the impersonal Brahman are

>|also divided into three categories-those desiring to be

>|liberated, those already liberated and those who have

>|realized Brahman.

1256|Madhya 24.122

1257|TEXT 122

1258|TEXT

1259|'mumuksu' jagate aneka samsari jana

1260|'mukti' lagi' bhaktye kare krsnera bhajana

1261|SYNONYMS

1262|mumuksu-desiring to be liberated; jagate-in this world;

>|aneka-many; samsari jana-engaged in material activities;

>|mukti lagi'-for the sake of liberation; bhaktye-in

>|devotional service; kare-perform; krsnera bhajana-the

>|worship of Krsna.

1263|TRANSLATION

1264|"There are many people within this material world who

>|desire liberation, and for this purpose they render

>|devotional service to Lord Krsna.

1265|Madhya 24.123

1266|TEXT 123

1267|TEXT

1268|mumuksavo ghora-rupan

1269|hitva bhuta-patin atha

1270|narayana-kalah santa

1271|bhajanti hy anasuyavah

1272|SYNONYMS

1273|mumuksavah-those who are perfectly learned, who desire the

>|highest perfection, and who, unlike demons and nondevotees,

>|are never envious of anyone; ghora-rupan-demigods with

>|fearful bodily features; hitva-giving up; bhuta-patin-the

>|forefathers (prajapatis); atha-therefore; narayana-kalah-

>|the plenary expansions of Lord Narayana; santah-very

>|peaceful; bhajanti-they worship; hi-certainly; anasuyavah-

>|nonenvious.

1274|TRANSLATION

1275|" 'Those who want to be relieved from the material clutches

>|give up the worship of the various demigods , who have

>|fearful bodily features. Such peaceful devotees, who are

>|not envious of the demigods, worship the different forms of

>|the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Narayana.'

1276|PURPORT

1277|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.2.26).

>|Those who actually want the highest perfection worship Lord

>|Visnu in His different incarnations. Those who are

>|attracted to the materialistic way of life and who are

>|always agitated and full of anxiety worship demigods who

>|appear fierce , demigods like goddess Kali and Kala-

>|bhairava (Rudra). The devotees of Krsna, however, do not

>|envy the demigods or their worshipers but peacefully render

>|devotional service to the incarnations of Narayana instead.

1278|Madhya 24.124

1279|TEXT 124

1280|TEXT

1281|sei sabera sadhu-sange guna sphuraya

1282|krsna-bhajana karaya, 'mumuksa' chadaya

1283|SYNONYMS

1284|sei sabera-of all those worshipers of different demigods;

>|sadhu-sange-the contact of real devotees; guna sphuraya-

>|awakens the appreciation of transcendental qualities; krsna-

>|bhajana karaya-engages in the devotional service of Lord

>|Krsna; mumuksa chadaya-and causes to give up the desire to

>|be liberated or merge into the impersonal feature of the

>|Lord.

1285|TRANSLATION

1286|"If those who are attached to demigod worship fortunately

>|associate with the devotees, their dormant devotional

>|service and appreciation of the Lord's qualities gradually

>|awaken. In this way they also engage in Krsna's devotional

>|service and give up the desire for liberation and the

>|desire to merge into the existence of impersonal Brahman.

1287|PURPORT

1288|The four Kumaras (Catuh-sana), Sukadeva Gosvami and

>|the nine Yogendras were absorbed in Brahman realization,

>|and how they became devotees is described herein. There are

>|three kinds of impersonalists-the mumuksu (those desiring

>|liberation), the jivan-muktas (those liberated in this life)

>| and the prapta-svarupas (those merged in Brahman

>|realization). All three types of jnanis are called

>|moksakanksis, those desiring liberation. By associating

>|with devotees, such people give up the mumuksu principle

>|and render devotional service. The real cause for this

>|change is the association of devotees. This Krsna

>|consciousness movement is meant to attract all types of men,

>| even those who desire things other than the Lord's

>|devotional service. Through the association of devotees,

>|they gradually begin to render devotional service.

1289|Madhya 24.125

1290|TEXT 125

1291|TEXT

1292|aho mahatman bahu-dosa-dusto

1293|'py ekena bhaty esa bhavo gunena

1294|sat-sangamakhyena sukhavahena

1295|krtadya no yena krsa mumuksa

1296|SYNONYMS

1297|aho mahatman -O great devotee; bahu-dosa-dustah-

>|infected with varieties of material disease or attachment;

>|api-although; ekena-with one; bhati-shines; esah-this;

>|bhavah-birth in this material world; gunena-with a good

>|quality; sat-sangama-akhyena-known as association with

>|devotees; sukha-avahena-which brings about happiness; krta-

>|made; adya-now; nah-our; yena-by which; krsa-insignificant;

>|mumuksa-the desire for liberation.

1298|TRANSLATION

1299|" 'O great learned devotee, although there are many faults

>|in this material world, there is one good opportunity-the

>|association with devotees. Such association brings about

>|great happiness. Due to this good quality, our strong

>|desire to achieve liberation by merging into the Brahman

>|effulgence has become weakened.'

1300|PURPORT

1301|This is a quotation from the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya.

1302|Madhya 24.126

1303|TEXT 126

1304|TEXT

1305|naradera sange saunakadi muni-gana

1306|mumuksa chadiya kaila krsnera bhajana

1307|SYNONYMS

1308|naradera sange-by the association of the great saintly

>|person Narada; saunaka-adi muni-gana-the great sages headed

>|by Saunaka Muni; mumuksa chadiya-giving up the desire for

>|liberation; kaila-performed; krsnera bhajana-devotional

>|service to Krsna.

1309|TRANSLATION

1310|"By associating with the great saint Narada, the great

>|sages like Saunaka and others gave up the

>|desire for liberation and engaged in Krsna's devotional

>|service.

1311|Madhya 24.127

1312|TEXT 127

1313|TEXT

1314|krsnera darsane, karo krsnera krpaya

1315|mumuksa chadiya gune bhaje tanra pa'ya

1316|SYNONYMS

1317|krsnera darsane-simply by meeting Krsna; karo-someone;

>|krsnera krpaya-by the favor of Krsna; mumuksa chadiya-

>|giving up the desire for liberation; gune-being attracted

>|by the transcendental qualities of Krsna; bhaje-engages in

>|service; tanra pa'ya-at the lotus feet of Krsna.

1318|TRANSLATION

1319|"Simply by meeting Krsna or receiving Krsna's special favor,

>| one can give up the desire for liberation. Being attracted

>|by the transcendental qualities of Krsna, one can engage in

>|His service.

1320|Madhya 24.128

1321|TEXT 128

1322|TEXT

1323|asmin sukha - ghana - murtau param -

1324|atmani vrsni - pattane sphurati

1325|atmaramataya me vrtha

1326|gato bata ciram kalah

1327|SYNONYMS

1328|asmin-when this; sukha-ghana-murtau-form of complete

>|happiness; parama-atmani-the Supreme Person; vrsni-pattane-

>|in Dvaraka-dhama; sphurati-exists; atmaramataya-by the

>|process of cultivating Brahman realization; me-my; vrtha-

>|uselessly; gatah-wasted; bata-alas, what can I say; ciram-

>|for a long time; kalah-time.

1329|TRANSLATION

1330|" 'In this Dvaraka-dhama, I am being attracted by the

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead, Krsna, who is personified

>|spiritual bliss. Simply by seeing Him, I am feeling great

>|happiness. Oh, I have wasted so much time trying to become

>|self-realized through impersonal cultivation. This is a

>|cause for lamentation!'

1331|PURPORT

1332|This verse is also found in the Bhakti-rasamrta-sindhu (3.1.

>|34).

1333|Madhya 24.129

1334|TEXT 129

1335|TEXT

1336|jivan - mukta ' aneka , sei dui

>| bheda jani

1337|'bhaktye jivan - mukta ', jnane jivan -

>|mukta ' mani

1338|SYNONYMS

1339|jivat-mukta-liberated in this life; aneka-there are many;

>|sei-all of them; dui bheda-two divisions; jani-we consider;

>|bhaktye jivat-mukta-one liberated in this life by pursuing

>|the process of devotional service; jnane jivat-mukta-a

>|person liberated in this life by following the process of

>|philosophical speculation; mani-we can understand.

1340|TRANSLATION

1341|"There are many people who are liberated even in this

>|lifetime. Some are liberated by discharging devotional

>|service, and others are liberated through the philosophical

>|speculative process.

1342|Madhya 24.130

1343|TEXT 130

1344|TEXT

1345|'bhaktye jivan-mukta' gunakrsta hana krsna bhaje

1346|suska-jnane jivan-mukta aparadhe adho maje

1347|SYNONYMS

1348|bhaktye jivat-mukta-persons liberated in this life by

>|discharging devotional service; guna-akrsta hana-being

>|attracted by the transcendental qualities of Krsna; krsna

>|bhaje-engage in the devotional service of the Lord; suska-

>|jnane jivat-mukta-so-called liberated in this life by dry,

>|speculative knowledge; aparadhe-by offenses; adho maje-fall

>|down.

1349|TRANSLATION

1350|"Those who are liberated by devotional service become more

>|and more attracted by the transcendental qualities of Krsna.

>| Thus they engage in His service. Those who are liberated

>|by the speculative process eventually fall down again due

>|to offensive activity.

1351|Madhya 24.131

1352|TEXT 131

1353|TEXT

1354|ye 'nye 'ravindaksa vimukta-maninas

1355|tvayy asta-bhavad avisuddha-buddhayah

1356|aruhya krcchrena param padam tatah

1357|patanty adho 'nadrta-yusmad-anghrayah

1358|SYNONYMS

1359|ye-all those who; anye-others (nondevotees); aravinda-aksa-

>|O lotus-eyed one; vimukta-maninah-who consider themselves

>|liberated; tvayi-unto You; asta-bhavat-without devotion;

>|avisuddha-buddhayah-whose intelligence is not purified;

>|aruhya-having ascended; krcchrena-by severe austerities and

>|penances; param padam-to the supreme position; tatah-from

>|there; patanti-fall; adhah-down; anadrta-without respecting;

>| yusmat-Your; anghrayah-lotus feet.

1360|TRANSLATION

1361|" 'O lotus-eyed one, those who think they are liberated in

>|this life but are without devotional service to You are of

>|impure intelligence. Although they accept severe

>|austerities and penances and rise to the spiritual position,

>| to impersonal Brahman realization, they fall down again

>|because they neglect to worship Your lotus feet.'

1362|PURPORT

1363|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.2.32).

1364|Madhya 24.132

1365|TEXT 132

1366|TEXT

1367|brahma-bhutah prasannatma

1368|na socati na kanksati

1369|samah sarvesu bhutesu

1370|mad-bhaktim labhate param

1371|SYNONYMS

1372|brahma-bhutah-being one with the Absolute; prasanna-atma-

>|fully joyful; na-never; socati-laments; na-never; kanksati-

>|desires; samah-equally disposed; sarvesu-all; bhutesu-to

>|living entities; mat-bhaktim-My devotional service; labhate-

>|gains; param-transcendental.

1373|TRANSLATION

1374|" 'One who is thus transcendentally situated at once

>|realizes the Supreme Brahman and is fully joyful. Be

>|never laments nor desires to have anything; he is equally

>|disposed to every living entity. In that state he attains

>|pure devotional service unto Me.'

1375|PURPORT

1376|This is a quotation from Bhagavad-gita (18.54).

1377|Madhya 24.133

1378|TEXT 133

1379|TEXT

1380|advaita-vithi-pathikair upasyah

1381|svananda-simhasana-labdha-diksah

1382|sathena kenapi vayam hathena

1383|dasi-krta gopa-vadhu-vitena

1384|SYNONYMS

1385|advaita-vithi-of the path of monism; pathikaih-by the

>|wanderers; upasyah-worshipable; svananda -of self-

>|realization; simhasana -on the throne; labdha-diksah-

>|being initiated; sathena-by a cheater; kenapi -some;

>|vayam-I; hathena-by force; dasi-krta-made into a

>|maidservant; gopa-vadhu-vitena-engaged in joking with the

>|gopis.

1386|TRANSLATION

1387|" 'Although I was worshiped by those on the path of monism

>|and initiated into self-realization through the yoga system,

>| I am nonetheless forcibly turned into a

>|maidservant by some cunning boy who is always joking with

>|the gopis.'

1388|PURPORT

1389|This is a verse written by Bilvamangala Thakura.

1390|Madhya 24.134

1391|TEXT 134

1392|TEXT

1393|bhakti-bale 'prapta-svarupa' divya-deha paya

1394|krsna-gunakrsta hana bhaje krsna-pa'ya

1395|SYNONYMS

1396|bhakti-bale-by the strength of devotional service; prapta-

>|svarupa-attaining his original status; divya-deha-a

>|transcendental body; paya-one gets; krsna-guna-akrsta-

>|attracted by the transcendental qualities of Krsna; hana-

>|being; bhaje-takes to devotional service; krsna-pa'ya-at

>|Krsna's lotus feet.

1397|TRANSLATION

1398|"One who has attained his constitutional position by the

>|strength of devotional service attains a transcendental

>|body even in this lifetime. Being attracted by Lord Krsna's

>|transcendental qualities, one fully engages in service at

>|His lotus feet.

1399|Madhya 24.135

1400|TEXT 135

1401|TEXT

1402|nirodho 'syanu sayanam

1403|atmanah saha saktibhih

1404|muktir hitvanyatha-rupam

1405|svarupena vyavasthitih

1406|SYNONYMS

1407|nirodhah-winding up; asya-of this; anu-after; sayanam-lying

>|down; atmanah-of the Supreme Lord; saha-with; saktibhih-the

>|energies (marginal and external); muktih-liberation; hitva-

>|giving up; anyatha-other; rupam-form; svarupena-with one's

>|own eternal form; vyavasthitih-staying.

1408|TRANSLATION

1409|" 'The living entities and other potencies merge in the

>|Maha-Visnu as the Lord lies down and winds up [destroys]

>|the cosmic manifestation. Liberation means being situated

>|in one's eternal original form , which he attains after

>|giving up the changeable gross and subtle bodies.'

1410|PURPORT

1411|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (2.10.6).

1412|Madhya 24.136

1413|TEXT 136

1414|TEXT

1415|krsna-bahirmukha-dose maya haite bhaya

1416|krsnonmukha bhakti haite maya-mukta haya

1417|SYNONYMS

1418|krsna-bahih-mukha-of going against Krsna consciousness;

>|dose-by the fault; maya haite-from the illusory energy;

>|bhaya-fear; krsna-unmukha-in favor of Krsna consciousness;

>|bhakti-devotional service; haite-from; maya-mukta-liberated

>|from maya; haya-one becomes.

1419|TRANSLATION

1420|"By opposing Krsna consciousness, one again becomes

>|conditioned and fearful due to the influence of maya. By

>|executing devotional service faithfully, one is liberated

>|from maya.

1421|Madhya 24.137

1422|TEXT 137

1423|TEXT

1424|bhayam dvitiyabhinivesatah syad

1425|isad apetasya viparyayo 'smrtih

1426|tan-mayayato budha abhajet tam

1427|bhaktyaikayesam guru-devatatma

1428|SYNONYMS

1429|bhayam-fear; dvitiya-abhinivesatah-from the misconception

>|of being a product of material energy; syat-arises; isat-

>|from the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Krsna; apetasya-of

>|one who has withdrawn (the conditioned soul); viparyayah-

>|reversal of position; asmrtih-no conception of his

>|relationship with the Supreme Lord; tat-mayaya-because of

>|the illusory energy of the Supreme Lord; atah-therefore;

>|budhah-one who is wise; abhajet-must worship; tam-Him;

>|bhaktya-by devotional service; ekaya-undiverted

>|to karma and jnana; isam-the Supreme Personality of Godhead;

>| guru-as the spiritual master; devata-worshipable Lord;

>|atma-Supersoul.

1430|TRANSLATION

1431|" 'When the living entity is attracted by the material

>|energy that is separate from Krsna, he is overpowered by

>|fear. Because he is separated from the Supreme Personality

>|of Godhead by the material energy, his conception of life

>|is reversed. In other words, instead of being the eternal

>|servant of Krsna, he becomes Krsna's competitor. This is

>|called viparyayah asmrtih . To nullify this mistake,

>|one who is actually learned and advanced worships the

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead as his spiritual master,

>|worshipful Deity and source of life. Be thus worships the

>|Lord by the process of unalloyed devotional service.'

1432|PURPORT

1433|This verse is quoted from Srimad-Bhagavatam (11.2.37).

1434|Madhya 24.138

1435|TEXT 138

1436|TEXT

1437|daivi hy esa guna-mayi

1438|mama maya duratyaya

1439|mam eva ye prapadyante

1440|mayam etam taranti te

1441|SYNONYMS

1442|daivi-belonging to the Supreme Lord; hi-certainly; esa-this;

>| guna-mayi-made of the three modes; mama-My; maya-external

>|energy; duratyaya-very difficult to surpass; mam-unto Me;

>|eva-certainly; ye-those who; prapadyante-surrender fully;

>|mayam-the illusory energy; etam-this; taranti-cross over;

>|te-they.

1443|TRANSLATION

1444|" 'This divine energy of Mine, consisting of the three

>|modes of material nature, is difficult to overcome. But

>|those who have surrendered unto Me can easily cross beyond

>|it.'

1445|PURPORT

1446|This is a quotation from Bhagavad-gita (7.14).

1447|Madhya 24.139

1448|TEXT 139

1449|TEXT

1450|bhakti vinu mukti nahi, bhaktye mukti haya

1451|SYNONYMS

1452|bhakti-devotional service; vinu-without; mukti-liberation;

>|nahi-there is not; bhaktye-actually by devotional service;

>|mukti haya-liberation is attained.

1453|TRANSLATION

1454|"One does not attain liberation without rendering

>|devotional service. Liberation is only attained by

>|devotional service.

1455|Madhya 24.140

1456|TEXT 140

1457|TEXT

1458|sreyah-srtim bhaktim udasya te vibho

1459|klisyanti ye kevala-bodha-labdhaye

1460|tesam asau klesala eva sisyate

1461|nanyad yatha sthula-tusavaghatinam

1462|SYNONYMS

1463|sreyah-srtim-the auspicious path of liberation; bhaktim-

>|devotional service; udasya-giving up; te-of You; vibho-O my

>|Lord; klisyanti-accept increased difficulties; ye-all those

>|persons who; kevala-only; bodha-labdhaye-for obtaining

>|knowledge; tesam-for them; asau-that; klesalah-trouble; eva-

>|only; sisyate-remains; na-not; anyat-anything else; yatha-

>|as much as; sthula-bulky; tusa-husks of rice; avaghatinam-

>|of those beating.

1464|TRANSLATION

1465|" 'My dear Lord, devotional service unto You is the only

>|auspicious path. If one gives it up simply for speculative

>|knowledge or the understanding that these living beings are

>|spirit souls and the material world is false, he undergoes

>|a great deal of trouble. Be only gains troublesome and

>|inauspicious activities. His actions are like beating a

>|husk that is already devoid of rice. One 's labor becomes

>|fruitless.'

1466|PURPORT

1467|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.14.4).

1468|Madhya 24.141

1469|TEXT 141

1470|TEXT

1471|ye 'nye 'ravindaksa vimukta-maninas

1472|tvayy asta-bhavad avisuddha-buddhayah

1473|aruhya krcchrena param padam tatah

1474|patanty adho 'nadrta-yusmad-anghrayah

1475|SYNONYMS

1476|ye-all those who; anye-others (nondevotees); aravinda-aksa-

>|O lotus-eyed one; vimukta-maninah-who consider themselves

>|liberated; tvayi-unto You; asta-bhavat-without devotion;

>|avisuddha-buddhayah-whose intelligence is not purified;

>|aruhya-having ascended; krcchrena-by severe austerities and

>|penances; param padam-to the supreme position; tatah-from

>|there; patanti-fall; adhah-down; anadrta-without respecting;

>| yusmat-Your; anghrayah-lotus feet.

1477|TRANSLATION

1478|" 'O lotus-eyed one, those who think they are liberated in

>|this life but are without devotional service to You are of

>|impure intelligence. Although they accept severe

>|austerities and penances and rise to the spiritual position,

>| to impersonal Brahman realization, they fall down again

>|because they neglect to worship Your lotus feet.'

1479|PURPORT

1480|This is a verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.2.32).

1481|Madhya 24.142

1482|TEXT 142

1483|TEXT

1484|ya esam purusam saksad

1485|atma-prabhavam isvaram

1486|na bhajanty avajananti

1487|sthanad bhrastah patanty adhah

1488|SYNONYMS

1489|ye-those who; esam-of those divisions of social and

>|spiritual orders; purusam-the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead; saksat-directly; atma-prabhavam-the source of

>|everyone; isvaram-the supreme controller; na-do not;

>|bhajanti-worship; avajananti-or who neglect; sthanat-from

>|their proper place; bhrastah-being fallen; patanti-fall;

>|adhah-downward into hellish conditions.

1490|TRANSLATION

1491|" 'If one simply maintains an official position in the four

>|varnas and asramas but does not worship the Supreme Lord

>|Visnu, he falls down from his puffed up position into a

>|hellish condition.'

1492|PURPORT

1493|This is also a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (11.5.3).

1494|Madhya 24.143

1495|TEXT 143

1496|TEXT

1497|bhaktye mukti paileha avasya krsnere bhajaya

1498|SYNONYMS

1499|bhaktye-by devotional service; mukti-liberation; paileha-if

>|one gets; avasya-certainly; krsnere-unto Lord Krsna;

>|bhajaya-renders service.

1500|TRANSLATION

1501|"When one is actually liberated by executing devotional

>|service, he always engages in the transcendental loving

>|service of the Lord.

1502|Madhya 24.144

1503|TEXT 144

1504|TEXT

1505|"mukta api lilaya vigraham

1506|krtva bhagavantam bhajante"

1507|SYNONYMS

1508|muktah-liberated; api-although; lilaya-by the pastimes;

>|vigraham-the form of the Lord; krtva-having installed;

>|bhagavantam-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhajante-

>|worship.

1509|TRANSLATION

1510|" 'Even a liberated soul merged in the impersonal Brahman

>|effulgence is attracted to the pastimes of Krsna. Be thus

>|installs a Deity and renders the Lord service.'

1511|PURPORT

1512|This is a quotation from Sankaracarya's commentary on the

>|Nrsimha-tapani Upanisad.

1513|Madhya 24.145

1514|TEXT 145

1515|TEXT

1516|ei chaya atmarama krsnere bhajaya

1517|prthak prthak ca-kare iha 'api'ra artha kaya

1518|SYNONYMS

1519|ei chaya-all these six; atmarama-transcendentalists;

>|krsnere bhajaya-render service to Krsna; prthak prthak-

>|separately; ca-kare-in the use of the word ca; iha-here; '

>|api'ra-of the word api; artha-meaning; kaya-says.

1520|TRANSLATION

1521|"These six kinds of atmaramas engage in the loving service

>|of Krsna. The varieties of service are indicated by adding

>|ca, and they also bear the meaning of api , 'indeed .'

1522|PURPORT

1523|There are six kinds of atmaramas: the neophyte (

>|sadhaka) student who is absorbed in Brahman realization (

>|brahmamaya ), one who has already attained the Brahman

>|position (prapta-brahma-laya), one who desires to be

>|liberated (mumuksu), one who is liberated even in this life

>|(jivan-mukta), and one who is self-realized (prapta-svarupa)

>|.

1524|Madhya 24.146

1525|TEXT 146

1526|TEXT

1527|"atmaramas ca api" kare krsne ahaituki bhakti

1528|"munayah santah" iti krsna-manane asakti

1529|SYNONYMS

1530|atmaramah ca api-self-realized persons also; kare-do; krsne-

>|unto Krsna; ahaituki bhakti-unmotivated devotional service;

>|munayah santah-great saintly persons and transcendentalists;

>| iti-thus; krsna-manane-in meditation on Krsna; asakti-

>|attraction.

1531|TRANSLATION

1532|"The six kinds of atmaramas render devotional service to

>|Krsna without ulterior motives. The words munayah and

>|santah indicate those who are very attached to

>|meditating upon Krsna.

1533|Madhya 24.147

1534|TEXT 147

1535|TEXT

1536|"nirgranthah"-avidya-hina, keha-vidhi-hina

1537|yahan yei yukta, sei arthera adhina

1538|SYNONYMS

1539|nirgranthah-nirgranthah; avidya-hina-without ignorance;

>|keha-some of them; vidhi-hina-without following any

>|regulative principles; yahan-wherever; yei-which; yukta-

>|appropriate; sei arthera adhina-comes under that different

>|import.

1540|TRANSLATION

1541|"The word nirgranthah means 'without ignorance' and '

>|devoid of rules and regulations.' Whichever meaning fits

>|may be applied.

1542|Madhya 24.148

1543|TEXT 148

1544|TEXT

1545|ca-sabde kari yadi'itaretara' artha

1546|ara eka artha kahe parama samartha

1547|SYNONYMS

1548|ca-sabde-by the word ca; kari-I do; yadi-if; itaretara

>| artha-different and separate meanings; ara-another;

>|eka-one; artha-meaning; kahe-is said; parama samartha-

>|highly suitable.

1549|TRANSLATION

1550|"By using the word ca in different places , there

>|are different meanings. Over and above them, there is

>|another meaning that is very important.

1551|Madhya 24.149

1552|TEXT 149

1553|TEXT

1554|"atmaramas ca atmaramas ca" kari' bara chaya

1555|panca atmarama chaya ca-kare lupta haya

1556|SYNONYMS

1557|atmaramah ca atmaramah ca-repeating the words atmaramah and

>|ca; kari'-doing; bara chaya-six times; panca atmarama-five

>|kinds of atmaramas; chaya-six; ca-kare-by the word ca;

>|lupta haya-become unpronounced.

1558|TRANSLATION

1559|"Although the words atmaramas ca would be repeated six

>|times, simply by adding the word ca, five atmaramas

>|are deleted.

1560|Madhya 24.150

1561|TEXT 150

1562|TEXT

1563|eka 'atmarama'-sabda avasesa rahe

1564|eka 'atmarama'-sabde chaya-jana kahe

1565|SYNONYMS

1566|eka-one; atmarama-atmarama; sabda-vibration; avasesa rahe-

>|remains at last; eka atmarama-one atmarama; sabde-by

>|vibrating; chaya-jana-six persons; kahe-are indicated.

1567|TRANSLATION

1568|"Therefore there is no need to repeat the word atmarama.

>|One is sufficient, and that one word indicates six persons.

1569|Madhya 24.151

1570|TEXT 151

1571|TEXT

1572|"sarupanam eka - sesa eka - vibhaktau

>|"

1573|uktarthanam aprayogah

1574|ramas ca ramas ca ramas

>|ca rama itivat

1575|SYNONYMS

1576|sa-rupanam-of words of the same form; eka-sesah-only the

>|last; eka-vibhaktau-in the same case; ukta-arthanam-of the

>|previously spoken meanings; aprayogah-nonapplication; ramah

>|ca-and Rama; ramah ca-and Rama; ramah ca-and Rama; ramah

>|itivat -in this way, by one rama, many ramas are

>|indicated.

1577|TRANSLATION

1578|" 'Of words having the same form and case termination, the

>|last one is the only one retained. For example, the word

>|ramah is used to stand for ramas ca, ramas ca, ramas ca,

>| etc. '

1579|PURPORT

1580|This is a quotation from Panini's sutras (1.2.64).

1581|Madhya 24.152

1582|TEXT 152

1583|TEXT

1584|tabe ye ca-kara, sei 'samuccaya' kaya

1585|"atmaramas ca munayas ca" krsnere bhajaya

1586|SYNONYMS

1587|tabe-then; ye-that; ca-kara-syllable ca; sei-that;

>|samuccaya-aggregation; kaya-is said; atmaramah ca-all those

>|who enjoy in the self; munayah ca-all saintly persons;

>|krsnere bhajaya-worship Krsna.

1588|TRANSLATION

1589|"By the aggregate use of the word ca, it is indicated

>|that all the atmaramas and saints serve and worship Krsna.

1590|Madhya 24.153

1591|TEXT 153

1592|TEXT

1593|"nirgrantha api"ra ei 'api'-sambhavane

1594|ei sata artha prathame karilun vyakhyane

1595|SYNONYMS

1596|nirgranthah apira-of the words nirgranthah api; ei-this;

>|api-api; sambhavane-in the matter of exposition;

>|ei sata artha-these seven different meanings; prathame-in

>|the beginning; karilun-I have done; vyakhyane-in

>|explanation.

1597|TRANSLATION

1598|"Api added to the word nirgranthah is used for

>|exposition. Thus I have tried to clarify the seven types

>|of meaning .

1599|Madhya 24.154

1600|TEXT 154

1601|TEXT

1602|antaryami-upasaka 'atmarama' kaya

1603|sei atmarama yogira dui bheda haya

1604|SYNONYMS

1605|antaryami-of the Supersoul; upasaka-worshiper; atmarama

>|kaya-is also said to be an atmarama; sei atmarama-that

>|atmarama; yogira-of the mystic yogi; dui bheda haya-there

>|are two kinds.

1606|TRANSLATION

1607|"The yogi who worships the Supersoul within himself is also

>|called atmarama. There are two types of atmarama-yogis.

1608|Madhya 24.155

1609|TEXT 155

1610|TEXT

1611|sagarbha, nigarbha,-ei haya dui bheda

1612|eka eka tina bhede chaya vibheda

1613|SYNONYMS

1614|sagarbha-sagarbha; nigarbha-nigarbha; ei-thus; haya-there

>|are; dui-two; bheda-different varieties; eka eka-each one;

>|tina bhede-in three varieties; chaya vibheda-therefore

>|there are six varieties.

1615|TRANSLATION

1616|"The two atmarama-yogis are called sagarbha and

>|nigarbha. Each of these is divided into three; therefore

>|there are six types of worshipers of the Supersoul.

1617|PURPORT

1618|The word sagarbha-yogi refers to a yogi who worships the

>|Supersoul in the Visnu form. The nigarbha-yogi worships the

>|Supersoul without form. The sagarbha and nigarbha yogis are

>|further categorized: (1) sagarbha-yogaruruksu, (2) nigarbha-

>|yogaruruksu, (3) sagarbha-yogarudha, (4) nigarbha-yogarudha,

>| (5) sagarbha-prapta-siddhi and (6) nigarbha-prapta-siddhi.

1619|Madhya 24.156

1620|TEXT 156

1621|TEXT

1622|kecit svadehantar

>|hrdayavakase

1623|pradesa-matram purusam vasantam

1624|catur-bhujam kanja-rathanga-sankha-

1625|gada-dharam dharanaya smaranti

1626|SYNONYMS

1627|kecit-some of them; sva-deha-antah-within one's own body;

>|hrdaya-avakase-in the cavity of the heart; pradesa-matram-

>|with the measurement of six inches; purusam-the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead; vasantam-residing; catuh-bhujam-

>|with four hands; kanja-a lotus flower; ratha-anga-a disc

>|like the wheel of a chariot; sankha-a conchshell; gada-

>|dharam-holding the club; dharanaya-by such contemplation;

>|smaranti-they remember.

1628|TRANSLATION

1629|" 'Some yogis think of the Lord within their hearts as

>|measuring about six inches. The Lord has four hands, in

>|which He holds a conchshell, club, disc and lotus flower.

>|Those who worship this form of Visnu within the heart are

>|called sagarbha-yogis.'

1630|PURPORT

1631|This verse is from Srimad-Bhagavatam (2.2.8).

1632|Madhya 24.157

1633|TEXT 157

1634|TEXT

1635|evam harau bhagavati pratilabdha-bhavo

1636|bhaktya dravad-dhrdaya utpulakah pramodat

1637|autkanthya-baspa-kalaya muhur ardyamanas

1638|tac capi citta-badisam sanakair viyunkte

1639|SYNONYMS

1640|evam-thus; harau-unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead;

>|bhagavati-the Lord; pratilabdha-bhavah-one who has awakened

>|a sense of ecstatic love; bhaktya-by devotional service;

>|dravat-melting; hrdayah-the heart; utpulakah-very pleased;

>|pramodat-because of happiness; autkanthya-with eagerness;

>|baspa-kalaya-with tears in the eyes; muhuh-always;

>|ardyamanah-merged in spiritual bliss; tat ca api-that also;

>|citta-badisam-with the heart like a fishing hook; sanakaih-

>|gradually; viyunkte-separates.

1641|TRANSLATION

1642|" 'When one is in ecstatic love with the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead, one's heart is melted by bhakti-

>|yoga , and one feels transcendental bliss. There are bodily

>|symptoms manifest, and , due to eagerness, there are tears

>|in the eyes. Thus one is subjected to spiritual bliss. When

>|the heart is overly afflicted, the meditative mind, like a

>|fishing hook, is gradually separated from the object of

>|meditation.'

1643|PURPORT

1644|This is also a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (3.28.34).

1645|Madhya 24.158

1646|TEXT 158

1647|TEXT

1648|'yogaruruksu', 'yogarudha' 'prapta-siddhi' ara

1649|ei tina bhede haya chaya prakara

1650|SYNONYMS

1651|yoga-aruruksu-persons desiring elevation to the platform of

>|yogic perfection; yoga-arudha-persons already elevated to

>|that position; prapta-siddhi-persons who have achieved the

>|success; ara-also; ei tina-these three; bhede-by varieties;

>|haya-there are; chaya prakara-six kinds.

1652|TRANSLATION

1653|"By these three divisions of advancement in yoga-

>|yogaruruksu, yogarudha and prapta-siddhi-there are six

>|kinds of mystic yogis.

1654|Madhya 24.159

1655|TEXT 159

1656|TEXT

1657|aruruksor muner yogam

1658|karma karanam ucyate

1659|yogarudhasya tasyaiva

1660|samah karanam ucyate

1661|SYNONYMS

1662|aruruksoh-of a person desiring to rise to the platform of

>|yogic perfection; muneh-of a saintly person; yogam-

>|spiritual knowledge; karma-work; karanam-the cause; ucyate-

>|is said; yoga-arudhasya-of one who has attained such

>|perfect knowledge; tasya-for him; eva-certainly; samah-

>|controlling the mind without being disturbed; karanam-cause;

>| ucyate-is said.

1663|TRANSLATION

1664|" ' those who wish to rise to the

>|platform of yogic perfection practice

>| the yoga system and strictly follow its

>|regulative principles . They practice the yoga postures ,

>|asanas and breathing exercises. those who are

>|already elevated to this platform practice meditation

>|and keep their minds on the Supreme

>|Lord . They reject all material activity and

>|keep their minds in an equipoised

>|condition [sama].

1665|PURPORT

1666|Texts 159 and 160 are from Bhagavad-gita (6.3 -4).

1667|Madhya 24.160

1668|TEXT 160

1669|TEXT

1670|yada hi nendriyarthesu

1671|na karmasv anusajjate

1672|sarva-sankalpa-sannyasi

1673|yogarudhas tadocyate

1674|SYNONYMS

1675|yada-when; hi-certainly; na-not; indriya-arthesu-sense

>|gratification; na-not; karmasu-in activities; anusajjate-

>|one becomes engaged; sarva-all kinds of; sankalpa-desires;

>|sannyasi-renouncing; yoga-arudhah-one who has actually

>|attained perfection in the yoga system; tada-at that time;

>|ucyate-is said.

1676|TRANSLATION

1677|" 'When a person is no longer interested in acting for

>|sense gratification and when he renounces all material

>|desires, he is said to be situated in perfect yoga [

>|yogarudha].'

1678|Madhya 24.161

1679|TEXT 161

1680|TEXT

1681|ei chaya yogi sadhu-sangadi-hetu pana

1682|krsna bhaje krsna-gune akrsta hana

1683|SYNONYMS

1684|ei-this; chaya-six; yogi-mystics; sadhu-of devotees; sanga-

>|adi-the association; hetu-because of; pana-getting; krsna

>|bhaje-render service to Krsna; krsna-gune-by the

>|transcendental qualities of Krsna; akrsta-attracted; hana-

>|becoming.

1685|TRANSLATION

1686|"When a purified yogi associates with devotees, he engages

>|in Lord Krsna's devotional service, being attracted by the

>|Lord's transcendental qualities.

1687|Madhya 24.162

1688|TEXT 162

1689|TEXT

1690|ca-sabde 'api'ra artha ihano kahaya

1691|'muni', 'nirgrantha'-sabdera purvavat artha haya

1692|SYNONYMS

1693|ca-sabde-by the word ca; 'api'ra-of the word api; artha-the

>|meaning; ihano-here also; kahaya-is applicable; muni-a

>|saintly person; nirgrantha- fully liberated; sabdera-

>|of the words; purva-vat-as mentioned above; artha haya-

>|there are the meanings.

1694|TRANSLATION

1695|"The meanings of the words ca and api can be applied

>|here. The meanings of the words muni and nirgrantha

>|are the same as before.

1696|Madhya 24.163

1697|TEXT 163

1698|TEXT

1699|urukrame ahaituki kahan kona artha

1700|ei tera artha kahilun parama samartha

1701|SYNONYMS

1702|urukrame-unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who acts

>|uncommonly; ahaituki-without motives ; kahan-

>|wherever; kona-some; artha-import; ei-in this way; tera

>|artha-thirteen imports; kahilun-I have explained; parama-

>|supremely; samartha-complete.

1703|TRANSLATION

1704|"The word ahaituki is always applicable to the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead, Urukrama. In this way I have

>|described the import of all these things in

>|thirteen complete varieties .

1705|PURPORT

1706|The thirteen varieties mentioned

>|are

>|(1) sadhaka, the neophyte performer; (2)

>|brahmamaya , one absorbed in the thought of impersonal

>|Brahman; (3) prapta-brahma-laya, one who has actually

>|attained Brahman perfection; (4) mumuksu, the desirer

>|of liberation; (5) jivan-mukta, one who is liberated

>|in this life; (6) prapta-svarupa, one who has attained one '

>|s original constitutional position; (7) nirgrantha-muni, a

>|completely liberated saint; (8) sagarbha-yogaruruksu, a

>|yogi meditating upon the four-handed Visnu form or

>|desiring yogic perfection; (9) nigarbha-yogaruruksu, one

>|who has attained perfection in impersonal meditation; (

>|10) sagarbha-yogarudha, already elevated to

>|the yoga perfection platform

>|; (11) nigarbha-yogarudha, similarly

>|impersonal yogi ; (12)

>|sagarbha-prapta-siddhi, one who has already attained the

>|perfectional stage ; (13)

>|nigarbha-prapta-siddhi, one who has attained perfection by

>| impersonal meditation.

1707|Madhya 24.164

1708|TEXT 164

1709|TEXT

1710|ei saba santa yabe bhaje bhagavan

1711|'santa' bhakta kari' tabe kahi tanra nama

1712|SYNONYMS

1713|ei saba-all these; santa-neutral; yabe-when; bhaje-worship;

>|bhagavan-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; santa bhakta-

>|devotees in the neutral stage of devotional service; kari'-

>|describing as; tabe-that time; kahi-I speak; tanra-their;

>|nama-name.

1714|TRANSLATION

1715|"These thirteen types of yogis and munis are called santa-

>|bhaktas, for they render transcendental loving service to

>|the Supreme Personality of Godhead in the neutral stage.

1716|Madhya 24.165

1717|TEXT 165

1718|TEXT

1719|'atma' sabde 'mana' kaha-mane yei rame

1720|sadhu-sange seha bhaje sri-krsna-carane

1721|SYNONYMS

1722|atma-atma; sabde-by the word ; mana-the mind; kaha-if

>|you say; mane-within the mind; yei rame-one who is

>|satisfied by speculation; sadhu-sange-by the association of

>|devotees; seha-he also; bhaje-takes to devotional service;

>|sri-krsna-carane-at the lotus feet of Lord Krsna.

1723|TRANSLATION

1724|"The word atma sometimes means 'the mind.' In this case ,

>| the word atmarama means 'a person who is satisfied by

>|mental speculation.' When such a person associates with a

>|pure devotee, he takes to devotional service at the lotus

>|feet of Krsna.

1725|Madhya 24.166

1726|TEXT 166

1727|TEXT

1728|udaram upasate ya rsi-vartmasu kurpa-drsah

1729|parisara-paddhatim hrdayam arunayo daharam

1730|tata udagad ananta tava dhama sirah paramam

1731|punar iha yat sametya na patanti krtanta-mukhe

1732|SYNONYMS

1733|udaram-the abdomen*; upasate-worship; ye-those who; rsi-

>|vartmasu-on the path marked out by the great saintly

>|persons; kurpa-drsah-whose vision is grossly situated in

>|the bodily conception of life; parisara-paddhatim-from

>|which the system of the arteries comes; hrdayam-the heart;

>|arunayah-saintly persons headed by Aruna Rsi; daharam-the

>|sky within the heart, the subtle conception of the

>|Supersoul within the heart; tatah-from that; udagat-went up;

>| ananta-O unlimited one; tava-Your; dhama-place; sirah-the

>|top of the head; paramam-supreme; punah-again; iha-in this

>|material world; yat-which; sametya-having achieved; na-not;

>|patanti-fall down; krta-anta-mukhe-in the repetition of

>|birth and death.

1734|TRANSLATION

1735|" 'Those who follow the path of great, saintly mystic yogis

>|take to the yogic gymnastic process and begin worshiping

>|from the abdomen, where it is said that Brahman is located.

>|Such people are called sarkaraksa, which means that they

>|are situated in the gross bodily conception. There are also

>|followers of the rsi known as Aruna. Following that path,

>|they observe the activities of the arteries. Thus they

>|gradually rise to the heart, where subtle Brahman,

>|Paramatma, is situated. They then worship Him. O unlimited

>|Ananta! Better than these persons are the mystic yogis who

>|worship You from the top of their heads. Beginning with the

>|abdomen and proceeding through the heart, they reach the

>|top of the head and pass through the brahma-randhra, the

>|hole at the top of the skull. Thus yogis attain the

>|perfectional platform and do not enter the cycle of birth

>|and death again.'

1736|PURPORT

1737|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.87.18).

1738|Madhya 24.167

1739|TEXT 167

1740|TEXT

1741|eho krsna-gunakrsta maha-muni hana

1742|ahaituki bhakti kare nirgrantha hana

1743|SYNONYMS

1744|eho-such yogis; krsna guna-akrsta-attracted by the

>|transcendental qualities of Krsna; maha-muni hana-becoming

>|great saintly persons; ahaituki bhakti kare-they perform

>|causeless devotional service; nirgrantha hana-becoming

>|indifferent to the mystic yoga process.

1745|TRANSLATION

1746|"Being attracted by the transcendental qualities of Krsna,

>|yogis become great saints. At that time, not being

>|hampered by the yogic process, they engage in unalloyed

>|devotional service.

1747|Madhya 24.168

1748|TEXT 168

1749|TEXT

1750|'atma'-sabde 'yatna' kahe-yatna kariya

1751|"munayo 'pi" krsna bhaje gunakrsta hana

1752|SYNONYMS

1753|atma-sabde-by the word atma; yatna-endeavor; kahe-one means;

>| yatna kariya-by great endeavor; munayah api-even great

>|saintly persons; krsna bhaje-take to the devotional service

>|of Krsna; guna-akrsta hana-being attracted by His

>|transcendental qualities.

1754|TRANSLATION

1755|"Atma also means 'endeavor.' Being attracted by Krsna's

>|transcendental qualities, some saints make a great endeavor

>|to come to the point of rendering service to Him.

1756|Madhya 24.169

1757|TEXT 169

1758|TEXT

1759|tasyaiva hetoh prayateta kovido

1760|na labhyate yad bhramatam upary adhah

1761|tal labhyate duhkhavad anyatah sukham

1762|kalena sarvatra gabhira-ramhasa

1763|SYNONYMS

1764|tasya eva-for that; hetoh-reason; prayateta-should endeavor;

>| kovidah-one who is learned and intelligent; na-not;

>|labhyate-is achieved; yat-that which; bhramatam-of those

>|wandering; upari adhah-up and down; tat-that; labhyate-is

>|achieved; duhkhavat -exactly like unhappiness or

>|distress; anyatah-from other reasons (one's past actions);

>|sukham-happiness; kalena-by time; sarvatra-everywhere;

>|gabhira-insurmountable; ramhasa-having force.

1765|TRANSLATION

1766|" 'The transcendental position cannot be attained by

>|wandering up and down from Brahmaloka and Satyaloka to

>|Patalaloka. If one is actually intelligent and learned, he

>|should endeavor for that rare transcendental position.

>|whatever material happiness

>|is available within the fourteen worlds is attained by the

>|force of time, just as one attains distress in due course

>|of time. since these are not attained

>|by spiritual consciousness, one should not try for them.'

1767|PURPORT

1768|This verse was spoken by Narada Muni in Srimad-Bhagavatam (

>|1.5.18). Narada Muni was speaking to Vyasadeva, who was

>|morose even after he had compiled all Vedic literatures.

>| In this connection, Narada Muni advised Srila Vyasadeva to

>|attain devotional service .

1769|Madhya 24.170

1770|TEXT 170

1771|TEXT

1772|sad-dharmasyavabodhaya

1773|yesam nirbandhini matih

1774|acirad eva sarvarthah

1775|sidhyaty esam abhipsitah

1776|SYNONYMS

1777|sat-dharmasya-of the path of progressive devotional service;

>| avabodhaya-for understanding; yesam-those whose;

>|nirbandhini-unflinching; matih-intelligence; acirat-very

>|soon; eva-certainly; sarva-arthah-the goal of life;

>|sidhyati-becomes fulfilled; esam-of these persons;

>|abhipsitah-desired.

1778|TRANSLATION

1779|" 'Those who are anxious to awaken their spiritual

>|consciousness , who have unflinching intelligence and who

>|are not deviated, certainly

>|attain the desired goal of life .'

1780|PURPORT

1781|This is a quotation from the Naradiya Purana.

1782|Madhya 24.171

1783|TEXT 171

1784|TEXT

1785|ca-sabda api-arthe, 'api'-avadharane

1786|yatnagraha vina bhakti na janmaya preme

1787|SYNONYMS

1788|ca-sabda-the word ca; api-of the word api; arthe-in the

>|meaning; api avadharane-this api is used in sense of

>|emphasis; yatna-agraha vina-without sincere endeavor;

>|bhakti-devotional service; na-not; janmaya-begets; preme-

>|love of Godhead.

1789|TRANSLATION

1790|"The word ca may be used in place of api, which gives

>|emphasis to something. Thus it means that without sincere

>|endeavor in devotional service, one cannot attain love of

>|Godhead.

1791|Madhya 24.172

1792|TEXT 172

1793|TEXT

1794|sadhanaughair anasangair

1795|alabhya sucirad api

1796|harina casv adeyeti

1797|dvidha sa syat sudurlabha

1798|SYNONYMS

1799|sadhana-activities of devotional service; aughaih-by masses

>|of; anasangaih-without attachment; alabhya-very difficult

>|to achieve; su-cirat api-even after a considerable duration

>|of time; harina-by the Supreme Lord; ca-also; asu-very soon;

>| adeya-not to be delivered; iti-thus; dvidha-two ways; sa-

>|that; syat-is; su-durlabha-very difficult to obtain.

1800|TRANSLATION

1801|" 'Devotional perfection is very difficult to attain for

>|two reasons. First, unless one is attached to Krsna, he

>|cannot attain devotional perfection even if he renders

>|devotional service for a long time. Second, Krsna does not

>|easily deliver perfection in devotional service.'

1802|PURPORT

1803|As stated in Srimad-Bhagavatam (5.6.18): muktim dadati

>|karhicit. Srila Sukadeva Gosvami told Maharaja Pariksit

>|that Krsna readily grants liberation but does not very

>|readily grant perfection in devotional service. This means

>|that Krsna wants to see that a devotee is actually sincere

>|and serious and that he does not have ulterior motives. If

>|this is the case, devotional service can very easily be

>|successful; otherwise it is very difficult to obtain from

>|the Supreme Personality of Godhead. This verse appears in

>|the Bhakti-rasamrta-sindhu (1.1.35).

1804|Madhya 24.173

1805|TEXT 173

1806|TEXT

1807|tesam satata-yuktanam

1808|bhajatam priti-purvakam

1809|dadami buddhi-yogam tam

1810|yena mam upayanti te

1811|SYNONYMS

1812|tesam-to them; satata-yuktanam-always engaged; bhajatam-in

>|devotional service; priti-purvakam-in loving ecstasy;

>|dadami-I give; buddhi-yogam-real intelligence; tam-that;

>|yena-by which; mam-unto Me; upayanti-come; te-they.

1813|TRANSLATION

1814|" 'To those who are constantly devoted and worship Me with

>|love, I give the understanding by which they can come to Me.

>|'

1815|PURPORT

1816|This is a quotation from Bhagavad-gita (10.10).

1817|Madhya 24.174

1818|TEXT 174

1819|TEXT

1820|'atma'-sabde 'dhrti' kahe,-dhairye yei rame

1821|dhairyavanta eva hana karaya bhajane

1822|SYNONYMS

1823|atma-sabde-by the word atma; dhrti-perseverance; kahe-it is

>|said; dhairye-with perseverance; yei rame-anyone who

>|endeavors; dhairyavanta -such persons with endurance;

>|eva-certainly; hana-becoming; karaya-perform; bhajane-

>|devotional service.

1824|TRANSLATION

1825|"Another meaning of atma is dhrti, or endurance. A

>|person who endeavors with endurance is atmarama. With

>|endurance, such a person engages in devotional service.

1826|Madhya 24.175

1827|TEXT 175

1828|TEXT

1829|'muni'-sabde-paksi, bhrnga; 'nirgranthe'-murkha-jana

1830|krsna-krpaya sadhu-krpaya donhara bhajana

1831|SYNONYMS

1832|muni-sabde-by the word muni; paksi-bird; bhrnga-bumblebee;

>|nirgranthe-in the word nirgrantha; murkha-jana-foolish

>|people; krsna-krpaya-by the mercy of Lord Krsna; sadhu-

>|krpaya-by the mercy of a devotee; donhara bhajana-engages

>|in devotional service of both (Krsna and his spiritual

>|master or the sadhu).

1833|TRANSLATION

1834|"The word muni also means 'bird ,' and 'bumblebee.' The

>|word nirgrantha refers to foolish people. By the mercy

>|of Krsna, such creatures contact a sadhu [spiritual master]

>|and thus engage in devotional service.

1835|Madhya 24.176

1836|TEXT 176

1837|TEXT

1838|prayo batamba munayo vihaga vane 'smin

1839|krsneksitam tad-uditam kala-venu-gitam

1840|aruhya ye druma-bhujan rucira-prabalan

1841|srnvanti milita-drso vigatanya-vacah

1842|SYNONYMS

1843|prayah-almost; bata-certainly; amba-O mother; munayah-great

>|sages; vihagah-the birds; vane-in the forest; asmin-this;

>|krsna-iksitam-seeing the lotus feet of Krsna; tat-uditam-

>|created by Him; kala-venu-gitam-sweet vibrations made by

>|playing the flute; aruhya-rising; ye-all of them; druma-

>|bhujan-to the branches of the trees; rucira-prabalan-having

>|beautiful creepers and twigs; srnvanti-hear; milita-drsah-

>|closing their eyes; vigata-anya-vacah-stopping all other

>|sounds.

1844|TRANSLATION

1845|" 'My dear mother, in this forest, all the birds, after

>|rising on the beautiful branches of the trees, are closing

>|their eyes and, not being attracted by any other sound, are

>|simply listening to the vibration of Krsna's flute. Such

>|birds and bees must be on the same level as great saints.'

1846|PURPORT

1847|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.21.14). This

>|statement was made by the gopis, who were lamenting in

>|separation from Krsna and studying how the inhabitants of

>|Vrndavana were enjoying life like saintly persons.

1848|Madhya 24.177

1849|TEXT 177

1850|TEXT

1851|ete 'linas tava yaso 'khila-loka-tirtham

1852|gayanta adi-purusanupatham bhajante

1853|prayo ami muni-gana bhavadiya-mukhya

1854|gudham vane 'pi na jahaty anaghatma-daivam

1855|SYNONYMS

1856|ete-all these; alinah-bees; tava-Your; yasah-reputation;

>|akhila-all; loka-tirtham-auspicious for the planets;

>|gayante-are singing; adi-purusa-O original person;

>|anupatham -along the path; bhajante-they are engaged

>|in transcendental loving service; prayah-almost; ami-these;

>|muni-ganah-great saintly persons; bhavadiya-in relation

>|with You; mukhyah-very advanced devotees; gudham-unknown;

>|vane-in the forest; api-although; na-not; jahati-give up;

>|anagha-O personality of transcendental goodness; atma-

>|daivam-their worshipable Deity.

1857|TRANSLATION

1858|" 'O good fortune personified! O original Personality of

>|Godhead, all these bees are chanting about Your

>|transcendental fame, which will purify the entire universe.

>|Indeed, they are following Your path in the forest and are

>|worshiping You. Actually they are all saintly persons, but

>|now they have taken the form of bees. Although You are

>|playing like a human being, they could not forget that You

>|are their worshipable Deity.'

1859|PURPORT

1860|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.15.6). Krsna

>|and Balarama were just on the verge of boyhood and were

>|entering the forest of Vrndavana when Krsna began to offer

>|prayers to please Balarama.

1861|Madhya 24.178

1862|TEXT 178

1863|TEXT

1864|sarasi sarasa-hamsa-vihangas

1865|caru-gita-hrta-cetasa etya

1866|harim upasata te yata-citta

1867|hanta milita-drso dhrta-maunah

1868|SYNONYMS

1869|sarasi-in the water; sarasa-cranes; hamsa-swans; vihangah-

>|birds; caru-gita-by the melodious song of Krsna's flute;

>|hrta-cetasah-devoid of material consciousness; etya-coming

>|near; harim-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; upasata-

>|worshiped; te-all of them; yata-cittah-with full attention;

>|hanta-alas; milita-drsah-closing their eyes; dhrta-maunah-

>|completely silent.

1870|TRANSLATION

1871|" 'All the cranes and swans in the water are being

>|enchanted by the melodious song of Krsna's flute. They have

>|approached and are worshiping the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead with full attention. Alas, they are closing their

>|eyes and are becoming completely silent.'

1872|PURPORT

1873|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.35.11). In

>|the day, Krsna went to the forest of Vrndavana, and at that

>|time, the gopis, being morose due to separation from Him,

>|were lamenting in this way.

1874|Madhya 24.179

1875|TEXT 179

1876|TEXT

1877|kirata - hunandhra - pulinda - pulkasa

1878|abhira-sumbha yavanah khasadayah

1879|ye 'nye ca papa yad-upasrayasrayah

1880|sudhyanti tasmai prabhavisnave namah

1881|SYNONYMS

1882|kirata-the aborigines named Kiratas; huna-the Hunas; andhra-

>|Andhras; pulinda-Pulindas; pulkasah- Pulkasas; abhira-

>|Abhiras; sumbhah-Sumbhas; yavanah-persons who do not follow

>|the Vedic injunctions and who eat cow's flesh; khasa-adayah-

>|Khasas and others; ye-those who; anye-similar others; ca-

>|also; papah-sinful persons; yat-of the Supreme Personality

>|of Godhead; upasraya-of the devotees; asrayah-taking

>|shelter; sudhyanti-become purified; tasmai-unto Him, Lord

>|Visnu, because of whom they become purified; prabhavisnave-

>|to Lord Visnu, the most powerful; namah-respectful

>|obeisances.

1883|TRANSLATION

1884|" ' Kirata, Huna, Andhra, Pulinda, Pulkasa, Abhira,

>|Sumbha, Yavana and the Khasa races and even

>|others who are addicted to sinful acts can be purified by

>|taking shelter of the devotees of the Lord due to His

>|being the supreme power. I beg to offer my respectful

>|obeisances unto Him.'

1885|PURPORT

1886|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (2.4.18). This

>|verse was spoken by Sukadeva Gosvami when Pariksit Maharaja

>|asked him for a description of the creation. While offering

>|obeisances to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Sukadeva

>|Gosvami described the unlimited potencies of Lord Visnu,

>|who can purify the lowborn creatures mentioned herein.

1887|Madhya 24.180

1888|TEXT 180

1889|TEXT

1890|kimva'dhrti'-sabde nija-purnatadi-jnana kaya

1891|duhkhabhave uttama-praptye maha-purna haya

1892|SYNONYMS

1893|kimva-or; dhrti-dhrti; sabde-by this word ; nija-own;

>|purnata-adi-perfection and so on; jnana-knowledge; kaya-

>|says; duhkha-abhave-in the absence of all material miseries;

>| uttama-the best; praptye-by obtaining; maha-purna haya-

>|becomes perfectly perfect.

1894|TRANSLATION

1895|"The word dhrti is also used when one is fully perfect

>|in knowledge. When due to having obtained the lotus feet

>|of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, he has no material

>|miseries, he attains maha-purna, the highest level of

>|perfection.

1896|Madhya 24.181

1897|TEXT 181

1898|TEXT

1899|dhrtih syat purnata jnana -

1900|duhkhabhavottamaptibhih

1901|apraptatita-nastartha-

1902|nabhisamsocanadikrt

1903|SYNONYMS

1904|dhrtih-endurance; syat-may become; purnata-fullness; jnana-

>|knowledge of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; duhkha-

>|abhava-the absence of misery; uttama-aptibhih-by attainment

>|of the highest platform of perfection; aprapta-not obtained;

>| atita-gone; nasta-destroyed; artha-object, goal;

>|anabhisam-socana-absence of lamentation; adi-and so

>|on; krt-doing.

1905|TRANSLATION

1906|" 'Dhrti is the fullness felt by the absence of misery

>|and brought about by receiving knowledge of the

>|Supreme Lord and by obtaining pure love for Him. The

>|lamentation that accrues from not obtaining a goal or by

>|loss of something already attained does not affect this

>|completeness.'

1907|PURPORT

1908|This verse is found in the Bhakti-rasamrta-sindhu (2.4.144).

1909|Madhya 24.182

1910|TEXT 182

1911|TEXT

1912|krsna-bhakta-duhkha-hina, vanchantara-hina

1913|krsna-prema-seva-purnananda-pravina

1914|SYNONYMS

1915|krsna-bhakta-a devotee of Lord Krsna; duhkha-hina-not under

>|miserable material conditions; vancha-antara-hina-he has no

>|other desire than to serve Krsna; krsna-prema-love

>|of Krsna; seva-service; purna-ananda-full in transcendental

>|bliss; pravina-and very expert or experienced in all

>|subject matters.

1916|TRANSLATION

1917|"A devotee of Krsna is never in a miserable condition, nor

>|does he have any desire other than to serve Krsna. He is

>|experienced and advanced. He feels the transcendental bliss

>|of love of Krsna and always engages in His service fully

>|protected .

1918|Madhya 24.183

1919|TEXT 183

1920|TEXT

1921|mat-sevaya pratitam te

1922|salokyadi-catustayam

1923|necchanti sevaya purnah

1924|kuto 'nyat kala-viplutam

1925|SYNONYMS

1926|mat-of Me; sevaya-by service; pratitam-obtained; te-they;

>|salokya-adi-liberation, beginning with salokya; catustayam-

>|the four kinds of; na icchanti-do not desire; sevaya-by

>|service; purnah-complete; kutah-where; anyat-other things;

>|kala-viplutam-which are lost in time.

1927|TRANSLATION

1928|" 'My devotees, having fulfilled their desires by serving

>|Me, do not accept the four kinds of salvation that are

>|easily earned by such service. Why then should they accept

>|any pleasures that are lost in the course of time?'

1929|PURPORT

1930|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (9.4.67).

1931|Madhya 24.184

1932|TEXT 184

1933|TEXT

1934|hrsikese hrsikani

1935|yasya sthairya-gatani hi

1936|sa eva dhairyam apnoti

1937|samsare jiva-cancale

1938|SYNONYMS

1939|hrsikese-to the master of the senses; hrsikani-all the

>|senses; yasya-whose; sthairya-gatani-fixed; hi-certainly;

>|sah-that person; eva-of course; dhairyam apnoti-attains the

>|position of dhairya, endurance; samsare-in the material

>|world; jiva-cancale-where everyone is disturbed.

1940|TRANSLATION

1941|"In this material world, all living entities are disturbed

>|due to their flickering position. A devotee, however, is

>|fixed in the service of the lotus feet of the Lord, the

>|master of the senses. Such a person is to be considered

>|situated in endurance and patience.

1942|Madhya 24.185

1943|TEXT 185

1944|TEXT

1945|'ca'-avadharane, iha 'api'-samuccaye

1946|dhrtimanta hana bhaje paksi-murkha-caye

1947|SYNONYMS

1948|ca-the word ca; avadharane-in emphasis; iha-here; api-the

>|word api; samuccaye-in the sense of an aggregate;

>|dhrtimanta-fully saturated; hana-becoming; bhaje-worship;

>|paksi-murkha-caye-dull creatures like the birds, the most

>|foolish.

1949|TRANSLATION

1950|"The word ca is for emphasis, and the word api is

>|used as an aggregate. it is to be understood

>|that even dull creatures [birds and illiterates] can also

>|be situated in endurance and engage in Krsna's devotional

>|service.

1951|Madhya 24.186

1952|TEXT 186

1953|TEXT

1954|'atma'-sabde 'buddhi' kahe buddhi-visesa

1955|samanya-buddhi-yukta yata jiva avasesa

1956|SYNONYMS

1957|atma-sabde-by the word atma; buddhi-intelligence; kahe-it

>|is said; buddhi-visesa-a particular type of intelligence;

>|samanya-buddhi-yukta-endowed with common intelligence; yata-

>|all; jiva-living entities; avasesa-the rest.

1958|TRANSLATION

1959|"The word atma is also used for a particular type of

>|intelligence. Since all living entities generally have some

>|intelligence, more or less, they are included.

1960|Madhya 24.187

1961|TEXT 187

1962|TEXT

1963|buddhye rame atmarama-dui ta' prakara

1964|'pandita' muni-gana, nirgrantha 'murkha' ara

1965|SYNONYMS

1966|buddhye-in intelligence; rame-who enjoys; atmarama-is

>|atmarama; dui ta ' prakara-two varieties; pandita-learned;

>|muni-gana-philosophers; nirgrantha-without education;

>|murkha-foolish; ara-also.

1967|TRANSLATION

1968|"Everyone has some kind of intelligence, and one who

>|utilizes his intelligence is called atmarama. There are

>|two types of atmarama. One is a learned scholar and a

>|philosopher, and the other is an uneducated, illiterate

>|and foolish person.

1969|Madhya 24.188

1970|TEXT 188

1971|TEXT

1972|krsna-krpaya sadhu-sange rati-buddhi paya

1973|saba chadi' suddha-bhakti kare krsna-paya

1974|SYNONYMS

1975|krsna-krpaya-by the mercy of Krsna; sadhu-sange-in the

>|association of devotees; rati-buddhi-devotional attraction

>|and intelligence; paya-one obtains; saba chadi'-giving up

>|everything; suddha-bhakti-pure devotional service; kare-

>|performs; krsna-paya-at the lotus feet of Krsna.

1976|TRANSLATION

1977|"By the mercy of Krsna and by the association of devotees,

>|one increases his attraction to and intelligence for pure

>|devotional service; therefore one gives up everything and

>|engages himself at the lotus feet of Krsna and His pure

>|devotees.

1978|Madhya 24.189

1979|TEXT 189

1980|TEXT

1981|aham sarvasya prabhavo

1982|mattah sarvam pravartate

1983|iti matva bhajante mam

1984|budha bhava-samanvitah

1985|SYNONYMS

1986|aham-I, Lord Krsna; sarvasya-of everyone; prabhavah-the

>|original source; mattah-from Me; sarvam-everything;

>|pravartate-emanates; iti-thus; matva-understanding;

>|bhajante-they engage in devotional service; mam-to Me;

>|budhah-those who are learned; bhava-samanvitah-with love

>|and devotion.

1987|TRANSLATION

1988|" 'I [Krsna] am the original source of everything.

>|Everything emanates from Me. The wise who perfectly know

>|this engage in My service with love and devotion.'

1989|PURPORT

1990|This is a quotation from Bhagavad-gita (10.8).

1991|Madhya 24.190

1992|TEXT 190

1993|TEXT

1994|te vai vidanty atitaranti ca deva-mayam

1995|stri-sudra-huna-sabara api papa-jivah

1996|yady adbhuta-krama-parayana-sila-siksas

1997|tiryag-jana api kimu sruta-dharana ye

1998|SYNONYMS

1999|te-all of them; vai-certainly; vidanti-understand;

>|atitaranti-cross over; ca-also; deva-mayam-the influence of

>|the external illusory energy; stri-women; sudra-fourth-

>|class men; huna-uncivilized hill tribes; sabarah-and

>|hunters; api-even; papa-jivah-sinful creatures; yadi-if;

>|adbhuta-krama-of the performer of wonderful activities;

>|parayana-of the devotees; sila-siksah-characteristics and

>|education; tiryak-janah-birds and beasts; api-even; kimu -

>|what to speak of; sruta-dharanah ye-persons advanced in the

>|education of Vedic knowledge.

2000|TRANSLATION

2001|" 'Women, fourth-class men, uncivilized hill tribes,

>|hunters and many others born of low families, as well as

>|birds and beasts, can engage in the service of the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead-who acts very wonderfully-and follow

>|the path of the devotees and take lessons from them.

>|Although the ocean of nescience is vast, they can still

>|cross over it. What, then, is the difficulty for those who

>|are advanced in Vedic knowledge?'

2002|PURPORT

2003|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (2.7.46). Lord

>|Brahma said this when speaking to his disciple Narada about

>|the wonderful characteristics of Lord Visnu. Simply by

>|chanting the glories of Lord Visnu, one can cross the ocean

>|of nescience, even though one may be lowborn.

2004|Madhya 24.191

2005|TEXT 191

2006|TEXT

2007|vicara kariya yabe bhaje krsna-paya

2008|sei buddhi dena tanre, yate krsna paya

2009|SYNONYMS

2010|vicara-consideration; kariya-doing; yabe-when; bhaje-one

>|worships; krsna-paya-at the lotus feet of Krsna; sei buddhi-

>|that intelligence; dena-gives; tanre-to him; yate-by which;

>|krsna paya-one gets the shelter of the lotus feet of Krsna.

2011|TRANSLATION

2012|"Considering all these points, when one engages in the

>|service of Krsna's lotus feet, Krsna gives one the

>|intelligence by which he can gradually progress toward

>|perfection in service to the Lord.

2013|Madhya 24.192

2014|TEXT 192

2015|TEXT

2016|tesam satata-yuktanam

2017|bhajatam priti-purvakam

2018|dadami buddhi-yogam tam

2019|yena mam upayanti te

2020|SYNONYMS

2021|tesam-to them; satata-yuktanam-always engaged; bhajatam-in

>|devotional service; priti-purvakam-in loving ecstasy;

>|dadami-I give; buddhi-yogam-real intelligence; tam-that;

>|yena-by which; mam-unto Me; upayanti-come; te-they.

2022|TRANSLATION

2023|" 'To those who are constantly devoted and worship Me with

>|love, I give the understanding by which they can come to Me.

>|'

2024|PURPORT

2025|This is a quotation from Bhagavad-gita (10.10).

2026|Madhya 24.193

2027|TEXT 193

2028|TEXT

2029|sat-sanga, krsna-seva, bhagavata, nama

2030|vraje vasa,-ei panca sadhana pradhana

2031|SYNONYMS

2032|sat-sanga-association with devotees; krsna-seva-engagement

>|in the service of Krsna; bhagavata-devotees and the book

>|known as Srimad-Bhagavatam; nama-the chanting of the holy

>|name; vraje vasa-residence in Vrndavana or Mathura; ei-

>|these; panca-five; sadhana pradhana-the chief processes of

>|devotion.

2033|TRANSLATION

2034|"To be elevated to the platform of devotional service, the

>|following five items should be observed: association with

>|devotees, engagement in the service of Lord Krsna, the

>|reading of Srimad-Bhagavatam, the chanting of the holy

>|names and residence at Vrndavana or Mathura.

2035|Madhya 24.194

2036|TEXT 194

2037|TEXT

2038|ei-panca-madhye eka 'svalpa' yadi haya

2039|subuddhi janera haya krsna-premodaya

2040|SYNONYMS

2041|ei-these; panca-madhye-out of the five; eka-of only one;

>|svalpa-a small quantity; yadi-if; haya-there is; su-buddhi-

>|intelligent; janera-of the person; haya-there is; krsna-

>|prema-udaya-awakening of dormant love for Krsna.

2042|TRANSLATION

2043|"One's dormant love for Krsna gradually awakens if one is a

>|little advanced in one of these five items and is

>|intelligent.

2044|Madhya 24.195

2045|TEXT 195

2046|TEXT

2047|duruhadbhuta-virye 'smin

2048|sraddha dure 'stu pancake

2049|yatra svalpo 'pi sambandhah

2050|saddhiyam bhava-janmane

2051|SYNONYMS

2052|duruha -difficult to be reconciled; adbhuta-

>|wonderful; virye-in the power; asmin-in this; sraddha-faith;

>| dure-far away; astu-let it be; pancake-in the above-

>|mentioned five principles; yatra-in which; svalpah -a

>|little; api-even; sambandhah-connection; sat-dhiyam-of

>|those who are intelligent and offenseless; bhava-janmane-to

>|awaken one's dormant love for Krsna.

2053|TRANSLATION

2054|" 'The power of these five principles is very wonderful and

>|difficult to reconcile. Even without faith in them, a

>|person who is offenseless can experience dormant love

>|of Krsna simply by being a little connected with them.'

2055|PURPORT

2056|This verse is also found in the Bhakti-rasamrta-sindhu (1.

>|2.238).

2057|Madhya 24.196

2058|TEXT 196

2059|TEXT

2060|udara mahati yanra sarvottama buddhi

2061|nana kame bhaje, tabu paya bhakti-siddhi

2062|SYNONYMS

2063|udara-liberal; mahati-great; yanra-whose; sarva-uttama-

>|first-class; buddhi-intelligence; nana-various; kame-with

>|desires; bhaje-engages in devotional service; tabu-still;

>|paya-gets; bhakti-siddhi-perfection in devotional service.

2064|TRANSLATION

2065|"If a person is actually liberal and intelligent, he can

>|advance and become perfect in devotional service even if he

>|has material desires and serves the Lord with some motive.

2066|Madhya 24.197

2067|TEXT 197

2068|TEXT

2069|akamah sarva-kamo va

2070|moksa-kama udara-dhih

2071|tivrena bhakti-yogena

2072|yajeta purusam param

2073|SYNONYMS

2074|akamah-without material desires; sarva-kamah-full of all

>|material desires; va-or; moksa-kamah-desiring liberation;

>|udara-dhih-sincere and advanced in devotional service;

>|tivrena-firm; bhakti-yogena-by the practice of bhakti-yoga;

>|yajeta-should worship; purusam param-the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead.

2075|TRANSLATION

2076|" 'Whether one desires everything or nothing, or whether he

>|desires to merge into the existence of the Lord, he is

>|intelligent only if he worships Lord Krsna, the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead, by rendering transcendental loving

>|service.'

2077|PURPORT

2078|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (2.3.10).

2079|Madhya 24.198

2080|TEXT 198

2081|TEXT

2082|bhakti-prabhava,-sei kama chadana

2083|krsna-pade bhakti karaya gune akarsiya

2084|SYNONYMS

2085|bhakti-prabhava-the influence of devotional service; sei-

>|that; kama-material desire; chadana-causing to give up;

>|krsna-pade-unto the lotus feet of Krsna; bhakti karaya-

>|engages in devotional service; gune-by transcendental

>|qualities; akarsiya-attracting.

2086|TRANSLATION

2087|"Devotional service is so strong that when one engages in

>|it, he gradually gives up all material desires and becomes

>|fully attracted to the lotus feet of Krsna. All this is

>|brought about by attraction for the transcendental

>|qualities of the Lord.

2088|Madhya 24.199

2089|TEXT 199

2090|TEXT

2091|satyam disaty arthitam arthito nrnam

2092|naivarthado yat punar arthita yatah

2093|svayam vidhatte bhajatam anicchatam

2094|iccha-pidhanam nija-pada-pallavam

2095|SYNONYMS

2096|satyam-it is true; disati-He awards; arthitam-that which is

>|desired; arthitah-being requested; nrnam-by human beings;

>|na-not; eva-certainly; artha-dah-giving desired things; yat-

>|which; punah-again; arthita-request; yatah-from which;

>|svayam-Himself; vidhatte-He gives; bhajatam-of those

>|engaged in devotional service; anicchatam-even though not

>|desiring; iccha-pidhanam-covering all other desires; nija-

>|pada-pallavam-the shelter of His own lotus feet.

2097|TRANSLATION

2098|" 'Whenever Krsna is requested to fulfill one's desire, He

>|undoubtedly does so, but He does not award anything which,

>|after being enjoyed, will cause someone to petition Him

>|again and again to fulfill further desires. When one has

>|other desires but engages in the Lord's service, Krsna

>|forcibly gives one shelter at His lotus feet, where one

>|will forget all other desires.'

2099|PURPORT

2100|This verse is from Srimad-Bhagavatam (5.19.27).

2101|Madhya 24.200

2102|TEXT 200

2103|TEXT

2104|'atma'-sabde 'svabhava' kahe, tate yei rame

2105|atmarama jiva yata sthavara-jangame

2106|SYNONYMS

2107|atma-sabde-by the word atma; svabhava-nature; kahe-is

>|sometimes said; tate-in that; yei rame-one who takes

>|pleasure; atmarama-called atmarama; jiva-the living

>|entities; yata-all of them; sthavara-jangame-the moving and

>|nonmoving.

2108|TRANSLATION

2109|"Another meaning of the word atma is 'one's

>|characteristic nature.' Whoever enjoys his particular type

>|of nature is called atmarama. Therefore, all living

>|entities-be they moving or nonmoving-are also called

>|atmarama.

2110|Madhya 24.201

2111|TEXT 201

2112|TEXT

2113|jivera svabhava-krsna-'dasa'-abhimana

2114|dehe atma-jnane acchadita sei 'jnana'

2115|SYNONYMS

2116|jivera svabhava-the original characteristic of all living

>|entities; krsna-dasa-servant of Krsna; abhimana-the

>|conception; dehe-in the material body; atma-jnane-by the

>|conception of the self; acchadita-covered; sei jnana-that

>|original consciousness.

2117|TRANSLATION

2118|"The original nature of every living entity is to consider

>|himself the eternal servant of Krsna. However , under the

>|influence of maya , he thinks himself to be the body, and

>|thus his original consciousness is covered.

2119|Madhya 24.202

2120|TEXT 202

2121|TEXT

2122|ca-sabde 'eva', 'api'-sabda samuccaye

2123|'atmarama eva' hana sri-krsna bhajaye

2124|SYNONYMS

2125|ca-sabde-by the word ca; eva-the word eva; api-sabda-the

>|word api; samuccaye-in the sense of aggregation; atmaramah

>|eva-all the atmaramas (all kinds of living entities); hana-

>|being; sri-krsna bhajaye-become engaged in the service of

>|Lord Krsna.

2126|TRANSLATION

2127|"In that case, by the word ca, the word eva is meant.

>|The word api can be taken in the sense of aggregation.

>|Thus the verse would read atmarama eva ; that is, 'even

>|all kinds of living beings worship Krsna.'

2128|PURPORT

2129|It is here mentioned that every living entity is atmarama.

>|Temporarily covered by the influence of maya, the living

>|entity serves his senses, which are represented as kama-

>|krodha-lobha-moha-mada-matsarya

>|. In the material condition, all

>|living entities are engaged in sense gratification, but

>|when they associate with devotees who follow the regulative

>|principles, they become purified and awakened to their

>|original consciousness. They then attempt to satisfy the

>|senses of Lord Krsna and engage in His devotional service.

2130|Madhya 24.203

2131|TEXT 203

2132|TEXT

2133|ei jiva-sanakadi saba muni-jana

2134|'nirgrantha'-murkha, nica, sthavara-pasu-gana

2135|SYNONYMS

2136|ei jiva-these living entities; sanaka-adi saba muni-jana-

>|all the great personalities, such as Sanaka and Sanatana;

>|nirgrantha-down to the illiterate; murkha-foolish person;

>|nica-lowborn; sthavara-the trees and plants; pasu-gana-the

>|beasts and birds.

2137|TRANSLATION

2138|"Living entities include great personalities like the four

>|Kumaras, low-class foolish people, trees, plants,

>|birds and beasts.

2139|Madhya 24.204

2140|TEXT 204

2141|TEXT

2142|vyasa-suka-sanakadira prasiddha bhajana

2143|'nirgrantha' sthavaradira suna vivarana

2144|SYNONYMS

2145|vyasa-of Vyasadeva; suka-of Sukadeva Gosvami; sanaka-adira-

>|of the four Kumaras; prasiddha bhajana-the devotional

>|service is celebrated; nirgrantha-foolish, uneducated;

>|sthavara-adira-of the immovable elements; suna vivarana-

>|hear the description.

2146|TRANSLATION

2147|"The devotional service of Vyasa, Suka and the four Kumaras

>|has already been well celebrated. Now let Me explain how

>|immovable living entities like trees and plants engage in

>|the Lord's devotional service.

2148|Madhya 24.205

2149|TEXT 205

2150|TEXT

2151|krsna-krpadi-hetu haite sabara udaya

2152|krsna-gunakrsta hana tanhare bhajaya

2153|SYNONYMS

2154|krsna-krpa-adi-hetu-the reason of Krsna's mercy; haite-from;

>| sabara udaya-anyone becomes a devotee; krsna-guna-akrsta

>|hana-being attracted by the transcendental qualities of

>|Krsna; tanhare-Him; bhajaya-worship.

2155|TRANSLATION

2156|"Everyone is eligible to receive Krsna's mercy-including

>|Vyasadeva, the four Kumaras, Sukadeva Gosvami, lowborn

>|creatures, trees, plants and beasts. By Krsna's mercy they

>|are elevated and engaged in His service.

2157|PURPORT

2158|This is also confirmed in Bhagavad-gita

>|wherein the Lord says:

2159|mam hi partha vyapasritya

2160|ye 'pi syuh papa -

>|yonayah

2161|striyo

>| vaisyas tatha

>|sudras

2162|te 'pi yanti param gatim

2163|"O son of Prtha, those who take shelter in Me, though they

>|be of lower birth-women, vaisyas [merchants], as well as

>|sudras [workers]-can approach the supreme destination." (9.

>|32)

2164|Everyone is eligible to become Krsna's devotee. One simply

>|has to be trained according to the approved process. It is

>|the work of Krsna's confidential devotees to turn everyone

>|into a Krsna bhakta. If the confidential devotees do not

>|take up the task of elevating everyone to Krsna

>|consciousness, then who will do it? Those who claim to be

>|devotees but do not engage in Krsna's service to elevate

>|all living creatures to Krsna consciousness are to be

>|considered kanistha-adhikaris (people in the lowest stage

>|of devotional service). When one rises to the second

>|platform of devotional service, his business is to

>|propagate Krsna consciousness all over the world. Those who

>|are active in the Krsna consciousness movement should not

>|remain in the neophyte stage but should rise to the

>|platform of preachers, the second platform of devotional

>|service. Devotional service is so enchanting that even the

>|first-class devotees (uttama-adhikaris) also come down to

>|the second platform to preach and render service to the

>|Lord for the benefit of the whole world.

2165|Madhya 24.206

2166|TEXT 206

2167|TEXT

2168|dhanyeyam adya dharani trna-virudhas tvat-

2169|pada-sprso druma-latah karajabhimrstah

2170|nadyo 'drayah khaga-mrgah sadayavalokair

2171|gopyo 'ntarena bhujayor api yat-sprha srih

2172|SYNONYMS

2173|dhanya-glorified; iyam-this; adya-today; dharani-the

>|surface of the globe; trna-virudhah-the grass and herbs;

>|tvat-Your; pada-sprsah-from the touch of the lotus feet;

>|druma-latah-the creepers and trees; karaja-abhimrstah-

>|touched by Your nails; nadyah-the rivers; adrayah-the

>|hills; khaga-mrgah-the birds and forest animals; sadaya-

>|avalokaih-because of Your merciful glances; gopyah-the

>|gopis, the damsels of Vraja; antarena-by the region between;

>| bhujayoh-Your two arms; api-also; yat-for which; sprha-

>|desirous; srih-the goddess of fortune.

2174|TRANSLATION

2175|" 'This land Vrndavana [Vrajabhumi] is glorified today .

>| Your lotus feet have touched the earth and grass .

>|Your fingers have touched the trees and creepers, and

>|Your merciful eyes have glanced upon rivers, hills,

>|birds and beasts. The gopis have been embraced by Your arms,

>| and even the goddess of fortune desires this. Now all of

>|these are glorified.'

2176|PURPORT

2177|This verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.15.8) is spoken by

>|Lord Krsna to Sri Balarama.

2178|Madhya 24.207

2179|TEXT 207

2180|TEXT

2181|ga gopakair anuvanam nayator udara

>|-

2182|venu-svanaih kala-padais tanu-bhrtsu sakhyah

2183|aspandanam gatimatam pulakas tarunam

2184|niryoga-pasa-krta-laksanayor vicitram

2185|SYNONYMS

2186|gah-the cows; gopakaih-with the cowherd boys; anuvanam

>|-to each forest; nayatoh-leading; udara-very liberal;

>|venu-svanaih-by the vibrations of the flutes; kala-padaih-

>|having sweet tones; tanu-bhrtsu-among the living entities;

>|sakhyah-O friends; aspandanam-the lack of movement;

>|gatimatam -of those living entities that can move;

>|pulakah-the ecstatic jubilation; tarunam-of the otherwise

>|nonmoving trees; niryoga-pasa-the ropes for binding the

>|rear legs of the cows; krta-laksanayoh-of those two (Krsna

>|and Balarama), who are characterized by; vicitram-wonderful.

2187|TRANSLATION

2188|" 'My dear friend, both Krsna and Balarama are passing

>|through the forest leading Their cows with Their cowherd

>|boy friends. They both carry ropes with which, at

>|the time of milking, They bind the rear legs of the cows.

>|When They play on Their flutes, all moving living entities

>|are stunned, and nonmoving living entities experience

>|ecstatic jubilation by Their sweet music. All these things

>|are certainly very wonderful.'

2189|PURPORT

2190|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.21.19). All

>| the gopis were very attracted to

>|Krsna when they saw Him wandering in

>|the forest with Baladeva . They Thus

>|praised the Lord's activities

>|.

2191|Madhya 24.208

2192|TEXT 208

2193|TEXT

2194|vana-latas tarava atmani visnum

2195|vyanjayantya iva puspa-phaladhyah

2196|pranata-bhara-vitapa madhu-dharah

2197|prema-hrsta-tanavo vavrsuh sma

2198|SYNONYMS

2199|vana-latah-the herbs and plants; taravah-the trees; atmani-

>|in the Supreme Soul; visnum-the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead; vyanjayantyah-manifesting; iva-like; puspa-phala-

>|adhyah-filled with luxuriant fruits and flowers; pranata-

>|bhara-bowed down because of loads; vitapah-the trees; madhu-

>|dharah-showers; prema-hrsta-inspired by love of

>|Godhead; tanavah-whose bodies; vavrsuh-constantly rained;

>|sma-certainly.

2200|TRANSLATION

2201|" 'The plants, creepers and trees were full of fruits and

>|flowers due to ecstatic love of Krsna. Indeed, being so

>|full, they were bowing down. They were inspired by such

>|deep love for Krsna that they were constantly pouring

>|showers of honey. In this way the gopis saw all the forest

>|of Vrndavana.'

2202|PURPORT

2203|This verse is from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.35.9).

2204|Madhya 24.209

2205|TEXT 209

2206|TEXT

2207|kirata -hunandhra - pulinda - pulkasa

2208|abhira-sumbha yavanah khasadayah

2209|ye 'nye ca papa yad-upasrayasrayah

2210|sudhyanti tasmai prabhavisnave namah

2211|SYNONYMS

2212|kirata-the aborigines named Kiratas; huna-the Hunas; andhra-

>|Andhras; pulinda-Pulindas; pulkasah- Pulkasas; abhira-

>|Abhiras; sumbhah-Sumbhas; yavanah-persons who do not follow

>|the Vedic injunctions and who eat cow's flesh; khasa-adayah-

>|Khasas and others; ye-those who; anye-similar others; ca-

>|also; papah-sinful persons; yat-of the Supreme Personality

>|of Godhead; upasraya-of the devotees; asrayah-taking

>|shelter; sudhyanti-become purified; tasmai-unto Him, Lord

>|Visnu, because of whom they become purified; prabhavisnave-

>|to Lord Visnu, the most powerful; namah-respectful

>|obeisances.

2213|TRANSLATION

2214|" ' Kirata, Huna, Andhra, Pulinda, Pulkasa, Abhira,

>|Sumbha, Yavana and the Khasa races and even

>|others who are addicted to sinful acts can be purified by

>|taking shelter of the devotees of the Lord due to His

>|being the supreme power. I beg to offer my respectful

>|obeisances unto Him.'

2215|Madhya 24.210

2216|TEXT 210

2217|TEXT

2218|age 'tera' artha karilun, ara 'chaya' ei

2219|unavimsati artha ha-ila mili' ei dui

2220|SYNONYMS

2221|age-previously; tera-thirteen; artha-meanings; karilun-I

>|have done; ara-another; chaya-six; ei-this; unavimsati-

>|altogether nineteen; artha-meanings; ha-ila-there were;

>|mili'-including; ei dui-these two.

2222|TRANSLATION

2223|"I have already spoken about the thirteen kinds of

>|meaning . Now there are six more. Combined,

>|these make nineteen.

2224|PURPORT

2225|The six different meanings are

>|(1) mental

>|speculators (vide verse 165), (2) those engaged in

>|different types of endeavor (vide verse 168), (3) those who

>|are patient and sober (vide verse 174), (4) those who are

>|intelligent and learned scholars (vide verse 187), (5)

>|those who are intelligent but illiterate and foolish (vide

>|verse 187), and (6) those who are conscious of

>|eternal servitorship to Krsna (vide verse 201).

2226|Madhya 24.211

2227|TEXT 211

2228|TEXT

2229|ei unisa artha karilu, age suna ara

2230|'atma'-sabde 'deha' kahe,-cari artha tara

2231|SYNONYMS

2232|ei-these; unisa-nineteen; artha-meanings; karilu-I have

>|done; age-ahead; suna-hear; ara-more; atma-sabde-by the

>|word atma; deha-the body; kahe-is understood; cari artha-

>|four meanings; tara-of that.

2233|TRANSLATION

2234|"I have already explained nineteen different meanings. Now

>|please hear further meanings. The word atma also refers

>|to the body, and this can be taken in four ways.

2235|PURPORT

2236|The four divisions

>|are (1) aupadika-brahma-deha, the material body considered

>|as Brahman with designations (vide verse 212), (2) karma-

>|nistha yajnikera karma-deha, the body engaged in

>|ritualistic ceremonies of the Vedic injunctions (vide verse

>|214), (3) tapo-deha, the body engaged in austerities and

>|penances (vide verse 216), and (4) sarva-kama-deha, the

>|body engaged for the satisfaction of all kinds of material

>|desires (vide verse 218).

2237|Madhya 24.212

2238|TEXT 212

2239|TEXT

2240|deharami dehe bhaje 'dehopadhi brahma'

2241|sat-sange seha kare krsnera bhajana

2242|SYNONYMS

2243|deharami-persons who have accepted this body as the

>|self and are interested only in sense gratification; dehe-

>|in the body; bhaje-worships; deha-upadhi brahma-Brahman

>|having the body as a designation; sat-sange-in the

>|association of devotees; seha-such a person; kare-does;

>|krsnera bhajana-service to Lord Krsna.

2244|TRANSLATION

2245|"One in the bodily conception worships his own body as

>|Brahman, but when he comes in contact with the devotee, he

>|gives up this mistaken idea and engages himself in the

>|devotional service of Lord Krsna.

2246|Madhya 24.213

2247|TEXT 213

2248|TEXT

2249|udaram upasate ya rsi-vartmasu kurpa-drsah

2250|parisara-paddhatim hrdayam arunayo daharam

2251|tata udagad ananta tava dhama sirah paramam

2252|punar iha yat sametya na patanti krtanta-mukhe

2253|SYNONYMS

2254|udaram-the abdomen; upasate-worship; ye-those who; rsi-

>|vartmasu-on the path marked out by the great saintly

>|persons; kurpa-drsah-whose vision is grossly situated in

>|the bodily conception of life; parisara-paddhatim-from

>|which the system of the arteries comes; hrdayam-the heart;

>|arunayah-saintly persons headed by Aruna Rsi; daharam-the

>|sky within the heart, the subtle conception of the

>|Supersoul within the heart; tatah-from that; udagat-went up;

>| ananta-O unlimited one; tava-Your; dhama-place; sirah-the

>|top of the head; paramam-supreme; punah-again; iha-in this

>|material world; yat-which; sametya-having achieved; na-not;

>|patanti-fall down; krta-anta-mukhe-in the repetition of

>|birth and death.

2255|TRANSLATION

2256|" 'Those who follow the path of great, saintly mystic yogis

>|take to the yogic gymnastic process and begin worshiping

>|from the abdomen, where it is said that Brahman is located.

>|Such people are called sark, which means that they

>|are situated in the gross bodily conception. There are also

>|followers of the rsi known as Aruna. Following that path,

>|they observe the activities of the arteries. Thus they

>|gradually rise to the heart, where subtle Brahman,

>|Paramatma, is situated. They then worship Him. O ,

>|unlimited Ananta! Better than these persons are the mystic

>|yogis who worship You from the top of their heads.

>|Beginning with the abdomen and proceeding through the heart,

>| they reach the top of the head and pass through the brahma-

>| randra, the hole at the top of the skull. Thus

>|yogis attain the perfectional platform and do not enter the

>|cycle of birth and death again.'

2257|PURPORT

2258|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.87.18).

2259|Madhya 24.214

2260|TEXT 214

2261|TEXT

2262|deharami karma-nistha-yajnikadi jana

2263|sat-sange 'karma' tyaji' karaya bhajana

2264|SYNONYMS

2265|deharami-those in the bodily concept of life; karma-nistha-

>|attracted to fruitive activities; yajnika-adi jana-persons

>|who perform ritualistic ceremonies for a better standard of

>|life; sat-sange-in contact with devotees; karma tyaji'-

>|giving up such fruitive activities; karaya bhajana-engages

>|in the devotional service of the Lord.

2266|TRANSLATION

2267|"Those who are in the bodily conception mainly engage in

>|fruitive activity. Those who perform yajnas and ritualistic

>|ceremonies are also considered in the same category.

>|However, when they are all in contact with the pure

>|devotee, they give up their fruitive activity and fully

>|engage in the service of the Lord.

2268|Madhya 24.215

2269|TEXT 215

2270|TEXT

2271|karmany asminn anasvase

2272|dhuma-dhumratmanam bhavan

2273|apayayati govinda-

2274|pada-padmasavam madhu

2275|SYNONYMS

2276|karmani-in fruitive activity; asmin-in this; anasvase-

>|although not positive in result; dhuma-dhumra-atmanam-whose

>|bodies are simply becoming blackish because of smoke;

>|bhavan-you; apayayati-give a chance to drink; govinda-pada-

>|padma-asavam-the nectarean beverage flowing from the lotus

>|feet of Govinda; madhu-sweet.

2277|TRANSLATION

2278|" 'We have just begun performing this fruitive activity, a

>|sacrificial fire, but due to the many imperfections in our

>|action, we are not certain of its result. Our bodies have

>|become black from the smoke, but we are factually pleased

>|by the nectar of the lotus feet of the Personality of

>|Godhead, Govinda, which you are distributing.'

2279|PURPORT

2280|This verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.18.12) was spoken to

>|Suta Gosvami at the meeting of great sages at Naimisaranya.

>|The great sages were headed by Saunaka, and Suta Gosvami

>|spoke of the glorious activities of the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead at that meeting. At that time, all

>|the rsis assembled there neglected to complete the

>|ritualistic ceremonies because there was no positive

>|assurance of the results. All the performers were coated

>|with black ash due to the large amount of smoke coming from

>|the fire.

2281|Madhya 24.216

2282|TEXT 216

2283|TEXT

2284|'tapasvi' prabhrti yata deharami haya

2285|sadhu-sange tapa chadi' sri-krsna bhajaya

2286|SYNONYMS

2287|tapasvi-persons who undergo severe penances; prabhrti-and

>|so on; yata-all; deharami haya-are within the category of

>|the bodily concept of life; sadhu-sange-in the association

>|of devotees; tapa chadi'-giving up all such processes of

>|penance and austerity; sri-krsna bhajaya-engage themselves

>|in the service of Lord Krsna.

2288|TRANSLATION

2289|"The tapasvis, those who undergo severe austerities and

>|penances to elevate themselves to the higher planetary

>|systems, are also in the same category. When such persons

>|come in contact with a devotee, they give up all those

>|practices and engage in Lord Krsna's service.

2290|Madhya 24.217

2291|TEXT 217

2292|TEXT

2293|yat-pada-sevabhirucis tapasvinam

2294|asesa-janmopacitam malam dhiyah

2295|sadyah ksinoty anvaham edhati sati

2296|yatha padangustha-vinihsrta sarit

2297|SYNONYMS

2298|yat-pada-seva-abhirucih-the taste for serving the lotus

>|feet of Lord Krsna; tapasvinam-of persons undergoing severe

>|penances; asesa-unlimited; janma-upacitam-contracted from

>|life after life; malam-dirt; dhiyah-of the intelligence;

>|sadyah-immediately; ksinoti-vanquishes; anvaham -every

>|day; edhati-increasing; sati-being in the mode of goodness;

>|yatha-as; pada-angustha-vinihsrta-emanating from the toe of

>|the Lord; sarit-the river Ganges.

2299|TRANSLATION

2300|" 'The taste for loving service is like the water of the

>|River Ganges, which flows from the feet of Lord Krsna.

>|Every day that taste diminishes the results of sinful

>|activities acquired over a period of many births by those

>|who perform austerities.'

2301|PURPORT

2302|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (4.21.31).

2303|Madhya 24.218

2304|TEXT 218

2305|TEXT

2306|deharami, sarva-kama-saba atmarama

2307|krsna-krpaya krsna bhaje chadi' saba kama

2308|SYNONYMS

2309|deharami-persons who are in the bodily concept of life;

>|sarva-kama-full of all material desires; saba-all; atmarama-

>|enjoying self-satisfaction; krsna-krpaya-by the mercy of

>|Krsna; krsna bhaje-become engaged in the devotional service

>|of Lord Krsna; chadi' saba kama-giving up all sorts of

>|material desire.

2310|TRANSLATION

2311|"As long as one labors under the bodily conception, he must

>|fulfill volumes and volumes of material desires. Thus a

>|person is called atmarama. When such an atmarama is favored

>|by the mercy of Krsna, he gives up his so-called self-

>|satisfaction and engages in the transcendental loving

>|service of the Lord.

2312|Madhya 24.219

2313|TEXT 219

2314|TEXT

2315|sthanabhilasi tapasi sthito 'ham

2316|tvam praptavan deva-munindra-guhyam

2317|kacam vicinvann api divya-ratnam

2318|svamin krtartho 'smi varam na yace

2319|SYNONYMS

2320|sthana-abhilasi-desiring a very high position in the

>|material world; tapasi-in severe austerities and penances;

>|sthitah-situated; aham-I; tvam-You; praptavan-have obtained;

>| deva-muni-indra-guhyam-difficult to achieve even for great

>|demigods, saintly persons and kings; kacam-a piece of glass;

>| vicinvan-searching for; api-although; divya-ratnam-a

>|transcendental gem; svamin-O my Lord; krta-arthah asmi-I am

>|fully satisfied; varam-any benediction; na yace-I do not

>|ask.

2321|TRANSLATION

2322|[When he was being benedicted by the Supreme Personality

>|of Godhead, Dhruva Maharaja said ], " 'O my Lord, because

>|I was seeking an opulent material position, I was

>|performing severe types of penance and austerity. Now I

>|have gotten You, who are very difficult for the great

>|demigods, saintly persons and kings to attain. I was

>|searching after a piece of glass, but instead I have found

>|a most valuable jewel. Therefore I am so satisfied that I

>|do not wish to ask any benediction from You.'

2323|PURPORT

2324|This verse is from the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya (7.28).

2325|Madhya 24.220

2326|TEXT 220

2327|TEXT

2328|ei cari artha saha ha-ila 'teisa' artha

2329|ara tina artha suna parama samartha

2330|SYNONYMS

2331|ei-these; cari-four; artha-meanings; saha-with; ha-ila-

>|there were; teisa artha-twenty-three different varieties of

>|imports; ara tina artha-another three imports; suna-hear;

>|parama samartha-very strong.

2332|TRANSLATION

2333|"In addition to the nineteen other meanings

>|, this

>| atmarama meaning [ including

>| those laboring under the bodily conception ] makes

>|four meanings altogether and brings the total to twenty-

>|three meanings. Now hear of another three meanings, which

>|are very suitable.

2334|PURPORT

2335|The three different meanings are

>|(1) the word ca meaning "in due course '

>| " (2) the words ca meaning eva , and

>|api meaning "censure," and (3)

>|nirgrantha , meaning "one who is very poor,

>|without money."

2336|Madhya 24.221

2337|TEXT 221

2338|TEXT

2339|ca-sabde 'samuccaye', ara artha kaya

2340|'atmaramas ca munayas ca' krsnere bhajaya

2341|SYNONYMS

2342|ca-sabde-by the word ca; samuccaye-in aggregation; ara-

>|another; artha-import; kaya-is meant; atmaramah ca munayah

>|ca-all the atmaramas and munis; krsnere bhajaya-worship

>|Krsna.

2343|TRANSLATION

2344|"As mentioned above, the word ca has been used to mean '

>|aggregate.' According to this meaning, all the atmaramas

>|and the munis engage in Krsna's service. Besides 'aggregate,

>|' there is another meaning of the word ca.

2345|Madhya 24.222

2346|TEXT 222

2347|TEXT

2348|'nirgranthah' hana ihan 'api'-nirdharane

2349|'ramas ca krsnas ca' yatha viharaye vane

2350|SYNONYMS

2351|nirgranthah hana-being liberated saintly persons; ihan-here;

>| api-the word api; nirdharane-in the sense of certainty;

>|ramah ca krsnah ca-both Rama and Krsna; yatha-as; viharaye-

>|enjoy walking; vane-in the forest.

2352|TRANSLATION

2353|"The word nirgranthah is used as an adjective, and

>|api is used in the sense of certainty. For instance,

>|ramas ca krsnas ca means that both Rama and Krsna enjoy

>|walking in the forest.

2354|Because it is said that both Rama and Krsna enjoy wandering

>|in the forest, it is understood that both of Them are

>|enjoying Their tour within the forest.

2355|Madhya 24.223

2356|TEXT 223

2357|TEXT

2358|ca-sabde 'anvacaye' artha kahe ara

2359|'bato, bhiksam ata, gam canaya' yaiche prakara

2360|SYNONYMS

2361|ca-sabde-by the word ca; anvacaye-in presenting an action

>|of secondary importance; artha-meaning; kahe-says; ara-

>|another; bato-O brahmacari: bhiksam ata-just bring some

>|alms; gam ca anaya-also, at the same time, bring the cows;

>|yaiche prakara-in this way.

2362|TRANSLATION

2363|"The word ca also means anvacaye, which means to

>|present a secondary thing to be done at the same time. This

>|is the way of understanding the word

>|anvacaye. An example is : 'O brahmacari, go out to collect

>|alms and at the same time bring in the cows.'

2364|Madhya 24.224

2365|TEXT 224

2366|TEXT

2367|krsna-manane muni krsne sarvada bhajaya

2368|'atmarama api' bhaje,-gauna artha kaya

2369|SYNONYMS

2370|krsna-manane-in meditating on Krsna; muni-saintly persons;

>|krsne-unto Lord Krsna; sarvada-always; bhajaya-perform

>|devotional service; atmaramah api-also those who are

>|atmaramas; bhaje-engage themselves in devotional service;

>|gauna artha kaya-this is also another secondary import.

2371|TRANSLATION

2372|"Saintly persons who are always meditating upon Krsna are

>|engaged in the devotional service of the Lord. The

>|atmaramas are also engaged in the Lord's service. That is

>|the indirect import.

2373|PURPORT

2374|The anvacaye meaning of the word ca indicates that between

>|the two words compounded by the word ca, one is given more

>|importance, and the other is considered subordinate. For

>|example : "O brahmacari, please go out and collect alms and

>|at the same time bring in the cows." In this statement, the

>|collection of alms is of first importance, and the second

>|business of collecting the cows is subordinate. Similarly,

>|one who always meditates upon Krsna is mainly a devotee of

>|Krsna engaged in His devotional service. Other atmaramas

>|are subordinate in devotional service.

2375|Madhya 24.225

2376|TEXT 225

2377|TEXT

2378|'ca' evarthe-'munayah eva' krsnere bhajaya

2379|"atmarama api"-'api' 'garha'-artha kaya

2380|SYNONYMS

2381|ca-the word ca; eva-arthe-in the sense of eva; munayah eva-

>|just the saintly persons; krsnere bhajaya-engage themselves

>|in the devotional service of Lord Krsna; atmaramah api-also

>|in this combination, atmarama api; api-the word api; garha-

>|artha kaya-in the sense of censure.

2382|TRANSLATION

2383|"The word ca is also used to indicate the certainty

>|that only saintly persons are engaged in rendering

>|devotional service to Krsna. In the combination atmarama

>|api, api is used in the sense of censure.

2384|Madhya 24.226

2385|TEXT 226

2386|TEXT

2387|'nirgrantha hana'-ei dunhara 'visesana'

2388|ara artha suna, yaiche sadhura sangama

2389|SYNONYMS

2390|nirgrantha hana-becoming nirgrantha; ei-this; dunhara-of

>|both; visesana-the adjective; ara artha-another import;

>|suna-please hear; yaiche-in which; sadhura sangama-there is

>|association with devotees.

2391|TRANSLATION

2392|"The word nirgrantha is taken as an adjective

>|modifying muni and atmarama. There is another meaning,

>| which you may hear from Me, indicating association with a

>|devotee. Now I shall explain how it is that through the

>|association of devotees, even a nirgrantha can become a

>|devotee.

2393|Madhya 24.227

2394|TEXT 227

2395|TEXT

2396|nirgrantha-sabde kahe tabe 'vyadha', 'nirdhana'

2397|sadhu-sange seha kare sri-krsna-bhajana

2398|SYNONYMS

2399|nirgrantha-sabde-by the word nirgrantha; kahe-is said; tabe-

>|therefore; vyadha-a hunter; nirdhana-without any riches;

>|sadhu-sange-by the association of a saintly person; seha-he

>|also; kare-engages himself; sri-krsna-bhajana-in the

>|devotional service of Lord Krsna.

2400|TRANSLATION

2401|"The word nirgrantha - when combined with api , used in

>|the sense of certainty - indicates a person who is a

>|hunter by profession or who is very poor. Nonetheless, when

>|such a person associates with a great saint like Narada, he

>|engages in Lord Krsna's devotional service.

2402|Madhya 24.228

2403|TEXT 228

2404|TEXT

2405|'krsnaramas ca' eva-haya krsna-manana

2406|vyadha hana haya pujya bhagavatottama

2407|SYNONYMS

2408|krsna-aramah ca-one who takes pleasure in Krsna; eva-

>|certainly; haya-there is; krsna-manana-meditation on Krsna;

>|vyadha hana-being a hunter; haya-is; pujya-worshipable;

>|bhagavata-uttama-the best of the devotees.

2409|TRANSLATION

2410|"The words krsnaramas ca refer to one who takes pleasure

>|in thinking of Krsna. Even though such a person may be a

>|hunter, he is still worshipable and is the best of devotees.

2411|Madhya 24.229

2412|TEXT 229

2413|TEXT

2414|eka bhakta-vyadhera katha suna savadhane

2415|yaha haite haya sat-sanga-mahimara jnane

2416|SYNONYMS

2417|eka bhakta-vyadhera-one devotee who was a hunter; katha-

>|narration; suna-please hear; savadhane-with attention; yaha

>|haite-from which; haya-there is; sat-sanga-mahimara jnane-

>|knowledge of the greatness of association with a great

>|devotee.

2418|TRANSLATION

2419|"I shall now narrate the story of how the hunter became a

>|great devotee by the association of such an exalted

>|personality as Narada Muni. From this story, one can

>|understand the greatness of association with pure devotees.

2420|Madhya 24.230

2421|TEXT 230

2422|TEXT

2423|eka dina sri-narada dekhi' narayana

2424|triveni-snane prayaga karila gamana

2425|SYNONYMS

2426|eka dina-one day; sri-narada-the great saintly person

>|Narada; dekhi' narayana-after visiting Lord Narayana; tri-

>|veni-snane-to bathe at the confluence of the Ganges, Yamuna

>|and Sarasvati rivers; prayaga-to Prayaga; karila gamana-

>|went.

2427|TRANSLATION

2428|"Once upon a time the great saint Narada, after visiting

>|Lord Narayana in the Vaikunthas, went to Prayaga to bathe

>|at the confluence of three rivers-the Ganges, Yamuna and

>|Sarasvati.

2429|PURPORT

2430|The great saint Narada is so liberated that he can go to

>|the Vaikuntha planets to see Narayana and then immediately

>|come to this planet in the material world and go to Prayaga

>|to bathe in the confluence of three rivers. The word tri-

>|veni refers to a confluence of three rivers. This

>|confluence is still visited by many hundreds of thousands

>|of people who go there to bathe, especially during the

>|month of January (

>|Magha-mela). A liberated person who has no material body

>|can go anywhere and everywhere; therefore a living entity

>|is called sarva-ga, which indicates that he can go anywhere

>|and everywhere. Presently scientists are trying to go to

>|other planets, but due to their material bodies, they are

>|not free to move at will. However, when one is situated in

>|his original spiritual body, he can move anywhere and

>|everywhere without difficulty. Within this material world

>|there is a planet called Siddhaloka, whose inhabitants can

>|go from one planet to another without the aid of a machine

>|or space rocket. In the material world every planet has a

>|specific advantage (vibhuti-bhinna). In the spiritual world,

>| however, all the planets and their inhabitants are

>|composed of spiritual energy. Because there are no material

>|impediments, it is said that everything in the spiritual

>|world is one.

2431|Madhya 24.231

2432|TEXT 231

2433|TEXT

2434|vana-pathe dekhe mrga ache bhume padi'

2435|bana-viddha bhagna-pada kare dhad-phadi

2436|SYNONYMS

2437|vana-pathe-on the forest path; dekhe-saw; mrga-deer; ache-

>|there was; bhume padi'-lying on the ground; bana-viddha-

>|pierced by an arrow; bhagna-pada-broken legs; kare dhad-

>|phadi-twisting with pain.

2438|TRANSLATION

2439|"Narada Muni saw that a deer was lying on the path through

>|the forest and that it was pierced by an arrow. It had

>|broken legs and was twisting due to much pain.

2440|Madhya 24.232

2441|TEXT 232

2442|TEXT

2443|ara kata-dure eka dekhena sukara

2444|taiche viddha bhagna-pada kare dhad-phada

2445|SYNONYMS

2446|ara kata-dure-still farther along; eka-one; dekhena-sees;

>|sukara-a boar; taiche-similarly; viddha-pierced; bhagna-

>|pada-broken legs; kare dhad-phada-twists in pain.

2447|TRANSLATION

2448|"Farther ahead, Narada Muni saw a boar pierced by an arrow.

>|Its legs were also broken, and it was twisting in pain.

2449|Madhya 24.233

2450|TEXT 233

2451|TEXT

2452|aiche eka sasaka dekhe ara kata-dure

2453|jivera duhkha dekhi' narada vyakula-antare

2454|SYNONYMS

2455|aiche-similarly; eka sasaka-one rabbit; dekhe-he sees; ara

>|kata-dure-still farther ahead; jivera-of the living entity;

>|duhkha dekhi'-seeing such horrible miseries; narada-the

>|great saintly person; vyakula-antare-very pained

>|within himself.

2456|TRANSLATION

2457|"When he went farther, he saw a rabbit that was also

>|suffering. Narada Muni was greatly pained at heart to see

>|living entities suffer so.

2458|Madhya 24.234

2459|TEXT 234

2460|TEXT

2461|kata-dure dekhe vyadha vrkse onta hana

2462|mrga maribare ache bana yudiya

2463|SYNONYMS

2464|kata-dure-somewhat farther; dekhe-Narada Muni saw; vyadha-

>|the hunter; vrkse onta hana-hiding behind a tree; mrga

>|maribare-to kill the animals; ache-was there; bana yudiya-

>|with arrows in the hand.

2465|TRANSLATION

2466|"When Narada Muni advanced farther, he saw a hunter behind

>|a tree. This hunter was holding arrows, and he was ready to

>|kill more animals.

2467|Madhya 24.235

2468|TEXT 235

2469|TEXT

2470|syama-varna rakta-netra maha-bhayankara

2471|dhanur-bana haste,-yena yama danda-dhara

2472|SYNONYMS

2473|syama-varna-blackish color; rakta-netra-reddish eyes; maha-

>|bhayankara-very fearful bodily features; dhanuh-bana haste-

>|with arrows and bow in hand; yena yama danda-dhara-exactly

>|like the superintendent of death, Yamaraja.

2474|TRANSLATION

2475|"The hunter's body was blackish. He had reddish eyes, and

>|he appeared fierce. It was as if the superintendent of

>|death, Yamaraja, was standing there with bows and

>|arrows in his hands.

2476|Madhya 24.236

2477|TEXT 236

2478|TEXT

2479|patha chadi' narada tara nikate calila

2480|narade dekhi' mrga saba palana gela

2481|SYNONYMS

2482|patha chadi'-leaving aside the path; narada-the saintly

>|person Narada; tara nikate-near him; calila-went; narade

>|dekhi'-seeing Narada; mrga-the animals; saba-all; palana

>|gela-left, running away.

2483|TRANSLATION

2484|"When Narada Muni left the forest path and went to the

>|hunter, all the animals immediately saw him and fled.

2485|Madhya 24.237

2486|TEXT 237

2487|TEXT

2488|kruddha hana vyadha tanre gali dite caya

2489|narada-prabhave mukhe gali nahi aya

2490|SYNONYMS

2491|kruddha hana-being very angry; vyadha-the hunter; tanre-him;

>| gali dite caya-wanted to abuse; narada-prabhave-by the

>|influence of Narada; mukhe-in the mouth; gali-abusive

>|language; nahi aya-did not come.

2492|TRANSLATION

2493|"When all the animals fled, the hunter wanted to chastise

>|Narada with abusive language, but due to Narada's presence,

>|he could not utter anything abusive.

2494|Madhya 24.238

2495|TEXT 238

2496|TEXT

2497|"gosani, prayana-patha chadi' kene aila

2498|toma dekhi' mora laksya mrga palaila"

2499|SYNONYMS

2500|gosani-O great saintly person; prayana-patha chadi'-leaving

>|aside the general path; kene-why; aila-have you come; toma

>|dekhi'-seeing you; mora laksya-my targets; mrga-the animals;

>| palaila-fled.

2501|TRANSLATION

2502|"The hunter addressed Narada Muni: 'O gosvami! O great

>|saintly person! Why have you left the general path through

>|the forest to come to me? Simply by seeing you, all the

>|animals I was hunting have now fled.'

2503|Madhya 24.239

2504|TEXT 239

2505|TEXT

2506|narada kahe,-"patha bhuli' ailana puchite

2507|mane eka samsaya haya, taha khandaite

2508|SYNONYMS

2509|narada kahe-Narada Muni replied; patha bhuli'-leaving the

>|general path; ailana-I have come; puchite-to inquire from

>|you; mane-in my mind; eka-one; samsaya haya-there is a

>|doubt; taha-that; khandaite-to cause to break.

2510|TRANSLATION

2511|"Narada Muni replied, 'Leaving the path, I have come to you

>|to settle a doubt that is in my mind.

2512|Madhya 24.240

2513|TEXT 240

2514|TEXT

2515|pathe ye sukara-mrga, jani tomara haya"

2516|vyadha kahe,-"yei kaha, sei ta' niscaya"

2517|SYNONYMS

2518|pathe-on the path; ye-those; sukara-mrga-boars and other

>|animals; jani-I can understand; tomara haya-all belong to

>|you; vyadha kahe-the hunter replied; yei kaha-whatever you

>|are saying; sei ta' niscaya-it is a fact.

2519|TRANSLATION

2520|" 'I was wondering whether all the boars and other animals

>|that are half-killed belong to you .' The hunter replied, '

>|Yes, what you are saying is so.'

2521|Madhya 24.241

2522|TEXT 241

2523|TEXT

2524|narada kahe,-"yadi jive mara' tumi bana

2525|ardha-mara kara kene, na lao parana?"

2526|SYNONYMS

2527|narada kahe-Narada Muni said; yadi-if; jive-in the animals;

>|mara'-pierce; tumi-you; bana-your arrows; ardha-mara kara-

>|you half-kill; kene-why; na lao parana-don't you take their

>|lives completely.

2528|TRANSLATION

2529|"Narada Muni then inquired, 'Why did you not kill the

>|animals completely? Why did you half-kill them by piercing

>|their bodies with arrows?'

2530|Madhya 24.242

2531|TEXT 242

2532|TEXT

2533|vyadha kahe,-"suna, gosani, 'mrgari' mora nama

2534|pitara siksate ami kari aiche kama

2535|SYNONYMS

2536|vyadha kahe-the hunter replied; suna-please hear; gosani-O

>|great saintly person; mrga-ari-the enemy of the animals;

>|mora nama-my name; pitara siksate-by the teaching of my

>|father; ami-I; kari-do; aiche kama-such acts.

2537|TRANSLATION

2538|"The hunter replied, 'My dear saintly person, my name is

>|Mrgari, enemy of animals. My father taught me to kill them

>|in that way.

2539|Madhya 24.243

2540|TEXT 243

2541|TEXT

2542|ardha-mara jiva yadi dhad-phada kare

2543|tabe ta' ananda mora badaye antare"

2544|SYNONYMS

2545|ardha-mara jiva-half-killed living beings; yadi-if; dhad-

>|phada kare-twist and turn because of suffering; tabe-then;

>|ta'-certainly; ananda-pleasure; mora-my; badaye antare-

>|increases within.

2546|TRANSLATION

2547|" 'When I see half-killed animals suffer, I feel great

>|pleasure.'

2548|Madhya 24.244

2549|TEXT 244

2550|TEXT

2551|narada kahe,-'eka-vastu magi tomara sthane'

2552|vyadha kahe,-"mrgadi laha, yei tomara mane

2553|SYNONYMS

2554|narada kahe-Narada Muni said; eka-vastu magi-I wish to beg

>|one thing; tomara sthane-from you; vyadha kahe-the hunter

>|replied; mrga-adi laha-take some of the hunted animals; yei

>|tomara mane-whatever you like.

2555|TRANSLATION

2556|"Narada Muni then told the hunter, 'I have one thing to beg

>|of you.' The hunter replied, 'You may take whatever animals

>|or anything else you would like.

2557|Madhya 24.245

2558|TEXT 245

2559|TEXT

2560|mrga-chala caha yadi, aisa mora ghare

2561|yei caha taha diba mrga-vyaghrambare"

2562|SYNONYMS

2563|mrga-chala-deerskin; caha yadi-if you want; aisa mora ghare-

>|come to my place; yei caha-whatever you want; taha-that;

>|diba-I shall give; mrga-vyaghra-ambare-whether a deerskin

>|or a tiger skin.

2564|TRANSLATION

2565|" 'I have many skins if you would like them. I shall give

>|you either a deerskin or a tiger skin.'

2566|Madhya 24.246

2567|TEXT 246

2568|TEXT

2569|narada kahe,-"iha ami kichu nahi cahi

2570|ara eka-dana ami magi toma-thani

2571|SYNONYMS

2572|narada kahe-Narada Muni said; iha-this; ami kichu nahi cahi-

>|I don't want any; ara-another; eka-dana-one charity; ami-I;

>|magi-beg; toma-thani-from you.

2573|TRANSLATION

2574|"Narada Muni said, 'I do not want any of the skins. I am

>|only asking one thing from you in charity.

2575|Madhya 24.247

2576|TEXT 247

2577|TEXT

2578|kali haite tumi yei mrgadi mariba

2579|prathamei mariba, ardha-mara na kariba"

2580|SYNONYMS

2581|kali haite-from tomorrow; tumi-you; yei-whatever; mrga-adi-

>|animals; mariba-you will kill; prathamei mariba-kill them

>|in the beginning; ardha-mara-half-killing; na kariba-do not

>|do.

2582|TRANSLATION

2583|" 'I beg you that from this day on you will kill animals

>|completely and not leave them half-dead.'

2584|Madhya 24.248

2585|TEXT 248

2586|TEXT

2587|vyadha kahe,-"kiba dana magila amare

2588|ardha marile kiba haya, taha kaha more"

2589|SYNONYMS

2590|vyadha kahe-the hunter replied; kiba dana-what kind of

>|charity; magila amare-have you begged from me; ardha marile-

>|in half-killing; kiba-what; haya-there is; taha-that; kaha

>|more-kindly explain to me.

2591|TRANSLATION

2592|"The hunter replied, 'My dear sir, what are you asking of

>|me? What is wrong with the animals' lying there half-killed?

>| Will you please explain this to me?'

2593|Madhya 24.249

2594|TEXT 249

2595|TEXT

2596|narada kahe,-"ardha marile jiva paya vyatha

2597|jive duhkha ditecha, tomara ha-ibe aiche avastha

2598|SYNONYMS

2599|narada kahe-Narada Muni replied; ardha marile-by half-

>|killing the animals; jiva paya vyatha-the living beings

>|suffer too much pain; jive duhkha ditecha-you are giving

>|troubles to the living beings; tomara-your; ha-ibe-there

>|will be; aiche avastha-the same suffering in retaliation.

2600|TRANSLATION

2601|"Narada Muni replied, 'If you leave the animals half-dead,

>|you are purposefully giving them pain. Therefore you will

>|have to suffer in retaliation.'

2602|PURPORT

2603|This is an authoritative statement given by the greatest

>|authority, Narada Muni. If one gives another living entity

>|unnecessary pain, one will certainly be punished by the

>|laws of nature by a similar pain. Although the hunter

>|Mrgari was uncivilized, he still had to suffer the results

>|of his sinful activities. However, if a civilized man kills

>|animals regularly in a slaughterhouse to maintain his so-

>|called civilization, using scientific methods and machines

>|to kill animals, one cannot even estimate the suffering

>|awaiting him. So-called civilized people consider

>|themselves very advanced in education, but they do not know

>|about the stringent laws of nature. According to nature's

>|law, it is a life for a life. We can hardly imagine the

>|sufferings of one who maintains a slaughterhouse. He

>|endures suffering not only in this life, but in his next

>|life also. It is said that a hunter, murderer or killer is

>|advised not to live and not to die. If he lives, he

>|accumulates even more sins, which bring about more

>|suffering in a future life. He is advised not to die

>|because his dying means that he immediately begins to

>|endure more suffering. Therefore he is advised not to live

>|and not to die.

2604|As followers of the Vedic principles, we accept the

>|statements of Narada Muni in this regard. It is our duty to

>|see that no one suffers due to sinful activities. Foolish

>|rascals are described in Bhagavad-gita as mayayapahrta-

>|jnanah , which indicates that although they are

>|superficially educated, maya has taken their real knowledge

>|away. Such people are presently leading human society. In

>|Srimad-Bhagavatam they are also described as andha

>|yathandhair upaniyamanah . These rascals are

>|themselves blind, and yet they are leading others who are

>|blind. When people follow such leaders, they suffer

>|unlimited pains in the future. Despite so-called

>|advancement, all this is happening. Who is safe? Who is

>|happy? Who is without anxiety?

2605|Madhya 24.250

2606|TEXT 250

2607|TEXT

2608|vyadha tumi, jiva mara-'alpa' aparadha tomara

2609|kadarthana diya mara'-e papa 'apara'

2610|SYNONYMS

2611|vyadha tumi-you are a hunter; jiva mara-your occupation is

>|to kill animals; alpa-slight; aparadha-offense; tomara-your;

>| kadarthana diya-unnecessarily giving them pain; mara'-when

>|you kill; e papa apara-this sinful activity is unlimited.

2612|TRANSLATION

2613|"Narada Muni continued, 'My dear hunter, your business is

>|killing animals. That is a slight offense on your part, but

>|when you consciously give them unnecessary pain by leaving

>|them half-dead, you incur very great sins.'

2614|PURPORT

2615|This is another good instruction to animal killers. There

>|are always animal killers and animal eaters in human

>|society because less civilized people are accustomed to

>|eating meat. In Vedic civilization, meat-eaters are

>|advised to kill an animal for the goddess Kali or a similar

>|demigod. This is in order not to give the animal

>|unnecessary pain, as slaughterhouses do. In the balidana

>| sacrifice to a demigod, it is recommended to cut the

>|throat of an animal with one slice. This should be done on

>|a dark-moon night, and the painful noises expressed by the

>|animal at the time of being slaughtered are not to be heard

>|by anyone. There are also many other restrictions.

>|Slaughter is only allowed once a month, and the killer

>|of the animal has to suffer similar pains in his next life.

>|At the present moment, so-called civilized men do not

>|sacrifice animals to a deity in a religious or ritualistic

>|way. They openly kill animals daily by the thousands for no

>|purpose other than the satisfaction of the tongue. Because

>|of this the entire world is suffering in so many ways.

>|Politicians are unnecessarily declaring war, and ,

>|according to the stringent laws of material nature,

>|massacres are taking place between nations.

2616|prakrteh kriyamanani

2617|gunaih karmani sarvasah

2618|ahankara

>|-

>|vimudhatma

2619|kartaham iti manyate

2620|"The bewildered spirit soul, under the influence of the

>|three modes of material nature, thinks himself to be the

>|doer of activities, which are in actuality carried out by

>|nature." (Bg. 3.27) The laws of prakrti (nature) are very

>|stringent. No one should think that he has the freedom to

>|kill animals and not suffer the consequences. One cannot be

>|safe by doing this. Narada Muni herein says that animal

>|killing is offensive, especially when animals are given

>|unnecessary pain. Meat-eaters and animal killers are

>|advised not to purchase meat from the slaughterhouse. They

>|can worship Kali once a month, kill some unimportant animal

>|and eat it. Even by following this method, one is still an

>|offender.

2621|Madhya 24.251

2622|TEXT 251

2623|TEXT

2624|kadarthiya tumi yata marila jivere

2625|tara taiche toma maribe janma-janmantare"

2626|SYNONYMS

2627|kadarthiya-giving unnecessary pangs; tumi-you; yata-all;

>|marila-killed; jivere-the living entities; tara-all of them;

>| taiche-similarly; toma-you; maribe-will kill; janma-janma-

>|antare-life after life.

2628|TRANSLATION

2629|"Narada Muni continued, 'All the animals that you have

>|killed and given unnecessary pain will kill you one after

>|the other in your next life and in life after life.'

2630|PURPORT

2631|This is another authoritative statement made by the great

>|sage Narada. Those who kill animals and give them

>|unnecessary pain-as people do in slaughterhouses-will be

>|killed in a similar way in the next life and in many lives

>|to come. One can never be excused from such an offense. If

>|one kills many thousands of animals in a professional way

>|so that other people can purchase the meat to eat, one must

>|be ready to be killed in a similar way in his next life and

>|in life after life. There are many rascals who violate

>|their own religious principles. According to Judeo-

>|Christian scriptures, it is clearly said, "Thou shalt not

>|kill." Nonetheless, giving all kinds of excuses, even the

>|heads of religions indulge in killing animals while trying

>|to pass as saintly persons. This mockery and hypocrisy in

>|human society bring about unlimited calamities; therefore

>|occasionally there are great wars. Masses of such people go

>|out onto battlefields and kill themselves. Presently they

>|have discovered the atomic bomb, which is simply awaiting

>| wholesale destruction. If people want to be

>|saved from the killing business life after life, they must

>|take to Krsna consciousness and cease sinful activity. The

>|International Society for Krishna Consciousness recommends

>|that everyone abandon meat-eating, illicit sex,

>|intoxication and gambling. When one gives up these sinful

>|activities, he can understand Krsna and take to this Krsna

>|consciousness movement. We therefore request everyone to

>|abandon sinful activity and chant the Hare Krsna mantra. In

>|this way people can save themselves from repeated birth and

>|death

>|.

2632|Madhya 24.252

2633|TEXT 252

2634|TEXT

2635|narada-sange vyadhera mana parasanna ha-ila

2636|tanra vakya suni' mane bhaya upajila

2637|SYNONYMS

2638|narada-sange-in the association of the great sage Narada

>|Muni; vyadhera-of the hunter; mana-the mind; parasanna ha-

>|ila-became cleansed and satisfied; tanra-his; vakya-words;

>|suni'-hearing; mane-in the mind; bhaya upajila-some fear

>|arose.

2639|TRANSLATION

2640|"In this way, through the association of the great sage

>|Narada Muni, the hunter was a little convinced of his

>|sinful activity. He therefore became somewhat afraid due to

>|his offenses.

2641|PURPORT

2642|This is the effect of associating with a pure devotee. Our

>|preachers who are preaching Krsna consciousness all over

>|the world should follow in the footsteps of Narada Muni and

>|become purified by following the four principles and

>|chanting the Hare Krsna maha-mantra. This will make them

>|fit to become Vaisnavas. Then, when they speak to sinful

>|people about the teachings of this Krsna consciousness

>|movement, people will be affected and take the instructions.

>| We receive instructions in devotional service through the

>|disciplic succession. Narada Muni is our original guru

>|because he is the spiritual master of Vyasadeva. Vyasadeva

>|is the spiritual master of our disciplic succession;

>|therefore we should follow in the footsteps of Narada Muni

>|and become pure Vaisnavas. A pure Vaisnava is one who has

>|no ulterior motive. He has totally dedicated himself to the

>|service of the Lord. He does not have material desires, and

>|he is not interested in so-called learning and

>|philanthropic work. The so-called learned scholars and

>|philanthropists are actually karmis and jnanis, and some

>|are actually misers engaged in sinful activity. All are

>|condemned because they are not devotees of Lord Krsna.

2643|This is a chance to become purified by associating

>|with this Krsna consciousness movement and strictly

>|following the rules and regulations. By chanting the Hare

>|Krsna maha-mantra, one can become free from all

>|contamination, especially contamination brought about by

>|the killing of animals. Lord Krsna Himself requested:

2644|sarva-dharman parityajya

2645|mam ekam saranam vraja

2646|aham tvam sarva- papebhyo

2647|moksayisyami ma sucah

2648|"Abandon all varieties of religion and just surrender unto

>|Me. I shall deliver you from all sinful reaction. Do not

>|fear." (Bg. 18.66)

2649|We should take this instruction from Krsna and follow in

>|the footsteps of Narada Muni in the disciplic succession.

>|If we simply surrender unto Krsna's lotus feet and take

>|this Krsna consciousness movement seriously, we can be

>|freed from the karma incurred by sin. If we are intelligent

>|enough, we shall engage in the loving service of the Lord.

>|Then our lives will be successful, and we shall not have to

>|suffer like the hunter life after life. By killing animals,

>|not only will we be bereft of the human form but we will

>|have to take an animal form and somehow or other be killed

>|by the same type of animal we have killed. This is the law

>|of nature. The Sanskrit word mamsa means "meat." It is said:

>| mam sah khadati iti mamsah. That is, "I am now eating the

>|flesh of an animal who will some day in the future be

>|eating my flesh."

2650|Madhya 24.253

2651|TEXT 253

2652|TEXT

2653|vyadha kahe,-"balya haite ei amara karma

2654|kemane tarimu muni pamara adhama?

2655|SYNONYMS

2656|vyadha kahe-the hunter said; balya haite-from the very

>|beginning of my childhood; ei amara karma-I have been

>|taught this business (half-killing animals); kemane-how;

>|tarimu-shall become free from these sinful activities; muni-

>|I; pamara adhama-sinful and misled.

2657|TRANSLATION

2658|"The hunter then admitted that he was convinced of his

>|sinful activity, and he said, 'I have been taught this

>|business from my very childhood. Now I am wondering how I

>|can become freed from these unlimited volumes of sinful

>|activity.'

2659|This kind of admission is very beneficial as long as one

>|does not again commit sin. Cheating and hypocrisy are not

>|tolerated by higher authorities. If one understands what

>|sin is, he should give it up with sincerity and regret and

>|surrender unto the lotus feet of the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead through His agent, the pure devotee. In this way,

>|one can be freed from the reactions of sin and make

>|progress in devotional service. However, if one continues

>|committing sins after making some atonement, he will not be

>|saved. In the sastras, such atonement is compared to an

>|elephant's bathing. An elephant takes a very good bath and

>|cleanses its body very nicely, but as soon as it comes out

>|of the water, it picks up some dust on the shore and throws

>|it all over its body. Atonement may be carried out very

>|nicely, but it will not help a person if he continues

>|committing sins. Therefore the hunter first admitted his

>|sinful activity before the saintly person Narada and then

>|asked how he could be saved.

2660|Madhya 24.254

2661|TEXT 254

2662|TEXT

2663|ei papa yaya mora, kemana upaye?

2664|nistara karaha more, padon tomara paye"

2665|SYNONYMS

2666|ei-this; papa yaya mora-sinful reaction of my life can be

>|washed off; kemana upaye-by what means; nistara karaha more-

>|kindly deliver me; padon-I fall down; tomara paye-at your

>|lotus feet.

2667|TRANSLATION

2668|"The hunter continued, 'My dear sir, please tell me how I

>|can be relieved from the reactions of my sinful life. Now I

>|fully surrender unto you and fall down at your lotus feet.

>|Please deliver me from sinful reactions.'

2669|PURPORT

2670|By the grace of Narada Muni, the hunter came to his good

>|senses and immediately surrendered unto the saint's lotus

>|feet. This is the process. By associating with a saintly

>|person, one is able to understand the reactions of his

>|sinful life. When one voluntarily surrenders to a saintly

>|person who is a representative of Krsna and follows his

>|instructions, one can become freed from sinful reaction.

>|Krsna demands the surrender of a sinful man, and Krsna's

>|representative gives the same instructions. The

>|representative of Krsna never tells his disciple, "

>|Surrender unto me." Rather he says, "Surrender unto Krsna."

>|If the disciple accepts this principle and surrenders

>|himself through the representative of Krsna, his life is

>|saved.

2671|Madhya 24.255

2672|TEXT 255

2673|TEXT

2674|narada kahe,-'yadi dhara amara vacana

2675|tabe se karite pari tomara mocana'

2676|SYNONYMS

2677|narada kahe-Narada Muni replied; yadi dhara-if you accept;

>|amara vacana-my instruction; tabe-then; se-this; karite

>|pari-I can do; tomara-your; mocana-liberation.

2678|TRANSLATION

2679|"Narada Muni assured the hunter, 'If you listen to my

>|instructions, I shall find the way you can be liberated.'

2680|PURPORT

2681|Gaurangera bhakta-gane jane jane sakti dhare. The purport

>|of this song is that the devotees of Lord Sri Caitanya

>|Mahaprabhu are very powerful, and each and every one of

>|them can deliver the whole world. What, then, to speak of

>|Narada Muni? If one follows the instructions of Narada Muni,

>| one can be delivered from any amount of sinful reactions.

>|This is the process. One must follow the instructions of a

>|spiritual master; then one will certainly be delivered from

>|all sinful reaction. This is the secret of success. Yasya

>|deve para bhaktir yatha deve tatha gurau . If one

>|has unflinching faith in Krsna and the spiritual master,

>|the result is tasyaite kathita hy arthah prakasante

>|mahatmanah: all the conclusions of revealed scriptures

>|will be open to such a person. A pure devotee of Krsna can

>|make the same demands that Narada Muni is making. He says, "

>|If you follow my instructions, I shall take responsibility

>|for your liberation." A pure devotee like Narada can give

>|assurance to any sinful man because by the grace of the

>|Lord such a devotee is empowered to deliver any sinful

>|person if that person follows the principles set forth.

2682|Madhya 24.256

2683|TEXT 256

2684|TEXT

2685|vyadha kahe,-'yei kaha, sei ta' kariba'

2686|narada kahe,-'dhanuka bhanga, tabe se kahiba'

2687|SYNONYMS

2688|vyadha kahe-the hunter replied; yei kaha-whatever you say;

>|sei ta' kariba-that I shall do; narada kahe-Narada Muni

>|replied; dhanuka bhanga-break your bow; tabe-then; se

>|kahiba-I shall speak to you.

2689|TRANSLATION

2690|"The hunter then said, 'My dear sir, whatever you say I

>|shall do.' Narada immediately ordered him, 'First of all,

>|break your bow. Then I shall tell you what is to be done.'

2691|PURPORT

2692|This is the process of initiation. The disciple must admit

>|that he will no longer commit sinful activity-namely

>|illicit sex, meat-eating, gambling and intoxication. He

>|promises to execute the order of the spiritual master. Then

>|the spiritual master takes care of him and elevates him to

>|spiritual emancipation.

2693|Madhya 24.257

2694|TEXT 257

2695|TEXT

2696|vyadha kahe,-'dhanuka bhangile vartiba kemane?'

2697|narada kahe,-'ami anna diba prati-dine'

2698|SYNONYMS

2699|vyadha kahe-the hunter replied; dhanuka bhangile-if I break

>|my bow; vartiba kemane-what will be the source of my

>|maintenance; narada kahe-Narada Muni replied; ami-I; anna-

>|food; diba-shall supply; prati-dine-every day.

2700|TRANSLATION

2701|"The hunter replied, 'If I break my bow, how shall I

>|maintain myself?' Narada Muni replied, 'Do not worry. I

>|shall supply all your food every day.'

2702|PURPORT

2703|The source of our income is not actually the source of our

>|maintenance. Every living being-from the great Brahma down

>|to an insignificant ant-is being maintained by the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead. Eko bahunam yo vidadhati kaman. The

>|one Supreme Being, Krsna, maintains everyone. Our so-called

>|source of income is our own choice only. If I wish to be a

>|hunter, it will appear that hunting is the source of my

>|income. If I become a brahmana and completely depend

>|on Krsna, I do not conduct a business, but nonetheless my

>|maintenance is supplied by Krsna. The hunter was disturbed

>|about breaking his bow because he was worried about his

>|income. Narada Muni assured the hunter because he knew that

>|the hunter was not being maintained by the bow but by Krsna.

>| Being the agent of Krsna, Narada Muni knew very well that

>|the hunter would not suffer by breaking the bow. There was

>|no doubt that Krsna would supply him food.

2704|Madhya 24.258

2705|TEXT 258

2706|TEXT

2707|dhanuka bhangi' vyadha tanra carane padila

2708|tare uthana narada upadesa kaila

2709|SYNONYMS

2710|dhanuka bhangi'-breaking the bow; vyadha-the hunter; tanra-

>|his (Narada Muni's); carane-at the lotus feet; padila-

>|surrendered; tare-him; uthana-raising; narada-the great

>|saint Narada Muni; upadesa kaila-gave instruction.

2711|TRANSLATION

2712|"Being thus assured by the great sage Narada Muni, the

>|hunter broke his bow, immediately fell down at the saint's

>|lotus feet and fully surrendered. After this, Narada Muni

>|raised him with his hand and gave him instructions for

>|spiritual advancement.

2713|PURPORT

2714|This is the process of initiation. The disciple must

>|surrender to the spiritual master, the representative of

>|Krsna. The spiritual master, being in the disciplic

>|succession stemming from Narada Muni, is in the same

>|category with Narada Muni. A person can be relieved from

>|his sinful activity if he surrenders to the lotus feet of a

>|person who actually represents Narada Muni. Narada Muni

>|gave instructions to the hunter after the hunter

>|surrendered.

2715|Madhya 24.259

2716|TEXT 259

2717|TEXT

2718|"ghare giya brahmane deha' yata ache dhana

2719|eka eka vastra pari' bahira hao dui-jana

2720|SYNONYMS

2721|ghare giya-returning home; brahmane-to the brahmanas, the

>|most intelligent men in spiritual understanding; deha'-give;

>| yata-whatever; ache-you have; dhana-riches; eka eka-each

>|of you; vastra pari'-just one cloth; bahira hao-leave home;

>|dui-jana-both of you.

2722|TRANSLATION

2723|"Narada Muni then advised the hunter, 'Return home and

>|distribute whatever riches you have to the pure brahmanas

>|who know the Absolute Truth. After distributing

>| all your riches to the brahmanas, both you and

>|your wife should leave home, taking only one

>|cloth to wear.'

2724|PURPORT

2725|This is the process of renunciation at the stage of

>|vanaprastha. After enjoying householder life for some time,

>|the husband and wife must leave home and distribute their

>|riches to brahmanas and Vaisnavas. One can keep his wife as

>|an assistant in the vanaprastha stage. The idea is that the

>|wife will assist the husband in spiritual advancement.

>|Therefore Narada Muni advised the hunter to adopt the

>|vanaprastha stage and leave home. It is not that a grhastha

>|should live at home until he dies. Vanaprastha is

>|preliminary to sannyasa. In the Krsna consciousness

>|movement there are many young couples engaged in the Lord's

>|service. Eventually they are supposed to take vanaprastha,

>|and after the vanaprastha stage the husband may take

>|sannyasa in order to preach. The wife may then remain alone

>|and serve the Deity or engage in other activities within

>|the Krsna consciousness movement.

2726|Madhya 24.260

2727|TEXT 260

2728|TEXT

2729|nadi-tire eka-khani kutira kariya

2730|tara age eka-pindi tulasi ropiya

2731|SYNONYMS

2732|nadi-tire-on the bank of the river; eka-khani-just one;

>|kutira-a cottage; kariya-constructing; tara age-just in

>|front of the cottage; eka-pindi-one raised platform; tulasi-

>|a tulasi plant; ropiya-growing.

2733|TRANSLATION

2734|"Narada Muni continued, 'Leave your home and go to the

>|river. There you should construct a small cottage, and in

>|front of the cottage you should grow a tulasi plant on a

>|raised platform.

2735|Madhya 24.261

2736|TEXT 261

2737|TEXT

2738|tulasi-parikrama kara, tulasi-sevana

2739|nirantara krsna-nama kariha kirtana

2740|SYNONYMS

2741|tulasi-parikrama kara-circumambulate the tulasi plant;

>|tulasi-sevana-just supply water to the root of tulasi-devi;

>|nirantara-continuously; krsna-nama-the holy name of Krsna;

>|kariha-just perform; kirtana-chanting.

2742|TRANSLATION

2743|" 'After planting the tulasi tree before your house, you

>|should daily circumambulate that tulasi plant, serve her by

>|giving her water and other things, and continuously chant

>|the Hare Krsna maha-mantra.'

2744|PURPORT

2745|This is the beginning of spiritual life. After leaving

>|householder life, one may go to a holy place, such as the

>|bank of the Ganges or Yamuna, and erect a small cottage. A

>|small cottage can be constructed without any expenditure.

>|Four logs serving as pillars can be secured by any man from

>|the forest. The roof can be covered with leaves, and one

>|can cleanse the inside. Thus one can live very peacefully.

>|In any condition, any man can live in a small cottage,

>|plant a tulasi tree, water it in the morning, offer it

>|prayers, and continuously chant the Hare Krsna maha-mantra.

>|Thus one can make vigorous spiritual advancement. This is

>|not at all difficult. One simply has to follow the

>|instructions of the spiritual master strictly. Then

>|everything will be successful in due course of time. As far

>|as eating is concerned, there is no problem. If Krsna, the

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead, supplies everyone with

>|eatables, why should He not supply His devotee? Sometimes a

>|devotee will not even bother to construct a cottage. He

>|will simply go to live in a mountain cave. One may live in

>|a cave, in a cottage beside a river, in a palace or in a

>|big city like New York or London. In any case, a devotee

>|can follow the instructions of his spiritual master and

>|engage in devotional service by watering the tulasi plant

>|and chanting the Hare Krsna mantra. Taking the advice of

>|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu and our spiritual master,

>|Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Gosvami Maharaja, one can go to

>|any part of the world and instruct people to become

>|devotees of the Lord by following the regulative principles,

>| worshiping the tulasi plant and continuously chanting the

>|Hare Krsna maha-mantra.

2746|Madhya 24.262

2747|TEXT 262

2748|TEXT

2749|ami tomaya bahu anna pathaimu dine

2750|sei anna labe, yata khao dui-jane"

2751|SYNONYMS

2752|ami-I; tomaya-for you; bahu-much; anna-food; pathaimu-shall

>|send; dine-every day; sei-that; anna-food; labe-you shall

>|take; yata-whatever; khao-you can eat; dui-jane-both of you.

2753|TRANSLATION

2754|"Narada Muni continued, 'I shall send sufficient

>|food to you both every day. You can take as much food as

>|you want.'

2755|PURPORT

2756|When a person takes to Krsna consciousness, there is no

>|need to care for material necessities. Krsna says that

>| He personally carries all

>|the necessities

>|to

>|his devotees

>|.

2757|ananyas cintayanto mam

2758|ye janah paryupasate

2759|tesam nityabhiyuktanam

2760|yoga-ksemam vahamy aham

2761|"Those who worship Me with love and devotion, meditating on

>|My transcendental form-to them I carry what they lack and

>|preserve what they have." (Bg. 9.22) Why should one be

>|anxious about the necessities of life? The principle should

>|be that one should not want more than what is absolutely

>|necessary. Narada Muni advises the hunter to accept only

>|what is absolutely necessary for him and his wife. The

>|devotee should always be alert to consume only those things

>|that he absolutely requires and not create unnecessary

>|needs.

2762|Madhya 24.263

2763|TEXT 263

2764|TEXT

2765|tabe sei mrgadi tine narada sustha kaila

2766|sustha hana mrgadi tine dhana palaila

2767|SYNONYMS

2768|tabe-thereafter; sei-those; mrga-adi-animals, beginning

>|with the deer; tine-three; narada-the sage Narada; sustha

>|kaila-brought to their senses; sustha hana-coming to

>|consciousness; mrga-adi-the pierced animals; tine-three;

>|dhana palaila-very swiftly fled away from that place.

2769|TRANSLATION

2770|"The three animals that were half-killed were then brought

>|to their consciousness by the sage Narada. Indeed, the

>|animals got up and swiftly fled.

2771|Madhya 24.264

2772|TEXT 264

2773|TEXT

2774|dekhiya vyadhera mane haila camatkara

2775|ghare gela vyadha, guruke kari' namaskara

2776|SYNONYMS

2777|dekhiya-seeing; vyadhera-of the hunter; mane-in the mind;

>|haila-there was; camatkara-wonder; ghare-home; gela-went;

>|vyadha-the hunter; guruke-to the spiritual master; kari'

>|namaskara-offering obeisances.

2778|TRANSLATION

2779|"When the hunter saw the half-killed animals flee, he was

>|certainly struck with wonder. He then offered his

>|respectful obeisances to the sage Narada and returned home.

2780|Madhya 24.265

2781|TEXT 265

2782|TEXT

2783|yatha-sthane narada gela, vyadha ghare aila

2784|naradera upadese sakala karila

2785|SYNONYMS

2786|yatha-sthane-to the proper destination; narada-sage Narada;

>|gela-went; vyadha-the hunter; ghare aila-came back to his

>|house; naradera upadese-under the instruction of the sage

>|Narada; sakala karila-he executed everything.

2787|TRANSLATION

2788|"After all this, Narada Muni went to his destination. After

>|the hunter returned home, he exactly followed the

>|instructions of his spiritual master, Narada.

2789|PURPORT

2790|For spiritual advancement one must have a bona fide

>|spiritual master and follow his instructions in order to be

>|assured of advancement.

2791|Madhya 24.266

2792|TEXT 266

2793|TEXT

2794|grame dhvani haila,-vyadha 'vaisnava' ha-ila

2795|gramera loka saba anna anite lagila

2796|SYNONYMS

2797|grame-in the village; dhvani haila-there was news; vyadha-

>|the hunter; vaisnava ha-ila-has become a Vaisnava, a lover

>|and servitor of Lord Visnu; gramera loka-the villagers;

>|saba-all kinds of; anna-food; anite lagila-began to bring.

2798|TRANSLATION

2799|"The news that the hunter had become a Vaisnava spread all

>|over the village. Indeed, all the villagers brought alms

>|and presented them to the Vaisnava who was formerly a

>|hunter.

2800|PURPORT

2801|It is the duty of the public to present a gift to a saintly

>|person, Vaisnava or brahmana when going to see him. Every

>|Vaisnava is dependent on Krsna, and Krsna is ready to

>|supply all of life's necessities, provided a Vaisnava

>|follows the principles set forth by the spiritual master.

>|There are certainly many householders in our Krsna

>|consciousness movement. They join the movement and live in

>|the society's centers, but if they take advantage of this

>|opportunity and do not work but live at the expense of the

>|movement, eating prasada and simply sleeping, they place

>|themselves in a very dangerous position. It is therefore

>|advised that grhasthas should not live in the temple. They

>|must live outside the temple and maintain themselves. Of

>|course, if the grhasthas are fully engaged in the Lord's

>|service according to the directions of the authorities,

>|there is no harm in their living in a temple. In any case,

>|a temple should not be a place to eat and sleep. A temple

>|manager should be very careful about these things.

2802|Madhya 24.267

2803|TEXT 267

2804|TEXT

2805|eka-dina anna ane dasa-bisa jane

2806|dine tata laya, yata khaya dui jane

2807|SYNONYMS

2808|eka-dina-in one day; anna-food; ane-brought; dasa-bisa jane-

>|enough for ten to twenty men; dine-in a day; tata laya-

>|would accept only as much; yata-as; khaya dui jane-the two

>|of them required to eat.

2809|TRANSLATION

2810|"In one day enough food was brought for ten or twenty

>|people, but the hunter and his wife would accept only as

>|much as they could eat.

2811|Madhya 24.268

2812|TEXT 268

2813|TEXT

2814|eka-dina narada kahe,-"sunaha, parvate

2815|amara eka sisya ache, calaha dekhite"

2816|SYNONYMS

2817|eka-dina-one day; narada kahe-Narada Muni said; sunaha-

>|please hear; parvate-my dear Parvata; amara-my; eka-one;

>|sisya-disciple; ache-there is; calaha dekhite-let us go see.

2818|TRANSLATION

2819|"One day, while speaking to his friend Parvata Muni, Narada

>|Muni requested him to go with him to see his disciple the

>|hunter.

2820|Madhya 24.269

2821|TEXT 269

2822|TEXT

2823|tabe dui rsi aila sei vyadha-sthane

2824|dura haite vyadha paila gurura darasane

2825|SYNONYMS

2826|tabe-thereafter; dui rsi-two saintly persons; aila-came;

>|sei vyadha-sthane-to the place of that hunter; dura haite-

>|from a distant place; vyadha-the hunter; paila-got; gurura

>|darasane-vision of his spiritual master.

2827|TRANSLATION

2828|"When the saintly sages came to the hunter's place,

>|the hunter could see them coming from a distance.

2829|Madhya 24.270

2830|TEXT 270

2831|TEXT

2832|aste-vyaste dhana ase, patha nahi paya

2833|pathera pipilika iti-uti dhare paya

2834|SYNONYMS

2835|aste-vyaste-with great alacrity; dhana-running; ase-came;

>|patha nahi paya-does not get the path; pathera-on the path;

>|pipilika-ants; iti-uti-here and there; dhare paya-touch the

>|foot.

2836|TRANSLATION

2837|"With great alacrity the hunter began to run toward his

>|spiritual master, but he could not fall down and offer

>|obeisances because ants were running hither and thither

>|around his feet.

2838|Madhya 24.271

2839|TEXT 271

2840|TEXT

2841|dandavat-sthane pipilikare dekhiya

2842|vastre sthana jhadi' pade dandavat hana

2843|SYNONYMS

2844|dandavat-sthane-in the place where he wanted to offer his

>|obeisances; pipilikare dekhiya-seeing the ants; vastre-by

>|the cloth; sthana jhadi'-cleansing the place; pade danda-

>|vat hana-falls down flat like a rod.

2845|TRANSLATION

2846|"Seeing the ants, the hunter whisked them away with a piece

>|of cloth. After thus clearing the ants from the ground, he

>|fell down flat to offer his obeisances.

2847|PURPORT

2848|The word danda means "rod," and vat means "like." To offer

>|obeisances to the spiritual master, one must fall flat

>|exactly as a rod falls on the ground. This is the meaning

>|of the word dandavat.

2849|Madhya 24.272

2850|TEXT 272

2851|TEXT

2852|narada kahe,-"vyadha, ei na haya ascarya

2853|hari-bhaktye himsa-sunya haya sadhu-varya

2854|SYNONYMS

2855|narada kahe-Narada Muni said; vyadha-my dear hunter; ei na

>|ascarya-this is not wonderful for you; hari-bhaktye-by

>|advancement in devotional service; himsa-sunya haya-one

>|becomes nonviolent and nonenvious; sadhu-varya-thus one

>|becomes the best of honest gentlemen.

2856|TRANSLATION

2857|"Narada Muni said, 'My dear hunter, such behavior is not at

>|all astonishing. A man in devotional service is

>|automatically nonviolent. He is the best of gentlemen.

2858|PURPORT

2859|In this verse the word sadhu-varya means "the best of

>|gentlemen." At the present moment there are many so-called

>|gentlemen who are expert in killing animals and birds.

>|Nonetheless, these so-called gentlemen profess a type of

>|religion that strictly prohibits killing. According to

>|Narada Muni and Vedic culture, animal killers are not even

>|gentlemen, to say nothing of being religious men. A

>|religious person, a devotee of the Lord, must be nonviolent.

>| Such is the nature of a religious person. It is

>|contradictory to be violent and at the same time call

>|oneself a religious person. Such hypocrisy is not approved

>|by Narada Muni and the disciplic succession.

2860|Madhya 24.273

2861|TEXT 273

2862|TEXT

2863|ete na hy adbhuta vyadha

2864|tavahimsadayo gunah

2865|hari-bhaktau pravrtta ye

2866|na te syuh paratapinah

2867|SYNONYMS

2868|ete-all these; na-not; hi-certainly; adbhutah-wonderful;

>|vyadha-O hunter; tava-your; ahimsa-adayah-nonviolence and

>|others; gunah-qualities; hari-bhaktau-in devotional service;

>| pravrttah-engaged; ye-those who; na-not; te-they; syuh-are;

>| paratapinah -envious of other living entities.

2869|TRANSLATION

2870|" 'O hunter, good qualities like nonviolence, which you

>|have developed, are not very astonishing, for those engaged

>|in the Lord's devotional service are never inclined to give

>|pain to others because of envy.'

2871|PURPORT

2872|This is a quotation from the Skanda Purana.

2873|Madhya 24.274

2874|TEXT 274

2875|TEXT

2876|tabe sei vyadha donhare angane anila

2877|kusasana ani' donhare bhaktye vasaila

2878|SYNONYMS

2879|tabe-thereafter; sei-that; vyadha-hunter; donhare-both

>|Narada Muni and Parvata; angane anila-brought in the

>|courtyard of his house; kusa-asana ani'-bringing straw mats

>|for sitting; donhare-both of them; bhaktye-with great

>|devotion; vasaila-made to sit down.

2880|TRANSLATION

2881|"The hunter then received both the great sages in the

>|courtyard of his house. He spread out a straw mat for them

>|to sit upon, and with great devotion he begged them to sit

>|down.

2882|Madhya 24.275

2883|TEXT 275

2884|TEXT

2885|jala ani' bhaktye donhara pada praksalila

2886|sei jala stri-puruse piya sire la-ila

2887|SYNONYMS

2888|jala ani'-bringing water; bhaktye-with great devotion;

>|donhara-of both of them; pada praksalila-washed the feet;

>|sei jala-that water; stri-puruse-husband and wife; piya-

>|drinking; sire la-ila-put on their heads.

2889|TRANSLATION

2890|"He then fetched water and washed the sages' feet with

>|great devotion. Then both husband and wife drank that water

>|and sprinkled it on their heads.

2891|PURPORT

2892|This is the process one should follow when receiving the

>|spiritual master or someone on the level of the spiritual

>|master. When the spiritual master comes to the residence of

>|his disciples, the disciples should follow in the footsteps

>|of the former hunter. It doesn't matter what one was before

>|initiation. After initiation, one must learn the etiquette

>|mentioned herein.

2893|Madhya 24.276

2894|TEXT 276

2895|TEXT

2896|kampa-pulakasru haila krsna-nama gana

2897|urdhva bahu nrtya kare vastra udana

2898|SYNONYMS

2899|kampa-trembling; pulaka-asru-tears and jubilation; haila-

>|there were; krsna-nama gana-chanting the Hare Krsna mantra;

>|urdhva bahu-raising the arms; nrtya kare-began to dance;

>|vastra udana-waving his garments up and down.

2900|TRANSLATION

2901|"When the hunter chanted the Hare Krsna maha-mantra before

>|his spiritual master, his body trembled, and tears welled

>| in his eyes. Filled with ecstatic love, he raised his

>|hands and began to dance, waving his garments up and down.

2902|Madhya 24.277

2903|TEXT 277

2904|TEXT

2905|dekhiya vyadhera prema parvata-mahamuni

2906|naradere kahe,-tumi hao sparsa-mani

2907|SYNONYMS

2908|dekhiya-seeing; vyadhera-of the hunter; prema-the ecstatic

>|love; parvata-maha-muni-the great sage Parvata Muni;

>|naradere kahe-spoke to Narada Muni; tumi hao sparsa-mani-

>|you are certainly a touchstone.

2909|TRANSLATION

2910|"When Parvata Muni saw the ecstatic loving symptoms of the

>|hunter, he told Narada, 'Certainly you are a touchstone.'

2911|PURPORT

2912|When a touchstone touches iron, it turns the iron to gold.

>|Parvata Muni called Narada Muni a touchstone because by his

>|touch the hunter, who was lowest among men, became an

>|elevated and perfect Vaisnava. Srila Bhaktivinoda Thakura

>|said that the position of a Vaisnava can be tested by

>|seeing how good a touchstone he is-that is, by seeing how

>|many Vaisnavas he has made during his life. A Vaisnava

>|should be a touchstone so that he can convert others to

>|Vaisnavism by his preaching, even though people may be

>|fallen like the hunter. There are many so-called advanced

>|devotees who sit in a secluded place for their personal

>|benefit. They do not go out to preach and convert others

>|into Vaisnavas, and therefore they certainly cannot be

>|called sparsa-mani, advanced devotees. Kanistha-adhikari

>|devotees cannot turn others into Vaisnavas, but a madhyama-

>|adhikari Vaisnava can do so by preaching. Sri Caitanya

>|Mahaprabhu advised His followers to increase the numbers of

>|Vaisnavas.

2913|yare dekha, tare kaha 'krsna'-upadesa

2914|amara ajnaya guru hana tara' ei desa

2915|(Cc. Madhya 7.128)

2916|It is Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu's wish that everyone should

>|become a Vaisnava and guru. Following the instructions of

>|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu and His disciplic succession, one

>|can become a spiritual master, for the process is very easy.

>| One can go everywhere and anywhere to preach the

>|instructions of Krsna. Bhagavad-gita is Krsna's

>|instructions; therefore the duty of every Vaisnava is to

>|travel and preach Bhagavad-gita, either in his country

>|or a foreign country. This is the test of sparsa-mani,

>|following in the footsteps of Narada Muni.

2917|Madhya 24.278

2918|TEXT 278

2919|TEXT

2920|"aho dhanyo 'si devarse

2921|krpaya yasya tat-ksanat

2922|nico 'py utpulako lebhe

2923|lubdhako ratim acyute"

2924|SYNONYMS

2925|aho-oh; dhanyah-glorified; asi-you are; deva-rse-O sage

>|among the demigods; krpaya-by the mercy; yasya-of whom; tat-

>|ksanat-immediately; nicah api-even though one is the lowest

>|of men; utpulakah-becoming agitated in ecstatic love; lebhe-

>|gets; lubdhakah-a hunter; ratim-attraction; acyute-unto the

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead.

2926|TRANSLATION

2927|"Parvata Muni continued, 'My dear friend Narada Muni, you

>|are glorified as the sage among the demigods. By your mercy,

>| even a lowborn person like this hunter can immediately

>|become attached to Lord Krsna.'

2928|PURPORT

2929|A pure Vaisnava believes in the statements of the sastras.

>|This verse is quoted from Vedic literature, the Skanda

>|Purana.

2930|Madhya 24.279

2931|TEXT 279

2932|TEXT

2933|narada kahe,-'vaisnava, tomara anna kichu aya?'

2934|vyadha kahe, "yare pathao, sei diya yaya

2935|SYNONYMS

2936|narada kahe-Narada Muni said; vaisnava-O Vaisnava; tomara-

>|your; anna-food; kichu aya-does any come; vyadha kahe-the

>|hunter replied; yare pathao-whoever you send; sei-that

>|person; diya-giving something; yaya-goes.

2937|TRANSLATION

2938|"Narada Muni then asked the hunter, 'My dear Vaisnava, do

>|you have some income for your maintenance?' The hunter

>|replied, 'My dear spiritual master, whoever you send gives

>|me something when he comes to see me.'

2939|PURPORT

2940|This confirms the statement in Bhagavad-gita (9.22) to

>|the effect that the Lord carries all necessities to His

>|Vaisnava devotee. Narada Muni asked the former hunter how

>|he was being maintained, and he replied that everyone who

>|came to see him brought him something for his maintenance.

>|Krsna, who is situated in everyone's heart, says, "I

>|personally carry all necessities to a Vaisnava." He can

>|order anyone to execute this. Everyone is ready to give

>|something to a Vaisnava, and if a Vaisnava is completely

>|engaged in devotional service, he need not be anxious for

>|his maintenance.

2941|Madhya 24.280

2942|TEXT 280

2943|TEXT

2944|eta anna na pathao, kichu karya nai

2945|sabe dui-janara yogya bhaksya-matra cai"

2946|SYNONYMS

2947|eta anna-so much food; na pathao-you do not need to send;

>|kichu karya nai-there is no such need; sabe-only; dui-

>|janara-for two persons; yogya-requisite; bhaksya-matra-

>|eatables; cai-we want.

2948|TRANSLATION

2949|"The former hunter said, 'Please do not send so may grains.

>| Only send what is sufficient for two people, no more.'

2950|PURPORT

2951|The former hunter only wanted enough for two people to eat,

>|no more. It is not necessary for a Vaisnava to keep a stock

>|of food for the next day. He should receive only sufficient

>|grains to last one day. The next day, he must again depend

>|on the Lord's mercy. This is the instruction of Sri

>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu. When His personal servant Govinda

>|sometimes kept a stock of haritaki (myrobalan), Sri

>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu chastised him, saying, "Why did you

>|keep a stock for the next day?" Srila Rupa Gosvami and

>|others were begging daily from door to door for their

>|sustenance, and they never attempted to stock their asrama

>|with food for the next day. We should not materially

>|calculate, thinking, "It is better to stock food for a week.

>| Why give the Lord trouble by having Him bring food daily?"

>|One should be convinced that the Lord will provide daily.

>|There is no need to stock food for the next day.

2952|Madhya 24.281

2953|TEXT 281

2954|TEXT

2955|narada kahe,-'aiche raha, tumi bhagyavan'

2956|eta bali' dui-jana ha-ila antardhana

2957|SYNONYMS

2958|narada kahe-Narada Muni said; aiche raha-live like that;

>|tumi bhagyavan-certainly you are very fortunate; eta bali'-

>|saying this; dui-jana-both Narada Muni and Parvata Muni; ha-

>|ila antardhana-disappeared.

2959|TRANSLATION

2960|"Narada Muni approved his not wanting more than a daily

>|supply of food, and he blessed him, saying, 'You are

>|fortunate.' Narada Muni and Parvata Muni then disappeared

>|from that place.

2961|Madhya 24.282

2962|TEXT 282

2963|TEXT

2964|ei ta' kahilun tomaya vyadhera akhyana

2965|ya sunile haya sadhu-sanga-prabhava-jnana

2966|SYNONYMS

2967|ei ta' kahilun-thus I have narrated; tomaya-unto you;

>|vyadhera akhyana-the story of the hunter; ya sunile-hearing

>|which; haya-there is; sadhu-sanga-of the association of

>|devotees; prabhava-of the influence; jnana-knowledge.

2968|TRANSLATION

2969|"So far I have narrated the incident of the hunter. By

>|hearing this narration, one can understand the influence

>|derived by associating with devotees.

2970|PURPORT

2971|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu wanted to stress that even a hunter,

>| the lowest of men, could become a topmost Vaisnava simply

>|by associating with Narada Muni or a devotee in his bona

>|fide disciplic succession.

2972|Madhya 24.283

2973|TEXT 283

2974|TEXT

2975|ei ara tina artha gananate paila

2976|ei dui artha mili' 'chabbisa' artha haila

2977|SYNONYMS

2978|ei-this example; ara-another; tina artha-three imports;

>|gananate-in calculating; paila-we have obtained; ei dui

>|artha mili'-by adding these two imports; chabbisa-twenty-

>|six; artha-imports; haila-there have been.

2979|TRANSLATION

2980|"In this way we have found three more meanings

>|. Combine these with the other meanings, and

>|the total number of meanings add up to twenty-six in all.

2981|Madhya 24.284

2982|TEXT 284

2983|TEXT

2984|ara artha suna, yaha-arthera bhandara

2985|sthule 'dui' artha, suksme 'batrisa' prakara

2986|SYNONYMS

2987|ara-another; artha-import; suna-hear; yaha-which; arthera

>|bhandara-storehouse of knowledge; sthule-grossly; dui artha-

>|two meanings; suksme-by a subtle import; batrisa-thirty-two;

>| prakara-varieties.

2988|TRANSLATION

2989|"There is yet another meaning, which is full of a variety

>|of imports. Actually there are two gross meanings and

>|thirty-two subtle meanings.

2990|PURPORT

2991|The two gross meanings refer to regulative devotional

>|service and spontaneous devotional service. There are also

>|thirty-two subtle meanings. Under the heading of regulative

>|devotional service, there are sixteen meanings:

>| (1) a servant of

>|the Lord as His personal associate, (2) a personal friend, (

>|3) personal parents or similar superiors, (4) a personal

>|beloved, (5) a servant elevated by spiritual cultivation, (

>|6) a friend by spiritual cultivation, (7) parents and

>|superior devotees by cultivation of devotional service, (8)

>|a beloved wife or female friend by cultivation of

>|devotional service, (9) a mature devotee as a servant, (10)

>|a mature devotee as a friend, (11) a mature devotee as a

>|parent and superior, (12) a mature devotee as wife and

>|beloved, (13) an immature devotee as servant, (14) an

>|immature devotee as a friend, (15) an immature devotee as

>|father and superior, and (16) an immature devotee as a

>|beloved. Similarly, under the heading of spontaneous

>|devotion there are also sixteen various associates.

>|Therefore the total number of devotees under the headings

>|of regular devotees and spontaneous devotees is thirty-

>|two.

2992|Madhya 24.285

2993|TEXT 285

2994|TEXT

2995|'atma'-sabde kahe-sarva-vidha bhagavan

2996|eka 'svayam bhagavan', ara 'bhagavan'-akhyana

2997|SYNONYMS

2998|atma-sabde-by the word atma; kahe-it is said; sarva-vidha

>|bhagavan-all types of Personalities of Godhead; eka-one;

>|svayam bhagavan-the original Supreme Personality of Godhead,

>| Krsna; ara-another; bhagavan-akhyana-the Personality of

>|Godhead by an expansive designation.

2999|TRANSLATION

3000|"The word atma refers to all the different expansions

>| of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. One of them is the

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself, Krsna, and the

>|others are different incarnations or expansions of Krsna.

3001|The word atma also includes all kinds of Bhagavan, the

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead. This means that Krsna has

>|unlimited expansions. This is described in Brahma-samhita (

>|5.46):

3002|diparcir eva hi dasantaram abhyupetya

3003|dipayate vivrta-hetu-samana-dharma

3004|yas tadrg eva hi ca visnutaya vibhati

3005|govindam adi-purusam tam aham bhajami

3006|These expansions are thus compared to candles

>|that have been lit from an original candle. All the

>|secondary candles are equally powerful, but the original

>|candle is that from which all the others have been lit.

>|Krsna is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, and

>|He is expanded as Balarama, Sankarsana, Aniruddha,

>|Pradyumna and Vasudeva. In this way there are innumerable

>|incarnations and expansions who are also called Bhagavan,

>|the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

3007|Madhya 24.286

3008|TEXT 286

3009|TEXT

3010|tante rame yei, sei saba-'atmarama'

3011|'vidhi-bhakta', 'raga-bhakta',-dui-vidha nama

3012|SYNONYMS

3013|tante-in all those Supreme Personalities of Godhead; rame-

>|takes pleasure in devotional service; yei-those persons who;

>| sei saba-all of them; atmarama-are also known as atmarama;

>|vidhi-bhakta-devotees following the regulative principles;

>|raga-bhakta-devotees following spontaneous love; dui-vidha

>|nama-two different varieties.

3014|TRANSLATION

3015|"One who always engages in the service of the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead is called atmarama. There are two

>|types of atmarama. One is an atmarama engaged in

>|regulative devotional service, and the other is an atmarama

>|engaged in spontaneous devotional service.

3016|Madhya 24.287

3017|TEXT 287

3018|TEXT

3019|dui-vidha bhakta haya cari cari prakara

3020|parisada, sadhana-siddha, sadhaka-gana ara

3021|SYNONYMS

3022|dui-vidha bhakta-these two varieties of atmarama devotees;

>|haya-are; cari cari prakara-each of four different

>|categories; parisada-personal associate; sadhana-siddha-

>|liberated to the position of associates by perfection in

>|devotional service; sadhaka-gana ara-and devotees already

>|engaged in the devotional service of the Lord.

3023|TRANSLATION

3024|"the atmaramas engaged in regulative

>|and spontaneous devotional service

>|are further categorized into four groups. There are the

>|eternal associates, the associates who have become perfect

>|by devotional service, and those who are engaged in

>|devotional service and are called sadhaka

>|.

3025|Madhya 24.288

3026|TEXT 288

3027|TEXT

3028|jata-ajata-rati-bhede sadhaka dui bheda

3029|vidhi-raga-marge cari cari-asta bheda

3030|SYNONYMS

3031|jata-ajata-rati-bhede-by distinction of mature love and

>|immature love; sadhaka dui bheda-those practicing

>|are of two varieties; vidhi-regulative

>|devotion; raga-spontaneous devotion; marge-on both the

>|paths; cari cari-there are four different varieties; asta

>|bheda-a total of eight kinds.

3032|TRANSLATION

3033|"Those who are practicing devotional service are either

>|mature or immature. Therefore the sadhakas are of two types.

>| Since the devotees execute either regulative devotional

>|service or spontaneous devotional service and there are

>|four groups within these two divisions, altogether there

>|are eight varieties.

3034|PURPORT

3035|Srila Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Thakura says that the

>|original Personality of Godhead, Krsna, is the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead, and His expansions are also called

>|the Personality of Godhead. However, Krsna is the original

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead. Speculative philosophers

>|and mystic yogis also meditate upon the form of Krsna, but

>|this form is not the form of the original Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead. Such a Bhagavan is but a partial

>|representation of the Lord's full potency. Nonetheless, He

>|has to be understood to be the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead. To clarify this matter, one should simply

>|understand that Krsna, the son of Nanda Maharaja in

>|Vrndavana, the friend of the cowherd boys and lover of the

>|gopis, is actually the original Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead. He is attained by spontaneous love. Although His

>|expansions are also called the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead, They are attained only by the execution of

>|regulative devotional service.

3036|Madhya 24.289

3037|TEXT 289

3038|TEXT

3039|vidhi-bhaktye nitya-siddha parisada-'dasa'

3040|'sakha' 'guru' 'kanta-gana',-cari-vidha prakasa

3041|SYNONYMS

3042|vidhi-bhaktye-by regulative devotional service; nitya-

>|siddha parisada-eternally perfect associate; dasa-the

>|servant; sakha guru kanta-gana-friends, superiors and

>|beloved damsels; cari-vidha prakasa-they are manifested in

>|four varieties.

3043|TRANSLATION

3044|"By executing regulative devotional service, one is

>|elevated to the platform of an eternally perfect associate-

>|such as a servant, friend, superior or beloved woman.

>|these are of four varieties.

3045|Madhya 24.290

3046|TEXT 290

3047|TEXT

3048|sadhana-siddha-dasa, sakha, guru, kanta-gana

3049|jata-rati sadhaka-bhakta-cari-vidha jana

3050|SYNONYMS

3051|sadhana-siddha-those who have perfected themselves by

>|devotional service; dasa-servants; sakha-friends; guru-

>|superiors; kanta-gana-beloved damsels; jata-rati sadhaka-

>|bhakta-devotees who have become mature by devotional

>|service; cari-vidha jana-they are also of four varieties.

3052|TRANSLATION

3053|"Among those who have perfected themselves by devotional

>|service, there are servants, friends, superiors and beloved

>|damsels. Similarly, there are four types of mature devotees.

3054|Madhya 24.291

3055|TEXT 291

3056|TEXT

3057|ajata-rati sadhaka-bhakta,-e cari prakara

3058|vidhi-marge bhakte sodasa bheda pracara

3059|SYNONYMS

3060|ajata-rati sadhaka-bhakta-immature devotees engaged in

>|devotional service; e cari prakara-there are also the same

>|four varieties; vidhi-marge-on the path of regulative

>|devotional service; bhakte-devotees; sodasa bheda pracara-

>|there are sixteen varieties.

3061|TRANSLATION

3062|"Within the category of regulative devotional service,

>|there are also immature devotees. These are also of four

>|varieties. Thus in regulative devotional service there are

>|altogether sixteen varieties.

3063|Madhya 24.292

3064|TEXT 292

3065|TEXT

3066|raga-marge aiche bhakte sodasa vibheda

3067|dui marge atmaramera batrisa vibheda

3068|SYNONYMS

3069|raga-marge-on the path of spontaneous loving service; aiche-

>|in the same way; bhakte-all the devotees; sodasa vibheda-

>|divided into sixteen varieties; dui marge-on the two paths,

>|namely regulative devotional service and spontaneous

>|devotional service; atmaramera-of persons enjoying with the

>|Supreme Self; batrisa vibheda-there are thirty-two

>|varieties of devotees.

3070|TRANSLATION

3071|"On the path of spontaneous devotional service, there are

>|also sixteen categories of devotees. Thus there are thirty-

>|two types of atmaramas enjoying the Supreme Lord on these

>|two paths.

3072|Madhya 24.293

3073|TEXT 293

3074|TEXT

3075|'muni', 'nirgrantha', 'ca' 'api',-cari sabdera artha

3076|yahan yei lage, taha kariye samartha

3077|SYNONYMS

3078|muni-the sage; nirgrantha- either learned or foolish;

>| ca- also; api- in spite of; cari sabdera artha-the

>|meanings of these four words; yahan-wherever; yei lage-they

>|apply; taha kariye samartha-make them sound.

3079|TRANSLATION

3080|"When these thirty-two types of devotees are qualified with

>|the words muni nirgrantha ca api,

>|they can be increased in different ways and very

>|soundly elaborated upon.

3081|Madhya 24.294

3082|TEXT 294

3083|TEXT

3084|batrise chabbise mili, asta-pancasa

3085|ara eka bheda suna arthera prakasa

3086|SYNONYMS

3087|batrise-these thirty-two varieties; chabbise-the formerly

>|described twenty-six varieties; mili'-added together; asta-

>|pancasa-they become fifty-eight; ara-another; eka-one;

>|bheda-different; suna-please hear; arthera prakasa-

>|manifestation of import.

3088|TRANSLATION

3089|"When we add the twenty-six types of devotees to these

>|thirty-two, they altogether number fifty-eight. You may now

>|hear from Me of manifestations with different

>|meanings.

3090|Madhya 24.295

3091|TEXT 295

3092|TEXT

3093|itaretara 'ca' diya samasa kariye

3094|'atanna' bara atmarama nama la-iye

3095|SYNONYMS

3096|itaretara-in different varieties; ca-the word ca; diya-

>|adding; samasa kariye-make a compound word; atanna bara-

>|fifty-eight times; atmarama-the atmarama devotees; nama la-

>|iye-I take their different names.

3097|TRANSLATION

3098|"In this way, as I add the word ca to one word after

>|another, I make a compound. Thus the different names of

>|atmaramas can be taken fifty-eight times.

3099|Madhya 24.296

3100|TEXT 296

3101|TEXT

3102|'atmaramas ca atmaramas ca' atanna-bara

3103|sese saba lopa kari' rakhi eka-bara

3104|SYNONYMS

3105|atmaramah ca atmaramah ca-repeating atmaramah; atanna-bara-

>|fifty-eight times; sese-at the end; saba lopa kari'-

>|rejecting all; rakhi-we keep; eka-bara-only one.

3106|TRANSLATION

3107|"In this way, one can repeat the word atmaramah with ca

>| for each of the fifty-eight meanings. By following the

>|rule previously stated and rejecting all but the last, we

>|retain that which represents all the meanings.

3108|Madhya 24.297

3109|TEXT 297

3110|TEXT

3111|sarupanam eka - sesa eka - vibhaktau ,

3112|uktarthanam aprayoga iti

3113|SYNONYMS

3114|sa-rupanam-of words of the same form; eka-sesah-only the

>|last; eka-vibhaktau-in the same case; ukta-arthanam-of the

>|previously spoken meanings; aprayogah-nonapplication; iti-

>|thus.

3115|TRANSLATION

3116|" 'Of words having the same form and case termination, the

>|last one is the only one retained.'

3117|PURPORT

3118|This is a quotation from Panini's sutras (1.2.64).

3119|Madhya 24.298

3120|TEXT 298

3121|TEXT

3122|atanna ca-karera saba lopa haya

3123|eka atmarama-sabde atanna artha kaya

3124|SYNONYMS

3125|atanna-fifty-eight; ca-karera-of the additions of the word

>|ca; saba lopa haya-all of them are rejected; eka-one;

>|atmarama-atmarama; sabde-by the word; atanna artha kaya-

>|fifty-eight imports are automatically derived.

3126|TRANSLATION

3127|"When all the ca-kara, or additions to the word ca, are

>|taken away, fifty-eight different meanings can still be

>|understood by the one word atmarama.

3128|Madhya 24.299

3129|TEXT 299

3130|TEXT

3131|asvattha-vrksas ca bata-vrksas ca kapittha-vrksas ca amra-

>|vrksas ca vrksah

3132|SYNONYMS

3133|asvattha-vrksah-banyan trees; ca-and; bata-vrksah-fig trees;

>| ca-and; kapittha-vrksah-a type of tree named kapittha; ca-

>|and; amra-vrksah-mango trees; ca-and; vrksah-all indicated

>|by the word "trees."

3134|TRANSLATION

3135|" 'By the plural word vrksah [ trees ], all trees,

>|such as banyan trees, fig trees, kapittha trees and mango

>|trees, are indicated.'

3136|Madhya 24.300

3137|TEXT 300

3138|TEXT

3139|"asmin vane vrksah phalanti" yaiche haya

3140|taiche saba atmarama krsne bhakti karaya

3141|SYNONYMS

3142|asmin vane-in this forest; vrksah phalanti-different

>|varieties of trees bear fruit; yaiche haya-just as in this

>|sentence; taiche-similarly; saba-all; atmarama-self-

>|realized souls; krsne bhakti karaya-engage themselves in

>|loving devotional service to Lord Krsna.

3143|TRANSLATION

3144|"This atmarama verse is like the sentence , 'In this forest

>|many different trees bear fruit.' All atmaramas render

>|devotional service to Lord Krsna.

3145|Madhya 24.301

3146|TEXT 301

3147|TEXT

3148|'atmaramas ca' samuccaye kahiye ca-kara

3149|'munayas ca' bhakti kare,-ei artha tara

3150|SYNONYMS

3151|atmaramah ca-similarly the word atmaramah with the word ca

>|added; samuccaye-in aggregation; kahiye-means; ca-kara-the

>|word ca; munayah ca-the word munayah with the word ca added;

>| bhakti kare-all of them engage in devotional service; ei

>|artha tara-this is the perfect meaning of the verse.

3152|TRANSLATION

3153|"After fifty-eight times uttering the word atmaramah

>| and taking ca in a sense of

>|aggregation, one may add the word munayah. That will

>|mean that they also render devotional service to

>|Lord Krsna. In this way there are fifty-nine meanings.

3154|Madhya 24.302

3155|TEXT 302

3156|TEXT

3157|'nirgrantha eva' hana, 'api'-nirdharane

3158|ei 'unasasti' prakara artha karilun vyakhyane

3159|SYNONYMS

3160|nirgrantha-the word nirgrantha; eva-also the word eva;

>|hana-becoming; api-the word api; nirdharane-in fixation; ei

>|unasasti prakara artha-in this way fifty-nine imports;

>|karilun vyakhyane-I have described.

3161|TRANSLATION

3162|"Then taking the word nirgrantha and

>|considering api in the sense of sustenance, I have tried

>|to explain fifty- nine meanings of the word.

3163|Madhya 24.303

3164|TEXT 303

3165|TEXT

3166|sarva-samuccaye ara eka artha haya

3167|'atmaramas ca munayas ca nirgranthas ca' bhajaya

3168|SYNONYMS

3169|sarva-samuccaye-taking all of them together; ara-another;

>|eka-one; artha-import; haya-there is; atmaramah ca munayah

>|ca nirgranthah ca bhajaya-the atmaramas, great sages and

>|nirgranthas (the learned and the fools) are all eligible to

>|engage in the transcendental loving service of the Lord.

3170|TRANSLATION

3171|"Taking all the words together, there is another meaning.

>|Whether one is an atmarama, a great sage, or nirgrantha,

>|everyone must engage in the service of the Lord.

3172|PURPORT

3173|The word sarva-samuccaye is significant here. It includes

>|all classes of men-atmarama, muni and nirgrantha.

>|Everyone engages in the service of the Lord. Taking

>|the word api in the sense of ascertainment, there are, all

>|together, sixty different meanings.

3174|Madhya 24.304

3175|TEXT 304

3176|TEXT

3177|'api'-sabda-avadharane, seha cari bara

3178|cari-sabda-sange evera karibe uccara

3179|SYNONYMS

3180|api-sabda-the word api; avadharane-in the matter of

>|ascertaining; seha cari bara-those four times; cari-sabda-

>|four words; sange-with; evera-of the word eva; karibe-one

>|can do; uccara-pronouncing.

3181|TRANSLATION

3182|"The word api is then used in the sense of ascertainment,

>| and then four times with four words the word eva can be

>|uttered .

3183|Madhya 24.305

3184|TEXT 305

3185|TEXT

3186|"urukrame eva bhaktim eva ahaitukim eva kurvanty eva"

3187|SYNONYMS

3188|urukrame-unto the most powerful; eva-only; bhaktim-

>|devotional service; eva-only; ahaitukim-without motives;

>|eva-only; kurvanti-they perform; eva-only.

3189|TRANSLATION

3190|"The words urukrama, bhakti, ahaituki and

>|kurvanti are added to the word eva again and again.

>|Thus another meaning is explained.

3191|Madhya 24.306

3192|TEXT 306

3193|TEXT

3194|ei ta' kahilun slokera 'sasti' sankhyaka artha

3195|ara eka artha suna pramane samartha

3196|SYNONYMS

3197|ei ta'-thus; kahilun-I have explained; slokera-of the verse;

>| sasti-sixty; sankhyaka-numbering; artha-imports; ara-

>|another; eka-one; artha-import; suna-please hear; pramane

>|samartha-quite fit for giving evidence.

3198|TRANSLATION

3199|"Now I have given sixty different meanings to the verse,

>|and yet there is another meaning which is also very

>|strongly evident.

3200|Madhya 24.307

3201|TEXT 307

3202|TEXT

3203|'atma'-sabde kahe 'ksetrajna jiva'-laksana

3204|brahmadi kita-paryanta-tanra saktite ganana

3205|SYNONYMS

3206|atma-sabde-by the word atma; kahe-it is said; ksetra-jna

>|jiva-the living entity who knows about his body; laksana-

>|symptom; brahma-adi-beginning from Lord Brahma; kita-

>|paryanta-down to the insignificant ant; tanra-His; saktite-

>|as the marginal potency; ganana-counting.

3207|TRANSLATION

3208|"The word atma also refers to the living entity who

>|knows about his body. That is another symptom. From Lord

>|Brahma down to the insignificant ant, everyone is counted

>|as the marginal potency of the Lord.

3209|Madhya 24.308

3210|TEXT 308

3211|TEXT

3212|visnu-saktih para prokta

3213|ksetrajnakhya tatha para

3214|avidya-karma-samjnanya

3215|trtiya saktir isyate

3216|SYNONYMS

3217|visnu-saktih-the potency of Lord Visnu; para-spiritual;

>|prokta-it is said; ksetra-jna-akhya-the potency known as

>|ksetrajna; tatha-as well as; para-spiritual; avidya-

>|ignorance; karma-fruitive activities; samjna-known as; anya-

>|other; trtiya-third; saktih-potency; isyate-known thus.

3218|TRANSLATION

3219|" 'The potency of Lord Visnu is summarized in three

>|categories-namely the spiritual potency, the living

>|entities and ignorance. The spiritual potency is full of

>|knowledge; the living entities, although belonging to the

>|spiritual potency, are subject to bewilderment; and the

>|third energy, which is full of ignorance, is always visible

>|in fruitive activities.'

3220|PURPORT

3221|This is a quotation from Visnu Purana. For an

>|explanation, see Adi-lila (7.119 ).

3222|Madhya 24.309

3223|TEXT 309

3224|TEXT

3225|"ksetrajna atma purusah

3226|pradhanam prakrtih striyam"

3227|SYNONYMS

3228|ksetra-jnah-the word ksetrajna; atma-the living entity;

>|purusah-the enjoyer; pradhanam-the chief; prakrtih-the

>|material nature; striyam-in the feminine gender.

3229|TRANSLATION

3230|" 'The word ksetrajna refers to the living entity, the

>|enjoyer, the chief and material nature.'

3231|PURPORT

3232|This is a quotation from the Svarga-varga (7) of the Amara-

>|kosa dictionary.

3233|Madhya 24.310

3234|TEXT 310

3235|TEXT

3236|bhramite bhramite yadi sadhu-sanga paya

3237|saba tyaji' tabe tinho krsnere bhajaya

3238|SYNONYMS

3239|bhramite bhramite-wandering in different forms in different

>|manners; yadi-if; sadhu-sanga paya-one obtains the

>|association of devotees; saba tyaji'-giving up everything;

>|tabe-then; tinho-he; krsnere bhajaya-engages himself in the

>|service of Lord Krsna.

3240|TRANSLATION

3241|"The living entities are wandering in different species of

>|life on different planets, but if by chance they get the

>|association of a pure devotee [sadhu] they give up all

>|other engagements and engage in the service of Lord Krsna.

3242|Madhya 24.311

3243|TEXT 311

3244|TEXT

3245|sati artha kahilun, saba-krsnera bhajane

3246|sei artha haya ei saba udaharane

3247|SYNONYMS

3248|sati-sixty; artha-imports; kahilun-I explained; saba-all;

>|krsnera bhajane-aiming at rendering transcendental loving

>|service to Krsna; sei artha haya-that is the only meaning;

>|ei saba-all these; udaharane-examples.

3249|TRANSLATION

3250|"I have thus explained sixty different meanings, and all of

>|them aim at the service of Lord Krsna. After giving so many

>|examples, that is the only meaning.

3251|Madhya 24.312

3252|TEXT 312

3253|TEXT

3254|'eka-sasti' artha ebe sphurila toma-sange

3255|tomara bhakti-vase uthe arthera tarange

3256|SYNONYMS

3257|eka-sasti-sixty-one; artha-imports; ebe-now; sphurila-has

>|awakened; toma-sange-because of your association; tomara-

>|your; bhakti-vase-by dint of devotional service; uthe-there

>|arises; arthera-of imports; tarange-waves.

3258|TRANSLATION

3259|"Now, due to your association, another meaning has awakened.

>| It is due to your devotional service that these waves of

>|meaning are arising.

3260|PURPORT

3261|The word atma refers to the living entity. From Lord Brahma

>|down to an insignificant ant, everyone is considered a

>|living entity. Living entities are considered part of the

>|Lord's marginal potency. All of them are ksetrajna ,

>|knowers of the body. When they become nirgrantha, or free,

>|saintly persons, they engage in Lord Krsna's service. That

>|is the sixty-first meaning of the verse.

3262|Madhya 24.313

3263|TEXT 313

3264|TEXT

3265|aham vedmi suko vetti

3266|vyaso vetti na vetti va

3267|bhaktya bhagavatam grahyam

3268|na buddhya na ca tikaya

3269|SYNONYMS

3270|aham-I (Lord Siva); vedmi-know; sukah-Sukadeva Gosvami;

>|vetti-knows; vyasah-Vyasadeva; vetti-knows; na vetti va-or

>|may not know; bhaktya-by devotional service (executed in

>|nine different processes); bhagavatam-the Bhagavata Purana (

>|called Paramahamsa-samhita, the text or treatise

>|readable by the topmost transcendentalists); grahyam-to be

>|accepted; na-not; buddhya-by so-called intelligence or

>|experimental knowledge; na-nor; ca-also; tikaya-by

>|imaginary commentary.

3271|TRANSLATION

3272|"[Lord Siva said,] 'I may know; Sukadeva Gosvami, the son

>|of Vyasadeva, may know; and Vyasadeva may know or may not

>|know the Srimad Bhagavatam. On the whole, Srimad-

>|Bhagavatam, the spotless Purana, can be learned only

>|through devotional service, not by material intelligence,

>|speculative methods or imaginary commentaries.' "

3273|PURPORT

3274|Devotional service includes nine processes, beginning with

>|hearing, chanting and remembering the activities of Lord

>|Visnu. Only one who has taken to devotional service can

>|understand Srimad-Bhagavatam, which is the spotless Purana

>|for a transcendentalist (paramahamsa). So-called

>|commentaries are useless for this purpose. According to the

>|Vedic injunction: yasya deve para bhaktir yatha deve tatha

>|gurau . All Vedic literatures maintain that

>|Srimad-Bhagavatam has to be learned from the person

>|bhagavata, and to understand it one has to engage in pure

>|devotional service. Srimad-Bhagavatam cannot be understood

>|by so-called erudite scholars or grammarians. One who has

>|developed pure Krsna consciousness and has served the pure

>|devotee, the spiritual master, can understand Srimad-

>|Bhagavatam. Others cannot.

3275|Madhya 24.314

3276|TEXT 314

3277|TEXT

3278|artha suni' sanatana vismita hana

3279|stuti kare mahaprabhura carane dhariya

3280|SYNONYMS

3281|artha suni'-by hearing the meaning (of the atmarama verse);

>| sanatana-Sanatana Gosvami; vismita hana-becoming struck

>|with wonder; stuti kare-offers prayers; mahaprabhura-of Sri

>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu; carane dhariya-touching the lotus feet.

3282|TRANSLATION

3283|After hearing all the explanations of all the different

>|meanings of the atmarama verse, Sanatana Gosvami was struck

>|with wonder. He fell down at the lotus feet of Sri Caitanya

>|Mahaprabhu and began to offer prayers.

3284|Madhya 24.315

3285|TEXT 315

3286|TEXT

3287|"saksat isvara tumi vrajendra-nandana

3288|tomara nisvase sarva-veda-pravartana

3289|SYNONYMS

3290|saksat isvara tumi-You are the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead; vrajendra-nandana-the son of Maharaja Nanda;

>|tomara nisvase-by Your breathing; sarva-veda-all Vedic

>|literatures; pravartana-are vibrated.

3291|TRANSLATION

3292|Sanatana Gosvami said, "My dear Lord, You are the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead, Krsna, the son of Maharaja Nanda.

>|All the Vedic literatures are vibrated through Your

>|breathing.

3293|Madhya 24.316

3294|TEXT 316

3295|TEXT

3296|tumi-vakta bhagavatera, tumi jana artha

3297|toma vina anya janite nahika samartha"

3298|SYNONYMS

3299|tumi-Your Lordship; vakta-the speaker; bhagavatera-of

>|Srimad-Bhagavatam; tumi-You; jana-know; artha-the import;

>|toma vina-except for You; anya-anyone else; janite-to know;

>|nahika-is not; samartha-able.

3300|TRANSLATION

3301|"My dear Lord, You are the original speaker of the

>|Bhagavatam. You therefore know its real import. But for You,

>| no one can understand the confidential meaning of Srimad-

>|Bhagavatam."

3302|PURPORT

3303|Following this statement by Srila Sanatana Gosvami, we have

>|written our introduction to Srimad-Bhagavatam (First Canto,

>|Part One, pages 7 -41).

3304|Madhya 24.317

3305|TEXT 317

3306|TEXT

3307|prabhu kahe,-"kene kara amara stavana

3308|bhagavatera svarupa kene na kara vicarana?

3309|SYNONYMS

3310|prabhu kahe-Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu said; kene kara-

>|why do you do; amara stavana-My personal glorification;

>|bhagavatera sva-rupa-the real form of Srimad-

>|Bhagavatam; kene-why; na kara-you do not do; vicarana-

>|consideration.

3311|TRANSLATION

3312|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu replied, "Why are you glorifying Me

>|personally? You should understand the transcendental

>|position of Srimad-Bhagavatam. Why don't you consider this

>|important point?

3313|Madhya 24.318

3314|TEXT 318

3315|TEXT

3316|krsna-tulya bhagavata-vibhu, sarvasraya

3317|prati-sloke prati-aksare nana artha kaya

3318|SYNONYMS

3319|krsna-tulya bhagavata-Srimad-Bhagavatam is identical with

>|Krsna; vibhu-the supreme; sarva-asraya-the origin of

>|everything, or that which controls everything; prati-sloke-

>|in every verse; prati-aksare-in every syllable; nana artha

>|kaya-there are varieties of imports.

3320|TRANSLATION

3321|"Srimad-Bhagavatam is as great as Krsna, the Supreme Lord

>|and shelter of everything. In each and every verse of

>|Srimad-Bhagavatam and in each and every syllable, there are

>|various meanings.

3322|Madhya 24.319

3323|TEXT 319

3324|TEXT

3325|prasnottare bhagavate kariyache nirdhara

3326|yanhara sravane loke lage camatkara

3327|SYNONYMS

3328|prasna-uttare-in the form of questions and answers;

>|bhagavate-in Srimad-Bhagavatam; kariyache-has made;

>|nirdhara-conclusion; yanhara sravane-hearing which; loke-in

>|all people; lage-there is; camatkara-wonderful astonishment.

3329|TRANSLATION

3330|"The form of Srimad-Bhagavatam is given in questions and

>|answers. Thus the conclusion is established. By hearing

>|these questions and answers, one is highly astonished.

3331|Madhya 24.320

3332|TEXT 320

3333|TEXT

3334|bruhi yogesvare krsne

3335|brahmanye dharma-varmani

3336|svam kastham adhunopete

3337|dharmah kam saranam gatah

3338|SYNONYMS

3339|bruhi-kindly explain; yoga-isvare-the Supreme Personality

>|of Godhead, the master of all mystic power; krsne-Lord

>|Krsna; brahmanye-the protector of brahminical culture;

>|dharma-varmani-the strong arms of religious principles;

>|svam-His own; kastham-to the personal abode; adhuna-at

>|present; upete-having returned; dharmah-the religious

>|principles; kam-unto what; saranam-shelter; gatah-have gone.

3340|TRANSLATION

3341|" 'Now that Sri Krsna, the Absolute Truth, the master of

>|all mystic powers, has departed for His own abode, please

>|tell us by whom religious principles are presently

>|protected.'

3342|PURPORT

3343|This verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.1.23) was a question

>|raised by all the sages, who were headed by Saunaka. This

>|question put before the great devotee Suta Gosvami is the

>|foremost of the six questions raised. The answer to this

>|important question is given in the next verse from

>|Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.3.43).

3344|Madhya 24.321

3345|TEXT 321

3346|TEXT

3347|krsne svadhamopagate

3348|dharma-jnanadibhih saha

3349|kalau nasta-drsam esa

3350|puranarko 'dhunoditah

3351|SYNONYMS

3352|krsne-Lord Krsna; sva-dhama-to His personal abode; upagate-

>|having returned; dharma-jnana-adibhih saha-along with

>|religious principles, transcendental knowledge, and so on;

>|kalau-in this Age of Kali; nasta-drsam-of persons who have

>|lost their spiritual vision; esah-this; purana-arkah-Purana

>|or Vedic literature that shines like the sun; adhuna-at the

>|present moment; uditah-has arisen.

3353|TRANSLATION

3354|" 'After Lord Krsna departed for His abode along with

>|religious principles and transcendental knowledge, this

>|Purana, Srimad-Bhagavatam, has arisen like the sun in this

>|Age of Kali to enlighten those who have no spiritual vision.

>|'

3355|Madhya 24.322

3356|TEXT 322

3357|TEXT

3358|ei mata kahilun eka slokera vyakhyana

3359|vatulera pralapa kari' ke kare pramana?

3360|SYNONYMS

3361|ei mata-in this way; kahilun-I have spoken; eka-one;

>|slokera-of a verse; vyakhyana-the explanation; vatulera

>|pralapa-the talking of a madman; kari'-doing; ke kare

>|pramana-who will accept this as evidential proof.

3362|TRANSLATION

3363|"In this way, like a madman, I have explained the meaning

>|of just one verse. I do not know who will take this as

>|evidence.

3364|Madhya 24.323

3365|TEXT 323

3366|TEXT

3367|ama-hena yeba keha 'vatula' haya

3368|ei-drste bhagavatera artha janaya"

3369|SYNONYMS

3370|ama-hena-exactly like Me; yeba-anyone who; keha-a person;

>|vatula haya-becomes a madman; ei-drste-according to this

>|process; bhagavatera-of Srimad-Bhagavatam; artha-import;

>|janaya-he can understand.

3371|TRANSLATION

3372|"If one becomes a madman like Me, he may also understand

>|the meaning of Srimad-Bhagavatam by this process."

3373|PURPORT

3374|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu plainly explains that Srimad-

>|Bhagavatam cannot be understood by those who are materially

>|situated. In other words, one has to become a madman like

>|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu. Apart from being the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead, Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu is an

>|acarya who exhibited love of God like a madman. According

>|to His own written verse: yugayitam nimesena. He says that

>|for Him, "a moment seems to last twelve years." Caksusa

>|pravrsayitam: "My tears are flowing like torrents of rain."

>|Sunyayitam jagat sarvam: "I feel as if the entire universe

>|were vacant." Why? Govinda-virahena me: "Due to My being

>|separated from Govinda, Krsna."

3375|One can understand Srimad-Bhagavatam only by following in

>|the footsteps of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, who was mad for

>|Krsna. We cannot, of course, imitate Sri Caitanya

>|Mahaprabhu. It is not possible. However, unless one is very

>|serious about understanding Krsna, he cannot understand

>|Srimad-Bhagavatam. Srimad-Bhagavatam gives the full

>|narration of Krsna's transcendental activities. The first

>|nine cantos explain who Krsna is, and the Lord's birth and

>|activities are narrated in the Tenth Canto. In Bhagavad-

>|gita it is stated : janma karma ca me divyam. Krsna's

>|appearance and disappearance are transcendental, not

>|mundane. A person is eligible to return home, back to

>|Godhead, if he perfectly understands Krsna and His

>|appearance and disappearance. This is verified by

>|Bhagavad-gita : tyaktva deham punar

>|janma naiti mam eti so 'rjuna .

3376|It is therefore concluded that one has to learn about Krsna

>|from Srimad-Bhagavatam and Bhagavad-gita, and one has

>|to follow in the footsteps of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu.

>|Those who do not follow Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu cannot

>|understand Bhagavad-gita and Srimad-Bhagavatam.

3377|Madhya 24.324

3378|TEXT 324

3379|TEXT

3380|punah sanatana kahe yudi' dui kare

3381|"prabhu ajna dila 'vaisnava-smrti' karibare

3382|SYNONYMS

3383|punah-again; sanatana-Sanatana Gosvami; kahe-says; yudi'

>|dui kare-folding his two hands; prabhu ajna dila-Your

>|Lordship has ordered me; vaisnava-smrti karibare-to write a

>|dictionary of Vaisnava activities.

3384|TRANSLATION

3385|Folding his hands, Sanatana Gosvami said, "My Lord, You

>|ordered me to write a directory about the activities of

>|Vaisnavas.

3386|Madhya 24.325

3387|TEXT 325

3388|TEXT

3389|muni-nica-jati, kichu na janon acara

3390|mo-haite kaiche haya smrti-paracara

3391|SYNONYMS

3392|muni-I; nica-jati-belong to a lower caste; kichu-anything;

>|na-not; janon-I know; acara-about proper behavior; mo-haite-

>|from me; kaiche-how; haya-there is; smrti-paracara-

>|propagation of the directions of Vaisnava behavior.

3393|TRANSLATION

3394|"I am a most lowborn person. I have no knowledge of good

>|behavior. How is it possible for me to write authorized

>|directions about Vaisnava activities?"

3395|PURPORT

3396|Actually Sanatana Gosvami belonged to a very respectable

>|brahmana family. Nonetheless, he submitted himself as a

>|fallen, lowborn person because he had served in the

>|Mohammedan government. A brahmana is never supposed to

>|be engaged for anyone's service. Accepting service for

>|a livelihood (paricaryatmakam karma ) is the

>|business of sudras. The brahmana is always independent and

>|busy studying sastra and preaching sastra to subordinate

>|social members such as ksatriyas and vaisyas. Sanatana

>|Gosvami felt unfit to write Vaisnava smrti about the

>|behavior of Vaisnavas because he had fallen from the

>|brahminical position. Thus Sanatana Gosvami clearly admits

>|that the brahminical culture should be standardized.

>|Presently in India, so-called brahmanas are almost all

>|engaged in some mundane service, and they do not understand

>|the import of the Vedic sastras. Nonetheless, they are

>|passing themselves off as brahmanas on the basis of birth.

>|In this connection, Sanatana Gosvami declares that a

>|brahmana cannot be engaged in anyone's service if he wants

>|to take a leading part in society. In Srimad-Bhagavatam

>|Narada Muni states that even if a brahmana is in a

>|difficult position, he should not accept the occupation of

>|a sudra. This means that he should not be engaged in

>|service for another, for this is the business of dogs.

>|Under the circumstances, Sanatana Gosvami felt very low

>|because he had accepted the service of the

>|Muslim government. The conclusion is that no one should

>|claim to be a brahmana simply by birthright while engaging

>|in someone else's service.

3397|Madhya 24.326

3398|TEXT 326

3399|TEXT

3400|sutra kari' disa yadi karaha upadesa

3401|apane karaha yadi hrdaye pravesa

3402|SYNONYMS

3403|sutra kari'-making a synopsis; disa-direction; yadi-if;

>|karaha upadesa-You kindly instruct; apane-personally;

>|karaha-You do; yadi-if; hrdaye pravesa-entering into me or

>|manifesting in my heart.

3404|TRANSLATION

3405|Sanatana Gosvami then requested the Lord, "Please

>|personally tell me how I can write this difficult book

>|about Vaisnava behavior. Please manifest Yourself in my

>|heart.

3406|PURPORT

3407|The writing of Vaisnava literatures is not a function for

>|ordinary men. Vaisnava literatures are not mental

>|concoctions. They are all authorized literature meant to

>|guide those who are going to be Vaisnavas. Under these

>|circumstances, an ordinary man cannot give his own opinion.

>|His opinion must always correspond with the conclusion of

>|the Vedas. Unless one is fully qualified in Vaisnava

>|behavior and authorized by superior authority (the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead), one cannot write Vaisnava

>|literatures or purports and commentaries on Srimad-

>|Bhagavatam and Bhagavad-gita.

3408|Madhya 24.327

3409|TEXT 327

3410|TEXT

3411|tabe tara disa sphure mo-nicera hrdaya

3412|isvara tumi,-ye karaha, sei siddha haya"

3413|SYNONYMS

3414|tabe-if you do so; tara-of that; disa-the process of

>|writing; sphure-manifests; mo-nicera-of someone lowborn

>|like me; hrdaya-in the heart; isvara tumi-You are the

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead; ye karaha-whatever You

>|cause to do; sei siddha haya-that is perfectly done.

3415|TRANSLATION

3416|"If You would please manifest Yourself within my heart and

>|personally direct me in writing this book, then, although I

>|am lowborn, I may hope to be able to write it. You can do

>|this because You are the Supreme Personality of Godhead

>|Yourself, and whatever You direct is perfect."

3417|Madhya 24.328

3418|TEXT 328

3419|TEXT

3420|prabhu kahe,-"ye karite kariba tumi mana

3421|krsna sei sei toma karabe sphurana

3422|SYNONYMS

3423|prabhu kahe-Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu said; ye-whatever;

>|karite-to do; kariba tumi mana-you want; krsna-Lord Krsna;

>|sei sei-that; toma-to you; karabe sphurana-will manifest.

3424|TRANSLATION

3425|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu replied, "Whatever you want to do

>|you will be able to do correctly by Lord Krsna's favor. He

>|will manifest the real purport.

3426|PURPORT

3427|Sanatana Gosvami was a pure devotee of Krsna. A pure

>|devotee has no business other than serving Krsna;

>|consequently Krsna is always ready to help him. This

>|benediction was given by Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu to

>|Sanatana Gosvami, who was authorized to write Vaisnava

>|smrti. Sanatana Gosvami was a pure devotee of the Lord, and

>|through the blessings of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu he was

>|able to write the book perfectly.

3428|Madhya 24.329

3429|TEXT 329

3430|TEXT

3431|tathapi ei sutrera suna dig-darasana

3432|sakarana likhi adau guru-asrayana

3433|SYNONYMS

3434|tathapi-still; ei sutrera-of the synopsis of this book;

>|suna-hear; dik-darasana-an indication; sakarana-the cause;

>|likhi-we should write; adau-in the beginning; guru-asrayana-

>|accepting a bona fide spiritual master.

3435|TRANSLATION

3436|"Because you asked me for a synopsis, please hear these few

>|indications. In the beginning one must take

>|shelter of a bona fide spiritual master.

3437|Madhya 24.330

3438|TEXT 330

3439|TEXT

3440|guru-laksana, sisya-laksana, donhara pariksana

3441|sevya-bhagavan, sarva-mantra-vicarana

3442|SYNONYMS

3443|guru-laksana-the symptoms of a bona fide spiritual master;

>|sisya-laksana-the symptoms of a bona fide disciple; donhara-

>|of both; pariksana-the testing; sevya-bhagavan-the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead is worshipable; sarva-mantra-

>|vicarana-consideration of the different types of mantras.

3444|TRANSLATION

3445|"In your book there should be the characteristics of

>|the bona fide guru and the bona fide disciple. Then, before

>|accepting a spiritual master, one can be assured of the

>|spiritual master's position. Similarly, the spiritual

>|master can also be assured of the disciple's position. The

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead, Krsna, should be described

>|as the worshipable object, and you should consider the bija-

>|mantra for the worship of Krsna, Rama

>|or any other expansion of the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead.

3446|PURPORT

3447|In the Padma Purana, the characteristics of the guru, the

>|bona fide spiritual master, have been described:

3448|maha-bhagavata-srestho

3449|brahmano vai gurur nrnam

3450|sarvesam eva lokanam

3451|asau pujyo yatha harih

3452|maha - kula

>|-prasuto

>| 'pi

3453|sarva

>|-yajnesu

>| diksitah

3454|sahasra

>|-sakhadhyayi ca

3455|na guruh syad avaisnavah

3456|The guru must be situated on the topmost

>|platform of devotional service. There are three classes of

>|devotees, and the guru must be accepted from the topmost

>|class. The first- class devotee is the spiritual master

>|for all kinds of people. It is said: gurur nrnam. The word

>|nrnam means "of all human beings." The guru is not

>|limited to a particular group. It is stated in the

>|Upadesamrta of Rupa Gosvami that a guru is a gosvami, a

>|controller of the senses and the mind. Such a guru can

>|accept disciples from all over the world. Prthivim sa

>|sisyat. This is the test of the guru.

3457|In India there are many so-called gurus, and

>|they are limited to a certain district or a province. They

>|do not even travel about India, yet they declare themselves

>|to be jagad- guru, gurus of the whole world. Such

>|cheating gurus should not be accepted. Anyone can see how

>|the bona fide spiritual master accepts disciples from all

>|over the world. The guru is a qualified brahmana; therefore

>|he knows Brahman and Parabrahman. He thus devotes his life

>|for the service of Parabrahman. The bona fide spiritual

>|master who accepts disciples from all over the world is

>|also worshiped all over the world because of his qualities.

>|Lokanam asau pujyo yatha harih: the people of the world

>|worship him just as they worship the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead. All these honors are offered to him because he

>|strictly follows the brahminical principles and teaches

>|these principles to his disciples. Such a person is called

>|an acarya because he knows the principles of devotional

>|service, he behaves in that way himself, and he

>|teaches his disciples to follow in his footsteps. Thus he

>|is an acarya or jagad-guru. Even though a person is born in

>|a brahminical family and is very expert in performing

>|sacrifices, he cannot be accepted as a guru if he is

>|not a strict Vaisnava. A guru is a brahmana by

>|qualification, and he can turn others into brahmanas

>|according to the sastric principles and brahminical

>|qualifications. Brahmanism is not a question of heredity.

>|In Srimad- Bhagavatam (7.32.11) Sri Narada Muni tells

>|Maharaja Yudhisthira what a brahmana is. He states that if

>|brahminical qualifications are observed in ksatriyas,

>|vaisyas or even sudras, one should accept them as

>|brahmanas . In this regard, Srila Sridhara Svami has

>|commented: samadibhir eva brahmanadi-vyavaharo mukhyah, na

>|jati-matradity aha-yasyeti. yad yadi anyatra varnantare 'pi

>|drsyeta, tad-varnantaram tenaiva laksana-nimittenaiva

>|varnena vinirdiset, na tu jati-nimittenety arthah.

3458|There is a similar statement made by Nilakantha, the

>|commentator on Mahabharata:

3459|sudro 'pi samady-upeto brahmana eva

3460|brahmano 'pi kamady-upetah sudra eva

3461|"Although one may be born in a sudra family, if he is

>|endowed with the brahminical qualities beginning with sama [

>|control of the mind], he is to be accepted as a brahmana.

>|Although one may be born in a brahmana family, if he is

>|endowed with the qualities beginning with kama [lust], he

>|is to be considered a sudra." No one should present himself

>|as a brahmana simply on the basis of being born in a

>|brahminical family. One must be qualified by the

>|brahminical qualities mentioned in the sastras,

>|particularly Bhagavad-gita:

3462|samo damas tapah saucam

3463|ksantir arjavam eva ca

3464|jnanam vijnanam astikyam

3465|brahma-karma svabhava-jam

3466|"Peacefulness, self-control, austerity, purity, tolerance,

>|honesty, wisdom, knowledge and religiousness-these are the

>|qualities by which the brahmanas work." (Bg. 18.42)

3467|Unless one is qualified with all these attributes, he

>|cannot be accepted as a brahmana. It is not a question of

>|simply taking birth in a brahmana family. In this regard,

>|Srila Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Thakura remarks that

>|Narottama dasa Thakura and Syamananda Gosvami, although not

>|born in brahmana families, are accepted as bona fide

>|spiritual masters because they were brahmanas by

>|qualification. Personalities like Sri Ganga-narayana,

>|Ramakrsna and many others, who were actually born in

>|brahmana families, accepted Narottama dasa Thakura and

>|Syamananda Gosvami as their spiritual masters.

3468|The maha-bhagavata is one who decorates his body with

>|tilaka and whose name indicates him to be a servant of

>|Krsna by the word dasa. He is also initiated by a bona fide

>|spiritual master and is expert in worshiping the Deity,

>|chanting mantras correctly, performing sacrifices, offering

>|prayers to the Lord, and performing sankirtana. He knows

>|how to serve the Supreme Personality of Godhead and how to

>|respect a Vaisnava. When one has attained the topmost

>|position of maha-bhagavata, he is to be accepted as a guru

>|and worshiped exactly like Hari, the Personality of Godhead.

>| Only such a person is eligible to occupy the post of a

>|guru. However, if one is highly qualified but is not a

>|Vaisnava, he cannot be accepted as a guru. One cannot be a

>|brahmana unless one is a Vaisnava. If one is a Vaisnava, he

>|is already a brahmana. If a guru is completely qualified as

>|a Vaisnava, he must be accepted as a brahmana even if he is

>|not born in a brahmana family. The caste system method of

>|distinguishing a brahmana by birth is not acceptable when

>|applied to a bona fide spiritual master. A spiritual master

>|is a qualified brahmana and acarya. If one is not a

>|qualified brahmana, he is not expert in studying Vedic

>|literatures. Nana-sastra-vicaranaika-nipunau. Every

>|Vaisnava is a spiritual master, and a spiritual master is

>|automatically expert in brahminical behavior. He also

>|understands the Vedic sastras.

3469|Similarly, a disciple's qualifications must be observed by

>|the spiritual master before he is accepted as a disciple.

>|In our Krsna consciousness movement, the requirement is

>|that one must be prepared to give up the four pillars of

>|sinful life-illicit sex, meat-eating, intoxication and

>|gambling. In Western countries especially, we first observe

>|whether a potential disciple is prepared to follow the

>|regulative principles. Then he is given the name of a

>|Vaisnava servant and initiated to chant the Hare Krsna maha-

>|mantra, at least sixteen rounds daily. In this way the

>|disciple renders devotional service under the guidance of

>|the spiritual master or his representative for at least six

>|months to a year. He is then recommended for a second

>|initiation, during which a sacred thread is offered and the

>|disciple is accepted as a bona fide brahmana. Srila

>|Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Thakura introduced the system of

>|giving the sacred thread to a bona fide Vaisnava, and we

>|are also following in his footsteps. The qualifications of

>|a bona fide disciple are described in Srimad-Bhagavatam (11.

>|10.6) as follows:

3470|amanya-matsaro dakso

3471|nirmamo drdha -sauhrdah

3472|asatvaro 'rtha-jijnasur

3473|anasuyur amogha-vak

3474|The disciple must have the following qualifications. He

>|must give up interest in the material bodily conception. He

>|must give up material lust, anger, greed, illusion, madness

>|and envy. He should be interested only in understanding the

>|science of God, and he should be ready to consider all

>|points in this matter. He should no longer think, "I am

>|this body," or, "This thing belongs to me." One must love

>|the spiritual master with unflinching faith, and one must

>|be very steady and fixed. The bona fide disciple should be

>|inquisitive to understand transcendental subject matter. He

>|must not search out faults among good qualities, and he

>|should no longer be interested in material topics. His only

>|interest should be Krsna, the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead.

3475|As far as the mutual testing of the spiritual master and

>|disciple is concerned, Srila Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati

>|Thakura explains that a bona fide disciple must be very

>|inquisitive to understand the transcendental subject matter.

>| As stated in Srimad-Bhagavatam (11.3.21):

3476|tasmad gurum prapadyeta

3477|jijnasuh sreya uttamam

3478|"One who is inquisitive to understand the highest goal and

>|benefit of life must approach a bona fide spiritual master

>|and surrender unto him." A serious disciple must be alert

>|when selecting a bona fide spiritual master. He must be

>|sure that the spiritual master can deliver all the

>|transcendental necessities. The spiritual master must

>|observe how inquisitive the disciple is and how eager he is

>|to understand the transcendental subject matter. The

>|spiritual master should study the disciple's

>|inquisitiveness for no less than six months or a year. A

>|spiritual master should not be very anxious to accept a

>|disciple because of his material opulences. Sometimes a big

>|businessman or landlord may approach a spiritual master for

>|initiation. Those who are materially interested are called

>|visayis (karmis), which indicates that they are very fond

>|of sense gratification. Such visayis sometimes approach a

>|famous guru and ask to become a disciple just as a matter

>|of fashion. Sometimes visayis pose as disciples of a

>|reputed spiritual master just to cover their activities and

>|advertise themselves as advanced in spiritual knowledge. In

>|other words, they want to attain material success. A

>|spiritual master must be very careful in this regard. Such

>|business is going on all over the world. The spiritual

>|master does not accept a materially opulent disciple just

>|to advertise the fact that he has such a big disciple. He

>|knows that by associating with such visayi disciples, he

>|may fall down. One who accepts a visayi disciple is not a

>|bona fide spiritual master. Even if he is, his position may

>|be damaged due to association with an unscrupulous visayi.

>|If a so-called spiritual master accepts a disciple for his

>|personal benefit or for material gain, the relationship

>|between the spiritual master and the disciple turns into a

>|material affair, and the spiritual master becomes like a

>|smarta-guru. There are many caste gosvamis who

>|professionally create some disciples who do not care for

>|them or their instructions. Such spiritual masters are

>|satisfied simply to get some material benefits from their

>|disciples. Such a relationship is condemned by Srila

>|Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Thakura, who calls such spiritual

>|masters and disciples a society of cheaters and cheated.

>|They are also called baulas or prakrta-sahajiyas. Their aim

>|is to make the connection between the spiritual master and

>|the disciple into a very cheap thing. They are not serious

>|in wanting to understand spiritual life.

3479|The words sevya bhagavan in this verse

>|are important. Bhagavan indicates the

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Visnu. Lord Visnu

>|alone is worshipable. There is no need to worship demigods.

>|This is confirmed in Bhagavad-gita :

3480|kamais tais tair hrta-jnanah

3481|prapadyante 'nya -devatah

3482|tam tam niyamam asthaya

3483|prakrtya niyatah svaya

3484|"Those whose minds are distorted by material desires

>|surrender unto demigods and follow the particular rules and

>|regulations of worship according to their own natures." (Bg.

>| 7.20)

3485|It is also stated in the Skanda Purana:

3486|vasudevam parityajya

3487|yo 'anya- devam upasate

3488|svamataram parityajya

3489|sva-pacim vandate hi sah

3490|"A person who worships the demigods and gives up Lord

>|Vasudeva is like a man who gives up the protection of his

>|mother for the shelter of a witch."

3491|It is also stated in Bhagavad-gita (9.23)

>|:

3492|ye 'py anya-devata-bhakta

3493|yajante sraddhayanvitah

3494|te 'pi mam eva kaunteya

3495|yajanty avidhi

>|-

>|purvakam

3496|"Whatever a man may sacrifice to other

>|gods, O son of Kunti, is really meant for Me alone,

>|but it is offered without true understanding."

3497|Demigods are also living entities and parts and parcels

>|of Krsna. Therefore in one sense one worships Krsna when

>|one worships the demigods, but not in the proper way. There

>|is a proper method to water a tree. One should water the

>|roots, but if one waters the leaves and branches instead,

>|he is simply wasting his time. If one worships the demigods

>|to the exclusion of Lord Visnu, his rewards will only be

>|material . As confirmed in Bhagavad -gita:

3498|antavat tu phalam tesam

3499|tad bhavaty alpa - medhasam

3500|devan deva - yajo yanti

3501|mad-bhakta yanti mam api

3502|"Men of small intelligence worship the demigods, and

>|their fruits are limited and temporary. Those who worship

>|the demigods go to the planets of the demigods, but My

>|devotees ultimately reach My supreme planet. " (Bg.

>|7.23 )

3503|Demigod worship is meant for unintelligent men because the

>|benefits derived from demigod worship are all material,

>|temporary and retractable. It is also stated in the Hari-

>|bhakti-vilasa:

3504|yas tu narayanam devam

3505|brahma-rudradi-devataih

3506|samatvenaiva vikseta

3507|sa pasandi bhaved dhruvam

3508|"Whoever thinks Lord Visnu and the demigods are on the same

>|level is to be immediately considered a rogue as far as

>|spiritual understanding is concerned."

3509|There are three modes of nature in the material world, but

>|when one is situated spiritually, he is above the material

>|modes, even though he lives in this material world. Lord

>|Krsna states in Bhagavad-gita (14.26):

3510|mam ca yo 'vyabhicarena

3511|bhakti -yogena sevate

3512|sa gunan samatityaitan

3513|brahma bhuyaya kalpate

3514|"One who engages in full

>|devotional service, who does not fall down in any

>|circumstances at once transcends the modes of material

>|nature and thus comes to the level of Brahman." When one

>|engages in the Supreme Lord's devotional service, he is in

>|a transcendental position. Even though one may be situated

>|in the mode of goodness in the material world, he is

>|susceptible to pollution by the modes of passion and

>|ignorance. When the mode of goodness is mixed with the mode

>|of passion, one worships the sun-god, Vivasvan. When the

>|mode of goodness is mixed with the mode of ignorance, he

>|worships Ganapati, or Ganesa. When the mode of passion is

>|mixed with the mode of ignorance, one worships Durga, or

>|Kali, the external potency. When one is simply in the mode

>|of ignorance, he becomes a devotee of Lord Siva because

>|Lord Siva is the predominating deity of the mode of

>|ignorance within this material world. However, when one is

>|completely free from the influence of all the modes of

>|material nature, he becomes a pure Vaisnava on the

>|devotional platform. Srila Rupa Gosvami states in the

>|Bhakti-rasamrta-sindhu:

3515|anyabhilasita - sunyam

3516|jnana -karmady -anavrtam

3517|anukulyena krsnanu

>|-

3518|silanam bhaktir uttama

3519|The position of visuddha-sattva is the position of

>|uncontaminated goodness. On that platform, one can then

>|understand, aradhyo bhagavan vrajesa-tanayas tad-dhama

>|vrndavanam: "The Supreme Personality of Godhead, the son of

>|Nanda Maharaja, is to be worshiped along with His

>|transcendental abode, Vrndavana."

3520|The word sarva-mantra-vicarana means "considering all

>|different types of mantras." There are different kinds of

>|mantras for different kinds of devotees. There are the

>|mantras known as the dvadasaksara, and these are composed

>|of twelve syllables. Similarly, there are mantras composed

>|of eighteen syllables-the Narasimha mantra, the Rama mantra,

>| Gopala mantra and so on. Each and every mantra has its own

>|spiritual significance. The spiritual master has to select

>|a mantra for his disciple according to the disciple's

>|ability to chant different mantras.

3521|Madhya 24.331

3522|TEXT 331

3523|TEXT

3524|mantra-adhikari, mantra-siddhy-adi-sodhana

3525|diksa, pratah-smrti-krtya, sauca, acamana

3526|SYNONYMS

3527|mantra-adhikari-qualification for receiving mantra

>|initiation; mantra-siddhi-adi-the perfection of the mantra

>|and so on; sodhana-purification; diksa-initiation; pratah-

>|smrti-krtya-morning duties and remembrance of the Supreme

>|Lord; sauca-cleanliness; acamana-washing the mouth and

>|other parts of the body.

3528|TRANSLATION

3529|"You should discuss the qualifications necessary for

>|receiving a mantra, the perfection of the mantra, the

>|purification of the mantra, initiation, morning duties,

>|remembrance of the Supreme Lord, cleanliness, and washing

>|the mouth and other parts of the body.

3530|PURPORT

3531|The following injunction is given in the Hari-bhakti-vilasa

>|(1.194)

>|:

3532|tantrikesu ca mantresu

3533|diksayam yositam api

3534|sadhvinam adhikaro 'sti

3535|sudradinam ca sad-dhiyam

3536|"Sudras and women who are chaste and sincerely

>|interested in understanding the Absolute Truth are

>|qualified to be initiated with the pancaratrika-mantras."

>|This is also confirmed in Bhagavad -gita (9.32):

3537|mam hi partha vyapasritya

3538|ye 'pi

>| syuh papa

>|-

>|yonayah

3539|striyo vaisyas tatha sudras

3540|te 'pi yanti param gatim

3541|"O son of Prtha, those who take shelter in Me, though they

>|be of lower birth-women, vaisyas [merchants], as well as

>|sudras [workers]-can approach the supreme destination."

3542|If one actually wants to serve Krsna, it doesn't matter

>|whether one is a sudra, vaisya, or even a woman. If one is

>|sincerely eager to chant the Hare Krsna mantra or diksa-

>|mantra, he is qualified to be initiated according to the

>|pancaratrika process. According to Vedic principles, only a

>|brahmana who is fully engaged in his occupational duties

>|can be initiated. Sudras and women are not admitted to a

>|vaidika initiation. Unless one is fit according to the

>|estimation of the spiritual master, one cannot accept a

>|mantra from the pancaratrika-vidhi or the vaidika-vidhi.

>|When one is fit to accept the mantra, he is initiated by

>|the pancaratrika-vidhi or the vaidika-vidhi. In any case,

>|the result is the same.

3543|Regarding mantra-siddhi-adi-sodhana, the efficiency of the

>|mantra, Srila Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Thakura gives

>|sixteen divisions, which are confirmed in the Hari-bhakti-

>|vilasa (beginning with 1.204):

3544|siddha-sadhya-susiddhari-

3545|kramaj jneyo vicaksanaih

3546|These are (1) siddha, (2) sadhya, (3) susiddha and (4) ari.

>|These four principles can be divided further: (1) siddha-

>|siddha, (2) siddha-sadhya, (3) siddha-susiddha, (4) siddha-

>|ari, (5) sadhya-siddha, (6) sadhya-sadhya, (7) sadhya-

>|susiddha, (8) sadhya-ari, (9) susiddha-siddha, (10)

>|susiddha-sadhya, (11) susiddha-susiddha, (12) susiddha-ari,

>|(13) ari-siddha, (14) ari-sadhya, (15) ari-susiddha, and (

>|16) ari-ari.

3547|Those who are initiated with the eighteen-alphabet mantra

>|do not need to consider the above-mentioned sixteen

>|divisions. As enjoined in the Hari-bhakti-vilasa (1.215,

>|219, 220):

3548|na catra satrava dosa

3549|narnasvadi- vicarana

3550|rksarasi -vicaro va

3551|na kartavyo manau priye

3552|natra cintyo 'ri

>|-suddhyadir

3553| nari

>|-mitradi- laksanam

3554|siddha - sadhya- susiddhari -

3555| rupa natra vicarana

3556|There is sodhana, or purification of the mantra, but there

>|is no such consideration for the Krsna mantra. Balitvat

>|krsna-mantranam samskarapeksanam na hi. "The Krsna mantra

>|is so strong that there is no question of sodhana. (1.235)

3557|As far as diksa is concerned, one should consult Madhya-

>|lila, Chapter Fifteen (108). On the whole, when a person is

>|initiated according to the pancaratrika-vidhi, he has

>|already attained the position of a brahmana. This is

>|enjoined in the Hari-bhakti-vilasa (2.12):

3558|yatha kancanatam yati

3559|kamsyam rasa-vidhanatah

3560|tatha diksa-vidhanena

3561|dvijatvam jayate nrnam

3562|"As bell metal can be turned into gold when treated with

>|mercury, a disciple initiated by a bona fide guru

>|immediately attains the position of a brahmana."

3563|As far as the time of diksa (initiation) is concerned,

>|everything depends on the position of the guru. As soon as

>|a bona fide guru is received by chance or by a program, one

>|should immediately take the opportunity to receive

>|initiation. In the book called Tattva-sagara, it is stated:

3564|durlabhe sad-gurunam ca

3565|sakrt- sanga upasthite

3566|tad-anujna yada labdha

3567|sa diksavasaro mahan

3568|grame va yadi varanye

3569|ksetre va divase nisi

3570|agacchati gurur daivad

3571|yatha diksa tad

>|-ajnaya

3572|yadaiveccha tada diksa

3573|guror ajnanurupatah

3574|na tirtham na vratam hemo

3575|na snanam na japa

>|-kriya

3576|diksayah karanam kintu

3577|sveccha-prapte tu sad-gurau

3578|"If, by chance, one gets a sad-guru, it doesn't matter

>|whether one is in the temple or the forest. If the sad-guru,

>| the bona fide spiritual master, agrees, one can be

>|initiated immediately, without waiting for a suitable time

>|or place."

3579|In the early morning hours (known as brahma-muhurta) one

>|should get up and immediately chant the Hare Krsna mantra,

>|or, at least, "Krsna, Krsna, Krsna." In this way, one

>|should remember Krsna. Some slokas or prayers should also

>|be chanted. By chanting, one immediately becomes auspicious

>|and transcendental to the infection of material qualities.

>|Actually one has to chant and remember Lord Krsna twenty-

>|four hours daily, or as much as possible.

3580|smartavyah satatam visnur

3581|vismartavyo na jatucit

3582|sarve vidhi-nisedhah syur

3583|etayor eva kinkarah

3584|"Krsna is the origin of Lord Visnu. He should always be

>|remembered and never forgotten at any time. All the rules

>|and prohibitions mentioned in the sastras should be the

>|servants of these two principles." This is a quotation from

>|padma Purana in the portion called Brhat-sahasra-nama-

>|stotra. pratah-krtya means that one should evacuate

>|regularly and then cleanse himself by taking a bath. One

>|has to gargle (acamana) and brush his teeth (danta-dhavana).

>| He should do this either with twigs or a toothbrush-

>|whatever is available. This will purify the mouth. Then one

>|should take his bath. Actually householders and

>|vanaprasthas should bathe two times a day (pratar-

>|madhyahnayoh snanam vanaprastha-grhasthayoh). A sannyasi

>|should bathe three times daily, and a brahmacari may take

>|only one bath a day. Whenever one is not able to bathe in

>|water, he can bathe by chanting the Hare Krsna mantra. One

>|also has to perform his sandhyadi-vandana-that is, one has

>|to chant his Gayatri mantra three times daily-morning, noon

>|and evening.

3585|Madhya 24.332

3586|TEXT 332

3587|TEXT

3588|danta-dhavana, snana, sandhyadi vandana

3589|guru-seva, urdhva-pundra-cakradi-dharana

3590|SYNONYMS

3591|danta-dhavana-washing the teeth; snana-bath; sandhya-adi

>|vandana-regular chanting of the mantras; guru-seva-serving

>|the spiritual master; urdhva-pundra-wearing perpendicularly

>|straight tilaka; cakra-adi-dharana-stamping the body with

>|different names and symbols of the Lord.

3592|TRANSLATION

3593|"in the morning , one should

>|regularly brush his teeth, take his bath, offer prayers to

>|the Lord and offer obeisances to the spiritual master.

>|one should render service to the

>|spiritual master and paint one's body in twelve places with

>|urdhva-pundra [tilaka] . one should stamp

>|the holy names of the Lord on his body, or

>|one should stamp the symbols of the Lord, such as the disc

>|and club.

3594|Madhya 24.333

3595|TEXT 333

3596|TEXT

3597|gopicandana-malya-dhrti, tulasi-aharana

3598|vastra-pitha-grha-samskara, krsna-prabodhana

3599|SYNONYMS

3600|gopi-candana-gopi-candana (available in Vrndavana and

>|Dvaraka); malya-beads on the neck; dhrti-wearing regularly;

>|tulasi-aharana-collecting tulasi leaves; vastra-cloth;

>|pitha-temple; grha-the house; samskara-cleansing; krsna-

>|prabodhana-awakening the Deity of Lord Krsna.

3601|TRANSLATION

3602|"After this, you should describe how one should decorate

>|his body with gopicandana, wear neck beads, collect tulasi

>|leaves from the tulasi tree, cleanse his cloth and the

>|altar, cleanse one 's own house or apartment and go to the

>|temple and ring the bell just to draw the attention of Lord

>|Krsna.

3603|Madhya 24.334

3604|TEXT 334

3605|TEXT

3606|panca, sodasa, pancasat upacare arcana

3607|panca-kala puja arati, krsnera bhojana-sayana

3608|SYNONYMS

3609|panca-five; sodasa-sixteen; pancasat-fifty; upacare-with

>|ingredients; arcana-offering worship; panca-kala-five times;

>| puja-worshiping; arati-offering arati; krsnera bhojana-

>|sayana-in this way offering eatables to Krsna and laying

>|Him down to rest.

3610|TRANSLATION

3611|"Also describe Deity worship, wherein one should offer food

>|to Krsna at least five times daily. One should in due time

>|place Krsna on a bed. You should also describe the process

>|for offering arati and the worship of the Lord according to

>|the list of five, sixteen or fifty ingredients.

3612|PURPORT

3613|The five ingredients are (1) very good

>|scents, (2) very good flowers, (3) incense, (4) a lamp and (

>|5) something edible. As for sodasopacara, the sixteen

>|ingredients, one should (1) provide a sitting place (asana),

>| (2) ask Krsna to sit down, (3) offer arghya, (4) offer

>|water to wash the legs, (5) wash the mouth, (6) offer madhu-

>|parka, (7) offer water for washing the mouth, (8) bathe

>|, (9) offer garments, (10) decorate the Lord's body

>|with ornaments, (11) offer sweet scents, (12) offer flowers

>|with good fragrance, like the rose or campaka, (13) offer

>|incense, (14) offer a lamp, (15) give good food, and (16)

>|offer prayers.

3614|In the Hari-bhakti-vilasa (Eleventh Vilasa, verses 127 -

>|140) there is a vivid description of what is required in

>|Deity worship. There are sixty-four items mentioned. In the

>|temple, worship should be so gorgeous that all sixty-four

>|items should be available for the satisfaction of the

>|Personality of Godhead. Sometimes it is impossible to get

>|all sixty-four items; therefore we recommend that at least

>|on the first day of installation all sixty-four items

>|should be available. When the Lord is established, worship

>|with all sixty-four items should continue as far as

>|possible. The sixty-four items are as follows: (1) There

>|must be a big bell hanging in front of the temple room so

>|that whoever comes in the room can ring the bell. This

>|item is called prabodhana, or offering oneself submissively

>|to the Lord. This is the first item. (2) The visitor must

>|chant Jaya Sri Radha-Govinda , or Jaya Sri Radha-

>|Madhava when he rings the bell. In either case, the word

>|jaya must be uttered. (3) One should immediately offer

>|obeisances to the Lord, falling down like a stick. (4)

>|There must be regular mangala-arati in the temple during

>|the early morning, an hour and a half before the sun rises.

>|(5) There must be an asana, a sitting place before the

>|altar. This asana is for the spiritual master. The disciple

>|brings everything before the spiritual master, and the

>|spiritual master offers everything to the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead. (6) After mangala-arati, the Deity

>|is supposed to wash His teeth by using a twig; therefore a

>|twig must be offered. (7) Water must be offered for washing

>|the Deity's feet. (8) Arghya should be offered. (9) Water

>|for acamana should be offered. (10) Madhu-parka, a small

>|bowl containing madhu (honey, a little ghee, a little water,

>| a little sugar, yogurt and milk) should be offered. This

>|is called madhu-parka-acamana. (11) One should place wooden

>|slippers before the Lord. (12) One should massage the body

>|of the Lord. (13) One should massage the body of the Lord

>|with oil. (14) With a soft, wet sponge one should remove

>|all the oil smeared over the Lord's body. (15) One should

>|bathe the Lord with water in which nicely scented flowers

>|have been soaking for some time. (16) After bathing the

>|body of the Lord with water, one should bathe Him with milk.

>| (17) Then with yogurt. (18) Then

>|with ghee. (19) Then

>|with honey. (20) Then with

>|sugar . (21) Then one should wash

>|the Deity with water and chant this mantra:

3615|cintamani-prakara-sadmasu kalpa-vrksa-

3616|laksavrtesu surabhir abhipalayantam

3617|laksmi-sahasra-sata-sambhrama-sevyamanam

3618|govindam adi-purusam tam aham bhajami

3619|(22) One should dry the entire body with a towel. (23) A

>|new dress should be put on the body. (24) A sacred thread

>|should be given to the body. (25) Water should be offered

>|for cleansing the mouth (acamana). (26) Nicely scented oils

>|like liquid sandalwood pulp should be smeared over the body.

>| (27) All kinds of ornaments and crowns should be placed on

>|the body. ( 28) Then one should offer flower garlands and

>|decorative flowers. (29 ) One should burn incense. (30)

>|Lamps should be offered. (31) Precautions should always be

>|taken so that demons and atheists cannot harm the body of

>|the Lord. (32) Food offerings should be placed before the

>|Lord. (33) Spices for chewing should be offered. (34) Betel

>|nuts should be offered. (35) At the proper time, there

>|should be arrangements so that the Lord may take rest in

>|bed. (36) The Lord's hair should be combed and decorated. (

>|37) First-class garments should be offered. (38) A first-

>|class helmet should be offered. (39) The garments should be

>|scented. (40) There should be Kaustubha jewels and other

>|ornaments offered. (41) A variety of flowers should be

>|offered. (42) Another mangala-arati should be offered. (43)

>|A mirror should be offered. (44) The Lord should be carried

>|on a nice palanquin to the altar. (45) The Lord should be

>|seated on the throne. (46) Again water should be given for

>|the washing of His feet. (47) Something again should be

>|offered for eating. (48) Evening arati. (49) The Lord

>|should be fanned with a camara fan, and an umbrella should

>|be placed over His head. (50) The Hare Krsna mantra and

>|approved songs should be sung. (51) Musical instruments

>|should be played. (52) One should dance before the Deity. (

>|53) One should circumambulate the Deity. (54) One should

>|again offer obeisances. (55) One should offer different

>|types of prayers and hymns at the Lord's lotus feet. (56)

>|One should touch the lotus feet of the Lord with one's head.

>| This may not be possible for everyone, but at least the

>|pujari should do this. (57) The flowers offered on the

>|previous day should touch one's head. (58) One should take

>|the remnants of the Lord's food. (59) One should sit before

>|the Lord and think that he is massaging the Lord's legs. (

>|60) One should decorate the Lord's bed with flowers before

>|the Lord takes His rest. (61) One should offer one's hand

>|to the Lord. (62) One should take the Deity to His bed. (63)

>| One should wash the feet of the Lord and then sit Him on

>|the bed. (64) One should place the Lord on the bed and then

>|massage His feet.

3620|Arati should be offered to the Deities five times daily-

>|early in the morning before sunrise, later in the morning,

>|at noon, in the evening and at night. This means that there

>|should be worship and a change of dress and flowers. As far

>|as the eatables are concerned, all items should be first-

>|class preparations. There should be first-class rice, dhal,

>|fruit, sweet rice, vegetables and a variety of foods to be

>|sucked, drunk and chewed. All the eatables offered to the

>|Deities should be extraordinarily excellent. In Europe and

>|America there is presently no monetary scarcity. People are

>|not poor, and if they follow these principles of Deity

>|worship, they will advance in spiritual life. As far as

>|placing the Deity in the bed is concerned, if the Deity is

>|large and heavy, it is not possible to move Him daily. It

>|is better that a small Deity, which is also worshiped, be

>|taken to the bed. This mantra should be chanted: agaccha

>|sayana-sthanam priyabhih saha kesava. "O Kesava, kindly

>|come to Your bed along with Srimati Radharani." (Hari-

>|bhakti-vilasa 11.40)

3621|The Deity should be placed in bed with Srimati Radharani,

>|and this should be indicated by bringing the wooden

>|slippers from the altar to the bedside. When the Deity is

>|laid down, His legs should be massaged. Before laying the

>|Deity down, a pot of milk and sugar should be offered to

>|Him. After taking this thick milk, the Deity should lie

>|down and should be offered betel nuts and spices to chew.

3622|Madhya 24.335

3623|TEXT 335

3624|TEXT

3625|sri-murti -laksana, ara salagrama-laksana

3626|krsna-ksetra-yatra, krsna-murti-darasana

3627|SYNONYMS

3628|sri-murti-laksana-characteristics of the Deity; ara-and;

>|salagrama-laksana-characteristics of the salagrama-sila;

>|krsna-ksetra-yatra-visiting places like Vrndavana, Dvaraka

>|and Mathura; krsna-murti-darasana-visiting the Deity in the

>|temple.

3629|TRANSLATION

3630|"The characteristics of the Deities should be discussed as

>|well as the characteristics of the salagrama-sila. One

>|should also discuss visiting the Deities in the temple and

>|touring holy places like Vrndavana, Mathura and Dvaraka.

3631|Madhya 24.336

3632|TEXT 336

3633|TEXT

3634|nama-mahima, namaparadha dure varjana

3635|vaisnava-laksana, sevaparadha-khandana

3636|SYNONYMS

3637|nama-mahima-the glories of the holy name; nama-aparadha-

>|offenses in chanting the holy name; dure varjana-giving up

>|very carefully; vaisnava-laksana-the symptoms of a Vaisnava;

>| seva-aparadha-khandana-rejecting offenses in worshiping

>|the Deity.

3638|TRANSLATION

3639|"You should glorify the holy name and

>|carefully give up offenses when chanting the holy name. One

>|should know the symptoms of a Vaisnava .

>| one must give up or nullify all kinds of seva-

>|aparadha, offenses in Deity worship.

3640|PURPORT

3641|The devotee should always be very careful not to commit the

>|ten offenses when chanting the Hare Krsna mantra. If a

>|devotee very strictly follows the methods of Deity worship,

>|he will naturally and quickly become a pure Vaisnava. A

>|pure Vaisnava has unflinching faith in the Lord, and he

>|does not deviate at all. He is always engaged in perfect

>|Deity worship.

3642|One should also notice the specific offenses against Deity

>|worship. These are mentioned in the Skanda Purana (Avanti-

>|khanda), spoken by Vyasadeva himself. One should liquidate

>|all kinds of offenses.

3643|The salagrama-sila should be worshiped with tulasi where a

>|sufficient quantity of tulasi leaves are available. Worship

>|of salagrama-sila should be introduced in all ISKCON

>|temples. Salagrama-sila is the form of the Lord's mercy. To

>|worship the Deity with the sixty-four items mentioned may

>|be a difficult job, but the Lord has become so small that

>|anyone in any temple can carefully handle Deity worship

>|simply by performing the same activities with salagrama-

>|sila.

3644|There are thirty-two offenses that should be

>|avoided. (1) One should not enter the temple in a vehicle.

>|Shoes and slippers should be removed before entering the

>|temple. (2) One should offer obeisances as soon as he sees

>|the Deity. (3) One should enter the temple after taking a

>|bath. In other words, one should be very clean. (4) One

>|should not offer obeisances to the Lord with one hand. (5)

>|One should not circumambulate demigods before the Deities. (

>|6) One should not spread out his legs before the Deity. (7)

>| One should not sit down before the Deity with his legs

>|crossed, nor should one touch his legs with his hands. (8)

>|One should not lie down before the Deity. (9) One should

>|not eat before the Deity. (10) One should not speak lies

>|before the Deity. (11) One should not speak very loudly

>|before the Deity. (12) One should not talk nonsense before

>|the Deity. (13) One should not cry before the Deity. (14)

>|One should not deal with others before the Deity. (15) One

>|should not utter harsh words before the Deity. (16) One

>|should not cover himself with a blanket. (17) One should

>|not talk enviously of others before the Deity. (18) One

>|should not praise others before the Deity. (19) One should

>|not use slang before the Deity. (20) One should not pass

>|air before the Deity. (21) One should not neglect the sixty-

>|four items of Deity worship. (22) One should not eat

>|anything not offered to the Deity. (23) One should not

>|neglect offering seasonal fruits as soon as they are

>|available. (24) One should always offer fresh, untouched

>|fruit to the Deity. (25) One should not sit with his back

>|toward the Deity. (26) One should not offer obeisances to

>|others before the Deity. (27) One should not sit near the

>|Deity without taking the spiritual master's permission. (28)

>| One should not be proud to hear himself praised before the

>|Deity. (29) One should not blaspheme the demigods. (30) One

>|should not be unkind to others before the Deities. (31) One

>|should observe all festivals in the temple. (32) One should

>|not fight or quarrel before the Deity.

3645|Madhya 24.337

3646|TEXT 337

3647|TEXT

3648|sankha-jala-gandha-puspa-dhupadi-laksana

3649|japa, stuti, parikrama, dandavat vandana

3650|SYNONYMS

3651|sankha-of a conchshell; jala-of water; gandha-of incense or

>|scents; puspa-of flowers; dhupa-adi-of incense, and so on;

>|laksana-the characteristics; japa-murmuring; stuti-offering

>|prayers; parikrama-circumambulation; dandavat-offering

>|obeisances; vandana-offering prayers.

3652|TRANSLATION

3653|"The items of worship, such as water, conchshell, flowers,

>|incense and lamp, should be described. You should also

>|mention chanting softly, offering prayers, circumambulating,

>| and offering obeisances. All these should be carefully

>|studied.

3654|PURPORT

3655|All these are mentioned in the Hari-bhakti-vilasa. The

>|Astama Vilasa of that book should be consulted as far as

>|possible.

3656|Madhya 24.338

3657|TEXT 338

3658|TEXT

3659|purascarana-vidhi, krsna-prasada-bhojana

3660|anivedita-tyaga, vaisnava-nindadi-varjana

3661|SYNONYMS

3662|purascarana-vidhi-ritualistic ceremonies; krsna-prasada-

>|bhojana-eating the remnants of food offered to the Lord;

>|anivedita-tyaga-not touching anything not offered to the

>|Lord; vaisnava-ninda-adi-varjana-completely avoiding

>|blaspheming a Vaisnava.

3663|TRANSLATION

3664|"Other items to be considered are the method of

>|performing purascarana, taking krsna- prasada, giving up

>|unoffered food and not blaspheming the Lord's devotees.

3665|PURPORT

3666|Regarding the vaisnava-ninda, see Madhya-lila, 15. 260.

3667|Madhya 24.339

3668|TEXT 339

3669|TEXT

3670|sadhu-laksana, sadhu-sanga, sadhu-sevana

3671|asatsanga -tyaga, sri-bhagavata-sravana

3672|SYNONYMS

3673|sadhu-laksana-the symptoms of a devotee; sadhu-sanga-

>|association with devotees; sadhu-sevana-offering service to

>|devotees; asat-sanga-tyaga-giving up the company of

>|nondevotees; sri-bhagavata-sravana-regularly hearing the

>|recitation of Srimad-Bhagavatam.

3674|TRANSLATION

3675|"One should know the symptoms of a devotee and how to

>|associate with devotees . One should know how to satisfy

>|the devotee by rendering service, and one should know how

>|to give up the association of nondevotees. One should also

>|regularly hear the recitation of

>|Srimad-Bhagavatam.

3676|Madhya 24.340

3677|TEXT 340

3678|TEXT

3679|dina-krtya, paksa-krtya, ekadasy-adi-vivarana

3680|masa-krtya, janmastamyadi-vidhi-vicarana

3681|SYNONYMS

3682|dina-krtya-daily duties; paksa-krtya-duties on the

>|fortnights; ekadasi-adi-vivarana-description of Ekadasi and

>|so on; masa-krtya-duties every month; janmastami-adi-of

>|performing Janmastami and other ceremonies; vidhi-of the

>|process; vicarana-consideration.

3683|TRANSLATION

3684|"You should describe the ritualistic duties of

>| every day, and you should describe the

>|fortnightly duties-especially observing Ekadasi fast,

>|which comes every fortnight. You should also

>|describe the duties of every month,

>|especially the observance of ceremonies

>|like Janmastami, Rama-navami and Nrsimha-caturdasi.

3685|Madhya 24.341

3686|TEXT 341

3687|TEXT

3688|ekadasi, janmastami, vamana-dvadasi

3689|sri-rama-navami, ara nrsimha-caturdasi

3690|SYNONYMS

3691|ekadasi-the eleventh day of the fortnight; janmastami-the

>|birthday ceremony of Lord Krsna; vamana-dvadasi-the

>|birthday or appearance day of Lord Vamana; sri-rama-navami-

>|the birthday ceremony of Lord Ramacandra; ara-and; nrsimha-

>|caturdasi-the appearance day of Lord Nrsimha.

3692|TRANSLATION

3693|"Ekadasi, Janmastami, Vamana-dvadasi, Rama-navami and

>|Nrsimha-caturdasi should all be observed.

3694|Madhya 24.342

3695|TEXT 342

3696|TEXT

3697|ei sabe viddha-tyaga, aviddha-karana

3698|akarane dosa, kaile bhaktira lambhana

3699|SYNONYMS

3700|ei sabe-all these things; viddha-tyaga-to avoid viddha-

>|ekadasi or mixed Ekadasi; aviddha-karana-performing the

>|pure Ekadasi; akarane dosa-the fault of not performing them;

>| kaile-if done so; bhaktira lambhana-there will be

>|discrepancies in devotional service.

3701|TRANSLATION

3702|"You should recommend the avoidance of mixed Ekadasi and

>|the performance of pure Ekadasi. You should also describe

>|the fault in not observing this. One should be very

>|careful as far as these items are concerned. If one is not

>|careful, one will be negligent in executing devotional

>|service.

3703|Madhya 24.343

3704|TEXT 343

3705|TEXT

3706|sarvatra pramana dibe purana-vacana

3707|sri-murti-visnu-mandira karana-laksana

3708|SYNONYMS

3709|sarvatra-everywhere; pramana-evidence; dibe-you should give;

>| purana-vacana-quoting from the Puranas; sri-murti-the

>|Deity; visnu-mandira-of the Visnu temple; karana-laksana-

>|the characteristics of constructing.

3710|TRANSLATION

3711|"Whatever you say about Vaisnava behavior, the

>|establishment of Vaisnava temples and Deities and

>|everything else should be supported by evidence from the

>|Puranas.

3712|Madhya 24.344

3713|TEXT 344

3714|TEXT

3715|'samanya' sad-acara, ara 'vaisnava'-acara

3716|kartavyakartavya saba 'smarta' vyavahara

3717|SYNONYMS

3718|samanya-general; sat-acara-good behavior; ara-and; vaisnava-

>|of devotees of Lord Visnu; acara-etiquette; kartavya-

>|akartavya-things which are to be done and which are not to

>|be done; saba-all; smarta-connected with regulative

>|principles; vyavahara-business.

3719|TRANSLATION

3720|"You should give general and specific descriptions of the

>|behavior and activities of a Vaisnava. You should outline

>|things that are to be done and things that are not to be

>|done. All this should be described as regulations and

>|etiquette.

3721|Madhya 24.345

3722|TEXT 345

3723|TEXT

3724|ei sanksepe sutra kahilun dig-darasana

3725|yabe tumi likhiba, krsna karabe sphurana

3726|SYNONYMS

3727|ei-thus; sanksepe-in brief; sutra-codes; kahilun-I have

>|described; dik-darasana-just a little direction; yabe-

>|whenever; tumi-you; likhiba-will attempt to write; krsna-

>|Lord Krsna; karabe-will do; sphurana-manifesting.

3728|TRANSLATION

3729|"I have thus given a synopsis of the Vaisnava regulative

>|principles. I have given this in brief just to give you a

>|little direction. When you write on this subject, Krsna

>|will help you by spiritually awakening you."

3730|PURPORT

3731|One cannot write on spiritual matters without being blessed

>|by Krsna and the disciplic succession of gurus. The

>|blessings of the authorities are one's power of attorney.

>|One should not try to write anything about Vaisnava

>|behavior and activities without being authorized by

>|superior authorities. This is confirmed in Bhagavad-

>|gita : evam parampara-praptam imam rajarsayo viduh.

3732|Madhya 24.346

3733|TEXT 346

3734|TEXT

3735|ei ta' kahilu prabhura sanatane prasada

3736|yahara sravane cittera khande avasada

3737|SYNONYMS

3738|ei ta'-in this way; kahilu-I have described; prabhura-of

>|Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; sanatane-unto Sanatana

>|Gosvami; prasada-mercy; yahara sravane-hearing which;

>|cittera-of the mind; khande-disappears; avasada-all

>|moroseness.

3739|TRANSLATION

3740|Thus I have narrated Lord Caitanya's mercy upon Sanatana

>|Gosvami. When one hears these topics, one's heart will be

>|cleansed of all contamination.

3741|Madhya 24.347

3742|TEXT 347

3743|TEXT

3744|nija-granthe karnapura vistara kariya

3745|sanatane prabhura prasada rakhiyache likhiya

3746|SYNONYMS

3747|nija-granthe-in his own book; karnapura-Kavi-karnapura;

>|vistara kariya-vividly describing; sanatane-unto Sanatana

>|Gosvami; prabhura-of Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; prasada-

>|the mercy; rakhiyache-has kept; likhiya-writing.

3748|TRANSLATION

3749|The authorized poet Kavi-karnapura has written a book named

>|Caitanya-candrodaya-nataka. This book tells how Sri

>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu blessed Sanatana Gosvami with His

>|specific mercy.

3750|Madhya 24.348

3751|TEXT 348

3752|TEXT

3753|gaudendrasya sabha-vibhusana-manis tyaktva ya rddham sriyam

3754|rupasyagraja esa eva tarunim vairagya-laksmim dadhe

3755|antar-bhakti-rasena purna-hrdayo bahye 'vadhutakrtih

3756|saivalaih pihitam maha-sara iva priti-pradas tad-vidam

3757|SYNONYMS

3758|gauda-indrasya-of the ruler of Gauda-desa (Bengal); sabha-

>|of the parliament; vibhusana-fundamental; manih-the gem;

>|tyaktva-relinquishing; yah-one who; rddham-opulent; sriyam-

>|kingly enjoyment; rupasya agrajah-the elder brother of

>|Srila Rupa Gosvami; esah-this; eva-certainly; tarunim-

>|youthful; vairagya-laksmim-the fortune of renunciation;

>|dadhe-accepted; antah-bhakti-rasena-by the mellows of inner

>|love of Krsna; purna-hrdayah-satisfied fully; bahye-

>|externally; avadhuta-akrtih-the dress of a mendicant;

>|saivalaih-by moss; pihitam-covered; maha-sarah-a great lake

>|or very deep lake; iva-like; priti-pradah-very pleasing;

>|tat-vidam-to persons acquainted with the science of

>|devotional service.

3759|TRANSLATION

3760|"Srila Sanatana Gosvami, the elder brother of Srila Rupa

>|Gosvami, was a most important minister in the government of

>|Hussain Shah, the ruler of Bengal, and he was considered a

>|most brilliant gem in that assembly. He possessed all the

>|opulences of a royal position, but he gave up everything

>|just to accept the youthful goddess of renunciation.

>|Although he externally appeared to be a mendicant who had

>|renounced everything, he was filled with the pleasure of

>|devotional service within his heart. Thus he can be

>|compared to a deep lake covered with moss. He was the

>|object of pleasure for all the devotees who knew the

>|science of devotional service.

3761|PURPORT

3762|This and the following two verses are from Caitanya-

>|candrodaya-nataka (9.34, 35, 38).

3763|Madhya 24.349

3764|TEXT 349

3765|TEXT

3766|tam sanatanam upagatam aksnor

3767|drsta-matram atimatra-dayardrah

3768|alilinga parighayata-dorbhyam

3769|sanukampam atha campaka-gaurah

3770|SYNONYMS

3771|tam-unto him; sanatanam-Sanatana Gosvami; upagatam-having

>|arrived; aksnoh-with the eyes; drsta-matram-being only seen;

>| ati-matra-greatly; daya-ardrah-merciful; alilinga-

>|embraced; parighayata-dorbhyam-with His two arms;

>|sa-anukampam-with great affection; atha-thus; campaka-

>|gaurah-Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, who has a complexion

>|the color of a campaka flower (golden).

3772|TRANSLATION

3773|"As soon as Sanatana Gosvami arrived in front of Lord

>|Caitanya, the Lord, seeing him, became merciful to him. The

>|Lord, who has the complexion of a golden campaka flower,

>|opened His arms and embraced him while expressing great

>|affection."

3774|Madhya 24.350

3775|TEXT 350

3776|TEXT

3777|kalena vrndavana-keli-varta

3778|lupteti tam khyapayitum visisya

3779|krpamrtenabhisiseca devas

3780|tatraiva rupam ca sanatanam ca

3781|SYNONYMS

3782|kalena-in the course of time; vrndavana-keli-varta-topics

>|concerning the transcendental mellows of the pastimes of

>|Lord Krsna in Vrndavana; lupta-almost lost; iti-thus; tam-

>|all those; khyapayitum-to enunciate; visisya-making

>|specific; krpa-amrtena-with the nectar of mercy; abhisiseca-

>|sprinkled; devah-the Lord; tatra-there; eva-indeed; rupam-

>|Srila Rupa Gosvami; ca-and; sanatanam-Sanatana Gosvami; ca-

>|as well as.

3783|TRANSLATION

3784|"In the course of time, the transcendental news of Krsna's

>|pastimes in Vrndavana was almost lost. To enunciate

>|explicitly those transcendental pastimes, Sri Caitanya

>|Mahaprabhu, at Prayaga, empowered Srila Rupa Gosvami and

>|Sanatana Gosvami with the nectar of His mercy to carry out

>|this work in Vrndavana."

3785|Madhya 24.351

3786|TEXT 351

3787|TEXT

3788|ei ta' kahilun sanatane prabhura prasada

3789|yahara sravane cittera khande avasada

3790|SYNONYMS

3791|ei ta'-thus; kahilun-I have explained; sanatane-unto

>|Sanatana Gosvami; prabhura prasada-the mercy of Lord Sri

>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu; yahara sravane-hearing which; cittera-

>|of the heart; khande-disappears; avasada-moroseness.

3792|TRANSLATION

3793|I have thus explained the mercy bestowed on Sanatana

>|Gosvami by Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu. If one hears this

>|, all moroseness in the heart will diminish.

3794|Madhya 24.352

3795|TEXT 352

3796|TEXT

3797|krsnera svarupa-ganera sakala haya 'jnana'

3798|vidhi-raga-marge 'sadhana bhakti'ra vidhana

3799|SYNONYMS

3800|krsnera svarupa-ganera-of Lord Krsna in His various

>|expansions; sakala-all; haya-there is; jnana-knowledge;

>|vidhi-raga-marge-in the process of devotional service under

>|regulative principles or in spontaneous love; sadhana

>|bhaktira vidhana-the authorized means of executing

>|devotional service.

3801|TRANSLATION

3802|By reading these instructions to Sanatana Gosvami, one will

>|become fully aware of Lord Krsna's various expansions and

>|the process of devotional service according to the

>|regulative principles and spontaneous love. Thus everything

>|can be fully known.

3803|Madhya 24.353

3804|TEXT 353

3805|TEXT

3806|'krsna-prema', 'bhakti-rasa', 'bhaktira siddhanta'

3807|ihara sravane bhakta janena saba anta

3808|SYNONYMS

3809|krsna-prema-love of Godhead; bhakti-rasa-the mellows of

>|devotional service; bhaktira siddhanta-the conclusions of

>|devotional service; ihara sravane-by hearing this chapter;

>|bhakta-a devotee; janena-knows; saba-all; anta-limits.

3810|TRANSLATION

3811|By reading this chapter, a pure devotee can

>|understand love of Krsna, the mellows of devotional service

>|and the conclusion of devotional service. Everyone can

>|understand all these things to their ultimate end by

>|studying this chapter.

3812|Madhya 24.354

3813|TEXT 354

3814|TEXT

3815|sri-caitanya-nityananda-advaita-carana

3816|yanra prana-dhana, sei paya ei dhana

3817|SYNONYMS

3818|sri-caitanya-nityananda-advaita-carana-the lotus feet of

>|Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, Lord Nityananda and Advaita

>|Prabhu; yanra prana-dhana-whose life and soul; sei-such a

>|person; paya-gets; ei dhana-this treasure-house of

>|devotional service.

3819|TRANSLATION

3820|The conclusion of this chapter can be known to one

>|whose life and soul are the lotus feet of Sri Caitanya

>|Mahaprabhu, Nityananda Prabhu and Advaita Prabhu.

3821|Madhya 24.355

3822|TEXT 355

3823|TEXT

3824|sri-rupa-raghunatha-pade yara asa

3825|caitanya-caritamrta kahe krsnadasa

3826|SYNONYMS

3827|sri-rupa-Srila Rupa Gosvami; raghunatha-Srila Raghunatha

>|dasa Gosvami; pade-at the lotus feet; yara-whose; asa-

>|expectation; caitanya-caritamrta-the book named Caitanya-

>|caritamrta; kahe-describes; krsnadasa-Srila Krsnadasa

>|Kaviraja Gosvami.

3828|TRANSLATION

3829|Praying at the lotus feet of Sri Rupa and Sri Raghunatha,

>|always desiring their mercy, I, Krsnadasa, narrate Sri

>|Caitanya-caritamrta, following in their footsteps.

3830|Thus end the Bhaktivedanta purports to Sri Caitanya-

>|caritamrta, Madhya-lila, Twenty- fourth Chapter,

>|describing the atmarama verse and the Lord's mercy upon

>|Sanatana Gosvami.

3831|

1|Madhya 24: The Sixty-One Explanations of the Atmarama

>|Verse

2|Chapter 24:

3|The Sixty-One Explanations of the Atmarama Verse

4|The following summary of this chapter is given by Srila

>|Bhaktivinoda Thakura in his Amrta-pravaha-bhasya. According

>|to Sri Sanatana Gosvami's request, Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu

>|explained the well-known Srimad-Bhagavatam verse beginning

>|atmaramas ca munayah. He explained this verse in sixty-one

>|different ways. He analyzed all the words and described

>|each word with its different connotations. Adding the words

>|ca and api, He described all the different meanings of the

>|verse. He then concluded that different classes of

>|transcendentalists (jnanis, karmis, yogis) utilize this

>|verse according to their own interpretation, but if they

>|would give up this process and surrender to Krsna, as

>|indicated by the verse itself, they would be able to

>|comprehend the real meaning of the verse. In this regard,

>|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu narrated a story about how the

>|great sage Narada converted a hunter into a great Vaisnava,

>|and how this was appreciated by Narada's friend Parvata

>|Muni. Sanatana Gosvami then offered a prayer to Sri

>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu, and Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu explained

>|the glory of Srimad-Bhagavatam. After this, the Lord gave

>|Sanatana Gosvami a synopsis of Hari-bhakti-vilasa, which

>|Sanatana Gosvami later developed into the guiding principle

>|of all Vaisnavas.

5|Madhya 24.1

6|TEXT 1

7|TEXT

8|Õ±R±õþ±N÷¿îÂ óðÃI±LSÁuI±nS±SúÓdA lÐ ›¶LÁ±úlþdA h

9|æÃáMÃÃN÷± æÃýÃÃ±õþ±õI±R u ÆaÂîÂNdI±ðÃlþ±aÂhÐ N 1 N

10|atmarameti padyarkasy-

11| arthamsun yah prakasayan

12|jagat-tamo jaharavyat

13| sa caitanyodayacalah

14|SYNONYMS

15|atmarama iti-beginning with the word atmarama; padya-verse;

>|arkasya-of the sunlike; artha-amsun-the shining rays of

>|different meanings; yah-who; prakasayan-manifesting; jagat-

>|tamah-the darkness of the material world; jahara-eradicated;

>| avyat-may protect; sah-He; caitanya-udaya-acalah-Sri

>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu, who is like the eastern horizon, where

>|the sun rises.

16|TRANSLATION

17|All glories to Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu ,

>| who acted as the eastern horizon where the sun of

>|the atmarama verse rose . He manifested its rays in the

>|form of different meanings and thus eradicated the darkness

>|of the material world. May He protect the universe.

18|Madhya 24.2

19|TEXT 2

20|TEXT

21|æÃlþ æÃlþ MÍaÂîdI æÃlþ ¿dîÂI±dµ h

22|æÃlþ±ÍZîÂaÂf æÃlþ ÎáNõþtÂMÃõÔµ N 2 N

23|jaya jaya sri-caitanya jaya nityananda

24|jayadvaita-candra jaya gaura-bhakta-vrnda

25|SYNONYMS

26|jaya jaya-all glories; sri-caitanya-to Lord Caitanya

>|Mahaprabhu; jaya-all glories; nityananda-to Lord Nityananda;

>| jaya-all glories; advaita-candra-to Advaita Acarya; jaya-

>|all glories; gaura-bhakta-vrnda-to all the devotees of Lord

>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu.

27|TRANSLATION

28|All glories to Lord Caitanya! All glories to Lord

>|Nityananda! All glories to Advaitacandra! And all glories

>|to all the devotees of Lord Caitanya!

29|Madhya 24.3

30|TEXT 3

31|TEXT

32|îÂNõ ud±îd ›¶tRÂõþ aÂõþNí s¿õþlþ± h

33|óRdõþ¿ó LÁNýÃÃ ¿LÁrRÃ ¿õdlþ LÁ¿õþlþ± N 3 N

34|tabe sanatana prabhura carane dhariya

35|punarapi kahe kichu vinaya kariya

36|SYNONYMS

37|tabe-thereafter; sanatana-Sanatana Gosvami; prabhura carane

>|dhariya-catching the lotus feet of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu;

>|punarapi-again; kahe-says; kichu-something; vinaya kariya-

>|with great humility.

38|TRANSLATION

39|Thereafter, Sanatana Gosvami clasped the lotus feet of Sri

>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu and humbly submitted the following

>|petition.

40|Madhya 24.4

41|TEXT 4

42|TEXT

43|'óÓNõS q¿dlþ±NrDÃ±, îRÂ¿÷ u±õSNtÂN÷-¦š±Nd h

44|ÛLÁ Î±NLÁ Õ±êÂ±õþ ÕnS ÆLÁõþ±rÃ õI±mI±Nd N 4 N

45|'purve suniyachon, tumi sarvabhauma-sthane

46|eka sloke athara artha kairacha vyakhyane

47|SYNONYMS

48|purve-formerly; suniyachon-I heard; tumi-You; sarvabhauma-

>|sthane-at the place of Sarvabhauma Bhattacarya; eka sloke-

>|in one verse; athara artha-eighteen meanings; kairacha

>|vyakhyane-have explained.

49|TRANSLATION

50|Sanatana Gosvami said, "My Lord, I have heard that

>|previously, at the home of Sarvabhauma Bhattacarya, You

>|explained the atmarama verse in eighteen different ways.

51|Madhya 24.5

52|TEXT 5

53|TEXT

54|Õ±R±õþ±÷±( ÷RdNlþ± ¿d¢¶SLš± ÕóRISN÷ h

55|LRÁõS(tm)LIÍýÃÃîRÂLÁNS tÂ¿MÃ¿÷Oy²îÂ&Ní± ýÃÃ¿õþÐ N 5 N

56|atmaramas ca munayo

57| nirgrantha apy urukrame

58|kurvanty ahaitukim bhaktim

59| ittham-bhuta-guno harih

60|SYNONYMS

61|atma-aramah-persons who take pleasure in being

>|transcendentally situated in the service of the Lord; ca-

>|also; munayah-great saintly persons who have completely

>|rejected material aspirations, fruitive activities and so

>|forth; nirgranthah-without interest in any material desire;

>|api-certainly; urukrame-unto the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead, Krsna, whose activities are wonderful; kurvanti-do;

>| ahaitukim-causeless, or without material desires; bhaktim-

>|devotional service; ittham-bhuta-so wonderful as to attract

>|the attention of the self-satisfied; gunah-who has

>|transcendental qualities; harih-the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead.

62|TRANSLATION

63|"'Those who are self-satisfied and unattracted by external

>|material desires are also attracted to the loving service

>|of Sri Krsna, whose qualities are transcendental and whose

>|activities are wonderful. Hari, the Personality of Godhead,

>|is called Krsna because He has such transcendentally

>|attractive features.'

64|PURPORT

65|This is the famous atmarama verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.

>|7.10).

66|Madhya 24.6

67|TEXT 6

68|TEXT

69|Õ±(lS q¿dlþ± Î÷±õþ nÂ×RLÁ¿FîÂ ÷d h

70|LÔÁó± LÁ¿õþ' LÁýÃÃ l¿ðÃ, æRÃnÂl±lþ |õí N' 6 N

71|ascarya suniya mora utkanthita mana

72|krpa kari' kaha yadi, judaya sravana'

73|SYNONYMS

74|ascarya-wonderful; suniya-hearing; mora-my; utkanthita-

>|desirous; mana-mind; krpa kari'-showing Your causeless

>|mercy; kaha yadi-if You speak; judaya-pleases; sravana-the

>|ear.

75|TRANSLATION

76|"I have heard this wonderful story and am therefore very

>|inquisitive to hear Your explanation again. If You would

>|kindly repeat it, I would be very pleased to hear."

77|Madhya 24.7

78|TEXT 7

79|TEXT

80|›¶tRÂ LÁNýÃÃ,–"Õ±¿÷ õ±îRÂh, Õ±÷±õþ õaÂNd h

81|u±õSNtÂN÷ õ±îRÂh îÂ±ýÃÃ± uîÂI LÁ¿õþ' ÷±Nd N 7 N

82|prabhu kahe,-"ami vatula, amara vacane

83|sarvabhauma vatula taha satya kari' mane

84|SYNONYMS

85|prabhu kahe-Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu said; ami-I; vatula-a

>|madman; amara vacane-in My words; sarvabhauma-Sarvabhauma

>|Bhattacarya; vatula-another madman; taha-that (My

>|explanation); satya kari' mane-took as truth.

86|TRANSLATION

87|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu replied, "I am one madman, and

>|Sarvabhauma Bhattacarya is another. Therefore he took My

>|words to be the truth.

88|Madhya 24.8

89|TEXT 8

90|TEXT

91|¿LÁõ± ›¶h±¿óh±†, ¿LÁrRÃ d±¿ýÃÃLÁ ¦œõþNí h

92|ÎîÂ±÷±õþ u/-õNh l¿ðÃ ¿LÁrRÃ ýÃÃlþ ÷Nd N 8 N

93|kiba pralapilana, kichu nahika smarane

94|tomara sanga-bale yadi kichu haya mane

95|SYNONYMS

96|kiba-what; pralapilana-I have said; kichu-anything; nahika-

>|there is not; smarane-in memory; tomara-of you; sanga-bale-

>|by the strength of association; yadi-if; kichu-something;

>|haya-there is; mane-in My mind.

97|TRANSLATION

98|"I do not recall what I spoke in that connection, but if

>|something comes to My mind due to association with you, I

>|shall explain it.

99|Madhya 24.9

100|TEXT 9

101|TEXT

102|uýÃÃNæÃ Õ±÷±õþ ¿LÁrRÃ ÕnS d±¿ýÃÃ tÂ±Nu h

103|ÎîÂ±÷±-uõ±õþ u/-õNh Îl ¿LÁrRÃ ›¶LÁ±Nú N 9 N

104|sahaje amara kichu artha nahi bhase

105|toma-sabara sanga-bale ye kichu prakase

106|SYNONYMS

107|sahaje-generally; amara-My; kichu-any; artha-meaning; nahi

>|bhase-does not manifest; toma-sabara sanga-bale-by the

>|strength of your association; ye-which; kichu-something;

>|prakase-manifests.

108|TRANSLATION

109|"Generally by Myself I cannot give an explanation, but by

>|the strength of your association something may manifest

>|itself.

110|Madhya 24.10

111|TEXT 10

112|TEXT

113|ÛLÁ±ðÃú óðÃ Ûý×ÃÃ Î±NLÁ uR¿d÷Sh h

114|óÔnLAÁ d±d± ÕnS óNðÃ LÁNõþ sÁh÷h N 10 N

115|ekadasa pada ei sloke sunirmala

116|prthak nana artha pade kare jhalamala

117|SYNONYMS

118|ekadasa pada-eleven words; ei-this; sloke-in the verse; su-

>|nirmala-very clear; prthak-separately; nana-various; artha-

>|meanings; pade-in each word; kare jhalamala-are glittering.

119|TRANSLATION

120|"There are eleven clear words in this verse, but when they

>|are studied separately, various meanings glitter from each

>|word.

121|PURPORT

122|The eleven separate words are (1) atmaramah, (2) ca, (3)

>|munayah, (4) nirgranthah, (5) api, (6) urukrame, (7)

>|kurvanti, (8) ahaitukim, (9) bhaktim, (10) ittham-bhuta-

>|gunah, and (11) harih. Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu will explain

>|the different connotations and imports of these words.

123|Madhya 24.11

124|TEXT 11

125|TEXT

126|'Õ±R±'-úNs õrpÁ, ÎðÃýÃÃ, ÷d, lP, sÔ¿îÂ h

127|õR¿X, ¦¤tÂ±õ,-Ûý×ÃÃ u±îÂ ÕnS-›¶±¿5 N 11 N

128|'atma'-sabde brahma, deha, mana, yatna, dhrti

129|buddhi, svabhava,-ei sata artha-prapti

130|SYNONYMS

131|atma-sabde-by the word atma; brahma-the Absolute Truth;

>|deha-the body; mana-the mind; yatna-endeavor; dhrti-

>|firmness; buddhi-intelligence; svabhava -nature; ei

>|sata-these seven; artha-prapti- attainment of meanings.

132|TRANSLATION

133|"The seven different meanings of the word 'atma ' are the

>|Absolute Truth, the body, the mind, endeavor, firmness,

>|intelligence and nature.

134|Madhya 24.12

135|TEXT 12

136|TEXT

137|"Õ±R± Îð Ãý ÃÃ ÷Nd ±õ

>|rpÁ¦¤tÂ±õsÔ¿îÂõR¿Xø¸R h ›¶lNP aÂ" ý×ÃÃ¿îÂ N 12 N

138|"atma deha-mano-brahma-svabhava-dhrti-buddhisu, prayatne ca"

>| iti

139|SYNONYMS

140|atma-the word atma; deha-the body; manah-the mind; brahma-

>|the Absolute Truth; svabhava -nature; dhrti-firmness;

>|buddhisu-in the sense of intelligence; prayatne-in endeavor;

>| ca-and; iti-thus.

141|TRANSLATION

142|"'The following are synonyms of the word "atma ": the body,

>| mind, Absolute Truth, natural characteristics, firmness,

>|intelligence and endeavor.'

143|PURPORT

144|This is a quotation from the Visva-prakasa dictionary.

145|Madhya 24.13

146|TEXT 13

147|TEXT

148|Ûý×ÃÃ u±NîÂ õþN÷ Îlý×ÃÃ, Îuý×ÃÃ Õ±R±õþ±÷áí h

149|Õ±R±õþ±÷áNíõþ Õ±Ná LÁ¿õþõÂ áíd N 13 N

150|ei sate rame yei, sei atmarama-gana

151|atmarama-ganera age kariba ganana

152|SYNONYMS

153|ei sate-in these seven items; rame-enjoy; yei-those who;

>|sei-they; atmarama-gana-atmaramas; atmarama-ganera-of the

>|atmaramas; age-later; kariba ganana-shall make a count.

154|TRANSLATION

155|"The word 'atmarama ' refers to one who enjoys these seven

>|items [the Absolute Truth, body, mind and so on]. Later,

>|I shall enumerate the atmaramas.

156|Madhya 24.14

157|TEXT 14

158|TEXT

159|'÷R¿d'-Õ±¿ðÃ úNsõþ ÕnS qd, ud±îd h

160|ÂÂóÔnLAÁ óÔnLAÁ ÕnS ó±NrÃ LÁ¿õþõ ¿÷hd N 14 N

161|'muni'-adi sabdera artha suna, sanatana

162|prthak prthak artha pache kariba milana

163|SYNONYMS

164|muni-the word muni; adi-and the other; sabdera-of the words;

>| artha-the meaning; suna-hear; sanatana-My dear Sanatana;

>|prthak prthak-separately; artha-meaning; pache-after;

>|kariba milana-I shall combine.

165|TRANSLATION

166|"My dear Sanatana, first hear the meanings of the other

>|words, beginning with the word 'muni. ' I shall first

>|explain their separate meanings, then combine them.

167|Madhya 24.15

168|TEXT 15

169|TEXT

170|'÷R¿d'-úNs ÷ddúNh, Õ±õþ LÁNýÃÃ Î÷NdN h

171|îÂó¦¤N, õrîÂN, l¿îÂ, Õ±õþ HÂ¿ø¸, ÷R¿d N 15 N

172|'muni'-sabde manana-sila, ara kahe mauni

173|tapasvi, vrati, yati, ara rsi, muni

174|SYNONYMS

175|muni-sabde-by the word muni; manana-sila-who is thoughtful;

>|ara-also; kahe-it means; mauni-one who is silent; tapasvi-

>|an ascetic; vrati-one who keeps great vows; yati-one in the

>|renounced order of life; ara-and; rsi-a saintly person;

>|muni-they are called muni.

176|TRANSLATION

177|"The word 'muni ' refers to one who is thoughtful, one who

>|is grave or silent, an ascetic, one who keeps great vows,

>|one in the renounced order and a saint. These are the

>|different meanings of the word 'muni. '

178|Madhya 24.16

179|TEXT 16

180|TEXT

181|'¿d¢¶SLš'-úNs LÁNýÃÃ, Õ¿õðÃI±-¢¶¿Lš-ýÃÃNd h

182|¿õ¿s-¿dNø¸s-ÎõðÃú±¦a-:±d±¿ðÃ-¿õýÃÃNd N 16 N

183|'nirgrantha'-sabde kahe, avidya-granthi-hina

184|vidhi-nisedha-veda-sastra-jnanadi-vihina

185|SYNONYMS

186|nirgrantha-sabde-by the word nirgrantha; kahe-

>|one means; avidya-of ignorance; granthi-hina-without any

>|knot; vidhi-nisedha-regulative principles of rules and

>|restrictions; veda-sastra-the Vedic literature; jnana-adi-

>|knowledge, and so on; vihina-without.

187|TRANSLATION

188|"The word 'nirgrantha ' refers to one who is liberated from

>|the material knots of ignorance. It also refers to one who

>|is devoid of all regulative principles enjoined in the

>|Vedic literature. It also refers to one who does not have

>|knowledge.

189|Madhya 24.17

190|TEXT 17

191|TEXT

192|÷ÓmS, dNaÂ, Î¥¡26Ã Õ±¿ðÃ ú±¦a¿õþMÃáí h

193|sdu=lþN-¿d¢¶SLš, Õ±õþ Îl ¿dsSd N 17 N

194|murkha, nica, mleccha adi sastra-rikta-gana

195|dhana-sancayi-nirgrantha, ara ye nirdhana

196|SYNONYMS

197|murkha-foolish, illiterate persons; nica-lowborn; mleccha-

>|unclean persons with no principles; adi-and others; sastra-

>|rikta-gana-persons devoid of all regulative principles

>|stated in the sastra; dhana-sancayi- a capitalist (one who

>|gathers wealth); nirgrantha-called nirgrantha; ara-also; ye-

>|anyone who; nirdhana-without riches.

198|TRANSLATION

199|"'Nirgrantha ' also refers to one who is illiterate,

>|lowborn, misbehaved, unregulated and devoid of respect for

>|the Vedic literature. The word also refers to one who is a

>|capitalist and to one who has no riches.

200|Madhya 24.18

201|TEXT 18

202|TEXT

203|¿d¿dS(Nlþ ¿d(c)Á÷±NnS ¿d¿dS÷S±í-¿dNø¸sNlþ±Ð h

204|¢¶NLš± sNd•Ãn uµNtSÂ õíSuS¢¶nNd•Ã¿ó aÂ N 18 N

205|nir niscaye nis kramarthe

206| nir nirmana-nisedhayoh

207|grantho dhane 'tha sandarbhe

208| varna-sangrathane 'pi ca

209|SYNONYMS

210|nih-the prefix nih; niscaye-in the sense of ascertainment;

>|nih-the prefix nih; krama-arthe-in the sense of

>|succession; nih-the prefix nih; nirmana-in the sense of

>|forming; nisedhayoh-in the sense of forbidding; granthah-

>|the word grantha; dhane-in the sense of wealth; atha-also;

>|sandarbhe-thesis; varna-sangrathane-in the sense of tying

>|together words; api-also; ca-and.

211|TRANSLATION

212|"'The prefix "nih " may be used for a sense of

>|ascertainment, gradation, construction or forbidding. The

>|word "grantha " means "riches, " "thesis " and "composition.

>| "'

213|PURPORT

214|This is another quotation from the Visva-prakasa dictionary.

215|Madhya 24.19

216|TEXT 19

217|TEXT

218|'nÂ×S÷'-úNs LÁNýÃÃ, õnÂl lD±õþ S÷ h

219|'S÷'-úNs LÁNýÃÃ Ûý×ÃÃ ó±ðÃ¿õNŽÂóí N 19 N

220|'urukrama'-sabde kahe, bada yanra krama

221|'krama'-sabde kahe ei pada-viksepana

222|SYNONYMS

223|urukrama-sabde-by the word urukrama; kahe-one

>|means; bada-great; yanra-whose; krama-step; krama-sabde- by

>|the word krama; kahe-one means; ei-this; pada-viksepana-

>|throwing forth of the foot.

224|TRANSLATION

225|"The word 'urukrama ' refers to one whose krama [step] is

>|great. The word 'krama ' means 'throwing the foot forward,'

>|that is, ' stepping.'

226|Madhya 24.20

227|TEXT 20

228|TEXT

229|ú¿MÃ, LÁ¥ó, ó¿õþó±iÂN, lR¿MÃ, úNMÃI Õ±S÷í h

230|aÂõþí-aÂ±hNd LDÁ±ó±ý×ÃÃh ¿StRÂõd N 20 N

231|sakti, kampa, paripati, yukti, saktye akramana

232|carana-calane kanpaila tribhuvana

233|SYNONYMS

234|sakti-power; kampa-trembling; paripati-method; yukti-

>|argument; saktye-with great force; akramana-attacking;

>|carana-calane-by moving the foot; kanpaila-caused to

>|tremble; tri-bhuvana-the three worlds.

235|TRANSLATION

236|"'Krama ' also means 'power, ' 'trembling, ' 'a systematic

>|method, ' 'argument ' and 'a forcible attack by stepping

>|forward. ' Thus Vamana caused the three worlds to tremble.

237|PURPORT

238|Uru means "very great, " and krama means "step. " When Lord

>|Vamanadeva was offered three steps of land, He expanded His

>|three steps by covering the entire universe. In this way

>|the three worlds trembled, and therefore Sri Vamanadeva,

>|the incarnation of Lord Visnu, is referred to as Urukrama.

239|Madhya 24.21

240|TEXT 21

241|TEXT

242|¿õNøž±dRS õNlSáíd±S LÁîÂN÷±•ÃýSÃÃîÂNýÃÃ

243|lÐ ó±¿nSõ±dI¿ó LÁ¿õ¿õS÷N÷ õþæÃ±S¿u h

244|aÂ¦¨y lÐ ¦¤õþSýÃÃu±...hîÂ± ¿SóÔ‡ÂS

245|l¦œ±¿Su±÷IuðÃd±ðÃRLÁ¥ólþ±d÷A N 21 N

246|visnor nu virya-gananam katamo 'rhatiha

247| yah parthivany api kavir vimame rajamsi

248|caskambha yah sva-ramhasaskhalata tri-prstham

249| yasmat tri-samya-sadanad uru kampayanam

250|SYNONYMS

251|visnoh-of Lord Visnu; nu-certainly; virya-gananam-a

>|counting of the different potencies; katamah-who; arhati-is

>|able to do; iha-in this world; yah-who; parthivani-of the

>|element earth; api-although; kavih-a learned person; vimame-

>|has counted; rajamsi-the atoms; caskambha-captured; yah-who;

>| sva-His own; ramhasa-by potency; askhalata-without

>|hindrances; tri-prstham-the topmost planet (Satyaloka);

>|yasmat-from some cause; tri-samya-where there is

>|equilibrium of the three gunas; sadanat-from the place (

>|from the root of the material world); uru

>|kampayanam-trembling greatly.

252|TRANSLATION

253|"'Even if a learned man is able to count all the minute

>|atoms in this material world, he still cannot count the

>|potencies of Lord Visnu. In the form of the Vamana

>|incarnation, Lord Visnu, without hindrance, captured all

>|the planets, extending from the root of the material world

>|up to Satyaloka. Indeed, He caused every planetary system

>|to tremble by the force of His steps.'

254|PURPORT

255|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (2.7.40). In the

>|Rg Veda mantras (1.2.154.1), it is said:

256|om visnor nu viryani kam pravocam

257| yah parthivani vimame rajamsi

258|yo 'skambhayad uttaram sadha-stham

259| vicakramanas tredhorugayah

260|The meaning of this verse is practically identical to that

>|of the verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam quoted above.

261|Madhya 24.22

262|TEXT 22

263|TEXT

264|¿õtRÂõþ+Nó õI±Nó, úNMÃI s±õþí-Îó±ø¸í h

265|÷±sRlSúNMÃI Îá±Nh±LÁ, U«NlS óõþNõI±÷ N 22 N

266|vibhu-rupe vyape, saktye dharana-posana

267|madhurya-saktye goloka, aisvarye paravyoma

268|SYNONYMS

269|vibhu-rupe-in His all-pervasive feature; vyape-expands;

>|saktye-by His potency; dharana-posana-maintaining and

>|nourishing; madhurya-saktye-by His potency of conjugal love;

>| goloka-the planetary system Goloka Vrndavana; aisvarye-and

>|by opulence; para-vyoma-the spiritual world.

270|TRANSLATION

271|"Through His all-pervasive feature, the Supreme Personality

>|of Godhead has expanded the entire creation. He is holding

>|and maintaining this creation by His extraordinary potency.

>|By His conjugal potency, He maintains the planetary system

>|known as Goloka Vrndavana. Through His six opulences, He

>|maintains many Vaikuntha planets.

272|PURPORT

273|In His gigantic form, Lord Krsna has covered the creation.

>|He holds all the planetary systems and maintains them by

>|His inconceivable potencies. Similarly, He is maintaining

>|His personal abode, Goloka Vrndavana, through His conjugal

>|love, and He is maintaining the spiritual world containing

>|the Vaikuntha planets by His opulences.

274|Madhya 24.23

275|TEXT 23

276|TEXT

277|÷±lþ±-úNMÃI õrpÁ±G±¿ðÃ-ó¿õþó±iÂN-uÔæÃd h

278|'nÂ×S÷'-úNsõþ Ûý×ÃÃ ÕnS ¿dõþ+óí N 23 N

279|maya-saktye brahmandadi-paripati-srjana

280|'urukrama'-sabdera ei artha nirupana

281|SYNONYMS

282|maya-saktye-by His external potency; brahmanda-adi-of

>|material universes and so on; paripati-an orderly

>|arrangement; srjana-creating; urukrama-sabdera-of the word

>|urukrama; ei-this; artha-of the meaning; nirupana-

>|ascertainment.

283|TRANSLATION

284|"The word 'urukrama ' indicates the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead, who, by His external potency, has perfectly

>|created innumerable universes.

285|Madhya 24.24

286|TEXT 24

287|TEXT

288|"S÷Ð úNMÃN ó¿õþó±iÂI±S S÷(±hdLÁ¥óNlþ±Ð N" 24 N

289|"kramah saktau paripatyam kramas calana-kampayoh"

290|SYNONYMS

291|kramah-the word krama; saktau-in the sense of potency;

>|paripatyam-in the sense of systematic arrangement; kramah-

>|the word krama; calana-in moving; kampayoh-or in trembling.

292|TRANSLATION

293|"'These are the different meanings of the word "krama. "

>|It is used in the sense of potency, systematic arrangement,

>|step, moving or trembling.'

294|PURPORT

295|This is a quotation from the Visva-prakasa dictionary. The

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead is all-pervasive. Not only

>|does He carry the three worlds by His inconceivable energy,

>|but He maintains them also. He is also maintaining His

>|spiritual planet, Goloka Vrndavana, by His conjugal love,

>|and He is maintaining the Vaikunthalokas by His opulences.

>|He maintains the material universes through His external

>|energy. The material universes are perfectly situated

>|because they are created by the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead.

296|Madhya 24.25

297|TEXT 25

298|TEXT

299|'LRÁõS¿(tm)L'-óð ÃÛý×ÃÃ óõþÍ¦œóðÃ ýÃÃlþ h

300|LÔÁøžuRm¿d¿÷MÃÃ tÂæÃNd îÂ±RólS LÁýÃÃlþ N 25 N

301|'kurvanti'-pada ei parasmaipada haya

302|krsna-sukha-nimitta bhajane tatparya kahaya

303|SYNONYMS

304|kurvanti-pada-the word kurvanti; ei-

>|this; parasmai-pada-a verb form indicating things done

>|for others; haya-is; krsna-sukha-nimitta-to satisfy Krsna;

>|bhajane-in devotional service; tatparya-the purport; kahaya-

>|is said.

305|TRANSLATION

306|"The word 'kurvanti ' means 'they do something for

>|others,' since it is a form of the verb ' to do' indicating

>|things done for others. It is used in connection with

>|devotional service, which must be executed for the

>|satisfaction of Krsna. That is the purport of the word '

>|kurvanti. '

307|PURPORT

308|In Sanskrit the verb "to do" has two forms, technically

>|called parasmai-pada and atmane-pada. When things

>|are done for one's personal satisfaction, the form is

>|called atmane-pada. In that case, the word "do" in

>|English is kurvate in Sanskrit. When things are done for

>|others, the verb form changes to kurvanti. Thus Sri

>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu informed Sanatana Gosvami that in the

>|atmarama verse the verb kurvanti means that things should

>|be done only for the satisfaction of Krsna. This is

>|supported by the grammarian Panini. The verb is formed as

>|atmane-pada when the work is to be done for one's own

>|benefit, and when it is done for others, it is called

>|parasmai-pada. Thus the verb is formed according to

>|whether something is done for one's self-satisfaction or

>|for another's satisfaction.

309|Madhya 24.26

310|TEXT 26

311|TEXT

312|"¦¤¿õþîÂ¿ÛžîÂÐ LÁSS¿tÂ›¶±Nlþ ¿

>|S lþ±ôÂNh N" 26 N

313|"svarita-nitah kartr-abhipraye kriya-phale"

314|SYNONYMS

315|svarita-n-itah-of verbs having an indicatory n or a

>|svarita accent; kartr-abhipraye-is meant for the agent;

>|kriya-phale-when the fruit of the action.

316|TRANSLATION

317|"'The terminations of the atmane-pada are employed

>|when the fruit of the action accrues to the agent of verbs

>|having an indicatory n or a svarita accent.'

318|PURPORT

319|This is a quotation from Panini's sutras (1.3.72).

320|Madhya 24.27

321|TEXT 27

322|TEXT

323|'ÎýÃÃîRÂ'-úNs LÁNýÃÃ-tRÂ¿MÃ-Õ±¿ðÃ õ±>±(tm)LNõþ h

324|tRÂ¿MÃ, ¿u¿X, ÷R¿MÃ-÷RmI Ûý×ÃÃ ¿îd ›¶LÁ±Nõþ N 27 N

325|'hetu'-sabde kahe-bhukti-adi vanchantare

326|bhukti, siddhi, mukti-mukhya ei tina prakare

327|SYNONYMS

328|hetu-sabde-by the word hetu; kahe-it is said;

>|bhukti-enjoying the result by oneself; adi-and so on;

>|vancha-antare-because of a different ambition; bhukti-

>|enjoying the result of action; siddhi-the perfection of

>|doing something; mukti-liberation; mukhya-chief; ei-these;

>|tina prakare-in three ways.

329|TRANSLATION

330|"The word 'hetu ' [ 'cause '] means that a thing is done

>|for some motive. There can be three motives. One may act to

>|enjoy the result personally, to achieve some material

>|perfection, or to attain

>|liberation.

331|Madhya 24.28

332|TEXT 28

333|TEXT

334|ÛLÁ tRÂ¿MÃ LÁNýÃÃ, ÎtÂ±á-Õd(tm)L-›¶LÁ±õþ h

335|¿u¿X-Õ(c)†±ðÃú, ÷R¿MÃ-ó=¿õs±LÁ±õþ N 28 N

336|eka bhukti kahe, bhoga-ananta-prakara

337|siddhi-astadasa, mukti-panca-vidhakara

338|SYNONYMS

339|eka-first; bhukti-material enjoyment by doing something;

>|kahe-is known; bhoga-enjoyment; ananta-prakara-unlimited

>|varieties; siddhi-the yogic perfections; astadasa-eighteen

>|in number; mukti-liberation; panca-vidha-akara-five

>|varieties.

340|TRANSLATION

341|"First we take the word 'bhukti ' [ 'material enjoyment '],

>|which is of unlimited variety. We may also take the word '

>|siddhi ' [ 'perfection '], which has eighteen varieties.

>|Similarly, the word 'mukti ' has five varieties.

342|Madhya 24.29

343|TEXT 29

344|TEXT

345|Ûý×ÃÃ lD±ýÃÃ± d±¿ýÃÃ, îÂ±ýÃÃ± tÂ¿MÃ-'ÕÍýÃÃîRÂLÁN' h

346|l±ýÃÃ± ÆýÃÃNîÂ õú ýÃÃlþ MLÔÁøž ÎLÁNîRÂLÁN N 29 N

347|ei yanha nahi, taha bhakti-'ahaituki'

348|yaha haite vasa haya sri-krsna kautuki

349|SYNONYMS

350|ei-these; yanha-where; nahi-not existing; taha-that; bhakti-

>|the platform of devotional service; ahaituki-unmotivated;

>|yaha haite-by which; vasa haya-comes under control; sri-

>|krsna-Lord Sri Krsna; kautuki-the most funny.

351|TRANSLATION

352|"Causeless devotional service is unmotivated by sense

>|enjoyment, perfection or liberation. When one is freed from

>|all these contaminations, he can bring Lord Krsna, who is

>|very funny, under control.

353|Madhya 24.30

354|TEXT 30

355|TEXT

356|'tÂ¿MÃ'-úNsõþ ÕnS ýÃÃlþ ðÃú¿õs±LÁ±õþ h

357|ÛLÁ-'u±sd', 'Î›¶÷tÂ¿MÃ'-dõ ›¶LÁ±õþ N 30 N

358|'bhakti'-sabdera artha haya dasa-vidhakara

359|eka-'sadhana', 'prema-bhakti'-nava prakara

360|SYNONYMS

361|bhakti-sabdera-of the word bhakti; artha-meanings;

>| haya-are; dasa-vidha-akara-ten varieties; eka-one; sadhana-

>|the execution of regulative devotional service; prema-

>|bhakti-ecstatic love of Godhead; nava prakara-nine kinds.

362|TRANSLATION

363|"There are ten meanings for the word 'bhakti ' ['devotional

>|service ']. One is sadhana-bhakti, execution of devotional

>|service according to the regulative principles, and the

>|other nine are varieties of prema-bhakti , ecstatic

>|love of Godhead.

364|PURPORT

365|The nine varieties of prema-bhakti are rati, prema, sneha,

>|mana, pranaya, raga, anuraga, bhava and mahabhava-

>|attraction, love, affection, adverse feelings, intimacy,

>|attachment, subattachment, ecstatic love and sublime

>|ecstatic love. For the word sadhana-bhakti there is only

>|one meaning, "the execution of devotional service according

>|to regulative principles ."

366|Madhya 24.31

367|TEXT 31

368|TEXT

369|'õþ¿îÂ'-hŽÂí±, 'Î›¶÷'-hŽÂí±, ý×ÃÃîÂI±¿ðÃ ›¶aÂ±õþ h

370|tÂ±õõþ+ó±, ÷ýÃÃ±tÂ±õ-hŽÂíõþ+ó± Õ±õþ N 31 N

371|'rati'-laksana, 'prema'-laksana, ityadi pracara

372|bhava-rupa, mahabhava-laksana-rupa ara

373|SYNONYMS

374|rati-of attraction; laksana-the symptoms; prema-of love;

>|laksana-the symptoms; iti-adi-and so on; pracara-are known;

>|bhava-rupa-in the form of ecstatic love; maha-bhava-of

>|higher ecstatic love; laksana-rupa-there are many symptoms;

>|ara-other.

375|TRANSLATION

376|"Next are explained the symptoms of love of Godhead, which

>|can be divided into nine varieties, beginning with

>|attraction and extending up to ecstatic love and finally up

>|to the topmost ecstatic love [mahabhava].

377|Madhya 24.32

378|TEXT 32

379|TEXT

380|ú±(tm)L-tÂNMÃõþ õþ¿îÂ õ±NnÂl 'Î›¶÷'-ólS(tm)L h

381|ðÃ±uI-tÂNMÃõþ õþ¿îÂ ýÃÃlþ 'õþ±á'-ðÃú±-Õ(tm)L N 32 N

382|santa-bhaktera rati bade 'prema'-paryanta

383|dasya-bhaktera rati haya 'raga'-dasa-anta

384|SYNONYMS

385|santa-bhaktera-of devotees on the platform of neutrality;

>|rati-attraction; bade-increases; prema-paryanta-up to love

>|of Godhead; dasya-bhaktera-of devotees on the platform of

>|servitude; rati-attraction; haya-increases; raga-dasa-anta-

>|up to the point of spontaneous attachment.

386|TRANSLATION

387|"The attraction to Krsna of devotees on the platform of

>|neutrality increases up to love of Godhead [prema], and the

>|attraction of devotees on the platform of servitorship

>|increases to spontaneous attachment [raga].

388|Madhya 24.33

389|TEXT 33

390|TEXT

391|um±áNíõþ õþ¿îÂ ýÃÃlþ 'ÕdRõþ±á' ólS(tm)L h

392|¿óîÔÂ-÷±îÔÂ-Î¦§ýÃÃ Õ±¿ðÃ 'ÕdRõþ±á'-Õ(tm)L N 33 N

393|sakha-ganera rati haya 'anuraga' paryanta

394|pitr-matr-sneha adi 'anuraga'-anta

395|SYNONYMS

396|sakha-ganera-of the friends; rati-the attraction; haya-

>|becomes; anuraga paryanta-up to subecstatic love; pitr-matr-

>|sneha-parental love; adi-and so on; anuraga-anta-up to the

>|end of subecstatic love.

397|TRANSLATION

398|"Devotees in Vrndavana who are friends of the Lord can

>|increase their ecstatic love to the point of anuraga.

>|Parental affectionate lovers, Krsna's father and mother,

>|can increase their love of Godhead up to the end of

>|anuraga.

399|Madhya 24.34

400|TEXT 34

401|TEXT

402|LÁ±(tm)L±áNíõþ õþ¿îÂ ó±lþ '÷ýÃÃ±tÂ±õ'-uN÷± h

403|'tÂ¿MÃ'-úNsõþ Ûý×ÃÃ uõ ÕNnSõþ ÷¿ýÃÃ÷± N 34 N

404|kanta-ganera rati paya 'mahabhava'-sima

405|'bhakti'-sabdera ei saba arthera mahima

406|SYNONYMS

407|kanta-ganera-of the devotees in conjugal love; rati-the

>|attraction; paya-attain; maha-bhava-sima-the limit of

>|mahabhava; bhakti-sabdera-of the word

>|bhakti; ei saba-all these; arthera-of the meanings; mahima-

>|of the glories.

408|TRANSLATION

409|"The gopis of Vrndavana who are attached to Krsna in

>|conjugal love can increase their ecstatic love up to the

>|point of mahabhava, the greatest ecstatic love . These

>|are some of the glorious meanings of the word 'bhakti

>|.'

410|Madhya 24.35

411|TEXT 35

412|TEXT

413|'ý×ÃÃOy²îÂ&íÐ'-úNsõþ qdýÃÃ õI±mI±d h

414|'ý×ÃÃOS'-úNsõþ ¿tÂi§ ÕnS, '&í'-úNsõþ Õ±d N 35 N

415|'ittham-bhuta-gunah'-sabdera sunaha vyakhyana

416|'ittham'-sabdera bhinna artha, 'guna'-sabdera ana

417|SYNONYMS

418|ittham-bhuta-gunah-sabdera-of

>|the word ittham-bhuta-gunah; sunaha-please hear; vyakhyana-

>|the explanation; ittham- sabdera-of the word

>|ittham; bhinna artha-different meanings; guna-

>|sabdera-of the word guna; ana- others.

419|TRANSLATION

420|"Please hear the meaning of the word 'ittham-bhuta-guna, '

>|which is found in the atmarama verse. 'Ittham-bhuta ' has

>|different meanings, and 'guna ' has other meanings.

421|Madhya 24.36

422|TEXT 36

423|TEXT

424|'ý×ÃÃOy²îÂ'-úNsõþ ÕnS-óÓíS±dµ÷lþ h

425|lD±õþ Õ±Ná õrpÁ±dµ îÔÂí›¶±lþ ýÃÃlþ N 36 N

426|'ittham-bhuta'-sabdera artha-purnanandamaya

427|yanra age brahmananda trna-praya haya

428|SYNONYMS

429|ittham-bhuta-sabdera-of the

>|word ittham-bhuta ; artha-the meaning or import; purna-

>|ananda-maya-full of transcendental bliss; yanra age-in

>|front of which; brahma-ananda-the transcendental bliss

>|derived from impersonalism; trna-praya-just like straw;

>|haya-is.

430|TRANSLATION

431|"The word 'ittham-bhuta ' is transcendentally exalted

>|because it means 'full of transcendental bliss.' Before

>|this transcendental bliss, the bliss derived from merging

>|into the existence of the Absolute [brahmananda] becomes

>|like a piece of straw in comparison.

432|Madhya 24.37

433|TEXT 37

434|TEXT

435|QRu±ŽÂ±RLÁõþí±‡ÃÃ±ðÃ¿õqX±¿t¿¦šîÂuI Î÷ h

436|uRm±¿d Îá±(c)óðÃ±lþN(tm)L õr±pÁ±íI¿ó æÃáðAÃ&Nõþ± N 37 N

437|tvat-saksat-karanahlada-

438| visuddhabdhi-sthitasya me

439|sukhani gos-padayante

440| brahmany api jagad-guro

441|SYNONYMS

442|tvat-Your; saksat-meeting; karana-such action; ahlada-

>|pleasure; visuddha -spiritually purified; abdhi-

>|ocean; sthitasya-being situated; me-by me; sukhani-

>|happiness; gos-padayante- becomes like a small

>|hole created by the hoof of a calf; brahmani-the pleasure

>|derived from impersonal Brahman understanding; api-also;

>|jagat-guro-O master of the universe.

443|TRANSLATION

444|"'My dear Lord, O master of the universe, since I have

>|directly seen You, my transcendental bliss has taken the

>|shape of a great ocean. Being situated in that ocean, I now

>|realize all other so-called happiness to be like the water

>|contained in the hoofprint of a calf.'

445|PURPORT

446|This is a verse from the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya (14.36).

447|Madhya 24.38

448|TEXT 38

449|TEXT

450|uõS±LÁø¸SLÁ, uõS±‡ÃÃ±ðÃLÁ, ÷ýÃÃ±õþu±lþd h

451|Õ±ód±õþ õNh LÁNõþ uõS-¿õ¦œ±õþí N 38 N

452|sarvakarsaka, sarvahladaka, maha-rasayana

453|apanara bale kare sarva-vismarana

454|SYNONYMS

455|sarva-akarsaka-all-attractive; sarva-ahladaka-all-pleasing;

>|maha-rasa-ayana-the complete abode of transcendental

>|mellows; apanara bale-by His own strength; kare-causes;

>|sarva-vismarana-forgetfulness of all other bliss.

456|TRANSLATION

457|"Lord Krsna is so exalted that He is more attractive than

>|anything else and more pleasing than anything else. He is

>|the most sublime abode of bliss. By His own strength, He

>|causes one to forget all other ecstasies.

458|Madhya 24.39

459|TEXT 39

460|TEXT

461|tRÂ¿MÃ-÷R¿MÃ-¿u¿X-uRm rÃ±nÂllþ l±õþ áNg h

462|ÕNhN¿LÁLÁ ú¿MÃ-&Ní LÔÁøžLÔÁó±lþ õ±Ng N 39 N

463|bhukti-mukti-siddhi-sukha chadaya yara gandhe

464|alaukika sakti-gune krsna-krpaya bandhe

465|SYNONYMS

466|bhukti-material enjoyment; mukti-liberation from material

>|suffering; siddhi-the perfection of mystic yoga; sukha-the

>|happiness derived from these things; chadaya-one gives up;

>|yara-of which; gandhe-simply by the slight fragrance;

>|alaukika-uncommon, transcendental; sakti-gune-by the power

>|and quality; krsna-krpaya-by the mercy of Lord Krsna;

>|bandhe-one becomes bound.

467|TRANSLATION

468|"Pure devotional service is so sublime that one can very

>|easily forget the happiness derived from material enjoyment,

>| material liberation and mystic or yogic perfection. Thus

>|the devotee is bound by Krsna's mercy and His uncommon

>|power and qualities.

469|Madhya 24.40

470|TEXT 40

471|TEXT

472|ú±¦alR¿MÃ d±¿ýÃÃ ý×ÃÃýÃÃD± ¿uX±(tm)L-¿õaÂ±õþ h

473|Ûý×ÃÃ ¦¤tÂ±õ-&Ní, l±NîÂ ÷±sRNlSõþ u±õþ N 40 N

474|sastra-yukti nahi ihan siddhanta-vicara

475|ei svabhava-gune, yate madhuryera sara

476|SYNONYMS

477|sastra-yukti-logic on the basis of revealed scripture; nahi-

>|there is not; ihan-here; siddhanta-vicara-consideration of

>|logical conclusions; ei-this; svabhava-gune-a natural

>|quality; yate-in which; madhuryera sara-the essence of all

>|transcendental bliss.

478|TRANSLATION

479|"When one is attracted to Krsna on the transcendental

>|platform, there is no longer any logical argument on the

>|basis of revealed scripture, nor are there considerations

>|of such conclusions. This is His transcendental quality

>|that is the essence of all transcendental sweetness.

480|Madhya 24.41

481|TEXT 41

482|TEXT

483|'&í' úNsõþ ÕnS-LÔÔÁNøžõþ &í Õd(tm)L h

484|u¿2aÂðÃAõþ+ó-&í uõS óÓíS±dµ N 41 N

485|'guna' sabdera artha-krsnera guna ananta

486|sac-cid-rupa-guna sarva purnananda

487|SYNONYMS

488|guna sabdera artha-the meaning of the word guna; krsnera

>|guna ananta-Krsna has unlimited qualities; sat-cit-rupa-

>|guna-such qualities are spiritual and eternal; sarva purna-

>|ananda-full of all transcendental bliss.

489|TRANSLATION

490|"The word 'guna ' means 'quality.' The qualities of Krsna

>|are transcendentally situated and are unlimited in quantity.

>| All of the spiritual qualities are full of transcendental

>|bliss.

491|Madhya 24.42

492|TEXT 42

493|TEXT

494|U«lS-÷±sRlS-LÁ±NíI ¦¤õþ+ó-óÓíSîÂ± h

495|tÂMÃõ±RuhI, Õ±RólS(tm)L õðÃ±dIîÂ± N 42 N

496|aisvarya-madhurya-karunye svarupa-purnata

497|bhakta-vatsalya, atma-paryanta vadanyata

498|SYNONYMS

499|aisvarya-opulence; madhurya-transcendental sweetness;

>|karunye-mercy; svarupa-purnata-fullness of spiritual value;

>|bhakta-vatsalya-affection for the devotee; atma-paryanta-up

>|to the point of His personal self; vadanyata-magnanimity.

500|TRANSLATION

501|"Krsna's transcendental qualities of opulence,

>|sweetness and mercy are perfect and full. As far as Krsna's

>|affectionate leaning toward His devotees is concerned, He

>|is so magnanimous that He can give Himself to His devotees.

502|Madhya 24.43

503|TEXT 43

504|TEXT

505|ÕNhN¿LÁLÁ õþ+ó, õþu, ÎuNõþtÂ±¿ðÃ &í h

506|LÁ±Nõþ± ÷d ÎLÁ±d &Ní LÁNõþ Õ±LÁø¸Sí N 43 N

507|alaukika rupa, rasa, saurabhadi guna

508|karo mana kona gune kare akarsana

509|SYNONYMS

510|alaukika rupa-uncommon beauty; rasa-mellows; saurabha-adi

>|guna-qualities like transcendental fragrance; karo mana-the

>|mind of a devotee; kona gune-by some particular quality;

>|kare-does; akarsana-attracting.

511|TRANSLATION

512|"Krsna has unlimited qualities. The devotees are attracted

>|by His uncommon beauty, mellows and fragrance. Thus they

>|are differently situated in the different transcendental

>|mellows. Therefore Krsna is called all-attractive.

513|Madhya 24.44

514|TEXT 44

515|TEXT

516|udLÁ±¿ðÃõþ ÷d ýÃÃ¿õþh ÎuNõþtÂ±¿ðÃ &Ní N 44 N

517|sanakadira mana harila saurabhadi gune

518|SYNONYMS

519|sanaka-adira mana-the minds of saintly sages like Sanaka

>|and Sanatana; harila-attracted; saurabha-adi-such as the

>|transcendental aroma of His lotus feet; gune-by the quality.

520|TRANSLATION

521|"The minds of the four boy sages [Sanaka, Sanatana,

>|Sanandana and Sanat-kumara] were attracted to the lotus

>|feet of Krsna by the aroma of the tulasi that had been

>|offered to the Lord.

522|Madhya 24.45

523|TEXT 45

524|TEXT

525|îÂuI±õþ¿õµdlþduI óðÃ±õþ¿õµ-

526|¿LÁ?{Ã¨¿÷|îRÂhuN÷LÁõþµõ±lþRÐ h

527|Õ(tm)LáSîÂÐ ¦¤¿õõNõþí aÂLÁ±õþ ÎîÂø¸±S

528|uSNŽÂ±tÂ÷ŽÂõþæRÃø¸±÷¿ó ¿aÂMÃÃîÂNi¤±Ð N 45 N

529|tasyaravinda-nayanasya padaravinda-

530| kinjalka-misra-tulasi-makaranda-vayuh

531|antar-gatah sva-vivarena cakara tesam

532| sanksobham aksara-jusam api citta-tanvoh

533|SYNONYMS

534|tasya-of Him; aravinda-nayanasya-of the Supreme Personality

>|of Godhead, whose eyes are like the petals of a lotus; pada-

>|aravinda-of the lotus feet; kinjalka-with saffron; misra-

>|mixed; tulasi-of tulasi leaves; makaranda-with the aroma;

>|vayuh-the air; antah-gatah-entered; sva-vivarena-

>|through the nostrils; cakara-created; tesam-of them;

>|sanksobham-strong agitation; aksara-jusam-of the

>|impersonally self-realized (Kumaras); api-also; citta-

>|tanvoh-of the mind and body.

535|TRANSLATION

536|"'When the breeze carrying the aroma of tulasi leaves and

>|saffron from the lotus feet of the lotus-eyed Personality

>|of Godhead entered through the nostrils into the hearts of

>|those sages [the Kumaras], they experienced a change in

>|both body and mind, even though they were attached to the

>|impersonal Brahman understanding.'

537|PURPORT

538|This is a verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (3.15.43). For an

>|explanation, see Madhya-lila 17.142 .

539|Madhya 24.46

540|TEXT 46

541|TEXT

542|qLÁNðÃNõõþ ÷d ýÃÃ¿õþh hNh±-|õNí N 46 N

543|sukadevera mana harila lila-sravane

544|SYNONYMS

545|sukadevera-of Sukadeva Gosvami; mana-the mind; harila-

>|carried away; lila-sravane-by hearing the pastimes of

>|the Lord.

546|TRANSLATION

547|"Sukadeva's mind was carried away by hearing the

>|pastimes of the Lord.

548|Madhya 24.47

549|TEXT 47

550|TEXT

551|ó¿õþ¿d¿‡ÂNîÂ±•Ã¿ó Æd&SNíI nÂ×MÃÃ÷ÐN±LÁhNhlþ± h

552|áÔýÃÃNîÂNaÂîÂ± õþ±æÃNø¸S Õ±mI±dS lðÃsNîÂõ±dA N 47 N

553|parinisthito 'pi nairgunye

554| uttamahsloka-lilaya

555|grhita-ceta rajarse

556| akhyanam yad adhitavan

557|SYNONYMS

558|parinisthitah-situated; api-although; nairgunye-in the

>|transcendental position, freed from the material modes of

>|nature; uttamah-sloka-lilaya-by the pastimes of the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead, Uttamahsloka; grhita-cetah-the mind

>|became fully taken over; raja-rse-O great King;

>|akhyanam-the narration; yat-which; adhitavan-studied.

559|TRANSLATION

560|"[ Sukadeva Gosvami addressed Pariksit Maharaja : ] 'My

>|dear King, although I was fully situated in the

>|transcendental position, I was nonetheless attracted to the

>|pastimes of Lord Krsna. Therefore I studied Srimad-

>|Bhagavatam from my father.'

561|PURPORT

562|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (2.1.9).

563|Madhya 24.48

564|TEXT 48

565|TEXT

566|¦¤uRm¿dtÔÂîÂNaÂîÂ±(tm)¦ðAÃõRIðÃ(tm)¦±dItÂ±Nõ±•ÃÃ-

567|óI¿æÃîÂ¿aÂõþhNh±LÔÁ(c)†u±õþ(tm)¦ðÃNlþ÷A h

568|õIîdRîÂ LÔÁólþ± l(tm)¦NðÃNóS óRõþ±íS

569|îÂ÷¿mhõÔ¿æÃdâ(r)S õI±u-uÓdRS dNîÂ±•Ã¿¦œ N 48 N

570|sva-sukha-nibhrta-cetas tad-vyudastanya-bhavo

571| 'py ajita-rucira-lilakrsta-saras tadiyam

572|vyatanuta krpaya yas tattva-dipam puranam

573| tam akhila-vrjina-ghnam vyasa-sunum nato 'smi

574|SYNONYMS

575|sva-sukha-nirbhrta-cetah-whose mind was always fully

>|absorbed in the happiness of self-realization; tat-by that;

>|vyudasta-anya-bhavah-being freed from all other attractions;

>| api-although; ajita-rucira-lila-by the most attractive

>|pastimes of Ajita, the Supreme Personality of Godhead;

>|akrsta-attracted; sarah-whose heart; tadiyam-in relation to

>|the Lord; vyatanuta-described and spread; krpaya-out of

>|mercy; yah-he who; tattva-dipam-which is the light of the

>|Absolute Truth; puranam-the supplementary Vedic literature

>|Srimad-Bhagavatam; tam-to him; akhila-vrjina-ghnam-who can

>|destroy all kinds of material misery; vyasa-sunum-Sukadeva

>|Gosvami, the son of Vyasadeva; natah asmi-I offer my

>|respectful obeisances.

576|TRANSLATION

577|"'I offer my respectful obeisances unto Srila Sukadeva

>|Gosvami, the son of Vyasadeva and the destroyer of all

>|sinful reactions . Being full in self-realization and

>|bliss , he had no material desire. Still,

>|he was attracted by the transcendental pastimes of the

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead, and out of compassion for

>|the people he described the transcendental historical

>|literature called Srimad-Bhagavatam. This is compared to

>|the light of the Absolute Truth.'

578|PURPORT

579|This verse is from Srimad-Bhagavatam (12.12.69).

580|Madhya 24.49

581|TEXT 49

582|TEXT

583|MÕ/-õþ+Nó ýÃÃNõþ Îá±¿óLÁ±õþ ÷d N 49 N

584|sri-anga-rupe hare gopikara mana

585|SYNONYMS

586|sri-anga-of His transcendental body; rupe-by the beauty;

>|hare-attracts; gopikara mana-the minds of the gopis.

587|TRANSLATION

588|"Lord Sri Krsna attracts the minds of all the gopis with

>|His beautiful, transcendental bodily features.

589|Madhya 24.50

590|TEXT 50

591|TEXT

592|õNŽÂI±hLÁ±õÔîÂ÷RmS îÂõ LRÁGh¿|-

593|áG¦šh±sõþuRsS ýÃÃ¿uîÂ±õNh±LÁ÷A h

594|ðÃMÃÃ±tÂlþ= tRÂæÃðÃGlRáS ¿õNh±LÁI

595|õŽÂÐ ¿|ÍlþLÁõþ÷í= tÂõ±÷ ðÃ±uIÐ N 50 N

596|viksyalakavrta-mukham tava kundala-sri-

597| ganda-sthaladhara-sudham hasitavalokam

598|dattabhayam ca bhuja-danda-yugam vilokya

599| vaksah sriyaika-ramanam ca bhavama dasyah

600|SYNONYMS

601|viksya-seeing; alaka-avrta-mukham-face decorated with

>|curling tresses of hair; tava-Your; kundala-sri-beauty of

>|earrings; ganda-sthala-falling on Your cheeks; adhara-

>|sudham-and the nectar from Your lips; hasita-avalokam-Your

>|smiling glance; datta-abhayam-which assure fearlessness; ca-

>|and; bhuja-danda-yugam-the two arms; vilokya-by seeing;

>|vaksah-chest; sriya-by the beauty; eka-ramanam-chiefly

>|producing conjugal attraction; ca-and; bhavama-we have

>|become; dasyah-Your maidservants.

602|TRANSLATION

603|"'Dear Krsna, we have simply surrendered ourselves as Your

>|maidservants, for we have seen Your beautiful face

>|decorated with tresses of hair, Your earrings falling upon

>|Your cheeks , the nectar of Your lips ,

>|and the beauty of Your smile . Indeed , because we have

>|also been embraced by Your arms, which give us courage ,

>| and seen Your chest, which is beautiful and

>|broad, we have surrendered ourselves.'

604|PURPORT

605|This verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.29.39) was spoken by

>|the gopis when they arrived near Krsna for the rasa dance

>|on a full- moon night. The attracted gopis were

>|awestruck, and they began to speak about how they came to

>|Krsna to enjoy the rasa dance.

606|Madhya 24.51

607|TEXT 51

608|TEXT

609|õþ+ó-&í-|õNí ¿%íI±¿ðÃõþ Õ±LÁø¸Sí N 51 N

610|rupa-guna-sravane rukminy-adira akarsana

611|SYNONYMS

612|rupa-beauty; guna-qualities; sravane-by hearing; rukmini-

>|adira-of the queens, headed by Rukmini; akarsana-attracting.

613|TRANSLATION

614|"The queens in Dvaraka, headed by Rukmini, are also

>|attracted to Krsna simply by hearing about His

>|transcendental beauty and qualities.

615|Madhya 24.52

616|TEXT 52

617|TEXT

618||n¸Q± &í±dA tRÂõduRµõþ úÔ°«îÂ±S ÎîÂ

619|¿d¿õSúI LÁíS¿õõÍõþýSÃÃõþNîÂ±•Ã/îÂ±ó÷A h

620|Âõþ+óS ðÔÃú±S ðÔÃ¿ú÷îÂ±÷¿mh±nSh±tÂS

621|QlIaRÂIîÂ±¿õú¿îÂ ¿aÂMÃÃ÷óSóS Î÷ N 52 N

622|srutva gunan bhuvana-sundara srnvatam te

623| nirvisya karna-vivarair harato 'nga-tapam

624|rupam drsam drsimatam akhilartha-labham

625| tvayy acyutavisati cittam apatrapam me

626|SYNONYMS

627|srutva-hearing; gunan-the transcendental qualities; bhuvana-

>|sundara-O most beautiful one in the whole creation;

>|srnvatam-of those hearing; te-Your; nirvisya-entering;

>|karna-vivaraih-by the holes of the ears; haratah anga-tapam-

>|decreasing all the miserable conditions of the body; rupam-

>|the beauty; drsam-of the eyes; drsi-matam-of those

>|who can see; akhila-artha-labham-the achievement of all

>|kinds of gains; tvayi-unto You; acyuta-O infallible one;

>|avisati-enters; cittam-the consciousness; apatrapam-without

>|shame; me-my.

628|TRANSLATION

629|"'O most beautiful Krsna, I have heard about Your

>|transcendental qualities from others, and therefore all my

>|bodily miseries are relieved. If someone sees Your

>|transcendental beauty, his eyes have attained everything

>|profitable in life. O infallible one, I have become

>|shameless after hearing of Your qualities, and I have

>|become attracted to You.'

630|PURPORT

631|This verse (Srimad-Bhagavatam 10.52.37) was written by

>|Rukminidevi in a letter to Krsna inviting Him to kidnap her.

>| Sukadeva Gosvami described this to Maharaja Pariksit when

>|the King asked him how Rukmini had been kidnapped. Rukmini

>|had heard about Krsna's qualities from different people,

>|and after she heard about them, she decided to accept Krsna

>|as her husband. Everything had been arranged for her

>|marriage to Sisupala; therefore she wrote a letter to Krsna,

>| which she sent through a brahmana, and invited Him to

>|kidnap her.

632|Madhya 24.53

633|TEXT 53

634|TEXT

635|õSúN-áNNîÂ ýÃÃNõþ LÔÁøž h„I±¿ðÃõþ ÷d N 53 N

636|vamsi-gite hare krsna laksmy-adira mana

637|SYNONYMS

638|vamsi-gite-by the vibration of His flute; hare-attracts;

>|krsna-Lord Krsna; laksmi-adira-of the goddess of fortune

>|and others; mana-the mind.

639|TRANSLATION

640|"Lord Krsna even attracts the mind of the goddess of

>|fortune simply by vibrating His transcendental flute.

641|Madhya 24.54

642|TEXT 54

643|TEXT

644|LÁuI±dRtÂ±Nõ±•ÃuI d ÎðÃõ ¿õ1/2NýÃÃ

645|îÂõ±¿ãÃÃ¸ârNõþíR¦óõþú±¿sLÁ±õþÐ h

646|lZ±>lþ± MhShd±aÂõþMÃÃNó±

647|¿õýÃÃ±lþ LÁ±÷±dA uR¿aÂõþS sÔîÂõrîÂ± N 54 N

648|kasyanubhavo 'sya na deva vidmahe

649| tavanghri-renu-sparasadhikarah

650|yad-vanchaya srir lalanacarat tapo

651| vihaya kaman su-ciram dhrta-vrata

652|SYNONYMS

653|kasya-of what; anubhavah-a result; asya-of the serpent (

>|Kaliya); na-not; deva-O Lord; vidmahe-we know; tava-anghri-

>|of Your lotus feet; renu-of the dust; sparasa-for touching;

>|adhikarah-qualification; yat-which; vanchaya-by desiring;

>|srih-the goddess of fortune; lalana-the topmost woman;

>|acarat-performed; tapah-austerity; vihaya-giving up; kaman-

>|all desires; su-ciram-for a long time; dhrta-a law

>|upheld; vrata-as a vow.

654|TRANSLATION

655|"'O Lord, we do not know how the serpent Kaliya attained

>|such an opportunity to be touched by the dust of Your lotus

>|feet. For this end, the goddess of fortune performed

>|austerities for centuries, giving up all other desires and

>|taking austere vows. Indeed, we do not know how this

>|serpent Kaliya got such an opportunity.'

656|PURPORT

657|This verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.16.36) was spoken by

>|the wives of the Kaliya serpent.

658|Madhya 24.55

659|TEXT 55

660|TEXT

661|Îl±áItÂ±Nõ æÃáNîÂ lîÂ lRõîÂNõþ áí N 55 N

662|yogya-bhave jagate yata yuvatira gana

663|SYNONYMS

664|yogya-bhave-by proper behavior; jagate-within the three

>|worlds; yata-all; yuvatira gana-the groups of young girls.

665|TRANSLATION

666|"Krsna attracts not only the minds of the gopis and the

>|goddesses of fortune but the minds of all the young girls

>|in the three worlds as well.

667|Madhya 24.56

668|TEXT 56

669|TEXT

670|LÁ±¦aI/ ÎîÂ LÁhóðÃ±÷ÔîÂNõíRáNîÂ-

671|uN¥œ±¿ýÃÃîÂ±lSaÂ¿õþîÂ±i§ aÂNh¿SNh±LÁI±÷A h

672|ÆSNh±LÁINuNtÂá¿÷ðÃ= ¿dõþNŽÂI õþ+óS

673|lðÃANá±¿ZæÃ^n÷÷Ôá±Ð óRhLÁ±dI¿õwdA N 56 N

674|ka stry anga te kala-padamrta-venu-gita-

675| sammohitarya-caritan na calet tri-lokyam

676|trailokya-saubhagam idam ca niriksya rupam

677| yad go-dvija-druma-mrgah pulakany abibhran

678|SYNONYMS

679|ka stri-who is that woman; anga-O Krsna; te-of You; kala-

>|pada-by the rhythms; amrta-venu-gita-and sweet songs of

>|Your flute; sammohita-being captivated; arya-caritat-from

>|the path of chastity according to Vedic civilization; na-

>|not; calet-would wander; tri-lokyam-within the three worlds;

>| trai-lokya-saubhagam-which is the fortune of the

>|three worlds; idam-this; ca-and; niriksya-by observing;

>|rupam-the beauty; yat-which; go-the cows; dvija-the birds;

>|druma-the trees; mrgah-forest animals like the deer;

>|pulakani-transcendental jubilation; abibhran-manifested.

680|TRANSLATION

681|"'My dear Lord Krsna, where is that woman within the three

>|worlds who would not be captivated by the rhythms of the

>|sweet songs coming from Your wonderful flute? Who would

>|not fall down from the path of chastity in this way? Your

>|beauty is the most sublime within the three worlds. Upon

>|seeing Your beauty, even cows, birds, animals and trees in

>|the forest become stunned in jubilation.'

682|PURPORT

683|This verse is from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.29.40).

684|Madhya 24.57

685|TEXT 57

686|TEXT

687|&îRÂhI ¦aNáNíõþ õ±RuNhI Õ±LÁø¸Sí h

688|ðÃ±uI-umI±¿ðÃ-tÂ±Nõ óRø¸±¿ðÃ áí N 57 N

689|guru-tulya stri-ganera vatsalye akarsana

690|dasya-sakhyadi-bhave purusadi gana

691|SYNONYMS

692|guru-tulya-on the level of a superior guardian; stri-ganera-

>|of the ladies of Vrndavana; vatsalye-in parental affection;

>|akarsana-attracting; dasya-sakhya-adi-servants, friends

>|and others; bhave-in the mood of; purusa-adi gana-all the

>|males of Vrndavana.

693|TRANSLATION

694|"The women of Vrndavana who are on the level of superior

>|guardians are attracted to Lord Krsna maternally. The men

>|of Vrndavana are attracted as servants, friends and fathers

>|.

695|Madhya 24.58

696|TEXT 58

697|TEXT

698|óŽÂN, ÷Ôá, õÔŽÂ, hîÂ±, ÎaÂîd±NaÂîd h

699|Î›¶N÷ ÷MÃÃ LÁ¿õþ' Õ±LÁø¸SNlþ LÔÁøž&í N 58 N

700|paksi, mrga, vrksa, lata, cetanacetana

701|preme matta kari' akarsaye krsna-guna

702|SYNONYMS

703|paksi-birds; mrga-animals; vrksa-trees; lata-creepers;

>|cetana-acetana-living entities and even the stones and wood;

>| preme-in ecstatic love; matta-captivated; kari'-making;

>|akarsaye-attract; krsna-guna-the qualities of Krsna.

704|TRANSLATION

705|"The qualities of Krsna captivate and attract everything,

>|living and nonliving. Even birds, animals and trees are

>|attracted to Krsna's qualities.

706|Madhya 24.59

707|TEXT 59

708|TEXT

709|'ýÃÃ¿õþÐ'-úNs d±d±nS, ðRÃý×ÃÃ ÷RmIîÂ÷ h

710|uõS Õ÷/h ýÃÃNõþ, Î›¶÷ ¿ðÃlþ± ýÃÃNõþ ÷d N 59 N

711|'harih'-sabde nanartha, dui mukhyatama

712|sarva amangala hare, prema diya hare mana

713|SYNONYMS

714|harih-sabde-by the word hari; nana-artha-different

>|imports; dui-two; mukhya-tama-chief; sarva-all; amangala-

>|inauspiciousness; hare-takes away; prema diya-by ecstatic

>|love; hare-attracts; mana-the mind.

715|TRANSLATION

716|"Although the word 'hari ' has many different meanings, two

>|of them are foremost. One meaning is that the Lord takes

>|away all inauspicious things from His devotee, and the

>|second meaning is that He attracts the mind by ecstatic

>|love for God.

717|Madhya 24.60

718|TEXT 60

719|TEXT

720|ÆlNrÃ ÆîÂNrÃ Îl±¿ýÃÃ ÎLÁ±¿ýÃÃ LÁõþNlþ ¦œõþí h

721|aÂ±¿õþ¿õs îÂ±ó îÂ±õþ LÁNõþ uSýÃÃõþí N 60 N

722|yaiche taiche yohi kohi karaye smarana

723|cari-vidha tapa tara kare samharana

724|SYNONYMS

725|yaiche taiche-somehow or other; yohi kohi-anywhere and

>|everywhere; karaye smarana-remembers; cari-vidha-the four

>|kinds; tapa-miserable conditions of life; tara-of the

>|devotee; kare samharana-He takes away.

726|TRANSLATION

727|"When the devotee somehow or other always remembers the

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead anywhere and everywhere,

>|Lord Hari takes away life's four miserable conditions.

728|PURPORT

729|The four miserable conditions are due to the four kinds of

>|sinful activities, known as (1) pataka, (2) uru-

>|pataka, (3) maha-pataka and (4) ati-pataka-

>|preliminary sin, very great sin, greater sin and topmost

>|sin. However, Krsna assures the devotee, aham tvam sarva-

>|papebhyo moksayisyami ma sucah: [Bg. 18.66] "I will protect

>|you from all sinful reactions. Do not fear." The word sarva-

>|papebhyah indicates four kinds of sinful activities. As

>|soon as the devotee surrenders unto Krsna's lotus feet, he

>|is certainly relieved from all sinful activities and their

>|results. The four basic sinful activities are summarized as

>|illicit sex, intoxication, gambling and meat-eating.

730|Madhya 24.61

731|TEXT 61

732|TEXT

733|ln±¿¢ŸÐ uRu÷ÔX±¿aÂSÐ LÁNõþ±NîÂIs±S¿u tÂ¦

>|œu±R h

734|îÂn± ÷¿Zø¸lþ± tÂ¿MÃXÍõd±S¿u LÔÁR¦§úÐ

>| N 61 N

735|yathagnih su-samrddharcih

736| karoty edhamsi bhasma-sat

737|tatha mad-visaya bhaktir

738| uddhavainamsi krtsnasah

739|SYNONYMS

740|yatha-as; agnih-a fire; su-samrddha-arcih-having a full

>|flame; karoti-makes; edhamsi-fuel; bhasma-sat-into

>|ashes; tatha-similarly; mat-visaya bhaktih-devotional

>|service in relation to Me; uddhava-O Uddhava; enamsi-all

>|kinds of sinful activity; krtsnasah-totally.

741|TRANSLATION

742|"'As all fuel is burned to ashes by a full-fledged fire,

>|all sinful activities are totally erased when one engages

>|in devotional service to Me.'

743|PURPORT

744|This verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (11.14.19) was spoken

>|by Lord Krsna.

745|Madhya 24.62

746|TEXT 62

747|TEXT

748|îÂNõ LÁNõþ tÂ¿MÃõ±sLÁ LÁ÷S, Õ¿õðÃI± d±ú h

749||õí±NðÃIõþ ôÂh 'Î›¶÷±' LÁõþNlþ ›¶LÁ±ú N 62 N

750|tabe kare bhakti-badhaka karma, avidya nasa

751|sravanadyera phala 'prema' karaye prakasa

752|SYNONYMS

753|tabe-thereafter; kare-does; bhakti-badhaka-impediments on

>|the path of devotional service; karma-activities; avidya-

>|ignorance; nasa-vanquishing; sravana-adyera-of hearing,

>|chanting and so forth; phala-the result; prema-love of

>|Godhead; karaye prakasa-causes a manifestation of.

754|TRANSLATION

755|"In this way, when all sinful activities are vanquished by

>|the grace of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, one

>|gradually vanquishes all kinds of impediments on the path

>|of devotional service, as well as the ignorance resulting

>|from these impediments. After this, one totally manifests

>|his original love of Godhead through devotional service in

>|nine different ways-hearing, chanting and so forth.

756|Madhya 24.63

757|TEXT 63

758|TEXT

759|¿dæÃ-&Ní îÂNõ ýÃÃNõþ ÎðÃNýÃÃ¿flþ÷d h

760|UNrÃ LÔÁó±hR LÔÁøž, UNrÃ îDÂ±õþ &í N 63 N

761|nija-gune tabe hare dehendriya-mana

762|aiche krpalu krsna, aiche tanra guna

763|SYNONYMS

764|nija-gune-by transcendental qualities; tabe-then; hare-

>|attracts; deha-indriya-mana-the body, senses and mind;

>|aiche-in that way; krpalu krsna-merciful Krsna; aiche-in

>|that way; tanra-His; guna-transcendental qualities.

765|TRANSLATION

766|"When the devotee is freed from all sinful material

>|activities, Krsna attracts his body, mind and senses to His

>|service. Thus Krsna is very merciful, and His

>|transcendental qualities are very attractive.

767|Madhya 24.64

768|TEXT 64

769|TEXT

770|aÂ±¿õþ óRø¸±nS rÃ±nÂl±lþ, &Ní ýÃÃNõþ uõ±õþ ÷d h

771|'ýÃÃ¿õþ'-úNsõþ Ûý×ÃÃ ÷RmI LÁ¿ýÃÃhRD hŽÂí N 64 N

772|cari purusartha chadaya, gune hare sabara mana

773|'hari'-sabdera ei mukhya kahilun laksana

774|SYNONYMS

775|cari purusa-artha-the four kinds of so-called goals of life;

>| chadaya-causes to give up; gune-by the transcendental

>|qualities; hare-attracts; sabara mana-everyone's mind; hari-

>|sabdera-of the word hari; ei-this; mukhya-chief;

>|kahilun-I have explained; laksana-the symptoms.

776|TRANSLATION

777|"When one's mind, senses and body are attracted to the

>|transcendental qualities of Hari, one gives up the four

>|principles of material success. Thus I have explained the

>|chief meanings of the word 'hari. '

778|PURPORT

779|The four principles of material success are (1) religious

>|performance, (2) economic development, (3) sense

>|gratification and (4) liberation, or merging into the

>|impersonal effulgence of Brahman. These things do not

>|interest the devotee.

780|Madhya 24.65

781|TEXT 65

782|TEXT

783|'aÂ' 'Õ¿ó', ðRÃý×ÃÃ ús îÂ±NîÂ 'ÕõIlþ' ýÃÃlþ h

784|Îlý×ÃÃ ÕnS h±á±ý×ÃÃNlþ, Îuý×ÃÃ ÕnS ýÃÃlþ N 65 N

785|'ca' 'api', dui sabda tate 'avyaya' haya

786|yei artha lagaiye, sei artha haya

787|SYNONYMS

788|ca-ca; api-api; dui-two; sabda-words; tate-in that way;

>|avyaya-indeclinable words; haya-are; yei-whatever; artha-

>|meaning; lagaiye-they want to use; sei-that; artha-meaning;

>|haya-can be used.

789|TRANSLATION

790|"When the conjunctions 'ca ' [ 'and '] and 'api '

>| [ 'although '] are added to this verse, the verse can

>|assume whatever meaning one wants to give it.

791|Madhya 24.66

792|TEXT 66

793|TEXT

794|îÂn±¿ó aÂ-LÁ±Nõþõþ LÁNýÃÃ ÷RmI ÕnS u±îÂ N 66 N

795|tathapi ca-karera kahe mukhya artha sata

796|SYNONYMS

797|tathapi-still; ca-karera-of the word ca; kahe-it is said;

>|mukhya-chief; artha-meanings; sata-seven.

798|TRANSLATION

799|"The word 'ca ' can be explained in seven ways.

800|Madhya 24.67

801|TEXT 67

802|TEXT

803|aÂ±i¤±aÂNlþ u÷±ýÃÃ±Nõþ•ÃNdI±•ÃdI±NnS aÂ u÷R2aÂNlþ h

804|lP±(tm)LNõþ îÂn± ó±ðóÓõþNí•óIõs±õþNí N 67 N

805|canvacaye samahare

806| ' nyonyarthe ca samuccaye

807|yatnantare tatha pada-

808| purane 'py avadharane

809|SYNONYMS

810|ca-this word ca; anvacaye-in connecting one with another;

>|samahare-in the sense of aggregation; anyonya -arthe-

>|to help one another in the imports; ca-the word ca;

>|samuccaye-in aggregate understanding; yatna-antare-in

>|another effort; tatha-as well as; pada-purane-in completing

>|the verse; api-also; avadharane-in the sense of certainty.

811|TRANSLATION

812|"'The word "ca " [ "and "] is used to connect a word or

>|sentence with a previous word or sentence, to give the

>|sense of aggregation, to assist the meaning, to give a

>|collective understanding, to suggest another effort or

>|exertion, or to fulfill the meter of a verse. It is also

>|used in the sense of certainty.'

813|PURPORT

814|This is a quotation from the Visva-prakasa dictionary.

815|Madhya 24.68

816|TEXT 68

817|TEXT

818|Õ¿ó-úNs ÷RmI ÕnS u±îÂ ¿õmI±îÂ N 68 N

819|api-sabde mukhya artha sata vikhyata

820|SYNONYMS

821|api-sabde-by the word api; mukhya-chief; artha-meanings;

>|sata-seven; vikhyata-celebrated.

822|TRANSLATION

823|"There are seven chief meanings of the word 'api. ' They

>|are as follows.

824|Madhya 24.69

825|TEXT 69

826|TEXT

827|Õ¿ó uy±õd±-›¶Ÿ-ú‚±-áýSÃÃ±-u÷R2aÂNlþ h

828|îÂn± lRMóðÃ±NnSø¸R LÁ±÷aÂ±õþ¿Slþ±uR aÂ N 69 N

829|api sambhavana-prasna-

830| sanka-garha-samuccaye

831|tatha yukta-padarthesu

832| kama-cara-kriyasu ca

833|SYNONYMS

834|api-the word api; sambhavana-possibility; prasna-question;

>|sanka-doubt; garha-censure or abuse; samuccaye-aggregation;

>|tatha-as well as; yukta-pada-arthesu-the appropriate

>|application of things; kama-cara-kriyasu-of extravagance;

>|ca-and.

835|TRANSLATION

836|"'The word "api " is used in the sense of possibility,

>|question, doubt, censure, aggregation, appropriate

>|application of things, and extravagance.'

837|PURPORT

838|This is another quotation from the Visva-prakasa.

839|Madhya 24.70

840|TEXT 70

841|TEXT

842|Ûý×ÃÃ îÂ' ÛLÁ±ðÃú óNðÃõþ ÕnS-¿díSlþ h

843|ÛNõ Î±LÁ±nS LÁ¿õþ, ln± Îl h±álþ N 70 N

844|ei ta' ekadasa padera artha-nirnaya

845|ebe slokartha kari, yatha ye lagaya

846|SYNONYMS

847|ei ta'-this; ekadasa-eleven; padera-of the words; artha-

>|nirnaya-demonstration of import; ebe-now; sloka-artha-the

>|total meaning of the verse; kari-let Me do; yatha-as much

>|as; ye-which; lagaya-applicable.

848|TRANSLATION

849|"I have now described the different meanings of the eleven

>|separate words. Now let Me give the complete meaning of the

>|sloka, as it is applied in different places.

850|Madhya 24.71

851|TEXT 71

852|TEXT

853|'õrpÁ' úNsõþ ÕnS-îÂN uõS-õÔýÃÃM÷ h

854|¦¤õþ+ó U«lS LÁ¿õþ' d±¿ýÃÃ lD±õþ u÷ N 71 N

855|'brahma' sabdera artha-tattva sarva-brhattama

856|svarupa aisvarya kari' nahi yanra sama

857|SYNONYMS

858|brahma-brahma; sabdera artha-the meaning of the word;

>|tattva-the truth; sarva-brhat-tama-the summum bonum among

>|relative truths; svarupa -the original identity;

>|aisvarya-opulence; kari'-accepting; nahi-not; yanra-whose;

>|sama-equal.

859|TRANSLATION

860|"The word 'brahma ' indicates the summum bonum, the

>|Absolute Truth, which is greater than all other truths. It

>|is the original identity, and there can be nothing

>|equal to that Absolute Truth.

861|Madhya 24.72

862|TEXT 72

863|TEXT

864|õÔýÃÃN±ðÃAõÔSýÃÃíQ±2aÂ îÂðÃAõrpÁ óõþ÷S ¿õðRÃÐ h

865|îÂÍ¦œ d÷N(tm)¦ uõS±RdA Îl±¿á¿aÂ(tm)LI±¿õLÁ±õþõR N 72 N

866|brhattvad brmhanatvac ca

867| tad brahma paramam viduh

868|tasmai namas te sarvatman

869| yogi-cintyavikaravat

870|SYNONYMS

871|brhattvat-because of being all-pervasive; brmhanatvat-

>|because of increasing unlimitedly; ca-and; tat-that; brahma-

>|Absolute Truth; paramam-the ultimate; viduh-they know;

>|tasmai-unto Him; namah-obeisances; te-unto You; sarva-atman-

>|the Supreme Soul; yogi-cintya-appreciable by great yogis;

>|avikara-vat-without change.

872|TRANSLATION

873|"'I offer my respectful obeisances to the Absolute Truth,

>|the summum bonum. He is the all-pervasive, all-increasing

>|subject matter for the great yogis. He is changeless, and

>|He is the soul of all.'

874|PURPORT

875|This is a quotation from the Visnu Purana (1.12.57).

876|Madhya 24.73

877|TEXT 73

878|TEXT

879|Îuý×ÃÃ õrpÁ-úNs LÁNýÃÃ ¦¤lþS-tÂáõ±dA h

880|Õ¿ZîÂNlþ-:±d, lD±ýÃÃ± ¿õd± d±¿ýÃÃ Õ±d N 73 N

881|sei brahma-sabde kahe svayam-bhagavan

882|advitiya-jnana, yanha vina nahi ana

883|SYNONYMS

884|sei-that; brahma-sabde-by the word brahma; kahe-it

>|is said; svayam-bhagavan-the Supreme Personality of Godhead;

>| advitiya-jnana-the supreme one, without duality; yanha-

>|which; vina-without; nahi ana-there is nothing else.

885|TRANSLATION

886|"The proper meaning of the word 'brahma ' is the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead, who is one without a second and

>|without whom nothing else exists.

887|Madhya 24.74

888|TEXT 74

889|TEXT

890|õðÃ¿(tm)L îÂMÃÃN¿õðÃ(tm)¦NS læÃA:±d÷Zlþ÷A h

891|õrNpÁ¿îÂ óõþ÷±NR¿îÂ tÂáõ±¿d¿îÂ úsINîÂ N 74 N

892|vadanti tat tattva-vidas

893| tattvam yaj jnanam advayam

894|brahmeti paramatmeti

895| bhagavan iti sabdyate

896|SYNONYMS

897|vadanti-they say; tat-that; tattva-vidah-learned souls;

>|tattvam-the Absolute Truth; yat-which; jnanam-knowledge;

>|advayam-nondual; brahma-Brahman; iti-thus; paramatma-

>|Paramatma; iti-thus; bhagavan-Bhagavan; iti-thus; sabdyate-

>|is known.

898|TRANSLATION

899|"'Learned transcendentalists who know the Absolute Truth

>|say that it is nondual knowledge and is called impersonal

>|Brahman, localized Paramatma and the Personality of Godhead.

>|'

900|PURPORT

901|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.2.11). For an

>|explanation, see Adi-lila 2.11 .

902|Madhya 24.75

903|TEXT 75

904|TEXT

905|Îuý×ÃÃ ÕZlþ-îÂN LÔÁøž-¦¤lþS-tÂáõ±dA h

906|¿îdLÁ±Nh uîÂI ¿îDÂNýÃÃ±-ú±¦a-›¶÷±í N 75 N

907|sei advaya-tattva krsna-svayam-bhagavan

908|tina-kale satya tinho-sastra-pramana

909|SYNONYMS

910|sei-that; advaya-tattva-Absolute Truth without a second;

>|krsna-Lord Krsna; svayam-bhagavan-the Supreme Personality

>|of Godhead; tina-kale-in three phases of time (past,

>|present and future); satya-truth; tinho-He; sastra-pramana-

>|the verdict of all Vedic literatures.

911|TRANSLATION

912|"That Absolute Truth without a second is Lord Krsna, the

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead. He is the supreme truth in

>|the past, present and future. That is the evidence of all

>|revealed scriptures.

913|Madhya 24.76

914|TEXT 76

915|TEXT

916|ÕýÃÃN÷õ±uN÷õ±N¢¶ d±dIðAÃlR uðÃuRóõþ÷A h

917|ó(±ðÃýÃÃS lNðÃîÂ2aÂ Îl±•Ãõ¿úNø¸IîÂ Îu±•Ã¦œIýÃÃ÷A N 76 N

918|aham evasam evagre

919| nanyad yat sad-asat-param

920|pascad aham yad etac ca

921| yo 'vasisyeta so 'smy aham

922|SYNONYMS

923|aham-I, the Personality of Godhead; eva-certainly; asam-

>|existed; eva-only; agre-before the creation; na-never;

>|anyat-anything else; yat-which; sat-the effect; asat-the

>|cause; param-the supreme; pascat-after; aham-I, the

>|Personality of Godhead; yat-which; etat-this creation; ca-

>|also; yah-who; avasisyeta-remains; sah-that; asmi-am; aham-

>|I, the Personality of Godhead.

924|TRANSLATION

925|"'Prior to the cosmic creation, only I exist, and no

>|phenomena exist, either gross, subtle or primordial. After

>|creation, only I exist in everything, and after

>|annihilation only I remain eternally.'

926|PURPORT

927|This verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (2.9.33)

>|was spoken by Lord Krsna. For an explanation see Adi-lila

>|1.53 .

928|Madhya 24.77

929|TEXT 77

930|TEXT

931|'Õ±R'-úNs LÁNýÃÃ LÔÁøž õÔýÃÃN¦¤õþ+ó h

932|uõSõI±óLÁ, uõSu±ŽÂN, óõþ÷¦¤õþ+ó N 77 N

933|'atma'-sabde kahe krsna brhattva-svarupa

934|sarva-vyapaka, sarva-saksi, parama-svarupa

935|SYNONYMS

936|atma-sabde-by the word atma; kahe-it is said; krsna-

>|the Supreme Lord Krsna; brhattva-the greatest of all;

>|svarupa -identity; sarva-vyapaka-all -pervasive; sarva-

>|saksi-the witness of all; parama-svarupa-the supreme form.

937|TRANSLATION

938|"The word 'atma ' [ 'self '] indicates the highest truth,

>|Krsna. He is the all-pervasive witness of all, and He is

>|the supreme form.

939|Madhya 24.78

940|TEXT 78

941|TEXT

942|Õ±îÂîÂQ±2aÂ ÷±îÔÂQ±ðÃ±R± ¿ýÃÃ óõþN÷± ýÃÃ¿õþÐ N 78 N

943|atatatvac ca matrtvad

944| atma hi paramo harih

945|SYNONYMS

946|atatatvat-due to being all-pervading; ca-and; matrtvat-due

>|to being the progenitor; atma-the soul; hi-certainly;

>|paramah-supreme; harih-the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

947|TRANSLATION

948|"'Hari, the Personality of Godhead, is the all-pervasive

>|original source of everything; He is therefore the

>|Supersoul of everything.'

949|PURPORT

950|This is a quotation from the Bhavartha-dipika, Sridhara

>|Svami's commentary on Srimad-Bhagavatam.

951|Madhya 24.79

952|TEXT 79

953|TEXT

954|Îuý×ÃÃ LÔÁøž›¶±¿5–ÎýÃÃîRÂ ¿S¿õs 'u±sd' h

955|:±d, Îl±á, tÂ¿M,-¿îÂNdõþ óÔnLAÁ hŽÂí N 79 N

956|sei krsna-prapti-hetu trividha 'sadhana'

957|jnana, yoga, bhakti,-tinera prthak laksana

958|SYNONYMS

959|sei-those; krsna-prapti-of achieving the lotus feet of

>|Krsna; hetu-causes; tri-vidha sadhana-the three kinds of

>|execution; jnana-knowledge; yoga-mystic yoga practice;

>|bhakti-and devotional service; tinera-of these three;

>|prthak laksana-the symptoms are different.

960|TRANSLATION

961|"There are three ways to attain the lotus feet of the

>|Absolute Truth, Krsna. There is the process of

>|philosophical speculation, the practice of mystic yoga and

>|the execution of devotional service. Each of these has its

>|different characteristics.

962|Madhya 24.80

963|TEXT 80

964|TEXT

965|¿îd u±sNd tÂáõ±dA ¿îd ¦¤õþ+Nó tÂ±Nu h

966|õrpÁ, óõþ÷±R±, tÂáõMÃÃ±,-¿S¿õs ›¶LÁ±Nú N 80 N

967|tina sadhane bhagavan tina svarupe bhase

968|brahma, paramatma, bhagavatta,-trividha prakase

969|SYNONYMS

970|tina sadhane-by these three different processes; bhagavan-

>|the Supreme Personality of Godhead; tina-three; svarupe

>|-in identities; bhase-appears; brahma-the impersonal

>|feature; paramatma-the localized feature; bhagavatta-and

>|the Supreme Personality of Godhead; trividha prakase-three

>|manifestations.

971|TRANSLATION

972|"The Absolute Truth is the same, but according to the

>|process by which one understands Him, He appears in three

>|forms-as Brahman, Paramatma and Bhagavan, the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead.

973|Madhya 24.81

974|TEXT 81

975|TEXT

976|õðÃ¿(tm)L îÂMÃÃN¿õðÃ(tm)¦NS læÃA:±d÷Zlþ÷A h

977|ÂõrNpÁ¿îÂ óõþ÷±NR¿îÂ tÂáõ±¿d¿îÂ úsINîÂ N 81 N

978|vadanti tat tattva-vidas

979| tattvam yaj jnanam advayam

980|brahmeti paramatmeti

981| bhagavan iti sabdyate

982|SYNONYMS

983|vadanti-they say; tat-that; tattva-vidah-learned souls;

>|tattvam-the Absolute Truth; yat-which; jnanam-knowledge;

>|advayam-nondual; brahma-Brahman; iti-thus; paramatma-

>|Paramatma; iti-thus; bhagavan-Bhagavan; iti-thus; sabdyate-

>|is known.

984|TRANSLATION

985|"'Learned transcendentalists who know the Absolute Truth

>|say that it is nondual knowledge and is called impersonal

>|Brahman, localized Paramatma and the Personality of Godhead.

>|'

986|Madhya 24.82

987|TEXT 82

988|TEXT

989|'õrpÁ-Õ±R±'-úNs l¿ðÃ LÔÁNøžNõþ LÁýÃÃlþ h

990|'õþ+¿nÂlõÔNMI' ¿d¿õSNúø¸ Õ(tm)LlS±÷N LÁlþ N 82 N

991|'brahma-atma'-sabde yadi krsnere kahaya

992|'rudhi-vrttye' nirvisesa antaryami kaya

993|SYNONYMS

994|brahma-atma-sabde-by the words brahma

>|and atma; yadi-if; krsnere kahaya-Krsna is indicated; rudhi-

>|vrttye-by the direct meaning; nirvisesa-impersonal;

>|antaryami-the Supersoul; kaya-is said.

995|TRANSLATION

996|"Although the words 'brahma ' and 'atma ' indicate Krsna,

>|their direct meaning refers only to the impersonal Brahman

>|and the Supersoul respectively.

997|Madhya 24.83

998|TEXT 83

999|TEXT

1000|:±d÷±NáS-¿d¿õSNúø¸-õrpÁ ›¶LÁ±Nú h

1001|Îl±á÷±NáS-Õ(tm)LlS±¿÷-¦¤õþ+NóNîÂ tÂ±Nu N 83 N

1002|jnana-marge-nirvisesa-brahma prakase

1003|yoga-marge-antaryami-svarupete bhase

1004|SYNONYMS

1005|jnana-marge-the process of philosophical speculation;

>|nirvisesa-brahma-the impersonal Brahman effulgence; prakase-

>|becomes manifest; yoga-marge-by practicing mystic yoga;

>|antaryami-svarupete-in the localized aspect, the Supersoul;

>|bhase-appears.

1006|TRANSLATION

1007|"If one follows the path of philosophical speculation, the

>|Absolute Truth manifests Himself as impersonal Brahman, and

>|if one follows the path of mystic yoga, He manifests

>|Himself as the Supersoul.

1008|Madhya 24.84

1009|TEXT 84

1010|TEXT

1011|õþ±átÂ¿MÃ-¿õ¿stÂ¿MÃ ýÃÃlþ ðRÃý×ÃÃõþ+ó h

1012|'¦¤lþS-tÂáõNN', tÂáõNN-›¶LÁ±ú ¿Zõþ+ó N 84 N

1013|raga-bhakti-vidhi-bhakti haya dui-rupa

1014|'svayam-bhagavattve', bhagavattve-prakasa dvi-rupa

1015|SYNONYMS

1016|raga-bhakti-spontaneous devotional service; vidhi-bhakti-

>|regulative devotional service; haya-are; dui-rupa-the two

>|kinds of devotional service; svayam-bhagavattve-in the

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhagavattve-and in His

>|personal expansion; prakasa dvi-rupa-the two kinds of

>|manifestation.

1017|TRANSLATION

1018|"There are two kinds of devotional activity-spontaneous and

>|regulative. By spontaneous devotional service, one attains

>|the original Personality of Godhead, Krsna, and by the

>|regulative process one attains the expansion of the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead.

1019|Madhya 24.85

1020|TEXT 85

1021|TEXT

1022|õþ±átÂNMÃI õrNæÃ ¦¤lþS-tÂáõ±Nd ó±lþ N 85 N

1023|raga-bhaktye vraje svayam-bhagavane paya

1024|SYNONYMS

1025|raga-bhaktye-by the discharge of spontaneous devotional

>|service; vraje-in Vrndavana; svayam-Himself; bhagavane-the

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead; paya-one gets.

1026|TRANSLATION

1027|"By executing spontaneous devotional service in Vrndavana,

>|one attains the original Supreme Personality of Godhead,

>|Krsna.

1028|Madhya 24.86

1029|TEXT 86

1030|TEXT

1031|d±lþS uRm±Nó± tÂáõ±dA ÎðÃ¿ýÃÃd±S Îá±¿óLÁ±uRîÂÐ h

1032|:±¿dd±=±RtÓÂîÂ±d±S ln± tÂ¿MÃ÷îÂ±¿÷ýÃÃ N 86 N

1033|nayam sukhapo bhagavan

1034| dehinam gopika-sutah

1035|jnaninam catma-bhutanam

1036| yatha bhaktimatam iha

1037|SYNONYMS

1038|na-not; ayam-this Lord Sri Krsna; sukha-apah-easily

>|available; bhagavan-the Supreme Personality of Godhead;

>|dehinam-for materialistic persons who have accepted the

>|body as the self; gopika-sutah-the son of mother Yasoda;

>|jnaninam-for persons addicted to mental speculation; ca-and;

>| atma-bhutanam-for persons performing severe austerities

>|and penances; yatha-as; bhakti-matam-for persons engaged in

>|spontaneous devotional service; iha-in this world.

1039|TRANSLATION

1040|"'The Supreme Personality of Godhead, Krsna, the son of

>|mother Yasoda, is accessible to those devotees engaged in

>|spontaneous loving service, but He is not as easily

>|accessible to mental speculators, to those striving for

>|self-realization by severe austerities and penances, or to

>|those who consider the body the same as the self.'

1041|PURPORT

1042|This verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.9.21) was spoken by

>|Srila Sukadeva Gosvami. For an explanation see

>|Madhya -lila 8. 227

>|.

1043|Madhya 24.87

1044|TEXT 87

1045|TEXT

1046|¿õ¿stÂNMÃI ó±ø¸SðÃNðÃNýÃÃ ÆõLRÁNFNîÂ l±lþ N 87 N

1047|vidhi-bhaktye parsada-dehe vaikunthete yaya

1048|SYNONYMS

1049|vidhi-bhaktye-by executing regulative devotional service;

>|parsada-dehe-in the form of an associate of the Lord;

>|vaikunthete yaya-one achieves the Vaikuntha planets.

1050|TRANSLATION

1051|"By executing regulative devotional service, one becomes an

>|associate of Narayana and attains the Vaikunthalokas, the

>|spiritual planets in the spiritual sky.

1052|Madhya 24.88

1053|TEXT 88

1054|TEXT

1055|l2aÂ õræÃ(tm)LI¿d¿÷ø¸±÷Ôø¸tÂ±dRõÔMÃÃI± h

1056|ðÓÃNõþ-l÷± ýRÃÃIó¿õþ dÐ ¦óÔýÃÃíNlþúNh±Ð h

1057|tÂîRSÂ¿÷SnÐ uRlúuÐ LÁnd±dRõþ±á-

1058|ÆõLvÁõIõ±(c)óLÁhlþ± óRhLÁNLÔÁîÂ±/±Ð N 88 N

1059|yac ca vrajanty animisam rsabhanuvrttya

1060| dure-yama hy upari nah sprhaniya-silah

1061|bhartur mithah su-yasasah kathananuraga-

1062| vaiklavya-baspa-kalaya pulaki-krtangah

1063|SYNONYMS

1064|yat-which; ca-also; vrajanti-go; animisam-of the demigods;

>|rsabha-anuvrttya-by practicing the best means of spiritual

>|life; dure-keeping at a distance; yamah-the regulative

>|principles; hi-certainly; upari-above; nah-our; sprhaniya-

>|silah-decorated with desirable qualities; bhartuh-of the

>|master; mithah-mutually; su-yasasah-who has all

>|transcendental qualities; kathana-anuraga-attracted to

>|discussions; vaiklavya-transformation; baspa-kalaya-with

>|tears in the eyes; pulaki-krta-jubilation; angah-

>|bodily limbs.

1065|TRANSLATION

1066|"'Those who discuss the activities of Lord Krsna are on

>|the highest platform of devotional life, and they evince

>|the symptoms of tears in the eyes and bodily jubilation.

>|Such persons discharge devotional service to Krsna without

>|practicing the rules and regulations of the mystic yoga

>|system. They possess all spiritual qualities, and they are

>|elevated to the Vaikuntha planets, which exist above us.'

1067|PURPORT

1068|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (3.15.25). In

>|this verse Lord Brahma is speaking to all the demigods, who

>|feared the two asuras in Diti's womb. Lord Brahma described

>|the Kumaras' visit to Vaikuntha, and this was again

>|explained by Maitreya, the friend of Vyasadeva, when he

>|gave instructions to Vidura.

1069|Madhya 24.89

1070|TEXT 89

1071|TEXT

1072|Îuý×ÃÃ nÂ×ó±uLÁ ýÃÃlþ ¿S¿õs ›¶LÁ±õþ h

1073|ÕLÁ±÷, Î÷±ŽÂLÁ±÷, uõSLÁ±÷ Õ±õþ N 89 N

1074|sei upasaka haya trividha prakara

1075|akama, moksa-kama, sarva-kama ara

1076|SYNONYMS

1077|sei upasaka-those devotees; haya-are; tri-vidha prakara-

>|three varieties; akama-without material desires; moksa-kama-

>|desiring to become liberated; sarva-kama-filled with all

>|material desires; ara-and.

1078|TRANSLATION

1079|"The devotees are divided into three categories-akama [

>|desireless], moksa-kama [desiring liberation] and sarva-

>|kama [desiring material perfection].

1080|Madhya 24.90

1081|TEXT 90

1082|TEXT

1083|ÕLÁ±÷Ð uõSLÁ±N÷± õ± Î÷±ŽÂLÁ±÷ nÂ×ðÃ±õþsNÐ h

1084|îÂNNõrí tÂ¿MÃNl±Nád lNæÃîÂ óRø¸S óõþ÷A N 90 N

1085|akamah sarva-kamo va

1086| moksa-kama udara-dhih

1087|tivrena bhakti-yogena

1088| yajeta purusam param

1089|SYNONYMS

1090|akamah-without material desires; sarva-kamah-full of all

>|material desires; va-or; moksa-kamah-desiring liberation;

>|udara-dhih-sincere and advanced in devotional service;

>|tivrena-firm; bhakti-yogena-by the practice of bhakti-yoga;

>|yajeta-should worship; purusam param-the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead.

1091|TRANSLATION

1092|"'One who is actually intelligent, although he may be a

>|devotee free from material desires, a karmi desiring all

>|kinds of material facilities, or a jnani desiring

>|liberation, should seriously engage in bhakti-yoga for the

>|satisfaction of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.'

1093|PURPORT

1094|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (2.3.10).

1095|Madhya 24.91

1096|TEXT 91

1097|TEXT

1098|õR¿X÷±dA-ÕNnS-l¿ðÃ '¿õaÂ±õþ:' ýÃÃlþ h

1099|¿dæÃ-LÁ±÷ h±¿áýÃÃ îÂNõ LÔÁNøžNõþ tÂæÃlþ N 91 N

1100|buddhiman-arthe-yadi 'vicara-jna' haya

1101|nija-kama lagiha tabe krsnere bhajaya

1102|SYNONYMS

1103|buddhiman-arthe-by the meaning of intelligent; yadi-if;

>|vicara-jna-expert in scrutinizing things; haya-is; nija-

>|kama lagiha-even for sense gratification; tabe-then;

>|krsnere bhajana-worships Lord Krsna.

1104|TRANSLATION

1105|"The meaning of the word 'udara- dhi ' is buddhiman-

>|intelligent or considerate. Because of this, even for one's

>|own sense gratification one engages in the devotional

>|service of Lord Krsna.

1106|Madhya 24.92

1107|TEXT 92

1108|TEXT

1109|tÂ¿MÃ ¿õdR ÎLÁ±d u±sd ¿ðÃNîÂ d±Nõþ ôÂh h

1110|uõ ôÂh ÎðÃlþ tÂ¿MÃ ¦¤îÂLa ›¶õh N 92 N

1111|bhakti vinu kona sadhana dite nare phala

1112|saba phala deya bhakti svatantra prabala

1113|SYNONYMS

1114|bhakti vinu-without devotional service; kona-some; sadhana-

>|practice for perfection; dite-to give; nare-not able; phala-

>|any result; saba phala-all the results of different

>|processes; deya-give; bhakti-devotional service; sva-

>|tantra-independent; prabala-and powerful.

1115|TRANSLATION

1116|"The other processes cannot yield results unless they are

>|associated with devotional service. Devotional service,

>|however, is so strong and independent that it can give one

>|all the desired results.

1117|Madhya 24.93

1118|TEXT 93

1119|TEXT

1120|ÕæÃ±áh(tm)¦d-dI±lþ ÕdI u±sd h

1121|ÕîÂÛõ ýÃÃ¿õþ tÂNæÃ õR¿X÷±dA æÃd N 93 N

1122|aja-gala-stana-nyaya anya sadhana

1123|ataeva hari bhaje buddhiman jana

1124|SYNONYMS

1125|aja-gala-stana-nyaya-like the nipples on the neck of a goat;

>| anya-other; sadhana-execution of spiritual life; ataeva-

>|therefore; hari-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhaje-

>|one worships; buddhiman jana-the intelligent person.

1126|TRANSLATION

1127|"With the exception of devotional service, all the methods

>|of self-realization are like the nipples on the neck of a

>|goat. Therefore an intelligent person adopts only

>|devotional service, giving up all other processes of self-

>|realization.

1128|PURPORT

1129|Without devotional service, other methods for self-

>|realization and spiritual life are useless. Other methods

>|cannot produce good results at any time, and therefore they

>|are compared to the nipples on the neck of a goat. These

>|nipples cannot produce milk, although it may appear that

>|they can. An unintelligent person cannot understand that

>|only devotional service can elevate one to the

>|transcendental position.

1130|Madhya 24.94

1131|TEXT 94

1132|TEXT

1133|aÂîRÂ¿õSs± tÂæÃN(tm)L ÷±S æÃd±Ð uRLÔÁ¿îÂNd±•ÃæRSÃd h

1134|Õ±NîSÂ± ¿æÃ:±uRõþnS±nSN :±dN aÂ tÂõþîÂø¸StÂ N 94 N

1135|catur-vidha bhajante mam

1136| janah sukrtino 'rjuna

1137|arto jijnasur artharthi

1138| jnani ca bharatarsabha

1139|SYNONYMS

1140|catuh-vidhah-four kinds; bhajante-worship; mam-Me; janah-

>|persons; sukrtinah-who have obeyed the principles of human

>|life or the regulative principles of varna and asrama;

>|arjuna-O Arjuna; artah-the distressed; jijnasuh-the

>|inquisitive; artha-arthi-one in need of money; jnani-one

>|pursuing knowledge; ca-also; bharata-rsabha-O best of the

>|Bharata dynasty.

1141|TRANSLATION

1142|"'O best among the Bharatas [Arjuna], four kinds of pious

>|men render devotional service unto Me-the distressed, the

>|desirer of wealth, the inquisitive and he who is

>|searching for knowledge of the Absolute.'

1143|PURPORT

1144|This is a quotation from the Bhagavad-gita (7.16). The word

>|sukrtinah is very important in this verse. Su means "

>|auspicious," and krti means "meritorious" or "regulated."

>|Unless one follows the regulative principles of religious

>|life, human life is no different from animal life.

>|Religious life means following the principles of varna and

>|asrama. In the Visnu Purana it is said:

1145|varnasramacaravata purusena parah puman

1146|visnur aradhyate pantha nanyat tat-tosa-karanam

1147| [Cc. Madhya 8.58]

1148|According to religious life, society is divided into four

>|social divisions-brahmana, ksatriya, vaisya and sudra-and

>|four spiritual divisions-brahmacarya, grhastha, vanaprastha

>|and sannyasa. One needs to be trained to become a brahmana,

>|ksatriya, vaisya or sudra, just as one is trained to become

>|an engineer, doctor or lawyer. Those who are properly

>|trained can be considered human beings; if one is not

>|trained socially and spiritually- that is, if one is

>|uneducated and unregulated-his life is on the animal

>|platform. Among animals there is no question of spiritual

>|advancement. Spiritual life can be attained by proper

>|training- either by following the principles of varna and

>|asrama or by being directly trained in the bhakti school by

>|the methods of sravanam kirtanam visnoh smaranam pada-

>|sevanam/ arcanam vandanam dasyam sakhyam atma-nivedanam [SB

>|7.5.23]. Without being trained, one cannot be sukrti,

>|auspicious. In this verse Krsna says that people approach

>|Him when in distress, in need of money or when actually

>|inquisitive to understand the Supreme Being, or the

>|original source of everything. Some people approach Him in

>|the pursuit of knowledge of the Absolute Truth, and others

>|approach Him when they are distressed, like the devotee

>|Gajendra. Others are inquisitive, like the great sages

>|headed by Saunaka, and others need money, like Dhruva

>|Maharaja. Sukadeva Gosvami approached the Lord when he

>|pursued knowledge. All these great personalities thus took

>|to the devotional service of the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead, Krsna.

1149|Madhya 24.95

1150|TEXT 95

1151|TEXT

1152|Õ±îSÂ, ÕnS±nSN,-ðRÃý×ÃÃ uLÁ±÷-¿tÂîÂNõþ á¿í h

1153|¿æÃ:±uR, :±dN,-ðRÃý×ÃÃ Î÷±ŽÂLÁ±÷ ÷±¿d N 95 N

1154|arta, artharthi,-dui sakama-bhitare gani

1155|jijnasu, jnani,-dui moksa-kama mani

1156|SYNONYMS

1157|arta-distressed; artha-arthi-desirous of money; dui-two

>|persons; sakama-bhitare-in the division of material

>|activities; gani-we consider; jijnasu-inquisitive; jnani-

>|pursuing knowledge; dui-two; moksa-kama-transcendentalists

>|pursuing spiritual knowledge for liberation; mani-I

>|consider.

1158|TRANSLATION

1159|"Materialistic devotees take to devotional service and

>|worship Krsna when they are distressed or in need of money.

>|Those who are actually inquisitive to understand the

>|supreme source of everything and those who are in search of

>|knowledge are called transcendentalists, for they desire

>|liberation from all material contamination.

1160|Madhya 24.96

1161|TEXT 96

1162|TEXT

1163|Ûý×ÃÃ aÂ±¿õþ uRLÔÁ¿îÂ ýÃÃlþ ÷ýÃÃ±tÂ±áIõ±dA h

1164|îÂMÃÃRLÁ±÷±¿ðÃ rÃ±¿nÂl' ýÃÃlþ qXtÂ¿MÃ÷±dA N 96 N

1165|ei cari sukrti haya maha-bhagyavan

1166|tat-tat-kamadi chadi' haya suddha-bhaktiman

1167|SYNONYMS

1168|ei cari-these four persons; sukrti-pious men; haya-are;

>|maha-bhagyavan-highly fortunate; tat-tat-those respective;

>|kama-adi-aspirations; chadi'-giving up; haya-become; suddha-

>|bhaktiman-pure devotees.

1169|TRANSLATION

1170|"Because they have a pious background, all four types of

>|people are to be considered greatly fortunate. Such people

>|gradually give up material desires and become pure devotees.

1171|Madhya 24.97

1172|TEXT 97

1173|TEXT

1174|u±sRu/-LÔÁó± ¿LÁ¥¤± LÔÁNøžõþ LÔÁó±lþ h

1175|LÁ±÷±¿ðÃ 'ðRÃÐu/' rÃ±¿nÂl' qXtÂ¿MÃ ó±lþ N 97 N

1176|sadhu-sanga-krpa kimva krsnera krpaya

1177|kamadi 'duhsanga' chadi' suddha-bhakti paya

1178|SYNONYMS

1179|sadhu-sanga-krpa-by the mercy of association with devotees;

>|kimva-or; krsnera krpaya-by the mercy of Krsna; kama-adi-

>|material desires and so on; duhsanga-unwanted association;

>|chadi'-giving up; suddha-bhakti paya-one obtains the

>|platform of pure devotional life.

1180|TRANSLATION

1181|"One is elevated to the platform of devotional life by the

>|mercy of a Vaisnava, the bona fide spiritual master, and by

>|the special mercy of Krsna. On that platform, one gives up

>|all material desires and the association of unwanted people.

>| Thus one is elevated to the platform of pure devotional

>|service.

1182|Madhya 24.98

1183|TEXT 98

1184|TEXT

1185|uRu/±ijRMÃ-ðRÃÐuN/± ýÃÃ±îRÂS Îd±RuýÃÃNîÂ õRsÐ h

1186|LÁNîSÂI÷±dS lNú± luI uLÔÁðÃ±LÁíSI Îõþ±aÂd÷A N 98 N

1187|sat-sangan mukta-duhsango

1188| hatum notsahate budhah

1189|kirtyamanam yaso yasya

1190| sakrd akarnya rocanam

1191|SYNONYMS

1192|sat-sangat-by the association of pure devotees; mukta-freed;

>| duhsangah-the association of materialistic persons; hatum-

>|to give up; na-not; utsahate-is able; budhah-one who is

>|actually learned; kirtyamanam-being glorified; yasah-the

>|glories; yasya-of whom (the Supreme Personality of Godhead);

>| sakrt-once; akarnya-hearing; rocanam-very pleasing.

1193|TRANSLATION

1194|"'The intelligent, who have understood the Supreme Lord in

>|the association of pure devotees and have become free from

>|bad , materialistic association, can never avoid hearing

>|the glories of the Lord, even though they have heard them

>|only once.'

1195|PURPORT

1196|This is a verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.10.11). All the

>|members of the Kuru dynasty offered respects when Krsna was

>|leaving Hastinapura after the Battle of Kuruksetra. Krsna

>|was going to His own kingdom, and all the members of the

>|Kuru dynasty were overwhelmed by His departure. This verse

>|was spoken in that connection by Sukadeva Gosvami.

1197|A pure devotee becomes attached to Krsna by

>|hearing the Lord's glories. The Lord's glories and the Lord

>|Himself are identical. One has to be qualified to

>|understand this absolute truth; therefore one should be

>|given a chance to associate with a pure devotee. Our Krsna

>|consciousness movement is meant for this purpose. We want

>|to create pure devotees so that other people will benefit

>|by their association. In this way the number of pure

>|devotees increases. Professional preachers cannot create

>|pure devotees. There are many professional preachers of

>|Srimad- Bhagavatam who read this work to earn their

>|livelihood. However, they cannot convert materialistic

>|people to devotional service. Only a pure devotee can

>|convert others to pure devotional service. It is therefore

>|important for all the preachers in our Krsna consciousness

>|movement to first become pure devotees and follow the

>|regulative principles, refraining from illicit sex, meat-

>|eating, gambling and intoxication. They should regularly

>|chant the Hare Krsna maha-mantra on their beads, follow the

>|devotional process, rise early in the morning, attend

>|mangala-arati and recite Srimad-Bhagavatam and the Bhagavad-

>|gita regularly. In this way, one can become purified and

>|free from all material contamination.

1198|sarvopadhi-vinirmuktam tat-paratvena nirmalam

1199|hrsikena hrsikesa-sevanam bhaktir ucyate

1200| [Cc. Madhya 19.170]

1201|"Bhakti, or devotional service, means engaging all one's

>|senses in the service of the Lord, the Supreme Personality

>|of Godhead, the master of all the senses. When the spirit

>|soul renders service unto the Supreme, there are two side

>|effects. One is freed from all material designations, and

>|one's senses are purified simply by being employed in the

>|service of the Lord." (Narada-pancaratra)

1202|To make a show of devotional service will not help one. One

>|must be a pure devotee following the devotional process;

>|then one can convert others to devotional service. Sri

>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu practiced devotional service and

>|preached (apani acari' bhakti karila pracara). If a

>|preacher behaves properly in devotional service, he will be

>|able to convert others. Otherwise, his preaching will have

>|no effect.

1203|Madhya 24.99

1204|TEXT 99

1205|TEXT

1206|'ðRÃÐu/' LÁ¿ýÃÃNlþ-'ÆLÁîÂõ', 'Õ±Rõ=d±' h

1207|LÔÁøž, LÔÁøžtÂ¿MÃ ¿õdR ÕdI LÁ±÷d± N 99 N

1208|'duhsanga' kahiye-'kaitava', 'atma-vancana'

1209|krsna, krsna-bhakti vinu anya kamana

1210|SYNONYMS

1211|duhsanga-bad, unwanted association; kahiye-I say; kaitava-

>|cheating; atma-vancana-cheating oneself; krsna-Lord Krsna;

>|krsna-bhakti-devotional service to Krsna; vinu-without;

>|anya-other; kamana-desires.

1212|TRANSLATION

1213|"Cheating oneself and cheating others is called kaitava.

>|Associating with those who cheat in this way is called

>|duhsanga, bad association. Those who desire things other

>|than Krsna's service are also called duhsanga, bad

>|association.

1214|Madhya 24.100

1215|TEXT 100

1216|TEXT

1217|s÷SÐ Î›¶±¿9îÂ-ÆLÁîÂNõ±•ÃS óõþN÷± ¿d÷SRuõþ±í±S uîÂ±S

1218|ÎõðÃIS õ±(tm)¦õ÷S õd ¿úõðÃS îÂ±óSNlþ±ijÓhd÷A h

1219|M÷3/4Ã±áõNîÂ ÷ýÃÃ±÷R¿dLÔÁNîÂ ¿LÁSõ± óÍõþõþN«õþÐ

1220|uNðÃI± ý+ðÃIõsINîÂ•ÃS LÔÁ¿îÂ¿tÂÐ q|ÓÃø¸R¿tÂ(tm)¦RŽÂí±R N

>|100 N

1221|dharmah projjhita-kaitavo 'tra paramo nirmatsaranam satam

1222| vedyam vastavam atra vastu siva-dam tapa-trayonmulanam

1223|srimad-bhagavate maha-muni-krte kim va parair isvarah

1224| sadyo hrdy avarudhyate 'tra krtibhih susrusubhis tat-ksanat

1225|SYNONYMS

1226|dharmah-religiosity; projjhita-completely rejected;

>|kaitavah-in which fruitive intention; atra-herein; paramah-

>|the highest; nirmatsaranam-of the fully pure in heart;

>|satam-devotees; vedyam-to be understood; vastavam-factual;

>|atra-herein; vastu-substance; siva-dam-giving well-being;

>|tapa-traya-of the threefold miseries; unmulanam-causing

>|uprooting; srimat-beautiful; bhagavate-in the Bhagavata

>|Purana; maha-muni-by the great sage (Vyasadeva); krte-

>|compiled; kim-what; va-indeed; paraih-with others; isvarah-

>|the Supreme Lord; sadyah-at once; hrdi-within the heart;

>|avarudhyate-becomes confined; atra-herein; krtibhih-by

>|pious men; susrusubhih-desiring to hear; tat-ksanat-without

>|delay.

1227|TRANSLATION

1228|"'The great scripture Srimad-Bhagavatam, compiled by

>|Mahamuni Vyasadeva from four original verses, describes the

>|most elevated and kindhearted devotees and completely

>|rejects the cheating ways of materially motivated

>|religiosity. It propounds the highest principle of eternal

>|religion, which can factually mitigate the threefold

>|miseries of a living being and award the highest

>|benediction of full prosperity and knowledge. Those willing

>|to hear the message of this scripture in a submissive

>|attitude of service can at once capture the Supreme Lord in

>|their hearts. Therefore there is no need for any scripture

>|other than Srimad-Bhagavatam.'

1229|PURPORT

1230|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.1.2). For an

>|explanation see Adi-lila 1.91 .

1231|Madhya 24.101

1232|TEXT 101

1233|TEXT

1234|'›¶'-úNs-Î÷±ŽÂõ±>± ÆLÁîÂõ›¶s±d h

1235|Ûý×ÃÃ Î±NLÁ Msõþ¦¤±÷N LÁ¿õþlþ±Nrd õI±mI±d N 101 N

1236|'pra'-sabde-moksa-vancha kaitava-pradhana

1237|ei sloke sridhara-svami kariyachena vyakhyana

1238|SYNONYMS

1239|pra-sabde-by the prefix pra; moksa-vancha-the desire for

>|being liberated; kaitava-pradhana-first-class cheating; ei

>|sloke-in this verse; sridhara-svami-the great commentator

>|Sridhara Svami; kariyachena-has made; vyakhyana-explanation.

1240|TRANSLATION

1241|"The prefix 'pra ' in the word 'projjhita ' specifically

>|refers to those desiring liberation or oneness with the

>|Supreme. Such a desire should be understood to be the

>|foremost cheating propensity. The great commentator

>|Sridhara Svami has explained this verse in that way.

1242|Madhya 24.102

1243|TEXT 102

1244|TEXT

1245|uLÁ±÷-tÂNMÃ 'Õ:' æÃ±¿d' ðÃlþ±hR tÂáõ±dA h

1246|¦¤-aÂõþí ¿ðÃlþ± LÁNõþ ý×ÃÃ26Ã±õþ ¿ós±d N 102 N

1247|sakama-bhakte 'ajna' jani' dayalu bhagavan

1248|sva-carana diya kare icchara pidhana

1249|SYNONYMS

1250|sakama-bhakte-to devotees who still have material desires

>|to fulfill; ajna-foolish; jani'-knowing; dayalu-merciful;

>|bhagavan-Sri Krsna; sva-carana-His own lotus feet; diya-

>|giving; kare-does; icchara pidhana-the covering of other

>|desires.

1251|TRANSLATION

1252|"When merciful Lord Krsna understands that a

>|foolish devotee desires material prosperity, He gratefully

>|gives him the shelter of His lotus feet. In this way, the

>|Lord covers the devotee's undesirable ambitions.

1253|Madhya 24.103

1254|TEXT 103

1255|TEXT

1256|uîÂIS ¿ðÃúîÂI¿nSîÂ÷¿nSNîÂ± dÔí±S

1257|Ædõ±nSNðÃ± lR óRdõþ¿nSîÂ± lîÂÐ h

1258|¦¤lþS ¿õsNMÃÃ tÂæÃîÂ±÷¿d26ÃîÂ±-

1259|¿÷26Ã±¿ós±dS ¿dæó±ðó~õ÷A N 103 N

1260|satyam disaty arthitam arthito nrnam

1261| naivartha-do yat punar arthita yatah

1262|svayam vidhatte bhajatam anicchatam

1263| iccha-pidhanam nija-pada-pallavam

1264|SYNONYMS

1265|satyam-it is true; disati-He awards; arthitam-that which is

>|desired; arthitah-being requested; nrnam-by human beings;

>|na-not; eva-certainly; artha-dah-giving desired things; yat-

>|which; punah-again; arthita-request; yatah-from which;

>|svayam-Himself; vidhatte-He gives; bhajatam-of those

>|engaged in devotional service; anicchatam-even though not

>|desiring; iccha-pidhanam-covering all other desires; nija-

>|pada-pallavam-the shelter of His own lotus feet.

1266|TRANSLATION

1267|"'Whenever Krsna is requested to fulfill one's desire, He

>|undoubtedly does so, but He does not award anything which,

>|after being enjoyed, will cause one to petition Him

>|again and again to fulfill further desires. When one has

>|other desires but engages in the Lord's service, Krsna

>|forcibly gives one shelter at His lotus feet, where one

>|will forget all other desires.'

1268|PURPORT

1269|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (5.19.27).

1270|Madhya 24.104

1271|TEXT 104

1272|TEXT

1273|u±sRu/, LÔÁøžLÔÁó±, tÂ¿MÃõþ ¦¤tÂ±õ h

1274|Û ¿îÂNd uõ rÃ±nÂl±lþ, LÁNõþ LÔÁNøž 'tÂ±õ' N 104 N

1275|sadhu-sanga, krsna-krpa, bhaktira svabhava

1276|e tine saba chadaya, kare krsne 'bhava'

1277|SYNONYMS

1278|sadhu-sanga-the association of devotees; krsna-krpa-the

>|mercy of Lord Krsna; bhaktira-of devotional service;

>|svabhava -nature; e tine-these three; saba chadaya-

>|cause one to give up everything else; kare-do; krsne-unto

>|Lord Krsna; bhava-the loving affairs.

1279|TRANSLATION

1280|"Association with a devotee, the mercy of Krsna, and the

>|nature of devotional service help one to give up all

>|undesirable association and gradually attain elevation to

>|the platform of love of Godhead.

1281|PURPORT

1282|This verse refers to the association of pure devotees, the

>|mercy of Krsna and the rendering of devotional service. All

>|these help one give up the association of nondevotees and

>|the material opulence awarded by the external energy, maya.

>|A pure devotee is never attracted by material opulence, for

>|he understands that wasting time to acquire material

>|opulence is a misuse of the gift of human life. In Srimad-

>|Bhagavatam it is said, srama eva hi kevalam [SB 1.2.8]. In

>|the eyes of a devotee, politicians, social workers,

>|philanthropists, philosophers and humanitarians are simply

>|wasting their time, for human society is not freed from the

>|cycle of birth and death by their activity and propaganda.

>|These so-called philanthropists, politicians and

>|philosophers have no knowledge because they do not know

>|that there is life after death. Understanding that there is

>|life after death is the beginning of spiritual knowledge. A

>|person can understand himself and what he is simply by

>|understanding the first lessons of the Bhagavad-gita (2.

>|13):

1283|dehino 'smin yatha dehe kaumaram yauvanam jara

1284|tatha dehantara -praptir dhiras tatra na muhyati

1285|"As the embodied soul continuously passes, in

>|this body, from boyhood to youth to old age, the soul

>|similarly passes into another body at death. A sober person

>|is not bewildered by such a change."

1286|Not knowing the real science of life, a foolish

>|person engages in the temporary activities of this life and

>|thus becomes further entangled in the cycle of birth and

>|death. He always desires material opulence, which can be

>|attained by karma, jnana and yoga. But when one is actually

>|elevated to the devotional platform, he gives up all these

>|desires. This is called anyabhilasita-sunya. Then one

>|becomes a pure devotee.

1287|Madhya 24.105

1288|TEXT 105

1289|TEXT

1290|Õ±Ná lîÂ lîÂ ÕnS õI±mI±d LÁ¿õþõ h

1291|LÔÁøž&í±¦¤±NðÃõþ Ûý×ÃÃ ÎýÃÃîRÂ æÃ±¿dõ N 105 N

1292|age yata yata artha vyakhyana kariba

1293|krsna-gunasvadera ei hetu janiba

1294|SYNONYMS

1295|age-ahead; yata yata-as many as; artha-meanings; vyakhyana

>|kariba-I shall explain; krsna-guna-asvadera-of tasting the

>|transcendental qualities of Krsna; ei-this; hetu-reason;

>|janiba-we shall understand.

1296|TRANSLATION

1297|"In this way I shall progressively explain all the words in

>|the atmarama verse. It should be understood that all these

>|words are meant to enable one to taste the transcendental

>|qualities of Krsna.

1298|Madhya 24.106

1299|TEXT 106

1300|TEXT

1301|Î±LÁõI±mI± h±¿á' Ûý×ÃÃ LÁ¿õþhRD Õ±tÂ±u h

1302|ÛNõ LÁ¿õþ Î±NLÁõþ ÷Óh±nS ›¶LÁ±ú N 106 N

1303|sloka-vyakhya lagi' ei karilun abhasa

1304|ebe kari slokera mulartha prakasa

1305|SYNONYMS

1306|sloka-vyakhya-of the explanation of the verse; lagi'-for

>|the matter; ei-this; karilun-I did; abhasa-indication; ebe-

>|now; kari-let Me do; slokera-of the verse; mula-artha-the

>|real meaning; prakasa-the manifestation.

1307|TRANSLATION

1308|"I have given all these explanations just to give some

>|indication of the verse 's meaning. Now let Me explain

>|the real meaning of the verse.

1309|Madhya 24.107

1310|TEXT 107

1311|TEXT

1312|:±d÷±NáS nÂ×ó±uLÁ-ðRÃý×ÃÃîÂ' ›¶LÁ±õþ h

1313|ÎLÁõh õrNpÁ±ó±uLÁ, Î÷±ŽÂ±LÁ±ãŽÂN Õ±õþ N 107 N

1314|jnana-marge upasaka-duita' prakara

1315|kevala brahmopasaka, moksakanksi ara

1316|SYNONYMS

1317|jnana-marge-on the path of philosophical speculation;

>|upasaka-worshipers; duita' prakara-two varieties; kevala-

>|only; brahma-upasaka-the worshiper of impersonal Brahman;

>|moksa-akanksi-desiring liberation; ara-and.

1318|TRANSLATION

1319|"There are two kinds of worshipers on the path of

>|philosophical speculation-one is called brahma-upasaka, a

>|worshiper of the impersonal Brahman, and the other is

>|called moksakanksi, one who desires liberation.

1320|Madhya 24.108

1321|TEXT 108

1322|TEXT

1323|ÎLÁõh õrNpÁ±ó±uLÁ ¿îd ÎtÂðÃ ýÃÃlþ h

1324|u±sLÁ, õrpÁ÷lþ, Õ±õþ ›¶±5–õrpÁhlþ N 108 N

1325|kevala brahmopasaka tina bheda haya

1326|sadhaka, brahmamaya, ara prapta-brahma-laya

1327|SYNONYMS

1328|kevala brahma-upasaka-the worshiper of only the impersonal

>|Brahman; tina bheda haya-there are three different groups;

>|sadhaka-the beginner; brahma-maya-absorbed in thought of

>|Brahman; ara-and; prapta-brahma-laya-actually merged into

>|the Brahman effulgence.

1329|TRANSLATION

1330|"There are three types of people who worship the impersonal

>|Brahman. The first is the beginner, the second is one whose

>|thoughts are absorbed in Brahman, and the third is one who

>|is actually merged in the impersonal Brahman.

1331|Madhya 24.109

1332|TEXT 109

1333|TEXT

1334|tÂ¿MÃ ¿õd± ÎLÁõh :±Nd '÷R¿MÃ' d±¿ýÃÃ ýÃÃlþ h

1335|tÂ¿MÃ u±sd LÁNõþ Îlý×ÃÃ '›¶±5–õrpÁhlþ' N 109 N

1336|bhakti vina kevala jnane 'mukti' nahi haya

1337|bhakti sadhana kare yei 'prapta-brahma-laya'

1338|SYNONYMS

1339|bhakti-devotional service; vina-without; kevala-only; jnane-

>|by philosophical speculation; mukti-liberation; nahi haya-

>|there is not; bhakti-devotional service; sadhana-practice;

>|kare-does; yei-anyone who; prapta-brahma-laya-as good as

>|merging into the impersonal Brahman.

1340|TRANSLATION

1341|"One cannot attain liberation simply through philosophical

>|speculation devoid of devotional service. However, if one

>|renders devotional service, he is automatically on the

>|Brahman platform.

1342|Madhya 24.110

1343|TEXT 110

1344|TEXT

1345|tÂ¿MÃõþ ¦¤tÂ±õ,-õrpÁ ÆýÃÃNîÂ LÁNõþ Õ±LÁø¸Sí h

1346|¿ðÃõI ÎðÃýÃÃ ¿ðÃlþ± LÁõþ±lþ LÔÁNøžõþ tÂæÃd N 110 N

1347|bhaktira svabhava,-brahma haite kare akarsana

1348|divya deha diya karaya krsnera bhajana

1349|SYNONYMS

1350|bhaktira-of devotional service; svabhava -nature;

>|brahma-impersonal Brahman realization; haite-from; kare-

>|does; akarsana-attracting; divya-transcendental; deha-body;

>|diya-offering; karaya-causes to perform; krsnera bhajana-

>|the service of Lord Krsna.

1351|TRANSLATION

1352|"Characteristically, one in devotional service is attracted

>|away from the impersonal Brahman platform. He is offered a

>|transcendental body to engage in Lord Krsna's service.

1353|Madhya 24.111

1354|TEXT 111

1355|TEXT

1356|tÂMÃNðÃýÃÃ ó±ý×ÃÃNh ýÃÃlþ &Níõþ ¦œõþí h

1357|&í±LÔÁ(c)† ýÃÃÛž± LÁNõþ ¿d÷Sh tÂæÃd N 111 N

1358|bhakta-deha paile haya gunera smarana

1359|gunakrsta hana kare nirmala bhajana

1360|SYNONYMS

1361|bhakta-deha-the body of a devotee; paile-when one gets;

>|haya-there is; gunera smarana-remembrance of the

>|transcendental qualities; guna-akrsta hana-being attracted

>|by the transcendental qualities; kare-performs; nirmala

>|bhajana-pure devotional service.

1362|TRANSLATION

1363|"When one gets a devotee's spiritual body, he can remember

>|the transcendental qualities of Krsna. Simply by being

>|attracted to Krsna's transcendental qualities, one becomes

>|a pure devotee engaged in His service.

1364|PURPORT

1365|Srila Bhaktivinoda Thakura has given the following summary

>|of verses 107–111. Transcendentalists on the path of

>|philosophical speculation can be divided into two

>|categories-the pure worshipers of impersonal Brahman and

>|those who wish to merge into the existence of impersonal

>|Brahman. When one is fully absorbed in the thought that one

>|is not different from the Supreme Absolute Truth, one is

>|said to be a worshiper of the impersonal Brahman. The

>|impersonal worshipers of Brahman can again be divided into

>|three categories-(1) sadhakas, those who are nearing

>|perfect execution of the process of Brahman realization; (2)

>| those who are fully absorbed in meditation on Brahman; and

>|(3) those who are on the brahma-bhuta [SB 4.30.20] platform

>|and have no relationship with material existence. Even

>|though the worshiper of impersonal Brahman can be highly

>|advanced, he cannot attain liberation without discharging

>|devotional service. Anyone who has realized himself as

>|spirit soul can engage in devotional service. This is the

>|verdict of the Bhagavad-gita (18.54):

1366|brahma-bhutah prasannatma na socati na kanksati

1367|samah sarvesu bhutesu mad-bhaktim labhate param

1368|"One who is thus transcendentally situated

>|at once realizes the Supreme Brahman and becomes fully

>|joyful. He never laments or desires to have anything; he is

>|equally disposed to every living entity. In that state he

>|attains pure devotional service unto Me."

1369|To attain the platform of pure devotional service, one has

>|to become spiritually pure and attain the brahma-bhuta

>|platform, which is beyond material anxiety and material

>|discrimination. When one approaches pure devotional service

>|after realizing Brahman, one becomes attracted by pure

>|devotional service. At such a time, by rendering devotional

>|service, one gets a spiritual body with purified senses.

1370|sarvopadhi-vinirmuktam tat-paratvena nirmalam

1371|hrsikena hrsikesa -sevanam bhaktir ucyate

1372| [Cc . Madhya 19.170]

1373|When one's senses are pure, one can render loving

>|devotional service to Krsna. A pure devotee can only

>|remember Krsna's transcendental qualities. Remembering them,

>| he fully engages in the loving service of the Lord.

1374|Madhya 24.112

1375|TEXT 112

1376|TEXT

1377|"÷RMÃ± Õ¿ó hNhlþ± ¿õ¢¶ýÃÃS LÔÁQ± tÂáõ(tm)LS tÂæÃN(tm)L N"

>|112 N

1378|"mukta api lilaya vigraham

1379|krtva bhagavantam bhajante"

1380|SYNONYMS

1381|muktah-liberated; api-although; lilaya-by pastimes;

>|vigraham-the form of the Lord; krtva-having installed;

>|bhagavantam-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhajante-

>|worship.

1382|TRANSLATION

1383|"'Even a liberated soul merged in the impersonal Brahman

>|effulgence is attracted to the pastimes of Krsna. He thus

>|installs a Deity and renders the Lord service.'

1384|PURPORT

1385|Highly elevated Mayavadi sannyasis sometimes worship the

>|Radha-Krsna Deity and discuss the pastimes of the Lord, but

>|their purpose is not elevation to Goloka Vrndavana. They

>|want to merge into the Lord's effulgence. This statement is

>|quoted from Sankaracarya's commentary on the Upanisad known

>|as Nrsimha-tapani.

1386|Madhya 24.113

1387|TEXT 113

1388|TEXT

1389|æÃij ÆýÃÃNîÂ qLÁ-udLÁ±¿ðÃ 'õrpÁ÷lþ' h

1390|LÔÁøž&í±LÔÁ(c)† ýÃÃÛž± LÔÁNøžNõþ tÂæÃlþ N 113 N

1391|janma haite suka-sanakadi 'brahmamaya'

1392|krsna-gunakrsta hana krsnere bhajaya

1393|SYNONYMS

1394|janma haite-from birth; suka-Sukadeva Gosvami; sanaka-adi-

>|the four Kumaras; brahma-maya-absorbed in the thought of

>|impersonal Brahman; krsna-guna-akrsta-attracted by the

>|transcendental pastimes of the Lord; hana-becoming; krsnere

>|bhajaya-worshiped Lord Krsna.

1395|TRANSLATION

1396|"Although Sukadeva Gosvami and the four Kumaras were always

>|absorbed in the thought of impersonal Brahman and were thus

>|Brahmavadis, they were nonetheless attracted by the

>|transcendental pastimes and qualities of Krsna. Therefore

>|they later became devotees of Krsna.

1397|Madhya 24.114

1398|TEXT 114

1399|TEXT

1400|udLÁ±NðÃIõþ LÔÁøžLÔÁó±lþ ÎuNõþNtÂ ýÃÃNõþ ÷d h

1401|&í±LÔÁ(c)† ýÃÃÛž± LÁNõþ ¿d÷Sh tÂæÃd N 114 N

1402|sanakadyera krsna-krpaya saurabhe hare mana

1403|gunakrsta hana kare nirmala bhajana

1404|SYNONYMS

1405|sanaka-adyera-of the four Kumaras, headed by Sanaka; krsna-

>|krpaya-by the mercy of the Lord; saurabhe-the fragrance;

>|hare-took away; mana-the minds; guna-akrsta hana-thus being

>|attracted by the qualities of Krsna; kare-perform; nirmala

>|bhajana-pure devotional service.

1406|TRANSLATION

1407|"The minds of the four Kumaras were attracted by the aroma

>|of the flowers offered to Krsna's lotus feet. Being thus

>|attracted by the transcendental qualities of Krsna, they

>|engaged in pure devotional service.

1408|Madhya 24.115

1409|TEXT 115

1410|TEXT

1411|îÂuI±õþ¿õµdlþduI óðÃ±õþ¿õµ-

1412|¿LÁ?{Ã¨¿÷|îRÂhuN÷LÁõþµõ±lþRÐ h

1413|Õ(tm)LáSîÂÐ ¦¤¿õõNõþí aÂLÁ±õþ ÎîÂø¸±S

1414|uSNŽÂ±tÂ÷ŽÂõþæRÃø¸±÷¿ó ¿aÂMÃÃîÂNi¤±Ð N 115 N

1415|tasyaravinda-nayanasya padaravinda-

1416| kinjalka-misra-tulasi-makaranda-vayuh

1417|antar-gatah sva-vivarena cakara tesam

1418| sanksobham aksara-jusam api citta-tanvoh

1419|SYNONYMS

1420|tasya-of Him; aravinda-nayanasya-of the lotus-eyed Lord;

>|pada-aravinda-of the lotus feet; kinjalka-with the toes;

>|misra-mixed; tulasi-the tulasi leaves; makaranda-fragrance;

>|vayuh-breeze; antah-gatah-entered within; sva-

>|vivarena-through their nostrils; cakara-made; tesam-of the

>|Kumaras; sanksobham-agitation for change; aksara-jusam-

>|attached to impersonal Brahman realization; api-even though;

>| citta-tanvoh-in both the mind and body.

1421|TRANSLATION

1422|"'When the breeze carrying the aroma of tulasi leaves and

>|saffron from the lotus feet of the lotus-eyed Personality

>|of Godhead entered through the nostrils into the hearts of

>|those sages [the Kumaras], they experienced a change in

>|both body and mind, even though they were attached to the

>|impersonal Brahman understanding.'

1423|PURPORT

1424|This is a verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (3.15.43).

1425|Madhya 24.116

1426|TEXT 116

1427|TEXT

1428|õI±uLÔÁó±lþ qLÁNðÃNõõþ hNh±¿ðÃ-¦œõþí h

1429|LÔÁøž&í±LÔÁ(c)† ýÃÃÛž± LÁNõþd tÂæÃd N 116 N

1430|vyasa-krpaya sukadevera liladi-smarana

1431|krsna-gunakrsta hana karena bhajana

1432|SYNONYMS

1433|vyasa-krpaya-by the mercy of Srila Vyasadeva; sukadevera-of

>|Sukadeva Gosvami; lila-adi-smarana-remembrance of the

>|transcendental pastimes of Krsna; krsna-guna-akrsta-

>|attracted by the transcendental qualities of Krsna; hana-

>|becoming; karena-performed; bhajana-loving service.

1434|TRANSLATION

1435|"By the mercy of Srila Vyasadeva, Sukadeva Gosvami was

>|attracted by the pastimes of Lord Krsna. Being thus

>|attracted by Krsna's transcendental qualities, he also

>|became a devotee and engaged in His service.

1436|Madhya 24.117

1437|TEXT 117

1438|TEXT

1439|ýÃÃNõþ&Sí±¿ŽÂ5÷¿îÂtSÂáõ±dA õ±ðÃõþ±lþ¿íÐ h

1440|ÕsIá±ijýÃÃðÃ±mI±dS ¿dîÂIS ¿õøRžæÃd¿›¶lþÐ N 117 N

1441|harer gunaksipta-matir

1442| bhagavan badarayanih

1443|adhyagan mahad-akhyanam

1444| nityam visnu-jana-priyah

1445|SYNONYMS

1446|hareh-of Lord Krsna; guna-aksipta-matih-whose mind was

>|agitated by the qualities; bhagavan-the most powerful

>|transcendentalist; badarayanih-Sukadeva, son of Vyasadeva;

>|adhyagat-studied; mahat-akhyanam-the great epic description;

>| nityam-eternally; visnu-jana-priyah-who is very dear to

>|the Vaisnavas, devotees of Lord Visnu.

1447|TRANSLATION

1448|"'Being very much attracted by the transcendental pastimes

>|of the Lord, the mind of Srila Sukadeva Gosvami was

>|agitated by Krsna consciousness. He therefore began to

>|study Srimad-Bhagavatam by the grace of his father.'

1449|PURPORT

1450|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.7.11).

1451|Madhya 24.118

1452|TEXT 118

1453|TEXT

1454|dõ-Îl±áN«õþ æÃij ÆýÃÃNîÂ 'u±sLÁ' :±dN h

1455|¿õ¿s-¿úõ-d±õþðÃ-÷RNm LÔÁøž&í q¿d' N 118 N

1456|nava-yogisvara janma haite 'sadhaka' jnani

1457|vidhi-siva-narada-mukhe krsna-guna suni'

1458|SYNONYMS

1459|nava-nine; yogi-isvara-great saintly yogis; janma haite-

>|from the very birth; sadhaka-practicers; jnani-well versed

>|in transcendental knowledge; vidhi-Lord Brahma; siva-Lord

>|Siva; narada-the great sage Narada; mukhe-in their mouths;

>|krsna-guna suni'-hearing the transcendental qualities of

>|Krsna.

1460|TRANSLATION

1461|"From their very births, the nine great mystic yogis [

>|Yogendras] were impersonal philosophers of the Absolute

>|Truth. But because they heard about Lord Krsna's

>|qualities from Lord Brahma, Lord Siva and the great sage

>|Narada, they also became Krsna's devotees.

1462|Madhya 24.119

1463|TEXT 119

1464|TEXT

1465|&í±LÔÁ(c)† ýÃÃÛž± LÁNõþ LÔÁNøžõþ tÂæÃd h

1466|ÛLÁ±ðÃú-¦¨Ng îDÂ±õþ tÂ¿MÃ-¿õõõþí N 119 N

1467|gunakrsta hana kare krsnera bhajana

1468|ekadasa-skandhe tanra bhakti-vivarana

1469|SYNONYMS

1470|guna-akrsta hana-being attracted by the transcendental

>|qualities; kare-engaged in; krsnera bhajana-the devotional

>|service of the Lord; ekadasa-skandhe-in the Eleventh Canto

>|of Srimad-Bhagavatam; tanra-of them; bhakti-vivarana-

>|description of the devotional service.

1471|TRANSLATION

1472|"In the Eleventh Canto of Srimad-Bhagavatam there is a full

>|description of the devotional service of the nine Yogendras,

>| who rendered devotional service because they were

>|attracted by the Lord's transcendental qualities.

1473|Madhya 24.120

1474|TEXT 120

1475|TEXT

1476|ÕNLvÁú±S LÁ÷htRÂõÐ ›¶¿õúI Îá±‡ÂNS

1477|LRÁõS(tm)LÐ |n¸¿îÂ¿úõþu±S |n¸¿îÂS |n¸îÂ:±Ð h

1478|nÂ×MRÃÃ/S lðRóRõþu/÷±lþ õþ/S

1479|Îl±áNf±Ð óRhLÁtÔÂNîÂ± dõ±óIõ±óRÐ N 120 N

1480|aklesam kamala-bhuvah pravisya gosthim

1481| kurvantah sruti-sirasam srutim sruta-jnah

1482|uttungam yadu-pura-sangamaya rangam

1483| yogindrah pulaka-bhrto navapy avapuh

1484|SYNONYMS

1485|aklesam-without material trouble; kamala-bhuvah-of Lord

>|Brahma, who took his birth from the lotus flower; pravisya-

>|entering; gosthim-the association; kurvantah-continuously

>|performing; sruti-sirasam-of the topmost Vedic knowledge;

>|srutim-hearing; sruta-jnah-who are expert in Vedic

>|knowledge; uttungam-very high; yadu-pura-sangamaya-for

>|going back home, back to Godhead, to Dvaraka; rangam-to

>|Ranga-ksetra; yogi-indrah-great saintly persons;

>|pulaka-bhrtah-being spiritually pleased; nava-nine; api-

>|although; avapuh-achieved.

1486|TRANSLATION

1487|"'The nine Yogendras entered Lord Brahma's association and

>|heard from him the real meaning of the topmost Vedic

>|literatures , the Upanisads. Although the Yogendras were

>|already conversant in Vedic knowledge, they became very

>|jubilant in Krsna consciousness just by listening to Brahma.

>| Thus they wanted to enter Dvaraka, the abode of Lord Krsna.

>| In this way they finally achieved the place known as Ranga-

>|ksetra.'

1488|PURPORT

1489|This is a quotation from the Maha Upanisad.

1490|Madhya 24.121

1491|TEXT 121

1492|TEXT

1493|Î÷±ŽÂ±LÁ±ãŽÂN :±dN ýÃÃlþ ¿îd›¶LÁ±õþ h

1494|÷R÷RŽRÂ, æÃNõijRMÃ, ›¶±5¦¤õþ+ó Õ±õþ N 121 N

1495|moksakanksi jnani haya tina-prakara

1496|mumuksu, jivan-mukta, prapta-svarupa ara

1497|SYNONYMS

1498|moksa-akanksi-those who desire to merge into the impersonal

>|Brahman; jnani-advanced in knowledge; haya-are; tina-

>|prakara-three varieties; mumuksu-desiring to be liberated;

>|jivan-mukta-already liberated, even in this life; prapta-

>|svarupa-self-realized; ara-and.

1499|TRANSLATION

1500|"Those who wish to merge into the impersonal Brahman are

>|also divided into three categories-those desiring to be

>|liberated, those already liberated and those who have

>|realized Brahman.

1501|Madhya 24.122

1502|TEXT 122

1503|TEXT

1504|'÷R÷RŽRÂ' æÃáNîÂ ÕNdLÁ uSu±õþN æÃd h

1505|'÷R¿MÃ' h±¿á' tÂNMÃI LÁNõþ LÔÁNøžõþ tÂæÃd N 122 N

1506|'mumuksu' jagate aneka samsari jana

1507|'mukti' lagi' bhaktye kare krsnera bhajana

1508|SYNONYMS

1509|mumuksu-desiring to be liberated; jagate-in this world;

>|aneka-many; samsari jana-engaged in material activities;

>|mukti lagi'-for the sake of liberation; bhaktye-in

>|devotional service; kare-perform; krsnera bhajana-the

>|worship of Krsna.

1510|TRANSLATION

1511|"There are many people within this material world who

>|desire liberation, and for this purpose they render

>|devotional service to Lord Krsna.

1512|Madhya 24.123

1513|TEXT 123

1514|TEXT

1515|÷R÷RŽÂNõ± Îâ±õþõþ+ó±dA ¿ýÃÃQ± tÓÂîÂóîÂNdn h

1516|d±õþ±lþí-LÁh±Ð ú±(tm)L± tÂæÃ¿(tm)L ýÃÃIduÓlþõÐ N 123 N

1517|mumuksavo ghora-rupan

1518| hitva bhuta-patin atha

1519|narayana-kalah santa

1520| bhajanti hy anasuyavah

1521|SYNONYMS

1522|mumuksavah-those who are perfectly learned, who desire the

>|highest perfection, and who, unlike demons and nondevotees,

>|are never envious of anyone; ghora-rupan-demigods with

>|fearful bodily features; hitva-giving up; bhuta-patin-the

>|forefathers (prajapatis); atha-therefore; narayana-kalah-

>|the plenary expansions of Lord Narayana; santah-very

>|peaceful; bhajanti-they worship; hi-certainly; anasuyavah-

>|nonenvious.

1523|TRANSLATION

1524|"'Those who want to be relieved from the material clutches

>|give up the worship of the various demigods who have

>|fearful bodily features. Such peaceful devotees, who are

>|not envious of the demigods, worship the different forms of

>|the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Narayana.'

1525|PURPORT

1526|This is a quotation from the Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.2.26).

>|Those who actually want the highest perfection worship Lord

>|Visnu in His different incarnations. Those who are

>|attracted to the materialistic way of life and who are

>|always agitated and full of anxiety worship demigods who

>|appear fierce - demigods like goddess Kali and Kala-

>|bhairava (Rudra). The devotees of Krsna, however, do not

>|envy the demigods or their worshipers but peacefully render

>|devotional service to the incarnations of Narayana instead.

1527|Madhya 24.124

1528|TEXT 124

1529|TEXT

1530|Îuý×ÃÃ uNõõþ u±sRuN/ &í ¦£RÂõþ±lþ h

1531|LÔÁøžtÂæÃd LÁõþ±lþ, '÷R÷RŽÂ±' rÃ±nÂl±lþ N 124 N

1532|sei sabera sadhu-sange guna sphuraya

1533|krsna-bhajana karaya, 'mumuksa' chadaya

1534|SYNONYMS

1535|sei sabera-of all those worshipers of different demigods;

>|sadhu-sange-the contact of real devotees; guna sphuraya-

>|awakens the appreciation of transcendental qualities; krsna-

>|bhajana karaya-engages in the devotional service of Lord

>|Krsna; mumuksa chadaya-and causes to give up the desire to

>|be liberated or merge into the impersonal feature of the

>|Lord.

1536|TRANSLATION

1537|"If those who are attached to demigod worship fortunately

>|associate with the devotees, their dormant devotional

>|service and appreciation of the Lord's qualities gradually

>|awaken. In this way they also engage in Krsna's devotional

>|service and give up the desire for liberation and the

>|desire to merge into the existence of impersonal Brahman.

1538|PURPORT

1539|The four Kumaras (Catuhsana ), Sukadeva Gosvami and

>|the nine Yogendras were absorbed in Brahman realization,

>|and how they became devotees is described herein. There are

>|three kinds of impersonalists-the mumuksu (those desiring

>|liberation), the jivan-muktas (those liberated in this life)

>| and the prapta-svarupas (those merged in Brahman

>|realization). All three types of jnanis are called

>|moksakanksis, those desiring liberation. By associating

>|with devotees, such people give up the mumuksu principle

>|and render devotional service. The real cause for this

>|change is the association of devotees. The Krsna

>|consciousness movement is meant to attract all types of men,

>| even those who desire things other than the Lord's

>|devotional service. Through the association of devotees,

>|they gradually begin to render devotional service.

1540|Madhya 24.125

1541|TEXT 125

1542|TEXT

1543|ÕNýÃÃ± ÷ýÃÃ±RdA õUNðÃ±ø¸ðRÃN(c)†±•Ã-

1544|ÎóINLÁd tÂ±NîÂIø¸ tÂNõ± &Níd h

1545|uRu/÷±NmId uRm±õNýÃÃd

1546|LÔÁîÂ±ðÃI Îd± Îld LÔÁú± ÷R÷RŽÂ± N 125 N

1547|aho mahatman bahu-dosa-dusto

1548| 'py ekena bhaty esa bhavo gunena

1549|sat-sangamakhyena sukhavahena

1550| krtadya no yena krsa mumuksa

1551|SYNONYMS

1552|aho maha-atman-O great devotee; bahu-dosa-dustah-

>|infected with varieties of material disease or attachment;

>|api-although; ekena-with one; bhati-shines; esah-this;

>|bhavah-birth in this material world; gunena-with a good

>|quality; sat-sangama-akhyena-known as association with

>|devotees; sukha-avahena-which brings about happiness; krta-

>|made; adya-now; nah-our; yena-by which; krsa-insignificant;

>|mumuksa-the desire for liberation.

1553|TRANSLATION

1554|"'O great learned devotee, although there are many faults

>|in this material world, there is one good opportunity-the

>|association with devotees. Such association brings about

>|great happiness. Due to this good quality, our strong

>|desire to achieve liberation by merging into the Brahman

>|effulgence has become weakened.'

1555|PURPORT

1556|This is a quotation from the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya.

1557|Madhya 24.126

1558|TEXT 126

1559|TEXT

1560|d±õþNðÃõþ uN/ ÎúNdLÁ±¿ðÃ ÷R¿dáí h

1561|÷R÷RŽÂ± rÃ±¿nÂllþ± ÆLÁh± LÔÁNøžõþ tÂæÃd N 126 N

1562|naradera sange saunakadi muni-gana

1563|mumuksa chadiya kaila krsnera bhajana

1564|SYNONYMS

1565|naradera sange-by the association of the great saintly

>|person Narada; saunaka-adi muni-gana-the great sages headed

>|by Saunaka Muni; mumuksa chadiya-giving up the desire for

>|liberation; kaila-performed; krsnera bhajana-devotional

>|service to Krsna.

1566|TRANSLATION

1567|"By associating with the great saint Narada,

>|Saunaka and other great sages gave up the

>|desire for liberation and engaged in Krsna's devotional

>|service.

1568|Madhya 24.127

1569|TEXT 127

1570|TEXT

1571|LÔÁNøžõþ ðÃúSNd, LÁ±Nõþ± LÔÁNøžõþ LÔÁó±lþ h

1572|÷R÷RŽÂ± rÃ±¿nÂllþ± &Ní tÂNæÃ îDÂ±õþ ó±'lþ N 127 N

1573|krsnera darsane, karo krsnera krpaya

1574|mumuksa chadiya gune bhaje tanra pa'ya

1575|SYNONYMS

1576|krsnera darsane-simply by meeting Krsna; karo-someone;

>|krsnera krpaya-by the favor of Krsna; mumuksa chadiya-

>|giving up the desire for liberation; gune-being attracted

>|by the transcendental qualities of Krsna; bhaje-engages in

>|service; tanra pa'ya-at the lotus feet of Krsna.

1577|TRANSLATION

1578|"Simply by meeting Krsna or receiving Krsna's special favor,

>| one can give up the desire for liberation. Being attracted

>|by the transcendental qualities of Krsna, one can engage in

>|His service.

1579|Madhya 24.128

1580|TEXT 128

1581|TEXT

1582|Õ¿¦œdA uRmâ d÷ ÓNîSÂN óõ þ÷±R¿d õÔ¿ø

>|žóMÃÃNd ¦£RÂõþ¿îÂ h

1583|Õ±R±õþ±÷îÂlþ± Î÷ õÔn± áNîÂ± õîÂ ¿

>|aÂõþS LÁ±hÐ N 128 N

1584|asmin sukha - ghana -murtau

1585| param -atmani vrsni -pattane sphurati

1586|atmaramataya me

1587| vrtha gato bata ciram kalah

1588|SYNONYMS

1589|asmin-when this; sukha-ghana-murtau-form of complete

>|happiness; parama-atmani-the Supreme Person; vrsni-pattane-

>|in Dvaraka-dhama; sphurati-exists; atmaramataya-by the

>|process of cultivating Brahman realization; me-my; vrtha-

>|uselessly; gatah-wasted; bata-alas, what can I say; ciram-

>|for a long time; kalah-time.

1590|TRANSLATION

1591|"'In this Dvaraka-dhama, I am being attracted by the

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead, Krsna, who is personified

>|spiritual bliss. Simply by seeing Him, I am feeling great

>|happiness. Oh, I have wasted so much time trying to become

>|self-realized through impersonal cultivation. This is a

>|cause for lamentation!'

1592|PURPORT

1593|This verse is found in the Bhakti-rasamrta-sindhu (3.1.

>|34).

1594|Madhya 24.129

1595|TEXT 129

1596|TEXT

1597|'æ ÃNõijRMÃ' ÕNdLÁ, Îuý×ÃÃ ðRÃý×ÃÃ ÎtÂ

>|ðÃ æÃ±¿d h

1598|'tÂNMÃI æÃ NõijRMÃ', ':±Nd æÃ

>|NõijRMÃ' ÷±¿d N 129 N

1599|'jivan-mukta' aneka, sei dui bheda jani

1600|'bhaktye jivan-mukta', 'jnane jivan-mukta' mani

1601|SYNONYMS

1602|jivan-mukta-liberated in this life; aneka-there are many;

>|sei-all of them; dui bheda-two divisions; jani-we consider;

>|bhaktye jivan-mukta-one liberated in this life by pursuing

>|the process of devotional service; jnane jivan-mukta-a

>|person liberated in this life by following the process of

>|philosophical speculation; mani-we can understand.

1603|TRANSLATION

1604|"There are many people who are liberated even in this

>|lifetime. Some are liberated by discharging devotional

>|service, and others are liberated through the philosophical

>|speculative process.

1605|Madhya 24.130

1606|TEXT 130

1607|TEXT

1608|'tÂNMÃI æÃNõijRMÃ' &í±LÔÁ(c)† ýÃÃÛž± LÔÁøž tÂNæÃ h

1609|q(c)¨:±Nd æÃNõijRMÃ Õóõþ±Ns ÕNs± ÷NæÃ N 130 N

1610|'bhaktye jivan-mukta' gunakrsta hana krsna bhaje

1611|suska-jnane jivan-mukta aparadhe adho maje

1612|SYNONYMS

1613|bhaktye jivan-mukta-persons liberated in this life by

>|discharging devotional service; guna-akrsta hana-being

>|attracted by the transcendental qualities of Krsna; krsna

>|bhaje-engage in the devotional service of the Lord; suska-

>|jnane jivan-mukta-so-called liberated in this life by dry,

>|speculative knowledge; aparadhe-by offenses; adho maje-fall

>|down.

1614|TRANSLATION

1615|"Those who are liberated by devotional service become more

>|and more attracted by the transcendental qualities of Krsna.

>| Thus they engage in His service. Those who are liberated

>|by the speculative process eventually fall down again due

>|to offensive activity.

1616|Madhya 24.131

1617|TEXT 131

1618|TEXT

1619|Îl•ÃNdI•Ãõþ¿õµ±ŽÂ ¿õ÷RMÃ÷±¿dd-

1620|b¦lI(tm)¦tÂ±õ±ðÃ¿õqXõRXlþÐ h

1621|Õ±ýÃÃI LÔÁN4í óõþS óðÃS îÂîÂÐ

1622|óîÂ(tm)LINs±•Ãd±ðÔÃîÂlRƒðÃãârlþÐ N 131 N

1623|ye 'nye 'ravindaksa vimukta-maninas

1624| tvayy asta-bhavad avisuddha-buddhayah

1625|aruhya krcchrena param padam tatah

1626| patanty adho 'nadrta-yusmad-anghrayah

1627|SYNONYMS

1628|ye-all those who; anye-others (nondevotees); aravinda-aksa-

>|O lotus-eyed one; vimukta-maninah-who consider themselves

>|liberated; tvayi-unto You; asta-bhavat-without devotion;

>|avisuddha-buddhayah-whose intelligence is not purified;

>|aruhya-having ascended; krcchrena-by severe austerities and

>|penances; param padam-to the supreme position; tatah-from

>|there; patanti-fall; adhah-down; anadrta-without respecting;

>| yusmat-Your; anghrayah-lotus feet.

1629|TRANSLATION

1630|"'O lotus-eyed one, those who think they are liberated in

>|this life but are without devotional service to You are of

>|impure intelligence. Although they accept severe

>|austerities and penances and rise to the spiritual position,

>| to impersonal Brahman realization, they fall down again

>|because they neglect to worship Your lotus feet.'

1631|PURPORT

1632|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.2.32).

1633|Madhya 24.132

1634|TEXT 132

1635|TEXT

1636|õrpÁtÓÂîÂÐ ›¶ui§±R± d Îú±aÂ¿îÂ d LÁ±ãŽÂ¿îÂ h

1637|u÷Ð uNõSø¸R tÓÂNîÂø¸R ÷3/4Ã¿MÃS htÂNîÂ óõþ±÷A N 132 N

1638|brahma-bhutah prasannatma

1639| na socati na kanksati

1640|samah sarvesu bhutesu

1641| mad-bhaktim labhate param

1642|SYNONYMS

1643|brahma-bhutah-being one with the Absolute; prasanna-atma-

>|fully joyful; na-never; socati-laments; na-never; kanksati-

>|desires; samah-equally disposed; sarvesu-all; bhutesu-to

>|living entities; mat-bhaktim-My devotional service; labhate-

>|gains; param-transcendental.

1644|TRANSLATION

1645|"'One who is thus transcendentally situated at once

>|realizes the Supreme Brahman and becomes fully joyful. He

>|never laments or desires to have anything; he is equally

>|disposed to every living entity. In that state he attains

>|pure devotional service unto Me.'

1646|PURPORT

1647|This is a quotation from the Bhagavad-gita (18.54).

1648|Madhya 24.133

1649|TEXT 133

1650|TEXT

1651|ÕÍZîÂõNnNó¿nÍLÁó±uI±Ð

1652|¦¤±dµ¿uSýÃÃ±udhtðÃNŽÂ±Ð h

1653|úNêÂd ÎLÁd±¿ó õlþS ýÃÃNêÂd

1654|ðÃ±uNLÔÁîÂ± Îá±óõsÓ¿õNiÂd N 133 N

1655|advaita-vithi-pathikair upasyah

1656| svananda-simhasana-labdha-diksah

1657|sathena kenapi vayam hathena

1658| dasi-krta gopa-vadhu-vitena

1659|SYNONYMS

1660|advaita-vithi-on the path of monism; pathikaih-by the

>|wanderers; upasyah-worshipable; sva-ananda-of self-

>|realization; simha-asana-on the throne; labdha-diksah-

>|being initiated; sathena-by a cheater; kena api-some;

>|vayam-I; hathena-by force; dasi-krta-made into a

>|maidservant; gopa-vadhu-vitena-engaged in joking with the

>|gopis.

1661|TRANSLATION

1662|"'Although I was worshiped by those on the path of monism

>|and initiated into self-realization through the yoga system,

>| I have nonetheless been forcibly turned into a

>|maidservant by some cunning boy who is always joking with

>|the gopis.'

1663|PURPORT

1664|This is a verse written by Bilvamangala Thakura.

1665|Madhya 24.134

1666|TEXT 134

1667|TEXT

1668|tÂ¿MÃõNh '›¶±5¦¤õþ+ó' ¿ðÃõINðÃýÃÃ ó±lþ h

1669|LÔÁøž&í±LÔÁ(c)† ýÃÃÛž± tÂNæÃ LÔÁøž-ó±'lþ N 134 N

1670|bhakti-bale 'prapta-svarupa' divya-deha paya

1671|krsna-gunakrsta hana bhaje krsna-pa'ya

1672|SYNONYMS

1673|bhakti-bale-by the strength of devotional service; prapta-

>|svarupa-attaining his original status; divya-deha-a

>|transcendental body; paya-one gets; krsna-guna-akrsta-

>|attracted by the transcendental qualities of Krsna; hana-

>|being; bhaje-takes to devotional service; krsna-pa'ya-at

>|Krsna's lotus feet.

1674|TRANSLATION

1675|"One who has attained his constitutional position by the

>|strength of devotional service attains a transcendental

>|body even in this lifetime. Being attracted by Lord Krsna's

>|transcendental qualities, he fully engages in service at

>|His lotus feet.

1676|Madhya 24.135

1677|TEXT 135

1678|TEXT

1679|¿dNõþ±Ns±•ÃuI±dRúlþd÷±RdÐ uýÃÃ ú¿MÃ¿tÂÐ h

1680|÷R¿MÃ¿ýSÃÃQ±dIn±õþ+óS ¦¤õþ+Nóí õIõ¿¦š¿îÂÐ N 135 N

1681|nirodho 'syanusayanam

1682| atmanah saha saktibhih

1683|muktir hitvanyatha-rupam

1684| svarupena vyavasthitih

1685|SYNONYMS

1686|nirodhah-winding up; asya-of this; anu-after; sayanam-lying

>|down; atmanah-of the Supreme Lord; saha-with; saktibhih-the

>|energies (marginal and external); muktih-liberation; hitva-

>|giving up; anyatha-other; rupam-form; svarupena-with one's

>|own eternal form; vyavasthitih-staying.

1687|TRANSLATION

1688|"'The living entities and other potencies merge into

>|Maha-Visnu as the Lord lies down and winds up [destroys]

>|the cosmic manifestation. Liberation means being situated

>|in one's eternal , original form after

>|giving up the changeable gross and subtle bodies.'

1689|PURPORT

1690|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (2.10.6).

1691|Madhya 24.136

1692|TEXT 136

1693|TEXT

1694|LÔÁøž-õ¿ýÃÃ÷SRm-ÎðÃ±Nø¸ ÷±lþ± ÆýÃÃNîÂ tÂlþ h

1695|LÔÁNøž±ijRm tÂ¿MÃ ÆýÃÃNîÂ ÷±lþ±-÷RMÃ ýÃÃlþ N 136 N

1696|krsna-bahirmukha-dose maya haite bhaya

1697|krsnonmukha bhakti haite maya-mukta haya

1698|SYNONYMS

1699|krsna-bahir-mukha-of going against Krsna consciousness;

>|dose-by the fault; maya haite-from the illusory energy;

>|bhaya-fear; krsna-unmukha-in favor of Krsna consciousness;

>|bhakti-devotional service; haite-from; maya-mukta-liberated

>|from maya; haya-one becomes.

1700|TRANSLATION

1701|"By opposing Krsna consciousness, one becomes

>|conditioned and fearful due to the influence of maya. By

>|executing devotional service faithfully, one is liberated

>|from maya.

1702|Madhya 24.137

1703|TEXT 137

1704|TEXT

1705|tÂlþS ¿ZîÂNlþ±¿tÂ¿dNõúîÂÐ uI±-

1706|ðÃNú±ðÃNóîÂuI ¿õólSNlþ±•Ã¦œÔ¿îÂÐ h

1707|îÂij±lþlþ±NîÂ± õRs Õ±tÂNæÃMÃÃS

1708|tÂÍMÃILÁNlþúS &NðÃõîÂ±R± N 137 N

1709|bhayam dvitiyabhinivesatah syad

1710| isad apetasya viparyayo 'smrtih

1711|tan-mayayato budha abhajet tam

1712| bhaktyaikayesam guru-devatatma

1713|SYNONYMS

1714|bhayam-fear; dvitiya-abhinivesatah-from the misconception

>|of being a product of material energy; syat-arises; isat-

>|from the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Krsna; apetasya-of

>|one who has withdrawn (the conditioned soul); viparyayah-

>|reversal of position; asmrtih-no conception of his

>|relationship with the Supreme Lord; tat-mayaya-because of

>|the illusory energy of the Supreme Lord; atah-therefore;

>|budhah-one who is wise; abhajet-must worship; tam-Him;

>|bhaktya-by devotional service; ekaya-not diverted

>|to karma and jnana; isam-the Supreme Personality of Godhead;

>| guru-as the spiritual master; devata-worshipable Lord;

>|atma-Supersoul.

1715|TRANSLATION

1716|"'When the living entity is attracted by the material

>|energy , which is separate from Krsna, he is overpowered by

>|fear. Because he is separated from the Supreme Personality

>|of Godhead by the material energy, his conception of life

>|is reversed. In other words, instead of being the eternal

>|servant of Krsna, he becomes Krsna's competitor. This is

>|called viparyayo 'smrtih. To nullify this mistake,

>|one who is actually learned and advanced worships the

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead as his spiritual master,

>|worshipful Deity and source of life. He thus worships the

>|Lord by the process of unalloyed devotional service.'

1717|PURPORT

1718|This verse is quoted from Srimad-Bhagavatam (11.2.37).

1719|Madhya 24.138

1720|TEXT 138

1721|TEXT

1722|ÆðÃõN ÎýÃÃIø¸± &í÷lþN ÷÷ ÷±lþ± ðRÃõþîÂIlþ± h

1723|÷±N÷õ Îl ›¶óðÃIN(tm)L ÷±lþ±N÷îÂ±S îÂõþ¿(tm)L ÎîÂ N 138 N

1724|daivi hy esa guna-mayi

1725| mama maya duratyaya

1726|mam eva ye prapadyante

1727| mayam etam taranti te

1728|SYNONYMS

1729|daivi-belonging to the Supreme Lord; hi-certainly; esa-this;

>| guna-mayi-made of the three modes; mama-My; maya-external

>|energy; duratyaya-very difficult to surpass; mam-unto Me;

>|eva-certainly; ye-those who; prapadyante-surrender fully;

>|mayam-the illusory energy; etam-this; taranti-cross over;

>|te-they.

1730|TRANSLATION

1731|"'This divine energy of Mine, consisting of the three

>|modes of material nature, is difficult to overcome. But

>|those who have surrendered unto Me can easily cross beyond

>|it.'

1732|PURPORT

1733|This is a quotation from the Bhagavad-gita (7.14).

1734|Madhya 24.139

1735|TEXT 139

1736|TEXT

1737|tÂ¿MÃ ¿õdR ÷R¿MÃ d±¿ýÃÃ, tÂNMÃI ÷R¿MÃ ýÃÃlþ N 139 N

1738|bhakti vinu mukti nahi, bhaktye mukti haya

1739|SYNONYMS

1740|bhakti-devotional service; vinu-without; mukti-liberation;

>|nahi-there is not; bhaktye-actually by devotional service;

>|mukti haya-liberation is attained.

1741|TRANSLATION

1742|"One does not attain liberation without rendering

>|devotional service. Liberation is attained only by

>|devotional service.

1743|Madhya 24.140

1744|TEXT 140

1745|TEXT

1746|Î|lþÐuÔ¿îÂS tÂ¿MÃ÷RðÃuI ÎîÂ ¿õNtÂ±

1747|¿LvÁúI¿(tm)L Îl ÎLÁõh-Îõ±shtNlþ h

1748|ÎîÂø¸±÷NuN ÎLvÁúh Ûõ ¿úø¸INîÂ

1749|d±dIðAÃln± ¦²šhîRÂø¸±õâ±¿îd±÷A N 140 N

1750|sreyah-srtim bhaktim udasya te vibho

1751| klisyanti ye kevala-bodha-labdhaye

1752|tesam asau klesala eva sisyate

1753| nanyad yatha sthula-tusavaghatinam

1754|SYNONYMS

1755|sreyah-srtim-the auspicious path of liberation; bhaktim-

>|devotional service; udasya-giving up; te-of You; vibho-O my

>|Lord; klisyanti-accept increased difficulties; ye-all those

>|persons who; kevala-only; bodha-labdhaye-for obtaining

>|knowledge; tesam-for them; asau-that; klesalah-trouble; eva-

>|only; sisyate-remains; na-not; anyat-anything else; yatha-

>|as much as; sthula-bulky; tusa-husks of rice; avaghatinam-

>|of those beating.

1756|TRANSLATION

1757|"'My dear Lord, devotional service unto You is the only

>|auspicious path. If one gives it up simply for speculative

>|knowledge or the understanding that these living beings are

>|spirit souls and the material world is false, he undergoes

>|a great deal of trouble. He only gains troublesome and

>|inauspicious activities. His actions are like beating a

>|husk that is already devoid of rice. His labor becomes

>|fruitless.'

1758|PURPORT

1759|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.14.4).

1760|Madhya 24.141

1761|TEXT 141

1762|TEXT

1763|Îl•ÃNdI•Ãõþ¿õµ±ŽÂ ¿õ÷RMÃ÷±¿dd-

1764|b¦lI(tm)¦tÂ±õ±ðÃ¿õqXõRXlþÐ h

1765|Õ±ýÃÃI LÔÁN4í óõþS óðÃS îÂîÂÐ

1766|óîÂ(tm)LINs±•Ãd±ðÔÃîÂlRƒðÃãârlþÐ N 141 N

1767|ye 'nye 'ravindaksa vimukta-maninas

1768| tvayy asta-bhavad avisuddha-buddhayah

1769|aruhya krcchrena param padam tatah

1770| patanty adho 'nadrta-yusmad-anghrayah

1771|SYNONYMS

1772|ye-all those who; anye-others (nondevotees); aravinda-aksa-

>|O lotus-eyed one; vimukta-maninah-who consider themselves

>|liberated; tvayi-unto You; asta-bhavat-without devotion;

>|avisuddha-buddhayah-whose intelligence is not purified;

>|aruhya-having ascended; krcchrena-by severe austerities and

>|penances; param padam-to the supreme position; tatah-from

>|there; patanti-fall; adhah-down; anadrta-without respecting;

>| yusmat-Your; anghrayah-lotus feet.

1773|TRANSLATION

1774|"'O lotus-eyed one, those who think they are liberated in

>|this life but are without devotional service to You are of

>|impure intelligence. Although they accept severe

>|austerities and penances and rise to the spiritual position,

>| to impersonal Brahman realization, they fall down again

>|because they neglect to worship Your lotus feet.'

1775|PURPORT

1776|This is a verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.2.32).

1777|Madhya 24.142

1778|TEXT 142

1779|TEXT

1780|l Ûø¸±S óRø¸S u±ŽÂ±ðÃ±R›¶tÂõ÷N«õþ÷A h

1781|d tÂæÃ(tm)LIõæÃ±d¿(tm)L ¦š±d±ðAÃw(c)†±Ð óîÂ(tm)LIsÐ N 142 N

1782|ya esam purusam saksad

1783| atma-prabhavam isvaram

1784|na bhajanty avajananti

1785| sthanad bhrastah patanty adhah

1786|SYNONYMS

1787|ye-those who; esam-of those divisions of social and

>|spiritual orders; purusam-the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead; saksat-directly; atma-prabhavam-the source of

>|everyone; isvaram-the supreme controller; na-do not;

>|bhajanti-worship; avajananti-or who neglect; sthanat-from

>|their proper place; bhrastah-being fallen; patanti-fall;

>|adhah-downward into hellish conditions.

1788|TRANSLATION

1789|"'If one simply maintains an official position in the four

>|varnas and asramas but does not worship the Supreme Lord

>|Visnu, he falls down from his puffed -up position into a

>|hellish condition.'

1790|PURPORT

1791|This is also a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (11.5.3).

1792|Madhya 24.143

1793|TEXT 143

1794|TEXT

1795|tÂNMÃI ÷R¿MÃ ó±ý×ÃÃNhýÃÃ ÕõúI LÔÁNøžNõþ tÂæÃlþ N 143 N

1796|bhaktye mukti paileha avasya krsnere bhajaya

1797|SYNONYMS

1798|bhaktye-by devotional service; mukti-liberation; paileha-if

>|one gets; avasya-certainly; krsnere-unto Lord Krsna;

>|bhajaya-renders service.

1799|TRANSLATION

1800|"When one is actually liberated by executing devotional

>|service, he always engages in the transcendental loving

>|service of the Lord.

1801|Madhya 24.144

1802|TEXT 144

1803|TEXT

1804|"÷RMÃ± Õ¿ó hNhlþ± ¿õ¢¶ýÃÃS LÔÁQ± tÂáõ(tm)LS tÂæÃN(tm)L N"

>|144 N

1805|"mukta api lilaya vigraham

1806|krtva bhagavantam bhajante"

1807|SYNONYMS

1808|muktah-liberated; api-although; lilaya-by the pastimes;

>|vigraham-the form of the Lord; krtva-having installed;

>|bhagavantam-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhajante-

>|worship.

1809|TRANSLATION

1810|"'Even a liberated soul merged in the impersonal Brahman

>|effulgence is attracted to the pastimes of Krsna. He thus

>|installs a Deity and renders the Lord service.'

1811|PURPORT

1812|This is a quotation from Sankaracarya's commentary on the

>|Nrsimha-tapani Upanisad.

1813|Madhya 24.145

1814|TEXT 145

1815|TEXT

1816|Ûý×ÃÃ rÃlþ Õ±R±õþ±÷ LÔÁNøžNõþ tÂæÃlþ h

1817|óÔnLAÁ óÔnLAÁ aÂ-LÁ±Nõþ ý×ÃÃýÃÃ± 'Õ¿ó'õþ ÕnS LÁlþ N 145 N

1818|ei chaya atmarama krsnere bhajaya

1819|prthak prthak ca-kare iha 'api'ra artha kaya

1820|SYNONYMS

1821|ei chaya-all these six; atmarama-transcendentalists;

>|krsnere bhajaya-render service to Krsna; prthak prthak-

>|separately; ca-kare-in the use of the word ca; iha-here;

>|apira -of the word api; artha-meaning; kaya-says.

1822|TRANSLATION

1823|"These six kinds of atmaramas engage in the loving service

>|of Krsna. The varieties of service are indicated by adding '

>|ca, ' and they also bear the meaning of 'api ' ['indeed ']

>|.

1824|PURPORT

1825|There are six kinds of atmaramas: the neophyte student (

>|sadhaka) , one who is absorbed in Brahman realization (

>|brahma-maya), one who has already attained the Brahman

>|position (prapta-brahma-laya), one who desires to be

>|liberated (mumuksu), one who is liberated even in this life

>|(jivan-mukta), and one who is self-realized (prapta-svarupa)

>|.

1826|Madhya 24.146

1827|TEXT 146

1828|TEXT

1829|"Õ±R±õþ±÷±( Õ¿ó" LÁNõþ LÔÁNøž ÕÍýÃÃîRÂLÁN tÂ¿MÃ h

1830|"÷RdlþÐ u(tm)LÐ" ý×ÃÃ¿îÂ LÔÁøž÷dNd Õ±u¿MÃ N 146 N

1831|"atmaramas ca api" kare krsne ahaituki bhakti

1832|"munayah santah" iti krsna-manane asakti

1833|SYNONYMS

1834|atmaramah ca api-self-realized persons also; kare-do; krsne-

>|unto Krsna; ahaituki bhakti-unmotivated devotional service;

>|munayah santah-great saintly persons and transcendentalists;

>| iti-thus; krsna-manane-in meditation on Krsna; asakti-

>|attraction.

1835|TRANSLATION

1836|"The six kinds of atmaramas render devotional service to

>|Krsna without ulterior motives. The words 'munayah ' and '

>|santah ' indicate those who are very much attached to

>|meditating upon Krsna.

1837|Madhya 24.147

1838|TEXT 147

1839|TEXT

1840|"¿d¢¶SLš±Ð"-Õ¿õðÃI±ýÃÃNd, ÎLÁýÃÃ-¿õ¿sýÃÃNd h

1841|l±ýDÃÃ± Îlý×ÃÃ lRMÃ, Îuý×ÃÃ ÕNnSõþ ÕsNd N 147 N

1842|"nirgranthah"-avidya-hina, keha-vidhi-hina

1843|yahan yei yukta, sei arthera adhina

1844|SYNONYMS

1845|nirgranthah-nirgranthah; avidya-hina-without ignorance;

>|keha-some of them; vidhi-hina-without following any

>|regulative principles; yahan-wherever; yei-which; yukta-

>|appropriate; sei arthera adhina-comes under that different

>|import.

1846|TRANSLATION

1847|"The word 'nirgranthah ' means 'without ignorance' and '

>|devoid of rules and regulations.' Whichever meaning fits

>|may be applied.

1848|Madhya 24.148

1849|TEXT 148

1850|TEXT

1851|aÂ-úNs LÁ¿õþ l¿ðÃ 'ý×ÃÃîÂNõþîÂõþ' ÕnS h

1852|Õ±õþ ÛLÁ ÕnS LÁNýÃÃ óõþ÷ u÷nS N 148 N

1853|ca-sabde kari yadi 'itaretara' artha

1854|ara eka artha kahe parama samartha

1855|SYNONYMS

1856|ca-sabde-by the word ca; kari-I do; yadi-if; itara-

>|itara artha-different and separate meanings; ara-another;

>|eka-one; artha-meaning; kahe-is said; parama samartha-

>|highly suitable.

1857|TRANSLATION

1858|"The use of the word 'ca ' in different places

>|produces different meanings. Over and above them, there is

>|another meaning that is very important.

1859|Madhya 24.149

1860|TEXT 149

1861|TEXT

1862|"Õ±R±õþ±÷±( Õ±R±õþ±÷±(" LÁ¿õþ' õ±õþ rÃlþ h

1863|ó= Õ±R±õþ±÷ rÃlþ aÂ-LÁ±Nõþ hR5 ýÃÃlþ N 149 N

1864|"atmaramas ca atmaramas ca" kari' bara chaya

1865|panca atmarama chaya ca-kare lupta haya

1866|SYNONYMS

1867|atmaramah ca atmaramah ca-repeating the words atmaramah and

>|ca; kari'-doing; bara chaya-six times; panca atmarama-five

>|kinds of atmaramas; chaya-six; ca-kare-by the word ca;

>|lupta haya-become unpronounced.

1868|TRANSLATION

1869|"Although the words 'atmaramas ca ' would be repeated six

>|times, simply by adding the word 'ca, ' five 'atmaramas '

>|are deleted.

1870|Madhya 24.150

1871|TEXT 150

1872|TEXT

1873|ÛLÁ 'Õ±R±õþ±÷'-ús ÕõNúø¸ õþNýÃÃ h

1874|ÛLÁ 'Õ±R±õþ±÷'-úNs rÃlþæÃd LÁNýÃÃ N 150 N

1875|eka 'atmarama'-sabda avasesa rahe

1876|eka 'atmarama'-sabde chaya-jana kahe

1877|SYNONYMS

1878|eka-one; atmarama-atmarama; sabda-vibration; avasesa rahe-

>|remains at last; eka atmarama-one atmarama; sabde-by

>|vibrating; chaya-jana-six persons; kahe-are indicated.

1879|TRANSLATION

1880|"Therefore there is no need to repeat the word 'atmarama. '

>|One is sufficient, and that one word indicates six persons.

1881|Madhya 24.151

1882|TEXT 151

1883|TEXT

1884|"uõþ+ó±í±N÷LÁNúø¸ ÛL Á¿ õt ÂNMÃ

>|N" h

1885|nÂ×MÃ±nS±d±÷›¶Nlþ±áÐ h

1886|õþ±÷( õþ±÷( õþ±÷( õþ±÷± ý×ÃÃ¿îÂõR N 151 N

1887|"sarupanam eka-sesa eka-vibhaktau" uktarthanam aprayogah,

>|ramas ca ramas ca ramas ca rama itivat.

1888|SYNONYMS

1889|sa-rupanam-of words of the same form; eka-sesah-only the

>|last; eka-vibhaktau-in the same case; ukta-arthanam-of the

>|previously spoken meanings; aprayogah-nonapplication; ramah

>|ca-and Rama; ramah ca-and Rama; ramah ca-and Rama; ramah

>|iti-vat-in this way, by one rama, many ramas are

>|indicated.

1890|TRANSLATION

1891|"'Of words having the same form and case termination, the

>|last one is the only one retained. For example, the word "

>|ramah " is used to stand for "ramas ca, ramas ca, ramas ca,

>|etc. "'

1892|PURPORT

1893|This is a quotation from Panini's sutras (1.2.64).

1894|Madhya 24.152

1895|TEXT 152

1896|TEXT

1897|îÂNõ Îl aÂ-LÁ±õþ, Îuý×ÃÃ 'u÷R2aÂlþ' LÁlþ h

1898|"Õ±R±õþ±÷±( ÷Rdlþ(" LÔÁNøžNõþ tÂæÃlþ N 152 N

1899|tabe ye ca-kara, sei 'samuccaya' kaya

1900|"atmaramas ca munayas ca" krsnere bhajaya

1901|SYNONYMS

1902|tabe-then; ye-that; ca-kara-syllable ca; sei-that;

>|samuccaya-aggregation; kaya-is said; atmaramah ca-all those

>|who enjoy in the self; munayah ca-all saintly persons;

>|krsnere bhajaya-worship Krsna.

1903|TRANSLATION

1904|"By the aggregate use of the word 'ca, ' it is indicated

>|that all the atmaramas and saints serve and worship Krsna.

1905|Madhya 24.153

1906|TEXT 153

1907|TEXT

1908|"¿d¢¶SLš± Õ¿ó"õþ Ûý×ÃÃ 'Õ¿ó'-uy±õNd h

1909|Ûý×ÃÃ u±îÂ ÕnS ›¶nN÷ LÁ¿õþhRD õI±mI±Nd N 153 N

1910|"nirgrantha api"ra ei 'api'-sambhavane

1911|ei sata artha prathame karilun vyakhyane

1912|SYNONYMS

1913|nirgranthah apira-of the words nirgranthah api; ei-this;

>|api-the word api; sambhavane-in the matter of exposition;

>|ei sata artha-these seven different meanings; prathame-in

>|the beginning; karilun-I have done; vyakhyane-in

>|explanation.

1914|TRANSLATION

1915|"'Api ' added to the word 'nirgranthah ' is used for

>|exposition. Thus I have tried to clarify seven meanings

>|[of the atmarama verse].

1916|Madhya 24.154

1917|TEXT 154

1918|TEXT

1919|Õ(tm)LlS±¿÷-nÂ×ó±uLÁ 'Õ±R±õþ±÷' LÁlþ h

1920|Îuý×ÃÃ Õ±R±õþ±÷ Îl±áNõþ ðRÃý×ÃÃ ÎtÂðÃ ýÃÃlþ N 154 N

1921|antaryami-upasaka 'atmarama' kaya

1922|sei atmarama yogira dui bheda haya

1923|SYNONYMS

1924|antaryami-of the Supersoul; upasaka-worshiper; atmarama

>|kaya-is also said to be an atmarama; sei atmarama-that

>|atmarama; yogira-of the mystic yogi; dui bheda haya-there

>|are two kinds.

1925|TRANSLATION

1926|"The yogi who worships the Supersoul within himself is also

>|called atmarama. There are two types of atmarama-yogis.

1927|Madhya 24.155

1928|TEXT 155

1929|TEXT

1930|uátSÂ, ¿dátSÂ,-Ûý×ÃÃ ýÃÃlþ ðRÃý×ÃÃ ÎtÂðÃ h

1931|ÛLÁ ÛLÁ ¿îd ÎtÂNðÃ rÃlþ ¿õNtÂðÃ N 155 N

1932|sagarbha, nigarbha,-ei haya dui bheda

1933|eka eka tina bhede chaya vibheda

1934|SYNONYMS

1935|sagarbha-sagarbha; nigarbha-nigarbha; ei-thus; haya-there

>|are; dui-two; bheda-different varieties; eka eka-each one;

>|tina bhede-in three varieties; chaya vibheda-therefore

>|there are six varieties.

1936|TRANSLATION

1937|"The two types of atmarama-yogis are called sagarbha and

>|nigarbha. Each of these is divided into three; therefore

>|there are six types of worshipers of the Supersoul.

1938|PURPORT

1939|The word sagarbha-yogi refers to a yogi who worships the

>|Supersoul in the Visnu form. The nigarbha-yogi worships the

>|Supersoul without form. The sagarbha and nigarbha yogis are

>|further categorized: (1) sagarbha-yogaruruksu, (2) nigarbha-

>|yogaruruksu, (3) sagarbha-yogarudha, (4) nigarbha-yogarudha,

>| (5) sagarbha-prapta-siddhi and (6) nigarbha-prapta-siddhi.

1940|Madhya 24.156

1941|TEXT 156

1942|TEXT

1943|ÎLÁ¿aÂR ¦¤NðÃýÃÃ±(tm)Lý+SðÃlþ±õLÁ±Nú ›

>|¶±NðÃú÷±SS óRø¸S õu(tm)L÷A h

1944|aÂîRÂtRSÂæÃS LÁ?õþn±/úºáðÃ±sõþS s±õþílþ± ¦œõþ¿(tm)L N 156 N

1945|kecit sva-dehantar hrdayavakase

1946| pradesa-matram purusam vasantam

1947|catur-bhujam kanja-rathanga-sankha-

1948| gada-dharam dharanaya smaranti

1949|SYNONYMS

1950|kecit-some of them; sva-deha-antah-within one's own body;

>|hrdaya-avakase-in the cavity of the heart; pradesa-matram-

>|with the measurement of six inches; purusam-the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead; vasantam-residing; catuh-bhujam-

>|with four hands; kanja-a lotus flower; ratha-anga-a disc

>|like the wheel of a chariot; sankha-a conchshell; gada-

>|dharam-holding the club; dharanaya-by such contemplation;

>|smaranti-they remember.

1951|TRANSLATION

1952|"'Some yogis think of the Lord within their hearts as

>|measuring about six inches. The Lord has four hands, in

>|which He holds a conchshell, club, disc and lotus flower.

>|Those who worship this form of Visnu within the heart are

>|called sagarbha-yogis.'

1953|PURPORT

1954|This verse is from Srimad-Bhagavatam (2.2.8).

1955|Madhya 24.157

1956|TEXT 157

1957|TEXT

1958|ÛõS ýÃÃNõþN tÂáõ¿îÂ ›¶¿îÂhttÂ±Nõ±

1959|tÂMÃI± ^õXÔÂðÃlþ nÂ×RóRhLÁÐ ›¶N÷±ðÃ±R h

1960|ÞRLÁFIõ±(c)óLÁhlþ± ÷RUõþðSÃI÷±d-

1961|(tm)¦2aÂ±¿ó ¿aÂMÃÃõ¿nÂlúS údÍLÁ¿õSlR†ANMÃ N 157 N

1962|evam harau bhagavati pratilabdha-bhavo

1963| bhaktya dravad-dhrdaya utpulakah pramodat

1964|autkanthya-baspa-kalaya muhur ardyamanas

1965| tac capi citta-badisam sanakair viyunkte

1966|SYNONYMS

1967|evam-thus; harau-unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead;

>|bhagavati-the Lord; pratilabdha-bhavah-one who has awakened

>|a sense of ecstatic love; bhaktya-by devotional service;

>|dravat-melting; hrdayah-the heart; utpulakah-very pleased;

>|pramodat-because of happiness; autkanthya-with eagerness;

>|baspa-kalaya-with tears in the eyes; muhuh-always;

>|ardyamanah-merged in spiritual bliss; tat ca api-that also;

>|citta-badisam-with the heart like a fishing hook; sanakaih-

>|gradually; viyunkte-separates.

1968|TRANSLATION

1969|"'When one is in ecstatic love with the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead, one's heart is melted by bhakti-

>|yoga and one feels transcendental bliss. There are bodily

>|symptoms manifest, and due to eagerness, there are tears

>|in the eyes. Thus one is subjected to spiritual bliss. When

>|the heart is overly afflicted, the meditative mind, like a

>|fishing hook, is gradually separated from the object of

>|meditation.'

1970|PURPORT

1971|This is also a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (3.28.34).

1972|Madhya 24.158

1973|TEXT 158

1974|TEXT

1975|'Îl±á±ŽRÂ', 'Îl±á±õþ+nÂl' '›¶±5¿u¿X' Õ±õþ h

1976|Ûý×ÃÃ ¿îd ÎtÂNðÃ ýÃÃlþ rÃlþ ›¶LÁ±õþ N 158 N

1977|'yogaruruksu', 'yogarudha' 'prapta-siddhi' ara

1978|ei tina bhede haya chaya prakara

1979|SYNONYMS

1980|yoga-aruruksu-persons desiring elevation to the platform of

>|yogic perfection; yoga-arudha-persons already elevated to

>|that position; prapta-siddhi-persons who have achieved the

>|success; ara-also; ei tina-these three; bhede-by varieties;

>|haya-there are; chaya prakara-six kinds.

1981|TRANSLATION

1982|"By these three divisions of advancement in yoga-

>|yogaruruksu, yogarudha and prapta-siddhi-there are six

>|kinds of mystic yogis.

1983|Madhya 24.159

1984|TEXT 159

1985|TEXT

1986|Õ±NŽÂ±÷RSNdNlS±áS LÁ÷S LÁ±õþí÷RaÂINîÂ h

1987|Îl±á±õþ+nÂluI îÂÍuIõ ú÷Ð LÁ±õþí÷RaÂINîÂ N 159 N

1988|aruruksor muner yogam

1989| karma karanam ucyate

1990|yogarudhasya tasyaiva

1991| samah karanam ucyate

1992|SYNONYMS

1993|aruruksoh-of a person desiring to rise to the platform of

>|yogic perfection; muneh-of a saintly person; yogam-

>|spiritual knowledge; karma-work; karanam-the cause; ucyate-

>|is said; yoga-arudhasya-of one who has attained such

>|perfect knowledge; tasya-for him; eva-certainly; samah-

>|controlling the mind without being disturbed; karanam-cause;

>| ucyate-is said.

1994|TRANSLATION

1995|"' For those saintly persons who wish to rise to the

>|platform of yogic perfection , the means consists of

>|practicing the yoga system by strictly following its

>|regulative principles and practicing the yoga postures

>| and breathing exercises. And for those who are

>|already elevated to this platform , the

>|means consists of maintaining mental equilibrium [

>|sama ] by rejecting all material activity and

>|practicing meditation to keep the mind on the

>|Supreme Lord .

1996|PURPORT

1997|Texts 159 and 160 are from the Bhagavad-gita (6.3 –4).

1998|Madhya 24.160

1999|TEXT 160

2000|TEXT

2001|lðÃ± ¿ýÃÃ Îd¿flþ±NnSø¸R d LÁ÷S¦¤dRø¸7ÁÁÁNîÂ h

2002|uõSuSLÁŠui§I±uN Îl±á±õþ+nÂl(tm)¦NðÃ±aÂINîÂ N 160 N

2003|yada hi nendriyarthesu

2004| na karmasv anusajjate

2005|sarva-sankalpa-sannyasi

2006| yogarudhas tadocyate

2007|SYNONYMS

2008|yada-when; hi-certainly; na-not; indriya-arthesu-sense

>|gratification; na-not; karmasu-in activities; anusajjate-

>|one becomes engaged; sarva-all kinds of; sankalpa-desires;

>|sannyasi-renouncing; yoga-arudhah-one who has actually

>|attained perfection in the yoga system; tada-at that time;

>|ucyate-is said.

2009|TRANSLATION

2010|"'When a person is no longer interested in acting for

>|sense gratification and when he renounces all material

>|desires, he is said to be situated in perfect yoga [

>|yogarudha].'

2011|Madhya 24.161

2012|TEXT 161

2013|TEXT

2014|Ûý×ÃÃ rÃlþ Îl±áN u±sRu/±¿ðÃ-ÎýÃÃîRÂ ó±Ûž± h

2015|LÔÁøž tÂNæÃ LÔÁøž&Ní Õ±LÔÁ(c)† ýÃÃÛž± N 161 N

2016|ei chaya yogi sadhu-sangadi-hetu pana

2017|krsna bhaje krsna-gune akrsta hana

2018|SYNONYMS

2019|ei-this; chaya-six; yogi-mystics; sadhu-of devotees; sanga-

>|adi-the association; hetu-because of; pana-getting; krsna

>|bhaje-render service to Krsna; krsna-gune-by the

>|transcendental qualities of Krsna; akrsta-attracted; hana-

>|becoming.

2020|TRANSLATION

2021|"When a purified yogi associates with devotees, he engages

>|in Lord Krsna's devotional service, being attracted by the

>|Lord's transcendental qualities.

2022|Madhya 24.162

2023|TEXT 162

2024|TEXT

2025|aÂ-úNs 'Õ¿ó'õþ ÕnS ý×ÃÃýDÃÃ±Ý LÁýÃÃlþ h

2026|'÷R¿d', '¿d¢¶SLš'-úNsõþ óÓõSõR ÕnS ýÃÃlþ N 162

2027|ca-sabde 'api'ra artha ihano kahaya

2028|'muni', 'nirgrantha'-sabdera purvavat artha haya

2029|SYNONYMS

2030|ca-sabde-by the word ca; 'api'ra-of the word api; artha-the

>|meaning; ihano-here also; kahaya-is applicable; muni-muni

>|; nirgrantha- nirgrantha ; sabdera-

>|of the words; purva-vat-as mentioned above; artha haya-

>|there are the meanings.

2031|TRANSLATION

2032|"The meanings of the words 'ca ' and 'api ' can be applied

>|here. The meanings of the words 'muni ' and 'nirgrantha '

>|are the same as before.

2033|Madhya 24.163

2034|TEXT 163

2035|TEXT

2036|nÂ×SN÷ ÕÍýÃÃîRÂLÁN LÁ±ýÃÃD± ÎLÁ±d ÕnS h

2037|Ûý×ÃÃ ÎîÂõþ ÕnS LÁ¿ýÃÃhRD óõþ÷ u÷nS N 163 N

2038|urukrame ahaituki kahan kona artha

2039|ei tera artha kahilun parama samartha

2040|SYNONYMS

2041|urukrame-unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who acts

>|uncommonly; ahaituki-the word ahaituki; kahan-

>|wherever; kona-some; artha-import; ei-in this way; tera

>|artha-thirteen imports; kahilun-I have explained; parama-

>|supremely; samartha-complete.

2042|TRANSLATION

2043|"The word 'ahaituki ' is always applicable to the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead, Urukrama. In this way I have

>|described thirteen complete meanings [ of

>|the atmarama verse].

2044|PURPORT

2045|The thirteen meanings of the atmarama verse mentioned

>|here are based on the following meanings for the word

>|atmarama: (1) sadhaka, the neophyte performer; (2)

>|brahma-maya, one absorbed in the thought of impersonal

>|Brahman; (3) prapta-brahma-laya, one who has actually

>|attained Brahman perfection; (4) mumuksu, one who

>|desires liberation; (5) jivan-mukta, one who is liberated

>|in this life; (6) prapta-svarupa, one who has attained his

>| original constitutional position; (7) nirgrantha-muni, a

>|completely liberated saint; (8) sagarbha-yogaruruksu, a

>|yogi meditating upon the four-handed Visnu form and

>|desiring yogic perfection; (9) nigarbha-yogaruruksu, one

>|who is trying for perfection in impersonal meditation; (

>|10) sagarbha-yogarudha, one who has been elevated to

>|the platform of yogic perfection by meditating on

>|the Visnu form; (11) nigarbha-yogarudha, an

>|impersonal yogi on the platform of perfection; (12)

>|sagarbha-prapta-siddhi, one who has attained the

>|perfectional stage by meditating on the Visnu form; (13)

>|nigarbha-prapta-siddhi, one who has attained perfection by

>|practicing impersonal meditation.

2046|Madhya 24.164

2047|TEXT 164

2048|TEXT

2049|Ûý×ÃÃ uõ ú±(tm)L lNõ tÂNæÃ tÂáõ±dA h

2050|'ú±(tm)L' tÂMÃ LÁ¿õþ' îÂNõ LÁ¿ýÃÃ îDÂ±õþ d±÷ N 164 N

2051|ei saba santa yabe bhaje bhagavan

2052|'santa' bhakta kari' tabe kahi tanra nama

2053|SYNONYMS

2054|ei saba-all these; santa-neutral; yabe-when; bhaje-worship;

>|bhagavan-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; santa bhakta-

>|devotees in the neutral stage of devotional service; kari'-

>|describing as; tabe-that time; kahi-I speak; tanra-their;

>|nama-name.

2055|TRANSLATION

2056|"These thirteen types of yogis and munis are called santa-

>|bhaktas, for they render transcendental loving service to

>|the Supreme Personality of Godhead in the neutral stage.

2057|Madhya 24.165

2058|TEXT 165

2059|TEXT

2060|'Õ±R±' úNs '÷d' LÁýÃÃ-÷Nd Îlý×ÃÃ õþN÷ h

2061|u±sRuN/ ÎuýÃÃ tÂNæÃ MLÔÁøžaÂõþNí N 165 N

2062|'atma' sabde 'mana' kaha-mane yei rame

2063|sadhu-sange seha bhaje sri-krsna-carane

2064|SYNONYMS

2065|atma-sabde-by the word atma; mana-the mind; kaha-if

>|you say; mane-within the mind; yei rame-one who is

>|satisfied by speculation; sadhu-sange-by the association of

>|devotees; seha-he also; bhaje-takes to devotional service;

>|sri-krsna-carane-at the lotus feet of Lord Krsna.

2066|TRANSLATION

2067|"The word 'atma ' sometimes means 'the mind.' In this case

>| the word 'atmarama ' means 'a person who is satisfied by

>|mental speculation.' When such a person associates with a

>|pure devotee, he takes to devotional service at the lotus

>|feet of Krsna.

2068|Madhya 24.166

2069|TEXT 166

2070|TEXT

2071|nÂ×ðÃõþ÷Ró±uNîÂ l HÂ¿ø¸õRSuR LÓÁóSðÔÃúÐ

2072|ó¿õþuõþóX¿îÂS ý+ðÃlþ÷±íNlþ± ðÃýÃÃõþ÷A h

2073|îÂîÂ nÂ×ðÃá±ðÃd(tm)L îÂõ s±÷ ¿úõþÐ óõþ÷S

2074|óRd¿õþýÃÃ lR uN÷îÂI d óîÂ¿(tm)L LÔÁîÂ±(tm)L÷RNm N 166 N

2075|udaram upasate ya rsi-vartmasu kurpa-drsah

2076| parisara-paddhatim hrdayam arunayo daharam

2077|tata udagad ananta tava dhama sirah paramam

2078| punar iha yat sametya na patanti krtanta-mukhe

2079|SYNONYMS

2080|udaram-the abdomen; upasate-worship; ye-those who; rsi-

>|vartmasu-on the path marked out by the great saintly

>|persons; kurpa-drsah-whose vision is grossly situated in

>|the bodily conception of life; parisara-paddhatim-from

>|which the system of the arteries comes; hrdayam-the heart;

>|arunayah-saintly persons headed by Aruna Rsi; daharam-the

>|sky within the heart, the subtle conception of the

>|Supersoul within the heart; tatah-from that; udagat-went up;

>| ananta-O unlimited one; tava-Your; dhama-place; sirah-the

>|top of the head; paramam-supreme; punah-again; iha-in this

>|material world; yat-which; sametya-having achieved; na-not;

>|patanti-fall down; krta-anta-mukhe-in the repetition of

>|birth and death.

2081|TRANSLATION

2082|"'Those who follow the path of great, saintly mystic yogis

>|take to the yogic gymnastic process and begin worshiping

>|from the abdomen, where it is said that Brahman is located.

>|Such people are called sarkaraksa, which means that they

>|are situated in the gross bodily conception. There are also

>|followers of the rsi known as Aruna. Following his path,

>|they observe the activities of the arteries. Thus they

>|gradually rise to the heart, where subtle Brahman,

>|Paramatma, is situated. They then worship Him. O unlimited

>|Ananta! Better than these persons are the mystic yogis who

>|worship You from the top of their heads. Beginning with the

>|abdomen and proceeding through the heart, they reach the

>|top of the head and pass through the brahma-randhra, the

>|hole at the top of the skull. Thus these yogis attain the

>|perfectional platform and do not enter the cycle of birth

>|and death again.'

2083|PURPORT

2084|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.87.18).

2085|Madhya 24.167

2086|TEXT 167

2087|TEXT

2088|ÛNýÃÃ± LÔÁøž&í±LÔÁ(c)† ÷ýÃÃ±÷R¿d ýÃÃÛž± h

2089|ÕÍýÃÃîRÂLÁN tÂ¿MÃ LÁNõþ ¿d¢¶SLš ýÃÃÛž± N 167 N

2090|eho krsna-gunakrsta maha-muni hana

2091|ahaituki bhakti kare nirgrantha hana

2092|SYNONYMS

2093|eho-such yogis; krsna guna-akrsta-attracted by the

>|transcendental qualities of Krsna; maha-muni hana-becoming

>|great saintly persons; ahaituki bhakti kare-they perform

>|causeless devotional service; nirgrantha hana-becoming

>|indifferent to the mystic yoga process.

2094|TRANSLATION

2095|"Being attracted by the transcendental qualities of Krsna,

>|such yogis become great saints. At that time, not being

>|hampered by the yogic process, they engage in unalloyed

>|devotional service.

2096|Madhya 24.168

2097|TEXT 168

2098|TEXT

2099|'Õ±R±'-úNs 'lP' LÁNýÃÃ-lP LÁ¿õþlþ± h

2100|"÷RdNlþ±•Ã¿ó" LÔÁøž tÂNæÃ &í±LÔÁ(c)† ýÃÃÛž± N 168 N

2101|'atma'-sabde 'yatna' kahe-yatna kariya

2102|"munayo 'pi" krsna bhaje gunakrsta hana

2103|SYNONYMS

2104|atma-sabde-by the word atma; yatna-endeavor; kahe-one means;

>| yatna kariya-by great endeavor; munayah api-even great

>|saintly persons; krsna bhaje-take to the devotional service

>|of Krsna; guna-akrsta hana-being attracted by His

>|transcendental qualities.

2105|TRANSLATION

2106|"'Atma ' also means 'endeavor.' Being attracted by Krsna's

>|transcendental qualities, some saints make a great endeavor

>|to come to the point of rendering service to Him.

2107|Madhya 24.169

2108|TEXT 169

2109|TEXT

2110|îÂÍuIõ ÎýÃÃNîÂ±Ð ›¶lNîÂîÂ ÎLÁ±¿õNðÃ±

2111|d htÂINîÂ lðAÃw÷îÂ±÷RólSsÐ h

2112|îÂ~tÂINîÂ ðRÃÐmõðÃdIîÂÐ uRmS

2113|LÁ±Nhd uõSS átÂNõþ-õþSýÃÃu± N 169 N

2114|tasyaiva hetoh prayateta kovido

2115| na labhyate yad bhramatam upary adhah

2116|tal labhyate duhkha-vad anyatah sukham

2117| kalena sarvatra gabhira-ramhasa

2118|SYNONYMS

2119|tasya eva-for that; hetoh-reason; prayateta-should endeavor;

>| kovidah-one who is learned and intelligent; na-not;

>|labhyate-is achieved; yat-that which; bhramatam-of those

>|wandering; upari adhah-up and down; tat-that; labhyate-is

>|achieved; duhkha-vat-exactly like unhappiness or

>|distress; anyatah-from other reasons (one's past actions);

>|sukham-happiness; kalena-by time; sarvatra-everywhere;

>|gabhira-insurmountable; ramhasa-having force.

2120|TRANSLATION

2121|"'The transcendental position cannot be attained by

>|wandering up and down from Brahmaloka and Satyaloka to

>|Patalaloka. If one is actually intelligent and learned, he

>|should endeavor for that rare transcendental position. By

>|the force of time one attains whatever material happiness

>|is available within the fourteen worlds

>|, just as one attains distress in due course

>|of time. But since spiritual consciousness is not attained

>|in this way, one should try for it.'

2122|PURPORT

2123|This verse was spoken by Narada Muni in Srimad-Bhagavatam (

>|1.5.18). Narada Muni was speaking to Vyasadeva, who was

>|morose even after he had compiled all the Vedic literatures.

>| In this connection, Narada Muni advised Srila Vyasadeva to

>|try to attain devotional service and nothing else.

2124|Madhya 24.170

2125|TEXT 170

2126|TEXT

2127|uX÷SuI±õNõ±s±lþ Îlø¸±S ¿dõS¿gdN ÷¿îÂÐ h

2128|Õ¿aÂõþ±NðÃõ uõS±nSÐ ¿usINîÂIø¸±÷tÂN¿oîÂÐ N 170 N

2129|sad-dharmasyavabodhaya

2130| yesam nirbandhini matih

2131|acirad eva sarvarthah

2132| sidhyaty esam abhipsitah

2133|SYNONYMS

2134|sat-dharmasya-of the path of progressive devotional service;

>| avabodhaya-for understanding; yesam-those whose;

>|nirbandhini-unflinching; matih-intelligence; acirat-very

>|soon; eva-certainly; sarva-arthah-the goal of life;

>|sidhyati-becomes fulfilled; esam-of these persons;

>|abhipsitah-desired.

2135|TRANSLATION

2136|"'Those who are eager to awaken their spiritual

>|consciousness and who

>|thus have unflinching, undeviated intelligence certainly

>|attain the desired goal of life very soon.'

2137|PURPORT

2138|This is a quotation from the Naradiya Purana.

2139|Madhya 24.171

2140|TEXT 171

2141|TEXT

2142|aÂ-ús Õ¿ó-ÕNnS, 'Õ¿ó'-Õõs±õþNí h

2143|lP±¢¶ýÃÃ ¿õd± tÂ¿MÃ d± æÃij±lþ Î›¶N÷ N 171 N

2144|ca-sabda api-arthe, 'api'-avadharane

2145|yatnagraha vina bhakti na janmaya preme

2146|SYNONYMS

2147|ca-sabda-the word ca; api-of the word api; arthe-in the

>|sense; api avadharane-this api is used for

>|emphasis; yatna-agraha vina-without sincere endeavor;

>|bhakti-devotional service; na-not; janmaya-begets; preme-

>|love of Godhead.

2148|TRANSLATION

2149|"The word 'ca ' may be used in place of 'api, ' which gives

>|emphasis to something. Thus it means that without sincere

>|endeavor in devotional service, one cannot attain love of

>|Godhead.

2150|Madhya 24.172

2151|TEXT 172

2152|TEXT

2153|u±sNdNÍâõþd±uÍ/õþhtÂI± uR¿aÂõþ±ðÃ¿ó h

2154|ýÃÃ¿õþí± aÂ±«NðÃNlþ¿îÂ ¿Zs± u± uI±R uRðRÃhStÂ± N 172 N

2155|sadhanaughair anasangair

2156| alabhya su-cirad api

2157|harina casv adeyeti

2158| dvidha sa syat su-durlabha

2159|SYNONYMS

2160|sadhana-activities of devotional service; oghaih-by masses

>|of; anasangaih-without attachment; alabhya-very difficult

>|to achieve; su-cirat api-even after a considerable duration

>|of time; harina-by the Supreme Lord; ca-also; asu-very soon;

>| adeya-not to be delivered; iti-thus; dvidha-two ways; sa-

>|that; syat-is; su-durlabha-very difficult to obtain.

2161|TRANSLATION

2162|"'Devotional perfection is very difficult to attain for

>|two reasons. First, unless one is attached to Krsna, he

>|cannot attain devotional perfection even if he renders

>|devotional service for a long time. Second, Krsna does not

>|easily deliver perfection in devotional service.'

2163|PURPORT

2164|As stated in Srimad-Bhagavatam (5.6.18), muktim dadati

>|karhicit. Srila Sukadeva Gosvami told Maharaja Pariksit

>|that Krsna readily grants liberation but does not very

>|readily grant perfection in devotional service. This means

>|that Krsna wants to see that a devotee is actually sincere

>|and serious and that he does not have ulterior motives. If

>|this is the case, devotional service can very easily be

>|successful; otherwise it is very difficult to obtain from

>|the Supreme Personality of Godhead. This verse appears in

>|the Bhakti-rasamrta-sindhu (1.1.35).

2165|Madhya 24.173

2166|TEXT 173

2167|TEXT

2168|ÎîÂø¸±S uîÂîÂlRMÃ±d±S tÂæÃîÂ±S ›¶N¿îÂóÓõSLÁ÷A h

2169|ðÃðÃ±¿÷ õR¿XNl±áS îÂS Îld ÷±÷Ról±¿(tm)L ÎîÂ N 173 N

2170|tesam satata-yuktanam

2171| bhajatam priti-purvakam

2172|dadami buddhi-yogam tam

2173| yena mam upayanti te

2174|SYNONYMS

2175|tesam-to them; satata-yuktanam-always engaged; bhajatam-in

>|devotional service; priti-purvakam-in loving ecstasy;

>|dadami-I give; buddhi-yogam-real intelligence; tam-that;

>|yena-by which; mam-unto Me; upayanti-come; te-they.

2176|TRANSLATION

2177|"'To those who are constantly devoted to serving Me with

>|love, I give the understanding by which they can come to Me.

>|'

2178|PURPORT

2179|This is a quotation from the Bhagavad-gita (10.10). For an

>|explanation, see Adi-lila 1.49

2180|Madhya 24.174

2181|TEXT 174

2182|TEXT

2183|'Õ±R±'-úNs 'sÔ¿îÂ' LÁNýÃÃ,–ÆsNlS Îlý×ÃÃ õþN÷ h

2184|ÆslSõ(tm)L Ûõ ýÃÃÛž± LÁõþlþ tÂæÃNd N 174 N

2185|'atma'-sabde 'dhrti' kahe,-dhairye yei rame

2186|dhairyavanta eva hana karaya bhajane

2187|SYNONYMS

2188|atma-sabde-by the word atma; dhrti-perseverance; kahe-it is

>|said; dhairye-with perseverance; yei rame-anyone who

>|endeavors; dhairya-vanta-such persons with endurance;

>|eva-certainly; hana-becoming; karaya-perform; bhajane-

>|devotional service.

2189|TRANSLATION

2190|"Another meaning of 'atma ' is dhrti, or endurance. A

>|person who endeavors with endurance is atmarama. With

>|endurance, such a person engages in devotional service.

2191|Madhya 24.175

2192|TEXT 175

2193|TEXT

2194|'÷R¿d'-úNs-óŽÂN, tÔÂ/, '¿d¢¶SNLš'-÷ÓmSæÃd h

2195|LÔÁøžLÔÁó±lþ u±sRLÔÁó±lþ ÎðDÃ±ýÃÃ±õþ tÂæÃd N 175 N

2196|'muni'-sabde-paksi, bhrnga; 'nirgranthe'-murkha-jana

2197|krsna-krpaya sadhu-krpaya donhara bhajana

2198|SYNONYMS

2199|muni-sabde-by the word muni; paksi-bird; bhrnga-bumblebee;

>|nirgranthe-by the word nirgrantha; murkha-jana-foolish

>|people; krsna-krpaya-by the mercy of Lord Krsna; sadhu-

>|krpaya-by the mercy of a devotee; donhara bhajana-engages

>|in devotional service of both (Krsna and his spiritual

>|master or the sadhu).

2200|TRANSLATION

2201|"The word 'muni ' also means 'bird ' and 'bumblebee.' The

>|word 'nirgrantha ' refers to foolish people. By the mercy

>|of Krsna, such creatures contact a sadhu [spiritual master]

>|and thus engage in devotional service.

2202|Madhya 24.176

2203|TEXT 176

2204|TEXT

2205|›¶±Nlþ± õîÂ±¥¤ ÷RdNlþ± ¿õýÃÃá± õNd•Ã¿¦œdA

2206|LÔÁNøž¿ŽÂîÂS îÂðRÃ¿ðÃîÂS LÁhNõíRáNîÂ÷A h

2207|Õ±ýÃÃI Îl ^n÷tRÂæÃ±dA ¿aÂõþ›¶õ±h±dA

2208|úÔ°«¿(tm)L ÷N¿hîÂðÔÃNú± ¿õáîÂ±dIõ±aÂÐ N 176 N

2209|prayo batamba munayo vihaga vane 'smin

2210| krsneksitam tad-uditam kala-venu-gitam

2211|aruhya ye druma-bhujan rucira-pravalan

2212| srnvanti milita-drso vigatanya-vacah

2213|SYNONYMS

2214|prayah-almost; bata-certainly; amba-O mother; munayah-great

>|sages; vihagah-the birds; vane-in the forest; asmin-this;

>|krsna-iksitam-seeing the lotus feet of Krsna; tat-uditam-

>|created by Him; kala-venu-gitam-sweet vibrations made by

>|playing the flute; aruhya-rising; ye-all of them; druma-

>|bhujan-to the branches of the trees; rucira-pravalan-having

>|beautiful creepers and twigs; srnvanti-hear; milita-drsah-

>|closing their eyes; vigata-anya-vacah-stopping all other

>|sounds.

2215|TRANSLATION

2216|"'My dear mother, in this forest, all the birds, after

>|rising on the beautiful branches of the trees, are closing

>|their eyes and, not being attracted by any other sound, are

>|simply listening to the vibration of Krsna's flute. Such

>|birds must be on the same level as great saints.'

2217|PURPORT

2218|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.21.14). This

>|statement was made by the gopis, who were lamenting in

>|separation from Krsna and studying how the inhabitants of

>|Vrndavana were enjoying life like saintly persons.

2219|Madhya 24.177

2220|TEXT 177

2221|TEXT

2222|ÛNîÂ•Ã¿hd(tm)¦õ lNú±•Ã¿mh-Îh±LÁîÂNnSS

2223|á±lþ(tm)L Õ±¿ðóRø¸±dRónS tÂæÃN(tm)L h

2224|›¶±Nlþ± Õ÷N ÷R¿dáí± tÂõðÃNlþ÷RmI±

2225|áÓnÂlS õNd•Ã¿ó d æÃýÃÃîÂIdâ±RÍðÃõ÷A N 177 N

2226|ete 'linas tava yaso 'khila-loka-tirtham

2227| gayanta adi-purusanupatham bhajante

2228|prayo ami muni-gana bhavadiya-mukhya

2229| gudham vane 'pi na jahaty anaghatma-daivam

2230|SYNONYMS

2231|ete-all these; alinah-bees; tava-Your; yasah-reputation;

>|akhila-all; loka-tirtham-auspicious for the planets;

>|gayante-are singing; adi-purusa-O original person;

>|anu-patham-along the path; bhajante-they are engaged

>|in transcendental loving service; prayah-almost; ami-these;

>|muni-ganah-great saintly persons; bhavadiya-in relation

>|with You; mukhyah-very advanced devotees; gudham-unknown;

>|vane-in the forest; api-although; na-not; jahati-give up;

>|anagha-O personality of transcendental goodness; atma-

>|daivam-their worshipable Deity.

2232|TRANSLATION

2233|"'O good fortune personified! O original Personality of

>|Godhead, all these bees are chanting about Your

>|transcendental fame, which will purify the entire universe.

>|Indeed, they are following Your path in the forest and are

>|worshiping You. Actually they are all saintly persons, but

>|now they have taken the form of bees. Although You are

>|playing like a human being, they could not forget that You

>|are their worshipable Deity.'

2234|PURPORT

2235|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.15.6). Krsna

>|and Balarama were just on the verge of boyhood and were

>|entering the forest of Vrndavana when Krsna began to offer

>|prayers to please Balarama.

2236|Madhya 24.178

2237|TEXT 178

2238|TEXT

2239|uõþ¿u u±õþuýÃÃSu¿õýÃÃ/±(±áNîÂý+îÂNaÂîÂu ÛîÂI h

2240|ýÃÃ¿õþ÷Ró±uîÂ ÎîÂ lîÂ¿aÂMÃÃ± ýÃÃ(tm)L ÷N¿hîÂðÔÃNú± sÔîÂN÷Nd±

>|Ð N 178 N

2241|sarasi sarasa-hamsa-vihangas

2242| caru-gita-hrta-cetasa etya

2243|harim upasata te yata-citta

2244| hanta milita-drso dhrta-maunah

2245|SYNONYMS

2246|sarasi-in the water; sarasa-cranes; hamsa-swans; vihangah-

>|birds; caru-gita-by the melodious song of Krsna's flute;

>|hrta-cetasah-devoid of material consciousness; etya-coming

>|near; harim-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; upasata-

>|worshiped; te-all of them; yata-cittah-with full attention;

>|hanta-alas; milita-drsah-closing their eyes; dhrta-maunah-

>|completely silent.

2247|TRANSLATION

2248|"'All the cranes and swans in the water are being

>|enchanted by the melodious song of Krsna's flute. They have

>|approached and are worshiping the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead with full attention. Alas, they are closing their

>|eyes and are becoming completely silent.'

2249|PURPORT

2250|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.35.11). In

>|the day, Krsna went to the forest of Vrndavana, and at that

>|time the gopis, being morose due to separation from Him,

>|were lamenting in this way.

2251|Madhya 24.179

2252|TEXT 179

2253|TEXT

2254|¿L Áõ þ± îÂýÓÃÃd±hóR¿hµóR!Áú±

2255|Õ±tÂNõþqpÁ± lõd±Ð mú±ðÃlþÐ h

2256|Îl•ÃNdI aÂ ó±ó± lðRó±|lþ±|lþ±Ð

2257|qsI¿(tm)L îÂÍ¦œ ›¶tÂ¿õøžNõ d÷Ð N 179 N

2258|kirata-hunandhra-pulinda-pukkasa

2259| abhira-sumbha yavanah khasadayah

2260|ye 'nye ca papa yad-upasrayasrayah

2261| sudhyanti tasmai prabhavisnave namah

2262|SYNONYMS

2263|kirata-the aborigines named Kiratas; huna-the Hunas; andhra-

>|Andhras; pulinda-Pulindas; pukkasah- Pukkasas; abhira-

>|Abhiras; sumbhah-Sumbhas; yavanah-persons who do not follow

>|the Vedic injunctions and who eat cow's flesh; khasa-adayah-

>|Khasas and others; ye-those who; anye-similar others; ca-

>|also; papah-sinful persons; yat-of the Supreme Personality

>|of Godhead; upasraya-of the devotees; asrayah-taking

>|shelter; sudhyanti-become purified; tasmai-unto Him, Lord

>|Visnu, because of whom they become purified; prabhavisnave-

>|to Lord Visnu, the most powerful; namah-respectful

>|obeisances.

2264|TRANSLATION

2265|"' Kiratas, Hunas, Andhras, Pulindas, Pukkasas, Abhiras,

>|Sumbhas, Yavanas and members of the Khasa races , and even

>|others who are addicted to sinful acts , can be purified by

>|taking shelter of the devotees of the Lord , due to His

>|being the supreme power. I beg to offer my respectful

>|obeisances unto Him.'

2266|PURPORT

2267|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (2.4.18). This

>|verse was spoken by Sukadeva Gosvami when Pariksit Maharaja

>|asked him for a description of the creation. While offering

>|obeisances to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Sukadeva

>|Gosvami described the unlimited potencies of Lord Visnu,

>|who can purify the lowborn creatures mentioned herein.

2268|Madhya 24.180

2269|TEXT 180

2270|TEXT

2271|¿LÁSõ± 'sÔ¿îÂ'-úNs ¿dæóÓíSîÂ±¿ðÃ-:±d LÁlþ h

2272|ðRÃÐm±tÂ±Nõ nÂ×MÃÃ÷›¶±N5I ÷ýÃÃ±óÓíS ýÃÃlþ N 180 N

2273|kimva 'dhrti'-sabde nija-purnatadi-jnana kaya

2274|duhkhabhave uttama-praptye maha-purna haya

2275|SYNONYMS

2276|kimva-or; dhrti-sabde-by the word dhrti; nija-own;

>|purnata-adi-perfection and so on; jnana-knowledge; kaya-

>|says; duhkha-abhave-in the absence of all material miseries;

>| uttama-the best; praptye-by obtaining; maha-purna haya-

>|becomes perfectly perfect.

2277|TRANSLATION

2278|"The word 'dhrti ' is also used when one is fully perfect

>|in knowledge. When , due to having obtained the lotus feet

>|of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, one has no material

>|miseries, he attains maha-purna, the highest level of

>|perfection.

2279|Madhya 24.181

2280|TEXT 181

2281|TEXT

2282|sÔ¿îÂÐ uI±R óÓíSîÂ± :±d- ðRÃÐm±tÂ±Nõ±MÃ

>|Ã÷±¿5¿tÂÐ h

2283|Õ›¶±5±îÂNîÂ-d(c)†±nS±d¿tÂuSNú±aÂd±¿ðÃLÔÁR N 181 N

2284|dhrtih syat purnata-jnana-

2285| duhkhabhavottamaptibhih

2286|apraptatita-nastartha-

2287| nabhisamsocanadi-krt

2288|SYNONYMS

2289|dhrtih-endurance; syat-may become; purnata-fullness; jnana-

>|knowledge of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; duhkha-

>|abhava-the absence of misery; uttama-aptibhih-by attainment

>|of the highest platform of perfection; aprapta-not obtained;

>| atita-gone; nasta-destroyed; artha-object, goal;

>|anabhisamsocana -absence of lamentation; adi-and so

>|on; krt-doing.

2290|TRANSLATION

2291|"'Dhrti is the fullness felt due to the absence of misery

>|and the attainment of knowledge of the

>|Supreme Lord and pure love for Him. The

>|lamentation that accrues from not obtaining a goal or from

>| losing something already attained does not affect this

>|completeness.'

2292|PURPORT

2293|This verse is found in the Bhakti-rasamrta-sindhu (2.4.144).

2294|Madhya 24.182

2295|TEXT 182

2296|TEXT

2297|LÔÁøžtÂMÃ-ðRÃÐmýÃÃNd, õ±>±(tm)Lõþ-ýÃÃNd h

2298|LÔÁøžN›¶÷-Îuõ±-óÓíS±dµ-›¶õNí N 182 N

2299|krsna-bhakta-duhkha-hina, vanchantara-hina

2300|krsna-prema-seva-purnananda-pravina

2301|SYNONYMS

2302|krsna-bhakta-a devotee of Lord Krsna; duhkha-hina-not under

>|miserable material conditions; vancha-antara-hina-he has no

>|desire other than to serve Krsna; krsna-prema-love

>|of Krsna; seva-service; purna-ananda-full in transcendental

>|bliss; pravina-and very expert or experienced in all

>|subject matters.

2303|TRANSLATION

2304|"A devotee of Krsna is never in a miserable condition, nor

>|does he have any desire other than to serve Krsna. He is

>|experienced and advanced. He feels the transcendental bliss

>|of love of Krsna and always engages in His service in

>|full perfection.

2305|Madhya 24.183

2306|TEXT 183

2307|TEXT

2308|÷RNuõlþ± ›¶îÂNîÂS ÎîÂ u±Nh±LÁI±¿ðÃ-aÂîRÂ(c)†lþ÷A h

2309|Îd26Ã¿(tm)L Îuõlþ± óÓíS±Ð LRÁNîÂ±•ÃÃdIR LÁ±h¿õ›RîÂ÷A N 183

>|N

2310|mat-sevaya pratitam te

2311| salokyadi-catustayam

2312|necchanti sevaya purnah

2313| kuto 'nyat kala-viplutam

2314|SYNONYMS

2315|mat-of Me; sevaya-by service; pratitam-obtained; te-they;

>|salokya-adi-liberation, beginning with salokya; catustayam-

>|the four kinds of; na icchanti-do not desire; sevaya-by

>|service; purnah-complete; kutah-where; anyat-other things;

>|kala-viplutam-which are lost in time.

2316|TRANSLATION

2317|"'My devotees, having fulfilled their desires by serving

>|Me, do not accept the four kinds of salvation that are

>|easily earned by such service. Why then should they accept

>|any pleasures that are lost in the course of time?'

2318|PURPORT

2319|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (9.4.67).

2320|Madhya 24.184

2321|TEXT 184

2322|TEXT

2323|ý+ø¸NNLÁNú ý+ø¸NLÁ±¿í luI Æ¦šlSáîÂ±¿d ¿ýÃÃ h

2324|u Ûõ ÆslS÷±N›Ÿ±¿îÂ uSu±Nõþ æÃNõaÂ=Nh N 184 N

2325|hrsikese hrsikani

2326| yasya sthairya-gatani hi

2327|sa eva dhairyam apnoti

2328| samsare jiva-cancale

2329|SYNONYMS

2330|hrsikese-to the master of the senses; hrsikani-all the

>|senses; yasya-whose; sthairya-gatani-fixed; hi-certainly;

>|sah-that person; eva-of course; dhairyam apnoti-attains the

>|position of dhairya, endurance; samsare-in the material

>|world; jiva-cancale-where everyone is disturbed.

2331|TRANSLATION

2332|"'In this material world, all living entities are disturbed

>|due to their flickering position. A devotee, however, is

>|fixed in the service of the lotus feet of the Lord, the

>|master of the senses. Such a person is to be considered

>|situated in endurance and patience. '

2333|Madhya 24.185

2334|TEXT 185

2335|TEXT

2336|'aÂ'-Õõs±õþNí, ý×ÃÃýÃÃ± 'Õ¿ó'-u÷R2aÂNlþ h

2337|sÔ¿îÂ÷(tm)L ýÃÃÛž± tÂNæÃ ó¿ŽÂ-÷ÓmS-aÂNlþ N 185 N

2338|'ca'-avadharane, iha 'api'-samuccaye

2339|dhrtimanta hana bhaje paksi-murkha-caye

2340|SYNONYMS

2341|ca-the word ca; avadharane-in emphasis; iha-here; api-the

>|word api; samuccaye-in the sense of an aggregate;

>|dhrtimanta-fully saturated; hana-becoming; bhaje-worship;

>|paksi-murkha-caye-dull creatures like the birds, the most

>|foolish.

2342|TRANSLATION

2343|"The word 'ca ' is for emphasis, and the word 'api ' is

>|used to indicate an aggregate. Thus it is to be understood

>|that even dull creatures [birds and illiterates] can also

>|be situated in endurance and engage in Krsna's devotional

>|service.

2344|Madhya 24.186

2345|TEXT 186

2346|TEXT

2347|'Õ±R±'-úNs 'õR¿X' LÁNýÃÃ õR¿X¿õNúø¸ h

2348|u±÷±dIõR¿XlRMÃ lîÂ æÃNõ ÕõNúø¸ N 186 N

2349|'atma'-sabde 'buddhi' kahe buddhi-visesa

2350|samanya-buddhi-yukta yata jiva avasesa

2351|SYNONYMS

2352|atma-sabde-by the word atma; buddhi-intelligence; kahe-it

>|is said; buddhi-visesa-a particular type of intelligence;

>|samanya-buddhi-yukta-endowed with common intelligence; yata-

>|all; jiva-living entities; avasesa-the rest.

2353|TRANSLATION

2354|"The word 'atma ' is also used for a particular type of

>|intelligence. Since all living entities generally have some

>|intelligence, more or less, they are included.

2355|Madhya 24.187

2356|TEXT 187

2357|TEXT

2358|õRNXI õþN÷ Õ±R±õþ±÷-ðRÃý×ÃÃ îÂ' ›¶LÁ±õþ h

2359|'ó¿GîÂ' ÷R¿dáí, ¿d¢¶SLš '÷ÓmS' Õ±õþ N 187 N

2360|buddhye rame atmarama-dui ta' prakara

2361|'pandita' muni-gana, nirgrantha 'murkha' ara

2362|SYNONYMS

2363|buddhye-in intelligence; rame-who enjoys; atmarama-is an

>|atmarama; dui ta ' prakara-two varieties; pandita-learned;

>|muni-gana-philosophers; nirgrantha-without education;

>|murkha-foolish; ara-also.

2364|TRANSLATION

2365|"Everyone has some kind of intelligence, and one who

>|utilizes his intelligence is called an atmarama. There are

>|two types of atmaramas. One is a learned scholar and

>|philosopher, and the other is an uneducated, illiterate ,

>| foolish person.

2366|Madhya 24.188

2367|TEXT 188

2368|TEXT

2369|LÔÁøžLÔÁó±lþ u±sRuN/ õþ¿îÂ-õR¿X ó±lþ h

2370|uõ rÃ±¿nÂl' qXtÂ¿MÃ LÁNõþ LÔÁøžó±lþ N 188 N

2371|krsna-krpaya sadhu-sange rati-buddhi paya

2372|saba chadi' suddha-bhakti kare krsna-paya

2373|SYNONYMS

2374|krsna-krpaya-by the mercy of Krsna; sadhu-sange-in the

>|association of devotees; rati-buddhi-devotional attraction

>|and intelligence; paya-one obtains; saba chadi'-giving up

>|everything; suddha-bhakti-pure devotional service; kare-

>|performs; krsna-paya-at the lotus feet of Krsna.

2375|TRANSLATION

2376|"By the mercy of Krsna and by the association of devotees,

>|one increases his attraction to and intelligence for pure

>|devotional service; therefore one gives up everything and

>|engages himself at the lotus feet of Krsna and His pure

>|devotees.

2377|Madhya 24.189

2378|TEXT 189

2379|TEXT

2380|ÕýÃÃS uõSuI ›¶tÂNõ± ÷MÃÃÐ uõSS ›¶õîSÂNîÂ h

2381|ý×ÃÃ¿îÂ ÷Q± tÂæÃN(tm)L ÷±S õRs± tÂ±õu÷¿i¤îÂ±Ð N 189 N

2382|aham sarvasya prabhavo

2383| mattah sarvam pravartate

2384|iti matva bhajante mam

2385| budha bhava-samanvitah

2386|SYNONYMS

2387|aham-I, Lord Krsna; sarvasya-of everyone; prabhavah-the

>|original source; mattah-from Me; sarvam-everything;

>|pravartate-emanates; iti-thus; matva-understanding;

>|bhajante-they engage in devotional service; mam-to Me;

>|budhah-those who are learned; bhava-samanvitah-with love

>|and devotion.

2388|TRANSLATION

2389|"'I [Krsna] am the original source of everything.

>|Everything emanates from Me. The wise who perfectly know

>|this engage in My service with love and devotion.'

2390|PURPORT

2391|This is a quotation from the Bhagavad-gita (10.8).

2392|Madhya 24.190

2393|TEXT 190

2394|TEXT

2395|ÎîÂ Æõ ¿õðÃ(tm)LI¿îÂîÂõþ¿(tm)L aÂ ÎðÃõ÷±lþ±S

2396|¦aNúÓ^ýÓÃÃdúõõþ± Õ¿ó ó±óæÃNõ±Ð h

2397|lðÃI3/4³ÃîÂS÷óõþ±lþí-úNh-¿úŽÂ±-

2398|¿(tm)¦lSáAæÃd± Õ¿ó ¿LÁ÷R |n¸îÂs±õþí± Îl N 190 N

2399|te vai vidanty atitaranti ca deva-mayam

2400| stri-sudra-huna-sabara api papa-jivah

2401|yady adbhuta-krama-parayana-sila-siksas

2402| tiryag-jana api kim u sruta-dharana ye

2403|SYNONYMS

2404|te-all of them; vai-certainly; vidanti-understand;

>|atitaranti-cross over; ca-also; deva-mayam-the influence of

>|the external illusory energy; stri-women; sudra-fourth-

>|class men; huna-uncivilized hill tribes; sabarah-and

>|hunters; api-even; papa-jivah-sinful creatures; yadi-if;

>|adbhuta-krama-of the performer of wonderful activities;

>|parayana-of the devotees; sila-siksah-characteristics and

>|education; tiryak-janah-birds and beasts; api-even; kim u-

>|what to speak of; sruta-dharanah ye-persons advanced in the

>|education of Vedic knowledge.

2405|TRANSLATION

2406|"'Women, fourth-class men, uncivilized hill tribes,

>|hunters and many others born of low families, as well as

>|birds and beasts, can engage in the service of the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead-who acts very wonderfully-and follow

>|the path of the devotees and take lessons from them.

>|Although the ocean of nescience is vast, they can still

>|cross over it. What, then, is the difficulty for those who

>|are advanced in Vedic knowledge?'

2407|PURPORT

2408|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (2.7.46). Lord

>|Brahma said this when speaking to his disciple Narada about

>|the wonderful characteristics of Lord Visnu. Simply by

>|chanting the glories of Lord Visnu, one can cross the ocean

>|of nescience, even though one may be lowborn.

2409|Madhya 24.191

2410|TEXT 191

2411|TEXT

2412|¿õaÂ±õþ LÁ¿õþlþ± lNõ tÂNæÃ LÔÁøž-ó±lþ h

2413|Îuý×ÃÃ õR¿X ÎðÃd îDÂ±Nõþ, l±NîÂ LÔÁøž ó±lþ N 191 N

2414|vicara kariya yabe bhaje krsna-paya

2415|sei buddhi dena tanre, yate krsna paya

2416|SYNONYMS

2417|vicara-consideration; kariya-doing; yabe-when; bhaje-one

>|worships; krsna-paya-at the lotus feet of Krsna; sei buddhi-

>|that intelligence; dena-gives; tanre-to him; yate-by which;

>|krsna paya-one gets the shelter of the lotus feet of Krsna.

2418|TRANSLATION

2419|"Considering all these points, when one engages in the

>|service of Krsna's lotus feet, Krsna gives one the

>|intelligence by which he can gradually progress toward

>|perfection in service to the Lord.

2420|Madhya 24.192

2421|TEXT 192

2422|TEXT

2423|ÎîÂø¸±S uîÂîÂlRMÃ±d±S tÂæÃîÂ±S ›¶N¿îÂóÓõSLÁ÷A h

2424|ðÃðÃ±¿÷ õR¿XNl±áS îÂS Îld ÷±÷Ról±¿(tm)L ÎîÂ N 192 N

2425|tesam satata-yuktanam

2426| bhajatam priti-purvakam

2427|dadami buddhi-yogam tam

2428| yena mam upayanti te

2429|SYNONYMS

2430|tesam-to them; satata-yuktanam-always engaged; bhajatam-in

>|devotional service; priti-purvakam-in loving ecstasy;

>|dadami-I give; buddhi-yogam-real intelligence; tam-that;

>|yena-by which; mam-unto Me; upayanti-come; te-they.

2431|TRANSLATION

2432|"'To those who are constantly devoted to serving Me with

>|love, I give the understanding by which they can come to Me.

>|'

2433|PURPORT

2434|This is a quotation from the Bhagavad-gita (10.10).

2435|Madhya 24.193

2436|TEXT 193

2437|TEXT

2438|uRu/, LÔÁøžNuõ±, tÂ±áõîÂ, d±÷ h

2439|õrNæÃ õ±u,-Ûý×ÃÃ ó= u±sd ›¶s±d N 193 N

2440|sat-sanga, krsna-seva, bhagavata, nama

2441|vraje vasa,-ei panca sadhana pradhana

2442|SYNONYMS

2443|sat-sanga-association with devotees; krsna-seva-engagement

>|in the service of Krsna; bhagavata-devotees and the book

>|known as Srimad-Bhagavatam; nama-the chanting of the holy

>|name; vraje vasa-residence in Vrndavana or Mathura; ei-

>|these; panca-five; sadhana pradhana-the chief processes of

>|devotion.

2444|TRANSLATION

2445|"To be elevated to the platform of devotional service, the

>|following five items should be observed: association with

>|devotees, engagement in the service of Lord Krsna, the

>|reading of Srimad-Bhagavatam, the chanting of the holy

>|names and residence at Vrndavana or Mathura.

2446|Madhya 24.194

2447|TEXT 194

2448|TEXT

2449|Ûý×ÃÃ-ó=-÷NsI ÛLÁ '¦¤Š' l¿ðÃ ýÃÃlþ h

2450|uRõR¿X æÃNdõþ ýÃÃlþ LÔÁøžN›¶N÷±ðÃlþ N 194 N

2451|ei-panca-madhye eka 'svalpa' yadi haya

2452|subuddhi janera haya krsna-premodaya

2453|SYNONYMS

2454|ei-these; panca-madhye-out of the five; eka-of only one;

>|svalpa-a small quantity; yadi-if; haya-there is; su-buddhi-

>|intelligent; janera-of the person; haya-there is; krsna-

>|prema-udaya-awakening of dormant love for Krsna.

2455|TRANSLATION

2456|"One's dormant love for Krsna gradually awakens if one is a

>|little advanced in one of these five items and is

>|intelligent.

2457|Madhya 24.195

2458|TEXT 195

2459|TEXT

2460|ðRÃõþ+ýÃÃ±3/4³ÃîÂõNNlS•Ã¿¦œdA |X± ðÓÃNõþ•Ãd ó=NLÁ h

2461|lS ¦¤NŠ±•Ã¿ó u¥¤gÐ u¿Xlþ±S tÂ±õæÃijNd N 195 N

2462|duruhadbhuta-virye 'smin

2463| sraddha dure 'stu pancake

2464|yatra sv-alpo 'pi sambandhah

2465| sad-dhiyam bhava-janmane

2466|SYNONYMS

2467|dur-uha-difficult to understand ; adbhuta-

>|wonderful; virye-in the power; asmin-in this; sraddha-faith;

>| dure-far away; astu-let it be; pancake-in the above-

>|mentioned five principles; yatra-in which; su-alpah-a

>|little; api-even; sambandhah-connection; sat-dhiyam-of

>|those who are intelligent and offenseless; bhava-janmane-to

>|awaken one's dormant love for Krsna.

2468|TRANSLATION

2469|"'The power of these five principles is very wonderful and

>|difficult to understand. Even without faith in them, a

>|person who is offenseless can awaken his dormant love

>|of Krsna simply by being a little connected with them.'

2470|PURPORT

2471|This verse is found in Bhakti-rasamrta-sindhu (1.

>|2.238).

2472|Madhya 24.196

2473|TEXT 196

2474|TEXT

2475|nÂ×ðÃ±õþ ÷ýÃÃîÂN lD±õþ uNõS±MÃÃ÷± õR¿X h

2476|d±d± LÁ±N÷ tÂNæÃ, îÂõR ó±lþ tÂ¿MÃ¿u¿X N 196 N

2477|udara mahati yanra sarvottama buddhi

2478|nana kame bhaje, tabu paya bhakti-siddhi

2479|SYNONYMS

2480|udara-liberal; mahati-great; yanra-whose; sarva-uttama-

>|first class; buddhi-intelligence; nana-various; kame-with

>|desires; bhaje-engages in devotional service; tabu-still;

>|paya-gets; bhakti-siddhi-perfection in devotional service.

2481|TRANSLATION

2482|"If a person is actually liberal and intelligent, he can

>|advance and become perfect in devotional service even if he

>|has material desires and serves the Lord with some motive.

2483|Madhya 24.197

2484|TEXT 197

2485|TEXT

2486|ÕLÁ±÷Ð uõSLÁ±N÷± õ± Î÷±ŽÂLÁ±÷ nÂ×ðÃ±õþsNÐ h

2487|îÂNNõrrí tÂ¿MÃNl±Nád lNæÃîÂ óRø¸S óõþ÷A N 197 N

2488|akamah sarva-kamo va

2489| moksa-kama udara-dhih

2490|tivrena bhakti-yogena

2491| yajeta purusam param

2492|SYNONYMS

2493|akamah-without material desires; sarva-kamah-full of all

>|material desires; va-or; moksa-kamah-desiring liberation;

>|udara-dhih-sincere and advanced in devotional service;

>|tivrena-firm; bhakti-yogena-by the practice of bhakti-yoga;

>|yajeta-should worship; purusam param-the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead.

2494|TRANSLATION

2495|"'Whether one desires everything or nothing, or whether he

>|desires to merge into the existence of the Lord, he is

>|intelligent only if he worships Lord Krsna, the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead, by rendering transcendental loving

>|service.'

2496|PURPORT

2497|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (2.3.10).

2498|Madhya 24.198

2499|TEXT 198

2500|TEXT

2501|tÂ¿MÃ-›¶tÂ±õ,-Îuý×ÃÃ LÁ±÷ rÃ±nÂl±Ûž± h

2502|LÔÁøžóNðÃ tÂ¿MÃ LÁõþ±lþ &Ní Õ±LÁ¿ø¸Slþ± N 198 N

2503|bhakti-prabhava,-sei kama chadana

2504|krsna-pade bhakti karaya gune akarsiya

2505|SYNONYMS

2506|bhakti-prabhava-the influence of devotional service; sei-

>|that; kama-material desire; chadana-causing to give up;

>|krsna-pade-unto the lotus feet of Krsna; bhakti karaya-

>|engages in devotional service; gune-by transcendental

>|qualities; akarsiya-attracting.

2507|TRANSLATION

2508|"Devotional service is so strong that when one engages in

>|it, he gradually gives up all material desires and becomes

>|fully attracted to the lotus feet of Krsna. All this is

>|brought about by attraction for the transcendental

>|qualities of the Lord.

2509|Madhya 24.199

2510|TEXT 199

2511|TEXT

2512|uîÂIS ¿ðÃúîÂI¿nSîÂ÷¿nSNîÂ± dÔí±S

2513|Ædõ±nSNðÃ± lR óRdõþ¿nSîÂ± lîÂÐ h

2514|¦¤lþS ¿õsNMÃÃ tÂæÃîÂ±÷¿d26ÃîÂ±-

2515|¿÷26Ã±-¿ós±dS ¿dæó±ðó~õ÷A N 199 N

2516|satyam disaty arthitam arthito nrnam

2517| naivartha-do yat punar arthita yatah

2518|svayam vidhatte bhajatam anicchatam

2519| iccha-pidhanam nija-pada-pallavam

2520|SYNONYMS

2521|satyam-it is true; disati-He awards; arthitam-that which is

>|desired; arthitah-being requested; nrnam-by human beings;

>|na-not; eva-certainly; artha-dah-giving desired things; yat-

>|which; punah-again; arthita-request; yatah-from which;

>|svayam-Himself; vidhatte-He gives; bhajatam-of those

>|engaged in devotional service; anicchatam-even though not

>|desiring; iccha-pidhanam-covering all other desires; nija-

>|pada-pallavam-the shelter of His own lotus feet.

2522|TRANSLATION

2523|"'Whenever Krsna is requested to fulfill one's desire, He

>|undoubtedly does so, but He does not award anything which,

>|after being enjoyed, will cause one to petition Him

>|again and again to fulfill further desires. When one has

>|other desires but engages in the Lord's service, Krsna

>|forcibly gives one shelter at His lotus feet, where one

>|will forget all other desires.'

2524|PURPORT

2525|This verse is from Srimad-Bhagavatam (5.19.27).

2526|Madhya 24.200

2527|TEXT 200

2528|TEXT

2529|'Õ±R±'-úNs '¦¤tÂ±õ' LÁNýÃÃ, îÂ±NîÂ Îlý×ÃÃ õþN÷ h

2530|Õ±R±õþ±÷ æÃNõ lîÂ ¦š±õõþ-æÃ/N÷ N 200 N

2531|'atma'-sabde 'svabhava' kahe, tate yei rame

2532|atmarama jiva yata sthavara-jangame

2533|SYNONYMS

2534|atma-sabde-by the word atma; svabhava-nature; kahe-is

>|sometimes said; tate-in that; yei rame-one who takes

>|pleasure; atmarama-called atmarama; jiva-the living

>|entities; yata-all of them; sthavara-jangame-the moving and

>|nonmoving.

2535|TRANSLATION

2536|"Another meaning of the word 'atma ' is 'one's

>|characteristic nature.' Whoever enjoys his particular type

>|of nature is called atmarama. Therefore, all living

>|entities-be they moving or nonmoving-are also called

>|atmarama.

2537|Madhya 24.201

2538|TEXT 201

2539|TEXT

2540|æÃNNõõþ ¦¤tÂ±õ-LÔÁøž-'ðÃ±u'-Õ¿tÂ÷±d h

2541|ÎðÃNýÃÃ Õ±R-:±Nd Õ±26Ã±¿ðÃîÂ Îuý×ÃÃ ':±d' N 201 N

2542|jivera svabhava-krsna-'dasa'-abhimana

2543|dehe atma-jnane acchadita sei 'jnana'

2544|SYNONYMS

2545|jivera svabhava-the original characteristic of all living

>|entities; krsna-dasa-servant of Krsna; abhimana-the

>|conception; dehe-in the material body; atma-jnane-by the

>|conception of the self; acchadita-covered; sei jnana-that

>|original consciousness.

2546|TRANSLATION

2547|"The original nature of every living entity is to consider

>|himself the eternal servant of Krsna. But under the

>|influence of maya he thinks himself to be the body, and

>|thus his original consciousness is covered.

2548|Madhya 24.202

2549|TEXT 202

2550|TEXT

2551|aÂ-úNs 'Ûõ', 'Õ¿ó'-ús u÷R2aÂNlþ h

2552|'Õ±R±õþ±÷± Ûõ' ýÃÃÛž± MLÔÁøž tÂæÃNlþ N 202 N

2553|ca-sabde 'eva', 'api'-sabda samuccaye

2554|'atmarama eva' hana sri-krsna bhajaye

2555|SYNONYMS

2556|ca-sabde-by the word ca; eva-the word eva; api-sabda-the

>|word api; samuccaye-in the sense of aggregation; atmaramah

>|eva-all the atmaramas (all kinds of living entities); hana-

>|being; sri-krsna bhajaye-become engaged in the service of

>|Lord Krsna.

2557|TRANSLATION

2558|"In that case, by the word 'ca, ' the word 'eva ' is meant.

>|The word 'api ' can be taken in the sense of aggregation.

>|Thus the verse would read atmarama eva - that is, 'even

>|all kinds of living beings worship Krsna.'

2559|PURPORT

2560|It is here mentioned that every living entity is atmarama.

>|Temporarily covered by the influence of maya, the living

>|entity serves his senses, which are represented as kama-

>|krodha-lobha-moha-mada-matsarya-lust, anger, greed,

>|illusion, madness and envy. In the material condition, all

>|living entities are engaged in sense gratification, but

>|when they associate with devotees who follow the regulative

>|principles, they become purified and awakened to their

>|original consciousness. They then attempt to satisfy the

>|senses of Lord Krsna and engage in His devotional service.

2561|Madhya 24.203

2562|TEXT 203

2563|TEXT

2564|Ûý×ÃÃ æÃNõ-udLÁ±¿ðÃ uõ ÷R¿dæÃd h

2565|'¿d¢¶SLš'-÷ÓmS, dNaÂ, ¦š±õõþ-óqáí N 203 N

2566|ei jiva-sanakadi saba muni-jana

2567|'nirgrantha'-murkha, nica, sthavara-pasu-gana

2568|SYNONYMS

2569|ei jiva-these living entities; sanaka-adi saba muni-jana-

>|all the great personalities, such as Sanaka and Sanatana;

>|nirgrantha-down to the illiterate; murkha-foolish person;

>|nica-lowborn; sthavara-the trees and plants; pasu-gana-the

>|beasts and birds.

2570|TRANSLATION

2571|"Living entities include great personalities like the four

>|Kumaras, and also low-class foolish people, trees, plants,

>|birds and beasts.

2572|Madhya 24.204

2573|TEXT 204

2574|TEXT

2575|õI±u-qLÁ-udLÁ±¿ðÃõþ ›¶¿uX tÂæÃd h

2576|'¿d¢¶SLš' ¦š±õõþ±¿ðÃõþ qd ¿õõõþí N 204 N

2577|vyasa-suka-sanakadira prasiddha bhajana

2578|'nirgrantha' sthavaradira suna vivarana

2579|SYNONYMS

2580|vyasa-of Vyasadeva; suka-of Sukadeva Gosvami; sanaka-adira-

>|of the four Kumaras; prasiddha bhajana-the devotional

>|service is celebrated; nirgrantha-foolish, uneducated;

>|sthavara-adira-of the immovable elements; suna vivarana-

>|hear the description.

2581|TRANSLATION

2582|"The devotional service of Vyasa, Suka and the four Kumaras

>|has already been well celebrated. Now let Me explain how

>|immovable living entities like trees and plants engage in

>|the Lord's devotional service.

2583|Madhya 24.205

2584|TEXT 205

2585|TEXT

2586|LÔÁøžLÔÁó±¿ðÃ-ÎýÃÃîRÂ ÆýÃÃNîÂ uõ±õþ nÂ×ðÃlþ h

2587|LÔÁøž&í±LÔÁ(c)† ýÃÃÛž± îDÂ±ýÃÃ±Nõþ tÂæÃlþ N 205 N

2588|krsna-krpadi-hetu haite sabara udaya

2589|krsna-gunakrsta hana tanhare bhajaya

2590|SYNONYMS

2591|krsna-krpa-adi-hetu-the reason of Krsna's mercy; haite-from;

>| sabara udaya-anyone becomes a devotee; krsna-guna-akrsta

>|hana-being attracted by the transcendental qualities of

>|Krsna; tanhare-Him; bhajaya-worship.

2592|TRANSLATION

2593|"Everyone is eligible to receive Krsna's mercy-including

>|Vyasadeva, the four Kumaras, Sukadeva Gosvami, lowborn

>|creatures, trees, plants and beasts. By Krsna's mercy they

>|are elevated and engaged in His service.

2594|PURPORT

2595|This is confirmed in the Bhagavad-gita (9.32),

>|wherein the Lord says:

2596|mam hi partha vyapasritya ye 'pi syuh papa-yonayah

2597|striyo vaisyas tatha sudras te 'pi yanti param gatim

2598|"O son of Prtha, those who take shelter in Me, though

>|they be of lower birth-women, vaisyas [merchants] and

>|sudras [workers]-birds, hills, watercan attain the supreme

>|destination."

2599|Everyone is eligible to become Krsna's devotee. One simply

>|has to be trained according to the approved process. It is

>|the work of Krsna's confidential devotees to turn everyone

>|into a Krsna bhakta. If the confidential devotees do not

>|take up the task of elevating everyone to Krsna

>|consciousness, then who will do it? Those who claim to be

>|devotees but do not engage in Krsna's service to elevate

>|all living creatures to Krsna consciousness are to be

>|considered kanistha-adhikaris (people in the lowest stage

>|of devotional service). When one rises to the second

>|platform of devotional service, his business is to

>|propagate Krsna consciousness all over the world. Those who

>|are active in the Krsna consciousness movement should not

>|remain in the neophyte stage but should rise to the

>|platform of preachers, the second platform of devotional

>|service. Devotional service is so enchanting that even the

>|first-class devotees (uttama-adhikaris) also come down to

>|the second platform to preach and render service to the

>|Lord for the benefit of the whole world.

2600|Madhya 24.206

2601|TEXT 206

2602|TEXT

2603|sNdIlþ÷ðÃI sõþíN îÔÂí-õNsb¦R-

2604|ó±ðÃ¦óÔNú± ^n÷hîÂ±Ð LÁõþæÃ±¿tÂ÷Ô(c)†±Ð h

2605|dNðÃI±•Ã^lþÐ má÷Ôá±Ð uðÃlþ±õNh±ÍLÁ-

2606|ÎáS±NóI±•Ã(tm)LNõþí tRÂæÃNlþ±õþ¿ó lR¦óÔýÃÃ± MÐ N 206 N

2607|dhanyeyam adya dharani trna-virudhas tvat-

2608| pada-sprso druma-latah karajabhimrstah

2609|nadyo 'drayah khaga-mrgah sadayavalokair

2610| gopyo 'ntarena bhujayor api yat-sprha srih

2611|SYNONYMS

2612|dhanya-glorified; iyam-this; adya-today; dharani-the

>|surface of the globe; trna-virudhah-the grass and herbs;

>|tvat-Your; pada-sprsah-from the touch of the lotus feet;

>|druma-latah-the creepers and trees; karaja-abhimrstah-

>|touched by Your fingernails; nadyah-the rivers; adrayah-the

>|hills; khaga-mrgah-the birds and forest animals; sadaya-

>|avalokaih-because of Your merciful glances; gopyah-the

>|gopis, the damsels of Vraja; antarena-by the region between;

>| bhujayoh-Your two arms; api-also; yat-for which; sprha-

>|desirous; srih-the goddess of fortune.

2613|TRANSLATION

2614|"'This land of Vrndavana [Vrajabhumi] is glorified today

>|because Your lotus feet have touched her earth and grass ,

>|Your fingernails have touched her trees and creepers, and

>|Your merciful eyes have glanced upon her rivers, hills,

>|birds and beasts. The gopis have been embraced by Your arms,

>| and even the goddess of fortune desires this. Now all of

>|these are glorified.'

2615|PURPORT

2616|This verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.15.8) was spoken by

>|Lord Krsna to Sri Balarama.

2617|Madhya 24.207

2618|TEXT 207

2619|TEXT

2620|á ± Îá±óÍLÁõþdRõdS dlþ Nî Â±ðÃ±

>|õþ-

2621|ÎõíR¦¤ÍdÐ LÁhóÍðÃ(tm)¦dRtÔÂRuR umIÐ h

2622|Õ¦óµdS á¿îÂ÷îÂ±S óRhLÁ(tm)¦õþ+í±S

2623|¿dNlS±áó±úLÔÁîÂhŽÂíNlþ±¿õS¿aÂS÷A N 207 N

2624|ga gopakair anu-vanam nayator udara-

2625| venu-svanaih kala-padais tanu-bhrtsu sakhyah

2626|aspandanam gatimatam pulakas tarunam

2627| niryoga-pasa-krta-laksanayor vicitram

2628|SYNONYMS

2629|gah-the cows; gopakaih-with the cowherd boys; anu-

>|vanam-to each forest; nayatoh-leading; udara-very liberal;

>|venu-svanaih-by the vibrations of the flutes; kala-padaih-

>|having sweet tones; tanu-bhrtsu-among the living entities;

>|sakhyah-O friends; aspandanam-the lack of movement;

>|gati-matam-of those living entities that can move;

>|pulakah-the ecstatic jubilation; tarunam-of the otherwise

>|nonmoving trees; niryoga-pasa-the ropes for binding the

>|rear legs of the cows; krta-laksanayoh-of those two (Krsna

>|and Balarama), who are characterized by; vicitram-wonderful.

2630|TRANSLATION

2631|"'My dear friend, Krsna and Balarama are passing

>|through the forest leading Their cows with Their cowherd

>|boyfriends . They both carry ropes with which, at

>|the time of milking, They bind the rear legs of the cows.

>|When They play on Their flutes, all moving living entities

>|are stunned, and nonmoving living entities experience

>|ecstatic jubilation by Their sweet music. All these things

>|are certainly very wonderful.'

2632|PURPORT

2633|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.21.19). As

>|Krsna wandered in the forest with Baladeva and the

>|two of Them wonderfully played Their flutes , all

>|the gopis became very much attracted. Thus they

>|praised the Lord's activities , describing how He was

>|enthusing all the plants, birds, hills, water-everything.

2634|Madhya 24.208

2635|TEXT 208

2636|TEXT

2637|õdhîÂ±(tm)¦õþõ Õ±R¿d ¿õøRžS

2638|õI?lþ(tm)LI ý×ÃÃõ óR(c)óôÂh±nÂI±Ð h

2639|›¶íîÂtÂ±õþ¿õiÂó± ÷sRs±õþ±Ð

2640|Î›¶÷ý+(c)†îdNõ± õõÔø¸RÐ ¦œ N 208 N

2641|vana-latas tarava atmani visnum

2642| vyanjayantya iva puspa-phaladhyah

2643|pranata-bhara-vitapa madhu-dharah

2644| prema-hrsta-tanavo vavrsuh sma

2645|SYNONYMS

2646|vana-latah-the herbs and plants; taravah-the trees; atmani-

>|in the Supreme Soul; visnum-the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead; vyanjayantyah-manifesting; iva-like; puspa-phala-

>|adhyah-filled with luxuriant fruits and flowers; pranata-

>|bhara-bowed down because of loads; vitapah-the trees; madhu-

>|dharah-showers of honey; prema-hrsta-inspired by love of

>|Godhead; tanavah-whose bodies; vavrsuh-constantly rained;

>|sma-certainly.

2647|TRANSLATION

2648|"'The plants, creepers and trees were full of fruits and

>|flowers due to ecstatic love of Krsna. Indeed, being so

>|full, they were bowing down. They were inspired by such

>|deep love for Krsna that they were constantly pouring

>|showers of honey. In this way the gopis saw all the forests

>|of Vrndavana.'

2649|PURPORT

2650|This verse is from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.35.9). For an

>|explanation, see Madhya-lila 8.276.

2651|Madhya 24.209

2652|TEXT 209

2653|TEXT

2654|¿LÁõþ±îÂýÓÃÃd±h- óR ¿h µóR!Áú±

2655|Õ±tÂNõþqy± lõd±Ð mu±ðÃlþÐ h

2656|Îl•ÃNdI aÂ ó±ó± lðRó±|lþ±|lþ±Ð

2657|qsI¿(tm)L îÂÍ¦œ ›¶tÂ¿õøžNõ d÷Ð N 209 N

2658|kirata-hunandhra-pulinda-pukkasa

2659| abhira-sumbha yavanah khasadayah

2660|ye 'nye ca papa yad-upasrayasrayah

2661| sudhyanti tasmai prabhavisnave namah

2662|SYNONYMS

2663|kirata-the aborigines named Kiratas; huna-the Hunas; andhra-

>|Andhras; pulinda-Pulindas; pukkasah- Pukkasas; abhira-

>|Abhiras; sumbhah-Sumbhas; yavanah-persons who do not follow

>|the Vedic injunctions and who eat cow's flesh; khasa-adayah-

>|Khasas and others; ye-those who; anye-similar others; ca-

>|also; papah-sinful persons; yat-of the Supreme Personality

>|of Godhead; upasraya-of the devotees; asrayah-taking

>|shelter; sudhyanti-become purified; tasmai-unto Him, Lord

>|Visnu, because of whom they become purified; prabhavisnave-

>|to Lord Visnu, the most powerful; namah-respectful

>|obeisances.

2664|TRANSLATION

2665|"' Kiratas, Hunas, Andhras, Pulindas, Pukkasas, Abhiras,

>|Sumbhas, Yavanas and members of the Khasa races , and even

>|others who are addicted to sinful acts , can be purified by

>|taking shelter of the devotees of the Lord , due to His

>|being the supreme power. I beg to offer my respectful

>|obeisances unto Him.'

2666|Madhya 24.210

2667|TEXT 210

2668|TEXT

2669|Õ±Ná 'ÎîÂõþ' ÕnS LÁ¿õþhRD, Õ±õþ 'rÃlþ' Ûý×ÃÃ h

2670|Ød¿õSú¿îÂ ÕnS ýÃÃý×ÃÃh ¿÷¿h' Ûý×ÃÃ ðRÃý×ÃÃ N 210 N

2671|age 'tera' artha karilun, ara 'chaya' ei

2672|unavimsati artha ha-ila mili' ei dui

2673|SYNONYMS

2674|age-previously; tera-thirteen; artha-meanings; karilun-I

>|have done; ara-another; chaya-six; ei-this; unavimsati-

>|altogether nineteen; artha-meanings; ha-ila-there were;

>|mili'-including; ei dui-these two.

2675|TRANSLATION

2676|"I have already spoken about thirteen meanings [of

>|the atmarama verse]. Now there are six more. Combined,

>|these make nineteen.

2677|PURPORT

2678|The six further meanings of the verse are based on the

>|following meanings of the word atmarama: (1) mental

>|speculators (vide verse 165), (2) those engaged in

>|different types of endeavor (vide verse 168), (3) those who

>|are patient and sober (vide verse 174), (4) those who are

>|intelligent and learned scholars (vide verse 187), (5)

>|those who are intelligent but illiterate and foolish (vide

>|verse 187), and (6) those who are conscious of their

>|eternal servitorship to Krsna (vide verse 201).

2679|Madhya 24.211

2680|TEXT 211

2681|TEXT

2682|Ûý×ÃÃ Ø¿dú ÕnS LÁ¿õþhR, Õ±Ná qd Õ±õþ h

2683|'Õ±R'-úNs 'ÎðÃýÃÃ' LÁNýÃÃ,–aÂ±¿õþ ÕnS îÂ±õþ N 211 N

2684|ei unisa artha karilu, age suna ara

2685|'atma'-sabde 'deha' kahe,-cari artha tara

2686|SYNONYMS

2687|ei-these; unisa-nineteen; artha-meanings; karilu-I have

>|done; age-ahead; suna-hear; ara-more; atma-sabde-by the

>|word atma; deha-the body; kahe-is understood; cari artha-

>|four meanings; tara-of that.

2688|TRANSLATION

2689|"I have already explained nineteen different meanings. Now

>|please hear further meanings. The word 'atma ' also refers

>|to the body, and this can be taken in four ways.

2690|PURPORT

2691|The four divisions of meanings of the word deha ("body")

>|are (1) aupadika-brahma-deha, the material body considered

>|as Brahman with designations (vide verse 212), (2) karma-

>|nistha yajnikera karma-deha, the body engaged in

>|ritualistic ceremonies of the Vedic injunctions (vide verse

>|214), (3) tapo-deha, the body engaged in austerities and

>|penances (vide verse 216), and (4) sarva-kama-deha, the

>|body engaged for the satisfaction of all kinds of material

>|desires (vide verse 218).

2692|Madhya 24.212

2693|TEXT 212

2694|TEXT

2695|ÎðÃýÃÃ±õþ±÷N ÎðÃNýÃÃ tÂNæÃ 'ÎðÃNýÃÃ±ó±¿s õrpÁ' h

2696|uRuN/ ÎuýÃÃ LÁNõþ LÔÁNøžõþ tÂæÃd N 212 N

2697|deharami dehe bhaje 'dehopadhi brahma'

2698|sat-sange seha kare krsnera bhajana

2699|SYNONYMS

2700|deharami-a person who has accepted the body as the

>|self and is interested only in sense gratification; dehe-

>|in the body; bhaje-worships; deha-upadhi brahma-Brahman

>|having the body as a designation; sat-sange-in the

>|association of devotees; seha-such a person; kare-does;

>|krsnera bhajana-service to Lord Krsna.

2701|TRANSLATION

2702|"One in the bodily conception worships his own body as

>|Brahman, but when he comes in contact with a devotee, he

>|gives up this mistaken idea and engages himself in the

>|devotional service of Lord Krsna.

2703|Madhya 24.213

2704|TEXT 213

2705|TEXT

2706|nÂ×ðÃõþ÷Ró±uNîÂ l HÂ¿ø¸õRSuR LÓÁóSðÔÃúÐ

2707|ó¿õþuõþóX¿îÂS ý+ðÃlþ÷±íNlþ± ðÃýÃÃõþ÷A h

2708|îÂîÂ nÂ×ðÃá±ðÃd(tm)L îÂõ s±÷ ¿úõþÐ óõþ÷S

2709|óRd¿õþýÃÃ lR uN÷îÂI d óîÂ¿(tm)L LÔÁîÂ±(tm)L÷RNm N 213 N

2710|udaram upasate ya rsi-vartmasu kurpa-drsah

2711| parisara-paddhatim hrdayam arunayo daharam

2712|tata udagad ananta tava dhama sirah paramam

2713| punar iha yat sametya na patanti krtanta-mukhe

2714|SYNONYMS

2715|udaram-the abdomen; upasate-worship; ye-those who; rsi-

>|vartmasu-on the path marked out by the great saintly

>|persons; kurpa-drsah-whose vision is grossly situated in

>|the bodily conception of life; parisara-paddhatim-from

>|which the system of the arteries comes; hrdayam-the heart;

>|arunayah-saintly persons headed by Aruna Rsi; daharam-the

>|sky within the heart, the subtle conception of the

>|Supersoul within the heart; tatah-from that; udagat-went up;

>| ananta-O unlimited one; tava-Your; dhama-place; sirah-the

>|top of the head; paramam-supreme; punah-again; iha-in this

>|material world; yat-which; sametya-having achieved; na-not;

>|patanti-fall down; krta-anta-mukhe-in the repetition of

>|birth and death.

2716|TRANSLATION

2717|"'Those who follow the path of great, saintly mystic yogis

>|take to the yogic gymnastic process and begin worshiping

>|from the abdomen, where it is said that Brahman is located.

>|Such people are called sarkaraksa, which means that they

>|are situated in the gross bodily conception. There are also

>|followers of the rsi known as Aruna. Following his path,

>|they observe the activities of the arteries. Thus they

>|gradually rise to the heart, where subtle Brahman,

>|Paramatma, is situated. They then worship Him. O

>|unlimited Ananta! Better than these persons are the mystic

>|yogis who worship You from the top of their heads.

>|Beginning with the abdomen and proceeding through the heart,

>| they reach the top of the head and pass through the brahma-

>| randhra, the hole at the top of the skull. Thus these

>|yogis attain the perfectional platform and do not enter the

>|cycle of birth and death again.'

2718|PURPORT

2719|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.87.18).

2720|Madhya 24.214

2721|TEXT 214

2722|TEXT

2723|ÎðÃýÃÃ±õþ±÷N LÁ÷S¿d‡Â-l±¿:LÁ±¿ðÃ æÃd h

2724|uRuN/ 'LÁ÷S' îÂI¿æÃ' LÁõþlþ tÂæÃd N 214 N

2725|deharami karma-nistha-yajnikadi jana

2726|sat-sange 'karma' tyaji' karaya bhajana

2727|SYNONYMS

2728|deharami-those in the bodily concept of life; karma-nistha-

>|attracted to fruitive activities; yajnika-adi jana-persons

>|who perform ritualistic ceremonies for a better standard of

>|life; sat-sange-in contact with devotees; karma tyaji'-

>|giving up such fruitive activities; karaya bhajana-engage

>|in the devotional service of the Lord.

2729|TRANSLATION

2730|"Those who are in the bodily conception mainly engage in

>|fruitive activity. Those who perform yajnas and ritualistic

>|ceremonies are also considered in the same category.

>|However, when such persons come in contact with the pure

>|devotee, they give up their fruitive activity and fully

>|engage in the service of the Lord.

2731|Madhya 24.215

2732|TEXT 215

2733|TEXT

2734|LÁ÷SíI¿¦œi§d±«±Nu sÓ÷sÓ¥Ú±Rd±S tÂõ±dA h

2735|Õ±ó±lþlþ¿îÂ Îá±¿õµó±ðó1/2±uõS ÷sR N 215 N

2736|karmany asminn anasvase

2737| dhuma-dhumratmanam bhavan

2738|apayayati govinda-

2739| pada-padmasavam madhu

2740|SYNONYMS

2741|karmani-in fruitive activity; asmin-in this; anasvase-

>|although not positive in result; dhuma-dhumra-atmanam-whose

>|bodies are simply becoming blackish because of smoke;

>|bhavan-you; apayayati-give a chance to drink; govinda-pada-

>|padma-asavam-the nectarean beverage flowing from the lotus

>|feet of Govinda; madhu-sweet.

2742|TRANSLATION

2743|"'We have just begun performing this fruitive activity, a

>|sacrificial fire, but due to the many imperfections in our

>|action, we are not certain of its result. Our bodies have

>|become black from the smoke, but we are factually pleased

>|by the nectar of the lotus feet of the Personality of

>|Godhead, Govinda, which you are distributing.'

2744|PURPORT

2745|This verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.18.12) was spoken to

>|Suta Gosvami at the meeting of great sages at Naimisaranya.

>|The great sages were headed by Saunaka, and Suta Gosvami

>|was speaking of the glorious activities of the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead at that meeting. At that time, all

>|the rsis assembled there neglected to complete the

>|ritualistic ceremonies because there was no positive

>|assurance of the results. All the performers were coated

>|with black ash due to the large amount of smoke coming from

>|the fire.

2746|Madhya 24.216

2747|TEXT 216

2748|TEXT

2749|'îÂó¦¤N' ›¶tÔÂ¿îÂ lîÂ ÎðÃýÃÃ±õþ±÷N ýÃÃlþ h

2750|u±sRuN/ îÂó rÃ±¿nÂl' MLÔÁøž tÂæÃlþ N 216 N

2751|'tapasvi' prabhrti yata deharami haya

2752|sadhu-sange tapa chadi' sri-krsna bhajaya

2753|SYNONYMS

2754|tapasvi-persons who undergo severe penances; prabhrti-and

>|so on; yata-all; deharami haya-are within the category of

>|the bodily concept of life; sadhu-sange-in the association

>|of devotees; tapa chadi'-giving up all such processes of

>|penance and austerity; sri-krsna bhajaya-engage themselves

>|in the service of Lord Krsna.

2755|TRANSLATION

2756|"The tapasvis, those who undergo severe austerities and

>|penances to elevate themselves to the higher planetary

>|systems, are also in the same category. When such persons

>|come in contact with a devotee, they give up all those

>|practices and engage in Lord Krsna's service.

2757|Madhya 24.217

2758|TEXT 217

2759|TEXT

2760|lRó±ðÃNuõ±¿tÂ¿aÂ(tm)¦Ãó¿¦¤d±-

2761|÷Núø¸æÃNij±ó¿aÂîÂS ÷hS ¿slþÐ h

2762|uðÃIÐ ¿ŽÂNí±îÂIi¤ýÃÃN÷sîÂN uîÂN

2763|ln± óðÃ±/R‡Â¿õ¿dÐuÔîÂ± u¿õþR N 217 N

2764|yat-pada-sevabhirucis tapasvinam

2765| asesa-janmopacitam malam dhiyah

2766|sadyah ksinoty anv-aham edhati sati

2767| yatha padangustha-vinihsrta sarit

2768|SYNONYMS

2769|yat-pada-seva-abhirucih-the taste for serving the lotus

>|feet of Lord Krsna; tapasvinam-of persons undergoing severe

>|penances; asesa-unlimited; janma-upacitam-contracted from

>|life after life; malam-dirt; dhiyah-of the intelligence;

>|sadyah-immediately; ksinoti-vanquishes; anu-aham-every

>|day; edhati-increasing; sati-being in the mode of goodness;

>|yatha-as; pada-angustha-vinihsrta-emanating from the toe of

>|the Lord; sarit-the river Ganges.

2770|TRANSLATION

2771|"'The taste for loving service is like the water of the

>|River Ganges, which flows from the feet of Lord Krsna.

>|Every day that taste diminishes the results of sinful

>|activities acquired over a period of many births by those

>|who perform austerities.'

2772|PURPORT

2773|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (4.21.31).

2774|Madhya 24.218

2775|TEXT 218

2776|TEXT

2777|ÎðÃýÃÃ±õþ±÷N, uõSLÁ±÷-uõ Õ±R±õþ±÷ h

2778|LÔÁøžLÔÁó±lþ LÔÁøž tÂNæÃ rÃ±¿nÂl' uõ LÁ±÷ N 218 N

2779|deharami, sarva-kama-saba atmarama

2780|krsna-krpaya krsna bhaje chadi' saba kama

2781|SYNONYMS

2782|deharami-persons who are in the bodily concept of life;

>|sarva-kama-full of all material desires; saba-all; atmarama-

>|enjoying self-satisfaction; krsna-krpaya-by the mercy of

>|Krsna; krsna bhaje-become engaged in the devotional service

>|of Lord Krsna; chadi' saba kama-giving up all sorts of

>|material desires.

2783|TRANSLATION

2784|"As long as one labors under the bodily conception, he must

>|fulfill volumes and volumes of material desires. Thus a

>|person is called atmarama. When such an atmarama is favored

>|by the mercy of Krsna, he gives up his so-called self-

>|satisfaction and engages in the transcendental loving

>|service of the Lord.

2785|Madhya 24.219

2786|TEXT 219

2787|TEXT

2788|¦š±d±¿tÂh±ø¸N îÂó¿u ¿¦šNîÂ±•ÃýÃÃS

2789|Q±S ›¶±5õ±dA ÎðÃõ÷RdNf&ýÃÃI÷A h

2790|LÁ±aÂS ¿õ¿aÂi¤i§¿ó ¿ðÃõIõþPS

2791|¦¤±¿÷dA LÔÁîÂ±NnS±•Ã¿¦œ õõþS d l±NaÂ N 219 N

2792|sthanabhilasi tapasi sthito 'ham

2793| tvam praptavan deva-munindra-guhyam

2794|kacam vicinvann api divya-ratnam

2795| svamin krtartho 'smi varam na yace

2796|SYNONYMS

2797|sthana-abhilasi-desiring a very high position in the

>|material world; tapasi-in severe austerities and penances;

>|sthitah-situated; aham-I; tvam-You; praptavan-have obtained;

>| deva-muni-indra-guhyam-difficult to achieve even for great

>|demigods, saintly persons and kings; kacam-a piece of glass;

>| vicinvan-searching for; api-although; divya-ratnam-a

>|transcendental gem; svamin-O my Lord; krta-arthah asmi-I am

>|fully satisfied; varam-any benediction; na yace-I do not

>|ask.

2798|TRANSLATION

2799|"[When he was being blessed by the Supreme Personality

>|of Godhead, Dhruva Maharaja said :] 'O my Lord, because

>|I was seeking an opulent material position, I was

>|performing severe types of penance and austerity. Now I

>|have gotten You, who are very difficult for the great

>|demigods, saintly persons and kings to attain. I was

>|searching after a piece of glass, but instead I have found

>|a most valuable jewel. Therefore I am so satisfied that I

>|do not wish to ask any benediction from You.'

2800|PURPORT

2801|This verse is from the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya (7.28).

2802|Madhya 24.220

2803|TEXT 220

2804|TEXT

2805|Ûý×ÃÃ aÂ±¿õþ ÕnS uýÃÃ ýÃÃý×ÃÃh 'ÎîÂý×ÃÃú' ÕnS h

2806|Õ±õþ ¿îd ÕnS qd óõþ÷ u÷nS N 220 N

2807|ei cari artha saha ha-ila 'teisa' artha

2808|ara tina artha suna parama samartha

2809|SYNONYMS

2810|ei-these; cari-four; artha-meanings; saha-with; ha-ila-

>|there were; teisa artha-twenty-three different varieties of

>|imports; ara tina artha-another three imports; suna-hear;

>|parama samartha-very strong.

2811|TRANSLATION

2812|"In addition to the nineteen meanings of the verse

>|mentioned previously, there are these four further

>|meanings when the word 'atmarama ' is taken to

>|mean 'those laboring under the bodily conception . ' This

>| brings the total to twenty-

>|three . Now hear of another three meanings, which

>|are very suitable.

2813|PURPORT

2814|The three further meanings of the verse are understood

>|when (1) the word ca is taken to mean "in due course ,

>| " (2) the word ca is taken to mean eva and the

>|word api to mean "censure," and (3) the word

>|nirgrantha is taken to mean "one who is very poor,

>|without money."

2815|Madhya 24.221

2816|TEXT 221

2817|TEXT

2818|aÂ-úNs 'u÷R2aÂNlþ,' Õ±õþ ÕnS LÁlþ h

2819|'Õ±R±õþ±÷±( ÷Rdlþ(' LÔÁNøžNõþ tÂæÃlþ N 221 N

2820|ca-sabde 'samuccaye', ara artha kaya

2821|'atmaramas ca munayas ca' krsnere bhajaya

2822|SYNONYMS

2823|ca-sabde-by the word ca; samuccaye-in aggregation; ara-

>|another; artha-import; kaya-is meant; atmaramah ca munayah

>|ca-all the atmaramas and munis; krsnere bhajaya-worship

>|Krsna.

2824|TRANSLATION

2825|"As mentioned above, the word 'ca ' can be used to mean '

>|aggregate.' According to this meaning, all the atmaramas

>|and munis engage in Krsna's service. Besides 'aggregate,

>|' there is another meaning of the word 'ca. '

2826|Madhya 24.222

2827|TEXT 222

2828|TEXT

2829|'¿d¢¶SLš±Ð' ýÃÃÛž± ý×ÃýDÃÃ± 'Õ¿ó'-¿ds±SõþNí h

2830|'õþ±÷( LÔÁøž(' ln± ¿õýÃÃõþNlþ õNd N 222 N

2831|'nirgranthah' hana ihan 'api'-nirdharane

2832|'ramas ca krsnas ca' yatha viharaye vane

2833|SYNONYMS

2834|nirgranthah hana-being liberated saintly persons; ihan-here;

>| api-the word api; nirdharane-in the sense of certainty;

>|ramah ca krsnah ca-both Rama and Krsna; yatha-as; viharaye-

>|enjoy walking; vane-in the forest.

2835|TRANSLATION

2836|"The word 'nirgranthah ' can be used as an adjective, and '

>|api ' can be used in the sense of certainty. For instance,

>|ramas ca krsnas ca means that both Rama and Krsna enjoy

>|walking in the forest.

2837|PURPORT

2838|Because it is said that both Rama and Krsna enjoy wandering

>|in the forest, it is understood that both of Them are

>|enjoying Their tour within the forest.

2839|Madhya 24.223

2840|TEXT 223

2841|TEXT

2842|aÂ-úNs 'Õi¤±aÂNlþ' ÕnS LÁNýÃÃ Õ±õþ h

2843|'õNiÂ±, ¿tÂŽÂ±÷iÂ, á±=±dlþ' ÆlNrÃ ›¶LÁ±õþ N 223 N

2844|ca-sabde 'anvacaye' artha kahe ara

2845|'bato, bhiksam ata, gam canaya' yaiche prakara

2846|SYNONYMS

2847|ca-sabde-by the word ca; anvacaye-in presenting an action

>|of secondary importance; artha-meaning; kahe-says; ara-

>|another; bato-O brahmacari; bhiksam ata-just bring some

>|alms; gam ca anaya-also, at the same time, bring the cows;

>|yaiche prakara-in this way.

2848|TRANSLATION

2849|"The word 'ca ' can also

>|present a secondary thing to be done at the same time. This

>|way of understanding the word 'ca' is called

>|anvacaye. An example is 'O brahmacari, go out to collect

>|alms and at the same time bring in the cows.'

2850|Madhya 24.224

2851|TEXT 224

2852|TEXT

2853|LÔÁøž÷dNd ÷R¿d LÔÁNøž uõSðÃ± tÂæÃlþ h

2854|'Õ±R±õþ±÷± Õ¿ó' tÂNæÃ,-ÎáNí ÕnS LÁlþ N 224 N

2855|krsna-manane muni krsne sarvada bhajaya

2856|'atmarama api' bhaje,-gauna artha kaya

2857|SYNONYMS

2858|krsna-manane-in meditating on Krsna; muni-saintly persons;

>|krsne-unto Lord Krsna; sarvada-always; bhajaya-perform

>|devotional service; atmaramah api-also those who are

>|atmaramas; bhaje-engage themselves in devotional service;

>|gauna artha kaya-this is also another, secondary import.

2859|TRANSLATION

2860|"Saintly persons who are always meditating upon Krsna are

>|engaged in the devotional service of the Lord. The

>|atmaramas are also engaged in the Lord's service. That is

>|the indirect import.

2861|PURPORT

2862|The anvacaye meaning of the word ca indicates that between

>|the two words compounded by the word ca, one is given more

>|importance and the other is considered subordinate. For

>|example , "O brahmacari, please go out and collect alms and

>|at the same time bring in the cows." In this statement, the

>|collection of alms is of first importance, and the second

>|business of collecting the cows is subordinate. Similarly,

>|one who always meditates upon Krsna is mainly a devotee of

>|Krsna engaged in His devotional service. Other atmaramas

>|are subordinate in devotional service.

2863|Madhya 24.225

2864|TEXT 225

2865|TEXT

2866|'aÂ' Ûõ±NnS-'÷RdlþÐ Ûõ' LÔÁNøžNõþ tÂæÃlþ h

2867|"Õ±R±õþ±÷± Õ¿ó"-'Õ¿ó' 'áýSÃÃ±'-ÕnS LÁlþ N 225 N

2868|'ca' evarthe-'munayah eva' krsnere bhajaya

2869|"atmarama api"-'api' 'garha'-artha kaya

2870|SYNONYMS

2871|ca-the word ca; eva-arthe-in the sense of eva; munayah eva-

>|just the saintly persons; krsnere bhajaya-engage themselves

>|in the devotional service of Lord Krsna; atmaramah api-also

>|in this combination, atmarama api; api-the word api; garha-

>|artha kaya-in the sense of censure.

2872|TRANSLATION

2873|"The word 'ca ' can also be used to indicate the certainty

>|that only saintly persons are engaged in rendering

>|devotional service to Krsna. In the combination 'atmarama

>|api, ' 'api ' is used in the sense of censure.

2874|Madhya 24.226

2875|TEXT 226

2876|TEXT

2877|'¿d¢¶SLš ýÃÃÛž±'-Ûý×ÃÃ ðRÃDýÃÃ±õþ '¿õNúø¸í' h

2878|Õ±õþ ÕnS qd, ÆlNrÃ u±sRõþ u/÷ N 226 N

2879|'nirgrantha hana'-ei dunhara 'visesana'

2880|ara artha suna, yaiche sadhura sangama

2881|SYNONYMS

2882|nirgrantha hana-becoming nirgrantha; ei-this; dunhara-of

>|both; visesana-the adjective; ara artha-another import;

>|suna-please hear; yaiche-in which; sadhura sangama-there is

>|association with devotees.

2883|TRANSLATION

2884|"The word 'nirgrantha ' can be taken as an adjective

>|modifying 'muni ' and 'atmarama. ' There is another meaning,

>| which you may hear from Me, indicating association with a

>|devotee. Now I shall explain how it is that through the

>|association of devotees, even a nirgrantha can become a

>|devotee.

2885|Madhya 24.227

2886|TEXT 227

2887|TEXT

2888|¿d¢¶SLš-úNs LÁNýÃÃ îÂNõ 'õI±s', '¿dsSd' h

2889|u±sRuN/ ÎuýÃÃ LÁNõþ MLÔÁøž-tÂæÃd N 227 N

2890|nirgrantha-sabde kahe tabe 'vyadha', 'nirdhana'

2891|sadhu-sange seha kare sri-krsna-bhajana

2892|SYNONYMS

2893|nirgrantha-sabde-by the word nirgrantha; kahe-is said; tabe-

>|therefore; vyadha-a hunter; nirdhana-without any riches;

>|sadhu-sange-by the association of a saintly person; seha-he

>|also; kare-engages himself; sri-krsna-bhajana-in the

>|devotional service of Lord Krsna.

2894|TRANSLATION

2895|"The word 'nirgrantha , ' when combined with 'api ' used in

>|the sense of certainty , indicates a person who is a

>|hunter by profession or who is very poor. Nonetheless, when

>|such a person associates with a great saint like Narada, he

>|engages in Lord Krsna's devotional service.

2896|Madhya 24.228

2897|TEXT 228

2898|TEXT

2899|'LÔÁøž± õþ±÷±(' Ûõ-ýÃÃlþ LÔÁøž-÷dd h

2900|õI±s ýÃÃÛž± ýÃÃlþ óÓæÃI tÂ±áõNîÂ±MÃÃ÷ N 228 N

2901|'krsnaramas ca' eva-haya krsna-manana

2902|vyadha hana haya pujya bhagavatottama

2903|SYNONYMS

2904|krsna-aramah ca-one who takes pleasure in Krsna; eva-

>|certainly; haya-there is; krsna-manana-meditation on Krsna;

>|vyadha hana-being a hunter; haya-is; pujya-worshipable;

>|bhagavata-uttama-the best of the devotees.

2905|TRANSLATION

2906|"The words 'krsnaramas ca ' refer to one who takes pleasure

>|in thinking of Krsna. Even though such a person may be a

>|hunter, he is still worshipable and is the best of devotees.

2907|Madhya 24.229

2908|TEXT 229

2909|TEXT

2910|ÛLÁ tÂMÃ-õI±Nsõþ LÁn± qd u±õs±Nd h

2911|l±ýÃÃ± ÆýÃÃNîÂ ýÃÃlþ uRu/-÷¿ýÃÃ÷±õþ :±Nd N 229 N

2912|eka bhakta-vyadhera katha suna savadhane

2913|yaha haite haya sat-sanga-mahimara jnane

2914|SYNONYMS

2915|eka bhakta-vyadhera-one devotee who was a hunter; katha-

>|narration; suna-please hear; savadhane-with attention; yaha

>|haite-from which; haya-there is; sat-sanga-mahimara jnane-

>|knowledge of the greatness of association with a great

>|devotee.

2916|TRANSLATION

2917|"I shall now narrate the story of how a hunter became a

>|great devotee by the association of such an exalted

>|personality as Narada Muni. From this story, one can

>|understand the greatness of association with pure devotees.

2918|Madhya 24.230

2919|TEXT 230

2920|TEXT

2921|ÛLÁ ¿ðÃd Md±õþðÃ ÎðÃ¿m' d±õþ±lþí h

2922|¿SNõíN-¦§±Nd ›¶lþ±á LÁ¿õþh± á÷d N 230 N

2923|eka dina sri-narada dekhi' narayana

2924|triveni-snane prayaga karila gamana

2925|SYNONYMS

2926|eka dina-one day; sri-narada-the great saintly person

>|Narada; dekhi' narayana-after visiting Lord Narayana; tri-

>|veni-snane-to bathe at the confluence of the Ganges, Yamuna

>|and Sarasvati rivers; prayaga-to Prayaga; karila gamana-

>|went.

2927|TRANSLATION

2928|"Once upon a time the great saint Narada, after visiting

>|Lord Narayana in the Vaikunthas, went to Prayaga to bathe

>|at the confluence of three rivers-the Ganges, Yamuna and

>|Sarasvati.

2929|PURPORT

2930|The great saint Narada is so liberated that he can go to

>|the Vaikuntha planets to see Narayana and then immediately

>|come to this planet in the material world and go to Prayaga

>|to bathe in the confluence of three rivers. The word tri-

>|veni refers to a confluence of three rivers. This

>|confluence is still visited by many hundreds of thousands

>|of people who go there to bathe, especially during the

>|Magha-mela, which occurs during the month of January

>|. A liberated person who has no material body

>|can go anywhere and everywhere; therefore a living entity

>|is called sarva-ga, which indicates that he can go anywhere

>|and everywhere. Presently scientists are trying to go to

>|other planets, but due to their material bodies, they are

>|not free to move at will. However, when one is situated in

>|his original spiritual body, he can move anywhere and

>|everywhere without difficulty. Within this material world

>|there is a planet called Siddhaloka, whose inhabitants can

>|go from one planet to another without the aid of a machine

>|or space rocket. In the material world every planet has a

>|specific advantage (vibhuti-bhinna). In the spiritual world,

>| however, all the planets and their inhabitants are

>|composed of spiritual energy. Because there are no material

>|impediments, it is said that everything in the spiritual

>|world is one.

2931|Madhya 24.231

2932|TEXT 231

2933|TEXT

2934|õdóNn ÎðNm ÷Ôá Õ±NrÃ tÓÂN÷ ó¿nÂl' h

2935|õ±í-¿õX tÃÃ¢Ÿó±ðÃ LÁNõþ snÂlAôÂ¿nÂl N 231 N

2936|vana-pathe dekhe mrga ache bhume padi'

2937|bana-viddha bhagna-pada kare dhad-phadi

2938|SYNONYMS

2939|vana-pathe-on the forest path; dekhe-saw; mrga-deer; ache-

>|there was; bhume padi'-lying on the ground; bana-viddha-

>|pierced by an arrow; bhagna-pada-broken legs; kare dhad-

>|phadi-twisting with pain.

2940|TRANSLATION

2941|"Narada Muni saw that a deer was lying on the path through

>|the forest and that it was pierced by an arrow. It had

>|broken legs and was twisting due to much pain.

2942|Madhya 24.232

2943|TEXT 232

2944|TEXT

2945|Õ±õþ LÁîÂðÓÃNõþ ÛLÁ ÎðÃNmd úÓLÁõþ h

2946|ÆîÂNrÃ ¿õX tÃÃ¢Ÿó±ðÃ LÁNõþ snÂlAôÂnÂl N 232 N

2947|ara kata-dure eka dekhena sukara

2948|taiche viddha bhagna-pada kare dhad-phada

2949|SYNONYMS

2950|ara kata-dure-still farther along; eka-one; dekhena-sees;

>|sukara-a boar; taiche-similarly; viddha-pierced; bhagna-

>|pada-broken legs; kare dhad-phada-twists in pain.

2951|TRANSLATION

2952|"Farther ahead, Narada Muni saw a boar pierced by an arrow.

>|Its legs were also broken, and it was twisting in pain.

2953|Madhya 24.233

2954|TEXT 233

2955|TEXT

2956|UNrÃ ÛLÁ úúLÁ ÎðÃNm Õ±õþ LÁîÂðÓÃNõþ h

2957|æÃNNõõþ ðRÃÐm Îð¿m' d±õþðÃ õI±LRÁh-Õ(tm)LNõþ N 233 N

2958|aiche eka sasaka dekhe ara kata-dure

2959|jivera duhkha dekhi' narada vyakula-antare

2960|SYNONYMS

2961|aiche-similarly; eka sasaka-one rabbit; dekhe-he sees; ara

>|kata-dure-still farther ahead; jivera-of the living entity;

>|duhkha dekhi'-seeing such horrible miseries; narada-the

>|great saintly person; vyakula-antare-very much pained

>|within himself.

2962|TRANSLATION

2963|"When he went farther, he saw a rabbit that was also

>|suffering. Narada Muni was greatly pained at heart to see

>|living entities suffer so.

2964|Madhya 24.234

2965|TEXT 234

2966|TEXT

2967|LÁîÂðÓÃNõþ ÎðÃNm õI±s õÔNŽÂ ÝDîÂ ýÃÃÛž± h

2968|÷Ôá ÷±¿õþõ±Nõþ Õ±NrÃ õ±í lR¿nÂllþ± N 234 N

2969|kata-dure dekhe vyadha vrkse onta hana

2970|mrga maribare ache bana yudiya

2971|SYNONYMS

2972|kata-dure-somewhat farther; dekhe-Narada Muni saw; vyadha-

>|the hunter; vrkse onta hana-hiding behind a tree; mrga

>|maribare-to kill the animals; ache-was there; bana yudiya-

>|with arrows in the hand.

2973|TRANSLATION

2974|"When Narada Muni advanced farther, he saw a hunter behind

>|a tree. This hunter was holding arrows, and he was ready to

>|kill more animals.

2975|Madhya 24.235

2976|TEXT 235

2977|TEXT

2978|úI±÷õíS õþMÃNdS ÷ýÃÃ±tÂlþ‚õþ h

2979|sdRõS±í ýÃÃN(tm)¦,-Îld l÷ ðÃGsõþ N 235 N

2980|syama-varna rakta-netra maha-bhayankara

2981|dhanur-bana haste,-yena yama danda-dhara

2982|SYNONYMS

2983|syama-varna-blackish color; rakta-netra-reddish eyes; maha-

>|bhayankara-very fearful bodily features; dhanur-bana haste-

>|with arrows and bow in hand; yena yama danda-dhara-exactly

>|like the superintendent of death, Yamaraja.

2984|TRANSLATION

2985|"The hunter's body was blackish. He had reddish eyes, and

>|he appeared fierce. It was as if the superintendent of

>|death, Yamaraja, were standing there with a bow and

>|arrows in his hands.

2986|Madhya 24.236

2987|TEXT 236

2988|TEXT

2989|ón rÃ±¿nÂl' d±õþðÃ îÂ±õþ ¿dLÁNiÂ aÂ¿hh h

2990|d±õþNðÃ ÎðÃ¿m' ÷Ôá uõ óh±Ûž± Îáh N 236 N

2991|patha chadi' narada tara nikate calila

2992|narade dekhi' mrga saba palana gela

2993|SYNONYMS

2994|patha chadi'-leaving aside the path; narada-the saintly

>|person Narada; tara nikate-near him; calila-went; narade

>|dekhi'-seeing Narada; mrga-the animals; saba-all; palana

>|gela-left, running away.

2995|TRANSLATION

2996|"When Narada Muni left the forest path and went to the

>|hunter, all the animals immediately saw him and fled.

2997|Madhya 24.237

2998|TEXT 237

2999|TEXT

3000|SRX ýÃÃÛž± õI±s îDÂ±Nõþ á±¿h ¿ðÃNîÂ aÂ±lþ h

3001|d±õþðÃ-›¶tÂ±Nõ ÷RNm á±¿h d±¿ýÃÃ Õ±lþ N 237 N

3002|kruddha hana vyadha tanre gali dite caya

3003|narada-prabhave mukhe gali nahi aya

3004|SYNONYMS

3005|kruddha hana-being very angry; vyadha-the hunter; tanre-him;

>| gali dite caya-wanted to abuse; narada-prabhave-by the

>|influence of Narada; mukhe-in the mouth; gali-abusive

>|language; nahi aya-did not come.

3006|TRANSLATION

3007|"When all the animals fled, the hunter wanted to chastise

>|Narada with abusive language, but due to Narada's presence,

>|he could not utter anything abusive.

3008|Madhya 24.238

3009|TEXT 238

3010|TEXT

3011|"Îá±u±¿Ûž, ›¶lþ±í-ón rÃ±¿nÂl' ÎLÁNd Õ±ý×ÃÃh± h

3012|ÎîÂ±÷± Îð¿m' Î÷±õþ hŽÂI ÷Ôá óh±ý×ÃÃh± N" 238 N

3013|"gosani, prayana-patha chadi' kene aila

3014|toma dekhi' mora laksya mrga palaila"

3015|SYNONYMS

3016|gosani-O great saintly person; prayana-patha chadi'-leaving

>|aside the general path; kene-why; aila-have you come; toma

>|dekhi'-seeing you; mora laksya-my targets; mrga-the animals;

>| palaila-fled.

3017|TRANSLATION

3018|"The hunter addressed Narada Muni: 'O gosvami! O great

>|saintly person! Why have you left the general path through

>|the forest to come to me? Simply by seeing you, all the

>|animals I was hunting have now fled.'

3019|Madhya 24.239

3020|TEXT 239

3021|TEXT

3022|d±õþðÃ LÁNýÃÃ,–"ón tRÂ¿h' Õ±ý×ÃÃh±† óR¿rNîÂ h

3023|÷Nd ÛLÁ uSúlþ ýÃÃlþ, îÂ±ýÃÃ± mG±ý×ÃÃNîÂ N 239 N

3024|narada kahe,-"patha bhuli' ailana puchite

3025|mane eka samsaya haya, taha khandaite

3026|SYNONYMS

3027|narada kahe-Narada Muni replied; patha bhuli'-leaving the

>|general path; ailana-I have come; puchite-to inquire from

>|you; mane-in my mind; eka-one; samsaya haya-there is a

>|doubt; taha-that; khandaite-to cause to break.

3028|TRANSLATION

3029|"Narada Muni replied, 'Leaving the path, I have come to you

>|to settle a doubt that is in my mind.

3030|Madhya 24.240

3031|TEXT 240

3032|TEXT

3033|ÂóNn Îl úÓLÁõþ-÷Ôá, æÃ±¿d ÎîÂ±÷±õþ ýÃÃlþ h"

3034|õI±s LÁNýÃÃ,–"Îlý×ÃÃ LÁýÃÃ, Îuý×ÃÃ îÂ' ¿d(lþ" N 240 N

3035|pathe ye sukara-mrga, jani tomara haya"

3036|vyadha kahe,-"yei kaha, sei ta' niscaya"

3037|SYNONYMS

3038|pathe-on the path; ye-those; sukara-mrga-boars and other

>|animals; jani-I can understand; tomara haya-all belong to

>|you; vyadha kahe-the hunter replied; yei kaha-whatever you

>|are saying; sei ta' niscaya-it is a fact.

3039|TRANSLATION

3040|"'I was wondering whether all the boars and other animals

>|that are half-killed belong to you

>|.'

3041|"The hunter replied, 'Yes, what you are saying is so.'

3042|Madhya 24.241

3043|TEXT 241

3044|TEXT

3045|d±õþðÃ LÁNýÃÃ,–"l¿ðÃ æÃNNõ ÷±õþ' îRÂ¿÷ õ±í h

3046|ÕnS-÷±õþ± LÁõþ ÎLÁNd, d± hÝ óõþ±í·" 241 N

3047|narada kahe,-"yadi jive mara' tumi bana

3048|ardha-mara kara kene, na lao parana?"

3049|SYNONYMS

3050|narada kahe-Narada Muni said; yadi-if; jive-in the animals;

>|mara'-pierce; tumi-you; bana-your arrows; ardha-mara kara-

>|you half-kill; kene-why; na lao parana-don't you take their

>|lives completely.

3051|TRANSLATION

3052|"Narada Muni then inquired, 'Why did you not kill the

>|animals completely? Why did you half-kill them by piercing

>|their bodies with arrows?'

3053|Madhya 24.242

3054|TEXT 242

3055|TEXT

3056|õI±s LÁNýÃÃ,–"qd, Îá±u±¿Ûž, '÷Ôá±¿õþ' Î÷±õþ d±÷ h

3057|¿óîÂ±õþ ¿úŽÂ±NîÂ Õ±¿÷ LÁ¿õþ UNrÃ LÁ±÷ N 242 N

3058|vyadha kahe,-"suna, gosani, 'mrgari' mora nama

3059|pitara siksate ami kari aiche kama

3060|SYNONYMS

3061|vyadha kahe-the hunter replied; suna-please hear; gosani-O

>|great saintly person; mrga-ari-the enemy of the animals;

>|mora nama-my name; pitara siksate-by the teaching of my

>|father; ami-I; kari-do; aiche kama-such acts.

3062|TRANSLATION

3063|"The hunter replied, 'My dear saintly person, my name is

>|Mrgari, enemy of animals. My father taught me to kill them

>|in that way.

3064|Madhya 24.243

3065|TEXT 243

3066|TEXT

3067|ÕsS-÷±õþ± æÃNõ l¿ðÃ snÂlAôÂnÂl LÁNõþ h

3068|îÂNõ îÂ' Õ±dµ Î÷±õþ õ±nÂlNlþ Õ(tm)LNõþ N" 243 N

3069|ardha-mara jiva yadi dhad-phada kare

3070|tabe ta' ananda mora badaye antare"

3071|SYNONYMS

3072|ardha-mara jiva-half-killed living beings; yadi-if; dhad-

>|phada kare-twist and turn because of suffering; tabe-then;

>|ta'-certainly; ananda-pleasure; mora-my; badaye antare-

>|increases within.

3073|TRANSLATION

3074|"'When I see half-killed animals suffer, I feel great

>|pleasure.'

3075|Madhya 24.244

3076|TEXT 244

3077|TEXT

3078|d±õþðÃ LÁNýÃÃ,–'ÛLÁõd ÷±¿á ÎîÂ±÷±õþ ¦š±Nd' h

3079|õI±s LÁNýÃÃ,–"÷Ôá±¿ðÃ hýÃÃ, Îlý×ÃÃ ÎîÂ±÷±õþ ÷Nd N 244 N

3080|narada kahe,-'eka-vastu magi tomara sthane'

3081|vyadha kahe,-"mrgadi laha, yei tomara mane

3082|SYNONYMS

3083|narada kahe-Narada Muni said; eka-vastu magi-I wish to beg

>|one thing; tomara sthane-from you; vyadha kahe-the hunter

>|replied; mrga-adi laha-take some of the hunted animals; yei

>|tomara mane-whatever you like.

3084|TRANSLATION

3085|"Narada Muni then told the hunter, 'I have one thing to beg

>|of you.'

3086|"The hunter replied, 'You may take whatever animals or

>|anything else you would like.

3087|Madhya 24.245

3088|TEXT 245

3089|TEXT

3090|÷ÔárÃ±h aÂ±ýÃÃ l¿ðÃ, Õ±ý×ÃÃu Î÷±õþ âNõþ h

3091|Îlý×ÃÃ aÂ±ýÃÃ îÂ±ýÃ± ¿ðÃõ ÷ÔáõI±âr±¥¤Nõþ N" 245 N

3092|mrga-chala caha yadi, aisa mora ghare

3093|yei caha taha diba mrga-vyaghrambare"

3094|SYNONYMS

3095|mrga-chala-deerskin; caha yadi-if you want; aisa mora ghare-

>|come to my place; yei caha-whatever you want; taha-that;

>|diba-I shall give; mrga-vyaghra-ambare-whether a deerskin

>|or a tiger skin.

3096|TRANSLATION

3097|"'I have many skins , if you would like them. I shall give

>|you either a deerskin or a tiger skin.'

3098|Madhya 24.246

3099|TEXT 246

3100|TEXT

3101|d±õþðÃ LÁNýÃÃ,–"ý×ÃÃýÃÃ± Õ±¿÷ ¿LÁrRÃ d±¿ýÃÃ aÂ±¿ýÃÃ h

3102|Õ±õþ ÛLÁð±d Õ±¿÷ ÷±¿á ÎîÂ±÷±-êÂ±¿Ûž N 246 N

3103|narada kahe,-"iha ami kichu nahi cahi

3104|ara eka-dana ami magi toma-thani

3105|SYNONYMS

3106|narada kahe-Narada Muni said; iha-this; ami kichu nahi cahi-

>|I don't want any; ara-another; eka-dana-one charity; ami-I;

>|magi-beg; toma-thani-from you.

3107|TRANSLATION

3108|"Narada Muni said, 'I do not want any of the skins. I am

>|asking only one thing from you in charity.

3109|Madhya 24.247

3110|TEXT 247

3111|TEXT

3112|LÁ±¿h ÆýÃÃNîÂ îRÂ¿÷ Îlý×ÃÃ ÷Ôá±¿ðÃ ÷±¿õþõ± h

3113|›¶nN÷ý×ÃÃ ÷±¿õþõ±, ÕsS-÷±õþ± d± LÁ¿õþõ± N" 247 N

3114|kali haite tumi yei mrgadi mariba

3115|prathamei mariba, ardha-mara na kariba"

3116|SYNONYMS

3117|kali haite-from tomorrow; tumi-you; yei-whatever; mrga-adi-

>|animals; mariba-you will kill; prathamei mariba-kill them

>|in the beginning; ardha-mara-half-killing; na kariba-do not

>|do.

3118|TRANSLATION

3119|"'I beg you that from this day on you will kill animals

>|completely and not leave them half-dead.'

3120|Madhya 24.248

3121|TEXT 248

3122|TEXT

3123|õI±s LÁNýÃÃ,–"¿LÁõ± ðÃ±d ÷±¿áh± Õ±÷±Nõþ h

3124|ÕsS ÷±¿õþNh ¿LÁõ± ýÃÃlþ, îÂ±ýÃÃ± LÁýÃÃ Î÷±Nõþ N" 248 N

3125|vyadha kahe,-"kiba dana magila amare

3126|ardha marile kiba haya, taha kaha more"

3127|SYNONYMS

3128|vyadha kahe-the hunter replied; kiba dana-what kind of

>|charity; magila amare-have you begged from me; ardha marile-

>|in half-killing; kiba-what; haya-there is; taha-that; kaha

>|more-kindly explain to me.

3129|TRANSLATION

3130|"The hunter replied, 'My dear sir, what are you asking of

>|me? What is wrong with the animals' lying there half-killed?

>| Will you please explain this to me?'

3131|Madhya 24.249

3132|TEXT 249

3133|TEXT

3134|d±õþðÃ LÁNýÃÃ,–"ÕsS ÷±¿õþNh æÃNõ ó±lþ õIn± h

3135|æÃNNõ ðRÃÐm ¿ðÃNîÂrÃ, ÎîÂ±÷±õþ ýÃÃý×ÃÃNõ UNrÃ Õõ¦š± N 249 N

3136|narada kahe,-"ardha marile jiva paya vyatha

3137|jive duhkha ditecha, tomara ha-ibe aiche avastha

3138|SYNONYMS

3139|narada kahe-Narada Muni replied; ardha marile-by half-

>|killing the animals; jiva paya vyatha-the living beings

>|suffer too much pain; jive duhkha ditecha-you are giving

>|troubles to the living beings; tomara-your; ha-ibe-there

>|will be; aiche avastha-the same suffering in retaliation.

3140|TRANSLATION

3141|"Narada Muni replied, 'If you leave the animals half-dead,

>|you are purposefully giving them pain. Therefore you will

>|have to suffer in retaliation.'

3142|PURPORT

3143|This is an authoritative statement given by the greatest

>|authority, Narada Muni. If one gives another living entity

>|unnecessary pain, one will certainly be punished by the

>|laws of nature with a similar pain. Although the hunter

>|Mrgari was uncivilized, he still had to suffer the results

>|of his sinful activities. However, if a civilized man kills

>|animals regularly in a slaughterhouse to maintain his so-

>|called civilization, using scientific methods and machines

>|to kill animals, one cannot even estimate the suffering

>|awaiting him. So-called civilized people consider

>|themselves very advanced in education, but they do not know

>|about the stringent laws of nature. According to nature's

>|law, it is a life for a life. We can hardly imagine the

>|sufferings of one who maintains a slaughterhouse. He

>|endures suffering not only in this life, but in his next

>|life also. It is said that a hunter, murderer or killer is

>|advised not to live and not to die. If he lives, he

>|accumulates even more sins, which bring about more

>|suffering in a future life. He is advised not to die

>|because his dying means that he immediately begins to

>|endure more suffering. Therefore he is advised not to live

>|and not to die.

3144|As followers of the Vedic principles, we accept the

>|statements of Narada Muni in this regard. It is our duty to

>|see that no one suffers due to sinful activities. Foolish

>|rascals are described in the Bhagavad-gita as mayayapahrta-

>|jnanah [Bg. 7.15], which indicates that although they are

>|superficially educated, maya has taken their real knowledge

>|away. Such people are presently leading human society. In

>|Srimad-Bhagavatam they are described as andha

>|yathandhair upaniyamanah [SB 7.5.31]. These rascals are

>|themselves blind, and yet they are leading others who are

>|blind. When people follow such leaders, they suffer

>|unlimited pains in the future. Despite so-called

>|advancement, all this is happening. Who is safe? Who is

>|happy? Who is without anxiety?

3145|Madhya 24.250

3146|TEXT 250

3147|TEXT

3148|õI±s îRÂ¿÷, æÃNõ ÷±õþ-'ÕŠ' Õóõþ±s ÎîÂ±÷±õþ h

3149|LÁðÃnSd± ¿ðÃlþ± ÷±õþ'-Û ó±ó 'Õó±õþ' N 250 N

3150|vyadha tumi, jiva mara-'alpa' aparadha tomara

3151|kadarthana diya mara'-e papa 'apara'

3152|SYNONYMS

3153|vyadha tumi-you are a hunter; jiva mara-your occupation is

>|to kill animals; alpa-slight; aparadha-offense; tomara-your;

>| kadarthana diya-unnecessarily giving them pain; mara'-when

>|you kill; e papa apara-this sinful activity is unlimited.

3154|TRANSLATION

3155|"Narada Muni continued, 'My dear hunter, your business is

>|killing animals. That is a slight offense on your part. But

>|when you consciously give them unnecessary pain by leaving

>|them half-dead, you incur very great sins.'

3156|PURPORT

3157|This is another good instruction to animal-killers. There

>|are always animal -killers and animal -eaters in human

>|society because less civilized people are accustomed to

>|eating meat. In the Vedic civilization, meat-eaters are

>|advised to kill an animal for the goddess Kali or a similar

>|demigod. This is in order not to give the animal

>|unnecessary pain, as slaughterhouses do. In the bali-

>|dana sacrifice to a demigod, it is recommended to cut the

>|throat of an animal with one slice. This should be done on

>|a dark-moon night, and the painful noises expressed by the

>|animal at the time of being slaughtered are not to be heard

>|by anyone. There are also many other restrictions.

>|Slaughter is allowed only once a month, and the killer

>|of the animal has to suffer similar pains in his next life.

>|At the present moment, so-called civilized men do not

>|sacrifice animals to a deity in a religious or ritualistic

>|way. They openly kill animals daily by the thousands for no

>|purpose other than the satisfaction of the tongue. Because

>|of this the entire world is suffering in so many ways.

>|Politicians are unnecessarily declaring war, and

>|according to the stringent laws of material nature,

>|massacres are taking place between nations.

3158|prakrteh kriyamanani gunaih karmani sarvasah

3159|ahankara -vimudhatma kartaham iti manyate

3160|"The bewildered spirit soul, under the influence of

>|the three modes of material nature, thinks himself to be

>|the doer of activities that are in actuality carried out by

>|nature." (Bg. 3.27) The laws of prakrti (nature) are very

>|stringent. No one should think that he has the freedom to

>|kill animals and not suffer the consequences. One cannot be

>|safe by doing this. Narada Muni herein says that animal-

>|killing is offensive, especially when animals are given

>|unnecessary pain. Meat-eaters and animal-killers are

>|advised not to purchase meat from the slaughterhouse. They

>|can worship Kali once a month, kill some unimportant animal

>|and eat it. Even by following this method, one is still an

>|offender.

3161|Madhya 24.251

3162|TEXT 251

3163|TEXT

3164|LÁðÃ¿nSlþ± îRÂ¿÷ lîÂ ÷±¿õþh± æÃNNõNõþ h

3165|îÂ±õþ± ÆîÂNrÃ ÎîÂ±÷± ÷±¿õþNõ æÃij-æÃij±(tm)LNõþ N" 251 N

3166|kadarthiya tumi yata marila jivere

3167|tara taiche toma maribe janma-janmantare"

3168|SYNONYMS

3169|kadarthiya-giving unnecessary pains; tumi-you; yata-all;

>|marila-killed; jivere-the living entities; tara-all of them;

>| taiche-similarly; toma-you; maribe-will kill; janma-janma-

>|antare-life after life.

3170|TRANSLATION

3171|"Narada Muni continued, 'All the animals that you have

>|killed and given unnecessary pain will kill you one after

>|the other in your next life and in life after life.'

3172|PURPORT

3173|This is another authoritative statement made by the great

>|sage Narada. Those who kill animals and give them

>|unnecessary pain-as people do in slaughterhouses-will be

>|killed in a similar way in the next life and in many lives

>|to come. One can never be excused from such an offense. If

>|one kills many thousands of animals in a professional way

>|so that other people can purchase the meat to eat, one must

>|be ready to be killed in a similar way in his next life and

>|in life after life. There are many rascals who violate

>|their own religious principles. According to Judeo-

>|Christian scriptures, it is clearly said, "Thou shalt not

>|kill." Nonetheless, giving all kinds of excuses, even the

>|heads of religions indulge in killing animals while trying

>|to pass as saintly persons. This mockery and hypocrisy in

>|human society bring about unlimited calamities; therefore

>|occasionally there are great wars. Masses of such people go

>|out onto battlefields and kill themselves. Presently they

>|have discovered the atomic bomb, which is simply waiting

>|to be used for wholesale destruction. If people want to be

>|saved from the killing business life after life, they must

>|take to Krsna consciousness and cease sinful activity. The

>|International Society for Krishna Consciousness recommends

>|that everyone abandon meat-eating, illicit sex,

>|intoxication and gambling. When one gives up these sinful

>|activities, he can understand Krsna and take to this Krsna

>|consciousness movement. We therefore request everyone to

>|abandon sinful activity and chant the Hare Krsna mantra. In

>|this way people can save themselves from repeated birth and

>|death and from being killed like the animals in

>|slaughterhouses.

3174|Madhya 24.252

3175|TEXT 252

3176|TEXT

3177|d±õþðÃ-uN/ õI±Nsõþ ÷d óõþui§ ýÃÃý×ÃÃh h

3178|îDÂ±õþ õ±LÁI q¿d' ÷Nd tÂlþ nÂ×ó¿æÃh N 252 N

3179|narada-sange vyadhera mana parasanna ha-ila

3180|tanra vakya suni' mane bhaya upajila

3181|SYNONYMS

3182|narada-sange-in the association of the great sage Narada

>|Muni; vyadhera-of the hunter; mana-the mind; parasanna ha-

>|ila-became cleansed and satisfied; tanra-his; vakya-words;

>|suni'-hearing; mane-in the mind; bhaya upajila-some fear

>|arose.

3183|TRANSLATION

3184|"In this way, through the association of the great sage

>|Narada Muni, the hunter was a little convinced of his

>|sinful activity. He therefore became somewhat afraid due to

>|his offenses.

3185|PURPORT

3186|This is the effect of associating with a pure devotee. Our

>|preachers who are preaching Krsna consciousness all over

>|the world should follow in the footsteps of Narada Muni and

>|become purified by following the four principles and

>|chanting the Hare Krsna maha-mantra. This will make them

>|fit to become Vaisnavas. Then, when they speak to sinful

>|people about the teachings of this Krsna consciousness

>|movement, people will be affected and take the instructions.

>| We receive instructions in devotional service through the

>|disciplic succession. Narada Muni is our original guru

>|because he is the spiritual master of Vyasadeva. Vyasadeva

>|is the spiritual master of our disciplic succession;

>|therefore we should follow in the footsteps of Narada Muni

>|and become pure Vaisnavas. A pure Vaisnava is one who has

>|no ulterior motive. He has totally dedicated himself to the

>|service of the Lord. He does not have material desires, and

>|he is not interested in so-called learning and

>|philanthropic work. The so-called learned scholars and

>|philanthropists are actually karmis and jnanis, and some

>|are actually misers engaged in sinful activity. All are

>|condemned because they are not devotees of Lord Krsna.

3187|Everyone has a chance to become purified by associating

>|with this Krsna consciousness movement and strictly

>|following the rules and regulations. By chanting the Hare

>|Krsna maha-mantra, one can become free from all

>|contamination, especially contamination brought about by

>|the killing of animals. Lord Krsna Himself requests:

3188|sarva-dharman parityajya mam ekam saranam vraja

3189|aham tvam sarva-papebhyo moksayisyami ma sucah

3190|"Abandon all varieties of religion and just

>|surrender unto Me. I shall deliver you from all sinful

>|reactions. Do not fear." (Bg. 18.66)

3191|We should take this instruction from Krsna and

>|follow in the footsteps of Narada Muni in the disciplic

>|succession. If we simply surrender unto Krsna's lotus feet

>|and take this Krsna consciousness movement seriously, we

>|can be freed from the karma incurred by sin. If we are

>|intelligent enough, we shall engage in the loving service

>|of the Lord. Then our lives will be successful, and we

>|shall not have to suffer like the hunter life after life.

>|By killing animals, not only will we be bereft of the human

>|form but we will have to take an animal form and somehow or

>|other be killed by the same type of animal we have killed.

>|This is the law of nature. The Sanskrit word mamsa means "

>|meat." It is said, mam sah khadati iti mamsah. That is, "I

>|am now eating the flesh of an animal who will some day in

>|the future be eating my flesh."

3192|Madhya 24.253

3193|TEXT 253

3194|TEXT

3195|õI±s LÁNýÃÃ,–"õ±hI ÆýÃÃNîÂ Ûý×ÃÃ Õ±÷±õþ LÁ÷S h

3196|ÎLÁ÷Nd îÂ¿õþ÷R ÷R¿Ûž ó±÷õþ Õs÷· 253 N

3197|vyadha kahe,-"balya haite ei amara karma

3198|kemane tarimu muni pamara adhama?

3199|SYNONYMS

3200|vyadha kahe-the hunter said; balya haite-from the very

>|beginning of my childhood; ei amara karma-I have been

>|taught this business (half-killing animals); kemane-how;

>|tarimu-shall become free from these sinful activities; muni-

>|I; pamara adhama-sinful and misled.

3201|TRANSLATION

3202|"The hunter then admitted that he was convinced of his

>|sinful activity, and he said, 'I have been taught this

>|business from my very childhood. Now I am wondering how I

>|can become freed from these unlimited volumes of sinful

>|activity.'

3203|PURPORT

3204|This kind of admission is very beneficial as long as one

>|does not again commit sin. Cheating and hypocrisy are not

>|tolerated by higher authorities. If one understands what

>|sin is, he should give it up with sincerity and regret and

>|surrender unto the lotus feet of the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead through His agent, the pure devotee. In this way,

>|one can be freed from the reactions of sin and make

>|progress in devotional service. However, if one continues

>|committing sins after making some atonement, he will not be

>|saved. In the sastras, such atonement is compared to an

>|elephant's bathing. An elephant takes a very good bath and

>|cleanses its body very nicely, but as soon as it comes out

>|of the water, it picks up some dust on the shore and throws

>|it all over its body. Atonement may be carried out very

>|nicely, but it will not help a person if he continues

>|committing sins. Therefore the hunter first admitted his

>|sinful activity before the saintly person Narada and then

>|asked how he could be saved.

3205|Madhya 24.254

3206|TEXT 254

3207|TEXT

3208|Ûý×ÃÃ ó±ó l±lþ Î÷±õþ, ÎLÁ÷d nÂ×ó±Nlþ*

3209|¿d(tm)¦±õþ LÁõþýÃÃ Î÷±Nõþ, óNnÂlD± ÎîÂ±÷±õþ ó±Nlþ N" 254 N

3210|ei papa yaya mora, kemana upaye?

3211|nistara karaha more, padon tomara paye"

3212|SYNONYMS

3213|ei-this; papa yaya mora-sinful reactions of my life can be

>|washed off; kemana upaye-by what means; nistara karaha more-

>|kindly deliver me; padon-I fall down; tomara paye-at your

>|lotus feet.

3214|TRANSLATION

3215|"The hunter continued, 'My dear sir, please tell me how I

>|can be relieved from the reactions of my sinful life. Now I

>|fully surrender unto you and fall down at your lotus feet.

>|Please deliver me from sinful reactions.'

3216|PURPORT

3217|By the grace of Narada Muni, the hunter came to his good

>|senses and immediately surrendered unto the saint's lotus

>|feet. This is the process. By associating with a saintly

>|person, one is able to understand the reactions of his

>|sinful life. When one voluntarily surrenders to a saintly

>|person who is a representative of Krsna and follows his

>|instructions, one can become freed from sinful reactions.

>|Krsna demands the surrender of a sinful man, and Krsna's

>|representative gives the same instructions. The

>|representative of Krsna never tells his disciple, "

>|Surrender unto me." Rather he says, "Surrender unto Krsna."

>|If the disciple accepts this principle and surrenders

>|himself through the representative of Krsna, his life is

>|saved.

3218|Madhya 24.255

3219|TEXT 255

3220|TEXT

3221|d±õþðÃ LÁNýÃÃ,–'l¿ðÃ sõþ Õ±÷±õþ õaÂd h

3222|îÂNõ Îu LÁ¿õþNîÂ ó±¿õþ ÎîÂ±÷±õþ Î÷±aÂd N' 255 N

3223|narada kahe,-'yadi dhara amara vacana

3224|tabe se karite pari tomara mocana'

3225|SYNONYMS

3226|narada kahe-Narada Muni replied; yadi dhara-if you accept;

>|amara vacana-my instruction; tabe-then; se-this; karite

>|pari-I can do; tomara-your; mocana-liberation.

3227|TRANSLATION

3228|"Narada Muni assured the hunter, 'If you listen to my

>|instructions, I shall find the way you can be liberated.'

3229|PURPORT

3230|Gaurangera bhakta-gane jane jane sakti dhare. The purport

>|of this song is that the devotees of Lord Sri Caitanya

>|Mahaprabhu are very powerful, and each and every one of

>|them can deliver the whole world. What, then, to speak of

>|Narada Muni? If one follows the instructions of Narada Muni,

>| one can be delivered from any number of sinful reactions.

>|This is the process. One must follow the instructions of a

>|spiritual master; then one will certainly be delivered from

>|all sinful reactions. This is the secret of success. Yasya

>|deve para bhaktir yatha deve tatha gurau [SU 6.23]. If one

>|has unflinching faith in Krsna and the spiritual master,

>|the result is tasyaite kathita hy arthah prakasante

>|mahatmanah: all the conclusions of the revealed scriptures

>|will be open to such a person. A pure devotee of Krsna can

>|make the same demands that Narada Muni is making. He says, "

>|If you follow my instructions, I shall take responsibility

>|for your liberation." A pure devotee like Narada can give

>|assurance to any sinful man because by the grace of the

>|Lord such a devotee is empowered to deliver any sinful

>|person if that person follows the principles set forth.

3231|Madhya 24.256

3232|TEXT 256

3233|TEXT

3234|õI±s LÁNýÃÃ,–'Îlý×ÃÃ LÁýÃÃ, Îuý×ÃÃ îÂ' LÁ¿õþõ' h

3235|d±õþðÃ LÁNýÃÃ,–'sdRLÁ tÂ±/, îÂNõ Îu LÁ¿ýÃÃõ' N 256 N

3236|vyadha kahe,-'yei kaha, sei ta' kariba'

3237|narada kahe,-'dhanuka bhanga, tabe se kahiba'

3238|SYNONYMS

3239|vyadha kahe-the hunter replied; yei kaha-whatever you say;

>|sei ta' kariba-that I shall do; narada kahe-Narada Muni

>|replied; dhanuka bhanga-break your bow; tabe-then; se

>|kahiba-I shall speak to you.

3240|TRANSLATION

3241|"The hunter then said, 'My dear sir, whatever you say I

>|shall do.'

3242|"Narada immediately ordered him, 'First of all, break your

>|bow. Then I shall tell you what is to be done.'

3243|PURPORT

3244|This is the process of initiation. The disciple must vow

>|that he will no longer commit sinful activity-namely

>|illicit sex, meat-eating, gambling and intoxication. He

>|promises to execute the order of the spiritual master. Then

>|the spiritual master takes care of him and elevates him to

>|spiritual emancipation.

3245|Madhya 24.257

3246|TEXT 257

3247|TEXT

3248|õI±s LÁNýÃÃ,–'sdRLÁ tÂ±¿/Nh õ¿îSÂõ ÎLÁ÷Nd·'

3249|d±õþðÃ LÁNýÃÃ,–'Õ±¿÷ Õi§ ¿ðÃõ ›¶¿îÂ¿ðÃNd N' 257 N

3250|vyadha kahe,-'dhanuka bhangile vartiba kemane?'

3251|narada kahe,-'ami anna diba prati-dine'

3252|SYNONYMS

3253|vyadha kahe-the hunter replied; dhanuka bhangile-if I break

>|my bow; vartiba kemane-what will be the source of my

>|maintenance; narada kahe-Narada Muni replied; ami-I; anna-

>|food; diba-shall supply; prati-dine-every day.

3254|TRANSLATION

3255|"The hunter replied, 'If I break my bow, how shall I

>|maintain myself?'

3256|"Narada Muni replied, 'Do not worry. I shall supply all

>|your food every day.'

3257|PURPORT

3258|The source of our income is not actually the source of our

>|maintenance. Every living being-from the great Brahma down

>|to an insignificant ant-is being maintained by the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead. Eko bahunam yo vidadhati kaman. The

>|one Supreme Being, Krsna, maintains everyone. Our so-called

>|source of income is our own choice only. If I wish to be a

>|hunter, it will appear that hunting is the source of my

>|maintenance. If I become a brahmana and completely depend

>|on Krsna, I do not conduct a business, but nonetheless my

>|maintenance is supplied by Krsna. The hunter was disturbed

>|about breaking his bow because he was worried about his

>|income. Narada Muni assured the hunter because he knew that

>|the hunter was not being maintained by the bow but by Krsna.

>| Being the agent of Krsna, Narada Muni knew very well that

>|the hunter would not suffer by breaking the bow. There was

>|no doubt that Krsna would supply him food.

3259|Madhya 24.258

3260|TEXT 258

3261|TEXT

3262|sdRLÁ tÂ±¿/' õI±s îDÂ±õþ aÂõþNí ó¿nÂlh h

3263|îÂ±Nõþ nÂ×êÂ±Ûž± d±õþðÃ nÂ×óNðÃú ÆLÁh N 258 N

3264|dhanuka bhangi' vyadha tanra carane padila

3265|tare uthana narada upadesa kaila

3266|SYNONYMS

3267|dhanuka bhangi'-breaking the bow; vyadha-the hunter; tanra-

>|his (Narada Muni's); carane-at the lotus feet; padila-

>|surrendered; tare-him; uthana-raising; narada-the great

>|saint Narada Muni; upadesa kaila-gave instruction.

3268|TRANSLATION

3269|"Being thus assured by the great sage Narada Muni, the

>|hunter broke his bow, immediately fell down at the saint's

>|lotus feet and fully surrendered. After this, Narada Muni

>|raised him with his hand and gave him instructions for

>|spiritual advancement.

3270|PURPORT

3271|This is the process of initiation. The disciple must

>|surrender to the spiritual master, the representative of

>|Krsna. The spiritual master, being in the disciplic

>|succession stemming from Narada Muni, is in the same

>|category with Narada Muni. A person can be relieved from

>|his sinful activity if he surrenders to the lotus feet of a

>|person who actually represents Narada Muni. Narada Muni

>|gave instructions to the hunter after the hunter

>|surrendered.

3272|Madhya 24.259

3273|TEXT 259

3274|TEXT

3275|"âNõþ ¿álþ± õr±pÁNí ÎðÃýÃÃ' lîÂ Õ±NrÃ sd h

3276|ÛLÁ ÛLÁ Âõ¦a ó¿õþ' õ±¿ýÃÃõþ ýÃÃÝ ðRÃý×ÃÃæÃd N 259 N

3277|"ghare giya brahmane deha' yata ache dhana

3278|eka eka vastra pari' bahira hao dui-jana

3279|SYNONYMS

3280|ghare giya-returning home; brahmane-to the brahmanas, the

>|most intelligent men in spiritual understanding; deha'-give;

>| yata-whatever; ache-you have; dhana-riches; eka eka-each

>|of you; vastra pari'-just one cloth; bahira hao-leave home;

>|dui-jana-both of you.

3281|TRANSLATION

3282|"Narada Muni then advised the hunter, 'Return home and

>|distribute whatever riches you have to the pure brahmanas

>|who know the Absolute Truth. After you have

>|distributed all your riches to the brahmanas, you and

>|your wife should leave home, each of you taking only one

>|cloth to wear.'

3283|PURPORT

3284|This is the process of renunciation at the stage of

>|vanaprastha. After enjoying householder life for some time,

>|the husband and wife must leave home and distribute their

>|riches to brahmanas and Vaisnavas. One can keep his wife as

>|an assistant in the vanaprastha stage. The idea is that the

>|wife will assist the husband in spiritual advancement.

>|Therefore Narada Muni advised the hunter to adopt the

>|vanaprastha stage and leave home. It is not that a grhastha

>|should live at home until he dies. Vanaprastha is

>|preliminary to sannyasa. In the Krsna consciousness

>|movement there are many young couples engaged in the Lord's

>|service. Eventually they are supposed to take vanaprastha,

>|and after the vanaprastha stage the husband may take

>|sannyasa in order to preach. The wife may then remain alone

>|and serve the Deity or engage in other activities within

>|the Krsna consciousness movement.

3285|Madhya 24.260

3286|TEXT 260

3287|TEXT

3288|dðÃN-îÂNNõþ ÛLÁm±¿d LRÁiÂNõþ LÁ¿õþlþ± h

3289|îÂ±õþ Õ±Ná ÛLÁ¿ó¿G îRÂhuN Îõþ±¿ólþ± N 260 N

3290|nadi-tire eka-khani kutira kariya

3291|tara age eka-pindi tulasi ropiya

3292|SYNONYMS

3293|nadi-tire-on the bank of the river; eka-khani-just one;

>|kutira-a cottage; kariya-constructing; tara age-just in

>|front of the cottage; eka-pindi-one raised platform; tulasi-

>|a tulasi plant; ropiya-growing.

3294|TRANSLATION

3295|"Narada Muni continued, 'Leave your home and go to the

>|river. There you should construct a small cottage, and in

>|front of the cottage you should grow a tulasi plant on a

>|raised platform.

3296|Madhya 24.261

3297|TEXT 261

3298|TEXT

3299|îRÂhuN-ó¿õþS÷± LÁõþ, îRÂhuN-Îuõd h

3300|¿dõþ(tm)Lõþ LÔÁøžd±÷ LÁ¿õþýÃÃ LÁNîSÂd N 261 N

3301|tulasi-parikrama kara, tulasi-sevana

3302|nirantara krsna-nama kariha kirtana

3303|SYNONYMS

3304|tulasi-parikrama kara-circumambulate the tulasi plant;

>|tulasi-sevana-just supply water to the root of Tulasi-devi;

>|nirantara-continuously; krsna-nama-the holy name of Krsna;

>|kariha-just perform; kirtana-chanting.

3305|TRANSLATION

3306|"'After planting the tulasi tree before your house, you

>|should daily circumambulate that tulasi plant, serve her by

>|giving her water and other things, and continuously chant

>|the Hare Krsna maha-mantra.'

3307|PURPORT

3308|This is the beginning of spiritual life. After leaving

>|householder life, one may go to a holy place, such as the

>|bank of the Ganges or Yamuna, and erect a small cottage. A

>|small cottage can be constructed without any expenditure.

>|Four logs serving as pillars can be secured by any man from

>|the forest. The roof can be covered with leaves, and one

>|can cleanse the inside. Thus one can live very peacefully.

>|In any condition, any man can live in a small cottage,

>|plant a tulasi tree, water it in the morning, offer it

>|prayers, and continuously chant the Hare Krsna maha-mantra.

>|Thus one can make vigorous spiritual advancement. This is

>|not at all difficult. One simply has to follow the

>|instructions of the spiritual master strictly. Then

>|everything will be successful in due course of time. As far

>|as eating is concerned, there is no problem. If Krsna, the

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead, supplies everyone with

>|eatables, why should He not supply His devotee? Sometimes a

>|devotee will not even bother to construct a cottage. He

>|will simply go to live in a mountain cave. One may live in

>|a cave, in a cottage beside a river, in a palace or in a

>|big city like New York or London. In any case, a devotee

>|can follow the instructions of his spiritual master and

>|engage in devotional service by watering the tulasi plant

>|and chanting the Hare Krsna mantra. Taking the advice of

>|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu and our spiritual master,

>|Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Gosvami Maharaja, one can go to

>|any part of the world and instruct people to become

>|devotees of the Lord by following the regulative principles,

>| worshiping the tulasi plant and continuously chanting the

>|Hare Krsna maha-mantra.

3309|Madhya 24.262

3310|TEXT 262

3311|TEXT

3312|Õ±¿÷ ÎîÂ±÷±lþ õU Õi§ ó±êÂ±ý×ÃÃ÷R ¿ðÃNd h

3313|Îuý×ÃÃ Õi§ hNõ, lîÂ m±Ý ðRÃý×ÃÃæÃNd N" 262 N

3314|ami tomaya bahu anna pathaimu dine

3315|sei anna labe, yata khao dui-jane"

3316|SYNONYMS

3317|ami-I; tomaya-for you; bahu-much; anna-food; pathaimu-shall

>|send; dine-every day; sei-that; anna-food; labe-you shall

>|take; yata-whatever; khao-you can eat; dui-jane-both of you.

3318|TRANSLATION

3319|"Narada Muni continued, 'Every day I shall send sufficient

>|food to you both . You can take as much food as

>|you want.'

3320|PURPORT

3321|When a person takes to Krsna consciousness, there is no

>|need to care for material necessities. Krsna says, yoga -

>|ksemam vahamy aham: [Bg. 9.22] "I personally carry all

>|necessities to My devotees." Why should one be anxious

>|about the necessities of life? The principle should be that

>|one should not want more than what is absolutely necessary.

>|Narada Muni advises the hunter to accept only what is

>|absolutely necessary for him and his wife. The devotee

>|should always be alert to consume only those things that he

>|absolutely requires and not create unnecessary needs.

3322|Madhya 24.263

3323|TEXT 263

3324|TEXT

3325|îÂNõ Îuý×ÃÃ ÷Ôá±¿ðÃ ¿îÂNd d±õþðÃ uR¦š ÆLÁh h

3326|uR¦š ýÃÃÛž± ÷Ôá±¿ðÃ ¿îÂNd s±Ûž± óh±ý×ÃÃh N 263 N

3327|tabe sei mrgadi tine narada sustha kaila

3328|sustha hana mrgadi tine dhana palaila

3329|SYNONYMS

3330|tabe-thereafter; sei-those; mrga-adi-animals, beginning

>|with the deer; tine-three; narada-the sage Narada; sustha

>|kaila-brought to their senses; sustha hana-coming to

>|consciousness; mrga-adi-the pierced animals; tine-three;

>|dhana palaila-very swiftly fled away from that place.

3331|TRANSLATION

3332|"The three animals that were half-killed were then brought

>|to their consciousness by the sage Narada. Indeed, the

>|animals got up and swiftly fled.

3333|Madhya 24.264

3334|TEXT 264

3335|TEXT

3336|ÎðÃ¿mlþ± õI±Nsõþ ÷Nd ÆýÃÃh aÂ÷RLÁ±õþ h

3337|âNõþ Îáh õI±s, &NLÁ LÁ¿õþ' d÷¦¨±õþ N 264 N

3338|dekhiya vyadhera mane haila camatkara

3339|ghare gela vyadha, guruke kari' namaskara

3340|SYNONYMS

3341|dekhiya-seeing; vyadhera-of the hunter; mane-in the mind;

>|haila-there was; camatkara-wonder; ghare-home; gela-went;

>|vyadha-the hunter; guruke-to the spiritual master; kari'

>|namaskara-offering obeisances.

3342|TRANSLATION

3343|"When the hunter saw the half-killed animals flee, he was

>|certainly struck with wonder. He then offered his

>|respectful obeisances to the sage Narada and returned home.

3344|Madhya 24.265

3345|TEXT 265

3346|TEXT

3347|ln±-¦š±Nd d±õþðÃ Îáh±, õI±s âNõþ Õ±ý×ÃÃh h

3348|d±õþNðÃõþ nÂ×óNðÃNú uLÁh LÁ¿õþh N 265 N

3349|yatha-sthane narada gela, vyadha ghare aila

3350|naradera upadese sakala karila

3351|SYNONYMS

3352|yatha-sthane-to the proper destination; narada-sage Narada;

>|gela-went; vyadha-the hunter; ghare aila-came back to his

>|house; naradera upadese-under the instruction of the sage

>|Narada; sakala karila-he executed everything.

3353|TRANSLATION

3354|"After all this, Narada Muni went to his destination. After

>|the hunter returned home, he exactly followed the

>|instructions of his spiritual master, Narada.

3355|PURPORT

3356|For spiritual advancement one must have a bona fide

>|spiritual master and follow his instructions in order to be

>|assured of advancement.

3357|Madhya 24.266

3358|TEXT 266

3359|TEXT

3360|¢¶±N÷ s‰¿d ÆýÃÃh, õI±s 'Æõøžõ' ýÃÃý×ÃÃh h

3361|¢¶±N÷õþ Îh±LÁ uõ Õi§ Õ±¿dNîÂ h±¿áh N 266 N

3362|grame dhvani haila,-vyadha 'vaisnava' ha-ila

3363|gramera loka saba anna anite lagila

3364|SYNONYMS

3365|grame-in the village; dhvani haila-there was news; vyadha-

>|the hunter; vaisnava ha-ila-has become a Vaisnava, a lover

>|and servitor of Lord Visnu; gramera loka-the villagers;

>|saba-all kinds of; anna-food; anite lagila-began to bring.

3366|TRANSLATION

3367|"The news that the hunter had become a Vaisnava spread all

>|over the village. Indeed, all the villagers brought alms

>|and presented them to the Vaisnava who had formerly been a

>|hunter.

3368|PURPORT

3369|It is the duty of the public to present a gift to a saintly

>|person, Vaisnava or brahmana when going to see him. Every

>|Vaisnava is dependent on Krsna, and Krsna is ready to

>|supply all of life's necessities, provided a Vaisnava

>|follows the principles set forth by the spiritual master.

>|There are certainly many householders in our Krsna

>|consciousness movement. They join the movement and live in

>|the society's centers, but if they take advantage of this

>|opportunity and do not work but live at the expense of the

>|movement, eating prasadam and simply sleeping, they place

>|themselves in a very dangerous position. It is therefore

>|advised that grhasthas should not live in the temple. They

>|must live outside the temple and maintain themselves. Of

>|course, if the grhasthas are fully engaged in the Lord's

>|service according to the directions of the authorities,

>|there is no harm in their living in a temple. In any case,

>|a temple should not be a place to eat and sleep. A temple

>|manager should be very careful about these things.

3370|Madhya 24.267

3371|TEXT 267

3372|TEXT

3373|ÛLÁ¿ðÃd Õi§ Õ±Nd ðÃú-Â¿õú æÃNd h

3374|¿ðÃNd îÂîÂ hlþ, lîÂ m±lþ ðRÃý×ÃÃ æÃNd N 267 N

3375|eka-dina anna ane dasa-bisa jane

3376|dine tata laya, yata khaya dui jane

3377|SYNONYMS

3378|eka-dina-in one day; anna-food; ane-brought; dasa-bisa jane-

>|enough for ten to twenty men; dine-in a day; tata laya-

>|would accept only as much; yata-as; khaya dui jane-the two

>|of them required to eat.

3379|TRANSLATION

3380|"In one day enough food was brought for ten or twenty

>|people, but the hunter and his wife would accept only as

>|much as they could eat.

3381|Madhya 24.268

3382|TEXT 268

3383|TEXT

3384|ÛLÁ¿ðÃd d±õþðÃ LÁNýÃÃ,–"qdýÃÃ, ÂóõSNîÂ h

3385|Õ±÷±õþ ÛLÁ ¿úø¸I Õ±NrÃ, aÂhýÃÃ ÎðÃ¿mNîÂ N" 268 N

3386|eka-dina narada kahe,-"sunaha, parvate

3387|amara eka sisya ache, calaha dekhite"

3388|SYNONYMS

3389|eka-dina-one day; narada kahe-Narada Muni said; sunaha-

>|please hear; parvate-my dear Parvata; amara-my; eka-one;

>|sisya-disciple; ache-there is; calaha dekhite-let us go see.

3390|TRANSLATION

3391|"One day, while speaking to his friend Parvata Muni, Narada

>|Muni requested him to go with him to see his disciple the

>|hunter.

3392|Madhya 24.269

3393|TEXT 269

3394|TEXT

3395|îÂNõ ðRÃý×ÃÃ HÂ¿ø¸ Õ±ý×ÃÃh± Îuý×ÃÃ õI±s-¦š±Nd h

3396|ðÓÃõþ ÆýÃÃNîÂ õI±s ó±ý×ÃÃh &õþ ðÃõþúNd N 269 N

3397|tabe dui rsi aila sei vyadha-sthane

3398|dura haite vyadha paila gurura darasane

3399|SYNONYMS

3400|tabe-thereafter; dui rsi-two saintly persons; aila-came;

>|sei vyadha-sthane-to the place of that hunter; dura haite-

>|from a distant place; vyadha-the hunter; paila-got; gurura

>|darasane-vision of his spiritual master.

3401|TRANSLATION

3402|"As the saintly sages approached the hunter's place,

>|the hunter could see them from a distance.

3403|Madhya 24.270

3404|TEXT 270

3405|TEXT

3406|Õ±N(tm)¦-õIN(tm)¦ s±Ûž± Õ±Nu, ón d±¿ýÃÃ ó±lþ h

3407|óNnõþ ¿óóN¿hLÁ± ý×ÃÃ¿îÂ-nÂ×¿îÂ sNõþ ó±lþ N 270 N

3408|aste-vyaste dhana ase, patha nahi paya

3409|pathera pipilika iti-uti dhare paya

3410|SYNONYMS

3411|aste-vyaste-with great alacrity; dhana-running; ase-came;

>|patha nahi paya-does not get the path; pathera-on the path;

>|pipilika-ants; iti-uti-here and there; dhare paya-touch the

>|foot.

3412|TRANSLATION

3413|"With great alacrity the hunter began to run toward his

>|spiritual master, but he could not fall down and offer

>|obeisances because ants were running hither and thither

>|around his feet.

3414|Madhya 24.271

3415|TEXT 271

3416|TEXT

3417|ðÃGõR-¦š±Nd ¿óóN¿hLÁ±Nõþ ÎðÃ¿mlþ± h

3418|õN¦a ¦š±d sÁ±¿nÂl' óNnÂl ðÃGõR ýÃÃÛž± N 271 N

3419|dandavat-sthane pipilikare dekhiya

3420|vastre sthana jhadi' pade dandavat hana

3421|SYNONYMS

3422|dandavat-sthane-in the place where he wanted to offer his

>|obeisances; pipilikare dekhiya-seeing the ants; vastre-by

>|the cloth; sthana jhadi'-cleansing the place; pade danda-

>|vat hana-falls down flat like a rod.

3423|TRANSLATION

3424|"Seeing the ants, the hunter whisked them away with a piece

>|of cloth. After thus clearing the ants from the ground, he

>|fell down flat to offer his obeisances.

3425|PURPORT

3426|The word danda means "rod," and vat means "like." To offer

>|obeisances to the spiritual master, one must fall flat

>|exactly as a rod falls on the ground. This is the meaning

>|of the word dandavat.

3427|Madhya 24.272

3428|TEXT 272

3429|TEXT

3430|d±õþðÃ LÁNýÃÃ,–"õI±s, Ûý×ÃÃ d± ýÃÃlþ Õ±(lS h

3431|ýÃÃ¿õþtÂNMÃI ¿ýÃÃSu±-úÓdI ýÃÃlþ u±sRõlS N 272 N

3432|narada kahe,-"vyadha, ei na haya ascarya

3433|hari-bhaktye himsa-sunya haya sadhu-varya

3434|SYNONYMS

3435|narada kahe-Narada Muni said; vyadha-my dear hunter; ei na

>|haya ascarya-this is not wonderful for you; hari-bhaktye-by

>|advancement in devotional service; himsa-sunya haya-one

>|becomes nonviolent and nonenvious; sadhu-varya-thus one

>|becomes the best of honest gentlemen.

3436|TRANSLATION

3437|"Narada Muni said, 'My dear hunter, such behavior is not at

>|all astonishing. A man in devotional service is

>|automatically nonviolent. He is the best of gentlemen.

3438|PURPORT

3439|In this verse the word sadhu-varya means "the best of

>|gentlemen." At the present moment there are many so-called

>|gentlemen who are expert in killing animals and birds.

>|Nonetheless, these so-called gentlemen profess a type of

>|religion that strictly prohibits killing. According to

>|Narada Muni and Vedic culture, animal-killers are not even

>|gentlemen, to say nothing of being religious men. A

>|religious person, a devotee of the Lord, must be nonviolent.

>| Such is the nature of a religious person. It is

>|contradictory to be violent and at the same time call

>|oneself a religious person. Such hypocrisy is not approved

>|by Narada Muni and the disciplic succession.

3440|Madhya 24.273

3441|TEXT 273

3442|TEXT

3443|ÛNîÂ d ýÃÃI3/4³ÃîÂ± õI±s îÂõ±¿ýÃÃSu±ðÃNlþ± &í±Ð h

3444|ýÃÃ¿õþtÂNMÃN ›¶õÔMÃÃ± Îl d ÎîÂ uRIÐ óõþîÂ±¿ódÐ N 273 N

3445|ete na hy adbhuta vyadha

3446| tavahimsadayo gunah

3447|hari-bhaktau pravrtta ye

3448| na te syuh para-tapinah

3449|SYNONYMS

3450|ete-all these; na-not; hi-certainly; adbhutah-wonderful;

>|vyadha-O hunter; tava-your; ahimsa-adayah-nonviolence and

>|others; gunah-qualities; hari-bhaktau-in devotional service;

>| pravrttah-engaged; ye-those who; na-not; te-they; syuh-are;

>| para-tapinah-envious of other living entities.

3451|TRANSLATION

3452|"'O hunter, good qualities like nonviolence, which you

>|have developed, are not very astonishing, for those engaged

>|in the Lord's devotional service are never inclined to give

>|pain to others because of envy.'

3453|PURPORT

3454|This is a quotation from the Skanda Purana.

3455|Madhya 24.274

3456|TEXT 274

3457|TEXT

3458|îÂNõ Îuý×ÃÃ õI±s ÎðDÃ±ýÃÃ±Nõþ Õ/Nd Õ±¿dh h

3459|LRÁú±ud Õ±¿d' ÎðDÃ±ýÃÃ±Nõþ tÂNMÃI õu±ý×ÃÃh N 274 N

3460|tabe sei vyadha donhare angane anila

3461|kusasana ani' donhare bhaktye vasaila

3462|SYNONYMS

3463|tabe-thereafter; sei-that; vyadha-hunter; donhare-both

>|Narada Muni and Parvata; angane anila-brought into the

>|courtyard of his house; kusa-asana ani'-bringing straw mats

>|for sitting; donhare-both of them; bhaktye-with great

>|devotion; vasaila-made to sit down.

3464|TRANSLATION

3465|"The hunter then received the two great sages in the

>|courtyard of his house. He spread out a straw mat for them

>|to sit upon, and with great devotion he begged them to sit

>|down.

3466|Madhya 24.275

3467|TEXT 275

3468|TEXT

3469|æÃh Õ±¿d' tÂNMÃI ÎðDÃ±ýÃÃ±õþÂ ó±ðÃ ›¶ŽÂ±¿hh h

3470|Îuý×ÃÃ æÃh ¦aN-óRNø¸ ¿ólþ± ¿úNõþ hý×ÃÃh N 275 N

3471|jala ani' bhaktye donhara pada praksalila

3472|sei jala stri-puruse piya sire la-ila

3473|SYNONYMS

3474|jala ani'-bringing water; bhaktye-with great devotion;

>|donhara-of both of them; pada praksalila-washed the feet;

>|sei jala-that water; stri-puruse-husband and wife; piya-

>|drinking; sire la-ila-put on their heads.

3475|TRANSLATION

3476|"He then fetched water and washed the sages' feet with

>|great devotion. Then both husband and wife drank that water

>|and sprinkled it on their heads.

3477|PURPORT

3478|This is the process one should follow when receiving the

>|spiritual master or someone on the level of the spiritual

>|master. When the spiritual master comes to the residence of

>|his disciples, the disciples should follow in the footsteps

>|of the former hunter. It doesn't matter what one was before

>|initiation. After initiation, one must learn the etiquette

>|mentioned herein.

3479|Madhya 24.276

3480|TEXT 276

3481|TEXT

3482|LÁ¥ó-óRhLÁ±|n¸ ÆýÃÃh LÔÁøžd±÷ á±Ûž± h

3483|Øs‰Sõ±U dÔîÂI LÁNõþ õ¦a nÂ×nÂl±Ûž± N 276 N

3484|kampa-pulakasru haila krsna-nama gana

3485|urdhva bahu nrtya kare vastra udana

3486|SYNONYMS

3487|kampa-trembling; pulaka-asru-tears and jubilation; haila-

>|there were; krsna-nama gana-chanting the Hare Krsna mantra;

>|urdhva bahu-raising the arms; nrtya kare-began to dance;

>|vastra udana-waving his garments up and down.

3488|TRANSLATION

3489|"When the hunter chanted the Hare Krsna maha-mantra before

>|his spiritual master, his body trembled and tears welled

>|up in his eyes. Filled with ecstatic love, he raised his

>|hands and began to dance, waving his garments up and down.

3490|Madhya 24.277

3491|TEXT 277

3492|TEXT

3493|ÎðÃ¿mlþ± õI±Nsõþ Î›¶÷Â óõSîÂ-÷ýÃÃ±÷R¿d h

3494|d±õþNðÃNõþ LÁNýÃÃ,–îRÂ¿÷ ýÃÃÝ ¦óúS÷¿í N 277 N

3495|dekhiya vyadhera prema parvata-mahamuni

3496|naradere kahe,-tumi hao sparsa-mani

3497|SYNONYMS

3498|dekhiya-seeing; vyadhera-of the hunter; prema-the ecstatic

>|love; parvata-maha-muni-the great sage Parvata Muni;

>|naradere kahe-spoke to Narada Muni; tumi hao sparsa-mani-

>|you are certainly a touchstone.

3499|TRANSLATION

3500|"When Parvata Muni saw the ecstatic loving symptoms of the

>|hunter, he told Narada, 'Certainly you are a touchstone.'

3501|PURPORT

3502|When a touchstone touches iron, it turns the iron to gold.

>|Parvata Muni called Narada Muni a touchstone because by his

>|touch the hunter, who was the lowest among men, became an

>|elevated and perfect Vaisnava. Srila Bhaktivinoda Thakura

>|said that the position of a Vaisnava can be tested by

>|seeing how good a touchstone he is-that is, by seeing how

>|many Vaisnavas he has made during his life. A Vaisnava

>|should be a touchstone so that he can convert others to

>|Vaisnavism by his preaching, even though people may be

>|fallen like the hunter. There are many so-called advanced

>|devotees who sit in a secluded place for their personal

>|benefit. They do not go out to preach and convert others

>|into Vaisnavas, and therefore they certainly cannot be

>|called sparsa-mani, advanced devotees. Kanistha-adhikari

>|devotees cannot turn others into Vaisnavas, but a madhyama-

>|adhikari Vaisnava can do so by preaching. Sri Caitanya

>|Mahaprabhu advised His followers to increase the numbers of

>|Vaisnavas.

3503|yare dekha, tare kaha 'krsna'-upadesa

3504|amara ajnaya guru hana tara' ei desa

3505|(Cc. Madhya 7.128)

3506|It is Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu's wish that everyone should

>|become a Vaisnava and guru. Following the instructions of

>|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu and His disciplic succession, one

>|can become a spiritual master, for the process is very easy.

>| One can go everywhere and anywhere to preach the

>|instructions of Krsna. The Bhagavad-gita is Krsna's

>|instructions; therefore the duty of every Vaisnava is to

>|travel and preach the Bhagavad-gita, either in his country

>|or a foreign country. This is the test of sparsa-mani,

>|following in the footsteps of Narada Muni.

3507|Madhya 24.278

3508|TEXT 278

3509|TEXT

3510|"ÕNýÃÃ± sNdI±•Ã¿u ÎðÃõNø¸S LÔÁólþ± luI îÂRŽÂí±R h

3511|dNNaÂ±•óRIRóRhNLÁ± ÎhNtÂ hRtNLÁ± õþ¿îÂ÷aRÂINîÂ N" 278 N

3512|"aho dhanyo 'si devarse

3513| krpaya yasya tat-ksanat

3514|nico 'py utpulako lebhe

3515| lubdhako ratim acyute"

3516|SYNONYMS

3517|aho-oh; dhanyah-glorified; asi-you are; deva-rse-O sage

>|among the demigods; krpaya-by the mercy; yasya-of whom; tat-

>|ksanat-immediately; nicah api-even though one is the lowest

>|of men; utpulakah-becoming agitated in ecstatic love; lebhe-

>|gets; lubdhakah-a hunter; ratim-attraction; acyute-unto the

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead.

3518|TRANSLATION

3519|"Parvata Muni continued, 'My dear friend Narada Muni, you

>|are glorified as the sage among the demigods. By your mercy,

>| even a lowborn person like this hunter can immediately

>|become attached to Lord Krsna.'

3520|PURPORT

3521|A pure Vaisnava believes in the statements of the sastras.

>|This verse is quoted from the Vedic literature, the Skanda

>|Purana.

3522|Madhya 24.279

3523|TEXT 279

3524|TEXT

3525|d±õþðÃ LÁNýÃÃ,–'Æõøžõ, ÎîÂ±÷±õþ Õi§ ¿LÁrRÃ Õ±lþ·'

3526|õI±s LÁNýÃÃ, ''l±Nõþ ó±êÂ±Ý, Îuý×ÃÃ ¿ðÃlþ± l±lþ N 279 N

3527|narada kahe,-'vaisnava, tomara anna kichu aya?'

3528|vyadha kahe, "yare pathao, sei diya yaya

3529|SYNONYMS

3530|narada kahe-Narada Muni said; vaisnava-O Vaisnava; tomara-

>|your; anna-food; kichu aya-does any come; vyadha kahe-the

>|hunter replied; yare pathao-whoever you send; sei-that

>|person; diya-giving something; yaya-goes.

3531|TRANSLATION

3532|"Narada Muni then asked the hunter, 'My dear Vaisnava, do

>|you have some income for your maintenance?'

3533|"The hunter replied, 'My dear spiritual master, whoever you

>|send gives me something when he comes to see me.'

3534|PURPORT

3535|This confirms the statement in the Bhagavad-gita (9.22) to

>|the effect that the Lord carries all necessities to His

>|Vaisnava devotee. Narada Muni asked the former hunter how

>|he was being maintained, and he replied that everyone who

>|came to see him brought him something for his maintenance.

>|Krsna, who is situated in everyone's heart, says, "I

>|personally carry all necessities to a Vaisnava." He can

>|order anyone to execute this. Everyone is ready to give

>|something to a Vaisnava, and if a Vaisnava is completely

>|engaged in devotional service, he need not be anxious for

>|his maintenance.

3536|Madhya 24.280

3537|TEXT 280

3538|TEXT

3539|ÛîÂ Õi§ d± ó±êÂ±Ý, ¿LÁrRÃ LÁ±lS d±ý×ÃÃ h

3540|uNõ ðRÃý×ÃÃæÃd±õþ Îl±áI tÂŽÂI÷±S aÂ±ý×ÃÃ N" 280 N

3541|eta anna na pathao, kichu karya nai

3542|sabe dui-janara yogya bhaksya-matra cai"

3543|SYNONYMS

3544|eta anna-so much food; na pathao-you do not need to send;

>|kichu karya nai-there is no such need; sabe-only; dui-

>|janara-for two persons; yogya-requisite; bhaksya-matra-

>|eatables; cai-we want.

3545|TRANSLATION

3546|"The former hunter said, 'Please do not send so much grain.

>| Only send what is sufficient for two people, no more.'

3547|PURPORT

3548|The former hunter only wanted enough for two people to eat,

>|no more. It is not necessary for a Vaisnava to keep a stock

>|of food for the next day. He should receive only sufficient

>|grain to last one day. The next day, he must again depend

>|on the Lord's mercy. This is the instruction of Sri

>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu. When His personal servant Govinda

>|sometimes kept a stock of haritaki (myrobalan), Sri

>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu chastised him, saying, "Why did you

>|keep a stock for the next day?" Srila Rupa Gosvami and

>|others were begging daily from door to door for their

>|sustenance, and they never attempted to stock their asrama

>|with food for the next day. We should not materially

>|calculate, thinking, "It is better to stock food for a week.

>| Why give the Lord trouble by having Him bring food daily?"

>|One should be convinced that the Lord will provide daily.

>|There is no need to stock food for the next day.

3549|Madhya 24.281

3550|TEXT 281

3551|TEXT

3552|d±õþðÃ LÁNýÃÃ,–'UNrÃ õþýÃÃ, îRÂ¿÷ tÂ±áIõ±dA' h

3553|ÛîÂ õ¿h' ðRÃý×ÃÃæÃd ýÃÃý×ÃÃh± Õ(tm)LsS±d N 281 N

3554|narada kahe,-'aiche raha, tumi bhagyavan'

3555|eta bali' dui-jana ha-ila antardhana

3556|SYNONYMS

3557|narada kahe-Narada Muni said; aiche raha-live like that;

>|tumi bhagyavan-certainly you are very fortunate; eta bali'-

>|saying this; dui-jana-both Narada Muni and Parvata Muni; ha-

>|ila antardhana-disappeared.

3558|TRANSLATION

3559|"Narada Muni approved his not wanting more than a daily

>|supply of food, and he blessed him, saying, 'You are

>|fortunate.' Narada Muni and Parvata Muni then disappeared

>|from that place.

3560|Madhya 24.282

3561|TEXT 282

3562|TEXT

3563|Ûý×ÃÃ îÂ' LÁ¿ýÃÃhRD ÎîÂ±÷±lþ õI±Nsõþ Õ±mI±d h

3564|l± q¿dNh ýÃÃlþ u±sRu/-›¶tÂ±õ-:±d N 282 N

3565|ei ta' kahilun tomaya vyadhera akhyana

3566|ya sunile haya sadhu-sanga-prabhava-jnana

3567|SYNONYMS

3568|ei ta' kahilun-thus I have narrated; tomaya-unto you;

>|vyadhera akhyana-the story of the hunter; ya sunile-hearing

>|which; haya-there is; sadhu-sanga-of the association of

>|devotees; prabhava-of the influence; jnana-knowledge.

3569|TRANSLATION

3570|"Thus I have narrated the incident of the hunter. By

>|hearing this narration, one can understand the influence

>|of association with devotees.

3571|PURPORT

3572|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu wanted to stress that even a hunter,

>| the lowest of men, could become a topmost Vaisnava simply

>|by associating with Narada Muni or a devotee in his bona

>|fide disciplic succession.

3573|Madhya 24.283

3574|TEXT 283

3575|TEXT

3576|Ûý×ÃÃ Õ±õþ ¿îd ÕnS áíd±NîÂ ó±ý×ÃÃh h

3577|Ûý×ÃÃ ðÃRý×ÃÃ ÕnS ¿÷¿h' 'rÃ±¿õ‰Ãú' ÕnS ÆýÃÃh N 283 N

3578|ei ara tina artha gananate paila

3579|ei dui artha mili' 'chabbisa' artha haila

3580|SYNONYMS

3581|ei-this example; ara-another; tina artha-three imports;

>|gananate-in calculating; paila-we have obtained; ei dui

>|artha mili'-by adding these two imports; chabbisa-twenty-

>|six; artha-imports; haila-there have been.

3582|TRANSLATION

3583|"In this way we have found three more meanings [of the

>|atmarama verse]. Combine these with the other meanings, and

>|the total number of meanings adds up to twenty-six in all.

3584|Madhya 24.284

3585|TEXT 284

3586|TEXT

3587|Õ±õþ ÕnS qd, l±ýÃÃ±-ÕNnSõþ tÂ±G±õþ h

3588|¦²šNh 'ðRÃý×ÃÃ' ÕnS, uÓN„ 'õ¿Sú' ›¶LÁ±õþ N 284 N

3589|ara artha suna, yaha-arthera bhandara

3590|sthule 'dui' artha, suksme 'batrisa' prakara

3591|SYNONYMS

3592|ara-another; artha-import; suna-hear; yaha-which; arthera

>|bhandara-storehouse of knowledge; sthule-grossly; dui artha-

>|two meanings; suksme-by a subtle import; batrisa-thirty-two;

>| prakara-varieties.

3593|TRANSLATION

3594|"There is yet another meaning, which is full of a variety

>|of imports. Actually there are two gross meanings and

>|thirty-two subtle meanings.

3595|PURPORT

3596|The two gross meanings refer to regulative devotional

>|service and spontaneous devotional service. There are also

>|thirty-two subtle meanings. Under the heading of regulative

>|devotional service, there are sixteen meanings based on

>|understanding the word atmarama to mean (1) a servant of

>|the Lord as His personal associate, (2) a personal friend, (

>|3) personal parents or similar superiors, (4) a personal

>|beloved, (5) a servant elevated by spiritual cultivation, (

>|6) a friend by spiritual cultivation, (7) parents and

>|superior devotees by cultivation of devotional service, (8)

>|a beloved wife or female friend by cultivation of

>|devotional service, (9) a mature devotee as a servant, (10)

>|a mature devotee as a friend, (11) a mature devotee as a

>|parent and superior, (12) a mature devotee as a wife and

>|beloved, (13) an immature devotee as a servant, (14) an

>|immature devotee as a friend, (15) an immature devotee as a

>|father or superior, and (16) an immature devotee as a

>|beloved. Similarly, under the heading of spontaneous

>|devotion there are also sixteen various associates.

>|Therefore the total number of devotees under the headings

>|of regulated devotees and spontaneous devotees is thirty-

>|two.

3597|Madhya 24.285

3598|TEXT 285

3599|TEXT

3600|'Õ±R±'-úNs LÁNýÃÃ-uõS¿õs tÂáõ±dA h

3601|ÛLÁ '¦¤lþS tÂáõ±dA', Õ±õþ 'tÂáõ±dA'-Õ±mI±d N 285 N

3602|'atma'-sabde kahe-sarva-vidha bhagavan

3603|eka 'svayam bhagavan', ara 'bhagavan'-akhyana

3604|SYNONYMS

3605|atma-sabde-by the word atma; kahe-it is said; sarva-vidha

>|bhagavan-all types of Personalities of Godhead; eka-one;

>|svayam bhagavan-the original Supreme Personality of Godhead,

>| Krsna; ara-another; bhagavan-akhyana-the Personality of

>|Godhead by an expansive designation.

3606|TRANSLATION

3607|"The word 'atma ' refers to all the different Personalities

>| of Godhead. One of them is the

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself, Krsna, and the

>|others are different incarnations or expansions of Krsna.

3608|PURPORT

3609|The word atma also includes all kinds of personalities

>|known as Bhagavan, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. This

>|means that Krsna has unlimited expansions. This is

>|described in the Brahma-samhita (5.46):

3610|diparcir eva hi dasantaram abhyupetya

3611| dipayate vivrta-hetu-samana-dharma

3612|yas tadrg eva hi ca visnutaya vibhati

3613| govindam adi-purusam tam aham bhajami

3614|The expansions of Krsna are thus compared to candles

>|that have been lit from an original candle. All the

>|secondary candles are equally powerful, but the original

>|candle is that from which all the others have been lit.

>|Krsna is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, and

>|He is expanded as Balarama, Sankarsana, Aniruddha,

>|Pradyumna and Vasudeva. In this way there are innumerable

>|incarnations and expansions who are also called Bhagavan,

>|the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

3615|Regarding the variety of personalities known as Bhagavan,

>|Srila Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Thakura says that the

>|Personality of Godhead known as Krsna is the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead and that His expansions are also

>|called the Personality of Godhead. In other words, Krsna,

>|the Supreme Personality of Godhead, is the origin of all

>|other Personalities of Godhead. Speculative philosophers

>|and mystic yogis also meditate upon the form of Krsna, but

>|this form is not the form of the original Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead. Such a Bhagavan is but a partial

>|representation of the Lord's full potency. Nonetheless, He

>|also has to be understood to be the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead. To clarify this matter, one should simply

>|understand that Krsna, the son of Nanda Maharaja in

>|Vrndavana, the friend of the cowherd boys and lover of the

>|gopis, is actually the original Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead. He is attained by spontaneous love. Although His

>|expansions are also called the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead, They are attained only by the execution of

>|regulative devotional service.

3616|Madhya 24.286

3617|TEXT 286

3618|TEXT

3619|îÂD±NîÂ õþN÷ Îlý×ÃÃ, Îuý×ÃÃ uõ-'Õ±R±õþ±÷' h

3620|'¿õ¿stÂMÃ', 'õþ±átÂMÃ',-ðRÃý×Ã¿õs d±÷ N 286 N

3621|tante rame yei, sei saba-'atmarama'

3622|'vidhi-bhakta', 'raga-bhakta',-dui-vidha nama

3623|SYNONYMS

3624|tante-in all those Supreme Personalities of Godhead; rame-

>|takes pleasure in devotional service; yei-those persons who;

>| sei saba-all of them; atmarama-are also known as atmarama;

>|vidhi-bhakta-devotees following the regulative principles;

>|raga-bhakta-devotees following spontaneous love; dui-vidha

>|nama-two different varieties.

3625|TRANSLATION

3626|"One who always engages in the service of the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead is called atmarama. There are two

>|types of atmaramas. One is an atmarama engaged in

>|regulative devotional service, and the other is an atmarama

>|engaged in spontaneous devotional service.

3627|Madhya 24.287

3628|TEXT 287

3629|TEXT

3630|ðRÃý×ÃÃ¿õs tÂMÃ ýÃÃlþ aÂ±¿õþ aÂ±¿õþ ›¶LÁ±õþ h

3631|ó±¿õþø¸ðÃ, u±sd¿uX, u±sLÁáí Õ±õþ N 287 N

3632|dui-vidha bhakta haya cari cari prakara

3633|parisada, sadhana-siddha, sadhaka-gana ara

3634|SYNONYMS

3635|dui-vidha bhakta-these two varieties of atmarama devotees;

>|haya-are; cari cari prakara-each of four different

>|categories; parisada-personal associate; sadhana-siddha-

>|liberated to the position of associates by perfection in

>|devotional service; sadhaka-gana ara-and devotees already

>|engaged in the devotional service of the Lord.

3636|TRANSLATION

3637|"Both the atmaramas engaged in regulative devotional

>|service and those engaged in spontaneous devotional service

>|are further categorized into four groups. There are the

>|eternal associates, the associates who have become perfect

>|by devotional service, and those who are practicing

>|devotional service and are called sadhakas , of whom there

>|are two varieties.

3638|Madhya 24.288

3639|TEXT 288

3640|TEXT

3641|æÃ±îÂ-ÕæÃ±îÂ-õþ¿îÂNtÂNðÃ u±sLÁ ðRÃý×ÃÃ ÎtÂðÃ h

3642|¿õ¿s-õþ±á-÷±NáS aÂ±¿õþ aÂ±¿õþ-Õ(c)† ÎtÂðÃ N 288 N

3643|jata-ajata-rati-bhede sadhaka dui bheda

3644|vidhi-raga-marge cari cari-asta bheda

3645|SYNONYMS

3646|jata-ajata-rati-bhede-by distinction of mature love and

>|immature love; sadhaka dui bheda-those practicing

>|devotional service are of two varieties; vidhi-regulative

>|devotion; raga-spontaneous devotion; marge-on both the

>|paths; cari cari-there are four different varieties; asta

>|bheda-a total of eight kinds.

3647|TRANSLATION

3648|"Those who are practicing devotional service are either

>|mature or immature. Therefore the sadhakas are of two types.

>| Since the devotees execute either regulative devotional

>|service or spontaneous devotional service and there are

>|four groups within these two divisions, altogether there

>|are eight varieties.

3649|Madhya 24.289

3650|TEXT 289

3651|TEXT

3652|¿õ¿stÂNMÃI ¿dîÂI¿uX ó±¿õþø¸ðÃ-'ðÃ±u' h

3653|'um±' '&', 'LÁ±(tm)L±áí',-aÂ±¿õþ¿õs Â›¶LÁ±ú N 289 N

3654|vidhi-bhaktye nitya-siddha parisada-'dasa'

3655|'sakha' 'guru', 'kanta-gana',-cari-vidha prakasa

3656|SYNONYMS

3657|vidhi-bhaktye-by regulative devotional service; nitya-

>|siddha parisada-eternally perfect associate; dasa-the

>|servant; sakha guru kanta-gana-friends, superiors and

>|beloved damsels; cari-vidha prakasa-they are manifested in

>|four varieties.

3658|TRANSLATION

3659|"By executing regulative devotional service, one is

>|elevated to the platform of an eternally perfect associate,

>| such as a servant, friend, superior or beloved woman. Each

>|of these is of four varieties.

3660|Madhya 24.290

3661|TEXT 290

3662|TEXT

3663|u±sd¿uX-ðÃ±u, um±, &, LÁ±(tm)L±áí h

3664|æÃ±îÂõþ¿îÂ u±sLÁtÂMÃ-aÂ±¿õþ¿õs æÃd N 290 N

3665|sadhana-siddha-dasa, sakha, guru, kanta-gana

3666|jata-rati sadhaka-bhakta-cari-vidha jana

3667|SYNONYMS

3668|sadhana-siddha-those who have perfected themselves by

>|devotional service; dasa-servants; sakha-friends; guru-

>|superiors; kanta-gana-beloved damsels; jata-rati sadhaka-

>|bhakta-devotees who have become mature by devotional

>|service; cari-vidha jana-they are also of four varieties.

3669|TRANSLATION

3670|"Among those who have perfected themselves by devotional

>|service, there are servants, friends, superiors and beloved

>|damsels. Similarly, there are four types of mature devotees.

3671|Madhya 24.291

3672|TEXT 291

3673|TEXT

3674|ÕæÃ±îÂõþ¿îÂ u±sLÁtÂMÃ,-Û aÂ±¿õþ ›¶LÁ±õþ

3675|¿õ¿s÷±NáS tÂNMÃ Îø¸±nÂlú ÎtÂðÃ ›¶aÂ±õþ N 291 N

3676|ajata-rati sadhaka-bhakta,-e cari prakara

3677|vidhi-marge bhakte sodasa bheda pracara

3678|SYNONYMS

3679|ajata-rati sadhaka-bhakta-immature devotees engaged in

>|devotional service; e cari prakara-there are also the same

>|four varieties; vidhi-marge-on the path of regulative

>|devotional service; bhakte-devotees; sodasa bheda pracara-

>|there are sixteen varieties.

3680|TRANSLATION

3681|"Within the category of regulative devotional service,

>|there are also immature devotees. These are also of four

>|varieties. Thus in regulative devotional service there are

>|altogether sixteen varieties.

3682|Madhya 24.292

3683|TEXT 292

3684|TEXT

3685|õþ±á÷±NáS UNrÃ tÂNMÃ Îø¸±nÂlú ¿õNtÂðÃ h

3686|ðRÃý×ÃÃ ÷±NáS Õ±R±õþ±N÷õþ õ¿Sú ¿õNtÂðÃ N 292 N

3687|raga-marge aiche bhakte sodasa vibheda

3688|dui marge atmaramera batrisa vibheda

3689|SYNONYMS

3690|raga-marge-on the path of spontaneous loving service; aiche-

>|in the same way; bhakte-all the devotees; sodasa vibheda-

>|divided into sixteen varieties; dui marge-on the two paths,

>|namely regulative devotional service and spontaneous

>|devotional service; atmaramera-of persons enjoying with the

>|Supreme Self; batrisa vibheda-there are thirty-two

>|varieties of devotees.

3691|TRANSLATION

3692|"On the path of spontaneous devotional service, there are

>|also sixteen categories of devotees. Thus there are thirty-

>|two types of atmaramas enjoying the Supreme Lord on these

>|two paths.

3693|Madhya 24.293

3694|TEXT 293

3695|TEXT

3696|'÷R¿d', '¿d¢¶SLš', 'aÂ' 'Õ¿ó',-aÂ±¿õþ úNsõþ ÕnS h

3697|l±ýÃÃD± Îlý×ÃÃ h±Ná, îÂ±ýÃÃ± LÁ¿õþNlþ u÷nS N 293 N

3698|'muni', 'nirgrantha', 'ca' 'api',-cari sabdera artha

3699|yahan yei lage, taha kariye samartha

3700|SYNONYMS

3701|muni-muni ; nirgrantha- nirgrantha ;

>| ca- ca; api- api ; cari sabdera artha-the

>|meanings of these four words; yahan-wherever; yei lage-they

>|apply; taha kariye samartha-make them sound.

3702|TRANSLATION

3703|"When these thirty-two types of devotees are qualified with

>|the words 'muni ,' 'nirgrantha ,' 'ca ' and 'api, ' the

>|meanings can be increased in different ways and very

>|soundly elaborated upon.

3704|Madhya 24.294

3705|TEXT 294

3706|TEXT

3707|õ¿SNú rÃ±¿õ‰Nú ¿÷¿h' Õ(c)†ó=±ú h

3708|Õ±õþ ÛLÁ ÎtÂðÃ qd ÕNnSõþ ›¶LÁ±ú N 294 N

3709|batrise chabbise mili, asta-pancasa

3710|ara eka bheda suna arthera prakasa

3711|SYNONYMS

3712|batrise-these thirty-two varieties; chabbise-the formerly

>|described twenty-six varieties; mili'-added together; asta-

>|pancasa-they become fifty-eight; ara-another; eka-one;

>|bheda-different; suna-please hear; arthera prakasa-

>|manifestation of import.

3713|TRANSLATION

3714|"When we add the twenty-six types of devotees to these

>|thirty-two, they altogether number fifty-eight. You may now

>|hear from Me of further manifestations of

>|meanings.

3715|Madhya 24.295

3716|TEXT 295

3717|TEXT

3718|ý×ÃÃîÂNõþîÂõþ 'aÂ' ¿ðÃlþ± u÷±u LÁ¿õþNlþ h

3719|'Õ±iÂ±i§'õ±õþ Õ±R±õþ±÷ d±÷ hý×ÃÃNlþ N 295 N

3720|itaretara 'ca' diya samasa kariye

3721|'atanna'-bara atmarama nama la-iye

3722|SYNONYMS

3723|itaretara-in different varieties; ca-the word ca; diya-

>|adding; samasa kariye-make a compound word; atanna-bara-

>|fifty-eight times; atmarama-the atmarama devotees; nama la-

>|iye-I take their different names.

3724|TRANSLATION

3725|"In this way, as I add the word 'ca ' to one word after

>|another, I make a compound. Thus the different names of

>|atmaramas can be taken fifty-eight times.

3726|Madhya 24.296

3727|TEXT 296

3728|TEXT

3729|'Õ±R±õþ±÷±( Õ±R±õþ±÷±(' Õ±iÂ±i§õ±õþ h

3730|ÎúNø¸ uõ Îh±ó LÁ¿õþ' õþ±¿m ÛLÁõ±õþ N 296 N

3731|'atmaramas ca atmaramas ca' atanna-bara

3732|sese saba lopa kari' rakhi eka-bara

3733|SYNONYMS

3734|atmaramah ca atmaramah ca-repeating atmaramah; atanna-bara-

>|fifty-eight times; sese-at the end; saba lopa kari'-

>|rejecting all; rakhi-we keep; eka-bara-only one.

3735|TRANSLATION

3736|"In this way, one can repeat the word 'atmaramah ' with 'ca

>|' for each of the fifty-eight meanings. By following the

>|rule previously stated and rejecting all but the last, we

>|retain that which represents all the meanings.

3737|Madhya 24.297

3738|TEXT 297

3739|TEXT

3740|uõþ+ó±í±N÷LÁNúø¸ ÛL Á¿ õt ÂNMÃ

>|N,

3741|nÂ×MÃ±nS±d±÷›¶Nlþ±á ý×ÃÃ¿îÂ N 297 N

3742|sarupanam eka-sesa eka-vibhaktau, uktarthanam aprayoga iti

3743|SYNONYMS

3744|sa-rupanam-of words of the same form; eka-sesah-only the

>|last; eka-vibhaktau-in the same case; ukta-arthanam-of the

>|previously spoken meanings; aprayogah-nonapplication; iti-

>|thus.

3745|TRANSLATION

3746|"'Of words having the same form and case termination, the

>|last one is the only one retained.'

3747|PURPORT

3748|This is a quotation from Panini's sutras (1.2.64).

3749|Madhya 24.298

3750|TEXT 298

3751|TEXT

3752|Õ±iÂ±i§ aÂ-LÁ±Nõþõþ uõ Îh±ó ýÃÃlþ h

3753|ÛLÁ Õ±R±õþ±÷-úNs Õ±iÂ±i§ ÕnS LÁlþ N 298 N

3754|atanna ca-karera saba lopa haya

3755|eka atmarama-sabde atanna artha kaya

3756|SYNONYMS

3757|atanna-fifty-eight; ca-karera-of the additions of the word

>|ca; saba lopa haya-all of them are rejected; eka-one;

>|atmarama-atmarama; sabde-by the word; atanna artha kaya-

>|fifty-eight imports are automatically derived.

3758|TRANSLATION

3759|"When all the ca-karas, or additions of the word 'ca, ' are

>|taken away, fifty-eight different meanings can still be

>|understood by the one word 'atmarama. '

3760|Madhya 24.299

3761|TEXT 299

3762|TEXT

3763|Õ«OõÔŽÂ±( õiÂõÔŽÂ±( LÁ¿óOõÔŽÂ±( Õ±¥ÚõÔŽÂ±( õÔŽÂ±Ð N 299 N

3764|asvattha-vrksas ca bata-vrksas ca kapittha-vrksas ca amra-

>|vrksas ca vrksah

3765|SYNONYMS

3766|asvattha-vrksah-banyan trees; ca-and; bata-vrksah-fig trees;

>| ca-and; kapittha-vrksah-a type of tree named kapittha; ca-

>|and; amra-vrksah-mango trees; ca-and; vrksah-all indicated

>|by the word "trees."

3767|TRANSLATION

3768|"'By the plural word 'vrksah ' [ 'trees '], all trees,

>|such as banyan trees, fig trees, kapittha trees and mango

>|trees, are indicated.'

3769|Madhya 24.300

3770|TEXT 300

3771|TEXT

3772|"Õ¿¦œdA õNd õÔŽÂ±Ð ôÂh¿(tm)L" ÆlNrÃ ýÃÃlþ h

3773|ÆîÂNrÃ uõ Õ±R±õþ±÷ LÔÁNøž tÂ¿MÃ LÁõþlþ N 300 N

3774|"asmin vane vrksah phalanti" yaiche haya

3775|taiche saba atmarama krsne bhakti karaya

3776|SYNONYMS

3777|asmin vane-in this forest; vrksah phalanti-different

>|varieties of trees bear fruit; yaiche haya-just as in this

>|sentence; taiche-similarly; saba-all; atmarama-self-

>|realized souls; krsne bhakti karaya-engage themselves in

>|loving devotional service to Lord Krsna.

3778|TRANSLATION

3779|"The atmarama verse is like the sentence 'In this forest

>|many different trees bear fruit.' All atmaramas render

>|devotional service to Lord Krsna.

3780|Madhya 24.301

3781|TEXT 301

3782|TEXT

3783|'Õ±R±õþ±÷±(' u÷R2aÂNlþ LÁ¿ýÃÃNlþ aÂ-LÁ±õþ h

3784|'÷Rdlþ(' tÂ¿MÃ LÁNõþ,-Ûý×ÃÃ ÕnS îÂ±õþ N 301 N

3785|'atmaramas ca' samuccaye kahiye ca-kara

3786|'munayas ca' bhakti kare,-ei artha tara

3787|SYNONYMS

3788|atmaramah ca-similarly the word atmaramah with the word ca

>|added; samuccaye-in aggregation; kahiye-means; ca-kara-the

>|word ca; munayah ca-the word munayah with the word ca added;

>| bhakti kare-all of them engage in devotional service; ei

>|artha tara-this is the perfect meaning of the verse.

3789|TRANSLATION

3790|"After uttering the word 'atmaramah '

>|fifty-eight times and taking 'ca ' in a sense of

>|aggregation, one may add the word 'munayah. ' That will

>|mean that great sages also render devotional service to

>|Lord Krsna. In this way there are fifty-nine meanings.

3791|Madhya 24.302

3792|TEXT 302

3793|TEXT

3794|'¿d¢¶SLš± Ûõ' ýÃÃÛž±, 'Õ¿ó'-¿dsS±õþNí h

3795|Ûý×ÃÃ 'Ødø¸¿(c)†' ›¶LÁ±õþ ÕnS LÁ¿õþhRD õI±mI±Nd N 302 N

3796|'nirgrantha eva' hana, 'api'-nirdharane

3797|ei 'unasasti' prakara artha karilun vyakhyane

3798|SYNONYMS

3799|nirgranthah-the word nirgranthah; eva-also the word eva;

>|hana-becoming; api-the word api; nirdharane-in fixation; ei

>|unasasti prakara artha-in this way fifty-nine imports;

>|karilun vyakhyane-I have described.

3800|TRANSLATION

3801|"Then taking the word 'nirgranthah' and

>|considering 'api ' in the sense of sustenance, I have tried

>|to explain a fifty- ninth meaning of the verse.

3802|Madhya 24.303

3803|TEXT 303

3804|TEXT

3805|uõSu÷R2aÂNlþ Õ±õþ ÛLÁ ÕnS ýÃÃlþ h

3806|'Õ±R±õþ±÷±( ÷Rdlþ( ¿d¢¶SLš±(' tÂæÃlþ N 303 N

3807|sarva-samuccaye ara eka artha haya

3808|'atmaramas ca munayas ca nirgranthas ca' bhajaya

3809|SYNONYMS

3810|sarva-samuccaye-taking all of them together; ara-another;

>|eka-one; artha-import; haya-there is; atmaramah ca munayah

>|ca nirgranthah ca bhajaya-the atmaramas, great sages and

>|nirgranthas (the learned and the fools) are all eligible to

>|engage in the transcendental loving service of the Lord.

3811|TRANSLATION

3812|"Taking all the words together, there is another meaning.

>|Whether one is an atmarama, a great sage or a nirgrantha,

>|everyone must engage in the service of the Lord.

3813|PURPORT

3814|The word sarva-samuccaye is significant here. It includes

>|all classes of men-atmaramas, munis and nirgranthas.

>|Everyone must engage in the service of the Lord. Taking

>|the word api in the sense of ascertainment, there are, all

>|together, sixty different meanings.

3815|Madhya 24.304

3816|TEXT 304

3817|TEXT

3818|'Õ¿ó'-ús-Õõs±õþNí, ÎuýÃÃ aÂ±¿õþ õ±õþ h

3819|aÂ±¿õþús-uN/ ÛNõõþ LÁ¿õþNõ nÂ×2aÂÂ±õþ N 304 N

3820|'api'-sabda-avadharane, seha cari bara

3821|cari-sabda-sange evera karibe uccara

3822|SYNONYMS

3823|api-sabda-the word api; avadharane-in the matter of

>|ascertaining; seha cari bara-those four times; cari-sabda-

>|four words; sange-with; evera-of the word eva; karibe-one

>|can do; uccara-pronouncing.

3824|TRANSLATION

3825|"The word 'api ' is then used in the sense of ascertainment,

>| and then the word 'eva ' can be

>|uttered four times with four words.

3826|Madhya 24.305

3827|TEXT 305

3828|TEXT

3829|"nÂ×SN÷ Ûõ tÂ¿MÃN÷õ ÕÍýÃÃîRÂLÁNN÷õ LRÁõSN(tm)LIõ" N 305 N

3830|"urukrame eva bhaktim eva ahaitukim eva kurvanty eva"

3831|SYNONYMS

3832|urukrame-unto the most powerful; eva-only; bhaktim-

>|devotional service; eva-only; ahaitukim-without motives;

>|eva-only; kurvanti-they perform; eva-only.

3833|TRANSLATION

3834|"The words 'urukrama, ' 'bhakti, ' 'ahaituki ' and '

>|kurvanti ' are added to the word 'eva ' again and again.

>|Thus another meaning is explained.

3835|Madhya 24.306

3836|TEXT 306

3837|TEXT

3838|Ûý×ÃÃ îÂ' LÁ¿ýÃÃhRD Î±NLÁõþ 'ø¸¿(c)†' uSmILÁ ÕnS h

3839|Õ±õþ ÛLÁ ÕnS qd ›¶÷±Ní u÷nS N 306 N

3840|ei ta' kahilun slokera 'sasti' sankhyaka artha

3841|ara eka artha suna pramane samartha

3842|SYNONYMS

3843|ei ta'-thus; kahilun-I have explained; slokera-of the verse;

>| sasti-sixty; sankhyaka-numbering; artha-imports; ara-

>|another; eka-one; artha-import; suna-please hear; pramane

>|samartha-quite fit for giving evidence.

3844|TRANSLATION

3845|"Now I have given sixty different meanings of the verse,

>|and yet there is another meaning which is also very

>|strongly evident.

3846|Madhya 24.307

3847|TEXT 307

3848|TEXT

3849|'Õ±R±'-úNs LÁNýÃÃ 'ÎŽÂS: æÃNõ'-hŽÂí h

3850|õrpÁ±¿ðÃ LÁNiÂólS(tm)L-îDÂ±õþ ú¿MÃNîÂ áíd N 307 N

3851|'atma'-sabde kahe 'ksetrajna jiva'-laksana

3852|brahmadi kita-paryanta-tanra saktite ganana

3853|SYNONYMS

3854|atma-sabde-by the word atma; kahe-it is said; ksetra-jna

>|jiva-the living entity who knows about his body; laksana-

>|symptom; brahma-adi-beginning from Lord Brahma; kita-

>|paryanta-down to the insignificant ant; tanra-His; saktite-

>|as the marginal potency; ganana-counting.

3855|TRANSLATION

3856|"The word 'atma ' also refers to the living entity who

>|knows about his body. That is another symptom. From Lord

>|Brahma down to the insignificant ant, everyone is counted

>|as the marginal potency of the Lord.

3857|Madhya 24.308

3858|TEXT 308

3859|TEXT

3860|¿õøRžú¿MÃÐ óõþ± Î›¶±MÃ± ÎŽÂS:±mI± îÂn±óõþ± h

3861|Õ¿õðÃI±-LÁ÷S-uS:±dI± îÔÂîÂNlþ± ú¿MÃ¿õþø¸INîÂ N 308 N

3862|visnu-saktih para prokta

3863| ksetrajnakhya tatha para

3864|avidya-karma-samjnanya

3865| trtiya saktir isyate

3866|SYNONYMS

3867|visnu-saktih-the potency of Lord Visnu; para-spiritual;

>|prokta-it is said; ksetra-jna-akhya-the potency known as

>|ksetrajna; tatha-as well as; para-spiritual; avidya-

>|ignorance; karma-fruitive activities; samjna-known as; anya-

>|other; trtiya-third; saktih-potency; isyate-known thus.

3868|TRANSLATION

3869|"'The potency of Lord Visnu is summarized in three

>|categories-namely the spiritual potency, the living

>|entities and ignorance. The spiritual potency is full of

>|knowledge; the living entities, although belonging to the

>|spiritual potency, are subject to bewilderment; and the

>|third energy, which is full of ignorance, is always visible

>|in fruitive activities.'

3870|PURPORT

3871|This is a quotation from the Visnu Purana. For an

>|explanation, see Adi-lila 7.119 .

3872|Madhya 24.309

3873|TEXT 309

3874|TEXT

3875|"ÎŽÂS: Õ±R± óRø¸Ð ›¶s±dS ›¶LÔÁ¿îÂÐ ¿¦alþ±÷A N" 309 N

3876|"ksetrajna atma purusah

3877| pradhanam prakrtih striyam"

3878|SYNONYMS

3879|ksetra-jnah-the word ksetrajna; atma-the living entity;

>|purusah-the enjoyer; pradhanam-the chief; prakrtih-the

>|material nature; striyam-in the feminine gender.

3880|TRANSLATION

3881|"'The word 'ksetrajna ' refers to the living entity, the

>|enjoyer, the chief and material nature.'

3882|PURPORT

3883|This is a quotation from the Svarga-varga (7) of the Amara-

>|kosa dictionary.

3884|Madhya 24.310

3885|TEXT 310

3886|TEXT

3887|w¿÷NîÂ w¿÷NîÂ l¿ðÃ u±sRu/ ó±lþ h

3888|uõ îÂI¿æÃ' îÂNõ ¿îÂDNýÃÃ± LÔÁNøžNõþ tÂæÃlþ N 310 N

3889|bhramite bhramite yadi sadhu-sanga paya

3890|saba tyaji' tabe tinho krsnere bhajaya

3891|SYNONYMS

3892|bhramite bhramite-wandering in different forms in different

>|manners; yadi-if; sadhu-sanga paya-one obtains the

>|association of devotees; saba tyaji'-giving up everything;

>|tabe-then; tinho-he; krsnere bhajaya-engages himself in the

>|service of Lord Krsna.

3893|TRANSLATION

3894|"The living entities are wandering in different species of

>|life on different planets, but if by chance they get the

>|association of a pure devotee [sadhu], they give up all

>|other engagements and engage in the service of Lord Krsna.

3895|Madhya 24.311

3896|TEXT 311

3897|TEXT

3898|ø¸±¿iÂ ÕnS LÁ¿ýÃÃhRD, uõ-LÔÁNøžõþ tÂæÃNd h

3899|Îuý×ÃÃ ÕnS ýÃÃlþ Ûý×ÃÃ uõ nÂ×ðÃ±ýÃõþNí N 311 N

3900|sati artha kahilun, saba-krsnera bhajane

3901|sei artha haya ei saba udaharane

3902|SYNONYMS

3903|sati-sixty; artha-imports; kahilun-I explained; saba-all;

>|krsnera bhajane-aiming at rendering transcendental loving

>|service to Krsna; sei artha haya-that is the only meaning;

>|ei saba-all these; udaharane-examples.

3904|TRANSLATION

3905|"I have thus explained sixty different meanings, and all of

>|them aim at the service of Lord Krsna. After giving so many

>|examples, that is the only meaning.

3906|Madhya 24.312

3907|TEXT 312

3908|TEXT

3909|'ÛLÁø¸¿(c)†' ÕnS ÛNõ ¦£RÂ¿õþh ÎîÂ±÷±-uN/ h

3910|ÎîÂ±÷±õþ tÂ¿MÃõNú nÂ×NêÂ ÕNnSõþ îÂõþN/ N 312 N

3911|'eka-sasti' artha ebe sphurila toma-sange

3912|tomara bhakti-vase uthe arthera tarange

3913|SYNONYMS

3914|eka-sasti-sixty-one; artha-imports; ebe-now; sphurila-has

>|awakened; toma-sange-because of your association; tomara-

>|your; bhakti-vase-by dint of devotional service; uthe-there

>|arises; arthera-of imports; tarange-waves.

3915|TRANSLATION

3916|"Now, due to your association, another meaning has awakened.

>| It is due to your devotional service that these waves of

>|meaning are arising.

3917|PURPORT

3918|The word atma refers to the living entity. From Lord Brahma

>|down to an insignificant ant, everyone is considered a

>|living entity. Living entities are considered part of the

>|Lord's marginal potency. All of them are ksetra-jna,

>|knowers of the body. When they become nirgrantha, or free,

>|saintly persons, they engage in Lord Krsna's service. That

>|is the sixty-first meaning of the verse.

3919|Madhya 24.313

3920|TEXT 313

3921|TEXT

3922|ÕýÃÃS Îõ¿1/2 qNLÁ± Îõ¿MÃÃ õI±Nu± Îõ¿MÃÃ d Îõ¿MÃÃ õ± h

3923|tÂMÃI± tÂ±áõîÂS ¢¶±ýÃÃIS d õRXI± d aÂ ¿iÂLÁlþ± N 313 N

3924|aham vedmi suko vetti

3925| vyaso vetti na vetti va

3926|bhaktya bhagavatam grahyam

3927| na buddhya na ca tikaya

3928|SYNONYMS

3929|aham-I (Lord Siva); vedmi-know; sukah-Sukadeva Gosvami;

>|vetti-knows; vyasah-Vyasadeva; vetti-knows; na vetti va-or

>|may not know; bhaktya-by devotional service (executed in

>|nine different processes); bhagavatam-the Bhagavata Purana (

>|called the Paramahamsa-samhita, the text or treatise

>|readable by the topmost transcendentalists); grahyam-to be

>|accepted; na-not; buddhya-by so-called intelligence or

>|experimental knowledge; na-nor; ca-also; tikaya-by

>|imaginary commentary.

3930|TRANSLATION

3931|"[Lord Siva said:] 'I may know; Sukadeva Gosvami, the son

>|of Vyasadeva, may know; and Vyasadeva may know or may not

>|know Srimad -Bhagavatam. On the whole, Srimad-

>|Bhagavatam, the spotless Purana, can be learned only

>|through devotional service, not by material intelligence,

>|speculative methods or imaginary commentaries.' "

3932|PURPORT

3933|Devotional service includes nine processes, beginning with

>|hearing, chanting and remembering the activities of Lord

>|Visnu. Only one who has taken to devotional service can

>|understand Srimad-Bhagavatam, which is the spotless Purana

>|for a transcendentalist (paramahamsa). So-called

>|commentaries are useless for this purpose. According to the

>|Vedic injunction, yasya deve para bhaktir yatha deve tatha

>|gurau [SU 6.23]. All Vedic literatures maintain that

>|Srimad-Bhagavatam has to be learned from the person

>|bhagavata, and to understand it one has to engage in pure

>|devotional service. Srimad-Bhagavatam cannot be understood

>|by so-called erudite scholars or grammarians. One who has

>|developed pure Krsna consciousness and has served the pure

>|devotee, the spiritual master, can understand Srimad-

>|Bhagavatam. Others cannot.

3934|Madhya 24.314

3935|TEXT 314

3936|TEXT

3937|ÕnS q¿d' ud±îd ¿õ¿¦œîÂ ýÃÃÛž± h

3938|d¿îÂ LÁNõþ ÷ýÃÃ±›¶tRÂõþ aÂõþNí s¿õþlþ± N 314 N

3939|artha suni' sanatana vismita hana

3940|stuti kare mahaprabhura carane dhariya

3941|SYNONYMS

3942|artha suni'-by hearing the meanings (of the atmarama verse);

>| sanatana-Sanatana Gosvami; vismita hana-becoming struck

>|with wonder; stuti kare-offers prayers; mahaprabhura-of Sri

>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu; carane dhariya-touching the lotus feet.

3943|TRANSLATION

3944|After hearing all the explanations of all the different

>|meanings of the atmarama verse, Sanatana Gosvami was struck

>|with wonder. He fell down at the lotus feet of Sri Caitanya

>|Mahaprabhu and began to offer prayers.

3945|Madhya 24.315

3946|TEXT 315

3947|TEXT

3948|"u±ŽÂ±R T«õþ îRÂ¿÷ õrNæÃfdµd h

3949|ÎîÂ±÷±õþ ¿d«±Nu uõSNõðÃ-›¶õîSÂd N 315 N

3950|"saksat isvara tumi vrajendra-nandana

3951|tomara nisvase sarva-veda-pravartana

3952|SYNONYMS

3953|saksat isvara tumi-You are the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead; vrajendra-nandana-the son of Maharaja Nanda;

>|tomara nisvase-by Your breathing; sarva-veda-all Vedic

>|literatures; pravartana-are vibrated.

3954|TRANSLATION

3955|Sanatana Gosvami said, "My dear Lord, You are the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead, Krsna, the son of Maharaja Nanda.

>|All the Vedic literatures are vibrated through Your

>|breathing.

3956|Madhya 24.316

3957|TEXT 316

3958|TEXT

3959|îRÂ¿÷-õMÃ± tÂ±áõNîÂõþ, îRÂ¿÷ æÃ±d ÕnS h

3960|ÎîÂ±÷± ¿õd± ÕdI æÃ±¿dNîÂ d±¿ýÃÃLÁ u÷nS N" 316 N

3961|tumi-vakta bhagavatera, tumi jana artha

3962|toma vina anya janite nahika samartha"

3963|SYNONYMS

3964|tumi-Your Lordship; vakta-the speaker; bhagavatera-of

>|Srimad-Bhagavatam; tumi-You; jana-know; artha-the import;

>|toma vina-except for You; anya-anyone else; janite-to know;

>|nahika-is not; samartha-able.

3965|TRANSLATION

3966|"My dear Lord, You are the original speaker of the

>|Bhagavatam. You therefore know its real import. But for You,

>| no one can understand the confidential meaning of Srimad-

>|Bhagavatam."

3967|PURPORT

3968|Following this statement by Srila Sanatana Gosvami, we have

>|written our introduction to Srimad-Bhagavatam (First Canto,

>|pages 1 –41).

3969|Madhya 24.317

3970|TEXT 317

3971|TEXT

3972|›¶tRÂ LÁNýÃÃ,–"ÎLÁNd LÁõþ Õ±÷±õþ (tm)¦õd h

3973|tÂ±áõNîÂõþ ¦¤õþ+ó ÎLÁNd d± LÁõþ ¿õaÂ±õþí· 317 N

3974|prabhu kahe,-"kene kara amara stavana

3975|bhagavatera svarupa kene na kara vicarana?

3976|SYNONYMS

3977|prabhu kahe-Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu said; kene kara-

>|why do you do; amara stavana-My personal glorification;

>|bhagavatera svarupa -the real form of Srimad-

>|Bhagavatam; kene-why; na kara-you do not do; vicarana-

>|consideration.

3978|TRANSLATION

3979|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu replied, "Why are you glorifying Me

>|personally? You should understand the transcendental

>|position of Srimad-Bhagavatam. Why don't you consider this

>|important point?

3980|Madhya 24.318

3981|TEXT 318

3982|TEXT

3983|LÔÁøž-îRÂhI tÂ±áõîÂ-¿õtRÂ, uõS±|lþ h

3984|›¶¿îÂ-Î±NLÁ ›¶¿îÂ-ÕŽÂNõþ d±d± ÕnS LÁlþ N 318 N

3985|krsna-tulya bhagavata-vibhu, sarvasraya

3986|prati-sloke prati-aksare nana artha kaya

3987|SYNONYMS

3988|krsna-tulya bhagavata-Srimad-Bhagavatam is identical with

>|Krsna; vibhu-the supreme; sarva-asraya-the origin of

>|everything, or that which controls everything; prati-sloke-

>|in every verse; prati-aksare-in every syllable; nana artha

>|kaya-there are varieties of imports.

3989|TRANSLATION

3990|"Srimad-Bhagavatam is as great as Krsna, the Supreme Lord

>|and shelter of everything. In each and every verse of

>|Srimad-Bhagavatam and in each and every syllable, there are

>|various meanings.

3991|Madhya 24.319

3992|TEXT 319

3993|TEXT

3994|›¶NŸ±MÃÃNõþ tÂ±áõNîÂ LÁ¿õþlþ±NrÃ ¿dsS±õþ h

3995|lD±ýÃÃ±õþ |õNí Îh±NLÁ h±Ná aÂ÷RLÁ±õþ N 319 N

3996|prasnottare bhagavate kariyache nirdhara

3997|yanhara sravane loke lage camatkara

3998|SYNONYMS

3999|prasna-uttare-in the form of questions and answers;

>|bhagavate-in Srimad-Bhagavatam; kariyache-has made;

>|nirdhara-conclusion; yanhara sravane-hearing which; loke-in

>|all people; lage-there is; camatkara-wonderful astonishment.

4000|TRANSLATION

4001|"The form of Srimad-Bhagavatam is given in questions and

>|answers. Thus the conclusion is established. By hearing

>|these questions and answers, one is highly astonished.

4002|Madhya 24.320

4003|TEXT 320

4004|TEXT

4005|õrÓÃ¿ýÃÃ Îl±Ná«Nõþ LÔÁNøž õrpÁNíI s÷Sõ÷S¿í h

4006|¦¤±S LÁ±‡Â±÷sRNd±NóNîÂ s÷SÐ LÁS úõþíS áîÂÐ N 320 N

4007|bruhi yogesvare krsne

4008| brahmanye dharma-varmani

4009|svam kastham adhunopete

4010| dharmah kam saranam gatah

4011|SYNONYMS

4012|bruhi-kindly explain; yoga-isvare-the Supreme Personality

>|of Godhead, the master of all mystic power; krsne-Lord

>|Krsna; brahmanye-the protector of brahminical culture;

>|dharma-varmani-the strong arms of religious principles;

>|svam-His own; kastham-to the personal abode; adhuna-at

>|present; upete-having returned; dharmah-the religious

>|principles; kam-unto what; saranam-shelter; gatah-have gone.

4013|TRANSLATION

4014|"'Now that Sri Krsna, the Absolute Truth, the master of

>|all mystic powers, has departed for His own abode, please

>|tell us by whom religious principles are presently

>|protected.'

4015|PURPORT

4016|This verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.1.23) was a question

>|raised by all the sages, who were headed by Saunaka. This

>|question put before the great devotee Suta Gosvami is the

>|foremost of the six questions raised. The answer to this

>|important question is given in the next verse, also from

>|Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.3.43).

4017|Madhya 24.321

4018|TEXT 321

4019|TEXT

4020|LÔÁNøž ¦¤s±N÷±óáNîÂ s÷S:±d±¿ðÃ¿tÂÐ uýÃÃ h

4021|LÁNhN d(c)†ðÔÃú±N÷ø¸ óRõþ±í±NLSÁ±•ÃsRNd±¿ðÃîÂÐ N 321 N

4022|krsne sva-dhamopagate

4023| dharma-jnanadibhih saha

4024|kalau nasta-drsam esa

4025| puranarko 'dhunoditah

4026|SYNONYMS

4027|krsne-Lord Krsna; sva-dhama-to His personal abode; upagate-

>|having returned; dharma-jnana-adibhih saha-along with

>|religious principles, transcendental knowledge, and so on;

>|kalau-in this Age of Kali; nasta-drsam-of persons who have

>|lost their spiritual vision; esah-this; purana-arkah-Purana

>|or Vedic literature that shines like the sun; adhuna-at the

>|present moment; uditah-has arisen.

4028|TRANSLATION

4029|"'After Lord Krsna departed for His abode along with

>|religious principles and transcendental knowledge, this

>|Purana, Srimad-Bhagavatam, has arisen like the sun in this

>|Age of Kali to enlighten those who have no spiritual vision.

>|'

4030|Madhya 24.322

4031|TEXT 322

4032|TEXT

4033|Ûý×ÃÃ ÷îÂ LÁ¿ýÃÃhRD ÛLÁ Î±NLÁõþ õI±mI±d h

4034|õ±îRÂNhõþ ›¶h±ó LÁ¿õþ' ÎLÁ LÁNõþ ›¶÷±í· 322 N

4035|ei mata kahilun eka slokera vyakhyana

4036|vatulera pralapa kari' ke kare pramana?

4037|SYNONYMS

4038|ei mata-in this way; kahilun-I have spoken; eka-one;

>|slokera-of a verse; vyakhyana-the explanation; vatulera

>|pralapa-the talking of a madman; kari'-doing; ke kare

>|pramana-who will accept this as evidential proof.

4039|TRANSLATION

4040|"In this way, like a madman, I have explained the meaning

>|of just one verse. I do not know who will take this as

>|evidence.

4041|Madhya 24.323

4042|TEXT 323

4043|TEXT

4044|Õ±÷±-ÎýÃÃd Îlõ± ÎLÁýÃÃ 'õ±îRÂh' ýÃÃlþ h

4045|Ûý×ÃÃðÔÃN(c)† ÂtÂ±áõNîÂõþ ÕnS æÃ±dlþ N" 323 N

4046|ama-hena yeba keha 'vatula' haya

4047|ei-drste bhagavatera artha janaya"

4048|SYNONYMS

4049|ama-hena-exactly like Me; yeba-anyone who; keha-a person;

>|vatula haya-becomes a madman; ei-drste-according to this

>|process; bhagavatera-of Srimad-Bhagavatam; artha-import;

>|janaya-he can understand.

4050|TRANSLATION

4051|"If one becomes a madman like Me, he may also understand

>|the meaning of Srimad-Bhagavatam by this process."

4052|PURPORT

4053|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu plainly explains that Srimad-

>|Bhagavatam cannot be understood by those who are materially

>|situated. In other words, one has to become a madman like

>|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu. Apart from being the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead, Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu is an

>|acarya who exhibited love of God like a madman. According

>|to His own written verse, yugayitam nimesena. He says that

>|for Him, "a moment seems to last twelve years." Caksusa

>|pravrsayitam: "My tears are flowing like torrents of rain."

>|Sunyayitam jagat sarvam: "I feel as if the entire universe

>|were vacant." Why? Govinda-virahena me: "Due to My being

>|separated from Govinda, Krsna."

4054|One can understand Srimad-Bhagavatam only by following in

>|the footsteps of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, who was mad for

>|Krsna. We cannot, of course, imitate Sri Caitanya

>|Mahaprabhu. It is not possible. However, unless one is very

>|serious about understanding Krsna, he cannot understand

>|Srimad-Bhagavatam. Srimad-Bhagavatam gives the full

>|narration of Krsna's transcendental activities. The first

>|nine cantos explain who Krsna is, and the Lord's birth and

>|activities are narrated in the Tenth Canto. In the Bhagavad-

>|gita it is stated , janma karma ca me divyam. Krsna's

>|appearance and disappearance are transcendental, not

>|mundane. A person is eligible to return home, back to

>|Godhead, if he perfectly understands Krsna and His

>|appearance and disappearance. This is verified by Krsna

>|Himself in the Bhagavad-gita (4.9): tyaktva deham punar

>|janma naiti mam eti so 'rjuna [Bg. 4.9].

4055|It is therefore concluded that one has to learn about Krsna

>|from Srimad-Bhagavatam and the Bhagavad-gita, and one has

>|to follow in the footsteps of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu.

>|Those who do not follow Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu cannot

>|understand the Bhagavad-gita and Srimad-Bhagavatam.

4056|Madhya 24.324

4057|TEXT 324

4058|TEXT

4059|óRdÐ ud±îd LÁNýÃÃ lR¿nÂl' ðRÃý×ÃÃ LÁNõþ h

4060|"›¶tRÂ Õ±:± ¿ðÃh± 'Æõøžõ¦œÔ¿îÂ' LÁ¿õþõ±Nõþ N 324 N

4061|punah sanatana kahe yudi' dui kare

4062|"prabhu ajna dila 'vaisnava-smrti' karibare

4063|SYNONYMS

4064|punah-again; sanatana-Sanatana Gosvami; kahe-says; yudi'

>|dui kare-folding his two hands; prabhu ajna dila-Your

>|Lordship has ordered me; vaisnava-smrti karibare-to write a

>|directory of Vaisnava activities.

4065|TRANSLATION

4066|Folding his hands, Sanatana Gosvami said, "My Lord, You

>|ordered me to write a directory about the activities of

>|Vaisnavas.

4067|Madhya 24.325

4068|TEXT 325

4069|TEXT

4070|÷R¿Ûž-dNaÂ-æÃ±¿îÂ, ¿LÁrRÃ d± æÃ±NdD± Õ±aÂ±õþ h

4071|Î÷±-ÆýÃÃNîÂ ÆLÁNrÃ ýÃÃlþ ¦œÔ¿îÂ-óõþaÂ±õþ N 325 N

4072|muni-nica-jati, kichu na janon acara

4073|mo-haite kaiche haya smrti-paracara

4074|SYNONYMS

4075|muni-I; nica-jati-belong to a lower caste; kichu-anything;

>|na-not; janon-I know; acara-about proper behavior; mo-haite-

>|from me; kaiche-how; haya-there is; smrti-paracara-

>|propagation of the directions of Vaisnava behavior.

4076|TRANSLATION

4077|"I am a most lowborn person. I have no knowledge of good

>|behavior. How is it possible for me to write authorized

>|directions about Vaisnava activities?"

4078|PURPORT

4079|Actually Sanatana Gosvami belonged to a very respectable

>|brahmana family. Nonetheless, he submitted himself as a

>|fallen, lowborn person because he had served in the

>|Muslim government. A brahmana is never supposed to

>|engage in anyone's service. Serving others for

>|a livelihood (paricaryatmakam karma [Bg. 18.44]) is the

>|business of sudras. The brahmana is always independent and

>|busy studying sastra and preaching sastra to subordinate

>|social members such as ksatriyas and vaisyas. Sanatana

>|Gosvami felt unfit to write Vaisnava smrti about the

>|behavior of Vaisnavas because he had fallen from the

>|brahminical position. Thus Sanatana Gosvami clearly admits

>|that the brahminical culture should be standardized.

>|Presently in India, so-called brahmanas are almost all

>|engaged in some mundane service, and they do not understand

>|the import of the Vedic sastras. Nonetheless, they are

>|passing themselves off as brahmanas on the basis of birth.

>|In this connection, Sanatana Gosvami declares that a

>|brahmana cannot be engaged in anyone's service if he wants

>|to take a leading part in society. In Srimad-Bhagavatam

>|Narada Muni states that even if a brahmana is in a

>|difficult position, he should not accept the occupation of

>|a sudra. This means that he should not be engaged in

>|service for another, for this is the business of dogs.

>|Under the circumstances, Sanatana Gosvami felt very low

>|because he had accepted a position of service in the

>|Muslim government. The conclusion is that no one should

>|claim to be a brahmana simply by birthright while engaging

>|in someone else's service.

4080|Madhya 24.326

4081|TEXT 326

4082|TEXT

4083|uÓS LÁ¿õþ' ¿ðÃú± l¿ðÃ LÁõþýÃÃ nÂ×óNðÃú h

4084|Õ±óNd LÁõþýÃÃ l¿ðÃ ý+ðÃNlþ ›¶Nõú N 326 N

4085|sutra kari' disa yadi karaha upadesa

4086|apane karaha yadi hrdaye pravesa

4087|SYNONYMS

4088|sutra kari'-making a synopsis; disa-direction; yadi-if;

>|karaha upadesa-You kindly instruct; apane-personally;

>|karaha-You do; yadi-if; hrdaye pravesa-entering into me or

>|manifesting in my heart.

4089|TRANSLATION

4090|Sanatana Gosvami then requested the Lord, "Please

>|personally tell me how I can write this difficult book

>|about Vaisnava behavior. Please manifest Yourself in my

>|heart.

4091|PURPORT

4092|The writing of Vaisnava literatures is not a function for

>|ordinary men. Vaisnava literatures are not mental

>|concoctions. They are all authorized literatures meant to

>|guide those who are going to be Vaisnavas. Under these

>|circumstances, an ordinary man cannot give his own opinion.

>|His opinion must always correspond with the conclusion of

>|the Vedas. Unless one is fully qualified in Vaisnava

>|behavior and authorized by superior authority (the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead), one cannot write Vaisnava

>|literatures or purports and commentaries on Srimad-

>|Bhagavatam and the Bhagavad-gita.

4093|Madhya 24.327

4094|TEXT 327

4095|TEXT

4096|îÂNõ îÂ±õþ ¿ðÃú± ¦£RÂNõþ Î÷±-dNNaÂõþ ý+ðÃlþ h

4097|T«õþ îRÂ¿÷,-Îl LÁõþ±ýÃÃ, Îuý×ÃÃ ¿uX ýÃÃlþ N" 327 N

4098|tabe tara disa sphure mo-nicera hrdaya

4099|isvara tumi,-ye karaha, sei siddha haya"

4100|SYNONYMS

4101|tabe-if You do so; tara-of that; disa-the process of

>|writing; sphure-manifests; mo-nicera-of someone lowborn

>|like me; hrdaya-in the heart; isvara tumi-You are the

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead; ye karaha-whatever You

>|cause to do; sei siddha haya-that is perfectly done.

4102|TRANSLATION

4103|"If You would please manifest Yourself within my heart and

>|personally direct me in writing this book, then, although I

>|am lowborn, I may hope to be able to write it. You can do

>|this because You are the Supreme Personality of Godhead

>|Yourself, and whatever You direct is perfect."

4104|Madhya 24.328

4105|TEXT 328

4106|TEXT

4107|›¶tRÂ LÁNýÃÃ,–"Îl LÁ¿õþNîÂ LÁ¿õþõ± îRÂ¿÷ ÷d h

4108|LÔÁøž Îuý×ÃÃ Îuý×ÃÃ ÎîÂ±÷± LÁõþ±Nõ ¦£RÂõþí N 328 N

4109|prabhu kahe,-"ye karite kariba tumi mana

4110|krsna sei sei toma karabe sphurana

4111|SYNONYMS

4112|prabhu kahe-Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu said; ye-whatever;

>|karite-to do; kariba tumi mana-you want; krsna-Lord Krsna;

>|sei sei-that; toma-to you; karabe sphurana-will manifest.

4113|TRANSLATION

4114|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu replied, "Whatever you want to do

>|you will be able to do correctly by Lord Krsna's favor. He

>|will manifest the real purport.

4115|PURPORT

4116|Sanatana Gosvami was a pure devotee of Krsna. A pure

>|devotee has no business other than serving Krsna;

>|consequently Krsna is always ready to help him. This

>|benediction was given by Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu to

>|Sanatana Gosvami, who was authorized to write Vaisnava

>|smrti. Sanatana Gosvami was a pure devotee of the Lord, and

>|through the blessings of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu he was

>|able to write the book perfectly.

4117|Madhya 24.329

4118|TEXT 329

4119|TEXT

4120|îÂn±¿ó Ûý×ÃÃ uÓNSõþ qd ¿ðÃáAðÃõþúd h

4121|uLÁ±õþí ¿h¿m Õ±NðÃN &-Õ±|lþí N 329 N

4122|tathapi ei sutrera suna dig-darasana

4123|sakarana likhi adau guru-asrayana

4124|SYNONYMS

4125|tathapi-still; ei sutrera-of the synopsis of this book;

>|suna-hear; dik-darasana-an indication; sakarana-the cause;

>|likhi-we should write; adau-in the beginning; guru-asrayana-

>|accepting a bona fide spiritual master.

4126|TRANSLATION

4127|"Because you asked Me for a synopsis, please hear these few

>|indications. In the beginning describe how one must take

>|shelter of a bona fide spiritual master.

4128|Madhya 24.330

4129|TEXT 330

4130|TEXT

4131|&hŽÂí, ¿úø¸IhŽÂí, ÎðDÃ±ýÃÃ±õþ óõþNŽÂí h

4132|ÎuõI-tÂáõ±dA, uõS÷La-¿õaÂ±õþí N 330 N

4133|guru-laksana, sisya-laksana, donhara pariksana

4134|sevya-bhagavan, sarva-mantra-vicarana

4135|SYNONYMS

4136|guru-laksana-the symptoms of a bona fide spiritual master;

>|sisya-laksana-the symptoms of a bona fide disciple; donhara-

>|of both; pariksana-the testing; sevya-bhagavan-the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead is worshipable; sarva-mantra-

>|vicarana-consideration of the different types of mantras.

4137|TRANSLATION

4138|"your book should describe the characteristics of

>|the bona fide guru and the bona fide disciple. Then, before

>|accepting a spiritual master, one can be assured of the

>|spiritual master's position. Similarly, the spiritual

>|master can also be assured of the disciple's position. The

>|Supreme Personality of Godhead, Krsna, should be described

>|as the worshipable object, and you should describe the bija-

>|mantra for the worship of Krsna, as well as that for Rama

>|and for other expansions of the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead.

4139|PURPORT

4140|In the Padma Purana, the characteristics of the guru, the

>|bona fide spiritual master, have been described:

4141|maha-bhagavata-srestho brahmano vai gurur nrnam

4142|sarvesam eva lokanam asau pujyo yatha harih

4143|maha-kula-prasuto 'pi sarva-yajnesu diksitah

4144|sahasra -sakhadhyayi ca na guruh syad avaisnavah

4145|The guru must be situated on the topmost platform of

>|devotional service. There are three classes of devotees,

>|and the guru must be accepted from the topmost class. The

>|first- class devotee is the spiritual master for all

>|kinds of people. It is said, gurur nrnam. The word nrnam

>|means "of all human beings." The guru is not limited to a

>|particular group. It is stated in the Upadesamrta of Rupa

>|Gosvami that a guru is a gosvami, a controller of the

>|senses and the mind. Such a guru can accept disciples from

>|all over the world. Prthivim sa sisyat. This is the test of

>|the guru .

4146|In India there are many so-called gurus, and they are

>|limited to a certain district or a province. They do not

>|even travel about India, yet they declare themselves to be

>|jagad-guru, the guru of the whole world. Such cheating

>|gurus should not be accepted. Anyone can see how the bona

>|fide spiritual master accepts disciples from all over the

>|world. The guru is a qualified brahmana; therefore he knows

>|Brahman and Parabrahman. He thus devotes his life for the

>|service of Parabrahman. The bona fide spiritual master who

>|accepts disciples from all over the world is also worshiped

>|all over the world because of his qualities. Lokanam asau

>|pujyo yatha harih: the people of the world worship him just

>|as they worship the Supreme Personality of Godhead. All

>|these honors are offered to him because he strictly follows

>|the brahminical principles and teaches these principles to

>|his disciples. Such a person is called an acarya because he

>|knows the principles of devotional service, he behaves in

>|that way himself, and he teaches his disciples to follow in

>|his footsteps. Thus he is an acarya or jagad-guru. Even

>|though a person is born in a brahminical family and is very

>|expert in performing sacrifices, he cannot be accepted as a

>|guru if he is not a strict Vaisnava. A guru is a brahmana

>|by qualification, and he can turn others into brahmanas

>|according to the sastric principles and brahminical

>|qualifications. Brahmanism is not a question of heredity.

>|In Srimad-Bhagavatam (7.11.35) Sri Narada Muni tells

>|Maharaja Yudhisthira what a brahmana is. He states that if

>|brahminical qualifications are observed in ksatriyas,

>|vaisyas or even sudras, one should accept them as brahmanas.

>| In this regard, Srila Sridhara Svami has commented:

>|samadibhir eva brahmanadi-vyavaharo mukhyah, na jati-

>|matradity aha- yasyeti . yad yadi anyatra varnantare 'pi

>|drsyeta, tad-varnantaram tenaiva laksana-nimittenaiva

>|varnena vinirdiset, na tu jati-nimittenety arthah: "The

>|most important criterion for deciding whether to deal with

>|someone as a brahmana or as a member of another varna is

>|the presence or absence of self-control and similar

>|brahminical qualities. We should not judge primarily

>|according to superficial characteristics like birth. This

>|is stated in the verse beginning yasya [SB 7.11.35]. If the

>|qualities of one varna are seen in someone born in another,

>|he should be designated according to the varna of his

>|qualities, not that of his birth."

4147|There is a similar statement made by Nilakantha, a

>|commentator on the Mahabharata: sudro 'pi samady-upeto

>|brahmana eva brahmano 'pi kamady-upetah sudra eva. "

>|Although one may be born in a sudra family, if he is

>|endowed with the brahminical qualities, beginning with sama

>|[control of the mind], he is to be accepted as a brahmana.

>|Although one may be born in a brahmana family, if he is

>|endowed with the qualities beginning with kama [lust], he

>|is to be considered a sudra." No one should present himself

>|as a brahmana simply on the basis of being born in a

>|brahminical family. One must be qualified by the

>|brahminical qualities mentioned in the sastras,

>|particularly the Bhagavad- gita ( 18.42):

4148|samo damas tapah saucam ksantir arjavam eva ca

4149|jnanam vijnanam astikyam brahma

>|-karma

>| svabhava - jam

4150|" Peacefulness , self

>|-control, austerity

>|, purity , tolerance

>|, honesty

>|, knowledge ,

>| wisdom and

>|religiousness

>|-these

>| are the

>| natural qualities by

>|which the brahmanas

>| work."

4151|Unless one is qualified with all these attributes, he

>|cannot be accepted as a brahmana. It is not a question of

>|simply taking birth in a brahmana family. In this regard,

>|Srila Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Thakura remarks that

>|Narottama dasa Thakura and Syamananda Gosvami, although not

>|born in brahmana families, are accepted as bona fide

>|spiritual masters because they were brahmanas by

>|qualification. Personalities like Sri Ganga-narayana,

>|Ramakrsna and many others, who were actually born in

>|brahmana families, accepted Narottama dasa Thakura and

>|Syamananda Gosvami as their spiritual masters.

4152|The maha-bhagavata is one who decorates his body with

>|tilaka and whose name indicates him to be a servant of

>|Krsna by the word dasa. He is also initiated by a bona fide

>|spiritual master and is expert in worshiping the Deity,

>|chanting mantras correctly, performing sacrifices, offering

>|prayers to the Lord and performing sankirtana. He knows

>|how to serve the Supreme Personality of Godhead and how to

>|respect a Vaisnava. When one has attained the topmost

>|position of maha-bhagavata, he is to be accepted as a guru

>|and worshiped exactly like Hari, the Personality of Godhead.

>| Only such a person is eligible to occupy the post of a

>|guru. However, if one is highly qualified but is not a

>|Vaisnava, he cannot be accepted as a guru. One cannot be a

>|brahmana unless one is a Vaisnava. If one is a Vaisnava, he

>|is already a brahmana. If a guru is completely qualified as

>|a Vaisnava, he must be accepted as a brahmana even if he is

>|not born in a brahmana family. The caste system method of

>|distinguishing a brahmana by birth is not acceptable when

>|applied to a bona fide spiritual master. A spiritual master

>|is a qualified brahmana and acarya. If one is not a

>|qualified brahmana, he is not expert in studying the Vedic

>|literatures. Nana-sastra-vicaranaika-nipunau. Every

>|Vaisnava is a spiritual master, and a spiritual master is

>|automatically expert in brahminical behavior. He also

>|understands the Vedic sastras.

4153|Similarly, a disciple's qualifications must be observed by

>|the spiritual master before he is accepted as a disciple.

>|In our Krsna consciousness movement, the requirement is

>|that one must be prepared to give up the four pillars of

>|sinful life-illicit sex, meat-eating, intoxication and

>|gambling. In Western countries especially, we first observe

>|whether a potential disciple is prepared to follow the

>|regulative principles. Then he is given the name of a

>|Vaisnava servant and initiated to chant the Hare Krsna maha-

>|mantra, at least sixteen rounds daily. In this way the

>|disciple renders devotional service under the guidance of

>|the spiritual master or his representative for at least six

>|months to a year. He is then recommended for a second

>|initiation, during which a sacred thread is offered and the

>|disciple is accepted as a bona fide brahmana. Srila

>|Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Thakura introduced the system of

>|giving the sacred thread to a bona fide Vaisnava, and we

>|are following in his footsteps. The qualifications of

>|a bona fide disciple are described in Srimad-Bhagavatam (11.

>|10.6) as follows:

4154|amanya-matsaro dakso nirmamo drdha-sauhrdah

4155|asatvaro 'rtha- jijnasur anasuyur amogha-vak

4156|The disciple must have the following qualifications. He

>|must give up interest in the material bodily conception. He

>|must give up material lust, anger, greed, illusion, madness

>|and envy. He should be interested only in understanding the

>|science of God, and he should be ready to consider all

>|points in this matter. He should no longer think, "I am

>|this body," or, "This thing belongs to me." One must love

>|the spiritual master with unflinching faith, and one must

>|be very steady and fixed. The bona fide disciple should be

>|inquisitive to understand transcendental subject matter. He

>|must not search out faults among good qualities, and he

>|should no longer be interested in material topics. His only

>|interest should be Krsna, the Supreme Personality of

>|Godhead.

4157|As far as the mutual testing of the spiritual master and

>|disciple is concerned, Srila Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati

>|Thakura explains that a bona fide disciple must be very

>|inquisitive to understand the transcendental subject matter.

>| As stated in Srimad-Bhagavatam (11.3.21):

4158|tasmad gurum prapadyeta

4159| jijnasuh sreya uttamam

4160|"One who is inquisitive to understand the highest goal and

>|benefit of life must approach a bona fide spiritual master

>|and surrender unto him." A serious disciple must be alert

>|when selecting a bona fide spiritual master. He must be

>|sure that the spiritual master can deliver all the

>|transcendental necessities. The spiritual master must

>|observe how inquisitive the disciple is and how eager he is

>|to understand the transcendental subject matter. The

>|spiritual master should study the disciple's

>|inquisitiveness for no less than six months or a year. A

>|spiritual master should not be very anxious to accept a

>|disciple because of his material opulences. Sometimes a big

>|businessman or landlord may approach a spiritual master for

>|initiation. Those who are materially interested are called

>|visayis (karmis), which indicates that they are very fond

>|of sense gratification. Such visayis sometimes approach a

>|famous guru and ask to become a disciple just as a matter

>|of fashion. Sometimes visayis pose as disciples of a

>|reputed spiritual master just to cover their activities and

>|advertise themselves as advanced in spiritual knowledge. In

>|other words, they want to attain material success. A

>|spiritual master must be very careful in this regard. Such

>|business is going on all over the world. The spiritual

>|master does not accept a materially opulent disciple just

>|to advertise the fact that he has such a big disciple. He

>|knows that by associating with such visayi disciples, he

>|may fall down. One who accepts a visayi disciple is not a

>|bona fide spiritual master. Even if he is, his position may

>|be damaged due to association with an unscrupulous visayi.

>|If a so-called spiritual master accepts a disciple for his

>|personal benefit or for material gain, the relationship

>|between the spiritual master and the disciple turns into a

>|material affair, and the spiritual master becomes like a

>|smarta-guru. There are many caste gosvamis who

>|professionally create some disciples who do not care for

>|them or their instructions. Such spiritual masters are

>|satisfied simply to get some material benefits from their

>|disciples. Such a relationship is condemned by Srila

>|Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Thakura, who calls such spiritual

>|masters and disciples a society of cheaters and cheated.

>|They are also called baulas or prakrta-sahajiyas. Their aim

>|is to make the connection between the spiritual master and

>|the disciple into a very cheap thing. They are not serious

>|in wanting to understand spiritual life.

4161|The words sevya bhagavan in this verse of the Caitanya-

>|caritamrta are important. Bhagavan indicates the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead, Lord Visnu. Lord Visnu alone is

>|worshipable. There is no need to worship demigods. This is

>|confirmed in the Bhagavad-gita (7.20):

4162|kamais tais tair hrta-jnanah prapadyante 'nya-devatah

4163|tam tam niyamam asthaya prakrtya

>|niyatah svaya

4164|"Those whose intelligence has been stolen by

>|material desires surrender unto demigods and follow the

>|particular rules and regulations of worship according to

>|their own natures."

4165|It is also stated in the Skanda Purana:

4166|vasudevam parityajya yo 'nya-devam upasate

4167|sva -mataram parityajya sva -pacim vandate hi sah

4168|"A person who worships the demigods and gives up Lord

>|Vasudeva is like a man who gives up the protection of his

>|mother for the shelter of a witch."

4169|It is also stated by Lord Krsna in the Bhagavad-gita (9.23)

>|:

4170|ye 'py anya-devata-bhakta yajante sraddhayanvitah

4171|te 'pi mam eva kaunteya yajanty avidhi-

>|purvakam

4172|" Those who are devotees of other gods and who

>|worship them with faith actually worship only Me, O son of

>|Kunti, but they do so in a wrong way."

4173|Demigods are also living entities and parts and parcels

>|of Krsna. Therefore in one sense one worships Krsna when

>|one worships the demigods, but not in the proper way. There

>|is a proper method to water a tree: one should water the

>|root. But if one waters the leaves and branches instead, he

>|is simply wasting his time. If one worships the demigods to

>|the exclusion of Lord Visnu, his rewards will only be

>|material. As confirmed by Lord Krsna in the Bhagavad-

>|gita (7.23):

4174|anta -vat tu phalam tesam tad bhavaty alpa -

>|medhasam

4175|devan deva - yajo

>|yanti mad -bhakta yanti mam api

4176|"Men of small intelligence worship the demigods,

>|and their fruits are limited and temporary. Those who

>|worship the demigods go to the planets of the demigods, but

>|My devotees ultimately reach My supreme planet."

4177|Demigod worship is meant for unintelligent men

>|because the benefits derived from demigod worship are all

>|material, temporary and retractable. It is also stated in

>|the Padma Purana:

4178|yas tu narayanam devam brahma -rudradi-daivataih

4179|samatvenaiva vikseta sa pasandi bhaved dhruvam

4180| [ Cc

>|. Madhya

>|18. 116 ]

4181|"Whoever thinks Lord Visnu and the demigods are on the same

>|level is to be immediately considered a rogue as far as

>|spiritual understanding is concerned."

4182|There are three modes of nature in the material world, but

>|when one is situated spiritually, he is above the material

>|modes, even though he lives in this material world. As Lord

>|Krsna states in the Bhagavad-gita (14.26):

4183|mam ca yo 'vyabhicarena bhakti-yogena sevate

4184|sa gunan samatityaitan brahma- bhuyaya kalpate

4185|" One who engages in full devotional service,

>|unfailing in all circumstances, at once transcends the

>|modes of material nature and thus comes to the level of

>|Brahman." In material consciousness, however, even one who

>|is situated in the mode of goodness is susceptible to

>|pollution by the modes of passion and ignorance. When the

>|mode of goodness is mixed with the mode of passion, one

>|worships the sun-god, Vivasvan. When the mode of goodness

>|is mixed with the mode of ignorance, one worships Ganapati,

>|or Ganesa. When the mode of passion is mixed with the mode

>|of ignorance, one worships Durga, or Kali, the external

>|potency. When one is simply in the mode of ignorance, one

>|becomes a devotee of Lord Siva because Lord Siva is the

>|predominating deity of the mode of ignorance within this

>|material world. However, when one is completely free from

>|the influence of all the modes of material nature, one

>|becomes a pure Vaisnava on the devotional platform. As

>|Srila Rupa Gosvami states in the Bhakti-rasamrta-sindhu:

4186|anyabhilasita -sunyam jnana- karmady -anavrtam

4187|anukulyena krsnanusilanam bhaktir uttama

4188| [ Cc. Madhya 19.167]

4189|"One should render transcendental

>|loving service to the Supreme Lord Krsna favorably and

>|without desire for material profit or gain through fruitive

>|activities or philosophical speculation. That is called

>|pure devotional service."

4190|The position of visuddha-sattva is the position of

>|uncontaminated goodness. On that platform one can then

>|understand, aradhyo bhagavan vrajesa-tanayas tad- dhama

>|vrndavanam: "The Supreme Personality of Godhead, the son of

>|Nanda Maharaja, is to be worshiped along with His

>|transcendental abode, Vrndavana."

4191|The word sarva -mantra-vicarana in the present

>|verse of Sri Caitanya-caritamrta means "considering all

>|different types of mantras." There are different kinds of

>|mantras for different kinds of devotees. There is the

>|mantra known as the dvadasaksara mantra, composed of twelve

>|syllables, and there is the mantra composed of eighteen

>|syllables. Similarly, there are the Narasimha mantra, the

>|Rama mantra, the Gopala mantra and so on. Each and every

>|mantra has its own spiritual significance. The spiritual

>|master has to select a mantra for his disciple according to

>|the disciple's ability to chant different mantras.

4192|Madhya 24.331

4193|TEXT 331

4194|TEXT

4195|÷La-Õ¿sLÁ±õþN, ÷La-¿uXI±¿ðÃ-Îú±sd h

4196|ðÃNŽÂ±, ›¶±îÂÐ¦œÔ¿îÂ-LÔÁîÂI, ÎúNaÂ, Õ±aÂ÷d N 331 N

4197|mantra-adhikari, mantra-siddhy-adi-sodhana

4198|diksa, pratah-smrti-krtya, sauca, acamana

4199|SYNONYMS

4200|mantra-adhikari-qualification for receiving mantra

>|initiation; mantra-siddhi-adi-the perfection of the mantra

>|and so on; sodhana-purification; diksa-initiation; pratah-

>|smrti-krtya-morning duties and remembrance of the Supreme

>|Lord; sauca-cleanliness; acamana-washing the mouth and

>|other parts of the body.

4201|TRANSLATION

4202|"You should discuss the qualifications necessary for

>|receiving a mantra, the perfection of the mantra, the

>|purification of the mantra, initiation, morning duties,

>|remembrance of the Supreme Lord, cleanliness and washing

>|the mouth and other parts of the body.

4203|PURPORT

4204|The following injunction is given in the Hari-bhakti-vilasa

>|(1.194) regarding mantra-adhikari, the qualification for

>|receiving mantra initiation:

4205|tantrikesu ca mantresu diksayam yositam api

4206|sadhvinam adhikaro 'sti sudradinam ca sad-dhiyam

4207|"Sudras and women who are chaste and

>|sincerely interested in understanding the Absolute Truth

>|are qualified to be initiated with the pancaratrika-mantras.

>|" This is confirmed by Lord Krsna in the Bhagavad-gita (9.

>|32):

4208|mam hi partha vyapasritya ye 'pi syuh papa- yonayah

4209|striyo

>| vaisyas tatha sudras

>| te 'pi yanti param gatim

4210|"O son of Prtha, those who take shelter in Me,

>| though they be of lower birth-women, vaisyas [merchants]

>|and sudras [workers]-can attain the supreme destination."

4211|If one actually wants to serve Krsna, it doesn' t matter

>|whether one is a sudra, vaisya or even a woman . If one

>|is sincerely eager to chant the Hare Krsna mantra or diksa-

>|mantra , one is qualified to be initiated according to the

>|pancaratrika process. However, according to Vedic

>|principles, only a brahmana who is fully engaged in his

>|occupational duties can be initiated. Sudras and women are

>|not admitted to a vaidika initiation. Unless one is fit

>|according to the estimation of the spiritual master, one

>|cannot accept a mantra from the pancaratrika-vidhi or the

>|vaidika-vidhi. When one is fit to accept the mantra, one is

>|initiated by the pancaratrika-vidhi or the vaidika-vidhi.

>|In any case, the result is the same.

4212|Regarding mantra -siddhy-adi-sodhana, the efficacy of

>|the mantra, Srila Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Thakura gives

>|sixteen divisions, which are confirmed in the Hari-bhakti-

>|vilasa (beginning with 1.204):

4213|siddha-sadhya-susiddhari-

4214| kramaj jneyo vicaksanaih

4215|These are (1) siddha, (2) sadhya, (3) susiddha and (4) ari.

>|These four principles can be divided further: (1) siddha-

>|siddha, (2) siddha-sadhya, (3) siddha-susiddha, (4) siddha-

>|ari, (5) sadhya-siddha, (6) sadhya-sadhya, (7) sadhya-

>|susiddha, (8) sadhya-ari, (9) susiddha-siddha, (10)

>|susiddha-sadhya, (11) susiddha-susiddha, (12) susiddha-ari,

>|(13) ari-siddha, (14) ari-sadhya, (15) ari-susiddha, and (

>|16) ari-ari.

4216|Those who are initiated with the eighteen-syllable mantra

>|do not need to consider the above-mentioned sixteen

>|divisions. As enjoined in the Hari-bhakti-vilasa (1.215,

>|219, 220):

4217|na catra satrava dosa narnasvadi-vicarana

4218|rksa-rasi-vicaro va na kartavyo manau priye

4219|natra cintyo 'ri- suddhyadir nari -mitradi-laksanam

4220|siddha -sadhya-susiddhari-rupa natra vicarana

4221|There is sodhana , or purification of the mantra, but

>|there is no such consideration for the Krsna mantra.

>|Balitvat krsna- mantranam samskarapeksanam na hi: "The

>|Krsna mantra is so strong that there is no question of

>|sodhana." (Hari-bhakti-vilasa 1.235)

4222|As far as diksa is concerned, one should consult Madhya-

>|lila 15.108. On the whole, when a person is initiated

>|according to the pancaratrika-vidhi, he has already

>|attained the position of a brahmana. This is enjoined in

>|the Hari- bhakti-vilasa (2.12):

4223|yatha kancanatam yati kamsyam rasa- vidhanatah

4224|tatha diksa-vidhanena dvijatvam jayate nrnam

4225|"As bell metal can be turned into gold when treated with

>|mercury, a disciple initiated by a bona fide guru

>|immediately attains the position of a brahmana."

4226|As far as the time of diksa (initiation) is concerned,

>|everything depends on the position of the guru. As soon as

>|a bona fide guru is received by chance or by a program, one

>|should immediately take the opportunity to receive

>|initiation. In the book called Tattva-sagara, it is stated:

4227|durlabhe sad-gurunam ca sakrt-sanga upasthite

4228|tad-anujna yada labdha sa diksavasaro mahan

4229|grame va yadi varanye ksetre va divase nisi

4230|agacchati gurur daivad yatha diksa tad-ajnaya

4231|yadaiveccha tada diksa guror ajnanurupatah

4232|na tirtham na vratam hemo na snanam na japa-kriya

4233|diksayah karanam kintu sveccha-prapte tu sad-gurau

4234|"If by chance one gets a sad-guru, it doesn't

>|matter whether one is in the temple or the forest. If the

>|sad- guru, the bona fide spiritual master, agrees, one

>|can be initiated immediately, without waiting for a

>|suitable time or place."

4235|Concerning pratah -smrti, remembrance of the Lord in the

>|morning, in the early morning hours (known as brahma-

>|muhurta) one should get up and immediately chant the Hare

>|Krsna mantra, or at least "Krsna, Krsna, Krsna." In this

>|way, one should remember Krsna. Some slokas or prayers

>|should also be chanted. By chanting, one immediately

>|becomes auspicious and transcendental to the infection of

>|material qualities. Actually one has to chant and remember

>|Lord Krsna twenty-four hours daily, or as much as possible:

4236|smartavyah satatam visnur vismartavyo na jatucit

4237|sarve vidhi-nisedhah syur etayor eva kinkarah

4238|" Krsna is the origin of Lord Visnu. He should always

>|be remembered and never forgotten at any time. All the

>|rules and prohibitions mentioned in the sastras should be

>|the servants of these two principles." This is a quotation

>|from the Padma Purana, from the portion called Brhat-

>|sahasra-nama- stotra .

4239|The word pratah -krtya in the present verse of the

>|Caitanya-caritamrta means that one should evacuate

>|regularly in the morning and then cleanse himself by taking

>|a bath. One has to gargle (acamana) and brush his teeth (

>|danta-dhavana). He should do this either with twigs or a

>|toothbrush-whatever is available. This will purify the

>|mouth. Then one should take his bath. Actually householders

>|and vanaprasthas should bathe two times a day (pratar-

>|madhyahnayoh snanam vanaprastha-grhasthayoh). A sannyasi

>|should bathe three times daily, and a brahmacari may take

>|only one bath a day. Whenever one is not able to bathe in

>|water, he can bathe by chanting the Hare Krsna mantra. One

>|also has to perform his sandhyadi-vandana-that is, one has

>|to chant his Gayatri mantra three times daily-morning, noon

>|and evening.

4240|Madhya 24.332

4241|TEXT 332

4242|TEXT

4243|ðÃ(tm)Ls±õd, ¦§±d, ugI±¿ðÃ õµd h

4244|&Nuõ±, Øs‰SóRHaÂS±¿ðÃ-s±õþí N 332 N

4245|danta-dhavana, snana, sandhyadi vandana

4246|guru-seva, urdhva-pundra-cakradi-dharana

4247|SYNONYMS

4248|danta-dhavana-brushing the teeth; snana-bath; sandhya-adi

>|vandana-regular chanting of the mantras; guru-seva-serving

>|the spiritual master; urdhva-pundra-wearing perpendicularly

>|straight tilaka; cakra-adi-dharana-stamping the body with

>|different names and symbols of the Lord.

4249|TRANSLATION

4250|"You should describe how in the morning one should

>|regularly brush his teeth, take his bath, offer prayers to

>|the Lord and offer obeisances to the spiritual master. You

>|should also describe how one should render service to the

>|spiritual master and paint one's body in twelve places with

>|urdhva-pundra [tilaka] , as well as how one should stamp

>|one's body with the holy names of the Lord or

>| the symbols of the Lord, such as the disc

>|and club.

4251|Madhya 24.333

4252|TEXT 333

4253|TEXT

4254|Îá±óNaÂµd-÷±hI-sÔ¿îÂ, îRÂhuN-Õ±ýÃÃõþí h

4255|õ¦a-óNêÂ-áÔýÃÃ-uS¦¨±õþ, LÔÁøž-›¶Nõ±sd N 333 N

4256|gopicandana-malya-dhrti, tulasi-aharana

4257|vastra-pitha-grha-samskara, krsna-prabodhana

4258|SYNONYMS

4259|gopi-candana-gopi-candana (available in Vrndavana and

>|Dvaraka); malya-beads on the neck; dhrti-wearing regularly;

>|tulasi-aharana-collecting tulasi leaves; vastra-cloth;

>|pitha-temple; grha-the house; samskara-cleansing; krsna-

>|prabodhana-awakening the Deity of Lord Krsna.

4260|TRANSLATION

4261|"After this, you should describe how one should decorate

>|his body with gopicandana, wear neck beads, collect tulasi

>|leaves from the tulasi tree, cleanse his cloth and the

>|altar, cleanse his own house or apartment and go to the

>|temple and ring the bell just to draw the attention of Lord

>|Krsna.

4262|Madhya 24.334

4263|TEXT 334

4264|TEXT

4265|ó=, Îø¸±nÂlú, ó=±úR nÂ×óaÂ±Nõþ ÕaSÂd h

4266|ó=LÁ±h óÓæÃ± Õ±õþ¿îÂ, LÔÁNøžõþ ÎtÂ±æÃd-úlþd N 334 N

4267|panca, sodasa, pancasat upacare arcana

4268|panca-kala puja arati, krsnera bhojana-sayana

4269|SYNONYMS

4270|panca-five; sodasa-sixteen; pancasat-fifty; upacare-with

>|ingredients; arcana-offering worship; panca-kala-five times;

>| puja-worshiping; arati-offering arati; krsnera bhojana-

>|sayana-in this way offering eatables to Krsna and laying

>|Him down to rest.

4271|TRANSLATION

4272|"Also describe Deity worship, wherein one should offer food

>|to Krsna at least five times daily and in due time

>|place Him on a bed. You should also describe the process

>|for offering arati and the worship of the Lord according to

>|the list of five, sixteen or fifty ingredients.

4273|PURPORT

4274|The five ingredients for Deity worship are (1) very good

>|scents, (2) very good flowers, (3) incense, (4) a lamp and (

>|5) something edible. As for sodasopacara, the sixteen

>|ingredients, one should (1) provide a sitting place (asana),

>| (2) ask Krsna to sit down, (3) offer arghya, (4) offer

>|water to wash the legs, (5) wash the mouth, (6) offer madhu-

>|parka, (7) offer water for washing the mouth, (8) bathe

>|the Lord, (9) offer garments, (10) decorate the Lord's body

>|with ornaments, (11) offer sweet scents, (12) offer flowers

>|with good fragrance, like the rose or campaka, (13) offer

>|incense, (14) offer a lamp, (15) give good food, and (16)

>|offer prayers.

4275|In the Hari-bhakti-vilasa (11. 127 –

>|140) there is a vivid description of what is required in

>|Deity worship. There are sixty-four items mentioned. In the

>|temple, worship should be so gorgeous that all sixty-four

>|items should be available for the satisfaction of the

>|Personality of Godhead. Sometimes it is impossible to get

>|all sixty-four items; therefore we recommend that at least

>|on the first day of installation all sixty-four items

>|should be available. When the Lord is established, worship

>|with all sixty-four items should continue as far as

>|possible. The sixty-four items are as follows: (1) There

>|must be a big bell hanging in front of the temple room so

>|that whoever comes into the room can ring the bell. This

>|item is called prabodhana, or offering oneself submissively

>|to the Lord. This is the first item. (2) The visitor must

>|chant "Jaya Sri Radha-Govinda ! " or "Jaya Sri Radha-

>|Madhava !" when he rings the bell. In either case, the word

>|jaya must be uttered. (3) One should immediately offer

>|obeisances to the Lord, falling down like a stick. (4)

>|There must be regular mangala-arati in the temple during

>|the early morning, an hour and a half before the sun rises.

>|(5) There must be an asana, a sitting place before the

>|altar. This asana is for the spiritual master. The disciple

>|brings everything before the spiritual master, and the

>|spiritual master offers everything to the Supreme

>|Personality of Godhead. (6) After mangala-arati, the Deity

>|is supposed to wash His teeth by using a twig; therefore a

>|twig must be offered. (7) Water must be offered for washing

>|the Deity's feet. (8) Arghya should be offered. (9) Water

>|for acamana should be offered. (10) Madhu-parka, a small

>|bowl containing madhu (honey, a little ghee, a little water,

>| a little sugar, yogurt and milk) should be offered. This

>|is called madhu-parka-acamana. (11) One should place wooden

>|slippers before the Lord. (12) One should massage the body

>|of the Lord. (13) One should massage the body of the Lord

>|with oil. (14) With a soft, wet sponge one should remove

>|all the oil smeared over the Lord's body. (15) One should

>|bathe the Lord with water in which nicely scented flowers

>|have been soaking for some time. (16) After bathing the

>|body of the Lord with water, one should bathe Him with milk.

>| (17) Then one should bathe Him with yogurt. (18) Then one

>|should bathe Him with ghee. (19) Then one should bathe Him

>|with honey. (20) Then one should bathe Him with water in

>|which sugar has been dissolved. (21) Then one should wash

>|the Deity with water and chant this mantra:

4276|cintamani-prakara-sadmasu kalpa-vrksa-

4277| laksavrtesu surabhir abhipalayantam

4278|laksmi-sahasra-sata-sambhrama-sevyamanam

4279| govindam adi-purusam tam aham bhajami

4280| [Bs

>|. 5

>|.29 ]

4281|(22) One should dry the entire body of the Lord with a

>|towel. (23) A new dress should be put on the Lord's body. (

>|24) A sacred thread should be placed on His body. (25)

>|Water should be offered for cleansing His mouth (acamana). (

>|26) Nicely scented oils like liquid sandalwood pulp should

>|be smeared over the Lord's body. (27) All kinds of

>|ornaments and crowns should be placed on His body. (28)

>|Then one should offer flower garlands and decorative

>|flowers. (29) One should burn incense. (30) Lamps should be

>|offered. (31) Precautions should always be taken so that

>|demons and atheists cannot harm the body of the Lord. (32)

>|Food offerings should be placed before the Lord. (33)

>|Spices for chewing should be offered. (34) Betel nuts

>|should be offered. (35) At the proper time, there should be

>|arrangements so that the Lord may take rest in bed. (36)

>|The Lord's hair should be combed and decorated. (37) First-

>|class garments should be offered. (38) A first-class helmet

>|should be offered. (39) The garments should be scented. (40)

>| There should be Kaustubha jewels and other ornaments

>|offered. (41) A variety of flowers should be offered. (42)

>|Another mangala-arati should be offered. (43) A mirror

>|should be offered. (44) The Lord should be carried on a

>|nice palanquin to the altar. (45) The Lord should be seated

>|on the throne. (46) Again water should be given for the

>|washing of His feet. (47) Something again should be offered

>|for eating. (48) Evening arati should be offered. (49) The

>|Lord should be fanned with a camara fan, and an umbrella

>|should be placed over His head. (50) The Hare Krsna mantra

>|and approved songs should be sung. (51) Musical instruments

>|should be played. (52) One should dance before the Deity. (

>|53) One should circumambulate the Deity. (54) One should

>|again offer obeisances. (55) One should offer different

>|types of prayers and hymns at the Lord's lotus feet. (56)

>|One should touch the lotus feet of the Lord with one's head.

>| This may not be possible for everyone, but at least the

>|pujari should do this. (57) The flowers offered on the

>|previous day should touch one's head. (58) One should take

>|the remnants of the Lord's food. (59) One should sit before

>|the Lord and think that he is massaging the Lord's legs. (

>|60) One should decorate the Lord's bed with flowers before

>|the Lord takes His rest. (61) One should offer one's hand

>|to the Lord. (62) One should take the Deity to His bed. (63)

>| One should wash the feet of the Lord and then sit Him on

>|the bed. (64) One should place the Lord on the bed and then

>|massage His feet.

4282|Arati should be offered to the Deities five times daily-

>|early in the morning before sunrise, later in the morning,

>|at noon, in the evening and at night. This means that there

>|should be worship and a change of dress and flowers. As far

>|as the eatables are concerned, all items should be first-

>|class preparations. There should be first-class rice, dhal,

>|fruit, sweet rice, vegetables and a variety of foods to be

>|sucked, drunk and chewed. All the eatables offered to the

>|Deities should be extraordinarily excellent. In Europe and

>|America there is presently no monetary scarcity. People are

>|not poor, and if they follow these principles of Deity

>|worship, they will advance in spiritual life. As far as

>|placing the Deity in the bed is concerned, if the Deity is

>|large and heavy, it is not possible to move Him daily. It

>|is better that a small Deity, which is also worshiped, be

>|taken to the bed. This mantra should be chanted: agaccha

>|sayana-sthanam priyabhih saha kesava. "O Kesava, kindly

>|come to Your bed along with Srimati Radharani." (Hari-

>|bhakti-vilasa 11.40)

4283|The Deity should be placed in bed with Srimati Radharani,

>|and this should be indicated by bringing the wooden

>|slippers from the altar to the bedside. When the Deity is

>|laid down, His legs should be massaged. Before laying the

>|Deity down, a pot of milk and sugar should be offered to

>|Him. After taking this thick milk, the Deity should lie

>|down and should be offered betel nuts and spices to chew.

4284|Madhya 24.335

4285|TEXT 335

4286|TEXT

4287|M÷Ó¿îSÂhŽÂí, Õ±õþ ú±h¢¶±÷hŽÂí h

4288|LÔÁøžNŽÂS-l±S±, LÔÁøž÷Ó¿îSÂ-ðÃõþúd N 335 N

4289|sri-murti-laksana, ara salagrama-laksana

4290|krsna-ksetra-yatra, krsna-murti-darasana

4291|SYNONYMS

4292|sri-murti-laksana-characteristics of the Deity; ara-and;

>|salagrama-laksana-characteristics of the salagrama-sila;

>|krsna-ksetra-yatra-visiting places like Vrndavana, Dvaraka

>|and Mathura; krsna-murti-darasana-visiting the Deity in the

>|temple.

4293|TRANSLATION

4294|"The characteristics of the Deities should be discussed, as

>|well as the characteristics of the salagrama-sila. You

>|should also discuss visiting the Deities in the temple and

>|touring holy places like Vrndavana, Mathura and Dvaraka.

4295|Madhya 24.336

4296|TEXT 336

4297|TEXT

4298|d±÷÷¿ýÃÃ÷±, d±÷±óõþ±s ðÓÃNõþ õæSÃd h

4299|ÆõøžõhŽÂí, Îuõ±óõþ±s-mGd N 336 N

4300|nama-mahima, namaparadha dure varjana

4301|vaisnava-laksana, sevaparadha-khandana

4302|SYNONYMS

4303|nama-mahima-the glories of the holy name; nama-aparadha-

>|offenses in chanting the holy name; dure varjana-giving up

>|very carefully; vaisnava-laksana-the symptoms of a Vaisnava;

>| seva-aparadha-khandana-rejecting offenses in worshiping

>|the Deity.

4304|TRANSLATION

4305|"You should glorify the holy name and explain that one must

>|carefully give up offenses when chanting the holy name. You

>|should also describe the symptoms of a Vaisnava and

>|explain that one must give up or nullify all kinds of seva-

>|aparadha, offenses in Deity worship.

4306|PURPORT

4307|The devotee should always be very careful not to commit the

>|ten offenses when chanting the Hare Krsna mantra. If a

>|devotee very strictly follows the methods of Deity worship,

>|he will naturally and quickly become a pure Vaisnava. A

>|pure Vaisnava has unflinching faith in the Lord, and he

>|does not deviate at all. He is always engaged in perfect

>|Deity worship.

4308|One should also note the specific offenses against Deity

>|worship. These are mentioned in the Skanda Purana (Avanti-

>|khanda), spoken by Vyasadeva himself. One should liquidate

>|all kinds of offenses.

4309|The salagrama-sila should be worshiped with tulasi where a

>|sufficient quantity of tulasi leaves are available. Worship

>|of salagrama-sila should be introduced in all ISKCON

>|temples. Salagrama-sila is the form of the Lord's mercy. To

>|worship the Deity with the sixty-four items mentioned may

>|be a difficult job, but the Lord has become so small that

>|anyone in any temple can carefully handle Deity worship

>|simply by performing the same activities with the salagrama-

>|sila.

4310|There are thirty-two offenses to the Deity that should be

>|avoided. (1) One should not enter the temple in a vehicle.

>|Shoes and slippers should be removed before entering the

>|temple. (2) One should offer obeisances as soon as he sees

>|the Deity. (3) One should enter the temple after taking a

>|bath. In other words, one should be very clean. (4) One

>|should not offer obeisances to the Lord with one hand. (5)

>|One should not circumambulate demigods before the Deities. (

>|6) One should not spread his legs before the Deity. (7)

>| One should not sit down before the Deity with his legs

>|crossed, nor should one touch his legs with his hands. (8)

>|One should not lie down before the Deity. (9) One should

>|not eat before the Deity. (10) One should not speak lies

>|before the Deity. (11) One should not speak very loudly

>|before the Deity. (12) One should not talk nonsense before

>|the Deity. (13) One should not cry before the Deity. (14)

>|One should not deal with others before the Deity. (15) One

>|should not utter harsh words before the Deity. (16) One

>|should not cover himself with a blanket. (17) One should

>|not talk enviously of others before the Deity. (18) One

>|should not praise others before the Deity. (19) One should

>|not use slang before the Deity. (20) One should not pass

>|air before the Deity. (21) One should not neglect the sixty-

>|four items of Deity worship. (22) One should not eat

>|anything not offered to the Deity. (23) One should not

>|neglect offering seasonal fruits as soon as they are

>|available. (24) One should always offer fresh, untouched

>|fruit to the Deity. (25) One should not sit with his back

>|toward the Deity. (26) One should not offer obeisances to

>|others before the Deity. (27) One should not sit near the

>|Deity without taking the spiritual master's permission. (28)

>| One should not be proud to hear himself praised before the

>|Deity. (29) One should not blaspheme the demigods. (30) One

>|should not be unkind to others before the Deities. (31) One

>|should observe all festivals in the temple. (32) One should

>|not fight or quarrel before the Deity.

4311|Madhya 24.337

4312|TEXT 337

4313|TEXT

4314|úº-æÃh-ág-óR(c)ó-sÓó±¿ðÃ-hŽÂí h

4315|æó, d¿îÂ, ó¿õþS÷±, ðÃGõR õµd N 337 N

4316|sankha-jala-gandha-puspa-dhupadi-laksana

4317|japa, stuti, parikrama, dandavat vandana

4318|SYNONYMS

4319|sankha-of a conchshell; jala-of water; gandha-of incense or

>|scents; puspa-of flowers; dhupa-adi-of incense, and so on;

>|laksana-the characteristics; japa-murmuring; stuti-offering

>|prayers; parikrama-circumambulation; dandavat-offering

>|obeisances; vandana-offering prayers.

4320|TRANSLATION

4321|"The items of worship, such as water, conchshell, flowers,

>|incense and lamp, should be described. You should also

>|mention chanting softly, offering prayers,

>|circumambulating and offering obeisances. All these should

>|be carefully described.

4322|PURPORT

4323|All these are mentioned in the Hari-bhakti-vilasa. The

>|eighth vilasa of that book should be consulted as far as

>|possible.

4324|Madhya 24.338

4325|TEXT 338

4326|TEXT

4327|óRõþ(õþí-¿õ¿s, LÔÁøž›¶u±ðÃ-ÎtÂ±æÃd h

4328|Õ¿dNõ¿ðÃîÂ-îÂI±á, Æõøžõ¿dµ±¿ðÃ-õæSÃd N 338 N

4329|purascarana-vidhi, krsna-prasada-bhojana

4330|anivedita-tyaga, vaisnava-nindadi-varjana

4331|SYNONYMS

4332|purascarana-vidhi-ritualistic ceremonies; krsna-prasada-

>|bhojana-eating the remnants of food offered to the Lord;

>|anivedita-tyaga-not touching anything not offered to the

>|Lord; vaisnava-ninda-adi-varjana-completely avoiding

>|blaspheming a Vaisnava.

4333|TRANSLATION

4334|"Other items you should describe are the method of

>|performing purascarana, taking krsna- prasadam, giving up

>|unoffered food and not blaspheming the Lord's devotees.

4335|PURPORT

4336|Regarding the vaisnava-ninda, see Madhya-lila 15. 261.

4337|Madhya 24.339

4338|TEXT 339

4339|TEXT

4340|u±sRhŽÂí, u±sRu/, u±sRNuõd h

4341|ÕuRu/-îÂI±á, MtÂ±áõîÂ-|õí N 339 N

4342|sadhu-laksana, sadhu-sanga, sadhu-sevana

4343|asat-sanga-tyaga, sri-bhagavata-sravana

4344|SYNONYMS

4345|sadhu-laksana-the symptoms of a devotee; sadhu-sanga-

>|association with devotees; sadhu-sevana-offering service to

>|devotees; asat-sanga-tyaga-giving up the company of

>|nondevotees; sri-bhagavata-sravana-regularly hearing the

>|recitation of Srimad-Bhagavatam.

4346|TRANSLATION

4347|"You should describe the symptoms of a devotee , how to

>|associate with devotees , how to satisfy

>|a devotee by rendering service, and how

>|to give up the association of nondevotees. You should also

>|explain the value of regularly hearing the recitation of

>|Srimad-Bhagavatam.

4348|Madhya 24.340

4349|TEXT 340

4350|TEXT

4351|¿ðÃdLÔÁîÂI, óŽÂLÔÁîÂI, ÛLÁ±ðÃúI±¿ðÃ-¿õõõþí h

4352|÷±uLÔÁîÂI, æÃij±(c)†÷I±¿ðÃ-¿õ¿s-¿õaÂ±õþí N 340 N

4353|dina-krtya, paksa-krtya, ekadasy-adi-vivarana

4354|masa-krtya, janmastamyadi-vidhi-vicarana

4355|SYNONYMS

4356|dina-krtya-daily duties; paksa-krtya-duties on the

>|fortnights; ekadasi-adi-vivarana-description of Ekadasi and

>|so on; masa-krtya-duties every month; janmastami-adi-of

>|performing Janmastami and other ceremonies; vidhi-of the

>|process; vicarana-consideration.

4357|TRANSLATION

4358|"You should describe the ritualistic duties to be

>|performed every day, and you should also describe the

>|fortnightly duties-especially how to observe

>|the fortnightly Ekadasi fast. You should also

>|describe the duties to be observed every month, and you

>|should especially describe the observance of ceremonies

>|like Janmastami, Rama-navami and Nrsimha-caturdasi.

4359|Madhya 24.341

4360|TEXT 341

4361|TEXT

4362|ÛLÁ±ðÃúN, æÃij±(c)†÷N, õ±÷dZ±ðÃúN h

4363|Mõþ±÷dõ÷N, Õ±õþ dÔ¿uSýÃÃaÂîRÂðSÃúN N 341 N

4364|ekadasi, janmastami, vamana-dvadasi

4365|sri-rama-navami, ara nrsimha-caturdasi

4366|SYNONYMS

4367|ekadasi-the eleventh day of the fortnight; janmastami-the

>|birthday ceremony of Lord Krsna; vamana-dvadasi-the

>|birthday or appearance day of Lord Vamana; sri-rama-navami-

>|the birthday ceremony of Lord Ramacandra; ara-and; nrsimha-

>|caturdasi-the appearance day of Lord Nrsimha.

4368|TRANSLATION

4369|"Ekadasi, Janmastami, Vamana-dvadasi, Rama-navami and

>|Nrsimha-caturdasi-all these should be described.

4370|Madhya 24.342

4371|TEXT 342

4372|TEXT

4373|Ûý×ÃÃ uNõ ¿õX±-îÂI±á, Õ¿õX±-LÁõþí h

4374|ÕLÁõþNí ÎðÃ±ø¸, ÆLÁNh tÂ¿MÃõþ hyd N 342 N

4375|ei sabe viddha-tyaga, aviddha-karana

4376|akarane dosa, kaile bhaktira lambhana

4377|SYNONYMS

4378|ei sabe-all these things; viddha-tyaga-to avoid viddha-

>|ekadasi or mixed Ekadasi; aviddha-karana-performing the

>|pure Ekadasi; akarane dosa-the fault of not performing them;

>| kaile-if done so; bhaktira lambhana-there will be

>|discrepancies in devotional service.

4379|TRANSLATION

4380|"You should recommend the avoidance of mixed Ekadasi and

>|the performance of pure Ekadasi. You should also describe

>|the fault in not observing Ekadasi. One should be very

>|careful as far as these items are concerned. If one is not

>|careful, one will be negligent in executing devotional

>|service.

4381|Madhya 24.343

4382|TEXT 343

4383|TEXT

4384|uõSS ›¶÷±í ¿ðÃNõ óRõþ±í-õaÂd h

4385|M÷Ó¿îSÂ-¿õøRž÷¿µõþLÁõþí-hŽÂí N 343 N

4386|sarvatra pramana dibe purana-vacana

4387|sri-murti-visnu-mandira-karana-laksana

4388|SYNONYMS

4389|sarvatra-everywhere; pramana-evidence; dibe-you should give;

>| purana-vacana-quoting from the Puranas; sri-murti-the

>|Deity; visnu-mandira-of the Visnu temple; karana-laksana-

>|the characteristics of constructing.

4390|TRANSLATION

4391|"Whatever you say about Vaisnava behavior, the

>|establishment of Vaisnava temples and Deities, and

>|everything else should be supported by evidence from the

>|Puranas.

4392|Madhya 24.344

4393|TEXT 344

4394|TEXT

4395|'u±÷±dI' uðÃ±aÂ±õþ, Õ±õþ 'Æõøžõ'-Õ±aÂ±õþ h

4396|LÁîSÂõI±LÁîSÂõI uõ '¦œ±îSÂ' õIõýÃÃ±õþ N 344 N

4397|'samanya' sad-acara, ara 'vaisnava'-acara

4398|kartavyakartavya saba 'smarta' vyavahara

4399|SYNONYMS

4400|samanya-general; sat-acara-good behavior; ara-and; vaisnava-

>|of devotees of Lord Visnu; acara-etiquette; kartavya-

>|akartavya-things which are to be done and which are not to

>|be done; saba-all; smarta-connected with regulative

>|principles; vyavahara-business.

4401|TRANSLATION

4402|"You should give general and specific descriptions of the

>|behavior and activities of a Vaisnava. You should outline

>|things that are to be done and things that are not to be

>|done. All this should be described as regulations and

>|etiquette.

4403|Madhya 24.345

4404|TEXT 345

4405|TEXT

4406|Ûý×ÃÃ uSNŽÂNó uÓS LÁ¿ýÃÃhRD ¿ðÃáAðÃõþúd h

4407|lNõ îRÂ¿÷ ¿h¿mõ±, LÔÁøž LÁõþ±Nõ ¦£RÂõþí N 345 N

4408|ei sanksepe sutra kahilun dig-darasana

4409|yabe tumi likhiba, krsna karabe sphurana

4410|SYNONYMS

4411|ei-thus; sanksepe-in brief; sutra-codes; kahilun-I have

>|described; dik-darasana-just a little direction; yabe-

>|whenever; tumi-you; likhiba-will attempt to write; krsna-

>|Lord Krsna; karabe-will do; sphurana-manifesting.

4412|TRANSLATION

4413|"I have thus given a synopsis of the Vaisnava regulative

>|principles. I have given this in brief just to give you a

>|little direction. When you write on this subject, Krsna

>|will help you by spiritually awakening you."

4414|PURPORT

4415|One cannot write on spiritual matters without being blessed

>|by Krsna and the disciplic succession of gurus. The

>|blessings of the authorities are one's power of attorney.

>|One should not try to write anything about Vaisnava

>|behavior and activities without being authorized by

>|superior authorities. This is confirmed in the Bhagavad-

>|gita (4.2): evam parampara-praptam imam rajarsayo viduh.

4416|Madhya 24.346

4417|TEXT 346

4418|TEXT

4419|Ûý×ÃÃ îÂ' LÁ¿ýÃÃhR ›¶tRÂõþ ud±îÂNd ›¶u±ðÃ h

4420|l±ýÃÃ±õþ |õNí ¿aÂNMÃÃõþ mNG Õõu±ðÃ N 346 N

4421|ei ta' kahilu prabhura sanatane prasada

4422|yahara sravane cittera khande avasada

4423|SYNONYMS

4424|ei ta'-in this way; kahilu-I have described; prabhura-of

>|Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; sanatane-unto Sanatana

>|Gosvami; prasada-mercy; yahara sravane-hearing which;

>|cittera-of the mind; khande-disappears; avasada-all

>|moroseness.

4425|TRANSLATION

4426|Thus I have narrated Lord Caitanya's mercy upon Sanatana

>|Gosvami. When one hears these topics, one's heart will be

>|cleansed of all contamination.

4427|Madhya 24.347

4428|TEXT 347

4429|TEXT

4430|¿dæÃ-¢¶NLš LÁíSóÓõþ ¿õ(tm)¦±õþ LÁ¿õþlþ± h

4431|ud±îÂNd ›¶tRÂõþ ›¶u±ðÃ õþ±¿mlþ±NrÃ ¿h¿mlþ± N 347 N

4432|nija-granthe karnapura vistara kariya

4433|sanatane prabhura prasada rakhiyache likhiya

4434|SYNONYMS

4435|nija-granthe-in his own book; karnapura-Kavi-karnapura;

>|vistara kariya-vividly describing; sanatane-unto Sanatana

>|Gosvami; prabhura-of Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; prasada-

>|the mercy; rakhiyache-has kept; likhiya-writing.

4436|TRANSLATION

4437|The authorized poet Kavi-karnapura has written a book named

>|Caitanya-candrodaya-nataka. This book tells how Sri

>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu blessed Sanatana Gosvami with His

>|specific mercy.

4438|Madhya 24.348

4439|TEXT 348

4440|TEXT

4441|ÎáNNnÂlfuI utÂ±-¿õtÓÂø¸í÷¿í(tm)¦IMÃ3± l HÂX±S ¿|lþS

4442|õþ+óuI±¢¶æÃ Ûø¸ Ûõ îÂíNS Æõõþ±áIh„NS ðÃNs h

4443|Õ(tm)LtSÂ¿MÃõþNud óÓíSý+ðÃNlþ± õ±NýÃÃI•ÃõsÓîÂ±LÔÁ¿îÂÐ

4444|Æúõ±ÍhÐ ¿ó¿ýÃÃîÂS ÷ýÃÃ±-uõþ ý×ÃÃõ ›¶N¿îÂ›¶ðÃ(tm)¦¿ZðÃ±÷A N

>|348 N

4445|gaudendrasya sabha-vibhusana-manis tyaktva ya rddham sriyam

4446| rupasyagraja esa eva tarunim vairagya-laksmim dadhe

4447|antar-bhakti-rasena purna-hrdayo bahye 'vadhutakrtih

4448| saivalaih pihitam maha-sara iva priti-pradas tad-vidam

4449|SYNONYMS

4450|gauda-indrasya-of the ruler of Gauda-desa (Bengal); sabha-

>|of the parliament; vibhusana-fundamental; manih-the gem;

>|tyaktva-relinquishing; yah-one who; rddham-opulent; sriyam-

>|kingly enjoyment; rupasya agrajah-the elder brother of

>|Srila Rupa Gosvami; esah-this; eva-certainly; tarunim-

>|youthful; vairagya-laksmim-the fortune of renunciation;

>|dadhe-accepted; antah-bhakti-rasena-by the mellows of inner

>|love of Krsna; purna-hrdayah-satisfied fully; bahye-

>|externally; avadhuta-akrtih-the dress of a mendicant;

>|saivalaih-by moss; pihitam-covered; maha-sarah-a great lake

>|or very deep lake; iva-like; priti-pradah-very pleasing;

>|tat-vidam-to persons acquainted with the science of

>|devotional service.

4451|TRANSLATION

4452|"Srila Sanatana Gosvami, the elder brother of Srila Rupa

>|Gosvami, was a most important minister in the government of

>|Hussain Shah, the ruler of Bengal, and he was considered a

>|most brilliant gem in that assembly. He possessed all the

>|opulences of a royal position, but he gave up everything

>|just to accept the youthful goddess of renunciation.

>|Although he externally appeared to be a mendicant who had

>|renounced everything, he was filled with the pleasure of

>|devotional service within his heart. Thus he can be

>|compared to a deep lake covered with moss. He was the

>|object of pleasure for all the devotees who knew the

>|science of devotional service.

4453|PURPORT

4454|This and the following two verses are from Caitanya-

>|candrodaya-nataka (9.34, 35, 38).

4455|Madhya 24.349

4456|TEXT 349

4457|TEXT

4458|îÂS ud±îd÷Ró±áîÂ÷NŽ(r)Â±-

4459|ðÔSÃ(c)†÷±S÷¿îÂ÷±SðÃlþ±^SÐ h

4460|Õ±¿h¿h/ ó¿õþâ±lþîÂ-ÎðÃ±tSÂI±S

4461|u±dRLÁ¥ó÷n aÂ¥óLÁ-ÎáNõþÐ N 349 N

4462|tam sanatanam upagatam aksnor

4463| drsta-matram atimatra-dayardrah

4464|alilinga parighayata-dorbhyam

4465| sanukampam atha campaka-gaurah

4466|SYNONYMS

4467|tam-unto him; sanatanam-Sanatana Gosvami; upagatam-having

>|arrived; aksnoh-with the eyes; drsta-matram-being only seen;

>| ati-matra-greatly; daya-ardrah-merciful; alilinga-

>|embraced; parighayata-dorbhyam-with His two arms;

>|sa-anukampam-with great affection; atha-thus; campaka-

>|gaurah-Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, who has a complexion

>|the color of a campaka flower (golden).

4468|TRANSLATION

4469|"As soon as Sanatana Gosvami arrived in front of Lord

>|Caitanya, the Lord, seeing him, became merciful to him. The

>|Lord, who has the complexion of a golden campaka flower,

>|opened His arms and embraced him while expressing great

>|affection."

4470|Madhya 24.350

4471|TEXT 350

4472|TEXT

4473|LÁ±Nhd õÔµ±õdNLÁ¿h-õ±îSÂ±

4474|hRN5¿îÂ îÂ±S mI±ó¿lþîRÂS ¿õ¿úø¸I h

4475|LÔÁó±÷ÔNîd±¿tÂ¿ø¸Nø¸aÂ ÎðÃõ-

4476|(tm)¦ÍSõ õþ+ó= ud±îd= N 350 N

4477|kalena vrndavana-keli-varta

4478| lupteti tam khyapayitum visisya

4479|krpamrtenabhisiseca devas

4480| tatraiva rupam ca sanatanam ca

4481|SYNONYMS

4482|kalena-in the course of time; vrndavana-keli-varta-topics

>|concerning the transcendental mellows of the pastimes of

>|Lord Krsna in Vrndavana; lupta-almost lost; iti-thus; tam-

>|all those; khyapayitum-to enunciate; visisya-making

>|specific; krpa-amrtena-with the nectar of mercy; abhisiseca-

>|sprinkled; devah-the Lord; tatra-there; eva-indeed; rupam-

>|Srila Rupa Gosvami; ca-and; sanatanam-Sanatana Gosvami; ca-

>|as well as.

4483|TRANSLATION

4484|"In the course of time, the transcendental news of Krsna's

>|pastimes in Vrndavana was almost lost. To enunciate

>|explicitly those transcendental pastimes, Sri Caitanya

>|Mahaprabhu empowered Srila Rupa Gosvami and

>|Sanatana Gosvami with the nectar of His mercy to carry out

>|this work in Vrndavana."

4485|Madhya 24.351

4486|TEXT 351

4487|TEXT

4488|Ûý×ÃÃ îÂ' LÁ¿ýÃÃhRD ud±îÂNd ›¶tRÂõþ ›¶u±ðÃ h

4489|l±ýÃÃ±õþ |õNí ¿aÂNMÃÃõþ mNG Õõu±ðÃ N 351 N

4490|ei ta' kahilun sanatane prabhura prasada

4491|yahara sravane cittera khande avasada

4492|SYNONYMS

4493|ei ta'-thus; kahilun-I have explained; sanatane-unto

>|Sanatana Gosvami; prabhura prasada-the mercy of Lord Sri

>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu; yahara sravane-hearing which; cittera-

>|of the heart; khande-disappears; avasada-moroseness.

4494|TRANSLATION

4495|I have thus explained the mercy bestowed on Sanatana

>|Gosvami by Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu. If one hears this

>|description, all moroseness in the heart will diminish.

4496|Madhya 24.352

4497|TEXT 352

4498|TEXT

4499|LÔÁNøžõþ ¦¤õþ+óáNíõþ uLÁh ýÃÃlþ ':±d' h

4500|¿õ¿s-õþ±á-÷±NáS 'u±sdtÂ¿MÃ'õþ ¿õs±d N 352 N

4501|krsnera svarupa-ganera sakala haya 'jnana'

4502|vidhi-raga-marge 'sadhana-bhakti'ra vidhana

4503|SYNONYMS

4504|krsnera svarupa-ganera-of Lord Krsna in His various

>|expansions; sakala-all; haya-there is; jnana-knowledge;

>|vidhi-raga-marge-in the process of devotional service under

>|regulative principles or in spontaneous love; sadhana

>|bhaktira vidhana-the authorized means of executing

>|devotional service.

4505|TRANSLATION

4506|By reading these instructions to Sanatana Gosvami, one will

>|become fully aware of Lord Krsna's various expansions and

>|the process of devotional service according to the

>|regulative principles and spontaneous love. Thus everything

>|can be fully known.

4507|Madhya 24.353

4508|TEXT 353

4509|TEXT

4510|'LÔÁøžN›¶÷', 'tÂ¿MÃõþu', 'tÂ¿MÃõþ ¿uX±(tm)L' h

4511|ý×ÃÃýÃÃ±õþ |õNí tÂMÃ æÃ±Ndd uõ Õ(tm)L N 353 N

4512|'krsna-prema', 'bhakti-rasa', 'bhaktira siddhanta'

4513|ihara sravane bhakta janena saba anta

4514|SYNONYMS

4515|krsna-prema-love of Godhead; bhakti-rasa-the mellows of

>|devotional service; bhaktira siddhanta-the conclusions of

>|devotional service; ihara sravane-by hearing this chapter;

>|bhakta-a devotee; janena-knows; saba-all; anta-limits.

4516|TRANSLATION

4517|By reading these instructions, a pure devotee can

>|understand love of Krsna, the mellows of devotional service

>|and the conclusion of devotional service. Everyone can

>|understand all these things to their ultimate end by

>|studying these instructions.

4518|Madhya 24.354

4519|TEXT 354

4520|TEXT

4521|MÍaÂîdI-¿dîÂI±dµ-ÕÍZîÂ-aÂõþí h

4522|lD±õþ ›¶±ísd, Îuý×ÃÃ ó±lþ Ûý×ÃÃ sd N 354 N

4523|sri-caitanya-nityananda-advaita-carana

4524|yanra prana-dhana, sei paya ei dhana

4525|SYNONYMS

4526|sri-caitanya-nityananda-advaita-carana-the lotus feet of

>|Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, Lord Nityananda and Advaita

>|Prabhu; yanra prana-dhana-whose life and soul; sei-such a

>|person; paya-gets; ei dhana-this treasure-house of

>|devotional service.

4527|TRANSLATION

4528|The conclusion of these instructions can be known to one

>|whose life and soul are the lotus feet of Sri Caitanya

>|Mahaprabhu, Nityananda Prabhu and Advaita Prabhu.

4529|Madhya 24.355

4530|TEXT 355

4531|TEXT

4532|Mõþ+ó-õþâRd±n-óNðÃ l±õþ Õ±ú h

4533|ÆaÂîdIaÂ¿õþîÂ±÷ÔîÂ LÁNýÃÃ LÔÁøžðÃ±u N 355 N

4534|sri-rupa-raghunatha-pade yara asa

4535|caitanya-caritamrta kahe krsnadasa

4536|SYNONYMS

4537|sri-rupa-Srila Rupa Gosvami; raghunatha-Srila Raghunatha

>|dasa Gosvami; pade-at the lotus feet; yara-whose; asa-

>|expectation; Caitanya-caritamrta-the book named Caitanya-

>|caritamrta; kahe-describes; krsnadasa-Srila Krsnadasa

>|Kaviraja Gosvami.

4538|TRANSLATION

4539|Praying at the lotus feet of Sri Rupa and Sri Raghunatha,

>|always desiring their mercy, I, Krsnadasa, narrate Sri

>|Caitanya-caritamrta, following in their footsteps.

4540|Thus end the Bhaktivedanta purports to Sri Caitanya-

>|caritamrta, Madhya-lila, Chapter Twenty- four,

>|describing the atmarama verse and the Lord's mercy upon

>|Sanatana Gosvami.

4541|

Legend:

Added(829+26063)

Deleted(87+2076)

Changed(1161)

Changed words in changed(1732)